PLC

Delta Vector Control Drive - C2000 Series User Manual
Industrial Automation Headquarters

Delta Electronics, Inc.
Taoyuan Technology Center
No.18, Xinglong Rd., Taoyuan District,
Taoyuan City 33068, Taiwan
TEL: 886-3-362-6301 / FAX: 886-3-371-6301
Asia EMEA
Delta Electronics (Shanghai) Co., Ltd. Headquarters: Delta Electronics (Netherlands) B.V.
No.182 Minyu Rd., Pudong Shanghai, P.R.C. Sales: Sales.IA.EMEA@deltaww.com
Post code : 201209 Marketing: Maketing.IA.EMEA@deltaww.com
TEL: 86-21-6872-3988 / FAX: 86-21-6872-3996 Technical Support: iatechnicalsupport@deltaww.com
Customer Service: 400-820-9595 Customer Support: Customer-Support@deltaww.com
Service: Service.IA.emea@deltaww.com
Delta Electronics (Japan), Inc. TEL: +31(0)40 800 3800
Tokyo Office
Industrial Automation Sales Department BENELUX: Delta Electronics (Netherlands) B.V.
2-1-14 Shibadaimon, Minato-ku De Witbogt 20, 5652 AG Eindhoven, The Netherlands
Tokyo, Japan 105-0012 Mail: Sales.IA.Benelux@deltaww.com
TEL: 81-3-5733-1155 / FAX: 81-3-5733-1255 TEL: +31(0)40 800 3800
DACH: Delta Electronics (Netherlands) B.V.

Delta Electronics (Korea), Inc.
Coesterweg 45, D-59494 Soest, Germany
Seoul Office
Mail: Sales.IA.DACH@deltaww.com
1511, 219, Gasan Digital 1-Ro., Geumcheon-gu,
TEL: +49(0)2921 987 0
Seoul, 08501 South Korea
TEL: 82-2-515-5305 / FAX: 82-2-515-5302 France: Delta Electronics (France) S.A.
ZI du bois Challand 2, 15 rue des Pyrénées,
Delta Energy Systems (Singapore) Pte Ltd. Lisses, 91090 Evry Cedex, France
4 Kaki Bukit Avenue 1, #05-04, Singapore 417939 Mail: Sales.IA.FR@deltaww.com
TEL: 65-6747-5155 / FAX: 65-6744-9228 TEL: +33(0)1 69 77 82 60
Delta Electronics (India) Pvt. Ltd.
Delta Vector Control Drive

Iberia: Delta Electronics Solutions (Spain) S.L.U
Plot No.43, Sector 35, HSIIDC Gurgaon, Ctra. De Villaverde a Vallecas, 265 1º Dcha Ed.
PIN 122001, Haryana, India Hormigueras – P.I. de Vallecas 28031 Madrid
TEL: 91-124-4874900 / FAX : 91-124-4874945 TEL: +34(0)91 223 74 20
C2000 Series User Manual

C/Llull, 321-329 (Edifici CINC) | 22@Barcrelona, 08019 Barcelona
Delta Electronics (Thailand) PCL.
909 Soi 9, Moo 4, Bangpoo Industrial Estate (E.P.Z), Mail: Sales.IA.Iberia@deltaww.com
Pattana 1 Rd., T.Phraksa, A.Muang, TEL: +34 93 303 00 60
Samutprakarn 10280, Thailand Italy: Delta Electronics (Italy) S.r.l.
TEL: 66-2709-2800 / FAX : 662-709-2827 Ufficio di Milano Via Senigallia 18/2 20161 Milano (MI)
Piazza Grazioli 18 00186 Roma Italy
Delta Energy Systems (Australia) Pty Ltd. Mail: Sales.IA.Italy@deltaww.com
Unit 20-21/45 Normanby Rd., Notting Hill Vic 3168, Australia
TEL: +39 02 64672538
TEL: 61-3-9543-3720
Russia: Delta Energy System LLC
Americas Vereyskaya Plaza II, office 112 Vereyskaya str.
17 121357 Moscow Russia
Delta Electronics (Americas) Ltd.
Mail: Sales.IA.RU@deltaww.com
Raleigh Office
TEL: +7 495 644 3240
P.O. Box 12173, 5101 Davis Drive,
Research Triangle Park, NC 27709, U.S.A. Turkey: Delta Greentech Elektronik San. Ltd. Sti. (Turkey)
TEL: 1-919-767-3813 / FAX: 1-919-767-3969 Şerifali Mah. Hendem Cad. Kule Sok. No:16-A
34775 Ümraniye – İstanbul
Delta Greentech (Brasil) S/A Mail: Sales.IA.Turkey@deltaww.com
São Paulo Office
TEL: + 90 216 499 9910
Rua Itapeva, 26 – 3˚ Andar - Bela Vista
CEP: 01332-000 – São Paulo – SP - Brasil GCC: Delta Energy Systems AG (Dubai BR)
TEL: 55-11-3530-8642 / 55-11-3530-8640 P.O. Box 185668, Gate 7, 3rd Floor, Hamarain Centre
Dubai, United Arab Emirates
Delta Electronics International Mexico S.A. de C.V. Mail: Sales.IA.MEA@deltaww.com
Mexico Office TEL: +971(0)4 2690148
Vía Dr. Gustavo Baz No. 2160, Colonia La Loma,
54060 Tlalnepantla Estado de Mexico Egypt + North Africa: Delta Electronics
TEL: 52-55-2628-3015 #3050/3052 511 Cairo Business Plaza, North 90 street,
New Cairo, Cairo, Egypt
Mail: Sales.IA.MEA@deltaww.com
*We reserve the right to change the information in this manual without prior notice.
DELTA_IA-MDS_VFD-C2000_UM_EN_20190213 w w w. d e l t a w w. c o m
Copyright notice
©Delta Electronics, Inc. All rights reserved.
All information contained in this user manual is the exclusive property of Delta Electronics Inc.
(hereinafter referred to as "Delta ") and is protected by copyright law and all other laws. Delta retains the
exclusive rights of this user manual in accordance with the copyright law and all other laws. No parts in
this manual may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, translated or used in any other ways without
the prior consent of Delta.
Limitation of Liability
The contents of this user manual are only for the use of the AC motor drives manufactured by Delta. Except
as defined in special mandatory laws, Delta provides this user manual “as is” and does not offer any kind
of warranty through this user manual for using the product, either express or implied, including but not
limited to the following: (i) this product will meet your needs or expectations; (ii) the information contained
in the product is current and correct; (iii) the product does not infringe any rights of any other person. You
shall bear your own risk to use this product.
In no event shall Delta, its subsidiaries, affiliates, managers, employees, agents, partners and licensors
be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, derivative or consequential damages ( including but
not limited to the damages for loss of profits, goodwill, use or other intangible losses) unless the laws
contains special mandatory provisions to the contrary.
Delta reserves the right to make changes to the user manual and the products described in the user
manual without prior notice and afterwards.
PLEASE READ PRIOR TO INSTALLATION FOR SAFETY.
 Disconnect AC input power before connecting any wiring to the AC motor drive.
 Even if the power has been turned off, a charge may still remain in the DC-link
capacitors with hazardous voltages before the POWER LED is OFF. Do NOT touch the
DANGER
internal circuits and components.
 There are highly sensitive MOS components on the printed circuit boards. These
components are especially sensitive to static electricity. Take anti-static measure before
touching these components or the circuit boards.
 Never modify the internal components or wiring.
 Ground the AC motor drive by using the ground terminal. The grounding method must
comply with the laws of the country where the AC motor drive is to be installed.
 Do NOT install the AC motor drive in a location with high temperature, direct sunlight or
inflammable materials or gases.
 Never connect the AC motor drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2 and W/T3 directly to the
AC mains circuit power supply.
CAU TION
 After finishing the wiring of the AC motor drive, check if U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 are
short-circuited to ground with a multimeter. Do NOT power the drive if short circuits occur.
Eliminate the short circuits before the drive is powered.
 The rated voltage of power system to install motor drives is listed below. Ensure that the
installation voltage is in the correct range when installing a motor drive.
1. For 230V models, the range is between 170–264V.
 Refer to the table below for short circuit rating:
Model (Power) Short circuit rating
230V / 460V 100 kA
575V (2–20HP) 5 kA
690V (25–50HP) 5 kA
690V (60–175HP) 10 kA
690V (215–335HP) 18 kA
690V (425–600HP) 30 kA
690V (745–850HP) 42 kA
 Only qualified persons are allowed to install, wire and maintain the AC motor drives.
 Even if the three-phase AC motor is stopped, a charge with hazardous voltages may still
remain in the main circuit terminals of the AC motor drive.
 The performance of electrolytic capacitor will degrade if it is not charged for a long time. It
is recommended to charge the drive which is stored in no charge condition every 2 years
for 3~4 hours to restore the performance of electrolytic capacitor in the motor drive. Note:
When power up the motor drive, use adjustable AC power source (ex. AC
autotransformer) to charge the drive at 70%~80% of rated voltage for 30 minutes (do not
run the motor drive). Then charge the drive at 100% of rated voltage for an hour (do not
run the motor drive). By doing these, restore the performance of electrolytic capacitor
before starting to run the motor drive. Do NOT run the motor drive at 100% rated voltage
right away.
 Pay attention to the following precautions when transporting and installing this package
(including wooden crate and wood stave)
1. If you need to deworm the wooden crate, do NOT use fumigation or you will damage
the drive. Any damage to the drive caused by using fumigation voids the warranty.
I
2. Use other methods, such as heat treatment or any other non-fumigation treatment, to
deworm the wood packaging material.
3. If you use heat treatment to deworm, leave the packaging materials in an environment
of over 56°C for a minimum of thirty minutes.
 Connect the drive to a three-phase three-wire or three-phase four-wire Wye system to
comply with UL standards.
 If the motor drive generates leakage current over AC 3.5 mA or over DC 10 mA on a
grounding conductor, compliance with local grounding regulations or IEC61800-5-1
standard is the minimum requirement for grounding.
NOTE
The content of this manual may be revised without prior notice. Please consult our distributors or download
the latest version at http://www.deltaww.com/iadownload_acmotordrive
II
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION ..................................................................................................................1-1
1-1 Nameplate Information…..................................................................................................1-2

1-2 Model Name………….......................................................................................................1-3
1-3 Serial Number.................................................................................................................1-4
1-4 Apply After Service by Mobile Device………………………………………………...…….1-5
1-5 RFI Jumper…..................................................................................................................1-6
1-6 Dimensions.....................................................................................................................1-9
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION ..................................................................................................................2-1
2-1 Mounting Clearance..........................................................................................................2-2

2-2 Air Flow and Power Dissipation.........................................................................................2-5
CHAPTER 3 UNPACKING ........................................................................................................................3-1
3-1 Unpacking.........................................................................................................................3-2
3-2 The Lifting Hook..............................................................................................................3-25
CHAPTER 4 WIRING ................................................................................................................................4-1
4-1 System Wiring Diagram...................................................................................................4-3

4-2 Wiring....................................................................................................................4-4
CHAPTER 5 MAIN CIRCUIT TERMINALS .............................................................................................5-1
5-1 Main Circuit Diagram.........................................................................................................5-4

5-2 Specifications of Main Circuit Terminals.............................................................................5-7
CHPATER 6 CONTROL TERMINALS ......................................................................................................6-1
6-1 Remove the Cover for Wiring…………………………………………………………………6-4

6-2 Specifications of Control Terminal........................................................................................6-7
6-3 Remove the Terminal Block..............................................................................................6-10
CHAPTER 7 OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES ................................................................................................7-1
7-1 All Brake Resistors and Brake Units Used in AC Motor Drives................................................7-2
7-2 Non-fuse Circuit Breaker....................................................................................................7-7
7-3 Fuse Specification Chart ....................................................................................................7-8
7-4 AC / DC Reactor..............................................................................................................7-10
7-5 Zero Phase Reactor.........................................................................................................7-44
7-6 EMC Filter.......................................................................................................................7-50
III
7-7 Digital Keypad.................................................................................................................7-70
7-8 Panel Mounting...............................................................................................................7-72
7-9 Conduit Box Kit...............................................................................................................7-89
7-10 Fan Kit........................................................................................................................7-105
7-11 Flange Mounting Kit ....................................................................................................7-120
7-12 USB/RS-485 Communication Interface IFD6530….........................................................7-122
CHAPTER 8 OPTION CARDS ..................................................................................................................8-1
8-1 Option Card Installation......................................................................................................8-2

8-2 EMC-D42A -- Extension card for 4-point digital input / 2-point digital input.................................8-14
8-3 EMC-D611A -- Extension card for 6-point digital input (110VAC input voltage)................................8-14
8-4 EMC-R6AA -- Relay output extension card (6-point N.O. output contact)......................................8-14
8-5 EMC-A22A -- Extension card for 2-point analog input/ 2-point analog output……………….……..8-15
8-6 EMC-BPS01 -- +24V power card ..............................................................................8-15
8-7 EMC-PG01/02L -- PG card (Line driver) .................................................................8-16
8-8 EMC-PG01/02O -- PG card (Open collector) .........................................................8-19
8-9 EMC-PG01/02U -- PG card (ABZ Incremental encoder signal/ UVW Hall position signal input)...8-22
8-10 EMC-PG01R -- PG card (Resolver).............................................................................8-24
8-11 CMC-MOD01 -- Communication card, Modbus TCP ....................................................8-26
8-12 CMC-PD01 -- Communication card, PROFIBUS DP ...................................................8-29
8-13 CMC-DN01 -- Communication card, DeviceNet ......................................................8-31
8-14 CMC-EIP01 -- Communication card, EtherNet/IP .................................................8-34
8-15 CMC-EC01 -- Communication card, EtherCAT ...................................................8-38
8-16 CMC-PN01 -- Communication card, PROFINET ..............................................8-41
8-17 EMC-COP01 -- Communication card, CANopen ..............................................8-45
8-18 Delta Standard Fieldbus Cables………………………………………………………8-46
CHAPTER 9 SPECIFICATION ..................................................................................................................9-1
9-1 230V Series…………………………………...........................................................................9-2

9-2 460V Series…………………………………...........................................................................9-3
9-3 575V Series…………………………………………………………………………………..….…...….9-5
9-4 690V Series………………………………………………………………….………………..…………9-6
9-5 Environment for Operation, Storage and Transportation………………………….....................9-10
9-6 Specification for Operation Temperature and Protection Level…….......................................9-11
9-7 Derating Curve of Ambient Temperature……………………………………..............................9-12
9-8 Efficiency Curve……………………………………………………………………………..9-17
CHAPTER 10 DIGITAL KEYPAD ...........................................................................................................10-1
10-1 Descriptions of Digital Keypad ………………………………….............................................10-2

10-2 Function of Digital Keypad KPC-CC01.............................................................................10-5
10-3 TPEditor Installation Instruction ....................................................................................10-26
IV
10-4 Fault Code Description of Digital Keypad KPC-CC01.......................................................10-34
10-5 Unsupported Functions when using TPEditor on KPC-CC01 Keypad………………10-38
CHAPTER 11 SUMMARY OF PARAMETERS ....................................................................................... 11-1
00 Drive Parameters…………………………………………….………………………………………..11-1
01 Basic Parameters…………………………………………………………………………………….11-10
02 Digital Input / Output Parameters………………………………………………….……………….11-14
03 Analog Input / Output Parameters…………………………………………..………………….…..11-20
04 Multi-stage Speed Parameters…………………………………………………………………..…11-24
05 Motor Parameters……………………………………………………….……………………………11-27
06 Protection Parameters……………………………………………………………………………….11-30
07 Special Parameters…………………………………………………………………………………..11-37
08 High-function PID Parameters………………………………………………………………………11-40
09 Communication Parameters………………………………………………………………………...11-42
10 Feedback Control Parameters………………………………………………...……………………11-47
11 Advanced Parameters……………………………………………………………………………….11-50
13 Application Parameters by Industry………………………………………………………………..11-53
14 Extension Card Parameter………………………………………………………………………….11-54
CHAPTER 12 DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETER SETTINGS ................................................................12-1
12-1 Description of Parameter Settings ……................................................................... 12.1-00-1

00 Drive Parameters…………………………………………………………………………...12.1-00-1
01 Basic Parameters……………………………………………………………………….….12.1-01-1
02 Digital Input / Output Parameters………………………………………………………….12.1-02-1
03 Analog Input / Output Parameters………………………………………………………12.1-03-1
04 Multi-stage Speed Parameters………………………………………………………..…..12.1-04-1
05 Motor Parameters……………………………………………………………………….….12.1-05-1
06 Protection Parameters……………………………………………………………………..12.1-06-1
07 Special Parameters………………………………………………………………………..12.1-07-1
08 High-function PID Parameters…………………………………………………………….12.1-08-1
09 Communication Parameters………………………………………………………….……12.1-09-1
10 Feedback Control Parameters……………………………………………………………12.1-10-1
11 Advanced Parameters………………………………………………………………….…12.1-11-1
13 Application Parameters by Industry…………………………………………………….12.1-13-1
14 Extension Card Parameter………………………………..…………………………….12.1-14-1
12-2 Adjustment & Application....................................................................................... 12.2-00-1
CHAPTER 13 WARNING CODES ..........................................................................................................13-1
CHAPTER 14 FAULT CODES AND DESCRIPTIONS............................................................................14-1
V
CHAPTER 15 CANOPEN OVERVIEW ...................................................................................................15-1
15-1 CANopen Overview……………………............................................................................15-3

15-2 Wiring for CANopen……………………….........................................................................15-6
15-3 CANopen Communication Interface Description.……………............................................15-7
15-4 CANopen Supporting Index ……..................................................................................15-19
15-5 CANopen Fault Codes ………………………..................................................................15-26
15-6 CANopen LED Function……………..............................................................................15-34
CHAPTER 16 PLC FUNCTION APPLICATIONS ...................................................................................16-1
16-1 PLC Summary……………………....................................................................................16-2

16-2 Notes Before PLC Use……………………........................................................................16-3
16-3 Turn On…………….......................………….....................................................................16-5
16-4 Basic Principles of PLC Ladder Diagrams......................................................................16-15
16-5 Various PLC Device Functions………………..................................................................16-26
16-6 Introduction To The Command Window..........................................................................16-41
16-7 Error Display And Handling.........................................................................................16-131
16-8 CANopen Master Control Applications........................................................................16-132
16-9 Explanation Of Various PLC Mode Controls (speed, torque, homing, and position)...........16-145
16-10 Internal Communications Main Node Control..............................................................16-151
16-11 Count Function Using MI8.........................................................................................16-155
16-12 Modbus Remote IO Control Applications (use MODRW)...........................................16-156
16-13 Calendar Function……………………………………………………………………………..16-163
CHAPTER 17 SAFE TORQUE OFF FUNCTION……………………………………………………….17-1
17-1 The Drive Safety Function Failure Rate……………………………………………………………17-2

17-2 Safe Torque Off Terminal Function Description…………………………………………………...17-2
17-3 Wiring Diagram……………………………………………………………………………………….17-3
17-4 Parameters……………………………………………………………………………………………17-5
17-5 Operating Sequence Description…………………………………………………...………………17-6
17-6 New Error Code for STO Function………………………………………………………..………..17-8
APPENDIX A. REVISION HISTORY………………………………………………………………............…..A-1
Issued Edition: 01
Firmware Version: V2.05
(Refer to Parameter 00-06 on the product to get the firmware version.)
Issued Date: 2019/02
VI
Chapter 1 IntroductionC2000
Chapter 1 Introduction
1-1 Nameplate Information
1-2 Model Name
1-3 Serial Number
1-4 Apply After Service by Mobile Device
1-5 RFI Jumper
1-6 Dimensions
1-1
Receiving and Inspection

After receiving the AC motor drive, please check for the following:
1. Please inspect the unit after unpacking to assure it was not damaged during shipment. Make sure that
the part number printed on the package corresponds with the part number indicated on the
nameplate.
2. Make sure that the voltage for the wiring lies within the range as indicated on the nameplate. Please
install the AC motor drive according to this manual.
3. Before applying the power, please make sure that all the devices, including power, motor, control
board and digital keypad, are connected correctly.
4. When wiring the AC motor drive, please make sure that the wiring of input terminals “R/L1, S/L2, T/L3”
and output terminals “U/T1, V/T2, W/T3” is correct to prevent drive damage.
5. When power is applied, select the language and set parameter groups via the digital keypad
(KPC-CC01). When executes trial run, please begin with a low speed and then gradually increases
the speed until the desired speed is reached.
1-1 Nameplate Information

230V/460V Model
Figure 1-1
575V/690V Model
Figure 1-2
1-2
1-2 Model Name

230V/460V Model
575V/690V Model
1-3
1-3 Serial Number

230V/460V Model
575V/690V Model
1-4
1-4 Apply After Service by Mobile Device

1-4-1 Location of Service Link Label
Frame A–H
Service link label (Service Label) will be pasted on the upper-right corner of the side where keypad is
installed on the case body, as below drawing shown:
Figure 1-3
1-4-2 Service Link Label
Figure 1-4
Scan QR Code to apply
1. Find out the QR code sticker (as above shown).
2. Using a Smartphone to run a QR Code reader APP.
3. Point your camera to the QR Code. Hold your camera steady so that the QR code comes into
focus.
4. Access the Delta after Service website.
5. Fill your information into the column marked with an orange star.
6. Enter the CAPTCHA and click “Submit” to complete the application.
Cannot find out the QR Code?
1. Open a web browser on your computer or smart phone.
2. Key in https://service.deltaww.com/ia/repair in address bar and press enter
3. Fill your information into the columns marked with an orange star.
4. Enter the CAPTCHA and click “Submit” to complete the application.
1-5
1-5 RFI Jumper

(1) In the drive there are Varistor / MOVs, which are connected from phase to phase and from phase to
ground, to protect the drive against mains surges or voltage spikes.
Because the Varistors / MOVs from phase to ground are connected to ground via the RFI jumper, the
protection will be ineffective when the RFI jumper is removed.
(2) In the models with built-in EMC filter the RFI jumper connects the filter capacitors to ground from a
return path for high frequency noise to isolate the noise from contaminating the mains power.
Removing the RFI jumper strongly reduces the effect of the built-in EMC filter. Although a single drive
complies with the international standards for leakage current, an installation with several drives with
built-in EMC filter can trigger the RCD. Removing the RFI jumper helps, but the EMC performance of
each drive would be no longer guaranteed.
Frame A–C Screw Torque: 8–10 kg-cm / [6.9–8.7 lb-in.] / [0.8–1.0 Nm]
Loosen the screws and remove the MOV-PLATE. Fasten the screws back to the original position after
MOV-PLATE is removed.
Figure 1-5 Figure 1-6

Frame D0–H
Remove the MOV-PLATE by hands, no screws need to be loosen.
Figure 1-7
1-6
Isolating main power from ground:

When the power distribution system of the drive is a floating ground system (IT Systems) or an asymmetric
ground system (Corner Grounded TN Systems), you must remove the RFI jumper. Removing the RFI
jumper disconnects the internal capacitors from ground to avoid damaging the internal circuits and to
reduce the ground leakage current.
Important points regarding ground connection

 To ensure the safety of personnel, proper operation, and to reduce electromagnetic radiation, you must
properly ground the drive during installation.
 The diameter of the cables must comply with the local safety regulations.
 The shield of shielded cables must be connected to the ground of the drive to meet safety regulations.
 The shield of shielded power cables can only be used as the ground for equipment when the
aforementioned points are met.
 When installing more drives, do not connect the grounds of the drives in series but connect each drive
to ground. The following pictures show the correct and wrong ways to connect the grounds.
Pay particular attention to the following points:

 Do not remove the RFI jumper while the power is on.
 Removing the RFI jumper also disconnects the built-in EMC filter capacitors. Compliance with the EMC
specifications is no longer guaranteed.
 Do not remove the RFI jumper if the mains power is a symmetrical grounded power system in order to
maintain the efficiency for EMC circuit.
 Do not remove the RFI jumper while conducting high voltage tests. When conducting a high voltage
test to the entire facility, you must disconnect the mains power and the motor if the leakage current is
too high.
Floating Ground System (IT Systems)

A floating ground system is also called IT system, ungrounded system, or high impedance/resistance
(greater than 30Ω) grounding system.
 Disconnect the ground cable from the internal EMC filter.
 In situations where EMC is required, check whether there is excess electromagnetic radiation affecting
nearby low-voltage circuits. In some situations, the adapter and cable naturally provide enough
suppression. If in doubt, install an extra electrostatic shielded cable on the power supply side between
the main circuit and the control terminals to increase security.
 Do not install an external RFI/EMC filter, the EMC filter will pass through a filter capacitor, thus
connecting power input to ground. This is very dangerous and can easily damage the Power
Regenerative Unit.
1-7
Asymmetric Ground System (Corner Grounded TN Systems)

Caution: Do not remove the RFI jumper while the input terminal of the Power Regenerative Unit carries
power.
In the following four situations, the RFI jumper must be removed. This is to prevent the system from
grounding through the RFI capacitor and damaging the Power Regenerative Unit.
RFI jumper must be removed
1. Grounding at a corner in a triangle configuration 2. Grounding at a midpoint in a polygonal
configuration
L1 L1
L2 L2
L3 L3
Figure 1-11
Figure 1-10
3. Grounding at one end in a single-phase 4. No stable neutral grounding in a three-phase
configuration autotransformer configuration
L1 L1
L1
L2
L2
N L3
L3
Figure 1-12
Figure 1-13
RFI jumper can be used

Internal grounding through RFI capacitor, which reduces
electromagnetic radiation. In a situation with higher L1
requirements for electromagnetic compatibility, and using
a symmetrical grounding power system, an EMC filter can
be installed. As a reference, the diagram on the right is a
symmetrical grounding power system.
L2
L3
Figure 1-14
1-8
1-6 Dimensions
Frame A
VFD007C23A; VFD007C43A/E; VFD015C23A; VFD015C43A/E; VFD022C23A; VFD022C43A/E;
VFD037C23A; VFD037C43A/E; VFD040C43A/E; VFD055C43A/E; VFD015C53A-21; VFD022C53A-21;
VFD037C53A-21
See Detail A
See Detail B
Detail A (Mounting Hole)
Detail B (Mounting Hole)
Figure 1-15
Unit: mm [inch]
Frame W H D W1 H1 D1* S1 Φ1 Φ2 Φ3
130.0 250.0 170.0 116.0 236.0 45.8 6.2 22.2 34.0 28.0
A1
[5.12] [9.84] [6.69] [4.57] [9.29] [1.80] [0.24] [0.87] [1.34] [1.10]
D1*: Flange mounting
1-9
Frame B
VFD055C23A; VFD075C23A; VFD075C43A/E; VFD110C23A; VFD110C43A/E; VFD150C43A/E;
VFD055C53A-21; VFD075C53A-21; VFD110C53A-21; VFD150C53A-21
See
See Detail
Detail A
See
See Detail B
B
Detail AA (Mounting
Detail (MountingHole)
Hole)

Figure 1-16
Unit: mm [inch]
190.0 320.0 190.0 173.0 303.0 77.9 8.5 22.2 34.0 43.8
B1
[7.48] [12.60] [7.48] [6.81] [11.93] [3.07] [0.33] [0.87] [1.34] [1.72]
1-10
Frame C
VFD150C23A; VFD185C23A; VFD185C43A/E; VFD220C23A; VFD220C43A/E; VFD300C43A/E;
VFD185C63B-21; VFD220C63B-21; VFD300C63B-21; VFD370C63B-21
See Detail A
SeeDetail
See DetailB B
Detail A
Detail A (Mounting
(MountingHole)
Hole)

Figure 1-17
Unit: mm [inch]
250.0 400.0 210.0 231.0 381.0 92.9 8.5 22.2 34.0 50.0
C1
[9.84] [15.75] [8.27] [9.09] [15.00] [3.66] [0.33] [0.87] [1.34] [1.97]
1-11
Frame D0
D0-1: VFD370C43S; VFD450C43S
D
W See
SEEDetail
DETAILAA D1
W1 D2
H1
H2
H3
S2
See Detail B
SEE DETAIL B
S1 S1
Detail AA
DETAIL Detail B
DETAIL
(MOUNTING HOLE)
(Mounting Hole) (MOUNTING HOLE)
(Mounting Hole)
Figure 1-18
Unit: mm [inch]
Frame W H1 D W1 H2 H3 D1* D2 S1 S2
280.0 500.0 255.0 235.0 475.0 442.0 94.2 16.0 11.0 18.0
D0-1
[11.02] [19.69] [10.04] [9.25] [18.70] [17.40] [3.71] [0.63] [0.43] [0.71]
1-12
Frame D0
D0-2: VFD370C43U; VFD450C43U
D
W See Detail A
SEE DETAIL A D1
W1 D2
H1
H2
H3
H
S2
SeeDETAIL
SEE Detail BB
2 3 3 2
1 1
S1 S1
Detail
DETAILAA Detail B
DETAIL B
(MOUNTING HOLE) (MOUNTING HOLE)
(Mounting Hole) (Mounting Hole)
Figure 1-19
Unit: mm [inch]
Frame W H D W1 H1 H2 H3 D1* D2 S1 S2 Φ1 Φ2 Φ3
280.0 614.4 255.0 235.0 500.0 475.0 442.0 94.2 16.0 11.0 18.0 62.7 34.0 22.0
D0-2
[11.02] [24.19] [10.04] [9.25] [19.69] [18.70] [17.40] [3.71] [0.63] [0.43] [0.71] [2.47] [1.34] [0.87]
1-13
Frame D
D1: VFD300C23A; VFD370C23A; VFD550C43A; VFD750C43A; VFD450C63B-00; VFD550C63B-00
D
W See DetailA A
SEE DETAIL D1
W1 D2
H1
H2
H3
S2
See DetailB B
SEE DETAIL
S1 S1
Detail
DETAIL AA DetailBB
DETAIL
Figure 1-20
Unit: mm [inch]
330.0 275.0 285.0 550.0 525.0 492.0 107.2 16.0 11.0 18.0
D1 - - - -
[12.99] [10.83] [11.22] [21.65] [20.67] [19.37] [4.22] [0.63] [0.43] [0.71]
1-14
Frame D
D2: VFD300C23E; VFD370C23E; VFD550C43E; VFD750C43E; VFD450C63B-21; VFD550C63B-21
D
W See DetailA A
SEE DETAIL D1
W1 D2
H1
H2
H3
H
S2
SeeDETAIL
SEE DetailB B
1 1
3 3
2 2
S1 S1
DetailAA
DETAIL DetailB B
DETAIL
Figure 1-21
Unit: mm [inch]
330.0 688.3 275.0 285.0 550.0 525.0 492.0 107.2 16.0 11.0 18.0 76.2 34.0 22.0
D2
[12.99] [27.10] [10.83] [11.22] [21.65] [20.67] [19.37] [4.22] [0.63] [0.43] [0.71] [3.00] [1.34] [0.87]
1-15
Frame E
E1: VFD450C23A; VFD550C23A; VFD750C23A; VFD900C43A; VFD1100C43A; VFD750C63B-00;
VFD900C63B-00; VFD1100C63B-00; VFD1320C63B-00
W D
W1 See Detail A D1
H1
H2
H3
See Detail B
Detail A Detail B
Figure 1-22
Unit: mm [inch]
Frame W H D W1 H1 H2 H3 D1* D2 S1, S2 S3 Ф1 Ф2 Ф3
370.0 300.0 335.0 589 560.0 528.0 143.0 18.0 13.0 18.0
E1 - - - -
[14.57] [11.81] [13.19 [23.19] [22.05] [20.80] [5.63] [0.71] [0.51] [0.71]
1-16
Frame E
E2: VFD450C23E; VFD550C23E; VFD750C23E; VFD900C43E; VFD1100C43E; VFD750C63B-21;
W D
W1 See Detail A D1
H1
H2
H3
H
See Detail B
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
Detail A Detail B
Figure 1-23
Unit: mm [inch]
Frame W H D W1 H1 H2 H3 D1* D2 S1, S2 S3 Ф1 Ф2 Ф3
370.0 715.8 300.0 335.0 589 560.0 528.0 143.0 18.0 13.0 18.0 22.0 34.0 92.0
E2
[14.57] [28.18] [11.81] [13.19 [23.19] [22.05] [20.80] [5.63] [0.71] [0.51] [0.71] [0.87] [1.34] [3.62]
1-17
Frame F
F1: VFD900C23A; VFD1320C43A; VFD1600C43A; VFD1600C63B-00; VFD2000C63B-00
W D
W1 D1
See Detail
See Detail A A
H1
H2
H3
See Detail
See Detail B B S3 D2
S1
S2
S1

Figure 1-24
Unit: mm [inch]
Frame W H D W1 H1 H2 H3 D1* D2 S1 S2 S3
420.0 300.0 380.0 800.0 770.0 717.0 124.0 18.0 13.0 25.0 18.0
F1 -
[16.54] [11.81] [14.96] [31.50] [30.32] [28.23] [4.88] [0.71] [0.51] [0.98] [0.71]
1-18
Frame F
F2: VFD900C23E; VFD1320C43E; VFD1600C43E; VFD1600C63B-21; VFD2000C63B-21
W D
W1 D1
See Detail
See Detail A A
H1
H2
H3
H
See Detail B S3 D2
See Detail B
S1
2
2
1
3
3
1
2
S2
S1

Figure 1-25
Unit: mm [inch]
Frame W H D W1 H1 H2 H3 D1* D2 S1 S2 S3
420.0 940.0 300.0 380.0 800.0 770.0 717.0 124.0 18.0 13.0 25.0 18.0
F2
[16.54] [37.00] [11.81] [14.96] [31.50] [30.32] [28.23] [4.88] [0.71] [0.51] [0.98] [0.71]
Frame Ф1 Ф2 Ф3
92.0 35.0 22.0
F2
[3.62] [1.38] [0.87]
1-19
Frame G
G1: VFD1850C43A; VFD2200C43A; VFD2500C63B-00; VFD3150C63B-00
W D
W1 See Detail A
H3
H2
H1
S3
See Detail B
Detail A Detail B
Figure 1-26
Unit: mm [inch]
Frame W H D W1 H1 H2 H3 S1 S2 S3 Ф1 Ф2 Ф3
500.0 397.0 440.0 1000.0 963.0 913.6 13.0 26.5 27.0
G1 - - - -
[19.69] [15.63] [217.32] [39.37] [37.91] [35.97] [0.51] [1.04] [1.06]
1-20
Frame G
G2: VFD1850C43E; VFD2200C43E; VFD2500C63B-21; VFD3150C63B-21
W D
W1 See Detail A
H3
H2
H1
H
S3
See Detail B
Detail A Detail B
Figure 1-27
Unit: mm [inch]
Frame W H D W1 H1 H2 H3 S1 S2 S3 Ф1 Ф2 Ф3
500.0 1240.2 397.0 440.0 1000.0 963.0 913.6 13.0 26.5 27.0 22.0 34.0 117.5
G2
[19.69] [48.83] [15.63] [217.32] [39.37] [37.91] [35.97] [0.51] [1.04] [1.06] [0.87] [1.34] [4.63]
1-21
Frame H
H1: VFD2800C43A; VFD3150C43A; VFD3550C43A; VFD4500C43A; VFD4000C63B-00;
See Detail A
See Detail B
Detail A Detail B
Figure 1-28
Unit: mm [inch]
Frame W H D W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 W6 H1 H2 H3 H4
700.0 1435.0 398.0 630.0 290.0 1403.0 1346.6
H1 - - - - - -
[27.56] [56.5] [15.67] [24.8] [11.42] [55.24] [53.02]
Frame H5 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 S1 S2 S3 Ф1 Ф2 Ф3
45.0 13.0 26.5 25.0
H1 - - - - - - - - -
[1.77] [0.51] [1.04] [0.98]
1-22
Frame H
H2: VFD2800C43E-1; VFD3150C43E-1; VFD3550C43E-1; VFD4500C43E-1
See Detail A
Side fixing baffle plate Side fixing baffle plate

See Detail B
Detail A Detail B
Figure 1-29
Unit: mm [inch]
700.0 1745.0 404.0 630.0 500.0 630.0 760.0 800.0 1729.0 1701.6
H2 - - -
[27.56] [68.70] [15.91] [24.8] [19.69] [24.8] [29.92] [31.5] [68.07] [66.99]
Frame H5 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 S1 S2 S3 Φ1 Φ2 Φ3
51.0 38.0 65.0 204.0 68.0 137.0 13.0 26.5 25.0
H2 - - - -
[2.01] [1.50] [2.56] [8.03] [2.68] [5.39] [0.51] [1.04] [0.98]
1-23
Frame H
H3: VFD2800C43E; VFD3150C43E; VFD3550C43E
See Detail A
Side fixing Side fixing baffle plate

側邊固定件側邊固定件
baffle plate
See Detail B
Detail A Detail B
Figure 1-30
Unit: mm [inch]
700.0 1745.0 404.0 630.0 500.0 630.0 760.0 800.0 1729.0 1701.6
H3 - - -
[27.56] [68.70] [15.91] [24.8] [19.69] [24.8] [29.92] [31.5] [68.07] [66.99]
51.0 38.0 65.0 204.0 68.0 137.0 13.0 26.5 25.0 22.0 34.0 117.5
H3 -
[2.01] [1.50] [2.56] [8.03] [2.68] [5.39] [0.51] [1.04] [0.98] [0.87] [1.34] [4.63]
1-24
690V Frame H
H2: VFD4000C63B-21; VFD4500C63B-21; VFD5600C63B-21; VFD6300C63B-21
W D
W2 See
See Detail
Detail A A D1
S3
H2 H3 H5
H1 H H4
See Detail BB
See Detail
W3
W2 S1
Side fixing
側邊固定件 W1 Side
側邊固定件fixing baffle plate
baffle plate 2 3 1 1 3 2 See Detail
See Detail C C
1
1
S1 Detail
Detail C
C (Mounting
D6 (Mounting
Hole) hole)
D4
3 3
D6 D3
D5 S2 S1
Detail A (Mounting Detail B (Mounting

W4
D2 Hole)
Detail A Detail B
Hole)
W5 (Mounting hole) (Mounting hole)
W6
Figure 1-31
Unit: mm [inch]
700.0 1745.0 404.0 630.0 500.0 630.0 760.0 800.0 1729.0 1701.6
H2 - - -
[27.56] [68.70] [15.91] [24.8] [19.69] [24.8] [29.92] [31.5] [68.07] [66.99]
51.0 38.0 65.0 204.0 68.0 137.0 13.0 26.5 25.0 22.0 34.0 117.5
H2 -
[2.01] [1.50] [2.56] [8.03] [2.68] [5.39] [0.51] [1.04] [0.98] [0.87] [1.34] [4.63]
Digital Keypad
1-25
KPC-CC01
Figure 1-32
1-26
Chapter 2 InstallationC2000
Chapter 2 Installation
2-1 Mounting Clearance
2-2 Air Flow and Power Dissipation
2-1
2-1 Mounting Clearance
 Prevent fiber particles, scraps of paper, shredded wood saw dust, metal particles, etc. from
adhering to the heat sink
 Install the AC motor drive in a metal cabinet. When installing one drive below another one,
use a metal separation between the AC motor drives to prevent mutual heating and to
prevent the risk of fire accident.
 Install the AC motor drive in Pollution Degree 2 environments only:
Normally only nonconductive pollution occurs and temporary conductivity caused by
condensation is expected.
The appearances shown in the following figures are for reference only.
Airflow direction: (Blue arrow) inflow (Red arrow) outflow Distance
Single drive installation Side-by-side horizontal installation(Frame A–C)
(Frame A–H)
Multiple drives, single

side-by-side horizontal
installation（Frame G, H）
Multiple drives, side-by-side

installation (Frame D0, D, E,
F) Install metal separation
between the drives.
Multiple drives side-by-side vertical installation (Frame A–H )

Ta: Frame A–G Ta*: Frame H
When installing one AC motor drive below another one (top-bottom installation), use a metal separation
between the drives to prevent mutual heating. The temperature measured at the fan’s inflow side must
be lower than the temperature measured at the operation side. If the fan’s inflow temperature is higher,
use a thicker or larger size of metal seperation. Operation temperature is the temperature measured at
50mm away from the fan’s inflow side. (As shown in the figure below)
2-2
Frame A [mm] B [mm] C [mm] D [mm]

A–C 60 30 10 0
D0–F 100 50 - 0
G 200 100 - 0
H 350 0 0 200 (100, Ta=Ta*=50℃)
VFD007C23A; VFD007C43A/E; VFD015C23A; VFD015C43A/E; VFD022C23A;
Frame A VFD022C43A/E; VFD037C23A; VFD037C43A/E; VFD040C43A/E; VFD055C43A/E; VFD015C53A-21;
VFD022C53A-21; VFD037C53A-21
VFD055C23A; VFD75C23A; VFD075C43A/E; VFD110C23A; VFD110C43A/E;
Frame B
VFD150C43A/E; VFD055C53A-21; VFD075C53A-21; VFD110C53A-21; VFD150C53A-21
VFD150C23A; VFD185C23A; VFD185C43A/E; VFD220C23A; VFD220C43A/E;
Frame C
VFD300C43A/E; VFD185C63B-21; VFD220C63B-21; VFD300C63B-21; VFD370C63B-21
Frame D0 VFD370C43S; VFD450C43S; VFD370C43U; VFD450C43U
VFD300C23A/E; VFD370C23A/E; VFD550C43A/E; VFD750C43A/E; VFD450C63B-00;
Frame D
VFD450C23A/E; VFD550C23A/E; VFD750C23A/E; VFD900C43A/E; VFD1100C43A/E;
Frame E VFD750C63B-00; VFD900C63B-00; VFD1100C63B-00; VFD1320C63B-00; VFD750C63B-21;
VFD900C23A/E; VFD1320C43A/E; VFD1600C43A/E; VFD1600C63B-00; VFD2000C63B-00;
Frame F
VFD1600C63B-21; VFD2000C63B-21
VFD1850C43A; VFD2200C43A; VFD1850C43E; VFD2200C43E; VFD2500C63B-00;
Frame G
VFD2800C43A; VFD3150C43A; VFD3550C43A; VFD4500C43A; VFD2800C43E-1; VFD3150C43E-1;
VFD3550C43E-1; VFD4500C43E-1; VFD2800C43E; VFD3150C43E; VFD3550C43E; VFD4500C43E;
Frame H
VFD4000C63B-00; VFD4500C63B-00; VFD5600C63B-00; VFD6300C63B-00; VFD4000C63B-21;
NOTE
1. The minimum mounting clearances stated in the table above applies to AC motor drives frame A to D. A drive fails
to follow the minimum mounting clearances may cause the fan to malfunction and heat dissipation problem.
2-3
NOT E
※ The mounting clearances stated in the figure is for installing the
drive in an open area. To install the drive in a confined space (such
as cabinet or electric box), please follow the following three rules:
(1) Keep the minimum mounting clearances. (2) Install a ventilation
equipment or an air conditioner to keep surrounding temperature
lower than operation temperature. (3) Refer to parameter setting
and set up Pr. 00-16, Pr.00-17, and Pr. 06-55.
※ The following table shows the heat dissipation and the required air
volume when installing a single drive in a confined space. When
installing multiple drives, the required air volume shall be multiplied
by the number of the drives.
※ Refer to the chart (Air flow rate for cooling) for ventilation
equipment design and selection.
※ Refer to the chart (Power dissipation) for air conditioner design and
selection.
※ Different control mode will affect the derating. See Pr. 06-55 for
more information.
※ Ambient temperature derating curve shows the derating status in
different temperature in relation to different protection level.
※ If UL Type 1 models need side by side installation, please remove
top cover of FrameA–C, and please do not install conduit box of
Frame D and above.
※ Suitable for Installation in a Compartment Handling Conditioned Air
(Plenum).
2-4
2-2 Air Flow and Power Dissipation

Air flow rate for cooling Power dissipation of AC motor drive
Flow Rate [cfm] Flow Rate [m3/hr] Power Dissipation [W]
Model No. Loss External
External Internal Total External Internal Total Internal Total
(Heat sink)
VFD007C23A - - - - - - 33 27 61
VFD015C23A 14 - 14 24 - 24 56 31 88
VFD022C23A 14 - 14 24 - 24 79 36 115
VFD037C23A 10 - 10 17 - 17 113 46 159
VFD055C23A 40 14 54 68 24 92 197 67 264
VFD075C23A 66 14 80 112 24 136 249 86 335
VFD110C23A 58 14 73 99 24 124 409 121 529
VFD150C23A 166 12 178 282 20 302 455 161 616
VFD185C23A 166 12 178 282 20 302 549 184 733
VFD220C23A 166 12 178 282 20 302 649 216 865
VFD300C23A/E 179 30 209 304 51 355 913 186 1099
VFD370C23A/E 179 30 209 304 51 355 1091 220 1311
VFD450C23A/E 228 73 301 387 124 511 1251 267 1518
VFD550C23A/E 228 73 301 387 124 511 1401 308 1709
VFD750C23A/E 246 73 319 418 124 542 1770 369 2139
VFD900C23A/E 224 112 336 381 190 571 2304 484 2788
VFD007C43A/E - - - - - - 33 25 59
VFD015C43A/E - - - - - - 45 29 74
VFD022C43A/E 14 - 14 24 - 24 71 33 104
VFD037C43A/E 10 - 10 17 - 17 103 38 141
VFD040C43A/E 10 - 10 17 - 17 116 42 158
VFD055C43A/E 10 - 10 17 - 17 134 46 180
VFD075C43A/E 40 14 54 68 24 92 216 76 292
VFD110C43A/E 66 14 80 112 24 136 287 93 380
VFD150C43A/E 58 14 73 99 24 124 396 122 518
VFD185C43A/E 99 21 120 168 36 204 369 138 507
VFD220C43A/E 99 21 120 168 36 204 476 158 635
VFD300C43A/E 126 21 147 214 36 250 655 211 866
VFD370C43S/U 179 30 209 304 51 355 809 184 993
VFD450C43S/U 179 30 209 304 51 355 929 218 1147
VFD550C43A/E 179 30 209 304 51 355 1156 257 1413
VFD750C43A/E 186 30 216 316 51 367 1408 334 1742
VFD900C43A/E 257 73 330 437 124 561 1693 399 2092
VFD1100C43A/E 223 73 296 379 124 503 2107 491 2599
VFD1320C43A/E 224 112 336 381 190 571 2502 579 3081
VFD1600C43A/E 289 112 401 491 190 681 3096 687 3783
VFD1850C43A/E 454 771 4589
VFD2200C43A/E 454 771 5772
VFD2800C43A/E 769 1307 6381
VFD3150C43A/E 769 1307 7156
VFD3550C43A/E 769 1307 8007
VFD4500C43A/E 769 1307 11894
VFD015C53A-21 - - - - - - 39.5 13.0 53
VFD022C53A-21 - - - - - - 55.0 22.0 77
VFD037C53A-21 0.006 - 0.006 13.6 - 13.6 86.8 42.7 130
VFD055C53A-21 0.019 0.007 0.026 40.0 14.5 54.5 124.6 67.9 193
VFD075C53A-21 0.019 0.007 0.026 40.0 14.5 54.5 143.5 119.0 263
VFD110C53A-21 0.019 0.007 0.026 40.0 14.5 54.5 222.2 162.8 385
VFD150C53A-21 0.019 0.007 0.026 40.0 14.5 54.5 308.5 216.5 525
VFD185C63B-21 90.0 21.3 111.4 153.0 36.2 189.2 317.5 145.0 462.5
VFD220C63B-21 90.0 21.3 111.4 153.0 36.2 189.2 408.2 141.8 550.0
VFD300C63B-21 90.0 21.3 111.4 153.0 36.2 189.2 492.7 257.3 750.0
2-5
Air flow rate for cooling Power dissipation of AC motor drive

Flow Rate [cfm] Flow Rate [m3/hr] Power Dissipation [W]
Model No. Loss External
External Internal Total External Internal Total Internal Total
(Heat sink)
VFD370C63B-21 89.0 21.3 110.3 151.2 36.2 187.5 641.6 283.4 925.0
VFD450C63B-00/21 175.9 36.4 212.3 298.8 61.8 360.6 718.2 406.8 1125.0
VFD550C63B-00/21 175.9 36.4 212.3 298.8 61.8 360.6 890.1 484.9 1375.0
VFD750C63B-00/21 264.6 90.6 355.2 449.6 153.9 603.5 1356.0 519.0 1875.0
VFD900C63B-00/21 264.6 90.6 355.2 449.6 153.9 603.5 1652.8 597.2 2250.0
VFD1100C63B-00/21 264.6 90.6 355.2 449.6 153.9 603.5 1960.3 789.7 2750.0
VFD1320C63B-00/21 264.6 90.6 355.2 449.6 153.9 603.5 2230.8 1069.2 3300.0
VFD1600C63B-00/21 248.1 135.3 383.4 421.6 229.9 651.4 2627.3 1372.7 4000.0
VFD2000C63B-00/21 248.1 135.3 383.4 421.6 229.9 651.4 3415.0 1585.0 5000.0
VFD2500C63B-00/21 409.7 696.0 4751.7 1498.3 6250.0
VFD3150C63B-00/21 409.7 696.0 5695.4 2179.6 7875.0
VFD4000C63B-00/21 563.0 956.4 6796.2 3203.8 10000.0
VFD4500C63B-00/21 952.9 1618.9 7313.6 3936.4 11250.0
VFD5600C63B-00/21 952.9 1618.9 9553.4 4446.6 14000.0
VFD6300C63B-00
952.9 1618.9 11042.4 4707.6 15750.0
VFD6300C63B-21
※ The required airflow shown in chart is for installing single drive in a ※ The heat dissipation shown in
confined space. the chart is for installing single
※ When installing the multiple drives, the required air volume should be the drive in a confined space.
required air volume for single drive X the number of the drives. ※ When installing the multiple
drives, volume of heat
dissipation should be the heat
dissipated for single drive X the
number of the drives.
※ Heat dissipation for each model
is calculated by rated voltage,
current and default carrier.
2-6
Chapter 3 UnpackingC2000
Chapter 3 Unpacking
3-1 Unpacking
3-2 The Lifting Hook
3-1
The AC motor drive should be kept in the shipping carton or crate before installation. In order to retain the
warranty coverage, the AC motor drive should be stored properly when it is not to be used for an extended
period of time.
3-1 Unpacking
Follow these steps to unpack the AC motor drive:
Frame D (carton version)

Unpacking 1 (VFDXXXCXXA, VFDXXXC63B-00) Unpacking 2 (VFDXXXCXXE, VFDXXXC63B-21)
Cut the three pieces of packaging strap off. Cut the three pieces of packaging strap off.
Remove the top cover, take out the EPEs and the Remove the top cover, take out the EPEs, rubber
manual, and then loosen the four screws. and the manual, and then loosen the six screws.
3-2
Lift the drive by hooking the lifting hole. It is now Lift the drive by hooking the lifting hole. It is now
ready for installation. ready for installation.
3-3
Frame D (crate version)

Loosen the 12 screws to open the top cover of the Loosen the 16 screws at the four corners of the
crate. crate, and then remove the iron plates.
Take out the EPEs and the manual. Remove the top cover, take out the EPEs, rubber
and the manual.
Figure 3-8
Loosen the eight screws fasten the drive on the

pallet, and then remove the wood plate.
Figure 3-12
Figure 3-9
3-4
Lift the drive by hooking the lifting hole. It is now Loosen the ten screws fasten the drive on the
ready for installation. pallet, and then remove the wood plate.
Figure 3-13
Lift the drive by hooking the lifting hole. It is now

Figure 3-10
ready for installation.
Figure 3-14
3-5
Frame E
Loosen the 16 screws at the four corners of the Loosen the 16 screws at the four corners of the
crate, and then remove the iron plates. crate, and then remove the iron plates.
manual. and the manual.
Figure 3-20
Figure 3-16
Loosen the eight screws fasten the drive on the Loosen the ten screws fasten the drive on the
pallet, and then remove the wood plate. pallet, and then remove the wood plates.
3-6
3-7
Frame F
Remove the six buckles fixed on the crate with a Remove the six buckles fixed on the crate with a
flat-head screwdriver, see the figure below. flat-head screwdriver, see the figure below.
6
6
5
5
4
4
1
1 2
2
Figure 3-23
3 Figure 3-27
3
Loosen the five screws fasten the drive on the Loosen the five screws fasten the drive on the
pallet, see the figure below. pallet, and then remove the wood plates.
5
4 9
8
3 wood plate2 7
6
2 5
wood plate1 4
1 3
2
1
3-8
ready for installation ready for installation.

.
3-9
Frame G
Remove the six buckles fixed on the crate with a Remove the six buckles fixed on the crate with a
flat-head screwdriver, see the figure below. flat-head screwdriver, see the figure below.
4 4
5 5
6 6
1 1
2
2
3 Figure 3-31 Figure 3-35
3

Loosen the five screws fasten the drive on the Loosen the 12 screws fasten the drive on the
pallet, see the figure below. pallet, and then remove the wood plates.
3
4
5 3
11 5 4
6
7
12 98
10 wood plate1
1 1
wood plate2
wood plate3
wood plate5
2 wood plate4 2
3-10
3-11
Frame H
Unpacking 1 (VFDXXXC43A) Unpacking 2 (VFDXXXC43E-1)
Remove the eight buckles fixed on the crate with Remove the eight buckles fixed on the crate with
a flat-head screwdriver, see the figure below. a flat-head screwdriver, see the figure below.
Loosen the six screws fasten the drive on the Loosen the six screws fasten the drive on the
pallet, and then remove six metal washers and six pallet, and then remove six metal washers and six
plastic washers. See the figure below. plastic washers. See the figure below.
3-12
Lift the drive by hooking the lifting hole. It is now Loosen the six M6 screws and the iron plates
ready for installation. (see the figure below). You can use the removed
screws and iron plates to fix the drive from
outside.
This description is how to fix the drive from the

outside. You can skip to the next step if it’s not
necessary.
Loosen the eight M8 screws, and then use these
eight M8 screws to fix the iron plates (removed at
the last step) to the drive, see the figure below.
Torque: 150–180 kg-cm / [130.20–156.24 lb-in.] /
[14.7–17.6 Nm]
Figure 3-47
Lift the drive by hooking the lifting hole. It is now

ready for installation.
Figure 3-48
3-13
Frame H
Unpacking 3 (VFDXXXC43E)
Remove the eight buckles fixed on the crate with a flat-head screwdriver, see the figure below.
Figure 3-49
Remove the top cover, take out the EPEs, rubber and the manual.
Figure 3-50
Loosen the six screws fasten the drive on the pallet, and then remove six metal washers and six plastic
washers. See the figure below.
Figure 3-51
3-14
Loosen the six M6 screws and the iron plates (see the figure below). You can use the removed screws
and iron plates to fix the drive from the outside.
Figure 3-52
Fix the drive from the inside Fix the drive from the outside
Loosen the 18 M6 screws and remove the covers Loosen the eight M8 screws, and then use these
(see the figure 3-54). After fixing the drive and the eight M8 screws to fix the iron plates (removed at
cover for cables (see the figure 3-53), fasten the the last step) to the drive, see the figure below.
other covers back (see the figure 3-54) Torque: 150–180 kg-cm / [130.20–156.24 lb-in.] /
Torque: 35–45 kg-cm / [30.38–39.06 lb-in.] / [14.7–17.6 Nm]
[3.4–4.4 Nm]
Figure 3-53
Cover for cables (use M12 screws)
Figure 3-56
Figure 3-54
3-15
Fasten the six M6 screws back, see the figure Fasten the six M6 screws back, see the figure
below. below.
Torque: 35–45 kg-cm / [30.8–39.06 lb-in] /
[3.4–4.4 Nm]
Figure 3-55
Figure 3-57
Lift the drive by hooking the lifting hole. It is now ready for installation.
Figure 3-58
3-16
690V Frame H
Unpacking 1 (VFDXXXC63B-00)
Figure 3-59
Remove the top cover, take out the EPEs and the manual.
Figure 3-60
Figure 3-61
3-17
Figure 3-62
3-18
690V Frame H
Unpacking 2 (VFDXXXC63B-21)
Figure 3-63
Remove the top cover, take out the EPEs, rubber and the manual.
Figure 3-64
Figure 3-65
3-19
Loosen the six M6 screws and the iron plates (see the figure below). You can use the removed screws
and iron plates to fix the drive from the outside.
Figure 3-66
Fix the drive from the inside. Fix the drive from the outside.
Loosen the 18 M6 screws and remove the covers Loosen the eight M8 screws, and then use these
(see the figure 3-68). After fixing the drive and the eight M8 screws to fix the iron plates (removed at
cover for cables (see the figure 3-67), fasten the the last step) to the drive, see the figure below.
other covers back (see the figure 3-68) Torque: 150–180 kg-cm / [130.20–156.24 lb-in.] /
[3.4–4.4 Nm]
Figure 3-67
Cover for cables (use M12 screws)
Figure 3-70
Figure 3-68
3-20
Fasten the six M6 screws back, see the figure Fasten the six M6 screws back, see the figure
below. below.
Figure 3-72
3-21
Frame H: Fix the drive

VFDXXXC43A
Screw: M12*6
Figure 3-73
VFDXXXC43E & VFDXXXC43E-1
Fix the drive from the inside.

Screw: M12*8
Torque: 340–420 kg-cm / [295.1–364.6 lb-in.] /
[33.3–41.2 Nm]
Figure 3-74
3-22
Fix the drive from the outside.

Screw: M12*8
Torque: 340–420 kg-cm / [295.1–364.6 lb-in.] /
[33.3–41.2 Nm]
Figure 3-75
VFDXXXC63B
Screw M 12*6
Figure 3-76
3-23
VFDXXXC63B-21
Fix the drive from the outside.

Screw: M12*8
Torque: 340–420 kg-cm / [295.1–364.6 lb-in.] /
[33.32–41.16 Nm]
Figure 3-77
3-24
3-2 The Lifting Hook

The arrows indicate the location of the lifting holes of frame D to H, as shown in figure below:
Frame D0
Applicable models:
D0
D0
VFD370C43S; VFD450C43S; VFD370C43U;
VFD450C43U
Figure 3-78
Frame D
Applicable models:
D
D
VFD300C23A; VFD370C23A; VFD550C43A;
VFD300C23E; VFD370C23E; VFD550C43E;
VFD750C43E; VFD450C63B-00; VFD550C63B-00;
VFD450C63B-21; VFD550C63B-21
Figure 3-79
Frame E
E
E
Applicable models:
VFD900C43A; VFD1100C43A; VFD450C23E;
VFD1100C63B-00; VFD1320C63B-00; VFD750C63B-21;
Figure 3-80
3-25
Frame F
Applicable models: FF
VFD1600C63B-00; VFD2000C63B-00;
VFD1600C63B-21; VFD2000C63B-21
Figure 3-81
Frame G
Applicable models: GG
VFD1850C43A; VFD2200C43A; VFD1850C43E;
VFD2500C63B-21; VFD3150C63B-21
Figure 3-82
Frame H H
Applicable models:
VFD4500C43A; VFD2800C43E-1; VFD3150C43E-1;
VFD3550C43E-1; VFD4500C43E-1; VFD2800C43E;
VFD4000C63B-00; VFD4500C63B-00;
VFD5600C63B-00; VFD6300C63B-00
Figure 3-83
3-26
690V Frame H3
Applicable models:
VFD4000C63B-21; VFD4500C63B-21;
VFD5600C63B-21; VFD6300C63B-21
Figure 3-84
3-27
Ensure the lifting hook properly goes through the Ensure the angle between the lifting holes and the
lifting hole, as shown in the following diagram. lifting device is within the specification, as shown
in the following figure.
Applicable to Frame D0–E
Applicable to Frame D0–E
Figure 3-85
Applicable to Frame F–H
Figure 3-87
Applicable to Frame F–H, 690V Frame H3

Following drawing is only for demonstration, it may
be slightly different with the machine you have.
Figure 3-86
Figure 3-88
3-28
Weight
VFDXXX X C XX A V FD XXX X C XX E
VFDXXXXCXXA:
27 kg(59.527kg
Ibs.)/ [59.5 lbs] VFDXXXXCXXE:
29 kg(63.29kg / [63.9 lbs]
9 Ibs.)
D0
VFDXXXXCXXA: 37.6kg / [82.9 lbs] VFDXXXXCXXE: 40kg / [88.2 lbs]

VFDXXXC63B-00:
37. 6 kg(82.939.0kg
Ibs.) / [86.0 lbs] VFDXXXC63B-21:
40 kg(88. 241.1kg
Ibs. ) / [91.3 lbs]
VFDXXXXCXXA: 63.6kg / [140.2 lbs] VFDXXXXCXXE: 66kg / [145.5 lbs]

VFDXXXC63B-00: 61.0kg / [134.5 lbs] VFDXXXC63B-21:
63. 6 kg(140. 2 Ibs.) 66 kg(145.63.4kg
5 Ibs. )/ [139.8 lbs]
E X

VFDXXXXCXXA: 85kg / [187.2 lbs] VFDXXXXCXXE: 88kg / [193.8 lbs]
VFDXXXC63B-00:
85kg(187. 288.0kg
Ibs.) / [194.0 lbs] VFDXXXC63B-21: 91.0kg
88kg(193.8 I bs./) [200.7 lbs]

VFDXXXXCXXA: 130kg / [286.5 lbs] VFDXXXXCXXE: 138kg / [303.9 lbs]
VFDXXXC63B-00:
130kg(286.135.0kg
5 Ibs.) / [297.6 lbs] VFDXXXC63B-21: 143.0kg / [315.3 lbs]
138k g(303. 9 Ibs.)
3-29
VFD2800C43A;
VFD2800 C43A;VFD3150C43A; VFD3550C43A;
VFD31 50C4 3A; VFD4500C43A:
VFD 3550 C43A; 235kg
VFD450 0C43 A / [518.1 lbs]
VFDXXXC63B-00: 243.0kg / [535.7 lbs]
235k g(51 8.1 Ibs)
H1
Figure 3-99
VFD28 00C4 3E-1; VFD3 150C 43E-1 ; VFD3550 C43E-1; VFD450 0C43 E-1
VFD2800C43E-1; VFD3150C43E-1; VFD3550C43E-1; VFD4500C43E-1: 257kg / [566.6 lbs]
257kg(566.6 Ibs)
H2
Figure 3-100
VFDXXXC63B-21: 251.0kg / [553.5 lbs]
Figure 3-101
VFD28 00C4 3E; VFD 3150C 43E; VFD355 0C43 E; VFD4 500C 43E
VFD2800C43E;
257kg(566.6 VFD3150C43E; VFD3550C43E; VFD4500C43E: 257kg / [566.6 lbs]
Ibs)
H3
Figure 3-102
3-30
Chapter 4 WiringC2000
Chapter 4 Wiring
4-1 System Wiring Diagram
4-2 Wiring
4-1
After removing the front cover, examine if the power and control terminals are clearly noted. Please
read following precautions before wiring.
 It is crucial to cut off the AC motor drive power before any wiring installation are
made. A charge may still remain in the DCBUS capacitors with hazardous voltages
even if the power has been turned off. Therefore, it is suggested for users to
measure the remaining voltage by DC voltage meter before wiring. For your
personnel safety, please do not perform any wiring before the voltage drops to a
safe level < 25 VDC. Wiring installation with remaining voltage condition may cause
sparks and short circuit.
 Only qualified personnel familiar with AC motor drives is allowed to perform
installation, wiring and commissioning. Make sure the power is turned off before
wiring to prevent electric shock.
 Make sure that power is only applied to the R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 terminals. Failure to
comply may result in damage to the equipment. The voltage and current should lie
within the range as indicated on the nameplate (Chapter 1-1 Nameplate
Information).
 All the units must be grounded directly to a common ground terminal to prevent
lightning strike or electric shock.
 Please make sure to fasten the screw of the main circuit terminals to prevent
sparks which is made by the loose screws due to vibration.
 When wiring, please choose the wires with specification that complies with local
regulation for your personnel safety.
 Check following items after finishing the wiring:
1. Are all connections correct?
2. Any loosen wires?
3. Any short-circuits between the terminals or to ground?
4-2
4-1 System Wiring Diagram
Power input Please refer to Chapter 9 Specification Table in

terminal user manual for detail.
There may be a large inrush current during power

NFB or fuse on. Refer to 7-2 NFB to select a suitable NFB or
7-3 Fuse Specification Chart.
Switching the power ON/OFF before the

Electromagnetic
magnetic contactor more than 1 x per hour can
contactor
cause damage to the drive.
When the mains power capacity is > 500kVA or

when the drive is preceded by a capacitor bank,
the instantaneous peaks voltages and current may
AC reactor destroy the drive. In that case it is recommended
(input terminal) to install an AC input reactor which will also
improve the power factor and harmonics. The
cable between reactor and drive should be < 10m.
Please refer to Chapter 7-4.
Used to reduce radiated emission, especially in

environments with audio devices, and reduce
Zero-phase
input and output side interference.
reactor
The effective range is AM band to 10MHz.
Can be used to reduce electromagnetic

EMC filter interference.
Brake module & Used to shorten the deceleration time of the

Brake resistor motor.
(BR) Please refer to Chapter 7-1.
The wiring length of the motor will affect switching

AC reactor
current peaks. It is recommended to install an AC
(output
Figure 4-1 output reactor when the motor wiring length
terminal)
exceeds the
T value listed in Chapter 7-4.
Note: Please refer to Chapter 4-2 Wiring a
Diagram for detailed wiring information. Table 4-1
4-3
4-2 Wiring
Figure 4-2
Figure 4-3
*1 Please refer to Chapter 7-1 for brake units and resistors selection
4-4
Figure 4-4
*1 Please refer to Chapter 7-1 for brake units and resistors selection.
Note: When wiring for 12 Pulse Input, please strictly follow above wiring diagram, or it may cause the fan
stop unexpectedly. Any questions, please contact Delta Electronics, Inc.
4-5
MODBUS RS-485
Figure 4-5
4-6
4-2-1 SINK (NPN) / SOURCE (PNP) Mode
4-7
[The page intentionally left blank]
4-8
Chapter 5 Main Circuit TerminalsC2000
Chapter 5 Main Circuit Terminals
5-1 Main Circuit Diagram
5-2 Specifications of Main Circuit Terminals
5-1
 Fasten the screws in the main circuit terminal to prevent sparks condition made by the
loose screws due to vibration.
 When it needs to install the filter at the output side of terminals U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 on
the AC motor drive. Please use inductance filter. Do not use phase-compensation
capacitors or L-C (Inductance-Capacitance) or R-C (Resistance-Capacitance), unless
approved by Delta.
 DO NOT connect phase-compensation capacitors or surge absorbers at the output
terminals of AC motor drives.
 DO NOT connect [+1, -], [+2, -], [+1/DC+, -/DC-] or brake resistor directly to prevent
drive damage.
 Ensure the insulation of the main circuit wiring in accordance with the relevant safety
regulations.
Main power terminals

 Do not connect 3-phase model to one-phase power. R/L1, S/L2 and T/L3 has no
phase-sequence requirement, it can be used upon random selection.
 It is recommended to add a magnetic contactor (MC) to the power input wiring to cut
off power quickly and reduce malfunction when activating the protection function of
the AC motor drive. Both ends of the MC should have an R-C surge absorber.
 Please use voltage and current within the specification.
 When using a general GFCI (Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter), select a current sensor
with sensitivity of 200mA or above and not less than 0.1-second operation time to
avoid nuisance tripping.
 Please use the shielded wire or tube for the power wiring and ground the two ends of
the shield wire or tube.
 Do NOT run/stop AC motor drives by turning the power ON/OFF. Run/stop AC motor
drives by RUN/STOP command via control terminals or keypad. If you still need to
run/stop AC motor drives by turning power ON/OFF, it is recommended to do so only
ONCE per hour.
 Connect the drive to a 3-phase three-wire or 3-phase four-wire Wye system to comply
with UL standards.
Output terminals for main circuit
 Use well-insulated motor, suitable for inverter operation.
 When the AC drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 are connected to the motor
terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 respectively, the motor will rotate counterclockwise
(as viewed on the shaft end of the motor, see the figure below) upon a forward
operation command is received. To permanently reverse the direction of motor
rotation, switch over any of the two motor leads.
Figure 5-1
5-2
Terminals for connecting DC reactor, external brake resistor, external brake resistor
and DC circuit
 This is the terminals used to connect the DC reactor to improve the power factor. For
the factory setting, it connects the short-circuit object. Please remove this short-circuit
object before connecting to the DC reactor.
DC rea ct or (o ption al)
+1 +2
Figure 5-2
 Connect a brake resistor or brake unit in applications with frequent deceleration
ramps, short deceleration time, too low brake torque or requiring increased brake
torque.
Brak e re sistor
(opt ional)
Brak e re sistor
(optional) BR
Brak e un it
VFDB (o ption al)
B1 B2 + -
Figure 5-3
 The external brake resistor of Frame A, B and C should connect to the terminals (B1,
B2) of AC motor drives.
 For those models without built-in brake resistor, please connect external brake unit
and brake resistor (both of them are optional) to increase brake torque.
 When the terminals +1, +2 and - are not used, please leave the terminals open.
 DC+ and DC- are connected by common DCBUS, please refer to Chapter 5-1 (Main
Circuit Terminal) for the wiring terminal specification and the wire gauge information.
 Please refer to the VFDB manual for more information on wire gauge when installing
the brake unit.
5-3
5-1 Main Circuit Diagram
Figure 5-4
Figure 5-5
Figure 5-6
*1 Please refer to Section 7-1 for more details of brake units.
5-4
Figure 5-7
*1 Please refer to Section 7-1 for brake units and resistors selection.
Note: When wiring for 12 Pulse Input, please strictly follow above wiring diagram, or it may cause the fan
stop unexpectedly. Any questions, please contact Delta Electronics, Inc.
NOTE
 If the wiring between motor drive and motor is over 75 meters, please refer to Chapter 7-4 Specifications of limits for motor
cable length.
 Please remove short circuit plate of Frame G and H if 12 pulse is implemented
Fasten the screw after the copper is removed.

Screw torque: 100~110 kg-cm / [ 86.8~95.5 lb-in.] / [9.8~10.8 Nm]
Detail A
See
Detail A
Figure 5-8
5-5
Terminals Descriptions
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 AC line input terminals 3-phase
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 AC drive output terminals for connecting 3-phase induction motor
Applicable to frame A–C
+1/DC+, +2/DC+ Connections for DC reactor to improve the power factor. It needs to remove the
jumper for installation.
Connections for brake module (VFDB series)
(for 230V models: ≤ 22kW, built-in brake module)
+1/DC+, -/DC-
(for 460V models: ≤ 30kW, built-in brake module)
Common DC BUS
B1, B2 Connections for brake resistor (optional)
Earth connection, please comply with local regulations.
Table 5-1
5-6
5-2 Specifications of Main Circuit Terminals

 Use the specified ring lug for main circuit terminal wiring. See figure 5-9 and figure 5-10 for ring lug
specifications. For other types of wiring use the wires that comply with the local regulations.
 After crimping the wire to the ring lug (must be UL approved), UL and CSA approved recognized
component (YDPU2), install heat shrink tube rated at a minimum of 600VAC insulation over the live
part. Refer to figure 5-10 below.
Terminal specification
The part number of the ring lugs (produced by K.S. Terminals Inc.) in the table below are for reference
only. You can buy the ring lugs of your choice to match with different frame sizes.
A B C D d2 E F W t
Frame AWG Kit P/N
(MAX) (MAX) (MIN) (MAX) (MIN) (MIN) (MIN) (MAX) (MAX)
16 RNBL2-4
14 RNBL2-4
A 12 RNBL5-4 20.0 5.0 5.5 9.0 4.3 8.0 5.5 10.0 1.5
10 RNBL5-4
8 RNBS8-4
8 RNBM8-5
B 6 RNB14-5 28.0 7.0 7.5 14.0 5.2 13.0 12.0 14.0 1.5
4 RNBS22-5
6 RNB14-8
4 RNB22-8
C 40.0 12.0 12.5 22.0 8.3 13.0 12.5 24.0 2.5
2 RNBS38-8
1/0 RNB60-8
4 RNB22-8
44.0 13.0 10.0 15.0 8.3 13.0 17.0 26.0 3.0
2 RNBS38-8
D0
1/0 SQNBS60-8
40.0 11.0 10.0 23.0 8.3 13.0 14.0*1 24.0 4.5
2/0 SQNBS80-8
4 RNB22-8
2 RNBS38-8
1/0 RNB60-8
2/0 RNB70-8
D 50.0 16.0 10.0 27.0 8.3 13.0 14.0 28.0 6.0
3/0 RNB80-8
4/0 SQNBS100-8
250MCM SQNBS150-8
300MCM SQNBS150-8
5-7
A B C D d2 E F W t
Frame AWG Kit P/N
(MAX) (MAX) (MIN) (MAX) (MIN) (MIN) (MIN) (MAX) (MAX)
1/0 RNB60-8
2/0 RNB70-8
E 53.0 16.0 17.0 26.5 8.4 13.0 17.0 31.0 5.0
3/0 RNB80-8
4/0 RNB100-8
3/0 RNB80-8
F 4/0 SQNBS100-8 55.0 15.0 10.0 27.0 8.3 13.0 17.5 31.0 6.0
300MCM SQNBS150-8
1/0 SQNBS60-8
2/0 SQNBS80-8
3/0 SQNBS80-8 54.0 15.5 18.0 26.5 8.2 13.0 18.0 31.0 3.5
4/0 SQNBS100-8
G
250MCM SQNBS150-8
300MCM SQNBS180-12
400MCM SQNBS200-12 70.0 21.0 27.0 32.7 12.2 13.0 27.0 42.0 4.0
500MCM SQNBS200-12
3/0 SQNBS80-8
4/0 SQNBS100-8
H 250 SQNBS150-8 54.0 15.5 18.0 26.5 8.2 13.0 18.0 31.0 3.5
300 SQNBS150-8
350 SQNBS150-8
*1: F(MAX)=16.5 Unit: mm
5-8
Frame A
-/ - B1 B2
 If you install at Ta 50°C environment, please select copper wire with voltage rating 600V and
temperature resistant 75°C or 90°C.
 If you install at Ta 50°C above environment, please select copper wire with voltage rating 600V and
temperature resistant at 90°C or above.
 For UL installation compliant, please use copper wires for installation, the wire gauge is based on
temperature resistant at 75°C which is requested and recommended from UL. Do not reduce the
wire gauge when using higher temperature wire.
Main Circuit Terminals

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, DC+, DC, Terminal
B1, B2
Model Name
Screw Spec. Screw Spec.
Max. Wire
Min. Wire Gauge and Torque Max. Wire Gauge Min. Wire Gauge and Torque
Gauge
(±10%) (±10%)
VFD007C23A 2.5 mm2 [14 AWG] 2.5 mm2 [14 AWG] 2.5 mm2 [14 AWG]
VFD007C43A
1.5 mm2 [16 AWG]
VFD015C43A 2.5 mm2 [14 AWG] 2.5 mm2 [14 AWG]
VFD022C43A 2.5 mm2 [14 AWG]
VFD037C43A
VFD040C43A 6.0 mm2 [10 AWG] M4 6.0 mm2 [10 AWG] 6.0 mm2 [10 AWG] M4
VFD055C43A 10 mm 2
20kg-cm 20kg-cm
VFD007C43E [8 AWG] [17.4 lb-in.] [17.4 lb-in.]
1.5 mm2 [16 AWG] [1.96Nm] [1.96Nm]
VFD015C43E 2.5 mm2 [14 AWG] 2.5 mm2 [14 AWG]
VFD022C43E 2.5 mm [14 AWG]
2
VFD037C43E
VFD040C43E 6.0 mm2 [10 AWG] 6.0 mm2 [10 AWG] 6.0 mm2 [10 AWG]
VFD055C43E
VFD015C53A-21
VFD022C53A-21
2.5 mm2 [14 AWG] 2.5 mm2 [14 AWG] 2.5 mm2 [14 AWG]
VFD037C53A-21
5-9
Frame B
-/DC- +2/DC+ +1/DC+ B1 B2
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
 For VFD110C23A, if you install at Ta 45°C above environment, please select copper wire with
voltage rating 600V and temperature resistant at 90°C or above.
wire gauge when using higher temperature wrie.
 Wire fix to pole +2/DC+ and +1/DC+ with 45 kg-cm / [39.0 lb-in] / [4.42 Nm] (±10%)

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, -/DC-, Terminal
+1/DC+, +2/DC+, B1, B2
Model Name
Max. Wire
Gauge
(±10%) (±10%)
VFD055C23A 10 mm2 [8 AWG] 10 mm2 [8 AWG] 10 mm2 [8 AWG]
VFD075C43A
VFD075C43E
10 mm2 [8 AWG] M5 10 mm2 [8 AWG] 10 mm2 [8 AWG] M5
VFD110C43A
25 mm2 35kg-cm 35kg-cm
VFD110C43E
[4 AWG] [30.4 lb-in.] [30.4 lb-in.]
VFD150C43A [3.43Nm] 16 mm2 [6 AWG] 16 mm2 [6 AWG] [3.43Nm]
16 mm2 [6 AWG]
VFD150C43E
VFD055C53A-21
6 mm2 [10 AWG] 6 mm2 [10 AWG] 6 mm2 [10 AWG]
VFD075C53A-21
VFD110C53A-21
VFD150C53A-21
5-10
Frame C
-/DC- +2/DC+ +1/DC+ B1 B2
 For VFD220C23A, if you insall at Ta 40°C above environment, please select copper wire with
wire gauge when using higher temperature wrie.
 Wire fix to pole +2/DC+ and +1/DC+ with 90 kg-cm / [78.2 lb-in] / [8.83 Nm] (±10%)

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, -/DC-, Terminal
+1/DC+, +2/DC+, B1, B2
Model Name
Max. Wire
Gauge
(±10%) (±10%)
VFD150C23A
VFD185C23A 50 mm2 [1/0 AWG] 50 mm2 [1/0 AWG] 25 mm2 [4 AWG]
VFD220C23A
VFD185C43A
25 mm2 [4 AWG] 25 mm2 [4 AWG]
VFD220C43A
VFD300C43A 35 mm2 [2 AWG] M8 35 mm2 [2 AWG] M8
50mm2 80kg-cm 16 mm2 [6 AWG] 80kg-cm
VFD185C43E
[1/0 AWG] 25 mm2 [4 AWG] [69.4 lb-in.] 25 mm2 [4 AWG] [69.4 lb-in.]
VFD220C43E [7.84Nm] [7.84Nm]
VFD300C43E 35 mm2 [2 AWG] 35 mm2 [2 AWG]
VFD185C63B-21 10 mm2 [8 AWG] 10 mm2 [8 AWG] 10 mm2 [8 AWG]
VFD220C63B-21 16 mm [6 AWG]
2
16 mm2 [6 AWG]
VFD300C63B-21 25 mm [4 AWG]
2
25 mm2 [4 AWG] 16 mm2 [6 AWG]
VFD370C63B-21 35 mm [2 AWG]
2
35 mm2 [2 AWG]
5-11
Frame D0
 If you install at Ta 40°C (for model names with last digit U) / 50°C (for model names with last digit S)
environment, please select copper wire with voltage rating 600V and temperature resistant at 75°C
or 90°C.
 If you install at Ta 40°C (for model names with last digit U) / 50°C (for model names with last digit S)
above environment, please select copper wire with voltage rating 600V and temperature resistant
at 90°C or above.

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, DC+, DC- Terminal
Model Name Screw Spec. Screw Spec.
Max. Wire
Gauge
(±10%) (±10%)
VFD370C43U
M8 M8
VFD450C43U 50 mm2 [1/0 AWG]
70mm2 80kg-cm 80kg-cm
35 mm [2 AWG] 25 mm [4 AWG]
2 2
[2/0 AWG] [69.4 lb-in.] [69.4 lb-in.]
VFD370C43S
[7.84Nm] [7.84Nm]
VFD450C43S 70 mm2 [2/0 AWG]
5-12
Frame D
 If you install at Ta 50°C (for 230V / 460V model names with last digit A; for 690V model names end
with 63B-00) / 40°C (for 230V / 460V model names with last digit A; for 690V model names end
with 63B-21) environment, please select copper wire with voltage rating 600V and temperature
resistant at 75°C or 90°C.
with 63B-21) above environmnet, please select copper wire with voltage rating 600V and
temperatrue resistant at 90°C or above.
temperature resistnat at 75°C, which is requested and recommended from UL. Do not reduce the
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, DC+, Terminal
DC-
Model Name
Max. Wire
Gauge
(±10%) (±10%)
VFD300C23A 120 mm2 [4/0 AWG] 120 mm2 [4/0 AWG]
70 mm2 [2/0 AWG]
VFD370C23A 120 mm [250MCM]
2
120 mm2 [250MCM]
150mm2 50 mm [1/0 AWG]
2
VFD370C43A 50 mm2 [1/0 AWG] 25 mm2 [4 AWG]
VFD450C43A [300MCM] 70 mm2 [2/0 AWG] 70 mm2 [2/0 AWG] 35 mm2 [2 AWG]
VFD550C43A 95 mm [3/0 AWG]
2
95 mm2 [3/0 AWG] 50 mm2 [1/0 AWG]
VFD750C43A 150 mm [300MCM]
2
150 mm2 [300MCM] 95 mm2 [3/0 AWG]
VFD300C23E 95 mm2 [3/0 AWG] M8 95 mm2 [3/0 AWG] 50 mm2 [1/0 AWG] M8
VFD370C23E 120 mm [4/0 AWG] 180kg-cm 120 mm2 [4/0 AWG]
2
70 mm2 [2/0 AWG] 180kg-cm
VFD370C43E 120mm2 [156.2 lb-in.] [156.2 lb-in.]
50 mm2 [1/0 AWG] [17.65Nm] 50 mm2 [1/0 AWG] 25 mm2 [4 AWG] [17.65Nm]
VFD450C43E [4/0 AWG]
VFD550C43E 70 mm2 [2/0 AWG] 70 mm2 [2/0 AWG] 35 mm [2 AWG]
2
VFD750C43E 120 mm [4/0 AWG]

2
120 mm2 [4/0 AWG] 70 mm2 [2/0 AWG]
VFD450C63B-00
VFD550C63B-00 150mm2
VFD450C63B-21 [300MCM]
VFD550C63B-21
5-13
Frame E
with 63B-21) environment, please select copper wire with voltage rating 600V and temperature
with 63B-21) above environment, please select copper wire with voltage rating 600V and
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, -/DC-, +1/DC+ Terminal
Max. Wire Max. Wire
Min. Wire Gauge and Torque Min. Wire Gauge and Torque
Gauge Gauge
(±10%) (±10%)
50mm2*2
VFD450C23A 50 mm2*2 [1/0 AWG*2] 50 mm2*1 [1/0 AWG*1]
[1/0 AWG*2]
95mm2*2
[3/0 AWG*2]
120mm2*2
[4/0 AWG*2]
50mm2*2
VFD900C43A 50 mm2*2 [1/0 AWG*2] 50 mm2*1[1/0 AWG*1]
[1/0 AWG*2]
95mm2*2
[3/0 AWG*2]
50mm2*2
VFD450C23E 50 mm2*2 [1/0 AWG*2] 50 mm2*1 [1/0 AWG*1]
[1/0 AWG*2]
70mm2*2
[2/0 AWG*2]
95mm2*2
M8 [3/0 AWG*2] M8
120mm2*2 50 mm2*2 [1/0 AWG*2] 180kg-cm 50mm2*2 180kg-cm
VFD900C43E 50 mm2*1 [1/0 AWG*1]
[4/0 AWG*2] [156.2 lb-in.] [1/0 AWG*2] [156.2 lb-in.]
[17.65 Nm] 70mm2*2 [17.65Nm]
[2/0 AWG*2]
25 mm2*2
VFD750C63B-00 25 mm2*2 [4 AWG*2] 25 mm2*1 [4 AWG*1]
[4 AWG*2]
VFD900C63B-00 35 mm2*2
35 mm2 *2 [2 AWG*2] 35 mm2 *1 [2 AWG*1]
VFD1100C63B-00 [2 AWG*2]
50 mm2*2
VFD1320C63B-00 50 mm2*2 [1/0 AWG*2] 50 mm2*1 [1/0 AWG*1]
[1/0 AWG*2]
25 mm2*2
VFD750C63B-21 25 mm2*2 [4 AWG*2] 25 mm2*1 [4 AWG*1]
[4 AWG*2]
VFD900C63B-21 35 mm2*2
35 mm2*2 [2 AWG*2] 35 mm2*1 [2 AWG*1]
VFD1100C63B-21 [2 AWG*2]
50 mm2*2
[1/0 AWG*2]
5-14
Frame F
with 63B-21) environment, please selet copper wire with voltage rating 600V and temperature
with 63B-21) above environment, please select copper wire with voltage rating 600V and
 For VFD900C23A, if you install at Ta 45°C above environment, please select copper wire with
 For VFD900C23E, if you install at Ta 35°C above environment, please select copper wire with
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, DC+, DC- Terminal
Max. Wire Max. Wire
Gauge Gauge
(±10%) (±10%)
150 mm2*2
VFD900C23A 150 mm2*2 [300MCM*2] 150 mm2 [300MCM]
[300MCM*2]
150mm2*2 120 mm2*2
VFD1320C43A 120 mm2*2 [4/0AWG*2] 120 mm2[4/0AWG]
[300MCM*2] [4/0AWG*2]
150 mm2*2
VFD1600C43A 150 mm2*2 [300MCM*2] 150 mm2 [300MCM]
[300MCM*2]
120 mm2*2
VFD900C23E 120 mm2*2 [4/0AWG*2] 120 mm2 [4/0AWG]
[4/0AWG*2]
120 mm2*2 M8 95 mm2*2 M8
VFD1320C43E 95 mm2*2 [3/0 AWG*2] 95 mm2 [3/0 AWG]
[4/0AWG*2] 180kg-cm [3/0 AWG*2] 180kg-cm
[156.2 lb-in.] 120 mm2*2 [156.2 lb-in.]
VFD1600C43E 120 mm2*2 [4/0AWG*2] 120 mm2 [4/0AWG]
[17.65Nm] [4/0AWG*2] [17.65Nm]
70 mm2*2
[2/0 AWG*2]
95 mm2*2
150mm2*2 [3/0 AWG*2]
[300MCM*2] 70 mm2*2
[2/0 AWG*2]
95 mm2*2
[3/0 AWG*2]
5-15
Frame G
R/L11 R/L12 S/L21 S/L22 T/L31 T/L32 +1/DC -/DC- U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
 If you install at Ta 50°C (for 230V / 460V model names with last digit A; for 690V model names end with
63B-00) / 40°C (for 230V / 460V model names with last digit A; for 690V model names end with 63B-21)
environment, please select copper wire with voltage rating 600V and temperature resistant at 75°C or 90°C.
above environment, please select copper wire with voltage rating 600V and temperature resistant at 90°C or
above.
 For VFD2200C43A, if you install at Ta 45°C above environment, please select copper wire with voltage
rating 600V and temperature resistant at 90°C or above.
temperature resistant at 75°C which is requested and recommended from UL. Do not reduce the wire gauge
when using higher temperature wire.
R/L11, R/L12, S/L21, S/L22, T/L31, T/L32 Terminal
Max. Wire Max. Wire
Gauge (±10%) Gauge (±10%)
70 mm2*4
VFD1850C43A 70 mm2*4 [2/0AWG*4] 70 mm2*2 [2/0AWG*2]
[2/0AWG*4]
95 mm2*4
120mm2*4 [3/0AWG*4]
[250MCM*4] 50 mm2*4 M8
VFD1850C43E 50 mm2*4 [1/0AWG*4] M8 50 mm2*2 [1/0AWG*2]
[1/0AWG*4]
180kg-cm 180kg-cm
70 mm2*4
VFD2200C43E 70 mm2*4 [2/0AWG*4] [156.2 lb-in.] 70 mm2*2 [2/0AWG*2] [156.2 lb-in.]
[2/0AWG*4]
[17.65Nm] [17.65Nm]
VFD2500C63B-00
VFD3150C63B-00 150mm2*4 50 mm2*4
50 mm2*4 [1/0 AWG*4] 50 mm2*2 [1/0 AWG*2]
VFD2500C63B-21 [300MCM*4] [1/0 AWG*4]
VFD3150C63B-21

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, +1/DC+, -/DC- Terminal
Max. Wire Max. Wire
Gauge (±10%) Gauge (±10%)
240 mm2*2
VFD1850C43A 240 mm2*2 [400MCM*2] 240 mm2*1 [400MCM*1]
[400MCM*2]
240 mm2*2
VFD2200C43A 240 mm2*2 [500MCM*2] 240 mm2*1[500MCM*1]
[500MCM*2]
150 mm2*2
VFD1850C43E 150 mm2*2 [300MCM*2] 150 mm2*1 [300MCM*2]
[300MCM*2]
M12 240 mm2*2 M8
240mm2*2 408kg-cm [400MCM*2] 180kg-cm
[500MCM*2] [354.1 lb-in.] 120 mm2*2 [156.2 lb-in.]
VFD2500C63B-00 120 mm2*2 [250MCM*2] 120 mm2*1 [250MCM*1]
[39.98 Nm] [250MCM*2] [17.65Nm]
150 mm2*2
[350MCM*2]
120 mm2*2
[250MCM*2]
150 mm2*2
[350MCM*2]
5-16
Frame H
R/L11 R/L12 S/L21 S/L22 T/L31 T/L32 +1/DC+ -/DC- U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
environment, please select copper wire with voltage rating 600V and temperature resistant at 75°C or 90°C.
 If you install at Ta 50°C(for 230V / 460V model names with last digit A; for 690V model names end with
above environment, please select copper wire with voltage rating 600V and temperature resistant at 90°C or
above.
 For VFD4500C43A, VFD4500C43E-1, if you install at Ta 40°C above environment, please select copper wire
with voltage rating 600V and temperature resistant at 90°C or above.
temperature resistant at 75°C which is requested and recommended from UL. Do not reduce the wire gauge
when using higher temperature wire.
R/L11, R/L12, S/L21, S/L22, T/L31, T/L32, U/T1, Terminal
V/T2, W/T3, +1/DC+, -/DC-
Model Name
Max. Wire Max. Wire
Gauge Gauge
(±10%) (±10%)
120 mm2*4
[4/0AWG*4]
VFD3150C43A 150 mm2*4
150 mm2*4 [300MCM*4] 150 mm2*2 [300MCM*2]
VFD3550C43A [300MCM*4]
185 mm2*4
VFD4500C43A 185 mm2*4 [350MCM*4] 185 mm2*2 [350MCM*2]
[350MCM*4]
120 mm2*4
VFD2800C43E-1 120 mm2*4 [4/0AGW*4] 120 mm2*2 [4/0AGW*2]
[4/0AGW*4]
VFD3150C43E-1 150 mm2*4
150 mm2*4 [300MCM*4] 150 mm2*2 [300MCM*2]
VFD3550C43E-1 [300MCM*4]
185 mm2*4
VFD4500C43E-1 185 mm2*4 [350MCM*4] 185 mm2*2 [350MCM*2]
[350MCM*4]
95 mm2*4
VFD2800C43E 95 mm2*4 [3/0AWG*4] 95 mm2*2 [3/0AWG*2]
[3/0AWG*4]
M8 120 mm2*4 M8
VFD3150C43E 120 mm2*4 [4/0AGW*4] 120 mm2*2 [4/0AGW*2]
185mm2*4 180kg-cm [4/0AGW*4] 180kg-cm
[350MCM*4] [156.2 lb-in.] 120 mm2*4 [156.2 lb-in.]
VFD3550C43E 120 mm2*4 [250MCM*4] [17.65Nm] [250MCM*4] 120 mm2*2 [250MCM*2] [17.65Nm]
185 mm2*4
[350MCM*4]
VFD4000C63B-00 95 mm2*4
95 mm2*4 [3/0AWG*4] 95 mm2*2 [3/0AWG*2]
VFD4500C63B-00 [3/0AWG*4]
120 mm2*4
[250MCM*4]
150 mm2*4
[300MCM*4]
VFD4000C63B-21 95 mm2*4
95 mm2*4 [3/0AWG*4] 95 mm2*2 [3/0AWG*2]
VFD4500C63B-21 [3/0AWG*4]
120 mm2*4
[250MCM*4]
150 mm2*4
[300MCM*4]
5-17
5-18
Chapter 6 Control TerminalsC2000
Chapter 6 Control Terminals
6-1 Remove the Cover for Wiring
6-2 Specifications of Control Terminal
6-3 Remove the Terminal Block
6-1
Analog input terminals (AVI, ACI, AUI, ACM)

 Analog input signals are easily affected by external noise. Use shielded wiring and
keep it as short as possible (<20m) with proper grounding. If the noise is inductive,
connecting the shield to terminal ACM can bring improvement.
 When using analog input signal in the circuit, twisted pair is suggested to use for
dealing with weak signal.
 If the analog input signals are affected by noise from the AC motor drive, please
connect a capacitor and ferrite core as indicated in the following diagram.
Wind each wires 3 times or more around the core
AVI/ACI/AUI
C
ACM
ferrite core
Figure 6-1
Digital inputs (FWD, REV, MI1–MI8, COM)
 The “COM” terminal is the common side of the photo-coupler. Any of wiring method,
the “common point” of all photo-coupler must be the “COM”.
6-2
 When the photo-coupler is using internal power supply, the switch connection for Sink
and Source as below:
MI-DCM: Sink mode
MI-+24V: Source mode
 When the photo-coupler is using external power supply, please remove the short circuit
cable between the +24V and COM terminals. The connection mode is Sink mode or
Source mode according to the below:
The “+” of 24V connecting to “COM: Sink mode
The “-“ of 24V connecting to COM: Source mode
Transistor outputs (MO1, MO2, MCM)
 Make sure to connect the digital outputs to the right polarity.

 When connecting a relay to the digital outputs connect a surge absorber across the coil
and check the polarity.
6-3
6-1 Remove the Cover for Wiring

Please remove the top cover before wiring the multi-function input and output terminals.
NOTE The drive appearances shown in the figures are for reference only, a real drive may look different.
Frame A & B
Applicable models: VFD007C23A; VFD007C43A/E; VFD015C23A; VFD015C43A/E; VFD022C23A;
VFD022C43A/E; VFD037C23A; VFD037C43A/E; VFD040C43A/E; VFD055C43A/E; VFD015C53A-21;
VFD022C53A-21; VFD037C53A-21; VFD055C23A; VFD075C23A; VFD075C43A/E; VFD110C23A;
VFD110C43A/E; VFD150C43A/E; VFD055C53A-21; VFD075C53A-21; VFD110C53A-21; VFD150C53A-21
Screw torque: 12–15 kg-cm / [10.4–13 lb-in.] / [1.2–1.5 Nm]
Loosen the screws and press the tabs on both sides to remove the cover.
Figure 6-6
Frame C
Applicable models: VFD150C23A; VFD185C23A; VFD185C43A/E; VFD220C23A; VFD220C43A/E;
VFD300C43A/E; VFD185C63B-21; VFD220C63B-21; VFD300C63B-21; VFD370C63B-21
Figure 6-7
6-4
Frame D0 & D
Applicable models: VFD370C43S; VFD450C43S; VFD370C43U; VFD450C43U; VFD300C23A; VFD370C23A;
VFD550C43A; VFD750C43A; VFD300C23E; VFD370C23E; VFD550C43E; VFD750C43E; VFD450C63B-00;
To remove the cover, lift it slightly and pull outward.
Figure 6-8
Frame E
Applicable models: VFD450C23A; VFD550C23A; VFD750C23A; VFD900C43A; VFD1100C43A;
VFD450C23E; VFD550C23E; VFD750C23E; VFD900C43E; VFD1100C43E; VFD750C63B-00;
VFD1100C63B-21; VFD1320C63B-21
Figure 6-9
Frame F
Applicable models: VFD900C23A; VFD1320C43A; VFD1600C43A; VFD900C23E; VFD1320C43E;
VFD1600C43E; VFD1600C63B-00; VFD2000C63B-00; VFD1600C63B-21; VFD2000C63B-21
Figure 6-10
6-5
Frame G
Applicable models: VFD1850C43A; VFD2200C43A; VFD1850C43E; VFD2200C43E; VFD2500C63B-00;
Figure 6-11
Frame H
Applicable models: VFD2800C43A; VFD3150C43A; VFD3550C43A; VFD4500C43A; VFD2800C43E-1;
VFD3150C43E-1; VFD3550C43E-1; VFD4500C43E-1; VFD2800C43E; VFD3150C43E; VFD3550C43E;
VFD4500C43E; VFD4000C63B-00; VFD4500C63B-00; VFD5600C63B-00; VFD6300C63B-00
Screw torque: 14–16 kg-cm / [12.15–13.89 lb-in.] / [1.4–1.6 Nm]
Figure 6-12
690V Frame H3
Applicable models: VFD4000C63B-21; VFD4500C63B-21; VFD5600C63B-21; VFD6300C63B-21
Screw torque: 14–16 kg-cm [12.15–13.89 lb-in.] [1.37–1.57 Nm]
Figure 6-13
6-6
6-2 Specifications of Control Terminal
0-10V
0 -10 V 0- 10 V 0 -20mA O pen
RC2 RB2 R A2 RC1 RB 1 RA1
AFM 1
AFM 2 AVI A CI 485
A
-10 -10V
0 -20 m A 0-2 0m A 0-10V 120
AF M1 +1 0V AVI ACI MO1 MO2 STO1 STO 2 + 24V +24 V C OM F WD M I1 MI3 MI5 MI 7 SGN D
C AF M2 -10V AU I ACM MCM DF M SCM1SCM2 D CM DC M RE V MI2 M I4 M I6 MI 8 SG+ SG-
Figure 6-14. Removable Terminal Block
Stripping Tightening
Function Maximum Minimum
Area Conductor length torque
name Wire Gauge Wire Gauge
(mm) (±10)
Conductor cross
5 kg-cm
RELAY section solid wire
Ⓐ 4–5 [4.3 lb-in.]
Terminals Conductor cross [0.49 Nm]
section stranded wire
Conductor cross
8 kg-cm
Control section solid wire 1.5 mm² 0.2 mm²
Ⓑ [6.9 lb-in.]
Terminals Conductor cross [16 AWG] [26 AWG] [0.78 Nm]
6–7
Conductor cross
2 kg-cm
Control section solid wire
Ⓒ [1.7 lb-in.]
Terminals Conductor cross [0.20 Nm]
Wiring precautions:
 In the figure above, the factory setting for STO1, STO2, +24V and SCM1, SCM2, DCM are short
circuit. The +24V from section Ⓒ of above figure is for STO only, and cannot be used for other
purposes. The factory setting for +24V-COM is short circuit and SINK mode (NPN); please refer
to Chapter 4 Wiring for more detail.
 Tighten the wiring with slotted screwdriver:
Ⓐ Ⓑ is 3.5 mm (wide) x 0.6 mm (thick); Ⓒ is 2.5 mm (wide) x 0.4 mm (thick)
 When wiring bare wires, make sure they are perfectly arranged to go through the wiring holes.
Terminals Terminal Function Factory Setting (NPN mode)

Digital control signal common
+24V +24V  5% 200 mA
(Source)
COM Digital control signal common (Sink) Common for multi-function input terminals
FWD-DCM:
FWD Forward-Stop command ON forward running
OFF deceleration to stop
REV-DCM:
REV Reverse-Stop command ON reverse running
OFF deceleration to stop
6-7

Refer to parameters 02-01–02-08 to program the
multi-function inputs MI1–MI8.
Source mode
MI1
ON: the activation current is 3.3 mA ≥ 11 VDC
– Multi-function input 1–8
OFF: cut-off voltage ≤ 5 VDC
MI8
Sink Mode
ON: the activation current is 3.3 mA ≤ 13 VDC
OFF: cut-off voltage ≥ 19 VDC
Regard the pulse voltage as the output monitor
Digital frequency meter
signal; Duty-cycle: 50 %
DFM DFM
Min. load impedance: 1 kΩ / 100 pf
DCM Figure 6-15
Max. current: 30 mA
DCM Digital frequency signal common Max. voltage: 30 VDC
The AC motor drive releases various monitor
signals, such as drive in operation, frequency
Multi-function output 1
MO1 attained and overload indication, via transistor
(photocoupler)
(open collector).
MO 1
Multi-function output 2
MO2 MO2
(photocoupler)
MCM Figure 6-16
MCM Multi-function output common Max 48 VDC 50 mA
RA1 Multi-function relay output 1 (N.O.) a Resistive Load

3A (N.O.) / 3A (N.C.) 250 VAC
RB1 Multi-function relay output 1 (N.C.) b 5A (N.O.) / 3A (N.C.) 30 VDC
RC1 Multi-function relay common Inductive Load (COS 0.4)

1.2A (N.O.) / 1.2A (N.C.) 250 VAC
RA2 Multi-function relay output 2 (N.O.) a 2.0A (N.O.) / 1.2A (N.C.) 30 VDC
RB2 Multi-function relay output 2 (N.C.) b It is used to output each monitor signal, such as
drive is in operation, frequency attained or
RC2 Multi-function relay common overload indication.
+10V Potentiometer power supply Analog frequency setting: +10VDC 20 mA
-10V Potentiometer power supply Analog frequency setting: -10VDC 20 mA
Analog voltage input

+10V AVI circuit Impedance: 20 kΩ
Range: 0–20 mA / 4–20 mA / 0–10 V = 0–Max.
AVI AVI
Output Frequency (Pr.01-00)
ACM
AVI switch, factory setting is 0–10 V
internal circuit Figure 6-17
6-8

Analog current input
ACI ACI circuit Impedance: 250Ω
Range: 0–20mA / 4–20mA / 0–10V = 0–Max.
ACI
Output Frequency (Pr. 01-00)
ACI Switch, factory setting is 4–20mA
ACM internal circuit Figure 6-18
Auxiliary analog voltage input
+10V
Impedance: 20kΩ
AUI ( -10V~+ 10V)
AUI Range: -10–+10VDC=0–Max. Output Frequency
A CM (Pr. 01-00)
-1 0V inter nal c irc ui t Figure 6-19

0–10V Max. output current 2mA, Max. load 5kΩ
-10–10V maximum output current 2mA, maximum
load 5kΩ
Output current: 2mA max
AFM1
Multi-function analog voltage output Resolution: 0–10V corresponds to Max. operation
frequency
Range: 0–10V  -10–+10V
AFM1 Switch, factory setting is 0–10V
0–10V Max. output current 2mA, Max. load 5kΩ
0–20mA Max. load 500Ω
Figure 6-20 Output current: 20mA max
AFM2 Resolution: 0–10V corresponds to Max. operation
frequency
Range: 0–10V  4–20mA
AFM2 Switch, factory setting is 0–10V
ACM Analog signal common Common for analog terminals
STO1 Default setting is shorted

SCM1 Power removal safety function for EN954-1 and IEC/EN61508
STO2 When STO1–SCM1; STO2–SCM2 is activated, the activation current is 3.3mA ≥ 11VDC
SCM2 Note: Please refer to CH 17 Safe Torque off Function.
SG+ MODBUS RS-485

SG- Note: Please refer to CH12 DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETER SETTINGS group 09
SGND Communication Parameters for more information.
PIN 1, 2, 7, 8: Reserved PIN 3, 6: SGND

RJ-45
PIN 4: SG- PIN 5: SG+
Table 6-1
NOTE: Wire size of analog control signals: 0.75 mm2 [18 AWG] with shielded wire
6-9
6-3 Remove the Terminal Block

1. Loosen the screws by screwdriver. (As shown in figure below).
Figure 6-21
2. Remove the control board by pulling it out for a distance 6–8 cm (as 1 in the figure) then lift the
control board upward (as 2 in the figure).
Figure 6-22
6-10
Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories
7-1 All Brake Resistors and Brake Units Used in AC Motor Drives
7-2 Non-fuse Circuit Breaker
7-3 Fuse Specification Chart
7-4 AC / DC Reactor
7-5 Zero Phase Reactors
7-6 EMC Filter
7-7 Panel Mounting (MKC-KPPK)
7-8 Conduit Box Kit
7-9 Fan Kit
7-10 Flange Mounting Kit
7-11 Power Terminal Kit
7-12 USB / RS-485 Communication Interface IFD6530
7-1
The optional accessories listed in this chapter are available upon request. Installing additional
accessories to your drive would substantially improve the drive’s performance. Please select an applicable
accessory according to your need or contact the local distributor for suggestion.
7-1 All Brake Resistors and Brake Units Used in AC Motor Drives
230V
Applicable
*1 125% Braking Torque 10% ED *2 Max. Braking Torque
Motor
Braking Brake Resistor value Total Min. Max. Total Peak
*3Braking Resistor for each
HP kW Torque Unit spec. for each Braking Resistor Braking Power
Brake Unit
[kg-m] *4VFDB AC motor Drive Current [A] Value [Ω] Current [A] [kW]
1 0.7 0.5 - BR080W200*1 80W 200Ω 1.9 63.3 6 2.3
2 1.5 1.0 - BR200W091*1 200W 91Ω 4.2 47.5 8 3.0
3 2.2 1.5 - BR300W070*1 300W 70Ω 5.4 38.0 10 3.8
5 3.7 2.5 - BR400W040*1 400W 40Ω 9.5 19.0 20 7.6
7.5 5.5 3.7 - BR1K0W020*1 1000W 20Ω 19 14.6 26 9.9
10 7.5 5.1 - BR1K0W020*1 1000W 20Ω 19 14.6 26 9.9
15 11 7.5 - BR1K5W013*1 1500W 13Ω 29 12.6 29 10.6
20 15 10.2 - BR1K0W4P3*2 2 series 2000W 8.6Ω 44 8.3 46 17.5
25 18 12.2 - BR1K0W4P3*2 2 series 2000W 8.6Ω 44 8.3 46 17.5
30 22 14.9 - BR1K5W3P3*2 2 series 3000W 6.6Ω 58 5.8 66 25.1
40 30 20.3 2015*2 BR1K0W5P1*2 2 series 4000W 5.1Ω 75 4.8 80 30.4
50 37 25.1 2022*2 BR1K2W3P9*2 2 series 4800W 3.9Ω 97 3.2 120 45.6
60 45 30.5 2022*2 BR1K5W3P3*2 2 series 6000W 3.3Ω 118 3.2 120 45.6
75 55 37.2 2022*3 BR1K2W3P9*2 2 series 7200W 2.6Ω 145 2.1 180 68.4
100 75 50.8 2022*4 BR1K2W3P9*2 2 series 9600W 2Ω 190 1.6 240 91.2
125 90 60.9 2022*4 BR1K5W3P3*2 2 series 12000W 1.65Ω 230 1.6 240 91.2
Table 7-1
460V
Applicable
Motor
Brake Unit
1 0.7 0.5 - BR080W750*1 80W 750Ω 1 190.0 4 3.0
2 1.5 1.0 - BR200W360*1 200W 360Ω 2.1 126.7 6 4.6
3 2.2 1.5 - BR300W250*1 300W 250Ω 3 108.6 7 5.3
5 3.7 2.5 - BR400W150*1 400W 150Ω 5.1 84.4 9 6.8
5.5 4.0 2.7
- BR1K0W075*1 1000W 75Ω 10.2 54.3 14 10.6
7.5 5.5 3.7
10 7.5 5.1 - BR1K0W075*1 1000W 75Ω 10.2 47.5 16 12.2
15 11 7.5 - BR1K5W043*1 1500W 43Ω 17.6 42.2 18 13.7
20 15 10.2 - BR1K0W016*2 2 series 2000W 32Ω 24 26.2 29 22.0
25 18 12.2 - BR1K0W016*2 2 series 2000W 32Ω 24 23.0 33 25.1
30 22 14.9 - BR1K5W013*2 2 series 3000W 26Ω 29 23.0 33 25.1
2 parallel,
40 30 20.3 - BR1K0W016*4 4000W 16Ω 47.5 14.1 54 41.0
2 series
2 parallel,
50 37 25.1 4045*1 BR1K2W015*4 4800W 15Ω 50 12.7 60 45.6
2 series
2 parallel,
60 45 30.5 4045*1 BR1K5W013*4 6000W 13Ω 59 12.7 60 45.6
2 series
75 55 37.2 4030*2 BR1K0W5P1*4 4 series 8000W 10.2Ω 76 9.5 80 60.8
2 parallel,
100 75 50.8 4045*2 BR1K2W015*4 9600W 7.5Ω 100 6.3 120 91.2
2 series
2 parallel,
125 90 60.9 4045*2 BR1K5W013*4 12000W 6.5Ω 117 6.3 120 91.2
2 series
5 parallel,
150 110 74.5 4110*1 BR1K2W015*10 12000W 6Ω 126 6.0 126 95.8
2 series
6 parallel,
175 132 89.4 4160*1 BR1K5W012*12 18000W 4Ω 190 4.0 190 144.4
2 series
6 parallel,
215 160 108.3 4160*1 BR1K5W012*12 18000W 4Ω 190 4.0 190 144.4
2 series
7 parallel,
250 185 125.3 4185*1 BR1K5W012*14 21000W 3.4Ω 225 3.4 225 172.1
2 series
7-2
Applicable
Motor
Brake Unit
5 parallel,
300 220 148.9 4110*2 BR1K2W015*10 24000W 3Ω 252 3.0 252 190.5
2 series
6 parallel,
375 280 189.6 4160*2 BR1K5W012*12 36000W 2Ω 380 2.0 380 288.8
2 series
6 parallel,
425 315 213.3 4160*2 BR1K5W012*12 36000W 2Ω 380 2.0 380 288.8
2 series
7 parallel,
475 355 240.3 4185*2 BR1K5W012*14 42000W 1.7Ω 450 1.7 450 344.2
2 series
6 parallel,
600 450 304.7 4185*3 BR1K5W012*12 54000W 1.3Ω 600 1.1 675 513.0
2 series
Table 7-2
575V
Applicable
＊1 125% Braking Torque / 10%ED ＊2 Max. Braking Torque
Motor (kW)
Braking ＊3 Braking Resistor value spec. Total Min. Max. Total Peak
Brake Unit
LD ND HD Torque Resistor for each for each AC motor Braking Resistor Braking Power
VFDB
[kg-m] Brake Unit drive Current [A] Value [Ω] Current [A] [kW]
1.5 0.75 0.75 0.5 - BR080W750*1 80W 750Ω 1.2 280.0 4 4.5
2.2 1.5 1.5 1 - BR200W360*1 200W 360Ω 2.6 186.7 6 6.7
3.7 2.2 2.2 1.5 - BR300W400*1 300W 400Ω 2.3 160.0 7 7.8
5.5 3.7 3.7 2.5 - BR500W100*1 500W 100Ω 9.2 93.3 12 13.4
7.5 5.5 3.7 3.7 - BR750W140*1 750W 140Ω 6.6 80.0 14 15.7
11 7.5 7.5 5.1 - BR1K0W075*1 1000W 75Ω 12.3 70.0 16 17.9
15 11 7.5 7.4 - BR1K1W091*1 1100W 91Ω 10.1 62.2 18 20.2

Table 7-3
690V
Applicable
Motor (kW)
Max.
Total Min.
Braking Brake Resistor value Total Peak
＊3 Braking Resistor series for Braking Resistor
LD ND HD Torque Unit spec. for each Braking Power
each Brake Unit Current Value
[kg-m] VFDB AC motor drive Current [kW]
[A] [Ω]
[A]
18.5 15 11 10.2 - BR1K0W039*2 2 series 2000W 78Ω 14.4 58.9 19 21.3
22 18.5 15 12.5 - BR1K2W033*2 2 series 2400W 66Ω 17.0 58.9 19 21.3
30 22 18.5 14.9 - BR1K5W027*2 2 series 3000W 54Ω 20.7 43.1 26 29.1
37 30 22 20.3 - BR1K2W015*3 3 series 3600W 45Ω 24.9 43.1 26 29.1
2 series,
45 37 30 25 6055*1 BR1K2W033*4 4800W 33Ω 33.9 24.3 46 51.5
2 parallel
2 series,
55 45 37 30.5 6055*1 BR1K5W027*4 6000W 27Ω 41.5 24.3 46 51.5
2 parallel
2 series,
75 55 45 37.2 6110*1 BR1K2W033*6 7200W 22Ω 50.9 12.2 92 103.0
3 parallel
2 series,
90 75 55 50.8 6110*1 BR1K5W027*6 9000W 18Ω 62.2 12.2 92 103.0
3 parallel
2 series,
110 90 75 60.9 6110*1 BR1K5W027*8 12000W 13.5Ω 83.0 12.2 92 103.0
4 parallel
3 series,
132 110 90 74.5 6160*1 BR1K2W015*12 14400W 11.3Ω 99.6 8.2 136 152.3
4 parallel
2 series,
160 132 110 89.4 6160*1 BR1K5W027*10 15000W 10.8Ω 103.7 8.2 136 152.3
5 parallel
2 series,
200 160 132 108.3 6200*1 BR1K5W027*12 18000W 9.0Ω 124.4 6.9 162 181.4
6 parallel
2 series,
250 200 160 135.4 6110*2 BR1K5W027*8 24000W 6.8Ω 165.9 6.1 184 206.1
4 parallel
2 series,
315 250 200 169.3 6160*2 BR1K5W027*10 30000W 5.4Ω 207.4 4.1 272 304.6
5 parallel
2 series,
400 315 250 213.3 6200*2 BR1K5W027*12 36000W 4.5Ω 248.9 3.5 324 362.9
6 parallel
7-3
Applicable
Motor (kW)
Max.
Total Min.
Braking Brake Resistor value Total Peak
＊3 Braking Resistor series for Braking Resistor
LD ND HD Torque Unit spec. for each Braking Power
each Brake Unit Current Value
[kg-m] VFDB AC motor drive Current [kW]
[A] [Ω]
[A]
2 series,
450 355 315 240.3 6200*2 BR1K5W027*14 42000W 3.9Ω 290.4 3.5 324 362.9
7 parallel
2 series,
560 450 355 304.7 6200*3 BR1K5W027*12 54000W 3.0Ω 373.3 2.3 486 544.3
6 parallel
2 series,
630 630 630 426.5 6200*4 BR1K5W027*12 72000W 2.3Ω 497.8 1.7 648 725.8
6 parallel
Table 7-4
*1. Calculation for 125% brake toque: (kW) * 125% * 0.8; where 0.8 is motor efficiency.
Because of the limited resistor power, the longest operation time for 10% ED is 10 seconds (on: 10 seconds / off: 90 seconds).
*2. Refer to Chapter 7 “Brake Module and Brake Resistors” in application manual for “Operation Duration & ED” vs. “Braking
Current”.
*3. For heat dissipation, a resistor of 400W or lower should be fixed to the frame and maintain the surface temperature below
250°C; a resistor of 1000W and above should maintain the surface temperature below 350°C.
*4. Please refer to VFDB series Braking Module Instruction for more detail on braking resistor.
NOTE
1. Specification and appearance of brake resistors
1-1 Wirewound resistor: for 1000W and above. Refer to the following appearance of wirewound resistor
(Figure7-1) and its model and specification comparison table (Table 7-5) for details.
H
F
G
L
E
A
B
C
K
Figure 7-1
Table 7-5
7-4
1-2 Aluminum housed resistor: for below 1000W. Refer to the following appearance of aluminum-housed
resistor (Figure 7-2) and its model and specification comparison table (Table 7-6) for details.
L1
L2
W
A
L 1 6A WG, 1. 31 8 M M2
L3
H
1 2.0 Figure 7-2
Table 7-6
2. Select the resistance value, power and brake usage (ED %) according to Delta rules.
Figure 7-3
For safety, install a thermal overload relay (O.L) between the brake unit and the brake resistor in
conjunction with the magnetic contactor (MC) before the drive for additional protection. The thermal
overload relay protects the brake resistor from damage due to frequent or continuous braking. Under such
circumstances, turn off the power to prevent damage to the brake resistor, brake unit and drive.
Figure 7-4
7-5
3. Any damage to the drive or other equipment caused by using brake resistors and brake modules that are
not provided by Delta voids the warranty.
4. Consider environmental safety factors when installing the brake resistors. If you use the minimum
resistance value, consult local dealers for the power calculation.
5. When using more than two brake units, the equivalent resistor value of the parallel brake unit cannot be
less than the value in the column “Minimum Resistor Value (Ω)”. Read the wiring information in the brake
unit user manual thoroughly prior to operation.
6. This chart is for normal usage; if the AC motor drive is applied for frequent braking, it is suggested to
enlarge 2~3 times of the Watts.
7. Thermal Overload Relay (TOR), for 230V / 460V / 690V models: Choosing a thermal overload relay is
based on whether its overload capacity is appropriate for the C2000. The standard braking capacity of the
C2000 is 10% ED (Tripping time=10 s). As shown in the figure below, the thermal overload relay
continuously operates for 10 seconds and it can withstand a 260% overload (Host starting). For example, a
460V, 110 kW C2000 has a braking current of 126 A (refer to the tables in this section), so it can use the
thermal overload relay with a rated current of 50 A. The property of each thermal relay may vary among
different manufacturer, please carefully read specification.
60
40
30
20
10
Second
Tripping time
8
6
4
3
2
1
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.3
0.8 1 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15
Multiple of current setting xln (A)
Figure 7-5
7-6
7-2 Non-fuse Circuit Breaker

Comply with UL standard: Per UL 508, paragraph 45.8.4, part a.
The rated current of the breaker shall be 1.6~2.6 times (575V / 690V models: 2~4 times) of the
maximum rated input current of AC motor drive.
3-phase 230V 3-phase 460V
Recommended non-fuse Recommended non-fuse
Model Model
breaker [A] breaker [A]
VFD007C23A 15 VFD007C43A/E 5
VFD015C23A 20 VFD015C43A/E 10
VFD022C23A 30 VFD022C43A/E 15
VFD037C23A 40 VFD040C43A/E 20
VFD055C23A 50 VFD037C43A/E 20
VFD075C23A 60 VFD055C43A/E 30
VFD110C23A 100 VFD075C43A/E 40
VFD150C23A 125 VFD110C43A/E 50
VFD185C23A 150 VFD150C43A/E 60
VFD220C23A 200 VFD185C43A/E 75
VFD300C23A/E 225 VFD220C43A/E 100
VFD370C23A/E 250 VFD300C43A/E 125
VFD450C23A/E 300 VFD370C43S/U 150
VFD550C23A/E 400 VFD450C43S/U 175
VFD750C23A/E 450 VFD550C43A/E 250
VFD900C23A/E 600 VFD750C43A/E 300
Table 7-7 VFD900C43A/E 300
VFD1100C43A/E 400
VFD1320C43A/E 500
VFD1600C43A/E 600
VFD1850C43A/E 600
VFD2200C43A/E 800
VFD2800C43A/E 1000
VFD3150C43A/E 1200
VFD3550C43A/E 1350
VFD4500C43A/E 1467
Table 7-8
3-phase 575V 3-phase 690V
Recommended Model Recommended non-fuse
Model
non-fuse breaker [A] breaker [A]
VFD015C53A-21 5 VFD185C63B-21 50
VFD022C53A-21 10 VFD220C63B-21 60
VFD037C53A-21 15 VFD300C63B-21 60
VFD055C53A-21 20 VFD370C63B-21 80
VFD075C53A-21 25 VFD450C63B-00 / 63B-21 100
VFD110C53A-21 40 VFD550C63B-00 / 63B-21 125
VFD150C53A-21 50 VFD750C63B-00 / 63B-21 150
Table 7-9 VFD900C63B-00 / 63B-21 200
VFD1100C63B-00 / 63B-21 225
VFD1320C63B-00 / 63B-21 300
VFD1600C63B-00 / 63B-21 350
VFD2000C63B-00 / 63B-21 400
VFD2500C63B-00 / 63B-21 500
VFD3150C63B-00 / 63B-21 650
VFD4000C63B-00 / 63B-21 800
VFD4500C63B-00 / 63B-21 850
VFD5600C63B-00 / 63B-21 1200
VFD6300C63B-00 / 63B-21 1400
Table 7-10
7-7
7-3 Fuse Specification Chart

 Fuse specifications lower than the table below are allowed.
 For installation in the United States, branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance with
the National Electrical Code (NEC) and any applicable local codes. Use UL classified fuses to
fulfill this requirement.
 For installation in Canada, branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance with
Canadian Electrical Code and any applicable provincial codes. Use UL classified fuses to fulfill
this requirement.
Input Current I [A] Line Fuse
230V Model
Heavy Duty Normal Duty I [A] Bussmann P/N
VFD007C23A 6.1 6.4 15 JJN-15 / JJS-15
VFD015C23A 11 12 25 JJN-25 / JJS-25
VFD022C23A 15 16 35 JJN-35 / JJS-35
VFD037C23A 18.5 20 45 JJN-45 / JJS-45
VFD055C23A 26 28 60 JJN-60 / JJS-60
VFD075C23A 34 36 80 JJN-80 / JJS-80
VFD110C23A 50 52 110 JJN-110 / JJS-110
VFD150C23A 68 72 150 JJN-150 / JJS-150
VFD185C23A 78 83 175 JJN-175 / JJS-175
VFD220C23A 95 99 225 JJN-225 / JJS-225
VFD300C23A/E 118 124 250 JJN-250 / JJS-250
VFD370C23A/E 136 143 300 JJN-300 / JJS-300
VFD450C23A/E 162 171 400 JJN-400 / JJS-400
VFD550C23A/E 196 206 450 JJN-450 / JJS-450
VFD750C23A/E 233 245 500 JJN-500 / JJS-500
VFD900C23A/E 315 331 700 JJN-700 / JJS-700
Table 7-11
460VModel
Heavy Duty Normal Duty I [A] Bussmann P/N
VFD007C43A/E 4.1 4.3 10 JJS-10
VFD015C43A/E 5.6 5.9 15 JJS-15
VFD022C43A/E 8.3 8.7 20 JJS-20
VFD037C43A/E 13 14 30 JJS-30
VFD040C43A/E 14.5 15.5 35 JJS-35
VFD055C43A/E 16 17 40 JJS-40
VFD075C43A/E 19 20 45 JJS-45
VFD110C43A/E 25 26 60 JJS-60
VFD150C43A/E 33 35 80 JJS-80
VFD185C43A/E 38 40 90 JJS-90
VFD220C43A/E 45 47 110 JJS-110
VFD300C43A/E 60 63 150 JJS-150
VFD370C43/S/U 70 74 175 JJS-175
VFD450C43/S/U 96 101 225 JJS-225
VFD550C43A/E 108 114 250 JJS-250
VFD750C43A/E 149 157 350 JJS-350
VFD900C43A/E 159 167 350 JJN-350
VFD1100C43A/E 197 207 450 JJS-450
VFD1320C43A/E 228 240 500 JJS-500
VFD1600C43A/E 285 300 700 KTU-700
VFD1850C43A/E 361 380 800 KTU-800
VFD2200C43A/E 380 400 800 KTU-800
VFD2800C43A/E 469 494 1000 KTU-1000
VFD3150C43A/E 527 555 1200 KTU-1200
VFD3550C43A/E 594 625 1400 KTU-1400
VFD4500C43A/E 815 866 1600 170M6019
Table 7-12
7-8

575V Model Normal Heavy
Light Duty I [A] Model No. Supplier
Duty Duty
VFD015C53A-21 3.8 3.1 2.6 7 KLKD007.T Littelfuse
VFD055C53A-21 14.9 12.3 10.7 25 25ET Bussmann
VFD075C53A-21 16.9 15 12.5 32 32ET Bussmann
VFD110C53A-21 21.3 18 16.9 50 50FE Bussmann
VFD150C53A-21 26.3 22.8 19.7 63 63FE Bussmann
Table 7-13

690V Model Normal
Light Duty Heavy Duty I [A] Bussmann P/N
Duty
VFD185C63B-21 29 24 20 60 JJS-60
VFD220C63B-21 36 29 24 70 JJS-70
VFD300C63B-21 43 36 29 80 JJS-80
VFD370C63B-21 54 43 36 100 JJS-100
VFD450C63B-00 / 63B-21 54 45 36 100 JJS-100
VFD550C63B-00 / 63B-21 67 54 45 125 JJS-125
VFD750C63B-00 / 63B-21 84 66 53 175 JJS-175
VFD900C63B-00 / 63B-21 102 84 66 200 JJS-200
VFD1100C63B-00 / 63B-21 122 102 84 250 JJS-250
VFD1320C63B-00 / 63B-21 147 122 102 300 JJS-300
VFD1600C63B-00 / 63B-21 178 148 123 350 JJS-350
VFD2000C63B-00 / 63B-21 217 178 148 400 JJS-400
VFD2500C63B-00 / 63B-21 292 222 181 450 170M4063
VFD3150C63B-00 / 63B-21 353 292 222 500 170M6058
VFD4000C63B-00 / 63B-21 454 353 292 700 170M6061
VFD4500C63B-00 / 63B-21 469 388 313 800 170M6062
VFD5600C63B-00 / 63B-21 595 504 423 1250 170M6066
VFD6300C63B-00 / 63B-21 681 681 681 1400 170M6067
Table 7-14
7-9
7-4 AC / DC Reactor
AC Input Reactor
Installing an AC reactor on the input side of an AC motor drive can increase line impedance, improve
the power factor, reduce input current, and reduce interference generated from the motor drive. It also
reduces momentary voltage surges or abnormal current spikes. For example, when the main power
capacity is higher than 500 kVA, or when using a switching capacitor bank, momentary voltage and current
spikes may damage the AC motor drive’s internal circuit. An AC reactor on the input side of the AC motor
drive protects it by suppressing surges.
Installation
Install an AC input reactor in series with the main power to the three input phases R S T as shown
below:
Wiring of AC input reactor Figure 7-6
Following table shows the standard AC reactors specification of Delta C2000

200V~230V/ 50~60Hz
Rated Current Saturation current 3% 5%
Built-in Input AC reactor
Model HP impedance impedance
(Arms) (Arms) DC reactor Delta part #
(mH) (mH)
VFD007C23A 1 5 8.64 2.536 4.227 No DR005A0254
VFD015C23A 2 8 12.78 1.585 2.642 No DR008A0159
VFD022C23A 3 11 18 1.152 1.922 No DR011A0115
VFD037C23A 5 17 28.8 0.746 1.243 No DR017AP746
VFD055C23A 7.5 25 43.2 0.507 0.845 No DR025AP507
VFD075C23A 10 33 55.8 0.32 0.534 No DR033AP320
VFD110C23A 15 49 84.6 0.216 0.359 No DR049AP215
VFD150C23A 20 65 111.6 0.163 0.271 No DR065AP163
VFD185C23A 25 75 127.8 0.169 0.282 No DR075AP170
VFD220C23A 30 90 154.8 0.141 0.235 No DR090AP141
VFD300C23A 40 120 205.2 0.106 0.176 Yes DR146AP087
VFD370C23A 50 146 250.2 0.087 0.145 Yes DR146AP087
VFD450C23A 60 180 307.8 0.070 0.117 Yes DR180AP070
VFD550C23A 75 215 367.2 0.059 0.098 Yes DR215AP059
VFD750C23A 100 255 435.6 0.049 0.083 Yes DR276AP049
VFD900C23A 125 346 592.2 0.037 0.061 Yes DR349AP037
Table 7-15
7-10
380V~460V/ 50~60Hz
Rated Current Saturation current 3% 5%
Built-in Input AC reactor
(Arms) (Arms) DC reactor Delta part #
(mH) (mH)
VFD007C43A 1 3 5.22 8.102 13.502 No DR003A0810
VFD015C43A 2 4 6.84 6.077 10.127 No DR004A0607
VFD022C43A 3 6 10.26 4.050 6.752 No DR006A0405
VFD037C43A 5 9 14.58 2.700 4.501 No DR009A0270
VFD040C43A 5 10.5 17.1 2.315 3.858 No DR010A0231
VFD055C43A 7.5 12 19.8 2.025 3.375 No DR012A0202
VFD075C43A 10 18 30.6 1.174 1.957 No DR018A0117
VFD110C43A 15 24 41.4 0.881 1.468 No DR024AP881
VFD150C43A 20 32 54 0.66 1.101 No DR032AP660
VFD185C43A 25 38 64.8 0.639 1.066 No DR038AP639
VFD220C43A 30 45 77.4 0.541 0.900 No DR045AP541
VFD300C43A 40 60 102.6 0.405 0.675 Yes DR060AP405
VFD370C43S/U 50 73 124.2 0.334 0.555 Yes DR073AP334
VFD450C43S/U 60 91 154.8 0.267 0.445 Yes DR091AP267
VFD550C43A 75 110 189 0.221 0.368 Yes DR110AP221
VFD750C43A 100 150 257.4 0.162 0.270 Yes DR150AP162
VFD900C43A 125 180 307.8 0.135 0.225 Yes DR180AP135
VFD1100C43A 150 220 376.2 0.110 0.184 Yes DR220AP110
VFD1320C43A 175 260 444.6 0.098 0.162 Yes DR260AP098
VFD1600C43A 215 310 531 0.078 0.131 Yes DR310AP078
VFD1850C43A 250 370 633.6 0.066 0.109 Yes DR370AP066
VFD2200C43A 300 460 786.6 0.054 0.090 Yes DR460AP054
VFD2800C43A 375 550 941.4 0.044 0.074 Yes DR550AP044
VFD3150C43A 420 616 1053 0.039 0.066 Yes DR616AP039
VFD3550C43A 475 683 1168.2 0.036 0.060 Yes DR683AP036
VFD4500C43A 600 866 1468.8 0.028 0.047 Yes DR866AP028
Table 7-16
575V, 50/60 Hz, 3-phase

Rated current (Arms) 3% impedance (mH) 5% impedance (mH)
Saturation
kW HP Light Normal Heavy Current Light Normal Heavy Light Normal Heavy
Duty Duty Duty (Arms) Duty Duty Duty Duty Duty Duty
VFD015C53A-21 2 3 2.5 2.1 4.2 8.806 10.567 12.580 14.677 17.612 20.967
VFD022C531-21 3 4.3 3.6 3 5.9 6.144 7.338 8.806 10.239 12.230 14.677
VFD037C53A-21 5 6.7 5.5 4.6 9.1 3.943 4.803 5.743 6.572 8.005 9.572
VFD055C53A-21 7.5 9.9 8.2 6.9 13.7 2.668 3.222 3.829 4.447 5.369 6.381
VFD075C53A-21 10 12.1 10 8.3 16.5 2.183 2.642 3.183 3.639 4.403 5.305
VFD110C53A-21 15 18.7 15.5 13 25.7 1.413 1.704 2.032 2.355 2.841 3.387
VFD150C53A-21 20 24.2 20 16.8 33.3 1.092 1.321 1.572 1.819 2.201 2.621
Table 7-17
7-11
690V, 50/60 Hz, 3-phase

Rated current Saturation Current 3% Impedance 5% Impedance
(Arms) (Arms) (mH) (mH)
kW HP
Light Normal Heavy Light Normal Heavy Light Normal Heavy Light Normal Heavy
Duty Duty Duty Duty Duty Duty Duty Duty Duty Duty Duty Duty
VFD185C63B-21 25 24 20 14 28.8 30.0 25.2 1.585 1.902 2.717 2.642 3.170 4.529
VFD220C63B-21 30 30 24 20 36.0 36.0 36.0 1.268 1.585 1.902 2.113 2.642 3.170
VFD300C63B-21 40 36 30 24 43.2 45.0 43.2 1.057 1.268 1.585 1.761 2.113 2.642
VFD370C63B-21 50 45 36 30 54.0 54.0 54.0 0.845 1.057 1.268 1.409 1.761 2.113
VFD450C63B-00/21 60 54 45 36 64.8 67.5 64.8 0.704 0.845 1.057 1.174 1.409 1.761
VFD550C63B-00/21 75 67 54 45 80.4 81.0 81.0 0.568 0.704 0.845 0.946 1.174 1.409
VFD750C63B-00/21 100 86 67 54 103.2 100.5 97.2 0.442 0.568 0.704 0.737 0.946 1.174
VFD900C63B-00/21 125 104 86 67 124.8 129.0 120.6 0.366 0.442 0.568 0.610 0.737 0.946
VFD1100C63B-00/21 150 125 104 86 150.0 156.0 154.8 0.304 0.366 0.442 0.507 0.610 0.737
VFD1320C63B-00/21 175 150 125 104 180.0 187.5 187.2 0.254 0.304 0.366 0.423 0.507 0.610
VFD1600C63B-00/21 215 180 150 125 216.0 225.0 225.0 0.211 0.254 0.304 0.352 0.423 0.507
VFD2000C63B-00/21 270 220 180 150 264.0 270.0 270.0 0.173 0.211 0.254 0.288 0.352 0.423
VFD2500C63B-00/21 335 290 220 180 348.0 330.0 324.0 0.131 0.173 0.211 0.219 0.288 0.352
VFD3150C63B-00/21 425 350 290 220 420.0 435.0 396.0 0.109 0.131 0.173 0.181 0.219 0.288
VFD4000C63B-00/21 530 430 350 290 516.0 525.0 522.0 0.088 0.109 0.131 0.147 0.181 0.219
VFD4500C63B-00/21 600 465 385 310 558.0 577.5 558.0 0.082 0.099 0.123 0.136 0.165 0.205
VFD5600C63B-00/21 745 590 465 420 708.0 697.5 756.0 0.064 0.082 0.091 0.107 0.136 0.151
VFD6300C63B-00/21 850 675 675 675 810.0 1012.5 1215.0 0.056 0.056 0.056 0.094 0.094 0.094
Table 7-18
7-12
AC input reactor dimension and specifications:
Marking
PE bolt
Tightening torque: 10.2~12.3 kg-cm / [8.9~10.6 lb-in.] /
[1.0~1.2 Nm]
Tightening torque: 6.1~8.2 kg-cm / [5.3~7.1 lb-in.] / [0.6~0.8 Nm]
Screw length
must not
interfere with the
mounting holes
Unit: mm
Input AC reactor
Model A B C D1*D2 E G1 G2 PE D
Delta part #
VFD007C23A DR005A0254 96 100 60 6*9 42 60 40 M4
VFD015C23A DR008A0159 120 120 88 6*12 60 80.5 60 M4
VFD022C23A DR011A0115 120 120 88 6*12 60 80.5 60 M4
VFD037C23A DR017AP746 120 120 93 6*12 65 80.5 60 M4
VFD055C23A DR025AP507 150 150 112 6*12 88 107 75 M4
VFD075C23A DR033AP320 150 150 112 6*12 88 107 75 M4
Table 7-19
7-13
Unit: mm
Input AC reactor
Model A B C D1*D2 H G G1 Q M PE D
Delta part #
VFD110C23A DR049AP215 180 195 160 6*12 115 85 122 16 1.2~1.4 M4
VFD150C23A DR065AP163 180 205 160 6*12 115 85 122 35 2.5~3.0 M4
Table 7-20
7-14
Unit: mm
Input AC reactor
Model A A1 B B1 B2 C C1 D1*D2 E G1 H M*T PE
Delta part #
VFD185C23A DR075AP170 240 220 205 42 165 151 95 7*13 152 176 85 20*3 M8
VFD220C23A DR090AP141 240 225 210 44 170 151 95 7*13 152 176 85 20*3 M8
VFD300C23A
DR146AP087 240 225 240 44 200 163 100 7*13 152 176 97 20*3 M8
VFD370C23A
VFD450C23A DR180AP070 250 235 250 49 206 175 105 11*18 160 190 124 30*3 M8
VFD550C23A DR215AP059 250 235 275 51 226 180 110 11*18 160 190 124 30*5 M8
Table 7-21
7-15
Unit: mm
Input AC reactor
Delta part #
VFD750C23A DR276AP049 270 255 310 50 265 200 130 10*18 176 200 106 30*5 M8
VFD900C23A DR349AP037 270 260 333 50 285 200 130 10*18 176 200 106 30*5 M8
Table 7-22
7-16
Marking
PE bolt
Tightening torque: 10.2~12.3 kg-cm / [8.9~10.6 lb-in.] /
[1.0~1.2 Nm]
Tightening torque: 6.1~8.2 kg-cm / [5.3~7.1 lb-in.] / [0.6~0.8 Nm]
Screw length
must not
interfere with the
mounting holes
Unit: mm
Input AC reactor
Model A B C D1*D2 E G1 G2 PE D
Delta part #
VFD007C43A DR003A0810 96 100 60 6*9 42 60 40 M4
VFD015C43A DR004A0607 120 120 88 6*12 60 80.5 60 M4
VFD022C43A DR006A0405 120 120 88 6*12 60 805 60 M4
VFD037C43A DR009A0270 150 150 88 6*12 74 107 75 M4
VFD040C43A DR010A0231 150 150 112 6*12 88 107 75 M4
VFD055C43A DR012A0202 150 150 112 6*12 88 107 75 M4
VFD075C43A DR018A0117 150 155 112 6*12 88 107 75 M4
VFD110C43A DR024AP881 150 155 112 6*12 88 107 75 M4
VFD150C43A DR032AP660 180 175 138 6*12 114 122 85 M6
Table 7-23
7-17
Unit: mm
Input AC reactor
Model A B C D1*D2 H G G1 Q M PE D
Delta part #
VFD185C43A DR038AP639 180 195 160 6*12 115 85 122 16 1.2~1.4 M4
VFD220C43A DR045AP541 235 235 145 7*13 85 / 176 16 1.2~1.4 M6
Table 7-24
7-18
Unit: mm
Input AC
Model reactor A A1 B B1 B2 C C1 D1*D2 E G1 H M*T PE
Delta part #
VFD300C43A DR060AP405 240 225 210 44 170 163 100 7*13 152 176 97 20*3 M8
VFD370C43S/U DR073AP334 250 230 225 44 186 174 105 11*18 160 190 124 20*3 M8
VFD450C43S/U DR091AP267 250 235 225 44 186 174 105 11*18 160 190 124 20*3 M8
VFD550C43A DR110AP221 270 255 235 50 192 175 105 10*18 176 200 106 20*3 M8
Table 7-25
7-19
Unit: mm
Input AC
Model reactor A A1 B B1 B2 C C1 D1*D2 E G1 G2 H M*T
Delta part #
VFD750C43A DR150AP162 270 260 260 51 208 195 120 10*18 176 200 / 118 30*3
VFD900C43A DR180AP135 300 290 300 55 246 195 115 11*22 200 230 190 142 30*3
VFD1100C43A DR220AP110 300 295 300 57 248 210 130 11*22 200 230 190 142 30*5
VFD1320C43A DR260AP098 300 290 330 56 270 227 140 11*22 200 230 190 160 30*5
VFD1600C43A DR310AP078 300 295 340 54 288 233 145 11*22 200 230 190 160 30*5
VFD1850C43A DR370AP066 300 295 340 54 289 268 168 11*22 200 230 190 185 40*3
Table 7-26
7-20
Unit: mm
Input AC reactor
Delta part #
VFD2200C43A DR460AP054 360 350 490 106 401 346 205 12*20 240 240 240 50*5 M8
VFD2800C43A DR550AP044 360 350 490 106 401 358 210 12*20 240 240 250 50*5 M8
VFD3150C43A DR616AP039 360 350 490 110 401 376 225 12*20 240 240 270 50*8 M8
VFD3550C43A DR683AP036 360 350 490 110 404 396 232 12*20 240 240 290 50*8 M8
VFD4500C43A DR866AP028 410 415 562 120 464 402 232 12*20 280 280 290 50*8 M8
Table 7-27
7-21
DC reactor
A DC reactor can also improve the power factor, reduce input current, and reduce interference
generated from the motor drive. A DC reactor stabilizes the DC BUS voltage. Compared to an AC input
reactor, the advantages are smaller size, lower price, and lower voltage drop (lower power dissipation).
Installation
Install the DC reactor between terminals +2/DC+ and +1/DC+. Remove the jumper (shown below)
before installing the DC reactor.
Wiring of DC reactor Figure 7-7
7-22
DC reactor dimension and specifications:
R
D
200V~230V/ 50~60Hz
Rated Current Saturation current DC reactor DC reactor A B C D E R
Model HP [mm] [mm] [mm]
(Arms) (Arms) (mH) Delta Part # [mm] [mm] [mm]
VFD007C23A 1 5 8.64 5.857 DR005D0585 79 78 112 64±2 56±2 9.5*5.5
VFD015C23A 2 8 12.78 3.660 DR008D0366 79 78 112 64±2 56±2 9.5*5.5
VFD022C23A 3 11 18 2.662 DR011D0266 79 92 112 64±2 69.5±2 9.5*5.5

VFD037C23A 5 17 28.8 1.722 DR017D0172 79 112 112 64±2 89.5±2 9.5*5.5
VFD055C23A 7.5 25 43.2 1.172 DR025D0117 99 105 128 79±2 82.5±2 9.5*5.5
VFD075C23A 10 33 55.8 0.851 DR033DP851 117 110 156 95±2 87±2 10*6.5
VFD110C23A 15 49 84.6 0.574 DR049DP574 117 120 157 95±2 97±2 10*6.5
VFD150C23A 20 65 111.6 0.432 DR065DP432 117 140 157 95±2 116.5±2 10*6.5
VFD185C23A 25 75 127.8 0.391 DR075DP391 136 135 178 111±2 112±2 10*6.5
VFD220C23A 30 90 154.8 0.325 DR090DP325 136 135 179 111±2 112±2 10*6.5
Table 7-28
7-23
380V~460V/ 50~60Hz
Rated Current Saturation current DC reactor DC reactor A B C D E R
Model HP
(Arms) (Arms) (mH) Delta Part # [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm]
VFD007C43A 1 3 5.22 18.709 DR003D1870 79 78 112 64±2 56±2 9.5*5.5
VFD015C43A 2 4 6.84 14.031 DR004D1403 79 92 112 64±2 69.5±2 9.5*5.5
VFD022C43A 3 6 10.26 9.355 DR006D0935 79 92 112 64±2 69.5±2 9.5*5.5
VFD037C43A 5 9 14.58 6.236 DR009D0623 79 112 112 64±2 89.5±2 9.5*5.5
VFD040C43A 5 10.5 17.1 5.345 DR010D0534 99 93 128 79±2 70±2 9.5*5.5
VFD055C43A 7.5 12 19.8 4.677 DR012D0467 99 105 128 79±2 82.5±2 9.5*5.5
VFD075C43A 10 18 30.6 3.119 DR018D0311 117 110 144 95±2 87±2 10*6.5
VFD110C43A 15 24 41.4 2.338 DR024D0233 117 120 144 95±2 97±2 10*6.5
VFD150C43A 20 32 54 1.754 DR032D0175 117 140 157 95±2 116.5±2 10*6.5
VFD185C43A 25 38 64.8 1.477 DR038D0147 136 135 172 111±2 112±2 10*6.5
VFD220C43A 30 45 77.4 1.247 DR045D0124 136 135 173 111±2 112±2 10*6.5
VFD300C43A 40 60 102.6 0.935 DR060DP935 136 150 173 111±2 127±2 10*6.5
Table 7-29
575V DC Choke
Rated Current 4%DC Impedance
Saturation
kW HP (Arms) Current (mH)
Light Normal Heavy (Arms) Light Normal Heavy
Duty Duty Duty Duty Duty Duty
VFD015C53A-21 2 3 2.5 2.1 4.2 20.336 24.404 29.052
VFD022C531-21 3 4.3 3.6 3 5.9 14.188 16.947 20.336
VFD037C53A-21 5 6.7 5.5 4.6 9.1 9.106 11.093 13.263
VFD055C53A-21 7.5 9.9 8.2 6.9 13.7 6.163 7.440 8.842
VFD075C53A-21 10 12.1 10 8.3 16.5 5.042 6.101 7.351
VFD110C53A-21 15 18.7 15.5 13 25.7 3.263 3.936 4.693
VFD150C53A-21 20 24.2 20 16.8 33.3 2.521 3.050 3.632
Table 7-30
690V DC Choke
Rated Current Saturation Current 4%DC Impedance
kW HP (Arms) (Arms) (mH)
Light Normal Heavy Light Normal Heavy Light Normal Heavy
Duty Duty Duty Duty Duty Duty Duty Duty Duty
VFD185C63B-21 25 24 20 14 28.8 30.0 25.2 3.661 4.393 6.275
VFD220C63B-21 30 30 24 20 36.0 36.0 36.0 2.928 3.661 4.393
VFD300C63B-21 40 36 30 24 43.2 45.0 43.2 2.440 2.928 3.661
VFD370C63B-21 50 45 36 30 54.0 54.0 54.0 1.952 2.440 2.928
Table 7-31
Following models are built-in DC impedance:

Frame D VFD450C63B-00; VFD550C63B-00; VFD450C63B-21; VFD550C63B-21
Frame E VFD750C63B-21; VFD900C63B-21; VFD1100C63B-21; VFD1320C63B-21
Frame F VFD1600C63B-00; VFD2000C63B-00; VFD1600C63B-21; VFD2000C63B-21
Frame G VFD2500C63B-00; VFD3150C63B-00; VFD2500C63B-21; VFD3150C63B-21
Frame H VFD4000C63B-21; VFD4500C63B-21; VFD5600C63B-21; VFD6300C63B-21
Table 7-32
7-24
Following table is the THDi value of Delta motor drive matching AC/DC reactor:
Drive Spec. Models without built-in DC reactor Models with built-in DC reactor
Reactor No AC/DC 3% input AC 5% input AC No AC/DC 3% input AC 5% input AC

reactor 4% DC reactor reactor
Spec. reactor reactor reactor reactor
5th 73.3% 38.5% 30.8% 25.5% 31.16% 27.01% 25.5%
7th 52.74% 15.3% 9.4% 18.6% 23.18% 9.54% 8.75%
11th 7.28% 7.1% 6.13% 7.14% 8.6% 4.5% 4.2%
13th 0.4% 3.75% 3.15% 0.48% 7.9% 0.22% 0.17%
THDi 91% 43.6% 34.33% 38.2% 42.28% 30.5% 28.4%
Note: THDi may have some difference due to different installation conditions (like wires or motors) and environment.
Table 7-33
AC Output reactor
Installing an AC reactor on the input side of an AC motor drive can increase line impedance, improve
the power factor, reduce input current, and reduce interference generated from the motor drive. It also
reduces momentary voltage surges or abnormal current spikes. For example, when the main power
capacity is higher than 500 kVA, or when using a switching capacitor bank, momentary voltage and current
spikes may damage the AC motor drive’s internal circuit. An AC reactor on the input side of the AC motor
drive protects it by suppressing surges.
Installation
Install an AC input reactor in series with the three output phases U V W to Motor as shown below:
Wiring of AC output reactor Figure 7-8
7-25
Following table shows the standard AC output reactors specification of Delta C2000
200V~230V/ 50~60Hz
3% 5%
Rated Current Saturation Built-in DC Input AC reactor Delta
(Arms) current (Arms) reactor part #
(mH) (mH)
VFD007C23A 1 5 8.64 2.536 4.227 No DR005L0254
VFD015C23A 2 8 12.78 1.585 2.642 No DR008L0159
VFD022C23A 3 11 18 1.152 1.922 No DR011L0115
VFD037C23A 5 17 28.8 0.746 1.243 No DR017LP746
VFD055C23A 7.5 25 43.2 0.507 0.845 No DR025LP507
VFD075C23A 10 33 55.8 0.32 0.534 No DR033LP320
VFD110C23A 15 49 84.6 0.216 0.359 No DR049LP215
VFD150C23A 20 65 111.6 0.163 0.271 No DR065LP162
VFD185C23A 25 75 127.8 0.169 0.282 No DR075LP170
VFD220C23A 30 90 154.8 0.141 0.235 No DR090LP141
VFD300C23A 40 120 205.2 0.106 0.176 Yes DR146LP087
VFD370C23A 50 146 250.2 0.087 0.145 Yes DR146LP087
VFD450C23A 60 180 307.8 0.070 0.117 Yes DR180LP070
VFD550C23A 75 215 367.2 0.059 0.098 Yes DR215LP059
VFD750C23A 100 255 435.6 0.049 0.083 Yes DR276LP049
VFD900C23A 125 346 592.2 0.037 0.061 Yes DR346LP037

Table 7-34
380V~460V/ 50~60Hz
Saturation 3% 5%
Rated Current Built-in
Model HP current impedance impedance Delta part #
(Arms) DC reactor
(Arms) (mH) (mH)
VFD007C43A 1 3 5.22 8.102 13.502 No DR003L0810
VFD015C43A 2 4 6.84 6.077 10.127 No DR004L0607
VFD022C43A 3 6 10.26 4.050 6.752 No DR006L0405
VFD037C43A 5 9 14.58 2.700 4.501 No DR009L0270
VFD040C43A 5 10.5 17.1 2.315 3.858 No DR010L0231
VFD055C43A 7.5 12 19.8 2.025 3.375 No DR012L0202
VFD075C43A 10 18 30.6 1.174 1.957 No DR018L0117
VFD110C43A 15 24 41.4 0.881 1.468 No DR024LP881
VFD150C43A 20 32 54 0.66 1.101 No DR032LP660
VFD185C43A 25 38 64.8 0.639 1.066 No DR038LP639
VFD220C43A 30 45 77.4 0.541 0.900 No DR045LP541
VFD300C43A 40 60 102.6 0.405 0.675 No DR060LP405
VFD370C43S/U 50 73 124.2 0.334 0.555 Yes DR073LP334
VFD450C43S/U 60 91 154.8 0.267 0.445 Yes DR091LP267
VFD550C43A 75 110 189 0.221 0.368 Yes DR110LP221
VFD750C43A 100 150 257.4 0.162 0.270 Yes DR150LP162
VFD900C43A 125 180 307.8 0.135 0.225 Yes DR180LP135
7-26
Saturation 3% 5%
Rated Current Built-in
Model HP current impedance impedance Delta part #
(Arms) DC reactor
(Arms) (mH) (mH)
VFD1100C43A 150 220 376.2 0.110 0.184 Yes DR220LP110
VFD1320C43A 175 260 444.6 0.098 0.162 Yes DR260LP098
VFD1600C43A 215 310 531 0.078 0.131 Yes DR310LP078
VFD1850C43A 250 370 633.6 0.066 0.109 Yes DR370LP066
VFD2200C43A 300 460 786.6 0.054 0.090 Yes DR460LP054
VFD2800C43A 375 550 941.4 0.044 0.074 Yes DR550LP044
VFD3150C43A 420 616 1053 0.039 0.066 Yes DR616LP039
VFD3550C43A 475 683 1168.2 0.036 0.060 Yes DR683LP036
VFD4500C43A 600 866 1468.8 0.028 0.047 Yes DR866LP028

Table 7-35
7-27
AC output reactor dimensions and specification:
Output AC reactor
Model A B C D1*D2 H H1 H2 PE
Delta part #
VFD007C23A DR005A0254 96 110 70 6*9 42 60 40 M4
VFD015C23A DR008A0159 120 135 96 6*12 60 80.5 60 M4
VFD022C23A DR011A0115 120 135 96 6*12 60 80.5 60 M4
VFD037C23A DR017AP746 120 135 105 6*12 65 80.5 60 M4
VFD055C23A DR025AP507 150 160 120 6*12 88 107 75 M4
VFD075C23A DR033AP320 150 160 120 6*12 88 107 75 M4
Table 7-36
7-28
Output AC reactor
Model A B C D1*D2 H G G1 Q M PE
Delta part #
VFD110C23A DR049AP215 180 205 175 6*12 115 85 122 16 1.2-1.4 M4
VFD150C23A DR065AP162 180 215 185 6*12 115 85 122 35 2.5-3.0 M4
Table 7-37
7-29
Output AC reactor
Model A A1 B B1 B2 C C1 D1*D2 E G1 H M*T
Delta part #
VFD185C23A DR075AP170 240 228 210 44 170 151 95 7*13 152 176 85 20*3
VFD220C23A DR090AP141 240 228 220 44 170 151 100 7*13 152 176 85 20*3
VFD300C23A
DR146AP087 240 228 250 45 202 162 110 7*13 152 176 97 30*3
VFD370C23A
VFD450C23A DR180AP070 250 240 260 46 203 175 115 11*18 160 190 124 30*5
VFD550C23A DR215AP059 250 240 285 51 226 180 120 11*18 160 190 124 30*5
Table 7-38
7-30
Output AC reactor
Model A A1 B B1 B2 C C1 D1*D2 E H M*T
Delta part #
VFD750C23A DR276AP049 270 260 320 50 265 200 140 10*18 176 106 30*5
VFD900C23A DR276AP050 270 264 350 50 285 200 140 10*18 176 106 30*5
Table 7-39
7-31
Output AC reactor
Model A B C D1*D2 H G1 G2 PE
Delta part #
VFD007C43A DR003A0810 96 115 60 6*9 42 60 40 M4

VFD015C43A DR004A0607 120 135 88 6*12 60 81 60 M4
VFD022C43A DR006A0405 120 135 88 6*12 60 81 60 M4
VFD037C43A DR009A0270 150 160 98 6*12 74 107 75 M4
VFD040C43A DR010A0231 150 160 112 6*12 88 107 75 M4
VFD055C43A DR012A0202 150 160 112 6*12 88 107 75 M4
VFD075C43A DR018A0117 150 160 112 6*12 88 107 75 M4
VFD110C43A DR024AP881 150 160 112 6*12 88 107 75 M4
VFD150C43A DR032AP660 180 190 138 6*12 114 122 85 M6
Table 7-40
7-32
Output AC reactor
Model A B C D1*D2 H G1 G2 PE
Delta part #
VFD185C43A DR038AP639 180 205 165 6*12 115 85 122 M4
VFD220C43A DR045AP541 235 245 150 7*13 85 / 176 M6
Table 7-41
7-33
Output AC reactor
Delta part #
VFD300C43A DR060AP405 240 228 215 44 170 163 110 7*13 152 176 97 20*3
VFD370C43S/U DR073AP334 250 235 235 44 186 174 115 11*18 160 190 124 20*3
VFD450C43S/U DR091AP267 250 240 235 44 186 174 115 11*18 160 190 124 20*3
VFD550C43A DR110AP221 270 260 245 50 192 175 115 10*18 176 200 106 20*3
Table 7-42
7-34
Output AC reactor
Model A A1 B B1 B2 C C1 D1*D2 E G1 G2 H M*T
Delta part #
VFD750C43A DR150LP162 270 264 265 51 208 192 125 10*18 176 200 / 118 30*3
VFD900C43A DR180LP135 300 295 310 55 246 195 125 11*22 200 230 190 142 30*3
VFD1100C43A DR220LP110 300 298 310 57 248 210 140 11*22 200 230 190 142 30*5
VFD1320C43A DR260LP098 300 295 330 56 270 227 140 11*22 200 230 190 160 30*5
VFD1600C43A DR310LP078 300 298 350 54 288 233 145 11*22 200 230 190 160 30*5
VFD1850C43A DR370LP066 300 298 350 54 289 268 170 11*22 200 230 190 185 40*5
Table 7-43
7-35
Output AC reactor
Delta part #
VFD2200C43A DR460AP054 360 355 510 106 401 346 215 12*20 240 240 240 50*5
VFD2800C43A DR550AP044 360 355 510 106 401 358 220 12*20 240 240 250 50*5
VFD3150C43A DR616AP039 360 355 510 110 401 376 230 12*20 240 240 270 50*8
VFD3550C43A DR683AP036 360 355 510 110 401 396 240 12*20 240 240 290 50*8
VFD4500C43A DR866AP028 410 418 570 120 464 402 245 12*20 280 280 290 50*8
Table 7-44
7-36
Motor Cable Length
1. Leakage current to affect the motor and counter measurement
If the cable length is too long, the parasitic capacitance between cables will enlarge and may
increase leakage current. It will activate the protection of over current, and increased leakage current
will not ensure the correction of current value in display. The worst case is that AC motor drive may
damage.
If more than one motor is connected to the AC motor drive, the total wiring length is the sum of
the wiring length from AC motor drive to each motor.
For the 460V series AC motor drive, when an overload relay is installed between the drive and
the motor to protect motor from overheating, the connecting cable must be shorter than 50m. However,
an overload relay malfunction may still occur. To prevent the malfunction, install an output reactor
(optional) to the drive or lower the carrier frequency setting (Pr. 00-17).
2. Surge voltage to affect the motor and counter measurement

When motor is driven by a PWM signal of AC motor drive, the motor terminals will experience
surge voltages (dv/dt) easily due to power transistors conversion of AC motor drive and cable
capacitance. When the motor cable is very long (especially for the 460V series), surge voltages (dv/dt)
may reduce insulation quality. To prevent this situation, please follow the rules below:
a. Use a motor with enhanced insulation
b. Connect an output reactor (optional) to the output terminals of the AC motor drive
c. Reduce the motor cable length to suggested value
The suggested motor shielded cable length in the following table complies with IEC 60034-17,
which is suitable for the motor with rated voltage under 500 VAC, and the insulation level of
peak-to-peak over (including) 1.35kV
Without AC reactor With AC reactor

Rated current
230V Model
(ND) (Arms) Shielded Cable Non-shielded Shielded Cable Non-shielded
[meter] cable [meter] [meter] cable [meter]
VFD007C23A 5 50 75 75 115
VFD015C23A 8 50 75 75 115
VFD022C23A 11 50 75 75 115
VFD037C23A 17 50 75 75 115
VFD055C23A 25 50 75 75 115
VFD075C23A 33 100 150 150 225
VFD110C23A 49 100 150 150 225
VFD150C23A 65 100 150 150 225
VFD185C23A 75 100 150 150 225
VFD220C23A 90 100 150 150 225
VFD300C23A/E 120 100 150 150 225
VFD370C23A/E 146 100 150 150 225
VFD450C23A/E 180 150 225 225 325
VFD550C23A/E 215 150 225 225 325
VFD750C23A/E 255 150 225 225 325
VFD900C23A/E 346 150 225 225 325
Table 7-45
7-37
Without AC reactor With AC reactor

Rated current
460V Model
VFD007C43A 3 50 75 75 115
VFD015C43A 4 50 75 75 115
VFD022C43A 6 50 75 75 115
VFD037C43A 9 50 75 75 115
VFD040C43A 10.5 50 75 75 115
VFD055C43A 12 50 75 75 115
VFD075C43A 18 100 150 150 225
VFD110C43A 24 100 150 150 225
VFD150C43A 32 100 150 150 225
VFD185C43A 38 100 150 150 225
VFD220C43A 45 100 150 150 225
VFD300C43A 60 100 150 150 225
VFD370C43S/U 73 100 150 150 225
VFD450C43S/U 91 150 225 225 325
VFD550C43A/E 110 150 225 225 325
VFD750C43A/E 150 150 225 225 325
VFD900C43A/E 180 150 225 225 325
VFD1100C43A/E 220 150 225 225 325
VFD1320C43A/E 260 150 225 225 325
VFD1600C43A/E 310 150 225 225 325
VFD1850C43A/E 370 150 225 225 325
VFD2200C43A/E 460 150 225 225 325
VFD2800C43A 550 150 225 225 325
VFD3150C43A 616 150 225 225 325
VFD3550C43A 683 150 225 225 325
VFD4500C43A 866 150 225 225 325
Table 7-46
460V Without AC reactor With AC reactor

Rated current
EMC Filter built-in model
VFD007C43E 3 30 75 30 115
VFD015C43E 4 30 75 30 115
VFD022C43E 6 30 75 30 115
VFD037C43E 9 30 75 30 115
VFD040C43E 10.5 30 75 30 115
VFD055C43E 12 30 75 30 115
VFD075C43E 18 50 150 50 225
VFD110C43E 24 50 150 50 225
VFD150C43E 32 50 150 50 225
VFD185C43E 38 50 150 50 225
VFD220C43E 45 50 150 50 225
VFD300C43E 60 50 150 50 225
Table 7-47
7-38
Rated
Current
kW HP Normal Shielded Shielded
Non-shielded Non-shielded
Model Duty Cable Cable
Cable [meter] Cable [meter]
(Arms) [meter] [meter]
VFD015C53A-21 0.75 1 2.5 35 30 45 20
VFD022C531-21 1.5 2 3.6 35 30 45 20
VFD037C53A-21 2.2 3 5.5 35 30 45 20
VFD055C53A-21 3.7 5 8.2 35 30 45 20
VFD075C53A-21 5.5 7.5 10 35 30 45 20
VFD110C53A-21 7.5 10 15.5 35 30 45 20
VFD150C53A-21 11 15 20 35 30 45 20
Table 7-48
Rated
Current
kW HP Normal Shielded Non-shield Shielded Non-shield
Model Duty Cable ed Cable Cable ed Cable
(Arms) [meter] [meter] [meter] [meter]
VFD185C63B-21 18.5 25 20 20 35 30 45
VFD220C63B-21 22 30 24 20 35 30 45
VFD300C63B-21 30 40 30 20 35 45 60
VFD370C63B-21 37 50 36 20 45 60 75
VFD450C63B-00/21 45 60 45 20 45 60 75
VFD550C63B-00/21 55 75 54 20 45 60 100
VFD750C63B-00/21 75 100 67 20 45 60 100
VFD900C63B-00/21 90 125 86 20 45 75 100
VFD1100C63B-00/21 110 150 104 20 45 75 100
VFD1320C63B-00/21 132 175 125 20 45 75 100
VFD1600C63B-00/21 160 215 150 20 45 90 100
VFD2000C63B-00/21 200 270 180 20 45 90 100
VFD2500C63B-00/21 250 335 220 20 45 90 100
VFD3150C63B-00/21 315 425 290 20 45 90 100
VFD4000C63B-00/21 400 530 350 20 45 90 100
VFD4500C63B-00/21 450 600 385 20 45 90 100
VFD5600C63B-00/21 560 745 465 20 45 75 90
VFD6300C63B-00/21 630 850 675 20 45 75 90
Table 7-49
* The table above is the suggested cable length of EMC built-in models operating under surge
voltage influencing. To pass the noise emission and Electromagnetic interference certification, the
cable length should follow chapter 7-7 instruction.
* 690V output motor cable length needs to comply with IEC 60034-25
Requirements on insulation level of Curve B motor
7-39
Figure 7-9
The tr is defined as:
Figure 7-10
Sine-wave filter
When there is longer cable length connected between motor drive and motor, the damping will
lead to high frequency resonator, and make impedance matching poor to enlarge the voltage reflection.
This phenomenon will generate twice-input voltage in motor side, which will easily make motor voltage
overshoot to damage insulation.
To prevent this phenomenon, installing sine-wave filter can transform PWM output voltage to
smooth and low-ripple sin wave, and motor cable length can longer than 1000 meters.
Installation
Sine-wave filter is serially connected between motor drive UVW output side and motor, which is
shown as below:
7-40
AC motor drive
Wiring of non-shielded cable
AC motor drive
Wiring of shielded cable
Following table shows the sin-wave filter specification of Delta C2000
200V~230V/ 50~60Hz
Output cable length [m]
kW HP Rated current (Arms) Suggested sine-wave filter part #
(Shielded or non-shielded)
0.75 1 5 B84143V0006R227
1.5 2 8
B84143V0011R227
2.2 3 11
3.7 5 17
B84143V0025R227
5.5 7.5 25
7.5 10 33 B84143V0033R227
11 15 49 B84143V0050R227
15 20 65 B84143V0066R227
1000
18.5 25 75 B84143V0075R227
22 30 90 B84143V0095R227
30 40 120 B84143V0132R227
37 50 146
B84143V0180R227
45 60 180
55 75 215 B84143V0250R227
75 100 255 B84143V0320R227
90 125 346 Please contact supplier EPCOS
Table 7-50
7-41
380V~460V/ 50~60Hz
Output cable length [m]
kW HP Rated current (Arms) Suggested sine-wave filter part #
(Shielded or non-shielded)
0.75 1 3
B84143V0004R227
1.5 2 4
2.2 3 6 B84143V0006R227
3.7 5 9
B84143V0011R227
4 5 10.5
5.5 7.5 12 B84143V0016R227
7.5 10 18
B84143V0025R227
11 15 24 1000
15 20 32 B84143V0033R227
18.5 25 38
B84143V0050R227
22 30 45
30 40 60 B84143V0066R227
37 50 73 B84143V0075R227
45 60 91 B84143V0095R227
55 75 110 B84143V0132R227
75 100 150 B84143V0180R227
90 125 180 B84143V0180R227
110 150 220 B84143V0250R227
132 175 260
B84143V0320R227
160 215 310
185 250 370
1000
220 300 460
280 375 550
Please contact supplier EPCOS
315 420 616
355 475 683
450 600 866
Table 7-51
Please refer to website:

Sine wave filter part #
http://en.tdk.eu/inf/30/db/emc_2014/B84143V_R227.pdf
B84143V0004R227 IR:4A, Sine-wave output filters for 3-phase systems

7-42
Please refer to website:

Sine wave filter part #
http://en.tdk.eu/inf/30/db/emc_2014/B84143V_R227.pdf

Table 7-52
7-43
7-5 Zero Phase Reactors
Reactor Wiring
Recommended Wire Size Qty Corresponding motor drives
model (Note) Method
RF008X00A ≤ 8 AWG ≤ 8.37 mm2 Diagram A VFD037C23A; VFD007C43A; VFD015C43A;

1C*3
or VFD055C43A; VFD015C53A-21;
4C*1
VFD022C53A-21; VFD037C53A-21;
T60006L2040W453 ≤ 8 AWG ≤ 8.37 mm2 Diagram B VFD055C53A-21; VFD075C53A-21,
VFD110C53A-21; VFD150C53A-21
RF004X00A ≤ 1 AWG ≤ 42.41 mm2 Diagram A VFD055C23A; VFD075C23A; VFD110C23A;

1C*3
or VFD110C43A; VFD150C43A; VFD075C43A;
T60006L2050W565 ≤ 1 AWG ≤ 42.41mm2 Diagram B 4C*1
VFD110C43A; VFD150C43A
VFD150C23A; VFD185C23A;
RF002X00A ≤ 600MCM ≤ 304 mm2 Diagram A VFD550C23A; VFD750C23A;
1C*3
or VFD550C43A; VFD750C43A;
4C*1
T60006L2050W565 ≤ 600MCM ≤ 304 mm2 Diagram B VFD185C63B-21; VFD220C63B-21;

VFD300C63B-21; VFD370C63B-21;
VFD450C63B-XX; VFD550C63B-XX
VFD750C63B-XX; VFD900C63B-XX;
1C*12
RF300X00A ≤ 300 MCM ≤ 152 mm2 Diagram A or VFD1100C63B-XX; VFD1320C63B-XX;
4C*3
Note 1: *600V insulated cable wire Table 7-53
Note 2: Above table only considers the motor wire size
Note 3: For max. wiring quantity, please refer to Chapter 5 Main
Circuit Terminal.
7-44
Diagram A
Please put all wires through at least one core without winding.
Diagram B
Diagram C
Diagram D
7-45
Diagram E
Note 1: The table above gives approximate wire size for the zero phase reactors but the selection is ultimately
governed by the type and diameter of cable fitted, i.e. the cable must fit through the center hole of zero phase
reactors.
Note 2: Only the phase conductors should pass through, not the earth core or screen.
Note 3: For the zero phase reactor used for signal cables, it is recommended to install near to the driver and well
fixed, as to prevent vibration and pulling of the cable.
Recommended wire Wiring

Model* Q’ty Applicable cables
size method
T60006L2050W565 ≦1 AWG Diagram D 1 D-sub
Category 5e shielding、Shielded twisted pair

T60006L2040W453 ≦8 AWG Diagram C 1 cable、CAN standard cable
(TAP-CB05, TAP-CB10)
T60004L2025W622 ≦10AWG Diagram E 1 PG card signal cable
T60004L2016W620 ≦12AWG Diagram E 1 PG card signal cable

Table 7-54
Note 1: *The table above is for reference only, please choose the zero phase reactor based on the actual
wire size that you are using.
Note 2: Some of the cables are recommended to choose bigger zero phase reactor due to its corresponded
mechanical size.
Recommended max. motor wire size of zero phase reactor (included LUG width and temp. tolerance of motor cable)
Available max. wire Available max. AGW (1C*3) Available max. AWG (4C*1)
Zero phase reactor
size/ LUG width 75C 90C 75C 90C
RF008X00A 13MM 3AWG 1AWG 3AWG 1AWG
RF004X00A 16MM 1AWG 2/0AWG 1AWG 1/0AWG
RF002X00A 36MM 600MCM 600MCM 1AWG 1/0AWG
RF300X00A 73MM 650MCM 650MCM 300MCM 300MCM
T60006L2040W453 11MM 9AWG 4AWG 6AWG 6AWG
T60006L2050W565 16MM 1AWG 2/0AWG 1AWG 1/0AWG
T60006L2160V066 57MM 600MCM 600MCM 300MCM 300MCM

Table 7-55
7-46
G
B
C
D F
A E
Unit: mm [inch]
Model A B C D E F G(Ø) Torque
98 73 36.5 29 56.5 86 5.5
RF008X00A < 10kgf/cm2
[3.858] [2.874] [1.437] [1.142] [2.224] [3.386] [0.217]
110 87.5 43.5 36 53 96 5.5
RF004X00A < 10kgf/cm2
[4.331] [3.445] [1.713] [1.417] [2.087] [3.780] [0.217]
Table 7-56
G
B
H
C
D E
Unit: mm [inch]
Model A B C D E F G(Ø) H Torque
200 172.5 90 78 55.5 184 5.5 22
RF002X00A <45kgf/cm2
[7.874] [6.791] [3.543] [3.071] [2.185] [7.244] [0.217] [0.866]
Table 7-57
Unit: mm [inch]
Model A B C D E F G(Ø) H I
241 217 114 155 42 220 6.5 7.0 20
RF300X00A
[9.488] [8.543] [4.488] [6.102] [1.654] [8.661] [0.256] [0.276] [0.787]
Table 7-58
7-47
Magnetic Ring
Model number: T60006-L2040-W453
Model number: T60006-L2160-V066
7-48
7-49
7-6 EMC Filter

Following table is the external EMC filter of C2000 series, user can choose corresponding zero phase
reactor and suitable shielded cable length in accord to required noise emission and electromagnetic
interference level to have the best configuration to suppress the electromagnetic interference. When the
application does not consider RE and only needs CE to comply with C2 or C1, there is no need to install
zero phase reactor in input side.
230V model
Conducted Radiation
C2000 Zero phase reactor
Emission Emission
Output
Filter model name Fc
Rated input Input side Output side shielded
Frame Model EN61800-3
current [A] (R/S/T) (U/V/W) cable length
C2 C1
VFD007C23A 6.4
VFD015C23A 12 RF008X00A RF008X00A
A EMF021A23A or or
VFD022C23A 16 T60006L2040W453 T60006L2040W453
VFD037C23A 20 ≤ 8kHz
VFD055C23A 28 RF004X00A RF004X00A
B VFD075C23A 36 EMF056A23A or or
VFD110C23A 52 T60006L2050W565 T60006L2050W565
VFD150C23A 72 RF002X00A
100m 50m C2
C VFD185C23A 83 KMF3100A or RF002X00A
VFD220C23A 99 T60006L2160V066 or ≤ 6kHz
VFD300C23A 124 T60006L2160V066
D B84143D0150R127 N/A
VFD370C23A 143
VFD450C23A 171
E VFD550C23A 206 B84143B0250S020 RF300X00A
N/A or ≤ 4kHz
VFD750C23A 245 T60006L2160V066
F VFD900C23A 331 B84143B0400S020
Table 7-59
7-50
460V model
Conducted Radiation
Emission Emission
Output
Rated Filter model name
Fc shielded
input (U/V/W) Input side Output side
Frame Model cable length EN61800-3
current (R/S/T) (U/V/W)
[A] C2 C1
VFD007C43A 4.3
VFD015C43A 5.9 EMF014A43A
VFD022C43A 8.7 RF008X00A RF008X00A
A or or
VFD037C43A 14 T60006L2040W453 T60006L2040W453
VFD040C43A 15.5 EMF018A43A ≤ 8kHz
VFD055C43A 17
VFD075C43A 20 RF004X00A RF004X00A
B VFD110C43A 26 EMF039A43A or or
VFD150C43A 35 T60006L2050W565 T60006L2050W565
VFD185C43A 40 RF002X00A
C VFD220C43A 47 KMF370A or
VFD300C43A 63 T60006L2160V066
RF002X00A ≤ 6kHz
VFD370C43S/U 74 or
D0 T60006L2160V066 100m 50m C2
VFD450C43S/U 101
B84143D0150R127 N/A
VFD550C43A 114
D
VFD750C43A 157
VFD900C43A 167
E B84143D0200R127
VFD1100C43A 207
VFD1320C43A 240
F
VFD1600C43A 300
MIF3400B RF300X00A
VFD1850C43A 380 ≤ 4kHz
G N/A or
VFD2200C43A 400 T60006L2160V066
VFD2800C43A 494
VFD3150C43A 555 MIF3800
H
VFD3550C43A 625
VFD4500C43A 866 B84143B1000S020
Table 7-60
Conducted Radiation
Emission Emission
Filter model name Carrier Output shielded
Rated Input Input
(U/V/W) Output side Frequency cable length
Frame Model Current side EN61800-3
(U/V/W)
[A] (R/S/T) EN618000-3 C2
VFD370C43S/U 74
D0 B84143B0120R110 N/A ≤6kHz 25m *C2
VFD450C43S/U 101
VFD550C43A 114
D B84143B0180S020 *C3
VFD750C43A 157
VFD900C43A 167
E B84143B0250S020 ≤4kHz
VFD1100C43A 207
VFD1320C43A 240
F B84143B0400S020 N/A RF300X00A C2
VFD1600C43A 300
or 13m
VFD1850C43A 380 T60006L2160V066
G B84143B0600S020
VFD2200C43A 400
VFD2800C43A 494
≤2kHz
VFD3150C43A 555
H B84143B1000S020 *C3
VFD3550C43A 625
VFD4500C43A 866
*For Radiated Emission, the drive needs to be placed inside a cabinet. Table 7-61
7-51
Conducted Radiation
Emission Emission
Filter model name Carrier Output shielded
Rated Input Output
(U/V/W) Input side Frequency cable length
Frame Model Current side EN61800-3
(R/S/T)
[A] (U/V/W) EN618000-3 C2
VFD370C43S/U 74
D0 B84143A0120R105 C3
VFD450C43S/U 101
≤6kHz
VFD550C43A 114
D B84143B0180S080 *C3
VFD750C43A 157
VFD900C43A 167
E B84143B0250S080 150m
VFD1100C43A 207
VFD1320C43A 240
F B84143B0400S080 N/A N/A
VFD1600C43A 300
VFD1850C43A 380
G B84143B0600S080 ≤4kHz C3
VFD2200C43A 400
VFD2800C43A 494
VFD3150C43A 555
H B84143B1000S080 100m
VFD3550C43A 625
VFD4500C43A 866
*For Radiated Emission, the drive needs to be placed inside a cabinet. Table 7-62
7-52
690V models
conducted and radiated emission
C2-motor cable C3-motor cable
length-50m length-100m
Frame Model Filter model name Zero phase reactor
Location of zero phase reactor (Refer to
below figure shown)
1* 2* 3* 1* 2* 3*
VFD015C53A-21 1 1
A VFD022C53A-21 EMF014A63A 1 1
VFD037C53A-21 1 1
VFD055C53A-21 T60006L2040W453 1 1 1 1
VFD075C53A-21 1 1 1 1
B EMF027A63A
VFD110C53A-21 1 1 1 1
VFD150C53A-21 1 1 1 1
VFD185C63B-21
VFD220C63B-21
C B84143A0050R021
VFD300C63B-21
VFD370C63B-21
T60006L2050W565
VFD450C63B-00 1 2
VFD550C63B-00 1 2
D B84143A0080R021
VFD450C63B-21 1 2
VFD550C63B-21 1 2
VFD750C63B-00
VFD900C63B-00
VFD1100C63B-00
VFD1320C63B-00
E B84143B0150S021
VFD750C63B-21
VFD900C63B-21
VFD1100C63B-21
VFD1320C63B-21
VFD1600C63B-00
VFD2000C63B-00
F B84143B0250S021
VFD1600C63B-21
VFD2000C63B-21
T60006L2160V066
VFD2500C63B-00
VFD3150C63B-00
G B84143B0400S021
VFD2500C63B-21
VFD3150C63B-21
VFD4000C63B-00 1 1
VFD4500C63B-00 1 1
VFD5600C63B-00 1 1
VFD6300C63B-00 1 1
H B84143B1000S021
VFD4000C63B-21 1 1
VFD4500C63B-21 1 1
VFD5600C63B-21 1 1
VFD6300C63B-21 1 1
※ The number represents quantity of zero phase reactor, all the motor cable are shielded cables. Table 7-63
7-53
EMC Filter Dimension

EMC filter model name: EMF021A23A, EMF014A43A
7-54
EMC filter model name: EMF018A43A
7-55
EMC filter model name: EMF056A23A, EMF039A43A
7-56
EMC filter model name: KMF370A, KMF3100A
EMC filter model name: B84143D0150R127
7-57
EMC filter model name: B84143D0200R127
7-58
EMC filter model name: B84143B0250S020
7-59
7-60
Unit: mm [inch]
7-61
Unit: mm [inch]
7-62
EMC filter model name: B84143A0050R021
Unit: mm
7-63
EMC filter model name: B84143A0080R021
Unit: mm
7-64
7-65
Unit: mm
Unit: mm
7-66
Following table is the suggested shielded cable length of EMC built-in models. User can choose
corresponding shielded cable length in accord to required noise emission and electromagnetic interference
level.
Rated Comply with EMC (IEC 61800-3) Comply with EMC (IEC 61800-3)
EMC built-in model
current Class C3 Class C2
Frame Model (ND) Shielded cable length Fc Shielded cable length Fc
VFD007C43E 4.3
VFD015C43E 5.9
VFD022C43E 8.7
A
VFD037C43E 14
VFD040C43E 15.5 ≤ 8kHz ≤ 8kHz
VFD055C43E 17
30m 10m
VFD075C43E 20
B VFD110C43E 26
VFD150C43E 35
VFD185C43E 40
C VFD220C43E 47 ≤ 6kHz ≤ 6kHz
VFD300C43E 63
Table 7-64
* Shielded cable length of Frame A should be no longer than 30m and Frame B, C no longer than 50m to prevent
cable length from being too long, which may cause built-in EMC filter malfunction due to overheat resulting from
leakage current and larger wires parasitic capacitance.
EMC Filter Installation

All electrical equipment, including AC motor drives, will generate high frequency/ low frequency noise
and will interfere with peripheral equipment by radiation or conduction when in operation. By using an EMC
filter with correct installation, much interference can be eliminated. It is recommended to use DELTA EMC
filter to have the best interference elimination performance.
We assure that it can comply with following rules when AC motor drive and EMC filter are installed and
wired according to user manual:
1. EN61000-6-4
2. EN61800-3: 1996
3. EN55011 (1991) Class A Group 1
General precaution
To ensure EMC filter can maximize the effect of suppressing the interference of AC motor drive, the
installation and wiring of AC motor drive should follow the user manual. In addition, be sure to observe the
following precautions:
1. EMC filter and AC motor drive should be installed on the same metal plate.
2. Please install AC motor drive on footprint EMC filter or install EMC filter as close as possible to the AC
motor drive.
3. Please wire as short as possible.
4. Metal plate should be grounded.
5. The cover of EMC filter and AC motor drive or grounding should be fixed on the metal plate and the
contact area should be as large as possible.
7-67
Choose suitable motor cable and precautions
Improper installation and choice of motor cable will affect the performance of EMC filter. Be sure to
observe the following precautions when selecting motor cable.
1. Use the cable with shielding (double shielding is the best).

2. The shielding on both ends of the motor cable should be grounded with the minimum length and
maximum contact area.
3. Remove any paint on metal saddle for good ground contact with the plate and shielding.
Remove any paint on metal saddle for good ground contact with
the plate and shielding.
saddle the plate with grounding
Figure 1
Saddle on both ends
Saddle on one end
Figure 2
7-68
Capacitor Filter
Capacitor Filter is a simple filter accessory, installed to provide simple filtering and eliminating interference.
Installation
Installed on the input side, connect each cable on terminal R, S, T and PE. As shown in the figure below. (Please do
NOT install the capacitor filter on the output side.)
Capacitor
Filter
R U
Grid S V Motor
T VFD W
PE PE
Model / Specification
Model Capacitance of the capacitor Temperature
Cx：1uF±20%
CXY101-43A -40~+85°C
Cy：1uF±20%
Unit: mm [inch]
7-69
7-7 Panel Mounting (MKC-KPPK)

For MKC-KPPK model, user can choose wall mounting or embedded mounting, protection level is IP66.
Applicable to the digital keypads (KPC-CC01 & KPC-CE01)
Wall Mounting Embedded Mounting
accessories*1 accessories*2
Screw *4 ~M4*p 0.7 *L8mm Screw *4 ~M4*p 0.7 *L8mm

Torque: 10~12 kg-cm / [8.7~10.4 lb-in.] / Torque: 10~12 kg-cm / [8.7~10.4 lb-in.] /
[1.0~1.2 Nm] [1.0~1.2 Nm]
Panel cutout dimension Unit: mm [inch] Panel cutout dimension Unit: mm [inch]
Normal cutout dimension

Panel
1.2mm 1.6mm 2.0mm
thickness
A 66.4 [2.614]
110.2 111.3 112.5
B
[4.339] [4.382] [4.429]
*Deviation: ±0.15mm /±0.0059inch
Table 7-65
Cutout dimension (Waterproof level: IP66)

Panel
1.2mm 1.6mm 2.0mm
thickness
A 66.4 [2.614]
B 110.8 [4.362]
*Deviation: ±0.15mm / ±0.0059inch
Table 7-66
7-70
Wall Mounting Embedded Mounting

7-71
7-8 Conduit Box Kit

 Appearance
Conduit box kit is optional for VFDXXXCXXA (Frame D and above) and VFDXXXC43S, the
protection will be IP20/ NEMA1/ UL TYPE1 after installation.
Frame D0
Applicable models
VFD370C43S/43U; VFD450SC43S/43U
Model number『MKC-D0N1CB』
ITEM Description Qty.
1 Screw M5*0.8*10L 4
2 Bushing Rubber 28 2
5 Conduit box cover 1
6 Conduit box base 1
Table 7-67
Frame D
Applicable models
VFD300C23A/23E; VFD370C23A/23E; VFD550C43A/43E; VFD750C43A/43E; VFD450C63B-00;
Model number『MKC-DN1CB』
1 Screw M5*0.8*10L 4
Table 7-68
Frame E
Applicable models
VFD450C23A/23E; VFD550C23A/23E; VFD750C23A/23E; VFD900C43A/43E; VFD1100C43A/43E;
VFD750C63B-00; VFD900C63B-00; VFD1100C63B-00; VFD1320C63B-00; VFD750C63B-21; VFD900C63B-21;
VFD1100C63B-21; VFD1320C63B-21
Model number『MKC-EN1CB』
1 Screw M5*0.8*10L 6
Table 7-69
7-72
Frame F
Applicable models
VFD900C23A/23E; VFD1320C43A/43E; VFD1600C43A/43E; VFD1600C63B-00; VFD2000C63B-00;
VFD1600C63B-21; VFD2000C63B-21
Model number『MKC-FN1CB』
1 Screw M5*0.8*10L 8
2 Bushing Rubber28 2
Table 7-70
Frame G
Applicable models
VFD1850C43A/43E; VFD2200C43A/43E; VFD2500C63B-00; VFD3150C63B-00; VFD2500C63B-21;
VFD3150C63B-21
Model number『MKC-GN1CB』
1 Screw M5*0.8*10L 12
Table 7-71
7-73
Frame H
Applicable models
VFD2800C43A; VFD3150C43A; VFD3550C43A; VFD4500C43A; VFD2800C43E; VFD3150C43E;
VFD3550C43E; VFD4500C43E; VFD2800C43E-1; VFD3150C43E-1; VFD3550C43E-1; VFD4500C43E-1
Model number『MKC-HN1CB』
1 Screw M6*1.0*25L 8 ITEM 1
2 Screw M8*1.25*30L 3 ITEM 2
3 NUT M8 4 ITEM 3
ITEM 14
4 NUT M10 4 ITEM 4
8 Conduit box cover 1 1
9 Conduit box cover 2 2 ITEM 6
ITEM 5
10 Conduit box cover 3 2 ITEM 5
11 Conduit box cover 4 2
ITEM 6
12 Conduit box base 1 ITEM 5
13 Accessories 1 2 ITEM 5
14 Accessories 2 1
Table 7-72
ITEM 7
ITEM 7
ITEM 10
ITEM 7
ITEM 10
ITEM 9 ITEM 7
ITEM 13
ITEM 12
ITEM 11
ITEM 11
ITEM 8
ITEM 9
ITEM 13
7-74
 Conduit Box Installation

Frame D0
1. Loosen the cover screws and press the tabs on each side of the cover to remove the cover, as shown in the
following figure.
Screw torque: 12~15 kg-cm / [10.4~13 Ib-in.] / [1.2~1.5 Nm]
2. Remove the 5 screws shown in the following figure.

Screw torque: 24~26 kg-cm / [20.8~22.6 Ib-in.] / [2.4~2.5 Nm]
3. Install the conduit box by fasten the 5 screws shown in the following figure.
7-75
4. Fasten the 2 screws shown in the following figure.

Frame D
following figure.
2. Remove the 5 screws shown in the following figure.

7-76
3. Install the conduit box by fasten the 5 screws shown in the following figure.
4. Fasten the 2 screws shown in the following figure. Screw torque: 12~15 kg-cm / [10.4~13 Ib-in.] / [1.2~1.5 Nm]
Frame E
1. Loosen the 4 cover screws and lift the cover;
7-77
2. Fasten the 6 screws shown in the following figure and place the cover back to the original position.
3. Fasten the 4 screws shown in the following figure.

Frame F
following figure.
1
2
7-78
2. Install the conduit box by fastens the 4 screws, as shown in the following figure.
3. Install the conduit box by fasten all the screws shown in the following figure
Screw 9~12 torque: 12~15 kg-cm / [10.4~13 Ib-in.] / [1.2~1.5 Nm]
Screw 13~16 torque: 24~26 kg-cm / [20.8~22.6 Ib-in.] / [2.4~2.5 Nm]
12
15
9
10
13
14
16
11
7-79
Frame G
1. On the conduit box, loosen 7 of the cover screws and remove the cover
2. On the drive, loosen 4 of the cover screws and press the tabs on each side of the cover to remove the cover,
as shown in the following figure.
1
2
3. Remove the top cover and loosen the screws.

M5 Screw torque: 24~26 kg-cm / [20.8~22.6 Ib-in.] / [2.4~2.5 Nm]
7-80
4. Install the conduit box by fastening all the screws shown in the following figure.
5. Fasten all the screws.

7-81
6. Place the cover back to the top and fasten the screws (as shown in the figure).
7-82
Frame H
Assembly for Frame H3 (Conduit Box)
1. Loosen the 3 screws and remove the cover of conduit box H3 as preparation.
2. Loosen the screws as below figure shown.
7-83
3. Fasten the M6 screws to locations shown in the following figure.

Screw Torque: 35~45 kg-cm / [30.3~39 Ib-in.] / [3.4~4.4 Nm]
4. Install the conduit box by fasten all the screws shown in the following figure.
Screw 1~6: M6 screw torque: 55~65 kg-cm / [47.7~56.4 Ib-in] / [5.4~6.4 Nm]
7 8 9
3 6
2 5
1 4
14
15
16
10 11 12 13
17
3
7
2
12
7-84
5. Fasten the 3 covers and screws, which were loosen from step 1, to the original location.
6. Installation complete.
7-85
Assembly for Frame H2 (Straight Stand)
1. Loosen the 3 screws and remove the cover of conduit box.
2. Remove the 4 covers of conduit box, and fasten the loosen screws back to the original location.
Screw Torque: 100~110 kg-cm / [86.7~95.4 Ib-in] / [9.8~10.8 Nm]
3. Remove the parts and screws as below figure shown.
7-86
4. Fasten the M6 screws to locations shown in below figure.

5. Install conduit box and accessories by fasten all the screws shown in the following figure.
7 8 9
3 6
2 5
1 4 14
15
16
10 11 12 13 17
3
7
2
12
7-87
6. Installation complete.
7-88
7-9 Fan Kit

 Frames of the fan kit
NOTE: The fan does not support hot swap function. For replacement, turn the power off before replacing the fan.
Frame A Heat sink Fan Model ”MKC-AFKM”
Applicable Model

VFD022C43A/43E; VFD037C43A/43E;
VFD040C43A/43E; VFD055C43A/43E;
VFD015C53A-21; VFD022C53A-21; VFD037C53A-21
Frame B Heat sink Fan Model ”MKC-BFKM1”
Applicable Model
VFD055C23A; VFD075C43A/43E; VFD055C53A-21;

Frame B Heat sink Fan Model ”MKC-BFKM2”
Applicable Model
VFD075C23A; VFD110C23A; VFD110C43A/43E;

VFD150C43A/43E
Frame B Capacitor Fan Model ”MKC-BFKB”
Applicable Model

VFD075C43A/43E; VFD110C43A/43E;
VFD150C43A/43E; VFD055C53A-21;
7-89
Frame C Capacitor Fan Model “MKC-CFKB1”
Applicable Model
VFD150C23A; VFD185C23A; VFD220C23A
Frame C Capacitor Fan Model “MKC-CFKB2”
Applicable Model
VFD185C43A/43E; VFD220C43A/43E;
VFD300C43A/43E
Frame C Heat sink Fan “MKC-CFKM”
Following Model use one set of MKC-CFKM:

VFD185C43A/E; VFD220C43A/E; VFD300C43A
Following Model use two sets of MKC-CFKM:

VFD300C43E
Frame C Heat sink Fan Capacitor Fan

‘MKC-CFKM1” “MKC-CFKB3”
Applicable Model
VFD185C63B-21; VFD220C63B-21; VFD300C63B-21;

VFD370C63B-21
Frame D0 Heat sink Fan Model Capacitor Fan Model

“MKC-D0FKM” ”MKC-DFKB”
Applicable Model
VFD370C43S/43U; VFD450C43S/43U;
7-90
Frame D Heat sink Fan Model Capacitor Fan Model

“MKC-DFKM” “MKC-DFKB”
Applicable Model
VFD300C23A/23E; VFD370C23A/23E;
VFD550C43A/43E; VFD750C43A/43E;
VFD450C63B-00; VFD550C63B-00;
VFD450C63B-21; VFD550C63B-21
Frame E Heat sink Fan Model “MKC-EFKM1”
Applicable Model
VFD450C23A/23E; VFD550C23A/23E
Frame E Heat sink Fan Model ”MKC-EFKM2”
Applicable Model
VFD750C23A/23E; VFD900C43A/43E;
VFD1100C43A/43E
Frame E Heat Sink Fan Model “MKC-EFKM3”
Applicable Model
VFD750C63B-00; VFD900C63B-00;
VFD1100C63B-00; VFD1320C63B-00;
VFD750C63B-21; VFD900C63B-21;
VFD1100C63B-21; VFD1320C63B-21
7-91
Frame E Capacitor Fan Model “MKC-EFKB”
Applicable Model
VFD450C23A/23E; VFD550C23A/23E;
VFD750C23A/23E; VFD900C43A/43E;
VFD1100C43A/43E; VFD750C63B-00;
VFD750C63B-21; VFD900C63B-00;
VFD1100C63B-00; VFD1320C63B-00;
VFD900C63B-21; VFD1100C63B-21;
VFD1320C63B-21
Frame F Heat sink Fan Model “MKC-FFKM”
Applicable Model
VFD900C23A/23E; VFD1320C43A/43E;
VFD1600C43A/43E; VFD1600C63B-00;
VFD2000C63B-00; VFD1600C63B-21;
VFD2000C63B-21
Frame F Capacitor Fan Model “MKC-FFKB”
Applicable Model
VFD900C23A/23E; VFD1320C43A/43E;
VFD1600C43A/43E; VFD1600C63B-00;
VFD2000C63B-00; VFD1600C63B-21;
VFD2000C63B-21
Frame G Heat sink Fan Model “MKC-GFKM”
Applicable Model
VFD1850C43A/43E; VFD2200C43A/43E;
VFD2500C63B-00; VFD3150C63B-00;
VFD2500C63B-21; VFD3150C63B-21
7-92
Frame H Heat sink Fan Model “MKC-HFKM”
Applicable Model
Following models use 2 sets of MKC-HFKM fan kit.
VFD2800C43A/43E; VFD3150C43A/43E;
VFD3550C43A/43E; VFD4500C43A/43E;
VFD2800C43E-1; VFD3150C43E-1; VFD3550C43E-1;
VFD4500C43E-1
Frame H Heat sink Fan Model “MKC-HFKM1”
Applicable Model
Following models use two sets of MKC-HFKM1:

VFD4000C63B-00; VFD4000C63B-21
Following models use three sets of MKC-HFKM1:

VFD4500C63B-00; VFD4500C63B-21;
VFD5600C63B-00; VFD5600C63B-21;
VFD6300C63B-00; VFD6300C63B-21
7-93
 Fan Removal
Frame A
Model “MKC-AFKM” : Heat Sink Fan
Applicable model
VFD015C23A; VFD022C23A; VFD037C23A; VFD022C43A/43E; VFD037C43A/43E; VFD040C43A/43E; VFD055C43A/43E;
1. Refer to Figure 1, press the tabs on both side of the 2. Disconnect the power terminal before removing the
fan to successfully remove the fan. fan. (As shown below.)
Figure 1 Figure 2
Frame B
Model ”MKC-BFKM1” Heat Sink Fan
Applicable model
VFD055C23A; VFD075C43A/43E; VFD055C53A-21; VFD075C53A-21; VFD110C53A-21; VFD150C53A-21
1. Refer to Figure 1, press the tab on both side of the 2. Disconnect the power terminal before removing the
fan to successfully remove the fan. fan. (As shown below.)
Figure 1 Figure 2
Frame B
Model “MKC-BFKM2” Heat Sink Fan
Applicable model
VFD075C23A; VFD110C23A; VFD110C43A/43E; VFD150C43A/43E
1. Refer to Figure 1, press the tab on both side of the fan 2. Disconnect the power terminal before removing the
to successfully remove the fan. fan. (As shown below.)
Figure 1 Figure 2
7-94
Frame B
Model ”MKC-BFKB” Capacitor Fan
Applicable model
VFD055C23A; VFD075C23A; VFD110C23A; VFD075C43A/43E; VFD110C43A/43E; VFD150C43A/43E; VFD055C53A-21;
Disconnect fan power and pull out the fan by using flathead screwdriver. (As shown in the larger picture)
Disconnect fan power and pull out the

fan by flathead screwdriver
Pay attention to direction of the

latch during the installation
Frame C
Model ”MKC-CFKM / MKC-CFKM1” Heat Sink Fan
Applicable model
Single fan kit applicable models (only fan kit 1 is required to be installed):
VFD185C43A/E; VFD220C43A/E; VFD300C43A; VFD185C63B-21; VFD220C63B-21; VFD300C63B-21; VFD370C63B-21
Duo fan kit applicable models (both fan kit 1 and 2 are required to be installed):
VFD150C23A; VFD185C23A; VFD220C23A; VFD300C43E
1. (As shown Figure 1) Before removing the fan, remove the cover by using a slotted screwdriver.
Figure 1
7-95
2. (As shown in Figure 2), remove the power connector, loosen the screw and remove the fan kit.
When installing the fan kit, have the label on the fan kit facing inside of the motor drive.
Screw’s torque force: 10~12 kg-cm / [8.7~10.4 lb-in.] / [1.0~1.2 Nm]
Figure 2
Frame C
Model “MKC-CFKB1” Capacitor Fan
Applicable model
VFD150C23A; VFD185C23A; VFD220C23A

Applicable model
VFD185C43A/43E; VFD220C43A/43E; VFD300C43A/43E

Applicable model
Disconnect fan power and pull out the fan by using flathead screwdriver. (As shown in the larger picture)
Disconnect fan power and pull out the

fan by flathead screwdriver.
Pay attention to direction of the

latch during the installation.
Figure 1
7-96
Frame D0
Model “MKC-DFKB” Capacitor Fan
Applicable model
VFD370C43S/43U; VFD450C43S/43U
1. Loosen screw 1 and screw 2, press the tab on the right 2. (Figure 2) Loosen screw 3, press the tab on the right
and left to remove the cover, follow the direction the and the left to remove the cover. Screw 3 Torque: 6~8
arrows indicate. Press on top of digital keypad to kg-cm / [5.2~6.9 lb-in.] / [0.6~0.8 Nm]
properly remove it. Screw 1, 2 Torque: 12~15 kg-cm /
[10.4~13 lb-in.] / [1.2~1.5 Nm]
3
1
2
Figure 1 Figure 2
3. Loosen screw 4 (figure 3) and disconnect fan power and
pull out the fan. (As shown in the enlarged picture 3)
Screw 4 Torque: 10~12 kg-cm / [8.7~10.4 lb-in.] /
[1.0~1.2 Nm]
Figure 3
Frame D0
Model “MKC-D0FKM” Heat Sink Fan
Applicable model
VFD370C43S/43U; VFD450C43S/43U
1. Loosen the screw and remove the fan kit. Screw torque: 24~26 kg-cm / [20.8~22.6 lb-in. / [2.4~2.5 Nm]
2. (As shown Figure 1) Before pulling out the fan, make sure the fan power is disconnected.
1
2
3
4
Figure 1
7-97
Frame D
Model “MKC-DFKB” Capacitor Fan
Applicable model
VFD300C23A/23E; VFD370C23A/23E; VFD550C43A/43E; VFD750C43A/43E; VFD450C63B-00; VFD550C63B-00;
VFD450C63B-21; VFD550C63B-21
1. (Figure 1) Loosen screw 1 and screw 2, press the tab on 2. (Figure 2) Loosen screw 3 & 4, press the tab on the right
the right and the left to remove the cover, follow the and the left to remove the cover. Screw 3, 4 Torque: 6~8
direction the arrows indicate in the following figure. kg-cm / [5.2~6.9 lb-in.] / [0.6~0.8 Nm]
Press on the top of digital keypad to properly remove it.
Screw 1, 2 Torque: 12~15 kg-cm / [10.4~13 lb-in.] /
[1.2~1.5 Nm]
4
3
1
2
Figure 2
Figure 1
3. Loosen screw 5 (figure 3) and disconnect fan power and pull out the fan. (As shown in the enlarged picture 3)
Screw 5 Torque: 10~12 kg-cm / [8.6~10.4 lb-in.] / [1.0~1.2 Nm]
Figure 3
Frame D
Model “MKC-DFKM” Heat Sink Fan
Applicable model
VFD450C63B-21; VFD550C63B-21
1. Loosen the screw and remove the fan kit. Screw torque: 24~26 kg-cm / [20.8~22.6 lb-in.] / [2.4~2.5 Nm]
2. (As shown Figure 1) Before removing the fan, remove the cover by using a slotted screwdriver.
1
2
3
4
Figure 1
7-98
Frame E
Applicable model
Applicable for MKC-EFKM1: VFD450C23A/23E; VFD550C23A/23E
Applicable for MKC-EFKM2: VFD750C23A/23E; VFD900C43A/43E; VFD1100C43A/43E
Applicable for MKC-EFKM3: VFD750C63B-00; VFD900C63B-00; VFD1100C63B-00; VFD1320C63B-00; VFD750C63B-21;
Applicable for MKC-EFKB: VFD450C23A/23E; VFD550C23A/23E; VFD750C23A/23E; VFD900C43A/43E; VFD1100C43A/43E;
Model “MKC-EFKM1” Heat Sink Fan Model “MKC-EFKM2” / “MKC-EFKM3” Heat Sink Fan
1. Loosen screw 1~4 (figure 1) and disconnect fan power 1. Loosen screw 1~4 (figure 2) and disconnect fan power
and pull out the fan. (As shown in the enlarged picture 3) and pull out the fan. (As shown in the enlarged picture 3)
Screw1~4 Torque: 24~26 kg-cm / [20.8~22.6 lb-in.] / Screw1~4 Torque: 24~26 kg-cm / [20.8~22.6 lb-in.] /
[2.4~2.5 Nm] [2.4~2.5 Nm]
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
Figure 1 Figure 2
Model “MKC-EFKB” Capacitor Fan
1. Loosen screw 1~2 (figure 3) and disconnect fan power and pull out the fan. (As shown in the enlarged picture 3)
Screw1~2 Torque: 24~26 kg-cm / [20.8~22.6 lb-in.] / [2.4~2.5 Nm]
Figure 3
7-99
Frame F
Applicable model
VFD900C23A/23E; VFD1320C43A/43E; VFD1600C43A/43E; VFD1600C63B-00; VFD2000C63B-00; VFD1600C63B-21;
VFD2000C63B-21
Fan model “MKC-FFKM” Heat Sink Fan

Loosen the screws and plug out the power of fan before removing (figure 1).
Figure 1
Fan model “MKC-FFKB” Capacitor Fan
1. Loosen the screw (figure 1) and removes the cover. 2. Loosen the screw (figure 2) and removes the cover.
Screw torque: 12~15 kg-cm / [10.4~13 Ib-in.] / Screw torque: 24~26 kg-cm / [20.8~22.6 Ib-in.] /
[1.2~1.5 Nm] [2.4~2.5 Nm]
7
Figure 1
Figure 2
3. Loosen the screws and remove the fan. (figure 3 and figure 4) Screw torque: 24~26 kg-cm / [20.8~22.6 Ib-in.] / [2.4~2.5 Nm]
11
10
9
11
10
9
Figure 3 Figure 4
7-100
Frame G
Applicable model
VFD1850C43A/43E; VFD2200C43A/43; VFD2500C63B-00; VFD3150C63B-00; VFD2500C63B-21; VFD3150C63B-21
Fan model “MKC-GFKM” Heat Sink Fan 2. For 1~8 shown in the figure 2: Loosen the screws
Screw torque: 35~40 kg-cm / [30.4~34.7 Ib-in.] /
1. Loosen the screw (figure 1) and remove the cover. [3.4~3.9 Nm]
Screw torque: 12~15 kg-cm / [10.4~13.1 Ib-in.] / 3. For 9~11 shown in the figure 2: Loosen the screws and
[1.2~1.5 Nm] removes the cover. Screw M4 torque: 14~16 kg-cm /
[12.2~13.9 Ib-in.] / [1.4~1.6 Nm]
Figure 1 Figure 2
4. Loosen screw 1, 2, 3 and remove the protective ring (as 5. Lift the fan by putting your finger through the protective
shown in figure 3) Screw torque: 14~16 kg-cm / [12.2~13.9 holes, as indicates in 1 and 2 on the figure 4.
Ib-in.] / [1.4~1.6 Nm]
Figure 4
Figure 3
6. For old drivers switching new fans, please follow below 7. Add cable model 3864483201 to connect the power board
steps: and fan connector. (The cable 3864483201 goes with the
Loosen screws 1~5, remove the cover (as below figure fan as accessory)
shown) M4 screw torque: 14~16 kg-cm / [12.2~13.9 lb-in] /
[1.4~1.6 Nm]
Cable 3864483201
Figure 6
Figure 5
7-101
Frame H
Applicable model
VFD2800C43A/43E; VFD3150C43A/43E; VFD3550C43A/43E; VD4500C43A/43E; VFD2800C43E-1; VFD3150C43E-1;
VFD3550C43E-1; VFD4500C43E-1
Fan model “MKC-HFKM” Heat Sink Fan 2. Loosen the screw 5~12 and remove the top cover (figure
2). Screw torque: 24~26kg-cm / [20.8~22.6 Ib-in.] /
1. Loosen the screw 1~4 and remove the top cover (figure 1) [2.4~2.5 Nm]
[1.4~1.6 Nm]
3
1
Figure 1
Figure 2
3. Press the latch to disconnect fan power (figure 3). 4. Loosen the screw 13~18 and remove the fan. Screw
torque: 24~26kg-cm / [20.8~22.6 Ib-in.] / [2.4~2.5 Nm]
(figure 4)
15
15 14
14
13 13
18
17 18
16
17
16
Make sure the power is

Pay attention to
properly disconnected
direction of the latch
before removal.
during the installation
Figure 3
Figure 4
7-102
Frame H
Applicable model
VFD4000C63B-00; VFD4000C63B-21
Fan model “MKC-HFKM1” Heat Sink Fan 2. Loosen the screw 1~8 and remove the top cover (figure 2).
Screw torque: 24~26kg-cm / [20.8~22.6 Ib-in.] /
[1.4~1.6 Nm]

Figure 1
Figure 2
3. Disconnect the fan connector (figure 3). 4. Loosen screws 1~4 (as shown below) and remove the fan.
Make sure the fan is disconnected when removing. Screw
(figure 4)

Figure 3
Figure 4
7-103
Frame H
Applicable model
VFD4500C63B-00; VFD5600C63B-00; VFD6300C63B-00; VFD4500C63B-21; VFD5600C63B-21; VFD6300C63B-21
Fan model “MKC-HFKM1” Heat Sink Fan 2. Loosen the screw 1~8 and remove the top cover (figure 2).
Screw torque: 24~26kg-cm / [20.8~22.6 Ib-in.] /
[1.4~1.6 Nm]

Figure 1
Figure 2
3. Disconnect the fan connector (figure 3). 4. Loosen screws 1~6 (as shown below) and remove the fan.
Make sure the fan is disconnected when removing. Screw
(figure 4)

Figure 3
Figure 4
7-104
7-10 Flange Mounting Kit

Applicable Models, Frame A~F
Frame A
『MKC-AFM1』
Applicable model
VFD015C23A; VFD022C23A; VFD022C43A/43E; VFD015C53A-21; VFD022C53A-21; VFD037C53A-21
Screw 1 *4
M3*P 0.5; L=6mm
Screw 2*8
M6*P 1.0; L=16mm
Accessories 1*1 Accessories 2*2 Accessories 3*2
『MKC-AFM』
Applicable model
VFD007C23A; VFD007C43A/43E; VFD015C43A/43E; VFD037C23A; VFD037C43A/43E; VFD040C43A/43E;
VFD055C43A/43E
Screw *8
M6*P 1.0; L=16mm
Accessory 2*2 Accessory t 3*2
Cutout dimension Unit: mm [inch]
7-105
『MKC-AFM1』Installation
1. Install accessory 1 by fastening 4 of the screw 1 (M3) (figure 1). Screw torque: 6~8 kg-cm / [5.21~6.94 Ib-in.] /
[0.6~0.8 Nm]
Figure 1
2. Install accessory 2&3 by fastening 2 of the screw 2 (M6) (figure 2). Screw torque: 25~30 kg-cm /
[21.7~26 Ib-in.] / [2.5~2.9 Nm]
Figure 2
3. Install accessory 2 & 3 by fastening 2 of the screw 2 (M6) (figure 3). Screw torque: 25~30 kg-cm / [21.7~26
Ib-in.] / [2.5~2.9 Nm]
Figure 3
4. Plate installation, place 4 of the screw 2 (M6) (figure 4) through accessory 2 & 3 and the plate then fasten the
screws. Screw torque: 25~30 kg-cm / [21.7~26 Ib-in.] / [2.5~2.9 Nm]
Figure 4
7-106
『MKC-AFM』 Installation
1. Fasten screw*2 (M6) and accessory 2 & 3. Screw torque: 25~30 kg-cm / [21.7~26 Ib-in.] / [2.5~2.9 Nm]
(figure 1)
Figure 1
2. Fasten screw*2 (M6) and accessory 2 & 3. Screw torque: 25~30 kg-cm / [21.7~26 Ib-in.] / [2.5~2.9 Nm]
(figure 2)
Figure 2
3. Plate installation, place 4 of the screw *4 (M6) through accessory 2 & 3 and the plate then fasten the screws.
Screw torque: 25~30 kg-cm / [21.7~26 Ib-in.] / [2.5~2.9 Nm] (figure 3)
Figure 3
7-107
Frame B
『MKC-BFM』
Applicable model
VFD055C23A; VFD075C23A; VFD110C23A; VFD075C43A/43E; VFD110C43A/43E; VFD150C43A/43E; VFD055C53A-21;
Screw 1 *4 ~ M8*P 1.25;

Screw 2*6 ~ M6*P 1.0
Accessory 1*2 Accessory 2*2
7-108
7-109
『MKC-BFM』Installation
1. Install accessory 1& 2 by fastening 4 of the screw 1 (M8). Screw torque: 40~45 kg-cm / [34.7~39.0 Ib-in.] /
[3.9~4.4 Nm] (As shown in the following figure)
2. Plate installation, place 6 of the screw 2 (M6) through accessory 1 & 2 and the plate then fasten the screws.
Screw torque: 25~30 kg-cm / [21.7~26 Ib-in.] / [2.5~2.9 Nm] (As shown in the following figure)
7-110
Frame C
『MKC-CFM』
Applicable model
VFD150C23A; VFD185C23A; VFD220C23A; VFD185C43A/43E; VFD220C43A/43E; VFD300C43A/43E; VFD185C63B-21;
Screw 1*4 ~ M8*P 1.25;

Screw 2*8 ~ M6*P 1.0
Accessory 1*2 Accessory 2*2
7-111
7-112
『MKC-CFM』Installation
1. Install accessory 1& 2 by fastening 4 of the screw 1(M8). Screw torque: 50~55 kg-cm / [43.4~47.7 Ib-in.] /
[4.9~5.4 Nm] (As shown in the following figure)
2. Plate installation, place 8 of the screw 2 (M6) through Accessory 1 & 2 and the plate then fasten the screws.
Screw torque: 25~30 kg-cm / [21.7~26 Ib-in.] / [2.5~2.9 Nm] (As shown in the following figure)
7-113
Frame D0
Applicable model
VFD370C43S/U; VFD450C43S/U
M10*P1.5(4X)
OR 11.0[0.43](4X)
7-114
Frame D
Applicable model
VFD450C63B-21; VFD550C63B-21
M10*P1.5(4X)
OR 11.0[0.43](4X)
7-115
Frame E
Applicable model
VFD450C23A/23E; VFD550C23A/23E; VFD750C23A/23E; VFD900C43A/43E; VFD1100C43A/43E; VFD750C63B-00;
VFD900C63B-00; VFD1100C63B-00; VFD1320C63B-00; VFD750C63B-21; VFD900C63B-21; VFD1100C63B-21;
VFD1320C63B-21
7-116
Frame D0 & D & E

1. Loosen 8 screws and remove Fixture 2 (as shown in 2. Loosen 10 screws and remove Fixture 1 (as shown
the following figure). in the following figure).
3. Fasten 4 screws (as shown in the following figure). 4. Fasten 5 screws (as shown in the following figure).
Screw torque: 30~32 kg-cm / [26.0~27.8 Ib-in.] / Screw torque: 30~32 kg-cm / [26.0~27.8 Ib-in.] /
[2.9~3.1 Nm]. [2.9~3.1 Nm]
5. Fasten 4 screws (as shown in the following figure). 6. Fasten 5 screws (as shown in the following figure).
Screw torque: 24~26 kg-cm / [20.8~22.6 Ib-in.] / Screw torque: 24~26 kg-cm / [20.8~22.6 Ib-in.] /
[2.4~2.5 Nm] [2.4~2.5 Nm]
7. Place 4 screws (M10) through Fixture 1 & 2 and the plate then fasten the screws. (as shown in the following
figure)
Frame D0/D M10*4
Screw torque: 200~240 kg-cm / [173.6~208.3 Ib-in.] / [19.6~235 Nm]
Frame E M12*4
Screw torque: 300~400 kg-cm / [260~347 Ib-in.] / [29.4~39.2 Nm]
7-117
Frame F
Applicable model
VFD900C23A/23E; VFD1320C43A/43E; VFD1600C43A/43E; VFD1600C63B-00; VFD2000C63B-00;
VFD1600C63B-21; VFD2000C63B-21
M12*P1.75(4X)
OR 13.0[0.51](4X)
7-118
Frame F
1. Loosen 12 screws and remove Fixture 2. 2. Loosen 12 screws and remove Fixture 2.
[2.4~2.5 Nm]
1
6
5 1
6
4 5
12 3
2
7
8
12 4
FIXTURE 2 3
9 7 2
10 8
11 FIXTURE2
9
10
11
3. Loosen screw 13 ~26 and remove Fixture 1. 4. Install Fixture 1 by fasten screw 13 ~26
[2.4~2.5 Nm]
13
19
18 13
19
17
18
20 17
16
26 20
14
26
15 16
25 14
25 15
24
24
FIXTURE1
FIXTURE1
23
21 23
21
22 22
5. Place 4 of the M12 screws through Fixture 1&2 and

plate then fasten the screws.
Screw torque: 300~400 kg-cm / [260~347 Ib-in.] /
[29.4~39.2 Nm]
Screws M12*4
7-119
7-11 Power Terminal Kit

『MKC-PTCG』 (Applicable for Frame G models-VFDXXXCXXA)
Applicable model
VFD1850C43A; VFD2200C43A
(The MKC-PTCG is optional for the above models, after installation, the 12 plus will be 6 plus.)
Accessories Diagram of power terminal connection

Item Description Q’ty M12 Torque: 408 kg-cm / [354.1 lb-in] / [39.98 Nm]
1 Copper Assy. 3
1.1 Copper 3
1.2 Screw M12*25L 6
1.3 Spring 6
1.4 Washer 6
1.5 Nuts 6
『MKC-PTCG』Installation
1. Loosen the 4 screws on the cover, as shown in the following figure. Screw Torque: 12~15 kg-cm / [10.4~13
lb-in] / [1.2~1.5 Nm]
2. Remove the 5 screws from the FR4 board, as shown in the following figure. (The FR4 board is not needed
after the installation of the power terminal kit). Screw Torque: 12~15 kg-cm / [10.4~13 lb-in] / [1.2~1.5 Nm]
FR4 Board
7-120
3. Loosen the upper M8 nuts (1~6) with a sleeve wrench (12mm of the sleeve). M8 Torque: 90kg / [78.1 lb-in] /
[8.8 Nm]
4. Install the 3pcs copper assy., as shown in the following figure 1. Fasten the upper M8 nuts (1~6) with a sleeve
wrench (12mm of the sleeve), as shown in the figure 2 below.
M8 Torque: 180 kg-cm / [156.2 lb-in] / [17.65 Nm]
Figure 1 Figure 2
Copper Assy. Installation complete
Figure 3
5. Put the cover back and fasten the screws as shown in the figure below. Screw Torque: 12~15 kg-cm /
[10.4~13 lb-in] / [1.2~1.5 Nm]
7-121
7-12 USB/RS-485 Communication Interface IFD6530

Warning
 Please thoroughly read this instruction sheet before installation and putting it into use.
 The content of this instruction sheet and the driver file may be revised without prior notice.
Please consult our distributors or download the most updated instruction/ driver version at
http://www.delta.com.tw/product/em/control/cm/control_cm_main.asp
1. Introduction
IFD6530 is a convenient RS485-to-USB converter, which does not require external power-supply and complex
setting process. It supports baud rate from 75 to 115.2Kbps and auto switching direction of data transmission. In
addition, it adopts RJ-45 in RS485 connector for users to wire conveniently. And its tiny dimension, handy use of
plug-and-play and hot-swap provide more conveniences for connecting all DELTA IABG products to your PC.
Applicable Models: All DELTA IABG products.
(Application & Dimension)
2. Specifications
Power supply No external power is needed
Power consumption 1.5W
Isolated voltage 2,500VDC

75Kbps, 150Kbps, 300Kbps, 600Kbps, 1,200Kbps, 2,400Kbps, 4,800Kbps, 9,600Kbps,
Baud rate
19,200Kbps, 38,400Kbps, 57,600Kbps, 115,200Kbps
RS-485 connector RJ-45
USB connector A type (plug)
Compatibility Full compliance with USB V2.0 specification
Max. cable length RS-485 Communication Port: 100 m
Support RS-485 half-duplex transmission

Table 7-73
7-122
 RJ-45
PIN Description PIN Description
1 Reserved 5 SG+
2 Reserved 6 GND
3 GND 7 Reserved
4 SG- 8 +9V
3. Preparations before Driver Installation

Please extract the driver file (IFD6530_Drivers.exe) by following steps.
You could find driver file (IFD6530_Drivers.exe) in the CD supplied with IFD6530.
Note: DO NOT connect IFD6530 to PC before extracting the driver file.
STEP 1 STEP 2
STEP 3 STEP 4
STEP 5
You should have a folder marked SiLabs under drive C. c:\ SiLabs
7-123
4. Driver Installation
After connecting IFD6530 to PC, please install driver by following steps.
7-124
5. LED Display
1. Steady Green LED ON: power is ON.
2. Blinking orange LED: data is transmitting.
7-125
[This page intentionally left blank]
7-126
Chapter 8 Option CardsC2000
Chapter 8 Option Cards
8-1 Option Card Installation
8-2 EMC-D42A -- Extension card for 4-point digital input/ 2-point digital input
8-3 EMC-D611A -- Extension card for 6-point digital input (110VAC input voltage)
8-4 EMC-R6AA -- Relay output extension card (6-point N.O. output contact)
8-5 EMC-A22A -- Extension card for 2-point analog input/ 2-point analog output
8-6 EMC-BPS01 -- +24V power card
8-7 EMC-PG01L / EMC-PG02L -- PG card (Line driver)
8-8 EMC-PG01O / EMC-PG02O -- PG card (Open collector)
8-9 EMC-PG01U / EMC-PG02U -- PG card (ABZ Incremental encoder signal/ UVW

Hall position signal input)
8-10 EMC-PG01R -- PG card (Resolver)
8-11 CMC-MOD01 -- Communication card, Modbus TCP
8-12 CMC-PD01 -- Communication card, PROFIBUS DP
8-13 CMC-DN01 -- Communication card, DeviceNet
8-14 CMC-EIP01 -- Communication card, EtherNet/IP
8-15 CMC-EC01 -- Communication card, EtherCAT
8-16 CMC-PN01 -- Communication card, PROFINET
8-17 EMC-COP01 -- Communication card, CANopen
8-18 Delta Standard Fieldbus Cables
8-1
Please select applicable option cards for your drive or contact local distributor for suggestion.
To prevent drive damage during installation, please remove the digital keypad and the cover before wiring.
Refer to the following instruction.
8-1 Option Card Installation

8-1-1 Remove covers
Frame A–C
Screw Torque: 8–10 kg-cm / [6.9–8.7 lb-in.] / [0.8–1.0 Nm]
Frame D0
Frame D
8-2
Frame E
Screw Torque: 12–15 kg-cm / [10.4–13 lb-in.] / [1.2–1.5 Nm]
Frame F
Frame G
8-3
Frame H
8-1-2 Option Card Installation Location

1 RJ45 (Socket) for digital keypad KPC-CC01
Please refer to CH10 Digital Keypad for more details on
1
○ KPC-CC01.
Please refer to CH10 Digital Keypad for more details on
3
○ Slot 3
optional accessory RJ45 extension cable.
2 Communication extension card (Slot 1)
4
○ Slot 2 2
○ CMC-MOD01; CMC-PD01; CMC-DN01; CMC-EIP01;
Slot 1
EMC-COP01; CMC-EC01; CMC-PN01
3 I/O & Relay extension card (Slot 3)
EMC-D42A; EMC-D611A; EMC-R6AA;
EMC-BPS01; EMC-A22A
4 PG Card (Slot 2)
EMC-PG01L; EMC-PG02L; EMC-PG01O; EMC-PG02O;
EMC-PG01U; EMC-PG02U; EMC-PG01R;
Screws Specification for option card terminals:

EMC-D42A; EMC-D611A; Wire gauge 0.2–0.5 mm2 [26–20 AWG]
EMC-BPS01 Torque 5 kg-cm / [4.4 Ib-in] / [0.5 Nm]
Wire gauge 0.2–0.5 mm2 [26–20 AWG]

EMC-R6AA
Torque 8 kg-cm / [7 Ib-in] / [0.8 Nm]
EMC-PG01L; EMC-PG01O Wire gauge 0.2–0.5 mm2 [26–20 AWG]
EMC-PG01R; EMC-PG01U Torque 2 kg-cm / [1.73 Ib-in] / [0.2 Nm]
8-4
I/O & Relay extension card (Slot 3)

EMC-D42A EMC-R6AA
EMC-BPS01 EMC-D611A
EMC-A22A
8-5
PG card (Slot 2)
EMC-PG01O / EMC-PG02O EMC-PG01L / EMC-PG02L
EMC-PG01U / EMC-PG02U EMC-PG01R
8-6
Communication extension card (Slot 1)

CMC-PD01 CMC-DN01
CMC-MOD01 / CMC-EIP01 EMC-COP01
CMC-EC01 CMC-PN01
8-7
8-1-3 Installation and Disconnection of Extension Card
8-1-3-1 Installation
Communication card: EMC-COP01, CMC-MOD01, CMC-EIP01, CMC-DN01, CMC-PD01, CMC-EC01,
CMC-PN01
8-8
I/O & Relay Card: EMC-D42A, EMC-D611A, EMC-R6AA, EMC-BPS01, EMC-A22A
8-9
PG Card: EMC-PG01U, EMC-PG01R, EMC-PG01L, EMC-PG01O
8-10
8-1-3-2 Disconnecting the extension card

Communication card: EMC-COP01, CMC-MOD01, CMC-EIP01, CMC-DN01, CMC-PD01, CMC-EC01,
CMC-PN01
8-11
I/O & Relay card: EMC-D42A, EMC-D611A, EMC-R6AA, EMC-BPS01, EMC-A22A
8-12
PG card: EMC-PG01U, EMC-PG01R, EMC-PG01L, EMC-PG01O
8-13
8-2 EMC-D42A -- Extension card for 4-point digital input/ 2-point digital input
Common for Multi-function input terminals
COM Select SINK (NPN) / SOURCE (PNP) in J1 jumper / external power
supply
Refer to parameters 02-26–02-29 to program the multi-function
inputs MI10–MI13.
Internal power is applied from terminal E24: +24VDC ±5% 200mA,
5W
MI10–MI13
External power +24VDC: max. voltage 30VDC, min. voltage 19VDC,
30W
ON: the activation current is 6.5mA
I/O Extension OFF: leakage current tolerance is 10μA
Multi-function output terminals (photocoupler)
Card
The AC motor drive releases various monitor signals, such as drive
in operation, frequency attained and overload indication, via
transistor (open collector).
MO10–MO11
MO10
MO11
MXM
Common for multi-function output terminals MO10,
MXM MO11(photocoupler)
Max 48VDC 50mA
8-3 EMC-D611A -- Extension card for 6-point digital input (110VAC input voltage)
AC AC power Common for multi-function input terminal (Neutral)
Refer to Pr. 02-26–Pr. 02-31 for multi-function input selection
I/O Extension Input voltage: 100–130VAC
Card Input frequency: 47–63Hz
MI10–MI15 Input impedance: 27Kohm
Terminal response time:
ON: 10ms
OFF: 20ms
8-4 EMC-R6AA -- Relay output extension card (6-point N.O. output contact)
Refer to Pr. 02-36– Pr. 02-41 for multi-function output selection
Resistive load:
3A (N.O.) / 250VAC
Relay Extension 5A (N.O.) / 30VDC
RA10–RA15
Card Inductive load (COS 0.4)
RC10–RC15
1.2A (N.O.) / 250VAC
2.0A (N.O.) / 30VDC
It is used to output each monitor signal, such as drive is in
operation, frequency attained or overload indication.
8-14
8-5 EMC-A22A -- Extension card for 2-point analog input/ 2-point analog output
Refer to Pr. 14-00–Pr. 14-01 for function selection (input), and Pr.
14-18–Pr. 14-19 for mode selection.
There are two sets of AI port, SSW3 (AI10) and SSW4 (AI11),
AI10, AI11
which can be switched to Voltage or Current mode.
Voltage mode: Input 0–10V
Current mode: Input 0–20mA / 4–20mA
Analog I/O
Extension Card Refer to Pr. 14-12–Pr. 14-13 for function selection (output), and Pr.
14-36–Pr. 14-37 for mode selection.
There are two sets of AO port, SSW1 (AO10) and SSW2 (AO11),
AO10, AO11
which can be switched to Voltage or Current mode.
Voltage mode: Output 0–10V
Current mode: Output 0–20mA / 4–20mA
ACM Analog signal common terminal
8-6 EMC-BPS01 -- +24V power card

Input power: 24V±5%
Maximum input current: 0.5A
Note:
1) Do not connect drive control terminal GND directly to the
EMC-BPS01 input terminal GND.
Function: When the drive is only powered by EMC-BPS01, the
communication can be assured and support all communication
External Power
24V cards and following functions:
Supply
GND Parameters read and write
Keypad can be displayed
Keypad button can be operated (except RUN)
Analog input is effective
Multi-input (FWD, REV, MI1–MI8) needs external power supply to
operate
Following functions are not supported：
Relay output (including extension card), PG card, PLC function
Note: Refer to I/O & Relay extension card installation/ disconnecting method for PG Card installation/ disconnecting.
8-15
8-7 EMC-PG01L / EMC-PG02L -- PG card (Line driver)

8-7-1 Terminal description
Set by Pr.10-00–10-02, Pr.10-16–10-18
Output voltage for power: +5V/+12V5% (use FSW3 to switch
VP +5V/+12V)
Max. output current: 200mA
DCM Common for power and signal
PG1 Encoder input signal (Line Driver or Open Collector)
Open Collector input voltage: +5–+24V (Note 1)
A1, /A1, B1,
It can be 1-phase or 2-phase input.
/B1, Z1, /Z1
EMC-PG01L: Max. input frequency: 300kHz
EMC-PG02L: Max. input frequency: 30kHz (Note 2)
Pulse Input signal (Line Driver or Open Collector)
Open Collector input voltage: +5–+24V (Note1)
A2, /A2,
PG2 It can be 1-phase or 2-phase input.
B2, /B2
EMC-PG01L: Max. input frequency: 300kHz
EMC-PG02L: Max. input frequency: 30kHz (Note 2)
PG Card Output signals. It has division frequency function: 1–255
times
Max. output voltage for Line driver: 5VDC
AO, /AO,
BO, /BO, Max. output current: 15mA
PG OUT
ZO, /ZO, EMC-PG01L Max. output frequency: 300kHz
SG
EMC-PG02L Max. output frequency: 30kHz
SG is the GND of PG card. It is also the GND of position machine
or PLC to make the output signal to be the common pivot point.
Note 1: Open Collector application, input current 5–15mA to each set then each set needs one pull-up resistor.
If input voltage of open collector is 24V, the power of encoder needs to be connected externally. Please refer to
diagram 2 of PG1.
5V Recommended pull-up resistor: above 100–220, 1/2W
12V Recommended pull-up resistor: above 510–1.35k, 1/2W
24V Recommended pull-up resistor: above 1.8k–3.3k, 1/2W
Note 2: If the required bandwidth is not over 30kHz at the application, it is recommended to use
EMC-PG02O/L (bandwidth 30kHz) to avoid interference.
PG1 card wiring diagram (the image 1 and 2 below are wiring diagrams of Open Collector encoder)
8-16
PG2 Wiring Diagram
8-17
8-7-2 EMC-PG01L / EMC-PG02L Wiring Diagram

 Please use a shielded cable to prevent interference. Do not run control wires parallel to any
high voltage AC power line (200 VAC and above).
 Recommended wire size 0.21–0.81mm2 [AWG24–AWG18].
 Cable length: Single-phase input, less than 30m/ 2-phase input, less than 100m
8-18
8-8 EMC-PG01O / EMC-PG02O -- PG card (Open collector)

8-8-1 Terminal descriptions
Set by Pr.10-00–10-02, Pr.10-16–10-18
Output voltage for power: +5V/+12V5% (use FSW3 to switch +5V/+12V)
VP
PG1 Encoder Input signal (Line Driver or Open Collector)

Open Collector Input Voltage: +5V–+24V (Note 1)
A1, /A1, B1, It can be 1-phase or 2-phase input.
/B1, Z1, /Z1
EMC-PG01O Max. input frequency: 300kHz
EMC-PG02O Max. input frequency: 30kHz (Note 2)
Pulse Input Signal (Line Driver or Open Collector)
Open Collector Input Voltage: +5–+24V (Note 1)
A2, /A2, It can be 1-phase or 2-phase input.
PG2
B2, /B2
EMC-PG02O Max. input frequency: 30kHz (Note 2)
Needs external power source for PG OUT circuit.
V+, V+
Input voltage of power: +7V – +24V
V- Input voltage for the negative side
PG Card Output signals has division frequency function: 1–255 times.
On the open collector’s output signal, add a high-pull resistor on the
PG OUT
external power V+–V- (e.g. power of PLC) to prevent the interference of
A/O, B/O, Z/O the receiving signal. Max. [Three pull-up resistor are included in the
package (1.8k/1W)] (Note 1)
If input voltage of open collector is 24V, the power of encoder needs to be connected externally. Please refer to
diagram 2 of PG1.
Note 2: If the required bandwidth is not over 30kHz at the application, it is recommended to use
EMC-PG02O/L (bandwidth 30kHz) to avoid interference.
8-19
PG1 card wiring diagram (the image 1 and 2 below are wiring diagrams of Open Collector encoder)
PG2 Wiring Diagram
8-20
8-8-2 EMC-PG01O / EMC-PG02O Wiring Diagram

8-21
8-9 EMC-PG01U / EMC-PG02U

-- PG card (ABZ Incremental encoder signal/ UVW Hall position signal input)
1. FSW1 S: Standard UVW Output Encoder; D: Delta Encoder
2. When using the Delta Encoder, wait for at least 250ms after powering up to receive signals from
UVW. If a running command is received before UVW signals finish, a PGF5 error message will be
given. So wait for 250ms before sending a running command.
3. EMC-PG02U has encoder disconnection detection function.
8-9-1 Terminal descriptions
Set by Pr.10-00–10-02, Pr.10-16–10-18
Output voltage for power: +5V/+12V5% (use FSW3 to
VP switch +5V/+12V)
PG1
Encoder input signal (Line Driver)
A1, /A1, B1, /B1, Z1, /Z1 It can be 1-phase or 2-phase input.
Max. output frequency: 300kHz
U1, /U1, V1, /V1, W1, /W1 Encoder input signal
A2, /A2, Open Collector Input Voltage: +5–+24V (Note1)
PG2
B2, /B2 It can be 1-phase or 2-phase input.
Max. output frequency: 300kHz.
PG Card Output signals.
It has division frequency function: 1–255 times
Max. output voltage for Line driver: 5VDC
AO, /AO, BO, /BO, ZO, Max. output current: 15mA
PG OUT
/ZO, SG Max. output frequency: 300kHz
SG is the GND of PG card. It is also the GND of position
machine or PLC to make the output signal to be the
common pivot point.
5V Recommended pull-up resistor: above100–220, 1/2W
24V Recommended pull-up resistor: above1.8k–3.3k, 1/2W
PG2 Wiring Diagram
8-22
8-9-2 EMC-PG01U / EMC-PG02U Wiring Diagram

8-23
8-10 EMC-PG01R -- PG card (Resolver)

8-10-1 Terminal Descriptions
Set by Pr.10-00–10-02 and Pr.10-30 Resolver. (Pr.10-00=3, Pr.10-01=1024)
Resolver Output Power
R1- R2
7Vrms, 10kHz
PG1
S1, /S3, Resolver Input Signal (S2, /S4=Sin; S1, /S3=Cos)
S2, /S4, 3.5±0.175Vrms, 10kHz
A2, /A2, Open Collector Input Voltage: +5–+24V (Note1)
PG2
B2, /B2 It can be 1-phase or 2-phase input.
Max. output frequency: 300kHz
PG Card Output signals. It has division frequency function: 1–255
times
AO, /AO, Max. output voltage for Line driver: 5VDC
PG OUT BO, /BO, Max. output current: 15mA
ZO, /ZO,
SG, Max. output frequency: 300kHz
SG is the GND of PG card. It is also the GND of position machine or
PLC to make the output signal to be the common pivot point.
PG2 Wiring Diagram
 DOS (Degradation of Signal)：If the amplitude of the sine wave input of the S1-/S3/ S2-/S4 is lower
than or higher than the encoder IC’s specification, a red light will be on. The possible reasons which
cause this problem are the following.
1. The turns ratio of the resolver encoder is not 1:0.5 which makes the sine wave input of the
S1-/S3/S2-/S4 not equal to 3.5±0.175Vrms.
2. While motor is running, motor creates common mode noise which makes accumulated voltage to
be more than 3.5±0.175Vrms
 LOT (Loss of Tracking): Compare the angle of S1-/S3/S2-/S4 sine wave input to the R1-R2 cosine
wave. If their difference is more than 5 degree, a red light will be on. Here are the possible reasons
why that happens:
1. The output frequency of the PG card is incorrect.
2. The specification of Resolver’s encoder is not 10kHz
3. The motor creates common mode noise while it is running. That causes a big difference, while
the motor is rotating, between main winding’s cosine wave angle and the sine wave angle of
second and third windings.
8-24
8-10-2 EMC-PG01R Wiring Diagram

 Cable length: PG1 input, less than 30m; PG2 single-phase input, less than 30m/ 2-phase input,
less than 100m
8-25
8-11 CMC-MOD01 -- Communication card, Modbus TCP
8-11-1 Features
1. Supports Modbus TCP protocol
2. MDI/MDI-X auto-detect
3. Baud rate: 10/100Mbps auto-detect
4. E-mail alarm
5. AC motor drive keypad/ Ethernet configuration
6. Virtual serial port.
8-11-2 Product File
 I/O CARD & Relay Card

 PG Card
 Comm. Card
 RJ-45 connection port
 Removable control circuit
terminal
8-11-3 Specifications
Network Interface
Interface RJ-45 with Auto MDI/MDIX

Number of ports 1 Port
Transmission method IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.3u
Transmission cable Category 5e shielding 100M
Transmission speed 10/100 Mbps Auto-Detect
ICMP, IP, TCP, UDP, DHCP, HTTP, SMTP, MODBUS OVER TCP/IP,
Network protocol
Delta Configuration
Electrical Specification
Power supply voltage 5VDC (supply by the AC motor drive)

Insulation voltage 500VDC
Weight 25g
8-26
Environment
ESD (IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 61000-4-2)

EFT (IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 61000-4-4)
Noise immunity
Surge Test (IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 61000-4-5)
Conducted Susceptibility Test (IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 61000-4-6)
Operation: -10°C–50°C (temperature), 90% (humidity)
Operation/ storage
Storage: -25°C –70°C (temperature), 95% (humidity)
International standard: IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 60068-2-6/ IEC
Vibration/ shock immunity
61800-5-1, IEC 60068-2-27
8-11-4 Communication Parameters for VFD-C2000 Connected to Ethernet
When VFD-C2000 is linked to Ethernet, please set up the communication parameters based on
the table below. Ethernet master will be able to read/write the frequency word and control word of
VFD-C2000 after communication parameters setup.
Parameter Function Set value (Dec) Explanation
Source of frequency The frequency command is controlled by
Pr. 00-20 8
command setting communication card.
Source of operation The operation command is controlled by
Pr. 00-21 5
Decoding method for
Pr. 09-30 0 Decoding method for Delta AC motor drive
communication
Pr. 09-75 IP setting 0 Static IP(0) / Dynamic distribution IP(1)
Pr. 09-76 IP address -1 192 IP address 192.168.1.5
Pr. 09-80 Netmask -1 255 Netmask 255.255.255.0
Pr. 09-84 Default gateway -1 192 Default gateway 192.168.1.1
8-11-5 Basic Registers

BR# R/W Content Explanation
Set up by the system; read only. The model code of
#0 R Model name
CMC-MOD01=H’0203
Firmware Displaying the current firmware version in hex, e.g. H’0100 indicates the
#1 R
version firmware version V1.00.
Displaying the data in decimal form. 10,000s digit and 1,000s digit are for
Release date of
#2 R “month”; 100s digit and 10s digit are for “day”.
the version
For 1 digit: 0 = morning; 1 = afternoon.
#11 R/W Modbus Timeout Pre-defined setting: 500 (ms)
#13 R/W Keep Alive Time Pre-defined setting: 30 (s)
8-27
8-11-6 LED Indicator & Troubleshooting

LED Indicators
LED Status Indication How to correct it?
On Power supply in normal status --
POWER Green
Off No power supply Check the power supply
On Network connection in normal status --
LINK Green Flashes Network in operation --

Check if the network cable is
Off Network not connected connected
Troubleshooting
Abnormality Cause How to correct it?
Check if AC motor drive is powered, and if the
AC motor drive not powered
power supply is normal.
POWER LED off
CMC-MOD01 not connected Make sure CMC-MOD01 is connected to AC motor
to AC motor drive drive.
CMC-MOD01 not connected Make sure the network cable is correctly connected
to network to network.
LINK LED off
Poor contact to RJ-45 Make sure RJ-45 connector is connected to
connector Ethernet port.
CMC-MOD01 not connected

Make sure CMC-MOD01 is connected to network.
to network
No module found PC and CMC-MOD01 in
Search by IP or set up relevant settings by AC
different networks and
motor drive keypad.
blocked by network firewall.
CMC-MOD01 not connected Make sure CMC-MOD01 is connected to the
to network network.
Fail to open Incorrect communication Make sure the communication setting in DCISoft is
CMC-MOD01 setup setting in DCISoft set to Ethernet.
page PC and CMC-MOD01 in
different networks and Conduct the setup by AC motor drive keypad.
blocked by network firewall.
Able to open Check if the network setting for CMC-MOD01 is
CMC-MOD01 setup correct. For the Intranet setting in your company,
Incorrect network setting in
page but fail to please consult your IT staff. For the Internet setting
CMC-MOD01
utilize webpage in your home, please refer to the network setting
monitoring instruction provided by your ISP.
Incorrect network setting in Check if the network setting for CMC-MOD01 is
CMC-MOD01 correct.
Fail to send e-mail
Incorrect mail server setting Please confirm the IP address for SMTP-Server.
8-28
8-12 CMC-PD01 -- Communication card, PROFIBUS DP
8-12-1 Features
1. Supports PZD control data exchange.
2. Supports PKW polling AC motor drive parameters.
3. Supports user diagnosis function.
4. Auto-detects baud rates; supports Max. 12Mbps.
8-12-2 Product Profile
1. NET indicator
2. POWER indicator
3. Positioning hole
4. AC motor drive connection
port
5. PROFIBUS DP connection
port
6. Screw fixing hole
7. Fool-proof groove
PROFIBUS DP Connector
Interface DB9 connector
Transmission method High-speed RS-485
Transmission cable Shielded twisted pair cable
Electrical isolation 500VDC
Communication
Message type Cyclic data exchange
Module name CMC-PD01
GSD document DELA08DB.GSD
Company ID 08DB (HEX)
Serial transmission
9.6Kbps; 19.2Kbps; 93.75Kbps; 187.5Kbps; 500Kbps; 1.5Mbps; 3Mbps; 6Mbps;
speed supported
12Mbps (bit per second)
(auto-detection)
Power supply 5VDC (supplied by AC motor drive)
Power consumption 1W
Weight 28g
8-29
Environment
ESD(IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 61000-4-2)
EFT(IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 61000-4-4)
Noise immunity Surge Teat(IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 61000-4-5)
Conducted Susceptibility Test(IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 61000-4-6)
Operation: -10ºC–50ºC (temperature), 90% (humidity)
Operation /storage
Storage: -25ºC–70ºC (temperature), 95% (humidity)
Shock / vibration International standards: IEC61131-2, IEC60068-2-6 (TEST Fc) / IEC61131-2 & IEC
resistance 60068-2-27 (TEST Ea)
8-12-4 Installation
PROFIBUS DP Connector
PIN PIN name Definition

1 - Not defined
2 - Not defined 9 5
3 Rxd/Txd-P Sending / receiving data P(B)
4 - Not defined
5 DGND Data reference ground
6 1
6 VP Power voltage – positive
7 - Not defined
8 Rxd/Txd-N Sending/receiving data N(A)
9 - Not defined

There are 2 LED indicators on CMC-PD01: POWER LED and NET LED. POWER LED displays the
status of the working power. NET LED displays the connection status of the communication.
POWER LED
LED status Indication How to correct it?
Green light on Power supply in normal status. --
Check if the connection between CMC-PD01 and AC
Off No power
motor drive is normal.
NET LED

Green light on Normal status --
CMC-PD01 is not connected to
Red light on Connect CMC-PD01 to PROFIBUS DP bus.
PROFIBUS DP bus.
Red light Invalid PROFIBUS communication Set the PROFIBUS address of CMC-PD01 between
flashes address 1 – 125 (decimal)
Orange light CMC-PD01 fails to communication Switch off the power and check whether CMC-PD01 is
flashes with AC motor drive. correctly and normally connected to AC motor drive.
8-30
8-13 CMC-DN01 -- Communication card, DeviceNet

8-13-1 Functions
1. Based on the high-speed communication interface of Delta HSSP protocol, able to conduct
immediate control to AC motor drive.
2. Supports Group 2 only connection and polling I/O data exchange.
3. For I/O mapping, supports Max. 32 words of input and 32 words of output.
4. Supports EDS file configuration in DeviceNet configuration software.
5. Supports all baud rates on DeviceNet bus: 125Kbps, 250Kbps, 500Kbps and extendable serial
transmission speed mode.
6. Node address and serial transmission speed can be set up on AC motor drive.
7. Power supplied from AC motor drive.
1. NS indicator
2. MS indicator
3. POWER indicator
4. Positioning hole
5. DeviceNet connection port
port
DeviceNet Connector
Interface 5-PIN open removable connector of 5.08mm PIN interval
Transmission CAN
th d
Transmission cable Shielded twisted pair cable (with 2 power cables)
Transmission speed 125Kbps, 250Kbps, 500Kbps and extendable serial transmission speed
d
Network protocol DeviceNet protocol
AC Motor Drive Connection Port

Interface 50 PIN communication terminal
Transmission method SPI communication
1. Communicating with AC motor drive
Terminal function
2. Transmitting power supply from AC motor drive
Communication Delta HSSP protocol
t l
8-31
Power supply voltage 5VDC (supplied by AC motor drive)
Communication wire
0.85W
power consumption
Power consumption 1W
Weight 23g
Environment
ESD (IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 61000-4-2)
EFT (IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 61000-4-4)
Noise immunity
Surge Teat(IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 61000-4-5)
Operation: -10ºC –50ºC (temperature), 90% (humidity)
Operation /storage
Storage: -25ºC–70ºC (temperature), 95% (humidity)
Shock / vibration International standards: IEC61800-5-1, IEC60068-2-6 (TEST Fc) /
resistance IEC61800-5-1 & IEC60068-2-27 (TEST Ea)
8-13-4 Installation
DeviceNet Connector
PIN Signal Color Definition
1 V+ Red DC24V 1
2
2 H White Signal+
3
3 S - Earth 4
4 L Blue Signal- 5
5 V- Black 0V

There are 3 LED indicators on CMC-DN01. POWER LED displays the status of power supply. MS
LED and NS LED are dual-color LED, displaying the connection status of the communication and
error messages.
POWER LED

Off Power supply in abnormal status. Check the power supply of CMC-DN01.
Green light On Power supply in normal status --
8-32
NS LED
1. Check the power of CMC-DN01 and see if the

connection is normal.
No power supply or CMC-DN01 has 2. Make sure at least one or more nodes are on the
Off
not completed MAC ID test yet. bus.
3. Check if the serial transmission speed of
CMC-DN01 is the same as that of other nodes.
1. Configure CMC-DN01 to the scan list of the

Green light CMC-DN01 is on-line but has not master.
flashes established connection to the master.
2. Re-download the configured data to the master.
CMC-DN01 is on-line and is normally

Green light on --
connected to the master
Red light CMC-DN01 is on-line, but I/O 1. Check if the network connection is normal.
flashes connection is timed-out. 2. Check if the master operates normally.
1. Make sure all the MAC IDs on the network are
not repeated.
1. The communication is down. 2. Check if the network installation is normal.
2. MAC ID test failure. 3. Check if the baud rate of CMC-DN01 is
Red light on
3. No network power supply. consistent with that of other nodes.
4. CMC-DN01 is off-line. 4. Check if the node address of CMC-DN01 is
illegal.
5. Check if the network power supply is normal.
MS LED

Check the power supply of CMC-DN01 and see if
Off No power supply or being off-line
the connection is normal.
Green light
Waiting for I/O data Switch the master PLC to RUN status
flashes
Green light on I/O data are normal --
Red light 1. Reconfigure CMC-DN01
Mapping error
flashes 2. Re-power AC motor drive
1. See the error code displayed on AC motor drive.
Red light on Hardware error
2. Send back to the factory for repair if necessary.
If the flashing lasts for a long time, turn off the
Orange light CMC-DN01 is establishing connection power and check if CMC-DN01 and AC motor drive
flashes with AC motor drive. are correctly installed and normally connected to
each other.
8-33
8-14 CMC-EIP01 -- Communication card, EtherNet/IP

8-14-1 Features
1. Supports Modbus TCP and Ethernet/IP protocol

2. Supports all parameters read/write (use with EIP V.1.06)
3. MDI/MDI-X auto-detect
4. Baud rate: 10/100Mbps auto-detect
5. AC motor drive keypad/ Ethernet configuration
6. Virtual serial port
[Figure1]

2. Positioning hole
port
4. LINK indicator
5. RJ-45 connection port
6. POWER indicator
7. Alignment groove
Network Interface
Interface RJ-45 with Auto MDI/MDIX
Transmission method IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.3u
Transmission cable Category 5e shielding 100M
Transmission speed 10/100 Mbps Auto-Detect
ICMP, IP, TCP, UDP, DHCP, HTTP, SMTP, MODBUS over TCP/IP, EtherNet/IP, Delta
Network protocol
Configuration
Weight 25g
Power supply voltage 5VDC (provided by VFD-C2000)
8-34
Environment
ESD (IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 61000-4-2)
EFT (IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 61000-4-4)
Noise immunity
Operation: -10°C–50°C (temperature), 90% (humidity)
Operation/storage
Storage: -25°C–70°C (temperature), 95% (humidity)
Vibration/shock International standards: IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 60068-2-6/IEC 61800-5-1, IEC
immunity 60068-2-27
8-14-4 Installation
Connecting CMC-EIP01 to Network

1. Turn off power to the AC motor drive.
2. Open the cover of the AC motor drive.
3. Connect a CAT-5e network cable to the RJ-45 port on the
CMC-EIP01 (See Figure 2).
[Figure 2]
RJ-45 PIN Definition
PIN Signal Definition PIN Signal Definition

Positive pole for
1 Tx+ 5 -- N/C
data transmission
Negative pole for Negative pole for
2 Tx- 6 Rx-
data transmission data receiving
Positive pole for
3 Rx+ 7 -- N/C
data receiving
4 -- N/C 8 -- N/C
8-14-5 Communication Parameters for VFD-C2000 Connected to Ethernet

When the VFD-C2000 is connected to an Ethernet network, please set up the communication
parameters for it according to the table below. The Ethernet master is only able to read/write the
frequency word and control word of VFD-C2000 after the communication parameters are set.

Source of frequency The frequency command is controlled by
Pr. 00-20 8
Source of operation The operation command is controlled by
Pr. 00-21 5
Decoding method for The decoding method for Delta AC motor
Pr. 09-30 0
communication drive
Pr. 09-75 IP setting 0 Static IP(0) / Dynamic distribution IP(1)
8-35


There are 2 LED indicators on the CMC-EIP01. The POWER LED displays the status of
power supply, and the LINK LED displays the connection status of the communication.
LED Indicators
LED Status Indication How to correct it?
On Power supply in normal status --
POWER Green
Off No power supply Check the power supply.
Network connection in normal
On --
status
LINK Green Flashing Network in operation --
Check if the network cable is
Off Network not connected
connected.
Troubleshooting
Check if AC motor drive is powered, and if the
AC motor drive not powered
power supply is normal.
POWER LED off
CMC-EIP01 not connected to Make sure CMC-EIP01 is connected to AC motor
AC motor drive drive.
CMC-EIP01 not connected to Make sure the network cable is correctly connected
network to network.
LINK LED off
Poor contact to RJ-45 Make sure RJ-45 connector is connected to
connector Ethernet port.
CMC-EIP01 not connected to
Make sure CMC-EIP01 is connected to network.
network
No communication
card found PC and CMC-EIP01 in
Search by IP or set up relevant settings by AC
different networks and blocked
motor drive keypad.
by network firewall.
CMC-EIP01 not connected to Make sure CMC-EIP01 is connected to the

network network.
Fail to open Incorrect communication Make sure the communication setting in DCISoft is
CMC-EIP01 setup setting in DCISoft set to Ethernet.
page PC and CMC-EIP01 in
different networks and blocked Conduct the setup by AC motor drive keypad.
by network firewall.
8-36

Able to open Check if the network setting for CMC-EIP01 is
CMC-EIP01 setup correct. For the Intranet setting in your company,
Incorrect network setting in
page but fail to please consult your IT staff. For the Internet setting
CMC-EIP01
utilize webpage in your home, please refer to the network setting
monitoring instruction provided by your ISP.
Incorrect network setting in Check if the network setting for CMC-EIP01 is
CMC-EIP01 correct.
Fail to send e-mail
Incorrect mail server setting Please confirm the IP address for SMTP-Server.
8-37
8-15 CMC-EC01 -- Communication card, EtherCAT

8-15-1 Features
The EtherCAT of C2000 currently provides standard control mode of CiA402 Velocity (Index
6060=2), but it is non-synchronous control mode. There is no need to turn on the DC (Distribute
Clock) function when operating. However, if the DC function is required for using with synchronous
products (e.g. ASDA-A2), the CMC-EC01 can still be used normally under this circumstances. The
VFD-C2000 supports the EtherCAT function with firmware version 2.02 and above. Please be
attention to the firmware you use.
[Figure 1]

2. Positioning hole
3. RUN indicator
4. ERR indicator
5. POWER indicator
6. OUT LINK indicator
7. IN LINK indicator
11. Control board connection port
Network Interface
Interface RJ-45
Transmission method IEEE802.3, IEEE802.3u
Transmission cable Category 5e shielding 100 M
Transmission speed 10 / 100 Mbps Auto-Defect
Network protocol EtherCAT
Power supply voltage 5VDC
Weight (g) 27
8-38
Environment
ESD (IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 61000-4-2)
EFT (IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 61000-4-4)
Noise immunity
Operation -10°C–15°C (temperature), 90% (humidity)
Storage -25°C–70°C (temperature), 95% (humidity)
Vibration / shock International standard: IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 60068-2-6 / IEC 61800-5-1,
immunity IEC 60068-2-27
8-15-4 RJ-45 PIN Definition

RJ-45 PIN No. Signal Definition
1 Tx+ Positive pole for data transmission

2 Tx- Negative pole for data transmission
3 Rx+ Positive pole for data receiving
4 -- N/C
5 -- N/C
6 Rx- Negative pole for data receiving
7 -- N/C
8 -- N/C
8-15-5 Communication Parameters for VFD-C2000 Connected to EtherCAT

When operating VFD-C2000 via CMC-EC01, please set the control and operation command as
controlled by communication card. When C2000 is connected to EtherCAT network, please set up
the communication parameters according to the table below.
Parameter Set value (Dec) Explanation
Pr. 00-20 8 The frequency command is controlled by communication card.
Pr. 00-21 5 The operation command is controlled by communication card.
Identification: when CMC-EC01 is connected, Pr.09-60 will show

Pr. 09-60 6
value 6 (EtherCAT Slave)
Pr. 09-61 -- Version of communication card
8-15-6 LED Indicator

LED Status Indication
On Power supply in normal status
POWER Green
Off No power supply
On Operate in normal status
Pre-operation (On / Off 200ms)
LINK Green Flashes Operate in safe mode
(On 200ms / Off 1000ms)
Off Initial state
8-39
LED Status Indication

Basic configuration error (On / Off 200ms)
Status switching error
Flashed
ERROR Red (On 200ms / Off 1000ms)
Times out (On 200ms twice / Off 1000ms)
Off No error
On Network connection in normal status
IN LINK Green Flashes Network in operation
On Network connection in normal status
OUT LINK Green Flashes Network in operation
8-15-7 Network Connection

Because the packet delivery of EtherCAT has directional characteristics, the connection must be
correct. The designed delivery direction of CMC-EC01 is left for IN / right for ON, the correct wiring
is as below shown:
When the hardware is installed and power on, check for the display. The current set value of
Pr.09-60 will be 6, and shows “EtherCAT” on the display. If the above information does not show
on the display, please check the version of VFD-C2000 (V2.02 and above) and the connection of
the card.
8-40
8-16 CMC-PN01 -- Communication card, PROFINET

8-16-1 Features
CMC-PN01 connects C2000 drive to PROFINET to exchange data with the host controller easily.
This simple network solution saves cost and time for connection and installation of factory automation.
Moreover, its components are compatible with suppliers’.
By installing CMC-PN01 in C2000 through the main PROFINET device, you can:
1. Control the drive through PROFINET
2. Modify the drive’s parameters through PROFINET
3. Monitor the drive’s status through PROFINET.
8-16-2 Product profile

2. Communication card fixing
hole
3. Indicator light: Ready out
4. Indicator light: MT out
5. Indicator light: SD
6. Indicator light: BF out
7. Indicator light: ACT PHY2
8. Indicator light: Link PHY2
9. Indicator light: ACT PHY1
10. ndicator light: Link PHY2
11. ON / OFF switch
12. Fool-proofing slot to the
communication card
13. RJ45 port (Port2)
14. RJ45 port (Port1)
15. A port to connect with
control board
Label with MAC address
Definition Description
MAC1 Port 1 MAC Address
MAC2 Port 2 MAC Address
MAC3 Interface MAC Address
8-41
Network interface
Item Specifications
Interface RJ45
Number of ports 2 ports
Transmission cable IEEE 802.3
Transmission rate Category 5e shielding 100 M
Communication
10/100 Mbps auto-negotiate
protocol
Interface PROFINET
Electrical specification
Item Specifications
Power supply voltage 5 VDC
Power consumption 0.8 W
Insulation voltage 500 VDC
Weight (g) 27 (g)
Environmental conditions
Item Specifications
ESD (IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 6100-4-2)
EFT (IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 6100-4-4)
Noise immunity
Surge Teat (IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 6100-4-5)
Operation and
-10–50°C (temperature), 90% (humidity)
storage
Vibration & shock International Standard: IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 60068-2-6 / IEC
resistance 61800-5-1, IEC 60068-2-27
8-16-4 Definition of PINs in RJ45 port
RJ45 PIN Signal Definition
1 Tx+ Positive pole for data transmission

2 Tx- Negative pole for data transmission
3 Rx+ Positive pole for receiving data
4 -- N/C
5 -- N/C
6 Rx- Negative pole for receiving data
7 -- N/C
8 -- N/C
8-42
8-16-5 To set the communication parameters when C2000 connects with PROFINET
When you operate VFD-C2000 through CMC-PN01, you should set the communication card as
the source of VFD-C2000 controls and settings. You need to use the keypad to configure the
following parameter addresses to the corresponding values:
Parameters Setting value Description
Pr.00-20 8 The frequency command is controlled by communication card
Pr.00-21 5 The frequency command is controlled by communication card
Pr.09-30 1 Use decoding method (60xx or 20xx)

Communication card identification:
Pr.09-60 12 When CMC-PN01 communication card is connected, the value
of this parameter displays “12”.
8-16-6 LED indicator introduction
Name Indicator status Indication

Always on PN Stack starts normally
Ready out indicator Yellow LED PN Stack starts normally, and waiting
Flashing
for syncing with MCU
Off PN Stack failed to start
MT out indicator Green LED - -
SD indicator Red LED - -
Connection with PROFINET Controller

Always on
is interrupted
Connection is in normal state, but the
BF out indicator Red LED Flashing communication with PROFINET
Controller is abnormally
Connection with PROFINET Controller
Off
is in normal state
It’s online, and exchanging the data
Always on
with Master normally
ACT PHY1 It’s offline, but hand shaking the data
Orange LED Flashing
indicator
with Master
Off Initial state
LINK PHY1 Always on Internet connection is in normal state
Green LED
indicator Off Doesn’t connect to network
It’s online, and exchanging the data
Always on
with Master normally
ACT PHY2 It’s offline, but hand shaking the data
Orange LED Flashing
indicator
with Master
Off Initial state
LINK PHY2 Always on Internet connection is in normal state
Green LED
indicator Off Doesn’t connect to network
8-43
8-16-7 Network connection

The wiring of CMC-PN01 shows as follows:
When the installation is finished, supply electricity to the drive. The Pr.09-60 of the drive should be
able to display “PROFINET” with a current value of 12. If not, make sure your version of the drive
is correct (C2000 needs 2.04 or later versions) and the communication card is correctly
connected.
8-44
8-17 EMC-COP01 -- Communication card, CANopen

8-17-6 Terminating Resistor Position
8-17-7 RJ-45 Pin Definition

Pin Pin name Definition
1 CAN_H CAN_H bus line (dominant high)
2 CAN_L CAN_L bus line (dominant low)
3 CAN_GND Ground/0V/V-
RS485 socket 7 CAN_GND Ground/0V/V-
Interface RJ-45
Transmission method CAN
Transmission cable CAN standard cable
Transmission speed 1Mbps, 500Kbps, 250Kbps, 125Kbps, 100Kbps, 50Kbps
Communication protocol CANopen
8-45
8-18 Delta Standard Fieldbus Cables

Delta Cables Part Number Description Length
UC-CMC003-01A CANopen cable, RJ45 connector 0.3m
UC-CMC010-01A CANopen cable, RJ45 connector 1m
CANopen Cable UC-CMC020-01A CANopen cable, RJ45 connector 2m
UC-DN01Z-01A DeviceNet cable 305m

DeviceNet Cable
UC-DN01Z-02A DeviceNet cable 305m
UC-EMC003-02A Ethernet / EtherCAT cable, Shielding 0.3m
UC-EMC005-02A Ethernet / EtherCAT cable, Shielding 0.5m
UC-EMC010-02A Ethernet / EtherCAT cable, Shielding 1m
EtherNet / EtherCAT UC-EMC020-02A Ethernet / EtherCAT cable, Shielding 2m

Cable
TAP-CN01 1 in 2 out, built-in 121Ω terminal resistor 1 in 2 out
CANopen / DeviceNet TAP-CN02 1 in 4 out, built-in 121Ω terminal resistor 1 in 4 out

TAP
1 in 4 out, RJ45 connector, built-in 121Ω 1 in 4 out,
TAP-CN03
terminal resistor RJ45
PROFIBUS Cable UC-PF01Z-01A PROFIBUS DP cable 305m
8-46
Chapter 9 Specification C2000
Chapter 9 Specification
9-1 230V Series
9-2 460V Series
9-3 575V Series
9-4 690V Series
9-5 Environment for Operation, Storage and Transportation
9-6 Specification for Operation Temperature and Protection Level
9-7 Derating Curve of Ambient Temperature
9-8 Efficiency Curve
9-1
9-1 230V Series

Frame Size A B C D E F
Model VFD-_ _ _C_ _ 007 015 022 037 055 075 110 150 185 220 300 370 450 550 750 900
Rated Output Capacity [kVA] 2.0 3.2 4.4 6.8 10 13 20 26 30 36 48 58 72 86 102 138
Rated Output Current [A] 5 8 11 17 25 33 49 65 75 90 120 146 180 215 255 346
Applicable Motor Output [kW] 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90
Normal Duty
Applicable Motor Output [HP] 1 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 120

120% of rated output current: 1 minute for every 5 minutes;
Overload Capacity
160% of rated output current: 3 seconds for every 30 seconds
Max. Output Frequency [Hz] 0.00~599.00
*Output Rating
Carrier Frequency [kHz] 2~15 (Default: 8) 2~10 (Default: 6) 2~9 (Default: 4)

Rated Output Capacity [kVA] 1.9 2.8 4.0 6.4 9.6 12 19 25 28 34 45 55 68 81 96 131
Rated Output Current [A] 4.8 7.1 10 16 24 31 47 62 71 86 114 139 171 204 242 329
Applicable Motor Output [kW] 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 19 22 30 37 45 55 75
Heavy Duty
Applicable Motor Output [HP] 0.5 1 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100

Overload Capacity
Carrier Frequency [kHz] 2~15 (Default: 2) 2~10 (Default: 2) 2~9 (Default: 2)
Normal Duty 6.4 12 16 20 28 36 52 72 83 99 124 143 171 206 245 331
Input Current [A]
Rating Input
Heavy Duty 6.1 11 15 18.5 26 34 50 68 78 95 118 136 162 196 233 315
Rated Voltage / Frequency 3-phase AC 200V~240V (-15% ~ +10%)，50 / 60Hz
Operating Voltage Range 170~264VAC
Frequency Tolerance 47~63Hz
Efficiency [%] 97.8 98.2
Power Factor >0.98
Drive Weight [Kg] 2.6 ± 0.3 5.4 ± 1 9.8 ± 1.5 38.5 ± 1.5 64.8 ± 1.5 86.5 ± 1.5
Natural
Cooling Method Fan cooling
cooling
Braking Chopper Frame A~C: Built-in Frame D~F: Optional
DC choke Frame A~C: Optional Frame D~F: Built-in
EMC Filter Frame A~F: Optional
EMC-COP01 Frame A~F: Optional
Table 9-1
NOTE
1. * : The factory setting is Normal Duty mode.
2. The carrier frequency is default. Increasing the carrier frequency requires a reduction in current. Please refer to Chapter 9-7
Derating Curve of Ambient Temperature.
3. The AC motor drive should operate in derating current when its control method is set to FOC Sensorless, TQC+PG, TQC
sensorless. PM+PG, PM sensorless Please refer to Pr. 06-55 for more information.
4. Select the AC motor drive with capacity one grade larger for the impact load application.
5. The rated input current will be affected by not only Power Transformer and the connection of the reactors on input side, but
also fluctuates with the impedance of power side.
6. For Frame D and above, if the last character of the model is A then it is under IP20 protection level but the wiring terminal is
under IP00 protection level; if the last character of the model is E, it is under IP20/NEMA1/UL TYPE1 protection level.
9-2
9-2 460V Series

Frame Size A B C
Model VFD-_ _ _ C_ _ 007 015 022 037 040 055 075 110 150 185 220 300
Rated Output Capacity [kVA] 2.4 3.2 4.8 7.2 8.4 10 14 19 25 30 36 48
Rated Output Current [A] 3.0 4.0 6.0 9.0 10.5 12 18 24 32 38 45 60
Applicable Motor Output [kW] 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 4.0 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30
Normal Duty
Applicable Motor Output [HP] 1 2 3 5 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40

Overload Capacity
*Output Rating
Carrier Frequency [kHz] 2~15 (Default: 8) 2~10 (Default: 6)

Rated Output Capacity [kVA] 2.3 3.0 4.5 6.5 7.6 9.6 14 18 24 29 34 45
Rated Output Current [A] 2.9 3.8 5.7 8.1 9.5 11 17 23 30 36 43 57
Applicable Motor Output [kW] 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 4.0 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22
Heavy Duty
Applicable Motor Output [HP] 0.5 1 2 3 5 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30

Overload Capacity
Normal Duty 4.3 5.9 8.7 14 15.5 17 20 26 35 40 47 63
Input Current [A]
Input Rating
Heavy Duty 4.1 5.6 8.3 13 14.5 16 19 25 33 38 45 60

Rated Voltage / Frequency 3-phase AC 380V~480V ( -15%~+10%), 50 / 60Hz
Efficiency [%] 97.8
Power Factor >0.98
Drive Weight [Kg] 2.6± 0.3 5.4± 1 9.8± 1.5
Cooling Method Natural cooling Fan cooling
Braking Chopper Frame A~C: Built-in
DC choke Frame A~C: Optional
EMC Filter VFDXXXC43A: Optional; Frame A~C VFDXXXC43E: Built-in
EMC-COP01 VFDXXXC43A: Optional; VFDXXXC43E: Built-in
Table 9-2
NOTE
6. For Frame A, B and C, Model VFDXXXC43A is under IP20/NEMA1/UL TYPE1 protection level.
9-3
Frame Size D0 D E F G H
Model VFD-_ _ _ C_ _ 370 450 550 750 900 1100 1320 1600 1850 2200 2800 3150 3550 4500
Rated Output Capacity [kVA] 58 73 88 120 143 175 207 247 295 367 438 491 544 720
Rated Output Current [A] 73 91 110 150 180 220 260 310 370 460 550 616 683 866
Applicable Motor Output [kW] 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 185 220 280 315 355 450
Normal Duty
Applicable Motor Output [HP] 50 60 75 100 125 150 175 215 250 300 375 420 475 600
Overload Capacity
*Output Rating

Rated Output Capacity [kVA] 55 69 84 114 136 167 197 235 280 348 417 466 517 677
Rated Output Current [A] 69 86 105 143 171 209 247 295 352 437 523 585 649 815
Applicable Motor Output [kW] 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 185 220 280 315 355
Heavy Duty
Applicable Motor Output [HP] 40 53 60 75 100 125 150 175 215 250 300 375 425 475
Overload Capacity
Normal Duty 74 101 114 157 167 207 240 300 380 400 494 555 625 866
Input Current [A]
Input Rating
Heavy Duty 70 96 108 149 159 197 228 285 361 380 469 527 594 815
Rated Voltage / Frequency 3-phase AC 380V~480V (-15% +10%), 50 / 60Hz
Efficiency [%] 97.8 98.2
Power Factor >0.98
Drive Weight [Kg] 27 ± 1.5 38.5 ± 1.5 64.8 ± 1.5 86.5 ± 1.5 134 ± 4 228
Braking Chopper Frame D0~H: Optional
DC choke Frame D0~H: Built-in
EMC Filter Frame D0~H: Optional
EMC-COP01 VFDXXXC43A：Optional; VFDXXXC43E: Built-in
Table 9-3
NOTE
6. For Frame A, B and C, Model VFDXXXC43A is under IP20/NEMA1/UL TYPE1 protection level.
8. Model VFD4500C43x does not have UL certification.
9-4
9-3 575V Series

Frame Size A B
Model VFD-_ _ _ C53A-21 015 022 037 055 075 110 150
Rated Output Capacity [kVA] 3 4.3 6.7 9.9 12.1 18.6 24.1
Light Duty
Rated Output Current [A] 3 4.3 6.7 9.9 12.1 18.7 24.2
Applicable Motor Output [kW] 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15
Applicable Motor Output [HP] 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20
Rated Output Capacity [kVA] 2.5 3.6 5.5 8.2 10 15.4 19.9
Normal Duty
*Output Rating
Rated Output Current [A] 2.5 3.6 5.5 8.2 10 15.5 20

Applicable Motor Output [kW] 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11
Applicable Motor Output [HP] 1 2 3 5 7.5 10 15
Rated Output Capacity [kVA] 2.1 3 4.6 6.9 8.3 12.9 16.7
Heavy Duty
Rated Output Current [A] 2.1 3 4.6 6.9 8.3 13 16.8

Applicable Motor Output [kW] 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 3.7 7.5 7.5
Applicable Motor Output [HP] 1 2 3 5 5 10 10
Carrier Frequency [kHz] 2~15 (Default: 6)
Light Duty 3.8 5.4 10.4 14.9 16.9 21.3 26.3
Input Current [A] Normal Duty 3.1 4.5 7.2 12.3 15 18 22.8
Input Rating
Heavy Duty 2.6 3.8 5.8 10.7 12.5 16.9 19.7

Rated Voltage / Frequency 3-phase AC 525 ~ 600 V ( -15%~+10%), 50/60 Hz
Efficiency [%] 97 98
Power Factor >0.98
Drive Weight [Kg] 3 ± 0.3 4.8 ± 1
Cooling Method Natural cooling Fan cooling
Braking Chopper Frame A~B: Built-in
DC choke Frame A~B: Optional
EMC Filter Frame A~B: Optional
Table 9-4
NOTE
* Parameter 00-16; available load modes: Light Duty (LD), Normal Duty (ND) and Heavy Duty (HD); default setting is LD mode
9-5
9-4 690V Series

Frame Size C D E
Model VFD-_ _ _ C63B-00 / -21 185 220 300 370 450 550 750 900 1100 1320
Rated Output Capacity [kVA] 29 36 43 54 65 80 103 124 149 179
Applicable Motor Output [690V, kW] 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132
Light Duty
Applicable Motor Output [690V, HP] 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 175

Rated Output Current [A] 24 30 36 45 54 67 86 104 125 150
Normal Duty
Applicable Motor Output [690V, kW] 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110

*Output Rating

Heavy Duty
Applicable Motor Output [690V, kW] 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90

Carrier Frequency [kHz] 2~9 (Default: 4)
Light Duty 29 36 43 54 65 81 84 102 122 147
Input Current [A] Normal Duty 24 29 36 43 54 65 66 84 102 122
Input Rating
Heavy Duty 20 24 29 36 43 54 53 66 84 102

Rated Voltage / Frequency 3-phase AC 525 V~ 690 V ( -15%~+10%), 50/60 Hz
Operating Voltage Range 446 ~ 759 VAC
Efficiency [%] 97
Power Factor >0.98
Drive Weight [Kg] 10 ± 1.5 39 ± 1.5 61 ± 1.5
Braking Chopper Frame C: Built-in Frame D~E: Optional
DC choke Frame C: Optional Frame D~E: Built-in
EMC Filter Frame C~E: Optional
Table 9-5
NOTE
9-6
Frame Size F G H
Model VFD-_ _ _ C63B-00/21 1600 2000 2500 3150 4000 4500 5600 6300
Rated Output Capacity [kVA] 215 263 347 418 494.5 534.7 678.5 776
Applicable Motor Output [690V, kW] 160 200 250 315 400 450 560 630
Light Duty
Applicable Motor Output [690V, HP] 215 270 335 425 530 600 745 850
Rated Output Current [A] 180 220 290 350 430 465 590 675
Rated Output Capacity [kVA] 179 215 239 347 402.5 442.7 534.7 776
Normal Duty
*Output Rating
Rated Output Capacity [kVA] 149 179 215 263 333.5 356.5 483 776
Heavy Duty
Light Duty 178 217 292 353 454 469 595 681
Input Current [A] Normal Duty 148 178 222 292 353 388 504 681
Input Rating
Heavy Duty 123 148 181 222 292 313 423 681
Rated Voltage / Frequency 3-phase AC 525 V~ 690V ( -15%~+10%), 50/60 Hz
Operating Voltage Range 446 ~ 759 VAC
Frequency Tolerance 47~63 Hz
Efficiency [%] 97 98
Power Factor >0.98
Drive Weight [Kg] 88 ± 1.5 135 ± 4 243 ± 5
Braking Chopper Frame F~H: Optional
DC choke Frame F~H: Built-in
EMC Filter Frame F~H: Optional
Table 9-6
NOTE
9-7
General Specifications
230V/ 460V model:
1: V/F, 2: SVC, 3: VF+PG, 4: FOC+PG, 5: TQC+PG, 6: PM+PG, 7: FOC sensorless,
Control Method 8: TQC sensorless, 9: PM sensorless
575V/ 690V model:
1: V/F, 2: V/F+PG, 3: SVC
IM: Reach up to 150% of 1/50 rated speed
Starting Torque
PM: Reach up to 150% of 1/100 rated speed
V/F Curve 4 point adjustable V/F curve and square curve
Speed Circuit Response Open-circuit: 5Hz
Bandwidth Close-circuit: Max. 40Hz for IM, and Max. 100Hz for PM
230V/ 460V model: Normal duty: a max. of 160% torque current; Heavy duty: a max. of 180%
Torque Limit torque current
575V/ 690V model: Max. 200% torque current
TQC + PG: ±5%
Torque Accuracy
TQC Sensorless: ±15%
Max. Output Frequency
Normal duty: 0.01~599.00Hz; Heavy duty: 0.00~300.00 Hz
(Hz)
Frequency Output
Digital command: 0.01%, -10°C~ +40°C; Analog command: 0.1%, 25 10°C
Control Characteristics
Accuracy
Output Frequency
Digital command: 0.1Hz, Analog command: 0.05% X max. output frequency (Pr.01-00) / 11 bit
Resolution
230V/ 460V model:
Normal duty: 120% of rated current can endure for1 minute during every 5 minutes
160% of rated current can endure for 3 seconds during every 30 seconds.
Heavy duty: 150% of rated current can endure for1 minute during every 5 minutes
Overload Tolerance 180% of rated current can endure for 3 seconds during every 30 seconds.
575V/ 690V model:
Light duty: 120% of rated current can endure for 1 minute.
Normal duty: 120% of rated current can endure for 1 minute, 150% can endure for 3 seconds.
Heavy duty: 150% of rated current can endure for 1 minute, 180% can endure for 3 seconds.
Frequency Setting Signal -10~ +10V, 0~ +10V, 4~20mA, 0~20mA, Pulse input
Accel. / decel. Time 0.00~600.00 / 0.0~6000.0 seconds
Torque control, Speed/torque control switching, Feed forward control, Zero-servo control,
Momentary power loss ride thru, Speed search, Over-torque detection, Torque limit, 16-step speed
(max), Accel. / decel. time switch, S-curve accel. / decel., 3-wire sequence, Auto-Tuning (rotational,
Main Control Function stationary), Dwell, Slip compensation, Torque compensation, JOG frequency, Frequency upper /
lower limit settings, DC injection braking at start / stop, High slip braking, PID control (with sleep
function),Energy saving control, MODBUS communication (RS-485 RJ45, max. 115.2 Kbps), Fault
restart, Parameter copy
230V model: Models above VFD150C23A (including VFD150C23A) are PWM control
Models below VFD110C23A (including VFD110C23A) are ON / OFF switch control
Fan Control 460V model: Models above VFD185C43A (including VFD185C43A) are PWM control
Models below VFD150C43A (including VFD150C43A) are ON / OFF switch control
575V/ 690V model: PWM control
Motor Protection Electronic thermal relay protection
For drive model 230V and 460V
Over-current protection: 240% rated current for normal duty; 250% rated current for heavy duty
Current clamp『Normal duty: 170~175%』;『Heavy duty: 175~180%』
Protection Characteristics
For drive model 575V and 690V (except 630kW)

Over-current Protection Over-current protection: 240% rated current for normal duty
Current clamp『Light duty: 125~145%』;『Normal duty: 170~175%』;『Heavy duty: 200~250%』
For 630kW
Over-current protection: 240% rated current for normal duty
Current clamp『Light duty, normal duty, and heavy duty: 170~175%』
230V model: drive will stop when DC-BUS voltage exceeds 410V
Over-voltage Protection 460V model: drive will stop when DC-BUS voltage exceeds 820V
690V model: drive will stop when DC-BUS voltage exceeds 1189V
Over-temperature
Built-in temperature sensor
Protection
9-8
Stall Prevention Stall prevention during acceleration, deceleration and running independently
Restart after Instantaneous
Parameter setting up to 20 seconds
Power Failure
Grounding Leakage
Leakage current is higher than 50% of rated current of the AC motor drive
Current Protection
Short-circuit Current Rating Per UL 508C, the drive is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100kA
(SCCR) symmetrical amperes (rms) when protected by fuses given in the fuse table.
Certifications
GB/T12668-2
Table 9-7
NOTE
The setting range of max. output frequency changes as carrier wave and control modes changes. Refer to Pr. 01-00 and
Pr. 06-55 for more information.
Model VFD4500C43x does not have UL certification.
9-9
9-5 Environment for Operation, Storage and Transportation

DO NOT expose the AC motor drive in the bad environment, such as dust, direct sunlight, corrosive / inflammable gasses,
humidity, liquid and vibration environment. The salt in the air must be less than 0.01mg / cm2 every year.
Installation
IEC60364-1 / IEC60664-1 Pollution degree 2, Indoor use only
location
Surrounding Storage /
-25 ~ +70
Temperature Transportation
(°C) Non-condensation, non-frozen
Operation Max. 95%
Storage /
Rated Humidity Max. 95%
Transportation
No condense water
Operation /
Air Pressure 86~106
Storage
Environment (kPa)
Transportation 70~106
IEC 60721-3-3
Operation Class 3C3; Class 3S2
Storage Class 1C2; Class 1S2
Pollution Level Transportation Class 2C2; Class 2S2
If the AC motor drive is to be used under harsh environment with high level of contamination
(e.g. dew, water, dust), make sure it is installed in an environment qualified for IP54 such as in
a cabinet.
If AC motor drive is installed at altitude 0~1000m, follow normal operation
Operation restriction. If it is installed at altitude 1000~2000m, decrease 1% of rated
Altitude
current or lower 0.5°C of temperature for every 100m increase in altitude.
Maximum altitude for Corner Grounded is 2000m.
Storage
Package Drop ISTA procedure 1A (according to weight) IEC60068-2-31
Transportation
1.0mm, peak to peak value range from 2Hz to 13.2 Hz; 0.7G~1.0G range from 13.2Hz to 55Hz; 1.0G range
Vibration
from 55Hz to 512Hz. Comply with IEC 60068-2-6
Impact IEC / EN 60068-2-27
10 10
Operation Max. allowed offset angle 10o (under normal
Position installation position)
Table 9-8
9-10
9-6 Specification for Operation Temperature and Protection Level

Operation
Model Frame Top cover Conduit Box Protection Level
Temperature
Top cover
Frame A~C Standard IP20 / UL Open Type -10~50°C
removed
230V: 0.75~22kW conduit
Standard with plate
460V: 0.75~30kW IP20 / UL Type1 / NEMA1 -10~40°C
top cover
IP00
IP20 / UL Open Type
VFDxxxCxxA
VFDxxxCxxS
Frame D~H
No conduit
230V: ≥ 22kW N/A -10~50°C
box
460V: ≥ 30kW
Th e c ircled area: IP00
Oth er than the circled are a: IP20
Figure 9-1
Top cover
Standard IP20 / UL Open Type -10~50°C
Frame A~C removed
conduit
460V: 0.75~30kW Standard with plate
VFDxxxCxxE IP20 / UL Type1 / NEMA1 -10~40°C
top cover
VFDxxxCxxU
Frame D~H
Standard
230V: ≥ 22kW N/A IP20 / UL Type1 / NEMA1 -10~40°C
conduit box
460V: ≥ 30kW
Table 9-9
9-11
9-7 Derating Curve of Ambient Temperature

Protection Level Operating Environment
230V / 460V: When the AC motor drive operates at the rated current, and the
ambient temperature has to be between -10 ~ +40°C. When the
temperature is over 40°C, the rated current decreases 2% for every
increase by 1°C. The maximum allowable temperature is 60°C.
UL Type I / IP20
temperature is over 40°C, the rated current decreases 2.5% for every
temperature is over 50°C, the rated current decreases 2% for every
UL Open Type / IP20
temperature is over 50°C, the rated current decreases 2.5% for every
If AC motor drive is installed at altitude 0~1000m, follow normal operation
restriction. If it is install at altitude 1000~2000m, decrease 1% of rated current or
High Altitude lower 0.5°C of temperature for every 100m increase in altitude. Maximum altitude
for Corner Grounded is 2000m. Contact Delta for more information, if you need to
use this motor drive at an altitude of 2000m or higher.
Table 9-10
Ambient temperature derating curve
230V / 460V Normal control ambient temperature derating curve
Figure 9-2
9-12
230V / 460V Advanced control ambient temperature derating curve
Figure 9-3
575V / 690V Ambient temperature derating curve
Figure 9-4
9-13
Current derating at high altitude
Figure 9-5 Table 9-10

Carrier wave derating curve
230V / 460V
General Control Derating Curve (Pr.00-10=1 and Pr.00-11=0~3)
In Normal Duty mode (Pr.00-16=0)
Setting 1 Setting 1
Setting 0 or 2 (50℃: UL open-type) Setting 0 or 2 (50℃: UL open-type)
Setting 0 or 2 (40℃:UL type1 or open type_side by Setting 0 or 2 (40℃:UL type1 or open type_ side by
side) side)
460V 230V
110 110
VFD007~150C43A/E VFD007~110C23A/E
VFD185~550C43A/E VFD150~370C23A/E
100
VFD750~3550C43A/E 100 VFD450~900C23A/E
90
Ratio(%)
Ratio(%)
90
80
80
70
60 70
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Fc(kHz) Fc(kHz)
In Heavy Duty mode (Pr.00-16=1)

Setting 1 Setting 1
Setting 0 or 2 (50℃: UL open-type) Setting 0 or 2 (50℃: UL open-type)
Setting 0 or 2 (40℃: UL type1 or open type_ side by Setting 0 or 2 (40℃: UL type1 or open type_ side by
side) side)
460V 230V
110 110
VFD007~150C43A/E VFD007~110C23A/E
100 100 VFD150~370C23A/E

VFD185~550C43A/E
VFD450~900C23A/E
90 VFD750~3550C43A/E 90
80 80
Ratio(%)
Ratio(%)
70 70
60 60
50 50
40 40
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Fc(kHz) Fc(kHz)
9-14
Advanced Control Derating Curve (Pr.00-10=1, and Pr.00-11=4~7; or Pr.00-10=3, and Pr.00-13=1~3)
In Normal Duty mode (Pr.00-16=0)
(50℃: UL open-type, Frame A~B) (50℃: UL open-type, Frame A~B)

(40℃: UL type1 or open type_side by side, Frame A~B) (40℃: UL type1 or open type_ side by side, Frame A~B)
(40℃: UL open-type, UL type 1 or open type_side by side, (40℃: UL open-type, UL type 1 or open type_side by side,
Frame C~H) Frame C~H)
460V 230V
In Heavy Duty mode (Pr.00-16=1)

(50℃: UL open-type, Frame A~B) (50℃: UL open-type, Frame A~B)
(40℃: UL type1 or open type_side by side, Frame A~B) (40℃: UL type1 or open type_ side by side, Frame A~B)
(40℃: UL open-type, UL type 1 or open type_side by side, (40℃: UL open-type, UL type 1 or open type_side by side,
Frame C~H) Frame C~H)
460V 230V
575V Derating Curve (Pr.00-16=0 or 1 or 2)
Figure 9-6
9-15
690V Derating Curve
Figure 9-7
9-16
9-8 Efficiency Curve
Figure 9-8
Figure 9-9
9-17
Figure 9-10
Figure 9-11
9-18
Chapter 10 Digital KeypadC2000
Chapter 10 Digital Keypad

10-1 Descriptions of Digital Keypad
10-2 Function of Digital Keypad KPC-CC01
10-3 TPEditor Installation Instruction
10-4 Fault Code Description of Digital Keypad KPC-CC01
10-5 Unsupported Functions when using TPEditor on

KPC-CC01 Keypad
10-1
10-1 Descriptions of Digital Keypad

The default communication format is ASCII 9600, 7, N, 2 in C2000. But the communication format is RTU
19200, 8, N, 2. To enable the communication between C2000 and KPC-CC01, you need to set up the
communication parameters of C2000 before linking the drive and the keypad (KPC-CC01).
Follow the set-up steps below:
 Set Pr.09-00 = 1 (the communication address)
 Set Pr.09-01 = 19.2 kbps (the COM1 transmission speed)
 Set Pr.09-04 = 13 (8, N, 2; RTU) (the COM1 communicatino protocol)
KPC-CC01
Communication Interface
RJ45 (socket), RS-485 interface
Installation Method
1. Embedded type and can be put flat on the surface of the control box. The front
cover is water proof.
2. Buy a MKC-KPPK model to do wall mounting or embedded mounting. Its
protection level is IP66.
3. The maximum RJ45 extension lead is 5 m (16ft)
4. This keypad can only be used on Delta’s motor drive C2000, CH2000 and
CP2000.
Descriptions of Keypad Functions

Key Descriptions
Start Operation Key
1. It is only valid when the source of operation command is from the keypad.
2. It can operate the AC motor drive by the function setting and the RUN LED will be ON.
3. It can be pressed again and again at stop process.
Stop Command Key. This key has the highest priority in any situation.
1. When it receives STOP command, no matter if the AC motor drive is in operation or stop
status, the AC motor drive needs to execute “STOP” command.
2. The RESET key can be used to reset the drive after the fault occurs.
3. The reasons why the error cannot be reset:
a. Because the condition which triggers the fault is not cleared. When the condition is
cleared, the fault can be reset.
b. Because it’s the fault status checking when power-on. When the condition is cleared,
re-power again, and the fault can be reset.
Operation Direction Key
1. This key only controls the operation direction, and will NOT activate the drive. FWD:
forward, REV: reverse.
2. Refer to the LED descriptions for more details.
ENTER Key
Press ENTER and go to the next level. If it is the last level then press ENTER to execute the
command.
ESC Key
ESC key function is to leave current menu and return to the last menu. It also functions as a
return key or cancel key in the sub-menu.
Press menu to return to main menu.
Menu content:
1. Parameter Setup 7. Language Setup 13. Startup Menu
2. Quick Start 8. Time Setup 14. Main Page
3. Application Selection List 9. Keypad Locked 15. PC Link
4. Changed List 10. PLC Function 16. Start Wizard
5. Copy Parameter 11. Copy PLC
6. Fault Record 12. Display Setup
10-2
Key Descriptions
Direction: Left / Right / Up / Down

1. In the numeric value setting mode, it is used to move the cursor and change the numeric
value.
2. In the menu/text selection mode, it is used for item selection.
Function Key
1. The functions keys have factory settings and can be defined by users. The factory settings
of F1 and F4 work with the function list below. For example, F1 is JOG function, F4 is a
speed setting key for adding/deleting user defined parameters.
2. Other functions must be defined by TPEditor first (please use version 1.60 or above).
TPEditor software can be downloaded at:
http://www.deltaww.com/services/DownloadCenter2.aspx?secID=8&pid=2&tid=0&CID=06&itemID=060302&typeID=1&downloadID=,&title=-- Select
Product Series --&dataType=8;&check=1&hl=en-US

Please refer to instruction for TPEditor in Chapter 10-3.
HAND Key
1. This key is executed by the parameter settings of the source of Hand frequency and hand
operation. The factory settings of both source of Hand frequency and hand operation are
the digital keypad.
2. Press HAND key at stop status, the setting will switch to hand frequency source and hand
operation source. Press HAND key at operation status, it stops the AC motor drive first
(display AHSP warning), and switch to hand frequency source and hand operation source.
3. KPC-CC01 displays HAND mode on the screen.
AUTO Key
1. This key is executed by the parameter settings of the source of AUTO frequency and
AUTO operation. The factory setting is the external terminal (source of operation is
4~20mA).
2. Press Auto key at stop status, the setting will switch to hand frequency source and hand
operation source. Press Auto key at operation status, it stops the AC motor drive first
(display AHSP warning), and switch to auto frequency source and auto operation source.
3. KPC-CC01 displays AUTO mode on the screen
Descriptions of LED Functions

LED Descriptions
Steady ON: operation indicator of the AC motor drive, including DC brake, zero speed,
standby, restart after fault and speed search.
Blinking: drive is decelerating to stop or in the status of base block.
Steady OFF: drive doesn’t execute the operation command
Steady ON: stop indicator of the AC motor drive.

Blinking: drive is in the standby status.
Steady OFF: drive doesn’t execute “STOP” command.
Operation Direction LED

1. Green light is on, the drive is running forward.
2. Red light is on, the drive is running backward.
3. Twinkling light: the drive is changing direction.
Operation Direction LED under Torque Mode
1. Green light is ON: when the torque command ≧ 0, and the motor is running forward.
2. Red light is ON: when the torque command < 0, and the motor is running backward.
3. Twinkling light: when the torque command < 0, and the motor is running forward.
10-3
LED Descriptions
RUN LED:
LED
Condition/ State
status
CANopen at initial
OFF
No LED
CANopen at pre-operation
ON 200 200
Blinking
ms ms
CANopen~ “RUN” OFF
CANopen at stopped
Single ON 200 200 1000

flash
ms ms ms
OFF
CANopen at operation status
ON
ERR LED:
LED Condition/ State
status
OFF No Error
One message fail
Single ON
flash 200 1 000
ms ms
OFF
Guarding fail or heartbeat fail
CANopen~ “ERR” ON
Double 200 200 200 1 000
flash
ms ms ms ms
OFF
SYNC fail
Triple ON
flash 2 00 200 20 0 200 200 100 0
ms ms ms ms ms ms
OFF
Bus off
ON
10-4
10-2 Function of Digital Keypad KPC-CC01
NOTE
1. Startup page can only display pictures, no flash.
2. When Power ON, it will display startup page then the main page. The main page displays Delta’s default setting F/H/A/U,
the display order can be set by Pr.00.03 (Startup display). When the selected item is U page, use left key and right key to
switch between the items, the display order of U page is set by Pr.00.04 (User display).
Display Icon
Display item
10-5
1. Parameter Setup
For example: Setup source of master frequency command.
Once in the Group 00 Motor Drive Parameter,

Use Up/Down key to select parameter 20:
Auto Frequency Command.
When this parameter is selected, press

ENTER key to go to this parameter’s setting
menu.
Press to select.
Use Up/Down key to choose a setting.

For example: Choose “2 Analogue Input”,
Press to select a parameter group. then press the ENTER key.
Once a parameter group is selected,
After pressing the ENTER key, an END will be
displayed which means that the parameter
press to go into that group.
setting is done.
NOTE: When parameter lock/ password
protection function is enabled, it will display
“Pr. lock” on the right-up corner of the keypad.
The parameter cannot be written or is
protected by the password under this
circumstances.
2. Quick Start
Description:
1. VF Mode
Items
1. Parameter Protection Password Input
(Pr. 00-07)
2. Parameter Protection Password Setting
(Pr. 00-08)
Press to select. 3. Control Mode (Pr. 00-10)
Quick Start: 4. Control of Speed Mode (Pr. 00-11)
01:Password Decoder
1. V/F Mode 5. Load Selection (Pr. 00-16)
2. VFPG Mode 6. Carrier Frequency (Pr. 00-17)
3. SVC Mode 7. Source of the Master Frequency
4. FOCPG Mode Command (AUTO) (Pr. 00-20)
5. TQCPG Mode 8. Source of the Operation Command
6. My Mode (AUTO) (Pr. 00-21)
9. Stop Method (Pr. 00-22)
10. Digital Keypad STOP function (Pr.00-32)
11. Max. Operation Frequency (Pr. 01-00)
12. Base Frequency of Motor 1 (Pr. 01-01)
13. Max. Output Voltage Setting of Motor 1
(Pr. 01-02)
14. Middle Output Frequency of Motor 1
(Pr. 01-03)
15. Middle Output Voltage of Motor 1
(Pr. 01-04)
16. Middle Output Frequency of Motor 2
(Pr. 01-05)
17. Middle Output Voltage of Motor 2
(Pr. 01-06)
18. Min. Output Frequency of Motor 1
(Pr. 01-07)
19. Min. Output Voltage of Motor 1
(Pr. 01-08)
20. Output Frequency Upper Limit
(Pr. 01-10)
10-6
21. Output Frequency Lower Limit

(Pr. 01-11)
22. Accel. Time 1 (Pr. 01-12)
23. Decel Time 1 (Pr. 01-13)
24. Over-voltage Stall Prevention
(Pr. 06-01)
25. Derating protection (Pr. 06-55)
26. Software Brake Level (Pr. 07-00)
27. Speed tracking during start-up
(Pr. 07-12)
28. Emergency stop (EF) & force to stop
selection (Pr. 07-20)
29. Filter Time of Torque Command
(Pr. 07-24)
30. Filter Time of Slip Compensation
(Pr. 07-25)
31. Torque compensation gain (Pr. 07-26)
32. Slip Compensation Gain (Pr. 07-27)
2. VFPG Mode
Items
(Pr. 00-07)
2. Parameter Protection Password
Setting (Pr. 00-08)
3. Control Mode (Pr. 00-10)
4. Control of Speed Mode (Pr. 00-11)
01: Password Decoder
5. Load Selection (Pr. 00-16)
6. Source of the Master Frequency
Command (AUTO) (Pr. 00-20)
7. Source of the Operation Command
(AUTO) (Pr. 00-21)
9. Digital Keypad STOP function
(Pr. 00-32)
(Pr. 01-02)
(Pr. 01-07)
(Pr. 01-08)
(Pr. 01-10)
(Pr. 01-11)
17. Accel. Time 1 (Pr. 01-12)
18. Decel Time 1 (Pr. 01-13)
(Pr. 06-01)
(Pr. 07-24)
(Pr. 07-25)
24. Encoder Type Selection (Pr. 10-00)
25. Encoder Pulse (Pr. 10-01)
26. Encoder Input Type Setting (Pr. 10-02)
27. ASR Control ( P) 1 (Pr. 11-06)
28. ASR Control (I) 1 (Pr. 11-07)
29. ASR Control ( P) 2 (Pr. 11-08)
30. ASR Control (I) 2 (Pr. 11-09)
31. P Gain of Zero Speed (Pr. 11-10)
32. I Gain of Zero Speed (Pr. 11-11)
10-7
3. SVC Mode
Items
(Pr. 00-07)
2. Parameter Protection Password
Setting (Pr. 00-08)
5. Load Selection (Pr. 00-16)
6. Carrier Frequency (Pr. 00-17)
(AUTO) (Pr. 00-21)
10. Digital Keypad STOP function
(Pr. 00-32)
12. Base Frequency of Motor 1
(Pr. P01-01)
(Pr. 01-02)
(Pr. 01-07)
(Pr. 01-08)
(Pr. 01-10)
(Pr. 01-11)
18. Accel. Time 1 (Pr. 01-12)
19. Decel Time 1 (Pr. 01-13)
20. Full-load Current of Induction Motor 1
(Pr. 05-01)
21. Rated Power of Induction Motor 1
(Pr. 05-02)
22. Rated Speed of Induction Motor 1
(Pr. 05-03)
23. Pole Number of Induction Motor 1
(Pr. 05-04)
24. No-load Current of Induction Motor 1
(Pr. 05-05)
(Pr. 06-01)
26. Over-current Stall Prevention during
Acceleration (Pr. 06-03)
27. Derating Protection (Pr. 06-55)
29. Emergency Stop (EF) & Force to Stop
Selection (Pr. 07-20)
(Pr. 07-24)
(Pr. 07-25)
4. FOCPG Mode
Items
(Pr. 00-07)
2. Parameter Protection Password Setting
(Pr. 00-08)
10-8
01: Password Decoder 5. Source of the Master Frequency

(AUTO) (Pr. 00-21)
(Pr. 01-02)
(Pr. 01-10)
(Pr. 01-11)
13. Accel. Time 1 (Pr. 01-12)
14. Decel Time 1 (Pr. 01-13)
(Pr. 05-01)
(Pr. 05-02)
(Pr. 05-03)
(Pr. 05-04)
(Pr. 05-05)
(Pr. 06-01)
21. Over-current Stall Prevention during
Acceleration (Pr. 06-03)
22. Derating Protection (Pr. 06-55)
24. Emergency Stop (EF) & Force to Stop
Selection (Pr. 07-20)
28. System Control (Pr. 11-00)
29. Per Unit of System Inertia (Pr. 11-01)
30. ASR1 Low-speed Bandwidth
(Pr. 11-03)
31. ASR2 High-speed Bandwidth
(Pr. 11-04)
32. Zero-speed Bandwidth (Pr. 11-05)
5. TQCPG Mode
Items
1. Password Input (Decode) (Pr. 00-07)
2. Password Setting (Pr. 00-08)
Command (Pr. 00-20)
(Pr. 00-21)

(Pr. 01-02)
(Pr. 05-01)
(Pr. 05-02)
(Pr. 05-03)
10-9

(Pr. 05-04)
(Pr. 05-05)
(Pr. 06-01)
20. System Control (Pr. 11-00)
21. Per Unit of System Inertia (Pr. 11-01)
22. ASR1 Low-speed Bandwidth
(Pr. 11-03)
23. ASR2 High-speed Bandwidth
(Pr. 11-04)
24. Zero-speed Bandwidth (Pr. 11-05)
25. Max. Torque Command (Pr. 11-27)
26. Source of Torque Offset (Pr. 11-28)
27. Torque Offset Setting (Pr. 11-29)
28. Source of Torque Command (Pr. 11-33)
29. Torque Command (Pr. 11-34)
30. Speed Limit Selection (Pr. 11-36)
31. Forward Speed Limit (torque mode)
(Pr. 11-37)
32. Reverse Speed Limit (torque mode)
(Pr. 11-38)
6. My Mode
Items
It can save 01~32 sets of parameters (Pr).
Setup process
1. Go to “Parameter Setup” function.
Press ENTER to go to the parameter
Click F4 in parameter which you need to use. There is an ADD
on the bottom right-hand corner of the
setting page, the screen. Press F4 on the keypad to add
this parameter to My Mode.
parameter will be saved
to My Mode. To delete or
00- 10
correct the parameter, 0
enter this parameter and Speed M ode
0~3 A DD
click the “DEL” on the

bottom right corner.
2. The parameter (Pr) will be displayed in

My mode if it is properly saved.
To correct or to delete this Pr., click DEL.
3. To delete a parameter, go to “My Mode”

and select a parameter which you need
to delete.
Press ENTER to enter the parameter
setting screen. There is a DEL on the
10-10
bottom left-hand corner of the screen.

Press F4 on the keypad to delete this
parameter from My Mode.
00- 10
0
Speed M ode
0~3 DEL
4. After pressing ENTER to delete <01

Control Mode>, the <02 Maximum
Operating Frequency > will automatically
replace <01 Control Mode>.
3. Application Selection List

This function allows user to select application and its parameters sets.
For example:
Select 3: Application Selection List
Press ENTER to go into the Application Selection List
Select Application
Press ENTER to enter the application selection screen, the selected
application set will be “Fan”.
Press ENTER to enter the Fan application set screen.
Press Up/ Down key to select the parameter.
10-11
Choose 0: Normal load or 1: Heavy load based on the needs, then press
ENTER.
4. Changed List
This function displays the parameter that user has set.
For example:
Set Pr. 13-00 Application Selection = 3: Fan
Enter the changed list screen. List PrNum=026 means there are 26
parameters that have been changed.
Press ENTER to enter the changed list screen.
Use Up/ Down key to select the parameters that need

to be checked or changed.
Press ENTER to enter the parameter.
5. Copy Parameter
4 duplicates are provided
The steps are shown in the example below.
Example: Saved in the motor drive.
1 Go to “Copy Parameter”
2 Select the parameter group which needs to
Press ENTER key to go to 001~004:
be copied and press ENTER key.
content storage
10-12
1. Select 1: Save in the motor drive.

2. Press ENTER key to go to “Save in the
motor drive” screen.
Begin to copy parameters until it is done.
Once copying parameters is done, keypad

will automatically go back to this screen.
Example: Saved in the keypad.
1. Go to “Copy parameter”
2. Select the parameter group which needs to
be copied and press ENTER key.
Press ENTER key to go to “Save in the motor

drive” screen.
Use Up/ Down key to select a symbol.

Use Left/ Right key to move the cursor to
select a file name.
String & Symbol Table:

！＂＃＄％＆＇（）＊＋，－．／０１２３４５６７８９：；＜＝＞？＠
ＡＢＣＤＥＦＧＨＩＪＫＬＭＮＯＰＱＲＳＴＵＶＷＸＹＺ［＼］＾＿｀
ａｂｃｄｆｇｈｉｊｋｌｍｎｏｐｑｒｓｔｕｖｗｘｙｚ｛｜｝～
Once the file name is confirmed, press

ENTER key.
To begin copying parameters until it is done.
When copying parameters is completed,

keypad will automatically be back to this
screen.
Press Right key to see the date of copying

parameters.
Press Right key to see the time of copying

parameters.
6. Fault Record
Able to store 6 error codes (Keypad V1.02 and previous versions)
Able to store 30 error codes (Keypad V1.20 and later version)
The most recent error record is shown as the first record. Select an error
record to see its details such as date, time, frequency, current, voltage,
DCBUS voltage)
10-13
Press Up/ Down key to select an error record.

Press to select. After selecting an error code, press ENTER to see
that error record’s detail
KPC-CE01 does not support
this function.
Press Up/ Down key to see an error record’s detail

such as date, time, frequency, current, voltage,
DCBUS voltage.
Press Up/ Down key to select an error record.

After selecting an error code, press ENTER to see
that error record’s detail
Press Up/ Down key to see an error record’s detail

such as date, time, frequency, current, voltage,
DCBUS voltage.
NOTE
Fault actions of AC motor drive are recorded and saved to KPC-CC01.
When KPC-CC01 is removed and applied to another AC motor drive, the
previous fault records will not be deleted. The new fault records of the
present AC motor drive will accumulate to KPC-CC01.
7. Language Setup
Language setting option is displayed in the language of the user’s choice.
Language setting options:
1. English 5. Русский
2. 繁體中文 6. Español
3. 简体中文 7. Português
Use Up / Down key to select
language, than press ENTER. 4. Türkçe 8. français
8. Time Setup
Time setup
2009/01/01 Use Up / Down key to set up Year
_ _ : _ _ :_ _
Use Left / Right key to select

Year, Month, Day, Hour, Minute Use Up / Down key to set up Month
or Second to set up
Use Up / Down key to set up Day
10-14
Use Up / Down key to set up Hour
Use Up / Down key to set up Minute
Use Up / Down key to set up Second
After setting up, press ENTER to confirm

the setup.
NOTE
Limitation: The charging process of the super capacitor will finish in about 6
minutes. When the digital keypad is removed, the time setting will be in
standby status for 7 days. After this period, the time needs to be reset.
9. Keypad Locked
Keypad Locked
This function is used to lock the keypad. The main page would not display
“keypad locked” when the keypad is locked, however it will display the
message”please press ESC and then ENTER to unlock the keypad” when any
key is pressed.
Press to lock When the keypad is locked, the main screen doesn’t
display any status to show that.
Press any key on the keypad; a screen as shown in

image on the left will be displayed.
If ESC key is not pressed, the keypad will

automatically be back to this screen.
The keypad is still locked at this moment. By

pressing any key, a screen as shown in the image on
the left will still be displayed.
Press ESC for 3 seconds to unlock the keypad and

the keypad will be back to this screen. Then each key
on the keypad is functional.
After the above steps, the keypad will not be locked when turning off the
power and turning on the power again.
10-15
10. PLC Function

When the PLC function is activated or stopped, the PLC status will be
displayed on main page of Delta default setting.
Option 2: Enable PLC function
Press Up/Down key to select a

PLC’s function. Factory setting on the main screen displays
Then press ENTER. PLC/RUN status bar.
Option 3: Disable PLC function
Factory setting on the main screen displays

PLC/STOP status bar
If the PLC program is not available in the control

board, PLFF warning will be displayed when
choosing option 2 or 3.
In this case, select option 1: No Function to clear
PLFF warning.
The PLC function of KPC-CE01 can only displays:
1. PLC0
2. PLC1
3. PLC2
11. Copy PLC

4 duplicates are provided
The steps are shown in the example below.
Example: Saved in the motor drive.
1. Go to “Copy PLC”
2. Select a parameter group to copy, then press
ENTER.
1. Select 1: Save in the motor drive.

2. Press ENTER key to go to “Save in the motor
drive” screen.
Begin to copy PLC until it is done.
Once copying PLC is done, keypad will automatically

be back to this screen.
NOTE
If “Option 1: Save in the motor drive” is selected,
verify if the PLC program is built-in to KPC-CC01
keypad. If PLC program is not available in the keypad
while “Option 1: Save in the motor drive” is selected,
an “ERR8 Warning: Type not matching” will be
displayed on the screen.
10-16
Unplug and plug back the keypad while copying the

PLC program will cause a CPLt warning.
Example: Saved in the keypad.
1. Go to “Copy PLC”.
2. Select the parameter group which needs to be
copied and press ENTER key.
Press ENTER key to go to “Save in the motor drive”

screen.
If WPLSoft editor is installed and password is set,

enter the password to save the file onto digital
display.
Use Up/ Down key to select a symbol.

Use Left/ Right key to move the cursor to select a file
name.
String & Symbol Table:

！＂＃＄％＆＇（）＊＋，－．／０１２３４５６７８９：；＜＝＞？＠Ａ
ＢＣＤＥＦＧＨＩＪＫＬＭＮＯＰＱＲＳＴＵＶＷＸＹＺ［＼］＾＿｀ａｂ
ｃｄｆｇｈｉｊｋｌｍｎｏｐｑｒｓｔｕｖｗｘｙｚ｛｜｝～
Once the file name is confirmed, press ENTER key.
To begin copying parameters until it is done.
When copying parameters is completed, keypad will

automatically be back to this screen.
Press Right key to see the date of copying

parameters.
Press Right key to see the time of copying

parameters.
12. Display setup

1. Contrast
Use Up / Down key to adjust the setting

value.
10-17
After selecting a setting value. Press

Press to setting menu.
ENTER to see screen’s display after
contrast is adjusted to be +10.
When the setting value is 0 Min, the

backlight will be steady on.
Then press ENTER.
After select a setting value Press ENTER to

see screen’s display result after contrast is
adjusted to be -10.
2. Back-light
Press ENTER to go to “Back Light Time

Setting” screen.

value.

backlight will be steady on.

backlight will be off in 10 minutes.
3. Text Color
Press ENTER to go to Text Color Setting

screen.
The default value is White Text.

value.
1:
The setting value changes to Blue Text.
2:
3:
10-18
13. Start-up
1. Default 1 DELTA LOGO
Indus tr ia l Aut om at ion
2. Default 2 DELTA Text
C Series
Indu strial A uto mation
3. User Defined: optional accessory is required (TPEditor & USB / RS-485

Communication Interface-IFD6530)
Install an editing accessory would allow users to design their own start-up
page. If editor accessory is not installed, “user defined” option will display a
blank page.
USB/RS-485 Communication Interface-IFD6530

Please refer to Chapter 07 Optional Accessories for more detail.
TPEditor
Go to Delta’s website to download TPEditor V1.60 or later versions.
http://www.deltaww.com/services/DownloadCenter2.aspx?secID=8&pid=2&tid=0&CID=06&itemID=060302&typeID=1&dow
nloadID=,&title=-- Select Product Series --&dataType=8;&check=1&hl=en-US
14. Main page

1. Default page
F 60.00Hz
H 0.00Hz
u 540.0Vdc
Default picture and editable
picture are available upon F 60.00Hz >>> H >>> A >>> U (circulate)
selection.
2. User Defined: optional accessory is required (TPEditor & USB / RS-485
Press to select. Communication Interface-IFD6530)
Install an editing accessory would allow users to design their own main
page. If editor accessory is not installed, “user defined” option will display
a blank page.
USB/RS-485 Communication Interface-IFD6530

Please refer to Chapter 07 Optional Accessories for more detail.
TPEditor
Go to Delta’s website to download TPEditor V1.60 or later versions.
http://www.deltaww.com/services/DownloadCenter2.aspx?secID=8&pid=2&tid=0&CID=06&itemID=060302&typeID=1&dow
nloadID=,&title=-- Select Product Series --&dataType=8;&check=1&hl=en-US
10-19
15. PC Link
1. TPEditor: This function allows users to connect the keypad to a
computer then to download and edit user defined pages.
Click ENTER to go to <Waiting to

connect to PC>
In TPEditor, choose <Communication>, then choose “Write to HMI”
Choose <YES> in the <Confirm to Write> dialogue box.
Start downloading pages to edit KPC-CC01.
Download completed
10-20
2. VFDSoft: this function allows user to link to the VFDSoft Operating

software then to upload data.
Copy parameter 1~4 in KPC-CC01
NOTE When the Operation System (OS) of your computer is
Windows 10, right click on the icon of VFDSoft to enter <Property> (as
shown in the red color square in the image below). Then click on the
<Compatibility> tab and select the <Run this program as an
administrator.> (also as shown in the red color square in the image
below)
Connect KPC-CCO1 to a computer
Start downloading pages to edit to

KPC-CC01
Use Up / Down key to select a parameter

group to upload to VFDSoft.
Press ENTER
Waiting to connect to PC
Open VFDSoft, choose <Parameter Manager function>
10-21
In Parameter Manager, choose <Load parameter table from KPC-CC01>
Choose the right communication port and click OK
Start to upload parameters to VFDSoft
Uploading parameter is completed
Before using the user defined starting screen and user defined main
screen, the starting screen setup and the main screen setup have to be
preset as user defined.
If the user defined page are not downloaded to KPC-CC01, the starting
screen and the main screen will be blank.
10-22
16. Start Wizard

F1 ：Next； F1 ：Back
F1 F4
F1
NOTE: The Start Wizard will not show up when re-power next time.
MENU
10-23
ESC
F4
F4 F4 F4
F1 F1 F1
F4 F4 F4
F1 F1 F1
F4 F4
F4
F1 F1
F1
F4 F1
F1
F4
MENU
Use Up/Down key After selecting,

to select “16: Start press ENTER
Wizard”
NOTE: The “16: Start Wizard” on the menu is to set whether shows start wizard when start up the
drive.
10-24
Other display
When a fault occurs, the menu will display:
Fault Warning
ocA CE01
Oc at accel Comm. Error 1
1. Press STOP / RESET button to reset the fault code. If still no response, please contact local distributor or return
to the factory. To view the fault DCBUS voltage, output current and output voltage, press “MENU”“Fault
Record”.
2. After resetting, if the screen returns to main page and shows no fault after pressing ESC, the fault is cleared.
3. When fault or warning message appears, backlight LED will blink until the fault or the warning is cleared.
Optional accessory: RJ45 Extension Lead for Digital Keypad

Part No. Description
CBC-K3FT RJ45 extension lead, 3 feet (approximately 0.9m)
CBC-K5FT RJ45 extension lead, 5 feet (approximately 1.5 m)
CBC-K10FT RJ45 extension lead, 10 feet (approximately 3 m)
Note: When you need to buy communication cables, buy non-shielded, 24 AWG, 4 twisted pair, 100 ohms
communication cables.
10-25
10-3 TPEditor Installation Instruction

TPEditor can edit up to 256 HMI (Human-Machine Interface) pages with a total storage capacity of 256KB.
Each page can edit 50 normal objects and 10 communication objects.
1) TPEditor: Setup & Basic Functions

1. Run TPEditor version 1.60 or above
2. Go to File (F) Click on New. The Window below will pop up. At the device type, click on the drop down
menu and choose DELTA VFD-C Inverter. At the TP type, click on the drop down menu and choose VFD-C
KeyPad. As for File Name, enter TPE0. Now click on OK.
3. You are now at the designing page. Go to Edit (E) Click on Add a New Page (A) or go to the TP page on
the upper right side, right click once on TP page and choose Add to increase one more page for editing.
4. Edit Startup Page
10-26
5. Static Text . Open a blank page, click once on this button , and then double click on that blank
page. The following window will pop up.
6. Static Bitmap Open a blank page, then click once on this button and then double click on that
blank page. The following window will pop up.
Please note that Static Bitmap setting supports only images in BMP format. Now choose an image that
you need and click open, then that image will appear in the Static Bitmap window.
7. Geometric Bitmap  As shown in the picture on the left, there are

11 kinds of geometric bitmap to choose. Open a new blank page then click once on a geometric bitmap
icon that you need. Then drag that icon and enlarge it to the size that you need on that blank page.
8. Finish editing the keypad starting screen and select Communication>Input User Defined Keypad
Starting Screen.
10-27
9. Downloading setting: Go to Tool > Communication. Set up communication port and speed of IFD6530.
10. Only three speed selections are available: 9600 bps, 19200 bps and 38400 bps.
11. When a dialogue box displayed on the screen asking to confirm writing or not, press buttons on the keypad
to go to MENU, select PC LINK and then press ENTER and wait for few seconds. Then select YES on the
screen to start downloading.
10-28
2) Edit Main Page & Example of Download

1. Go to editing page, select Edit > Add one page or press the button ADD on the right hand side of the HMI
page to increase number of pages to edit. This keypad currently supports up to 256 pages.
2. On the bottom right-hand corner of the HMI, click on a page number to edit or go to VIEW > HMI page to
start editing main page. As shown in the image, the following objects are available. From left to right:
Static Text, ASCII Display, Static Bitmap, Scale, Bar Graph, Button, Clock Display, Multi-state bit map,
Units, Numeric Input and 11 geometric bitmaps and lines of different width. The application of Static Text,
Static Bitmap, and geometric bitmap is the same as the editing startup page.
3. Numeric / ASCII Display: To add a Numeric / ASCII Display object to a screen, double click on the object
to set up Related Devices, Frame Setting, Fonts and Alignment.
Related Device: Choose the VFD Communication Port that you need, if you want to read output
frequency (H), set the VFD Communication Port to $2202. For other values, please refer to ACMD
ModBus Comm Address List.
10-29
4. Scale Setting : On the Tool Bar, click on for Scale Setting. You can also edit Scale Setting in the
Property Window on the right hand side of your computer screen.
a. Scale Position: Click on the drop down list to choose which position that you need to place a scale.
b. Scale Side: Click on the drop down list to choose if you want to number your scale from smaller
number to bigger number or from big to small. Click OK to accept this setting or click Cancel to
abort.
c. Font Setting: Click on the drop down list to choose the Font setting that you need then click OK to
accept the setting or click Cancel to abort.
d. Value Length: Click on the drop down to choose 16 bits or 32 bits. Then click OK to accept the
setting or click Cancel to abort.
e. Main Scale & Sub Scale: In order to divide the whole scale into equal parts, key in the numbers of
your choices for main scale and sub scale.
f. Maximum value & Minimum Value are the numbers on the two ends of a scale. They can be
negative numbers. But the values allowed to be input are limited by the length of value. For
example, when the length of value is set to be hexadecimal, the maximum and the minimum value
cannot be input as -4000.
Follow the Scale setting mentioned above; you will have a scale as shown below.
5. Bar Graph setting :
a. Related Device: Choose the VFD Communication Port that you need.
b. Direction Setting: Click on the drop down menu to choose one of the following directions: From
Bottom to Top, From Top to Bottom, From Left to Right or From Right to Left.
c. Maximum Value & Minimum Value: They define the range covered by the maximum value and
minimum value. If a value is smaller than or equal to the minimum value, then the bar graph will be
blank. If a value is bigger or equal to the maximum value, then the bar graph will be full. If a value is
between minimum and maximum value, then the bar graph will be filled proportionally.
10-30
6. Button : Currently this function only allows the Keypad to switch pages, other functions are not yet
available. Text input function and Image inserted functions are not yet supported.
Double click on to open set up window.
<Button Type> allows users set up buttons’ functions. <Page Jump> and <Constant Setting> are the only
two currently supported functions.
A. [Page Jump] function setting
 Page Jump setting: After you choose the Page Jump function in the drop down list, you will see this
Page Jump Setting Menu
 <Function Key> allows you to assign functions to the following keys on the KPC-CC01 keypad: F1,
F2, F3, F4, Up, Down, Left and Right. Please note that the Up and Down keys are locked by
TPEditor. These two keys cannot be programmed. If you want to program Up and Down keys, go to
ToolFunction Key Settings (F) Re-Define Up / Down Key (R).
 Button Text: This function allows user to name buttons. For example, key in <Next Page> in the
empty space, a button will have the wording <Next Page> displayed on it.
B. [Constant setting] function
This function is to set up the memory address’ value of the VFD or PLC. When pressing the <function
button> set up in before, a value will be written to the memory address of the <Constant Setting>. This
function can be used as initializing a variable.
10-31
7. Clock Display Setting : The setup window of the Clock Display is shown as the image below. Time,
Day or Date can be displayed on the keypad.
Open a new file and click once in that window, you will see the following
In the clock display setting, you can choose to display Time, Day or Date on the Keypad. To adjust time,
go to #9 on the Keypad’s menu. You can also adjust Frame Setting, Font Setting and Alignment.
8. Multi-state bitmap : The setup window of the multi-state is shown as the image below. This object
reads the bit’s property value of the PLC. It defines what image or wording is when this bit is 0 or when
this bit is 1. Set the initial status to be 0 or 1 to define the displayed image or wording.
9. Unit Measurement : Click once on this Button

Open a new file and double click on that window, you will see the following:
Choose from the drop down list the Metrology and the Unity Name that you need.
As for Metrology, you have the following choices: Length, Square Measure, Volume/Solid Measure,
Weight, Speed, Time and Temperature. The unit name changes automatically when you change
metrology type.
10-32
10. Numeric Input Setting :
This menu allows you to provide parameters or communication ports and to input numbers.
Click once on this button .
Open a new file and double click on that window, you will see the following:
a. Related Device: There are two blank spaces to fill in, one is <Write> and another one is <Read>.
Input the numbers that you want to display and the corresponding numbers of a parameter and that
of a communication port. For example, input 012C to Read and Write Parameter Pr. 01-44.
b. Outline Setting: The Frame setting, Font setting, Vertical Alignment and Horizontal Alignment are
the same as mentioned before. Click on the drop down menu and choose the setting that you need.
c. Function key: The setting here allows you to program keys on the keypad. Press the key on the
menu then the corresponding key on the keypad will start to blink, then press Enter to confirm the
setting.
d. Value Type & Value Length: These two factors influence the range of the Minimum and Maximum
Value of the Limit Setting. Please note that the corresponding supporting values for C2000 have to
be 16bits. The 32bits values are not supported.
e. Value Setting: This part is set automatically by the keypad itself.
f. Limit Setting: Input the range the security setting here.
For example, if you set Function Key as F1, Minimum Value as 0 and Maximum Value as 4, then
press F1 on Keypad. Then you can press Up and Down key on the keypad to increase or decrease
the value. Press Enter Key on the keypad to confirm your setting. You can also go to parameter
table 01-44 to verify if your input value is correct.
11. Download TP Page: Press Up or Down key on the keypad until you reach #13 PC Link.
Then press Enter on the keypad and you will see the word “Waiting” on keypad’s screen. Now choose a
page that you have created then go to Communication (M) Write to TP (W) to start downloading the
page to the keypad.
When you see the word Completed on the keypad’s screen, that means the download is done.
Then you can press ESC on the keypad to go back to the menu of the keypad.
10-33
10-4 Digital Keypad KPC-CC01 Fault Codes and Descriptions
Fault Codes
LCM Display * Description Corrective Actions

An error has occurred on keypad’s flash memory.
1. Press RESET on the keypad to clear errors.
Fault 2. Verify if there’s any problem on Flash IC.
FrEr Keypad flash memory read error 3. Shut down the system, wait for ten minutes, and
then power on again the system.
kpdFlash Read Er If none of the solution above works, contact your
authorized local dealer.
An error has occurred on keypad’s flash memory.
1. Press RESET on the keypad to clear errors.
Fault 2. Verify if there’s any problem on Flash IC.
FSEr Keypad flash memory save error 3. Shut down the system, wait for ten minutes, and
kpdFlash Save Er If none of the solution above works, contact your
authorized local dealer.
Errors occurred on factory setting of parameters.
It might be caused by firmware update.
Fault 1. Press RESET on the keypad to clear errors.
Keypad flash memory parameter 2. Verify if there’s any problem on Flash IC.
FPEr
error 3. Shut down the system, wait for ten minutes, and
kpdFlash Pr Er then power on again the system.
If none of the solution above works, contact your local
authorized dealer.
Keypad cannot read any data sent from VFD.
1. Verify if the keypad is properly connected to the
motor drive by a communication cable such as
Fault RJ-45.
Keypad flash memory when read
VFDr 2. Press RESET on the keypad to clear errors.
AC drive data error
3. Shut down the system, wait for ten minutes, and
Read VFD Info Er then power on again the system.
authorized dealer.
A Serious error has occurred on keypad’s CPU.
1. Verify if there’s any problem on CPU clock?
2. Verify if there’s any problem on Flash IC?
Fault 3. Verify if there’s any problem on RTC IC?
A serious CPU error occurs to the 4. Verify if the communication quality of the RS485 is
CPUEr
Keypad good?
CPU Error 5. Shut down the system, wait for ten minutes, and
then power on again the system. If none of the
solution above works, contact your local authorized
dealer.
10-34
Warning Codes

Motor drive doesn’t accept the communication
command sent from keypad.
Warning
motor drive on the communication contact by a
CE01 Modbus function code error communication cable such as RJ-45.
Comm Command Er 2. Press RESET on the keypad to clear errors.
If none of the above solution works, contact your local
authorized dealer.
Motor drive doesn’t accept keypad’s communication
address.
Warning
CE02 Modbus data address error communication cable such as RJ-45.
Comm Address Er 2. Press RESET on the keypad to clear errors.
authorized dealer.
Motor drive doesn’t accept the communication data
sent from keypad.
Warning
CE03 Modbus data value error communication cable such as RJ-45.
Comm Data Error 2. Press RESET on the keypad to clear errors.
authorized dealer.
Motor drive cannot process the communication
Warning
communication cable such as RJ-45.
CE04 Modbus slave drive error 2. Press RESET on the keypad to clear errors.
Comm Slave Error 3. Shut down the system, wait for ten minutes, and
authorized dealer.
Motor drive doesn’t respond to the communication
Warning
communication cable such as RJ-45.
CE10 Modbus transmission time-Out 2. Press RESET on the keypad to clear errors.
KpdCom m Time O ut 3. Shut down the system, wait for ten minutes, and
authorized dealer.
Keypad’s TP Editor uses unsupported object or Drive
series.
1. Verify how the TP Editor should use that object.
Delete unsupported object and unsupported
Warning
Object not supported by TP setting.
TPNO Editor 2. Reedit the TP editor and then download it.
TP No Object 3. Make sure the Drive series support TP functions. If
it didn’t, the main page will display default.
authorized dealer.
NOTE The warning code which shows as “CExx” only occurs when the communication problem
between the drive and keypad, and it’s nothing to do with the drive and other device. Be noted
that the warning code description to judge the cause of error if “CExx” occurs.
10-35
File Copy Setting Fault Description:
These faults will happen when KPC-CC01 cannot perform the command after clicking the Enter button in
copy function.

The property of the parameter / file is read-only and
cannot be written to.
Parameter and file are read only 1. Verify the specification on the user manual.
If the solution above doesn’t work, contact your local
authorized dealer.
An error occurred while writing to a parameter / file.
1. Verify if there’s any problem on the Flash IC.
Fail to write parameter and file then power on again the system.
If none of the solution above work, contact your local
authorized dealer.
A setting cannot be made while motor drive is in
operation.
AC drive is in operating status 1. Verify if the drive is not in operation.
authorized dealer.
A setting cannot be made because a parameter is
locked.
1. Verify if the parameter is locked or not. If it is locked,
AC drive parameter is locked unlock it and try to set up the parameter again.
authorized dealer.
A setting cannot be made because a parameter is
being modified.
1. Verify if the parameter is being modified. If it is not
AC drive parameter changing being modified, try to set up that parameter again.
authorized dealer.
A setting cannot be made because an error has
occurred on the motor drive.
1. Verify if there’s any error occurred on the motor
Fault code drive. If there isn’t any error, try to make the setting
again.
authorized dealer.
A setting cannot be made because of a warning
message given to the motor drive.
1. Verify if there’s any warning message given to the
Warning code motor drive.
authorized dealer.
The copied data are not the same type, so the setting
cannot be made.
1. Verify if the products’ serial numbers need to be
File type dismatch copied fall in the category. If they are in the same
category, try to make the setting again.
If the solution above doesn’t work, contact your
authorized dealer.
10-36

A setting cannot be made, because some data are
locked.
1. Verify if the data are unlocked or able to be
unlocked. If the data are unlocked, try to make the
File is locked with password setting again.
authorized dealer.
A setting cannot be made because the password is
incorrect.
1. Verify if the password is correct. If the password is
correct, try to make the setting again.
File password is incorrect 2. Shut down the system, wait for ten minutes, and
authorized dealer.
A setting cannot be made, because the version of the
data is incorrect.
1. Verify if the version of the data matches the motor
Different version of copied data drive. If it matches, try to make the setting again.
authorized dealer.
A setting cannot be made, because data copying
timeout expired.
1. Redo data copying.
2. Verify if copying data is authorized. If it is
AC drive copy function time-out authorized, try again to copy data.
authorized dealer.
※ The content in this chapter only applies on V1.01 and above of KPC-CC01 keypad.
10-37
10-5 Functions not supported when using TPEditor with KPC-CC01
1. Local Page Setting and Global Setting functions are not supported.
2. [Communication][Read from TP] functions are not supported.
3. In RTC Display Setting, the Refer Device cannot be modified.
10-38
Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000
Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter Settings
This chapter provides a summary of parameter (Pr.) setting ranges and defaults. You can set,
change, and reset parameters through the digital keypad.
NOTE
1) : You can set this parameter during operation
2) For more details on parameters, please refer to Ch12 Description of Parameter Settings.
00 Drive Parameters
NOTE IM: Induction Motor; PM: Permanent Magnet Motor
Pr. Parameter Name Setting Range Default
4: 230V, 0.75kW
5: 460V, 0.75kW
6: 230V, 1.50kW
7: 460V, 1.50kW
8: 230V, 2.20kW
9: 460V, 2.20kW
10: 230V, 3.70kW
11: 460V, 3.70kW
12: 230V, 5.50kW
13: 460V, 5.50kW
14: 230V, 7.50kW
15: 460V, 7.50kW
16: 230V, 11.0kW
17: 460V, 11.0kW
18: 230V, 15.0kW Read
00-00 Identity code of the AC motor drive
19: 460V, 15.0kW only
20: 230V, 18.5kW
21: 460V, 18.5kW
22: 230V, 22.0kW
23: 460V, 22.0kW
24: 230V, 30.0kW
25: 460V, 30.0kW
26: 230V, 37.0kW
27: 460V, 37.0kW
28: 230V, 45.0kW
29: 460V, 45.0kW
30: 230V, 55.0kW
31: 460V, 55.0kW
32: 230V, 75.0kW
33: 460V, 75.0kW
11-1

34: 230V, 90.0kW
35: 460V, 90.0kW
37: 460V, 110.0kW
39: 460V, 132.0kW
41: 460V, 160.0kW
43: 460V, 185.0kW
45: 460V, 220.0kW
47: 460V, 280.0kW
49: 460V, 315.0kW
51: 460V, 355.0kW
55: 460V, 450.0kW
93: 460V, 4kW
505: 575V, 1.5kW
506: 575V, 2.2kW
507: 575V, 3.7kW
508: 575V, 5.5kW
509: 575V, 7.5kW
510: 575V, 11kW
511: 575V, 15kW
612: 690V, 18.5kW
613: 690V, 22kW
614: 690V, 30kW
615: 690V, 37kW
616: 690V, 45kW
617: 690V, 55kW
618: 690V, 75kW
619: 690V, 90kW
620: 690V, 110kW
621: 690V, 132kW
622: 690V, 160kW
686: 690V, 200kW
687: 690V, 250kW
626: 690V, 315kW
628: 690V, 400kW
629: 690V, 450kW
631: 690V, 560kW
632: 690V, 630kW
Read
00-01 Display AC motor drive rated current Display by models
only
0: No function
00-02 Parameter reset 1: Parameter write protect 0
5: Reset kWh display to 0
11-2

6: Reset PLC (including CANopen Master Index)
7: Reset CANopen Index (Slave)
9: Reset all parameters to defaults with base
frequency at 50 Hz
10: Reset all parameters to defaults with base
frequency at 60 Hz
0: F (frequency command)
1: H (output frequency)
 00-03 Start-up display selection 0
2: U (multi-function display, see Pr. 00-04)
3: A (output current)
0: Display output current (A) (Unit: Amp)
1: Display counter value (c) (Unit: CNT)
2: Display actual output frequency (H.) (Unit: Hz)
3: Display DC BUS voltage (v) (Unit: VDC)
4: Display output voltage (E) (Unit: VAC)
5: Display output power angle (n) (Unit: deg)
6: Display output power in kW (P) (Unit: kW)
7: Display actual motor speed rpm (r) (Unit: rpm)
8: Display estimate output torque % (t) (Unit: %)
9: Display PG feedback (G) (refer to Pr. 10-00 and
Pr. 10-01) (Unit: PLS)
10: Display PID feedback (b) (Unit: %)
11: Display AVI in % (1.) (Unit: %)
12: Display ACI in % (2.) (Unit: %)
Content of multi-function display 13: Display AUI in % (3.) (Unit: %)
 00-04 3
(user-defined) 14: Display the temperature of IGBT (i.) (Unit: °C)
15: Display the temperature of capacitance (c.)
(Unit: °C)
16: The status of digital input (ON / OFF) (i)
17: The status of digital output (ON / OFF) (o)
18: Multi-step speed (S)
19: The corresponding CPU pin status of digital
input (d)
20: The corresponding CPU pin status of digital
output (0.)
21: Actual motor position (PG1 of PG card) (P.)
The maximum value is 32bits display
22: Pulse input frequency (PG2 of PG card) (S.)
23: Pulse input position (PG2 of PG card) (q.)
The maximum value is 32bits display
11-3

24: Position command tracing error (E.)
25: Overload count (0.00~100.00%) (o.) (Unit: %)
26: Ground fault GFF (G.) (Unit: %)
27: DC BUS voltage ripple (r.) (Unit: VDC)
28: Display PLC data D1043 (C)
29: Display PM pole section (EMC-PG01U
application) (4.)
30: Display output of user defined (U)
31: Display Pr. 00-05 user gain (K)
32: Number of actual motor revolution during
operation (PG card plug in and Z phase signal
input) (Z.)
33: Motor actual position during operation (when PG
card is connected) (q)
34: Operation speed of fan (F.) (Unit: %)
35: Control mode display:
0 = Speed control mode (SPD)
1 = Torque control mode (TQR) (t.)
36: Present operating carrier frequency of drive (Hz)
(J.)
38: Display drive status (6.)
39: Display estimated output torque, positive and
negative, using Nt-m as unit (t 0.0: positive
torque; -0.0: negative torque (C.)
40: Torque command (L.) (Unit: %)
41: kWh display (J) (Unit: kWh)
42: PID target value (h.) (Unit: %)
43: PID offset (o.) (Unit: %)
44: PID output frequency (b.) (Unit: Hz)
45: Hardware ID
49: Motor temperature (PTC, PT100, KTY84-130)
51: PMSVC torque offset
52: AI10%
53: AI11%
Coefficient gain in actual output
 00-05 0.00–160.00 1.00
frequency
Read
00-06 Software version Read only
only
Parameter protection password 0–65535
 00-07 0
input 0–4: the number of password attempts allowed
11-4

0–65535
Parameter protection password 0: No password protection / password entered
 00-08 0
setting correctly (Pr. 00-07)
1: Parameter set
0: Speed mode
1: Point-to-point position control mode
 00-10 Control mode 0
2: Torque mode
3: Homing mode
0: IMVF (IM V/F control)

1: IMVFPG (IM V/F control + Encoder)
2: IM/PM SVC (IM / PM space vector control)
3: IMFOCPG (IM FOC + Encoder)
00-11 Speed control mode 0
4: PMFOCPG (PM FOC + Encoder)
5: IMFOC sensorless (IM FOC sensorless )
6: PM sensorless (PM FOC sensorless)
7: IPM sensorless (Interior PM FOC sensorless)
0: Relative position
00-12 Point-to-point position mode 0
1: Absolute position
0: IM TQCPG (IM torque control + Encoder)

00-13 Torque mode control 1: PM TQCPG (PM torque control + Encoder) 0
2: IM TQC sensorless (IM sensorless torque control)
0: Normal load
00-16 Load selection 0
1: Heavy load
Normal load
VF, VFPG,
SVC, PMFOCPG, PMFOC, IMFOC,
230V/460V
IMFOCPG, PMTQCPG IPMFOC IMTQC
IMTQCPG
1–15HP 2–15kHz 4–15kHz 4–10kHz 4–14kHz 8
20–50HP 2–10kHz 4–10kHz 4–10kHz 4–10kHz 6
60–125HP 2–9kHz 4–9kHz 4–9kHz 4–9kHz 4
Heavy load
VF, VFPG,
SVC, PMFOCPG, PMFOC, IMFOC,
00-17 Carrier frequency 230V/460V
IMFOCPG, PMTQCPG IPMFOC IMTQC
IMTQCPG
1–15HP 2–15kHz 4–15kHz 4–10kHz 4–14kHz 2
20–50HP 2–10kHz 4–10kHz 4–10kHz 4–10kHz
60–125HP 2–9kHz 4–9kHz 4–9kHz 4–9kHz
575V/690V (Light/ Normal/ Heavy load)

Power/ Control mode VF, VFPG, SVC
1–15HP (575V) 2–15kHz 6
20–600HP (690V) 2–9kHz 4
850HP (690V) 2–9kHz 3
11-5

bit0: Control command by PLC force control
bit1: Frequency command by PLC force control Read
00-19 PLC command mask
bit2: Position command by PLC force control only
bit3: Torque command by PLC force control
0: Digital keypad
1: RS-485 communication
2: External analog input (Pr. 03-00)
3: External UP / DOWN terminal (multi-function
input terminal)
Master frequency command
4: Pulse input without direction command (Pr.10-16
00-20 (AUTO) source / Source selection 0
without direction), use with PG card
of the PID target
5: Pulse input with direction command (Pr. 10-16),
use with PG card
6: CANopen communication card
8: Communication card (does not include CANopen
card)
0: Digital keypad
1: External terminals.
Operation command (AUTO) 2: RS-485 communication.
00-21 0
source 3: CANopen communication card
card)
0: Ramp to stop
 00-22 Stop method 0
1: Coast to stop
0: Enable forward / reverse
 00-23 Control of motor direction 1: Disable reverse 0
2: Disable forward
Digital keypad frequency command Read
00-24 Read only
memory only
bit0–3: user defined decimal place
0000b: no decimal place
0001b: one decimal place
0010b: two decimal places
0011b: three decimal places
 00-25 User defined characteristics bit4–15: user defined unit 0
000xh: Hz
001xh: rpm
002xh: %
003xh: kg
004xh: m/s
11-6

005xh: kW
006xh: HP
007xh: ppm
008xh: 1/m
009xh: kg/s
00Axh: kg/m
00Bxh: kg/h
00Cxh: lb/s
00Dxh: lb/m
00Exh: lb/h
00Fxh: ft/s
010xh: ft/m
011xh: m
012xh: ft
013xh: degC
014xh: degF
015xh: mbar
016xh: bar
017xh: Pa
018xh: kPa
019xh: mWG
01Axh: inWG
01Bxh: ftWG
01Cxh: psi
01Dxh: atm
01Exh: L/s
01Fxh: L/m
020xh: L/h
021xh: m3/s
022xh: m3/h
023xh: GPM
024xh: CFM
xxxxh: Hz
0: Disable
0–65535 (when Pr. 00-25 set to no decimal place)
0.0–6553.5 (when Pr. 00-25 set to 1 decimal place)
00-26 Maximum user-defined value 0.00–655.35 (when Pr. 00-25 set to 2 decimal 0
places)
0.000–65.535 (when Pr. 00-25 set to 3 decimal
places)
11-7

Read
00-27 User-defined value Read only
Only
0: Standard HOA function
1: When switching between local and remote, the
drive stops.
drive runs with REMOTE settings for frequency
and operation status.
00-29 LOCAL / REMOTE mode 0
drive runs with LOCAL settings for frequency and
operation status.
drive runs with LOCAL settings when switched to
Local and runs with REMOTE settings when
switched to Remote for frequency and operation
status.
0: Digital keypad
3: External UP / DOWN terminal
Master frequency command 4: Pulse input without direction command
00-30 0
(HAND) source (Pr. 10-16 without direction)
5: Pulse input with direction command (Pr. 10-16)
card)
0: Digital keypad
1: External terminals.
Operation command (HAND) 2: RS-485 communication.
00-31 0
source 3: CANopen communication card
card)
0: Disable STOP key
 00-32 Digital keypad STOP function 0
1: Enable STOP key
 00-40 Homing mode 0000h
Note: Forward run = clockwise (CW)

X
Reverse run = counterclockwise (CCW)
11-8

0: Forward run to home.
Set PL forward limit as check point.
1: Reverse run (CCW) to home.
Set NL reverse limit (CCWL) as check point.
2: Forward run to home. Set ORG:
OFF → ON as check point.
3: Reverse to home. Set ORG:
OFF → ON as check point.
4: Forward run and search for Z-pulse as check
point.
5: Reverse run and search for Z-pulse as check
point.
6: Forward run to home. Set ORG:
ON → OFF as check point.
7: Reverse run to home. Set ORG:
ON → OFF as check point.
8: Define current position as home.
Set X to 0, 1, 2, 3, 6, 7 first.
0: Reverse run to Z pulse
Y
1: Continue forward run to Z pulse
2: Ignore Z pulse
When home limit is reached, set X to 2, 3, 4, 5,
6, 7 first.
Z
0: Display the error
1: Reverse the direction
 00-41 Homing by frequency 1 0.00–599.00 Hz 8.00
 00-42 Homing by frequency 2 0.00–599.00 Hz 2.00
 00-48 Display filter time (current) 0.001–65.535 sec. 0.100
 00-49 Display filter time (keypad) 0.001–65.535 sec. 0.100
00-50 Software version (date) Read only #####
11-9
01 Basic Parameters
60.00 /
 01-00 Maximum operation frequency 0.00–599.00 Hz
50.00
60.00 /
01-01 Output frequency of motor 1 0.00–599.00 Hz
50.00
230V: 0.0–255.0 V 200.0
460V: 0.0–510.0 V 400.0
01-02 Output voltage of motor 1
575V: 0.0–637.0 V 575.0
690V: 0.0–765.0 V 660.0
01-03 Mid-point frequency 1 of motor 1 0.00–599.00 Hz 3.00
230V: 0.0–240.0 V 11.0
460V: 0.0–480.0 V 22.0
 01-04 Mid-point voltage 1 of motor 1
575V: 0.0–637.0 V 0.0
690V: 0.0–720.0 V 0.0
230V: 0.0–240.0 V 5.0
460V: 0.0–480.0 V 10.0
575V: 0.0V–637.0 V 0.0
690V: 0.0–720.0 V 0.0
01-07 Min. output frequency of motor 1 0.00–599.00 Hz 0.50
230V: 0.0–240.0 V 1.0
460V: 0.0–480.0 V 2.0
 01-08 Min. output voltage of motor 1
575V: 0.0–637.0 V 0.0
690V: 0.0–720.0 V 0.0
01-09 Start-up frequency 0.00–599.00 Hz 0.50
 01-10 Output frequency upper limit 0.00–599.00 Hz 599.00
 01-11 Output frequency lower limit 0.00–599.00 Hz 0
Pr. 01-45=0: 0.00–600.00 sec.
Pr. 01-45=1: 0.00–6000.0 sec.
 01-12 Acceleration time 1 10.00
The default of motor drive with 30HP and above:
60.00 / 60.0
Pr. 01-45=0: 0.00–600.00 sec.
Pr. 01-45=1: 0.00–6000.0 sec.
 01-13 Deceleration time 1 10.00
60.00 / 60.0
Pr. 01-45=0: 0.00–600.00 sec.
Pr. 01-45=1: 0.00–6000.0 sec.
60.00 / 60.0
 01-15 Deceleration time 2 Pr. 01-45=0: 0.00–600.00 sec. 10.00
11-10

Pr. 01-45=1: 0.00–6000.0 sec.
60.00 / 60.0
Pr. 01-45=0: 0.00–600.00 sec.
Pr. 01-45=1: 0.00–6000.0 sec.
60.00 / 60.0
Pr. 01-45=0: 0.00–600.00 sec.
Pr. 01-45=1: 0.00–6000.0 sec.
60.00 / 60.0
Pr. 01-45=0: 0.00–600.00 sec.
Pr. 01-45=1: 0.00–6000.0 sec.
60.00 / 60.0
Pr. 01-45=0: 0.00–600.00 sec.
Pr. 01-45=1: 0.00–6000.0 sec.
60.00 / 60.0
Pr. 01-45=0: 0.00–600.00 sec.
Pr. 01-45=1: 0.00–6000.0 sec.
 01-20 JOG acceleration time 10.00
60.00 / 60.0
Pr. 01-45=0: 0.00–600.00 sec.
Pr. 01-45=1: 0.00–6000.0 sec.
 01-21 JOG deceleration time 10.00
60.00 / 60.0
 01-22 JOG frequency 0.00–599.00Hz 6.00
First / Fourth acceleration /
 01-23 0.00–599.00Hz 0.00
deceleration frequency
Pr. 01-45=0: 0.00–25.00 sec.
 01-24 S-curve acceleration begin time 1 0.20
Pr. 01-45=1: 0.0–250.0 sec.
Pr. 01-45=0: 0.00–25.00 sec.
 01-25 S-curve acceleration arrival time 2 0.20
Pr. 01-45=1: 0.0–250.0 sec.
Pr. 01-45=0: 0.00–25.00 sec.
 01-26 S-curve deceleration begin time 1 0.20
Pr. 01-45=1: 0.0–250.0 sec.
Pr. 01-45=0: 0.00–25.00 sec.
 01-27 S-curve deceleration arrival time 2 0.20
Pr. 01-45=1: 0.0–250.0 sec.
01-28 Skip frequency 1 (upper limit) 0.00–599.00 Hz 0.00
01-29 Skip frequency 1 (lower limit) 0.00–599.00 Hz 0.00
11-11

0: Waiting for output
01-34 Zero-speed mode 1: Zero-speed operation 0
2: Minimum frequency (Refer to Pr. 01-07, 01-41)
60.00 /
01-35 Output frequency of motor 2 0.00–599.00 Hz
50.00
230V: 0.0–255.0 V 200.0
460V: 0.0–510.0 V 400.0
01-36 Output voltage of motor 2
575V: 0.0–637.0 V 575.0
690V: 0.0–765.0 V 660.0
230V: 0.0–240.0 V 11.0
460V: 0.0–480.0 V 22.0
575V: 0.0–637.0 V 0.0
690V: 0.0–720.0 V 0.0
230V: 0.0–240.0 V 5.0
460V: 0.0–480.0 V 10.0
575V: 0.0–637.0 V 0.0
690V: 0.0–720.0 V 0.0
01-41 Min. output frequency of motor 2 0.00–599.00 Hz 0.50
230V: 0.0–240.0 V 1.0
460V: 0.0–480.0 V 2.0
 01-42 Min. output voltage of motor 2
575V: 0.0–637.0 V 0.0
690V: 0.0–720.0 V 0.0
0: V/F curve determined by Pr. 01-00–01-08
1: 1.5th V/F curve
2: 2nd V/F curve
3: 60Hz, voltage saturation in 50Hz
5: 50Hz, decrease gradually with cube
01-43 V/F curve selection 6: 50Hz, decrease gradually with square 0
8: 60Hz, decrease gradually with square
9: 50Hz, medium starting torque
10: 50Hz, high starting torque
11-12

0: Linear acceleration and linear deceleration
1: Auto-acceleration and linear deceleration
Auto-acceleration and 2: Linear acceleration and auto-deceleration
 01-44 0
auto-deceleration setting 3: Auto-acceleration and auto-deceleration
4: Stall prevention by auto-acceleration and
auto-deceleration (limited by Pr. 01-12~01-21)
Time unit for accel. / decel. and S 0: Unit: 0.01 sec.
01-45 0
curve 1: Unit: 0.1 sec.
Pr. 01-45=0: 0.00–600.00 sec.
 01-46 CANopen quick stop time 1.00
Pr. 01-45=1: 0.0–6000.0 sec.
0: Disable
Regenerative energy restriction
01-49 1: Over voltage energy restriction 0
control method
2: Traction energy control (TEC)
11-13
02 Digital Input / Output Parameters

0: Two-wire mode 1, power on for operation control
Two-wire / Three-wire operation 1: Two -wire mode 2, power on for operation
02-00 0
control control
2: Three-wire, power on for operation control
02-01 Multi-function input command 1 (MI1) 0: No function 1
02-02 Multi-function input command 2 (MI2) 1: Multi-step speed command 1 / multi-step 2
02-03 Multi-function input command 3 (MI3) position command 1 3
Input terminal of I/O extension card position command 4
02-26 0
(MI10) 5: Reset
Input terminal of I/O extension card 6: JOG command (By KPC-CC01 or external
02-27 0
(MI11) control)
Input terminal of I/O extension card 7: Acceleration / deceleration speed inhibit
02-28 0
(MI12) 8: 1st and 2nd acceleration / deceleration time
Input terminal of I/O extension card selection
02-29 0
(MI13) 9: 3rd and 4th acceleration / deceleration time
Input terminal of I/O extension card selection
02-30 0
(MI14) 10: EF input (Pr. 07-20)
Input terminal of I/O extension card 11: Base Block (B.B) input from external
02-31 0
(MI15) 12: Output stop
13: Cancel the setting of auto-acceleration /
auto-deceleration time
14: Switch between motor 1 and motor 2
15: Rotating speed command from AVI
16: Rotating speed command from ACI
17: Rotating speed command from AUI
18: Forced to stop (Pr. 07-20)
19: Digital up command
20: Digital down command
21: PID function disabled
22: Clear the counter
23: Input the counter value (MI6)
24: FWD JOG command
25: REV JOG command
11-14

26: TQC / FOC mode selection
27: ASR1 / ASR2 selection
28: Emergency stop (EF1)
29: Signal confirmation for Y-connection
30: Signal confirmation for ᇞ-connection
31: High torque bias (Pr. 11-30)
32: Middle torque bias (Pr. 11-31)
33: Low torque bias (Pr. 11-32)
34: Switch between multi-step position and
multi-step speed control
35: Enable single-point position control
36: Enable multi-step position learning function
(valid at stop)
37: Enable full position control pulse command
input
38: Disable write EEPROM function
39: Torque command direction
40: Force coasting to stop
41: HAND switch
42: AUTO switch
43: Enable resolution selection (Pr. 02-48)
44: Reverse direction homing (NL)
45: Forward direction homing (PL)
46: Homing (ORG)
47: Enable homing function
48: Mechanical gear ratio switch
49: Enable drive
50: Slave dEb action to execute
51: Selection for PLC mode bit 0
52: Selection for PLC mode bit 1
53: Trigger CANopen quick stop
55: Brake release
56: Local / Remote selection
0: UP / DOWN by acceleration / deceleration time
 02-09 UP / DOWN key mode 0
1: UP / DOWN constant speed (Pr. 02-10)
Constant speed, acceleration /
 02-10 deceleration speed of the UP / DOWN 0.001–1.000Hz / ms 0.001
key
 02-11 Multi-function input response time 0.000–30.000 sec. 0.005
 02-12 Multi-function input mode selection 0000h–FFFFh (0: N.O.; 1: N.C.) 0000h
11-15

 02-13 Multi-function output 1 RLY1 0: No function 11
 02-14 Multi-function output 2 RLY2 1: Indication during RUN 1
 02-16 Multi-function output 3 (MO1) 2: Operation speed reached 66
 02-17 Multi-function output 4 (MO2) 3: Desired frequency reached 1 (Pr. 02-22) 0
Output terminal of the I/O extension 4: Desired frequency reached 2 (Pr. 02-24)
 02-36 0
card (MO10) or (RA10) 5: Zero speed (Frequency command)
Output terminal of I/O extension card 6: Zero speed including STOP (Frequency
 02-37 0
(MO11) or (RA11) command)
Output terminal of I/O extension card 7: Over-torque 1 (Pr. 06-06–06-08)
 02-38 0
(RA12) 8: Over-torque 2 (Pr. 06-09–06-11)
Output terminal of I/O extension card 9: Drive is ready
 02-39 0
(RA13) 10: Low voltage warning (Lv) (Pr. 06-00)
Output terminal of I/O extension card 11: Malfunction indication
 02-40 0
(RA14) 12: Mechanical brake release (Pr. 02-32)
Output terminal of I/O extension card 13: Over-heat warning (Pr. 06-15)
 02-41 0
(RA15) 14: Software brake signal indication (Pr. 07-00)
Output terminal of I/O extension card 15: PID feedback error (Pr. 08-13, Pr. 08-14)
 02-42 0
(MO16 virtual terminal) 16: Slip error (oSL)
Output terminal of I/O extension card 17: Count value reached, does not return to 0
 02-43 0
(MO17 virtual terminal) (Pr. 02-20)
Output terminal of I/O extension card 18: Count value reached, returns to 0
 02-44 0
(MO18 virtual terminal) (Pr. 02-19)
Output terminal of I/O extension card 19: External interrupt B.B. input (Base Block)
 02-45 0
(MO19 virtual terminal) 20: Warning output
Output terminal of I/O extension card 21: Over-voltage
 02-46 0
(MO20 virtual terminal) 22: Over-current stall prevention
23: Over-voltage stall prevention
24: Operation mode
25: Forward command
26: Reverse command
27: Output when current ≥ Pr. 02-33
28: Output when current < Pr. 02-33
29: Output when frequency ≥ Pr. 02-34
30: Output when frequency < Pr. 02-34
31: Y-connection for the motor coil
32: ᇞ-connection for the motor coil
33: Zero speed (actual output frequency)
34: Zero speed including stop (actual output
frequency)
35: Error output selection 1 (Pr. 06-23)
11-16

39: Position reached (Pr. 10-19)
40: Speed reached (including stop)
41: Multi-position reached
42: Crane function
43: Actual motor speed higher than Pr. 02-47
44: Low current output (use with Pr. 06-71~06-73)
45: UVW output electromagnetic valve switch
46: Master dEb output
47: Closed brake output
49: Homing action complete output
50: Output control for CANopen
51: Analog output control for RS485 interface
(InnerCOM / MODBUS)
52: Output control for communication cards
65: Output for both CAN & 485 control
66: SO output logic A
67: Analog input level reached
68: SO output logic B
70: FAN warning output
 02-18 Multi-function output direction 0000h~FFFFh (0: N.O.; 1: N.C.) 0000h
Terminal counting value reached
 02-19 0–65500 0
(returns to 0)
Preliminary counting value reached
 02-20 0–65500 0
(does not return to 0)
 02-21 Digital output gain (DFM) 1–166 1
60.00 /
 02-22 Desired frequency reached 1 0.00–599.00Hz
50.00
The width of the desired frequency
 02-23 0.00–599.00Hz 2.00
reached 1
60.00 /
 02-24 Desired frequency reached 2 0.00–599.00Hz
50.00
The width of the desired frequency
 02-25 0.00–599.00Hz 2.00
reached 2
02-32 Brake delay time 0.000–65.000 sec. 0.000
Output current level setting for
 02-33 0–100% 0
multi-function output terminal
11-17

Output frequency setting for 0.00–599.00Hz
 02-34 3.00
multi-function output terminal (Motor speed when using PG Card)
0: Disable
External operation control selection
 02-35 1: Drive runs if the RUN command remains after 0
after reset and activate
reset or reboot
 02-47 Motor zero-speed level 0–65535 rpm 0
Maximum frequency of resolution
 02-48 0.00–599.00Hz 60.00
switch
Switch delay time of maximum output
 02-49 0–65.000 sec. 0.000
frequency
Display the status of multi-function Read
02-50 Monitor the status of multi-function input terminals
input terminal only
Display the status of multi-function Monitor the status of multi-function output Read
02-51
output terminal terminals only
Display the external multi-function Read
02-52 Monitor the status of PLC input terminals
input terminals used by PLC only
Display the external multi-function Read
02-53 Monitor the status of PLC output terminals
output terminals used by PLC only
Display the frequency command Read
02-54 0.00–599.00Hz (Read only)
executed by external terminal only
02-56 Brake release check time 0.000–65.000 sec. 0.000
Multi-function output terminal:
 02-57 function 42: brake current check 0–100% 0
point
Multi-function output terminal
 02-58 (function 42): brake frequency check 0.00–599.00Hz 0.00
point
Frequency reached detection
02-63 0.00–599.00Hz 0.00
amplitude
1: EMC-BPS01
4: EMC-D611A
Read
02-70 IO card types 5: EMC-D42A
only
6: EMC-R6AA
11: EMC-A22A
0: Use frequency with speed control as DFM
output frequency
02-71 DFM output selection 0
1: Use frequency with system acceleration /
deceleration as DFM output frequency
Internal / external multi-function input
02-74 0000–FFFFh 0000h
terminal selection
11-18

Internal multi-function output terminal
02-75 0000–FFFFh 0000h
selection
11-19
03 Analog Input / Output Parameters

 03-00 Analog input selection (AVI) 0: No function 1
 03-01 Analog input selection (ACI) 1: Frequency command (speed limit under torque 0
 03-02 Analog input selection (AUI) control mode) 0
2: Torque command (torque limit under speed mode)
3: Torque compensation command
4: PID target value
5: PID feedback signal
6: Thermistor (PTC / KTY-84) input value
7: Positive torque limit
8: Negative torque limit
9: Regenerative torque limit
10: Positive / negative torque limit
11: PT100 thermistor input value
13: PID compensation value
 03-03 Analog input bias (AVI) -100.0–100.0% 0.0
 03-04 Analog input bias (ACI) -100.0–100.0% 0.0
 03-05 Analog input bias (AUI) -100.0–100.0% 0.0
Positive / negative bias mode 0: No bias
 03-07
(AVI) 1: Lower than or equal to bias
Positive / negative bias mode 2: Greater than or equal to bias
 03-08 0
(ACI) 3: The absolute value of the bias voltage while serving
Positive / negative bias mode as the center
 03-09
(AUI) 4: Bias serves as the center
0: Negative frequency is not allowed. The digital
keypad or external terminal controls the forward and
Reverse setting when analog reverse direction.
03-10 signal input is negative 1: Negative frequency is allowed. Positive frequency = 0
frequency run in forward direction; negative frequency = run in
reverse direction. The digital keypad or external
terminal control cannot switch the running direction.
 03-11 Analog input gain (AVI) -500.0–500.0% 100.0
 03-12 Analog input gain (ACI) -500.0–500.0% 100.0
 03-13 Analog positive input gain (AUI) -500.0–500.0% 100.0
 03-14 Analog negative input gain (AUI) -500.0–500.0% 100.0
 03-15 Analog input filter time (AVI) 0.00–20.00 sec. 0.01
 03-16 Analog input filter time (ACI) 0.00–20.00 sec. 0.01
 03-17 Analog input filter time (AUI) 0.00–20.00 sec. 0.01
11-20

0: Disable (AVI, ACI, AUI)
 03-18 Analog input addition function 0
1: Enable
0: Disable
Signal loss selection for 1: Continue operation at the last frequency
03-19 0
analog input 4–20mA 2: Decelerate to 0Hz
3: Stop immediately and display ACE
 03-20 Multi-function output 1 (AFM1) 0: Output frequency (Hz) 0
 03-23 Multi-function output 2 (AFM2) 1: Frequency command (Hz) 0
2: Motor speed (Hz)
3: Output current (rms)
4: Output voltage
5: DC BUS voltage
6: Power factor
7: Power
8: Output torque
9: AVI
10: ACI
11: AUI
12: Iq current command
13: Iq feedback value
14: Id current command
15: Id feedback value
18: Torque command
19: PG2 frequency command
20: CANopen analog output
21: RS-485 analog output
22: Communication card analog output
23: Constant voltage output
25: CANopen and RS-485 analog output
 03-21 Analog output gain 1 (AFM1) 0.0–500.0% 100.0
0: Absolute value of output voltage
Analog output 1 in REV direction
 03-22 1: Reverse output 0 V; forward output 0–10 V 0
(AFM1)
2: Reverse output 5–0 V; forward output 5–10 V
 03-24 Analog output gain 2 (AFM2) 0.0–500.0% 100.0
0: Absolute value of output voltage
 03-25 1: Reverse output 0 V; forward output 0–10 V 0
(AFM2)
 03-27 AFM2 output bias -100.00–100.00% 0.00
0: 0–10V
 03-28 AVI terminal input selection 1: 0–20mA 0
2: 4–20mA
11-21

0: 4–20mA
 03-29 ACI terminal input selection 1: 0–10V 0
2: 0–20mA
PLC analog output terminal Read
03-30 Monitor the status of PLC analog output terminals
status only
0: 0–20mA output
 03-31 AFM2 output selection 0
1: 4–20mA output
 03-32 AFM1 DC output setting level 0.00–100.00% 0.00
 03-33 AFM2 DC output setting level 0.00–100.00% 0.00
 03-35 AFM1 filter output time 0.00–20.00 sec. 0.01
 03-36 AFM2 filter output time 0.00–20.00 sec. 0.01
0: AVI
Multi-function MO output by AI
 03-44 1: ACI 0
level source
2: AUI
 03-45 AI upper level -100.00–100.00% 50.00
 03-46 AI lower level -100.00–100.00% 10.00
0: Regular curve
1: Three-point curve of AVI
2: Three-point curve of ACI
3: Three-point curve of AVI & ACI
 03-50 Analog input curve selection 0
4: Three-point curve of AUI
5: Three-point curve of AVI & AUI
6: Three-point curve of ACI & AUI
7: Three-point curve of AVI & ACI & AUI
Pr. 03-28=0, 0.00–10.00V 0.00
 03-51 AVI lowest point Pr. 03-28=1, 0.00–20.00mA 0.00
Pr. 03-28=2, 0.00–20.00mA 4.00
 03-52 AVI proportional lowest point -100.00–100.00% 0.00
Pr. 03-28=0, 0.00–10.00V 5.00
 03-53 AVI mid-point Pr. 03-28=1, 0.00–20.00mA 10.00
Pr. 03-28=2, 0.00–20.00mA 12.00
 03-54 AVI proportional mid-point -100.00–100.00% 50.00
Pr. 03-28=0, 0.00–10.00V 10.00
 03-55 AVI highest point Pr. 03-28=1, 0.00–20.00mA 20.00
Pr. 03-28=2, 0.00–20.00mA 20.00
 03-56 AVI proportional high point -100.00–100.00% 100.00
Pr. 03-29=0, 0.00–20.00mA 4.00
 03-57 ACI lowest point Pr. 03-29=1, 0.00–10.00V 0.00
Pr. 03-29=2, 0.00–20.00mA 0.00
 03-58 ACI proportional lowest point -100.00–100.00% 0.00
11-22

Pr. 03-29=0, 0.00–20.00mA 12.00
 03-59 ACI mid-point Pr. 03-29=1, 0.00–10.00V 5.00
Pr. 03-29=2, 0.00–20.00mA 10.00
 03-60 ACI proportional mid-point -100.00–100.00% 50.00
Pr. 03-29=0, 0.00–20.00mA 20.00
 03-61 ACI highest point Pr. 03-29=1, 0.00–10.00V 10.00
Pr. 03-29=2, 0.00–20.00mA 20.00
 03-62 ACI proportional highest point -100.00–100.00% 100.00
 03-63 Positive AUI voltage lowest point 0.00–10.00V 0.00
Positive AUI voltage proportional
 03-64 -100.00%–100.00% 0.00
lowest point
 03-65 Positive AUI voltage mid-point 0.00–10.00V 5.00
 03-66 -100.00%–100.00% 50.00
mid-point
 Positive AUI voltage highest
03-67 0.00–10.00V 10.00
point
 03-68 -100.00%–100.00% 100.00
highest point
 Negative AUI voltage highest
03-69 -10.00V–0.00V 0.00
point
Negative AUI voltage
 03-70 -100.00%–100.00% 0.00
proportional highest point
 03-71 Negative AUI voltage mid-point -10.00–0.00V -5.00
 03-72 -100.00%–100.00% -50.00
proportional mid-point
Negative AUI voltage lowest
 03-73 -10.00–0.00V -10.00
point
 03-74 -100.00%–100.00% -100.00
proportional lowest point
11-23
04 Multi-step Speed Parameters

 04-00 1st step speed frequency 0.00–599.00Hz 0.00
 04-01 2nd step speed frequency 0.00–599.00Hz 0.00
 04-02 3 step speed frequency
rd
0.00–599.00Hz 0.00
 04-03 4th step speed frequency 0.00–599.00Hz 0.00
th
0.00–599.00Hz 0.00
th
0.00–599.00Hz 0.00
 04-15 Position command 1 (rotation) -30000–30000 0
 04-16 Position command 1 (pulse) -32767–32767 0
11-24

 04-50 PLC buffer 0 0–65535 0
 04-51 PLC buffer 1 0–65535 0
 04-52 PLC buffer 2 0–65535 0
 04-53 PLC buffer 3 0–65535 0
 04-54 PLC buffer 4 0–65535 0
 04-55 PLC buffer 5 0–65535 0
 04-56 PLC buffer 6 0–65535 0
 04-57 PLC buffer 7 0–65535 0
 04-58 PLC buffer 8 0–65535 0
 04-59 PLC buffer 9 0–65535 0
 04-60 PLC buffer 10 0–65535 0
 04-61 PLC buffer 11 0–65535 0
 04-62 PLC buffer 12 0–65535 0
 04-63 PLC buffer 13 0–65535 0
 04-64 PLC buffer 14 0–65535 0
 04-65 PLC buffer 15 0–65535 0
 04-66 PLC buffer 16 0–65535 0
 04-67 PLC buffer 17 0–65535 0
 04-68 PLC buffer 18 0–65535 0
 04-69 PLC buffer 19 0–65535 0
 04-70 PLC Application parameter 0 0–65535 0
11-25

11-26
05 Motor Parameters
0: No function
1: Simple rolling auto-tuning for induction motor (IM)
2: Static auto-tuning for induction motor (IM)
4: Dynamic test for PM magnetic pole
05-00 Motor parameter auto tuning (with the running in forward direction) 0
5: Rolling auto-tuning for PM (IPM / SPM)
6: Advanced rolling auto-tuning for IM motor flux curve
12: FOC sensorless inertia estimation
13: Static auto-tuning for PM (IPM / SPM)
Depending
Full-load current for induction on the
05-01 Depending on the model power model
motor 1 (A) power
Depending
Rated power for induction motor on the
 05-02 0.00–655.35kW model
1 (kW) power
Depending
Rated speed for induction motor on the
 05-03 0–xxxx (Depending on the motor pole number) motor pole
1 (rpm) number
Number of poles for induction
05-04 2–64 4
motor 1
Depending
No-load current for induction on the
05-05 0.00–Pr. 05-01 default model
motor 1 (A) power
Depending
Stator resistance (Rs) for on the
05-06 0.000–65.535 model
induction motor 1 power
Rotor resistance (Rr) for
05-07 0.000–65.535 0.000
induction motor 1
Magnetizing inductance (Lm) for
05-08 0.0–6553.5mH 0.0
induction motor 1
Stator inductance (Lx) for
05-09 0.0–6553.5mH 0.0
induction motor 1
Depending
Full-load current for induction on the
motor 2 (A) power
Depending
Rated power for induction motor on the
 05-14 0.00–655.35kW model
2 (kW) power
Depending
Rated speed for induction motor on the
 05-15 0–xxxx (Depending on the motor pole number) motor pole
2 (rpm) number
Number of poles for induction
05-16 2–64 4
motor 2
Depending
No-load current for induction on the
05-17 0.00– Pr. 05-13 default model
motor 2 (A) power
11-27

Depending
Stator resistance (Rs) for on the
05-18 0.000–65.535 model
induction motor 2 power
Rotor resistance (Rr) of induction
05-19 0.000–65.535 0.000
motor 2
Magnetizing inductance (Lm) of
05-20 0.0–6553.5mH 0.0
induction motor 2
Stator inductance (Lx) of
05-21 0.0–6553.5mH 0.0
induction motor 2
1: Motor 1
05-22 Induction motor 1 / 2 selection 1
2: Motor 2
Frequency for Y-connection /
 05-23 ᇞ-connection switch for an 0.00–599.00Hz 60.00
induction motor
Y-connection / ᇞ-connection 0: Disable
05-24 0
switch for induction motor 1: Enable
Delay time for Y-connection /
 05-25 ᇞ-connection switch for an 0.000–60.000 sec. 0.200
induction motor
Accumulated Watt-hour for a
05-28 Read only 0.0
motor (W-hour)
05-29 Read only 0.0
motor in low word (kW-hour)
05-30 Read only 0
motor in high word (MW-hour)
Accumulated motor operation
05-31 0–1439 0
time (Min.)
Accumulated motor operation
05-32 0–65535 0
time (Day)
Induction motor (IM) or 0: IM
05-33 permanent magnet motor (PM) 1: SPM (Surface permanent magnet motor) 0
selection 2: IPM (Interior permanent magnet motor)
Depending
Full-load current for a permanent on the
magnet motor power
Depending
Rated power for a permanent on the
 05-35 0.00–655.35kW model
magnet motor power
Rated speed for a permanent
 05-36 0–65535rpm 2000
magnet motor
Pole number for a permanent
05-37 0–65535 10
magnet motor
11-28

Depending
System inertia for a permanent on the
05-38 0.0–6553.5kg.cm2 motor
magnet motor power
Stator resistance for a permanent
05-39 0.000–65.535 0.000
magnet motor
05-40 Permanent magnet motor Ld 0.00–655.35mH 0.00
05-41 Permanent magnet motor Lq 0.00–655.35mH 0.00
PG offset angle for a permanent
 05-42 0.0–360.0° 0.0
magnet motor
Ke parameter of a permanent
 05-43 0–65535 (Unit: V / krpm) 0
magnet motor
11-29
06 Protection Parameters
230V:
Frame A–D: 150.0–220.0VDC 180.0
Frame E and above: 190.0–220.0VDC 200.0
460V:
 06-00 Low voltage level
Frame A–D: 300.0–440.0VDC 360.0
Frame E and above: 380.0~440.0VDC 400.0
575V: 420.0–520.0VDC 470.0
690V: 450.0–660.0VDC 480.0
0: Disabled
230V: 0.0–450.0VDC 380.0
 06-01 Over-voltage stall prevention 460V: 0.0–900.0VDC 760.0
575V: 0.0–920.0VDC 920.0
690V: 0.0–1087.0VDC 1087.0
Selection for over-voltage stall 0: Traditional over-voltage stall prevention
 06-02 0
prevention 1: Smart over-voltage stall prevention
230V / 460V models
Normal load: 0–160% (100% corresponds to the rated 120
current of the drive)
Heavy load: 0–180% (100% corresponds to the rated 120
Over-current stall prevention 575V / 690V models
 06-03
during acceleration Light load: 0–125% (100% corresponds to the rated 120
230V / 460V models
Over-current stall prevention 575V / 690V models
 06-04
during operation Light load: 0–125% (100% corresponds to the rated 120
11-30

0: By current acceleration / deceleration time
1: By the 1st acceleration / deceleration time
Acceleration / deceleration time
2: By the 2nd acceleration / deceleration time
 06-05 selection for stall prevention at 0
3: By the 3rd acceleration / deceleration time
constant speed
4: By the 4th acceleration / deceleration time
5: By automatic acceleration / deceleration
0: No function
1: Continue operation after over-torque detection
during constant speed operation
Over-torque detection selection 2: Stop after over-torque detection during constant
 06-06 0
(OT1) speed operation
during RUN
4: Stop after over-torque detection during RUN
10–250% (100% corresponds to the rated current of
 06-07 Over-torque detection level (OT1) 120
the drive)
 06-08 Over-torque detection time (OT1) 0.0–60.0 sec. 0.1
0: No function
during constant speed operation
Over-torque detection selection 2: Stop after over-torque detection during constant
 06-09 0
(OT2) speed operation
during RUN
4: Stop after Over-torque detection during RUN
 06-10 Over-torque detection level (OT2) 120
the drive)
 06-11 Over-torque detection time (OT2) 0.0–60.0 sec. 0.1
 06-12 Current limit 170
the drive)
0: Inverter motor (with external forced cooling)
Electronic thermal relay selection
 06-13 1: Standard motor (motor with fan on the shaft) 2
1 (Motor 1)
2: Disable
Electronic thermal relay action
 06-14 30.0–600.0 sec. 60.0
time 1 (Motor 1)
Temperature level over-heat (OH)
 06-15 0.0–110.0°C 105.0
warning
Stall prevention limit level
 06-16 (Weak magnetic area current stall 0–100% (Pr. 06-03, Pr. 06-04) 100
prevention level)
11-31

Fault record 1 0: No fault record
06-17 0
(Present fault record) 1: Over-current during acceleration (ocA)
06-18 Fault record 2 2: Over-current during deceleration (ocd) 0
06-19 Fault record 3 3: Over-current during constant speed (ocn) 0
06-20 Fault record 4 4: Ground fault (GFF) 0
06-21 Fault record 5 5: IGBT short-circuit (occ) 0
06-22 Fault record 6 6: Over-current at stop (ocS) 0
7: Over-voltage during acceleration (ovA)
8: Over-voltage during deceleration (ovd)
9: Over-voltage during constant speed (ovn)
10: Over-voltage at stop (ovS)
11: Low-voltage during acceleration (LvA)
12: Low-voltage during deceleration (Lvd)
13: Low-voltage during constant speed (Lvn)
14: Low-voltage at stop (LvS)
15: Phase loss protection (OrP)
16: IGBT over-heat (oH1)
17: Capacitance over-heat (oH2)
18: TH1 open: IGBT over-heat protection error (tH1o)
19: TH2 open: capacitance over-heat protection error
(tH2o)
21: Drive over-load (oL)
22: Electronics thermal relay protection 1 (EoL1)
24: Motor overheat (oH3) (PTC / PT100)
26: Over-torque 1 (ot1)
28: Low current (uC)
29: Home limit error (LMIT)
30: Memory write-in error (cF1)
31: Memory read-out error (cF2)
33: U-phase current detection error (cd1)
34: V-phase current detection error (cd2)
35: W-phase current detection error (cd3)
36: Clamp current detection error (Hd0)
37: Over-current detection error (Hd1)
38: Over-voltage detection error (Hd2)
39: IGBT short-circuit detection error (Hd3)
40: Auto-tuning error (AUE)
41: PID feedback loss (AFE)
11-32

42: PG feedback error (PGF1)
43: PG feedback loss (PGF2)
44: PG feedback stall (PGF3)
45: PG slip error (PGF4)
48: Analog current input loss (ACE)
49: External fault input (EF)
51: External base block (bb)
52: Password error (Pcod)
54: Communication error (CE1)
58: Communication time-out (CE10)
60: Brake transistor error (bF)
61: Y-connection / ∆-connection switch error (ydc)
62: Deceleration energy backup error (dEb)
63: Slip error (oSL)
64: Electromagnet switch error (ryF)
65: PG card error (PGF5)
68: Sensorless estimated speed have wrong direction
69: Sensorless estimated speed is over speed
70: Sensorless estimated speed deviated
71: Watchdog
72: Channel 1 (STO1~SCM1) safety loop error (STL1)
73: External safety gate (S1)
75: External brake error
76: Safe torque off (STO)
77: Channel 2 (STO2~SCM2) safety loop error (STL2)
78: Internal loop error (STL3)
82: U phase output phase loss (OPHL)
83: V phase output phase loss (OPHL)
84: W phase output phase loss (OPHL)
85: PG-02U ABZ hardware disconnection
86: PG-02U UVW hardware disconnection
87: oL3 Low frequency overload protection
89: RoPd Initial rotor position detection error
90: Inner PLC function is forced to stop
93: CPU error
101: CANopen software disconnect 1 (CGdE)
102: CAN open software disconnect 2 (CHbE)
11-33

104: CANopen hardware disconnect (CbFE)
105: CANopen index setting error (CIdE)
106: CANopen slave station number setting error
(CAdE)
107: CANopen index setting exceed limit (CFrE)
111: ictE Internal communication overtime error
(InrCOM)
112: PM sensorless shaft lock error
142: Auto-tuning error 1 (no feedback current error)
(AUE1)
143: Auto-tuning error 2 (motor phase loss error)
(AUE2)
144: Auto-tuning error 3 (no-load current I0 measuring
error) (AUE3)
148: Auto-tuning error 4 (leakage inductance Lsigma
measuring error) (AUE4)
 06-23 Fault output option 1 0–65535 (refer to bit table for fault code) 0
0: Inverter motor (with external forced cooling)
Electronic thermal relay selection
 06-27 1: Standard motor (motor with fan on the shaft) 2
2 (Motor 2)
2: Disable
Electronic thermal relay action
 06-28 30.0–600.0 sec. 60.0
time 2 (Motor 2)
0: Warn and continue operation
PTC detection selection / PT100 1: Warn and ramp to stop
 06-29 0
motion 2: Warn and coast to stop
3: No warning
 06-30 PTC level / KTY84 Level 0.0–100.0% 50.0
Frequency command at Read
06-31 0.00–599.00Hz
malfunction only
Read
06-32 Output frequency at malfunction 0.00–599.00Hz
only
Read
06-33 Output voltage at malfunction 0.0–6553.5V
only
Read
06-34 DC voltage at malfunction 0.0–6553.5V
only
Read
06-35 Output current at malfunction 0.0–6553.5Amp
only
11-34

Read
06-36 IGBT temperature at malfunction -3276.7–3276.7°C
only
Capacitance temperature at Read
06-37 -3276.7–3276.7°C
malfunction only
Read
06-38 Motor speed at malfunction -32767–32767rpm
only
Read
06-39 Torque command at malfunction -32767–32767%
only
Status of the multi-function input Read
06-40 0000h–FFFFh
terminal at malfunction only
Status of the multi-function output Read
06-41 0000h–FFFFh
terminal at malfunction only
Read
06-42 Drive status at malfunction 0000h–FFFFh
only
0: STO latch
 06-44 STO latch selection 0
1: STO no latch
Treatment to output phase loss 1: Warn and ramp to stop
 06-45 3
protection (OPHL) 2: Warn and coast to stop
3: No warning
Detection time of output phase
 06-46 0.000–65.535 sec. 3.000
loss
Current detection level for output
 06-47 0.00–100.00% 1.00
phase loss
DC brake time of output phase
 06-48 0.000–65.535 sec. 0.000
loss
0: Disable
 06-49 LvX auto-reset 0
1: Enable
Time for input phase loss
 06-50 0.00–600.00 sec. 0.20
detection
Depending
on the
06-51 CAP oH warning level 0.0–110.0 degree motor
power
230V series: 0.0–160.0VDC 30.0
460V series: 0.0–320.0VDC 60.0
 06-52 Ripple of input phase loss
575V series: 0.0–400.0VDC 75.0
690V series: 0.0–480.0VDC 90.0
Detected input phase loss (OrP) 0: Warn and ramp to stop
 06-53 0
action 1: Warn and coast to stop
0: Constant rated current and limit carrier wave by
 06-55 Derating protection load current and temperature 0
11-35

1: Constant carrier frequency and limit load current by
setting carrier wave
2: Constant rated current (same as setting 0), but
close current limit
 06-56 PT100 voltage level 1 0.000–10.000V 5.000
 06-57 PT100 voltage level 2 0.000–10.000V 7.000
 06-58 PT100 level 1 frequency protect 0.00–599.00Hz 0.00
PT100 activation level 1 protect
 06-59 0–6000 sec. 60
frequency delay time
Software detection GFF current
 06-60 0.0–6553.5 % 60.0
level
 06-61 Software detection GFF filter time 0.00–655.35 sec. 0.10
230V: 0.0–100 VDC 20.0
06-62 dEb reset bias level
460V: 0.0–200.0 VDC 40.0
Operation time of fault record 1 Read
06-63 0–65535 days
(Day) only
06-64 0–1439 min.
(Minutes) only
06-65 0–65535 days
(Day) only
06-66 0–1439 min.
(Minutes) only
06-67 0–65535 days
(Day) only
06-68 0–1439 min.
(Minutes) only
06-69 0–65535 days
(Day) only
06-70 0–1439 min.
(Minutes) only
 06-71 Low current setting level 0.0–100.0 % 0.0
 06-72 Low current detection time 0.00–360.00 sec. 0.00
0: No function
1: Warn and coast to stop
 06-73 Low current action 0
2: Warn and ramp to stop by the 2nd deceleration time
0–1
06-86 PTC Type 0: PTC 0
1: KTY84-130
11-36
07 Special Parameters
230V: 350.0–450.0VDC 370.0
460V: 700.0–900.0VDC 740.0
 07-00 Built-in software brake level
575V: 850.0–1116.0VDC 895.0
690V: 939.0–1318.0VDC 1057.0
 07-01 DC brake current level 0–100% 0
 07-02 DC brake time at run 0.0–60.0 sec. 0.0
 07-03 DC brake time at stop 0.0–60.0 sec. 0.0
 07-04 DC brake frequency at stop 0.00–599.00Hz 0.00
 07-05 Voltage increasing gain 1–200% 100
0: Stop operation
Restart after momentary power
 07-06 1: Speed tracking by speed before the power loss 0
loss
2: Speed tracking by minimum output frequency
 07-07 Allowed power loss duration 0.0–20.0 sec. 2.0
 07-08 Base block time 0.0–5.0 sec. #.#
 07-09 Current limit of speed tracking 20–200% 100
0: Stop operation
 07-10 Restart after fault action 1: Speed tracking by current speed 0
Number of times of restart after
 07-11 0–10 0
fault
0: Disable
1: Speed tracking by maximum output frequency
 07-12 Speed tracking during start-up 0
2: Speed tracking by motor frequency at start
0: Disable
1: dEb with auto-acceleration / auto-deceleration, the
drive does not output the frequency after the power is
restored.
2: dEb with auto-acceleration / auto-deceleration, the
 07-13 dEb function selection drive outputs the frequency after the power is 0
restored
3: dEb low-voltage control, then increase to 350VDC/
700VDC and decelerate to stop
4: dEb high-voltage control of 350VDC/ 700VDC and
decelerate to stop
07-14 dEb function reset time 0.0–25.0 sec. 3.0
 07-15 Dwell time at acceleration 0.00–600.00 sec. 0.00
 07-16 Dwell frequency at acceleration 0.00–599.00Hz 0.00
 07-17 Dwell time at deceleration 0.00–600.00 sec. 0.00
 07-18 Dwell frequency at deceleration 0.00–599.00Hz 0.00
11-37

0: Fan always ON
1: Fan is OFF after AC motor drive stops for one minute
2: Fan is ON when AC motor drive runs; fan is OFF
 07-19 Fan cooling control when AC motor drive stops. 0
3: Fan turns ON when temperature (IGBT) reaches
around 60°C.
4: Fan always OFF
0: Coast to stop
1: Stop by the 1st deceleration time
2: Stop by the 2nd deceleration time
Emergency stop (EF) & force to
 07-20 3: Stop by the 3rd deceleration time 0
stop selection
4: Stop by the 4th deceleration time
5: System deceleration
6: Automatic deceleration
Automatic energy-saving 0: Disable
 07-21 0
selection 1: Enable
 07-22 Energy-saving gain 10~1000% 100
0: Enable AVR
Auto voltage regulation (AVR)
 07-23 1: Disable AVR 0
function
2: Disable AVR during deceleration
Torque command filter time
 07-24 0.001–10.000 sec. 0.500
(V/F and SVC control mode)
Slip compensation filter time
 07-25 0.001–10.000 sec. 0.100
(V/F and SVC control mode)
Torque compensation gain (V/F IM: 0–10 (when Pr. 05-33 = 0)
 07-26 0
and SVC control mode) PM: 0–5000 (when Pr. 05-33 = 1 or 2)
0.00
(Default
Slip compensation gain (V/F and
 07-27 0.00–10.00 value is
SVC control mode) 1.00 in
SVC
mode)
0.0–100.0%
 07-29 Slip deviation level 0
0: No detection
Over slip deviation detection
 07-30 0.0–10.0 sec. 1.0
time
1: Warn and ramp to stop
 07-31 Over slip deviation treatment 0
3: No warning
Motor shock compensation 0–10000
 07-32 1000
factor 0: Disable
 07-33 Auto-restart internal of fault 0.0–6000.0 sec. 60.0
11-38

PMSVC voltage feedback
07-38 0.50–2.00 1.00
forward gain
07-62 dEb gain (Kp) 0–65535 8000
07-63 dEb gain (Ki) 0–65535 150
11-39
08 High-function PID Parameters

0: No function
1: Negative PID feedback: by analog input
(Pr. 03-00–03-02)
2: Negative PID feedback: by PG card pulse input,
without direction (Pr. 10-02)
3: Negative PID feedback:by PG card pulse input,
with direction (Pr. 10-02)
Terminal selection of PID
 08-00 4: Positive PID feedback: by analog input 0
feedback
(Pr. 03-00–03-02)
5: Positive PID feedback: by PG card pulse input,
without direction (Pr. 10-02)
6: Positive PID feedback: by PG card pulse input,
with direction (Pr. 10-02)
7: Negative PID feedback: by communication protocol
8: Positive PID feedback: by communication protocol
 08-01 Proportional gain (P) 0.0–500.0 1.0
0.00–100.00 sec.
 08-02 Integral time (I) 1.00
0.0: No integral
 08-03 Differential time (D) 0.00–1.00 sec. 0.00
 08-04 Upper limit of integral control 0.0–100.0% 100.0
 08-05 PID output command limit 0.0–110.0% 100.0
PID feedback value by Read
 08-06 -200.00–200.00%
communication protocol only
 08-07 PID delay time 0.0–35.0 sec. 0.0
 08-08 Feedback signal detection time 0.0–3600.0 sec. 0.0
 08-09 Feedback signal fault treatment 0
3: Warn and operate at last frequency
 08-10 Sleep frequency 0.00–599.00Hz 0.00
 08-11 Wake-up frequency 0.00–599.00Hz 0.00
 08-12 Sleep time 0.0–6000.0 sec. 0.0
 08-13 PID deviation level 1.0–50.0% 10.0
 08-14 PID deviation time 0.1–300.0 sec. 5.0
 08-15 PID feedback filter time 0.1–300.0 sec. 5.0
0: Parameter setting (Pr. 08-17)
 08-16 PID compensation selection 0
1: Analog input
 08-17 PID compensation -100.0–100.0% 0.0
11-40

0: Refer to PID output command
08-18 Sleep mode function setting 0
1: Refer to PID feedback signal
 08-19 Wake-up integral limit 0.0–200.0% 50.0
0: Serial connection
08-20 PID mode selection 0
1: Parallel connection
Enable PID to change the 0: Operation direction cannot be changed
08-21 0
operation direction 1: Operation direction can be changed
 08-22 Wake-up delay time 0.00–600.00 sec. 0.00
bit0 = 1, PID running in reverse follows the setting for
Pr. 00-23.
bit0 = 0, PID running in reverse follows PID’s calculated
 08-23 PID control flag 0000h
value.
bit1 = 1, second decimal place of PID Kp
bit1 = 0, first decimal place of PID Kp
11-41
09 Communication Parameters
 09-00 Communication address 1–254 1
 09-01 COM1 transmission speed 4.8–115.2Kbps 9.6
 09-02 COM1 transmission fault treatment 3
3: No warning and continue operation
 09-03 COM1 time-out detection 0.0–100.0 sec. 0.0
1 : 7, N, 2 (ASCII)
2 : 7, E, 1 (ASCII)
3 : 7, O, 1 (ASCII)
4 : 7, E, 2 (ASCII)
5 : 7, O, 2 (ASCII)
6 : 8, N, 1 (ASCII)
7 : 8, N, 2 (ASCII)
8 : 8, E, 1 (ASCII)
 09-04 COM1 communication protocol 9 : 8, O, 1 (ASCII) 1
10 : 8, E, 2 (ASCII)
11 : 8, O, 2 (ASCII)
12: 8, N, 1 (RTU)
13: 8, N, 2 (RTU)
14: 8, E, 1 (RTU)
15: 8, O, 1 (RTU)
16: 8, E, 2 (RTU)
17: 8, O, 2 (RTU)
 09-09 Communication response delay time 0.0–200.0ms 2.0
09-10 Communication main frequency 0.00–599.00Hz 60.00
 09-11 Block transfer 1 0000–FFFFh 0000h
11-42

0: Decoding method 1 (20xx)
09-30 Communication decoding method 1
1: Decoding method 2 (60xx)
0: MODBUS 485
-1: Internal communication slave 1
09-31 Internal communication protocol -5: Internal communication slave 5 0
-10: Internal communication master
-12: Internal PLC control
bit0: Before PLC scans, set up PLC target

frequency=0
bit1: Before PLC scans, set up PLC target
 09-33 PLC command force to 0 0
torque=0
bit2: Before PLC scans, set up the speed limit
of torque control mode=0
09-35 PLC address 1–254 2

0: Disable
09-36 CANopen slave address 0
1–127
0: 1Mbps
1: 500Kbps
2: 250Kbps
09-37 CANopen speed 0
3: 125Kbps
4: 100Kbps (Delta only)
5: 50Kbps
bit0: CANopen Guarding Time out

bit1: CANopen Heartbeat Time out
bit2: CANopen SYNC Time out
09-39 CANopen warning record bit3: CANopen SDO Time out Read only
bit4: CANopen SDO buffer overflow
bit5: Can Bus Off
bit6: Error protocol of CANopen
11-43

bit8: The setting values of CANopen indexes
are fail
bit9: The setting value of CANopen address
is fail
bit10: The checksum value of CANopen
indexes is fail
0: Disable (Delta-defined decoding method)
09-40 CANopen decoding method 1: Enable (CANopen DS402 standard 1
protocol)
0: Node Reset
1: Com Reset
2: Boot up Read
09-41 CANopen communication status
3: Pre operation Only
4: Operation
5: Stop
0: Not ready for use
1: Inhibit Start
2: Ready to Switch on
3: Switched on Read
09-42 CANopen control status
4: Enable Operation Only
7: Quick Stop Active
13: Error Reaction Activation
14: Error
0: Disable
09-45 CANopen master function 0
1: Enable
09-46 CANopen master address 0–127 100
0–12
0: No communication card
1: DeviceNet Slave
2: Profibus-DP Slave
09-60 Communication card identification 3: CANopen Slave / Master ##
4: MODBUS-TCP Slave
5: EtherNet / IP Slave
6: EtherCAT
12: PROFINET
09-61 Firmware version of communication card Read only ##
09-62 Product code Read only ##
09-63 Error code Read only ##
Communication card address DeviceNet: 0–63
 09-70 1
(for DeviceNet or PROFIBUS) Profibus-DP: 1–125
11-44

Standard DeviceNet:
0: 125Kbps
1: 250Kbps
2: 500Kbps
3: 1Mbps (Delta only)
Non-standard DeviceNet: (Delta only)
0: 10Kbps
Communication card speed setting
 09-71 1: 20Kbps 2
(for DeviceNet)
2: 50Kbps
3: 100Kbps
4: 125Kbps
5: 250Kbps
6: 500Kbps
7: 800Kbps
8: 1Mbps
0: Standard DeviceNet
In this mode, baud rate can only be
125Kbps, 250Kbps, 500Kbps in standard
Other communication card speed setting
 09-72 DeviceNet speed 0
(for DeviceNet)
1: Non-standard DeviceNet
In this mode, the baud rate of DeviceNet
can be the same as CANopen (0~8).
Communication card IP configuration 0: Static IP
 09-75 0
(for MODBUS TCP) 1: Dynamic IP (DHCP)
Communication card IP address 1
 09-76 0–65535 0
(for MODBUS TCP)
 09-77 0–65535 0
(for MODBUS TCP)
 09-78 0–65535 0
(for MODBUS TCP)
 09-79 0–65535 0
(for MODBUS TCP)
Communication card address mask 1
 09-80 0–65535
(for MODBUS TCP) 0
 09-81 0–65535 0
(for MODBUS TCP)
 09-82 0–65535 0
(for MODBUS TCP)
 09-83 0–65535 0
(for MODBUS TCP)
11-45

Communication card gateway address 1
 09-84 0–65535 0
(for MODBUS TCP)
 09-85 0–65535 0
for MODBUS TCP)
 09-86 0–65535 0
(for MODBUS TCP)
 09-87 0–65535 0
(for MODBUS TCP)
Communication card password
 09-88 0–99 0
(Low word) (for MODBUS TCP)
Communication card password
 09-89 0–99 0
(High word) (for MODBUS TCP)
Reset communication card 0: Disable
 09-90 0
(for MODBUS TCP) 1: Reset, return to default
bit0: Enable IP filter
bit 1: Enable internet parameters (1 bit).
When IP address is set, this bit is
enabled. After updating the
communication card parameters, this bit
Additional settings for the communication
 09-91 changes to disabled. 0
card (for MODBUS TCP)
bit 2: Enable login password (1 bit).
When you enter the login password, this
bit is enabled. After updating the
communication card parameters, this bit
changes to disabled.
bit0: Enable password
When the communication card is set
Communication card status
09-92 with a password, this bit is enabled. 0
(for MODBUS TCP)
When the password is cleared, this bit is
disabled.
11-46
10 Feedback Control Parameters

NOTE IM: Induction Motor; PM: Permanent Magnet Motor
0: Disable
1: ABZ
2: ABZ (Delta encoder for Delta servo motor)
10-00 Encoder type selection 0
3: Resolver
4: ABZ / UVW
5: MI8 single phase pulse input
10-01 Encoder pulses per revolution 1–20000 600
0: Disable
1: Phases A and B are pulse inputs, forward direction if
A-phase leads B-phase by 90 degrees
B-phase leads A-phase by 90 degrees
10-02 Encoder input type setting 0
3: Phase A is a pulse input and phase B is a direction
input (L = reverse direction, H = forward direction)
input (L = forward direction, H = reverse direction)
5: Single-phase input
Frequency division output
 10-03 1–255 1
setting (denominator)
 10-04 Electrical gear at load side A1 1–65535 100
 10-05 Electrical gear at motor side B1 1–65535 100
 10-06 Electrical gear at load side A2 1–65535 100
 10-07 Electrical gear at motor side B2 1–65535 100
Treatment for encoder / speed
 10-08 1: Warn and ramp to stop 2
observer feedback fault
Detection time of encoder / 0.0–10.0 sec.
 10-09 1.0
speed observer feedback fault 0: Disable
Encoder / speed observer stall 0–120%
 10-10 115
level 0: No function
Detection time of encoder /
 10-11 0.0–2.0 sec. 0.1
speed observer stall
Encoder / speed observer stall
action
Encoder / speed observer slip 0–50%
 10-13 50
range 0: No function
11-47

Detection time of encoder /
 10-14 0.0–10.0 sec. 0.5
speed observer slip
Encoder / speed observer stall
and slip error action
0: Disable
A-phase leads B-phase by 90 degrees
B-phase leads A-phase by 90 degrees
 10-16 Pulse input type setting 0
input (L = reverse direction, H = forward direction).
input. (L = forward direction, H = reverse direction).
5: Single-phase pulse input (MI8)
 10-17 Electrical gear A 1–65535 100
 10-18 Electrical gear B 1–65535 100
 10-19 Positioning for encoder position -32767–2400 0
Error range for encoder position
 10-20 0–65535 pulses 10
reached
 10-21 Filter time (PG2) 0.000–65.535 sec. 0.100
bit0: ASR control at sensorless torque (0: use PI as
ASR; 1: use P as ASR)
bit11: Activate DC braking when executing zero torque
command (0: ON; 1: OFF)
bit12: FOC Sensorless mode, cross zero means speed
 10-24 FOC & TQC function control goes from negative to positive or reverse 0
direction (0: determined by stator frequency; 1:
determined by speed command)
bit15: Direction control at open loop status (0: Switch
ON direction control; 1: Switch OFF direction
control)
FOC bandwidth for speed
 10-25 20.0–100.0Hz 40.0
observer
 10-26 FOC minimum stator frequency 0.0–10.0%fN 2.0
FOC low-pass filter time
 10-27 1–1000ms 50
constant
FOC gain for excitation current
 10-28 33–100%Tr 100
rise time
 10-29 Top limit of frequency deviation 0.00–200.00Hz 20.00
11-48

10-30 Resolver pole pair 1–50 pole pairs 1
 10-31 I/F mode, current command 0–150% of motor rated current 40
PM FOC sensorless speed
 10-32 0.00–600.00Hz 5.00
estimator bandwidth
PM sensorless speed estimator
 10-34 0.00–655.35 1.00
low-pass filter gain
 10-35 AMR (Kp) gain 0.00–3.00 1.00
 10-36 AMR (Ki) gain 0.00–3.00 0.20
 10-37 PM sensorless control word 0000–FFFFh 0000
Frequency point to switch from
 10-39 I/F mode to PM sensorless 0.00–599.00Hz 20.00
mode
Frequency point to switch from
 10-40 PM sensorless mode to V/F 0.00–599.00Hz 20.00
mode
I/F mode, Id current low
 10-41 0.0–6.0 sec. 0.2
pass-filter time
Initial angle detection pulse
 10-42 0.0–3.0 1.0
value
Read
10-43 PG card version 0–655.35
only
 10-49 Zero voltage time during start-up 0.000–60.000 sec. 0.000
Reverse angle limit (Electrical
 10-50 0.00–30.00 degree 10.00
angle)
 10-51 Injection frequency 0–1200Hz 500
0.0–200.0V
230V Series: 0.0–100.0V 15.0
 10-52 Injection magnitude 460V Series: 0.0–200.0V 30.0
575V Series: 0.0–200.0V 30.0
690V Series: 0.0–200.0V 30.0
0: Disable
1: Internal 1/4 rated current attracting the rotor to zero
PM initial rotor position
 10-53 degrees 0
detection method
2: High frequency injection
3: Pulse injection
11-49
11 Advanced Parameters
bit0: Auto-tuning for ASR and APR
bit1: Inertia estimate (only in FOCPG mode)
bit2: Zero servo
11-00 System control bit6: 0Hz linear-cross 0000h
bit7: Save or do not save the frequency
bit8: Maximum speed for point to point position
control
11-01 Per unit of system inertia 1–65535 (256 = 1PU) 256
 11-02 ASR1 / ASR2 switch frequency 5.00–599.00Hz 7.00
 11-03 ASR1 low-speed bandwidth 1–40Hz (IM) / 1~100Hz (PM) 10
 11-04 ASR2 high-speed bandwidth 1–40Hz (IM) / 1~100Hz (PM) 10
 11-05 Zero-speed bandwidth 1–40Hz (IM) / 1~100Hz (PM) 10
 11-06 ASR 1 gain 0–40Hz (IM) / 1~100Hz (PM) 10
 11-07 ASR 1 integral time 0.000–10.000 sec. 0.100
 11-08 ASR 2 gain 0–40Hz (IM) / 0~100Hz (PM) 10
 11-09 ASR 2 integral time 0.000–10.000 sec. 0.100
 11-10 ASR gain of zero speed 0–40Hz (IM) / 0~100Hz (PM) 10
 11-11 ASR1 integral time of zero speed 0.000–10.000 sec. 0.100
 11-12 Gain for ASR speed feed forward 0–150% 0
 11-13 PDFF gain value 0–200% 30
 11-14 ASR output Low-pass filter time 0.000–0.350 sec. 0.008
 11-15 Notch filter depth 0–20db 0
 11-16 Notch filter frequency 0.00–200.00Hz 0.00
Forward motor torque limit
 11-17 0–500% 500
Quadrant I
Forward regenerative torque limit
 11-18 0–500% 500
Quadrant II
Reverse motor torque limit
 11-19 0–500% 500
Quadrant III
Reverse regenerative torque limit
 11-20 0–500% 500
Quadrant IV
Flux weakening curve for motor 1
 11-21 0–200% 90
gain value
Flux weakening curve for motor 2
 11-22 0–200% 90
gain value
Flux weakening area speed
 11-23 0–150% 65
response
 11-24 APR gain 0.00–40.00Hz (IM) / 0–100.00Hz (PM) 10.00
11-50

Gain value for the APR feed
 11-25 0–100 30
forward
 11-26 APR curve time 0.00–655.35 sec. 3.00
 11-27 Maximum torque command 0–500% 100
0: Disable
1: Analog signal input (Pr. 03-00)
 11-28 Torque offset source 0
2: Pr. 11-29
3: Controlled by external terminal (Pr. 11-30–11-32)
 11-29 Torque offset setting -100.0–100.0% 0.0
 11-30 High torque compensation -100.0–100.0% 30.0
 11-31 Middle torque compensation -100.0–100.0% 20.0
 11-32 Low torque compensation -100.0–100.0% 10.0
0 : Digital keypad
1 : RS-485 communication (Pr. 11-34)
 11-33 Torque command source 2: Analog signal input (Pr. 03-00) 0
3: CANopen
5: Communication extension card
 11-34 Torque command -100.0–100.0% (Pr. 11-27 set value = 100 %) 0.0
 11-35 Torque command filter time 0.000–1.000 sec. 0.000
0: Set by Pr. 11-37 (Forward speed limit) and Pr.
11-38 (Reverse speed limit)
1: Set by Pr. 11-37, Pr. 11-38 and Pr. 00-20 (Source
11-36 Speed limit selection 0
of master frequency command)
2: Set by Pr. 00-20 (Source of master frequency
command).
 11-37 Forward speed limit (torque mode) 0–120% 10
 11-38 Reverse speed limit (torque mode) 0–120% 10
Zero torque command mode 0: Torque mode
11-39 0
selection 1: Speed mode
0: External terminal
Point-to-point position control 2: RS-485
 11-40 0
command source 3: CANopen
5: Communication card
 11-42 System control flag 0000–FFFFh 0000h
Point- to-point position control

 11-43 0.00–599.00Hz 10.00
maximum ferquency
Point-to-point position control

 11-44 0.00–655.35 sec. 1.00
acceleration time
11-51

Point-to-point position control
 11-45 0.00–655.35 sec. 3.00
deceleration time
11-46 Torque output filter time 0.000–65.535 sec. 0.050
11-52
13 Application Parameters by Industry

0: Disable
1: User-defined Parameter
2: Compressor (IM)
13-00 Industry Parameters combination 0
3: Fan
4: Pump
10: Air Handling Unit, AHU
11-53
14 Extension Card Parameter

Extension card Input terminal 0: Disable
 14-00 0
selection (AI10) 1: Frequency command
Extension card Input terminal 2: Torque command (torque limit under speed mode)
 14-01 0
selection (AI11) 3: Torque compensation command
4: PID target value
10: Positive/ negative torque limit
13: PID compensation amount
 14-08 Analog input filter time (AI10) 0.00–20.00 sec. 0.01
 14-09 Analog input filter time (AI11) 0.00–20.00 sec. 0.01
Analog input 4–20mA signal loss 0: Disable
 14-10 0
selection (AI10) 1: Continue operation at the last frequency
Analog input 4–20mA signal loss 2: Decelerate to 0Hz
 14-11 0
selection (AI11) 3: Stop immediately and display ACE
Extension card output terminal 0: Output frequency (Hz)

 14-12 0
selection (AO10) 1: Frequency command (Hz)
Extension card output terminal 2: Motor speed (Hz)
 14-13 0
selection (AO11) 3: Output current (rms)
4: Output voltage
5: DC BUS voltage
6: Power factor
7: Power
8: Torque
9: AVI
10: ACI
12: q-axis current (Iq)
13: q-axis feedback value (Iq)
14: d-axis current (Id)
15: d-axis feedback value (Id)
18: Torque command
19: PG2 frequency command
20: CANopen analog output
21: RS-485 analog output
11-54

22: Communication card analog output
23: Constant voltage output
25: CANopen and RS-485 analog output
Analog output 1 gain output
 14-14 0.0–500.0% 100.0
(AO10)
Analog output 1 gain output
 14-15 0.0–500.0% 100.0
(AO11)

 14-16 0: Absolute value of output voltage 0
(AO10)
1: Reverse output 0V; Forward output 0–10V
 14-17 2: Reverse output 5~0V; Forward output 5–10V 0
(AO11)
0: 0–10V (AVI10)
Extension card input selection
 14-18 1: 0–20mA (ACI10) 0
(AI10)
2: 4–20mA (ACI10)
0: 0–10V (AVI11)
Extension card input selection
 14-19 1: 0–20mA (ACI11) 0
(AI11)
2: 4–20mA (ACI11)
14-20 AO10 DC output setting level 0.00–100.00 % 0.00
14-21 AO11 DC output setting level 0.00–100.00 % 0.00
 14-22 AO10 filter output time 0.00–20.00 sec. 0.01
 14-23 AO11 filter output time 0.00–20.00 sec. 0.01
14-36 0: 0–10V 0
 AO10 output selection
1: 0–20mA
 14-37 AO11 output selection 2: 4–20mA 0
11-55
11-56
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings

12-1 Description of Parameter Settings
00 Drive Parameters  You can set this parameter during operation.
Identity Code of the AC Motor Drive

Default: #.#
Settings Read Only
Display AC Motor Drive Rated Current
Default: #.#
Settings Read Only
 Pr. 00-00 displays the identity code of the AC motor drive. Use the following specification table to
check if Pr.00-01 setting is the rated current of the AC motor drive. Pr.00-01 corresponds to the
identity code of the AC motor drive (Pr. 00-00).
 The default is the rated current for normal load. Set Pr.00-16 to 1 to display the rated current for
heavy load.
230V Series
Frame A B C
kW 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22
HP 1.0 2.0 3.0 5.0 7.5 10 15 20 25 30
Identity code 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
Rated current for
4.8 7.1 10 16 24 31 47 62 71 86
heavy load (A)
Rated current for
5 8 11 17 25 33 49 65 75 90
normal load (A)
Frame D E F
kW 30 37 45 55 75 90
HP 40 50 60 75 100 125
Identity code 24 26 28 30 32 34
Rated current for
114 139 171 204 242 329
heavy duty (A)
Rated current for
120 146 180 215 255 346
normal duty (A)
460V Series
Frame A B C
kW 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 4.0 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30
HP 1 2 3 5 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40
Identity code 5 7 9 11 93 13 15 17 19 21 23 25
Rated current for
2.9 3.8 5.7 8.1 9.5 11 17 23 30 36 43 57
heavy load (A)
Rated current for
3.0 4.0 6.0 9.0 10.5 12 18 24 32 38 45 60
normal load (A)
Frame D0 D E F G H
kW 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 185 220 280 315 355 450
HP 50 60 75 100 125 150 175 215 250 300 375 425 475 600
Identity code 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51 55
Rated current for
69 86 105 143 171 209 247 295 352 437 523 585 649 816
heavy load (A)
Rated current for
73 91 110 150 180 220 260 310 370 460 550 616 683 866
normal load (A)
12.1-00-1
575V Series
Frame A B
kW 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15
HP 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20
Identity code 505 506 507 508 509 510 511
Rated current for
2.1 3 4.6 6.9 8.3 13 16.8
heavy load (A)
Rated current for
2.5 3.6 5.5 8.2 10 15.5 20
normal load (A)
690V Series
Frame C D E F
kW 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200
HP 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 175 215 270
Identity code 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 686
Rated current for
14 20 24 30 36 45 54 67 86 104 125 150
heavy load (A)
Rated current for
20 24 30 36 45 54 67 86 104 125 150 180
normal load (A)
Frame G H
kW 250 315 400 450 560 630
HP 335 425 530 600 745 840
Identity code 687 626 628 629 631 632
Rated current for
180 220 290 310 420 675
heavy load (A)
Rated current for
220 290 350 385 465 675
normal load (A)
Parameter Reset
Default: 0
Settings 0: No Function
1: Write protection for parameters
5: Reset kWh display to 0
6: Reset PLC (including CANopen Master Index)
7: Reset CANopen Index (Slave)
9: Reset all parameters to defaults with base frequency at 50 Hz
10: Reset all parameters to defaults with base frequency at 60Hz
 When set to 1, all parameters are read only except Pr. 00-02, Pr. 00-07 and Pr. 00-08. Set Pr.
00-02 to 0 before changing other parameter settings.
 When set to 9 or 10, reset all parameters to defaults. If there is a password set in Pr. 00-08,
enter the password set in Pr. 00-07 to reset to default.
 When set to 5, kWh displayed value can be reset to 0 even when the drive is operating. Pr.
05-26, Pr. 05-27, Pr. 05-28, Pr. 05-29, and Pr. 05-30 are reset to 0.
 When set to 6, clear internal PLC program (includes the related settings of PLC internal
CANopen master)
 When set to 7, reset the related settings of CANopen slave.
 When set to 6, 7, 9, 10, reboot the motor drive after setting.
12.1-00-2
 Start-up Display Selection

Default: 0
Settings 0: F (Frequency command)
1: H (Output frequency)
2: U (User defined)
3: A (Output current)
 This parameter determines the start-up display page. This is the user defined choice display
according to the setting in Pr.00-04.
 Content of Multi-function Display (User-defined)

Default: 3
Settings 0: Display output current (A) (Unit: Amp)
1: Display counter value (c) (Unit: CNT)
2: Display actual output frequency (H.) (Unit: Hz)
3: Display DC BUS voltage (v) (Unit: VDC)
4: Display output voltage (E) (Unit: VAC)
5: Display output power angle (n) (Unit: deg)
6: Display output power in kW (P) (Unit: kW)
7: Display actual motor speed rpm (r) (Unit: rpm)
8: Display estimate output torque % (t) (Unit: %)
9: Display PG feedback (G) (refer to Pr. 10-00 and Pr. 10-01) (Unit: PLS)
10: Display PID feedback (b) (Unit: %)
11: Display AVI in % (1.) (Unit: %)
12: Display ACI in % (2.) (Unit: %)
13: Display AUI in % (3.) (Unit: %)
14: Display the temperature of IGBT (i.) (Unit: °C)
15: Display the temperature of capacitance (c.) (Unit: °C)
16: The status of digital input (ON/OFF), refer to Pr. 02-12 (i)
17: The status of digital output (ON/OFF), refer to Pr. 02-18 (o)
18: Multi-step speed (S)
19: The corresponding CPU pin status of digital input (d)
20: The corresponding CPU pin status of digital output (0.)
21: Actual motor position (PG1 of PG card) (P.) The maximum value is
32bits display
22: Pulse input frequency (PG2 of PG card) (S.)
23: Pulse input position (PG2 of PG card) (q.) The maximum value is
32bits display
24: Position command tracing error (E.)
25: Overload counting (0.00–100.00%) (o.) (Unit: %)
26: Ground fault GFF (G.) (Unit: %)
27: DC BUS voltage ripple (r.) (Unit: VDC)
28: Display PLC register D1043 data (C)
12.1-00-3
29: Display PM pole section (EMC-PG01U application) (4.)

30 : Display output of user defined (U)
31 : Display Pr. 00-05 user Gain (K)
32: Number of actual motor revolution during operation (PG card plug in
and Z phase signal input) (Z.)
33: Motor actual position during operation (when PG card is connected)(q)
34: Operation speed of fan (F.) (Unit: %)
35: Control Mode display: 0= Speed control mode (SPD), 1= torque
control mode (TQR) (t.)
36: Present operating carrier frequency of drive (Hz) (J.)
38: Display drive status (6.) (Refer to Note 7)
39: Display estimated output torque, positive and negative, using Nt-m as
unit (t=0.0: positive torque; -0.0: negative torque) (C.)
40: Torque command (L.) (Unit: %)
41: kWh display (J) (Unit: kWh)
42: PID reference (h.) (Unit: %)
43: PID offset (o.) (Unit: %)
44: PID output frequency (b.) (Unit: Hz)
45: Hardware ID
49: Motor temperature (PTC, PT100, KTY84-130)
51: PMSVC torque offset
52: AI10%
53: AI11%
 Explanation 1
 When Pr. 10-01 is set to 1000 and Pr. 10-02 is set to 1, 2, the displayed range for PG feedback is
between 0–4000.
 When Pr. 10-01 is set to 1000 and Pr. 10-02 is set to 3, 4, 5, the displayed range for PG feedback is
between 0–1000.
 Home position: If it has Z phase, Z phase will be regarded as home position. Otherwise, home
position will be the encoder start up position.
 Explanation 2
It can also display negative values when setting analog input bias (Pr. 03-03–03-10).
Example: Assume that AVI input voltage is 0 V, Pr. 03-03 is 10.0% and Pr. 03-07 is 4 (Bias serves
as the center).
 Explanation 3
Example: If REV, MI1 and MI6 are ON, the following table shows the status of the terminals.
Normally opened contact (N.O.), 0: OFF, 1: ON
Terminal MI15 MI14 MI13 MI12 MI11 MI10 MI8 MI7 MI6 MI5 MI4 MI3 MI2 MI1 REV FWD
Status 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0
NOTEMI10–MI15 are the terminals for extension cards (Pr. 02-26–02-31).
 The value is 0000 0000 1000 0110 in binary and 0086H in HEX. When Pr. 00-04 is set to 16 or 19,
the u page on the keypad displays 0086H.
12.1-00-4
 The setting value 16 is ON / OFF status of digital input according to Pr. 02-12 setting, and the setting
value 19 is the corresponding CPU pin ON / OFF status of the digital input.
 The FWD / REV action and MI1 (which is set as three-wire) are not affected by Pr. 02-12.
 You can set 16 to monitor the digital input status, and then set 19 to check if the circuit is normal.
 Explanation 4
Assume that RY1: Pr. 02-13 is set to 9 (Drive is ready). After the AC motor drive powers on, if there
is no other abnormal status, the contact is ON. The display status is shown below.
Normally opened contact (N.O.)
Terminal MO20 MO19 MO18 MO17 MO16 MO15 MO14 MO13 MO12 MO11 MO10 MO2 MO1 Reserved RY2 RY1
Status 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
 If Pr. 00-04 is set to 17 or 20, it displays in hexadecimal “0001h” with LED u page is ON in the
keypad.
 The setting value 17 is ON / OFF status of digital output according to Pr. 02-18 setting, and the
setting value 19 is the corresponding CPU pin ON / OFF status of the digital output.
 You can set 17 to monitor the digital output status, and then set 20 to check if the circuit is normal.
 Explanation 5
Setting value 8: 100% means the motor rated torque.
Motor rated torque = (Motor rated power x 60 / 2π) / Motor rated rotating speed
 Explanation 6
Setting value 25: when displayed value reaches 100.00%, the drive shows “oL” as an overload
warning.
 Explanation 7
Setting value 38
bit0: The drive is running forward.
bit1: The drive is running backward.
bit2: The drive is ready.
bit3: Errors occurred on the drive.
bit4: The drive is running.
bit5: Warnings occurred on the drive.
 Coefficient Gain in Actual Output Frequency

Default: 0
Settings 0.00–160.00
 This parameter is to set coefficient gain in actual output frequency. Set Pr. 00-04= 31 to display
the calculation result on the screen (calculation = output frequency * Pr. 00-05).
Software Version
Default: Read only
Settings Read only
12.1-00-5
 Parameter Protection Password Input

Default: 0
Settings 0–65535
Display 0–4 (the number of password attempts allowed)
 This parameter allows you to enter your password (which is set in Pr. 00-08) to unlock the
parameter protection and to make changes to the parameter.
 To avoid problems in the future, be sure to write down the password after you set this parameter.
 Pr. 00-07 and Pr. 00-08 are used to prevent personnel from setting other parameters by accident.
 If you forget the password, clear the password setting by input 9999 and press the ENTER key,
then enter 9999 again and press ENTER within 10 seconds. After decoding, all the settings
return to default.
 When setting is under password protection, all the parameters read 0, except Pr. 00-08.
 Parameter Protection Password Setting

Default: 0
Settings 0–65535
0: No password protection or password entered correctly (Pr. 00-07)
1: Password has been set
 This parameter is for setting the password protection. Password can be set directly the first time.
After you set the password, the value of Pr.00-08 is 1, which means password protection is
activated. At this time, if you want to change any of the parameter settings, you must enter the
correct password in Pr.00-07 to deactivate the password temporarily, and this would make
Pr.00-08 become 0. After you finish setting the parameters, reboot the motor drive and the
password is activated again.
 Entering the correct password in Pr.00-07 only temporarily deactivates the password. To
permanently deactivate password protection, set Pr.00-08 to 0 manually. Otherwise, password
protection is always reactivated after you reboot the motor drive.
 The keypad copy function works normally only when the password protection is deactivated
(temporarily or permanently), and password set in Pr. 00-08 cannot be copied to the keypad. So
when copying parameters from the keypad to the motor drive, set the password manually again
in the motor drive to activate password protection.
Password Decode Flow Chart
Pass word Setting Pass word Forgotten Pass word Incorrect
00-07 00-07
00-08
Displays 01 after Enter 9999 and press ENTER, 3 chan ces of p assword inpu t:
correct password is then ente r 9999 aga in withi n 10 Incorre ct p assword 1: d ispl ays "01"
entered to Pr.00-08. se cond s an d pre ss ENTER. Incorre ct p assword 2: disp lays "02 "
Then all pa ra meters will re set Incorre ct p assword 3: "Pcode "(blin king)
to factory se ttings .
Keyp ad will be locked after 3 wrong attemp ted

passwords. To re-activ ate t he keypa d, pl ease
reboo t the drive an d in put t he correct
password.
12.1-00-6
Decode Flow Char t
00-08
Password Set
00-07
Password Input
Yes Shut down th drive

Pr.00-08=0 and re-app ly power
No
Re-apply power.
(The password is still valid)
 Control Mode
Default: 0
Settings 0: Speed mode
1: Point-to-Point position control mode
2: Torque mode
3: Homing mode
 Determines the control mode of the AC motor drive.
Speed Control Mode

Default: 0
Settings 0: IMVF (IM V/F control)
1: IMVFPG (IM V/F control+ Encoder)
2: IM/PM SVC (IM/PM space vector control)
4: PMFOCPG (PM FOC + Encoder)
5: IMFOC Sensorless (IM FOC sensorless)
6: PM Sensorless (PM FOC sensorless)
7: IPM Sensorless (Interior PM FOC sensorless)
 Determines the control method of the AC motor drive:
0: IM V/F control, you can set the proportion of V/F as required and control multiple motors
simultaneously.
1: IM V/F control + Encoder, you can use optional PG card with encoder for the closed-loop
speed control.
2: IM/PM space vector control, get the optimal control by auto-tuning the motor parameters.
3: IM FOC + encoder, not only can increase torque, but also can increase the accuracy of the
speed control (1:1000).
4: PM FOC + Encoder, not only can increase torque, but also can increase the accuracy of
the speed control (1:1000).
5: IM FOC sensorless, IM field oriented sensorless vector control
6: PM FOC sensorless, PM field oriented sensorless vector control
7: Interior PM FOC sensorless, Interior PM field oriented sensorless vector control
12.1-00-7
 There are more detailed explanation of motor adjustment procedure in section 12-2
 When Pr. 00-10=0, and you set Pr. 00-11 to 0, the V/F control diagram is as follows.
 When Pr. 00-10=0, and you set Pr. 00-11 to 1, the V/F control + encoder diagram is as follows.
 When Pr. 00-10=0, and you set Pr. 00-11 to 2, the space vector control diagram is as follows:
IM Space Vector Control (IMSVC):
12.1-00-8
PM Space Vector Control (PMSVC):
 When Pr. 00-10=0, and you set Pr. 00-11 to 3, the IM FOCPG control diagram is as follows:
 When Pr. 00-10=0, and you set Pr. 00-11 to 4, the PM FOCPG control diagram is as follows:
12.1-00-9
 When Pr. 00-10=0, and you set Pr. 00-11 to 5, IMFOC Sensorless control diagram is as follows:
 When Pr. 00-10=0, and you set Pr. 00-11 to 6, PM FOC Sensorless control diagram is as follows:
 When Pr. 00-10=0, and you set Pr. 00-11 to 7, IPM FOC sensorless control diagram is as follows:
12.1-00-10
Point-to-Point Position Control

Default: 0
Settings: 0: Relative position
1: Absolute position
 Pr. 00-12 = 0 is incremental type P2P; Pr. 00-12 = 1 is absolute type P2P
Control of Torque Mode

Default: 0
Settings 0: IM TQCPG (IM Torque control + Encoder)
1: PM TQCPG (PM Torque control + Encoder)
2: IM TQC Sensorless (IM Sensorless torque control)
 Pr. 00-13=0, IM TQCPG control diagram is as follows:
Pr.11-28
Torque Bias
0
0
Pr.11-33 Analog Input
Torque Source 1 Pr.11-27
Pr.11-34 Pr.11-29
Pr.11-21
0 2 Maximum
RS485 Pr.11-22
Pr.11-30~Pr.11-32 Torque
3
Pr.10-35
1
Analog Input Toffset Pr.10-36
Pr.11-35
2 + Active Id *
CANopen Tq* Magnetic
+ d-axis ACR DC Bus DC Bus
3 X LPF Regulator DC Bus Voltage
Reserve Voltage Voltage
4 Torque Limit Detection Protection
COMM Card
Pr.06-12
5 TQ/SPD Ua Ub Uc
Pr.11-17~11-20
Select
Feed Forward Torque
q-axis
Control Iq *
Pr.11-36 Current dq IGBT
Speed limit Calculator q-axis ACR AVR IM
Pr.11-12 Speed abc PWM
Pr.11-37&Pr.11-38
0 + Pr.07-23
Pr.11-37 Pr.01-01~01-02
+ +
Pr.11-38 ASR Pr.05-01~05-09
1 LPF
Pr.00-20
Ia
Fcmd - Torque Limit abc Ib
2 Pr.11-00 bit0=0 Pr.11-14 Slip Calculator
Pr.00-20 set Pr.11-06~11-11 Pr.06-12 dq Ic
Pr.11-00 bit0=1 Pr.11-17~11-20 Encoder
ωsl +
set Pr.11-03~11-05 θe
ʃ
Pr.10-00~10-02
+
ωr Speed
Feedback
 Pr. 00-13=1, PM TQCPG control diagram is as follows:
12.1-00-11
 Pr. 00-13=2, IM TQC Sensorless control diagram is as follows:
Load Selection
Default: 0
Settings 0: Normal load
1: Heavy load
 Normal load: over-load ability is 160% rated output current in 3 seconds (120% rated output
current in 1 minute). Refer to Pr. 00-17 for the setting of carrier wave. Refer to Chapter 9
“Specifications” or Pr. 00-01 for the rated current.
 Heavy load: over-load ability is 180% rated output current in 3 seconds. (150% rated output
current in 1 minute). Refer to Pr. 00-17 for the setting of carrier wave. Refer to Chapter 9
“Specifications” or Pr. 00-01 for the rated current.
 Pr.00-01 varies with the setting value for Pr.00-16. The default value and maximum for Pr.06-03
and Pr.06-04 also vary with the setting value of Pr.00-16.
 In Normal load, the default setting of Pr. 06-03, Pr. 06-04 is 120%, and the maximum is 160%.
However, if DC voltage is higher than 700 VDC (460V series) or 350 VDC (230V series), then the
maximum is 145%
 In Heavy load, the default setting of Pr. 06-03, Pr. 06-04 is 150%, and the maximum is 180%.
However, if DC voltage is higher than 700 VDC (460V series) or 350 VDC (230V series), then the
maximum is 165%
Carrier Frequency
Default: Table below
Settings 2–15kHz
 This parameter determines the PWM carrier frequency for the AC motor drive.
230V Series [Normal Load]
VF, VFPG, SVC, PMFOCPG,
Power/ Control PMFOC, IPMFOC IMFOC, IMTQC
IMFOCPG, IMTQCPG PMTQCPG
mode
Settings Default Settings Default Settings Default Settings Default
1–15HP
2–15kHz 8kHz 4–15kHz 8kHz 4–10kHz 8kHz 4–14kHz 8kHz
[0.75–11kW]
20–50HP
[15–37kW]
60–125HP
[45–90kW]
12.1-00-12
230V Series [Heavy Load]

1–15HP
[0.75–11kW]
20–50HP
[15–37kW]
60–125HP
[45–90kW]
460V Series [Normal Load]

VF, VFPG, SVC, PMFOCPG,
Power/ Control PMFOC, IPMFOC IMFOC, IMTQC
IMFOCPG, IMTQCPG PMTQCPG
mode
Settings Default Settings Default Settings Default Settings Default
1–15HP
[0.75–11kW]
20–50HP
[15–37kW]
60–125HP
[45–90kW]
460V Series [Heavy Load]
1–15HP
[0.75–11kW]
20–50HP
[15–37kW]
60–125HP
[45–90kW]
575V Series [Light/ Normal/ Heavy Load] 690V Series [Light/ Normal/ Heavy Load]
Power/ Control VF, VFPG, SVC
mode Settings Default Settings Default
1–15HP
2–15kHz 6kHz - -
[0.75–11kW]
20–600HP
- - 2–9kHz 4kHz
[15–450kW]
850HP
- - 2–9kHz 3kHz
[630kW]
 From the table, you see that the PWM carrier frequency has significant influences on the
electromagnetic noise, the AC motor drive heat dissipation, and the motor acoustic noise.
Therefore, if the surrounding noise is greater than the motor noise, lower the carrier frequency is
good to reduce the temperature rise. Although it is quiet operation in the higher carrier frequency,
the entire wiring and interference resistance should be considerate.
 When the carrier frequency is higher than the factory setting, it needs to protect by decreasing the
carrier frequency. See Pr. 06-55 for the related setting and details.
12.1-00-13
PLC Command Mask

Default: Read Only
Settings bit0: Control command by PLC force control
bit1: Frequency command by PLC force control
bit2: Position command by PLC force control
bit3: Torque command by PLC force control
 Determines if frequency command or control command is locked by PLC
Master Frequency Command (AUTO) Source / Source Selection of the PID Target
Default: 0
Settings 0: Digital keypad
3: External UP / DOWN terminal (multi-function input terminal)
4: Pulse input without direction command (Pr. 10-16 without direction), use
with PG card
5: Pulse input with direction command (Pr. 10-16), use with PG card
8: Communication card (does not include CANopen card)
 Set the source of the master frequency in AUTO mode.
 Pr. 00-20 and Pr. 00-21 are for the settings of frequency source and operation source in AUTO
mode. Pr. 00-30 and Pr. 00-31 are for the settings of frequency source and operation source in
HAND mode. You can switch the AUTO / HAND mode with the keypad KPC-CC01 (optional) or
the multi-function input terminal (MI) to set the master frequency source.
 The default for the frequency source or operation source is for AUTO mode. It returns to AUTO
mode whenever cycle the power. If you use a multi-function input terminal to switch between
AUTO and HAND mode, the highest priority is the multi-function input terminal. When the
external terminal is OFF, the drive does not accept any operation signal and cannot execute JOG.
 When Pr. 00-20=4, the pulse input without direction command has included PG and MI8 input.
Operation Command (AUTO) Source
Default: 0
1: External terminals. Keypad STOP disabled.
2: RS-485 communication. Keypad STOP disabled.
 Set the source of the operation frequency in AUTO mode.
 When you control the operation command by the keypad KPC-CC01, keys RUN, STOP and JOG
(F1) are valid.
 Stop Method
Default: 0
Settings 0: Ramp to stop
1: Coast to stop
12.1-00-14
 Determines how the motor is stopped when the AC motor drive receives the STOP command.
1. Ramp to stop: the AC motor drive decelerates to 0 or the minimum output frequency (Pr. 01-07)
according to the set deceleration time, and then to stop.
2. Coast to stop: the AC motor drive stops output immediately, and the motor coasts to stop
according to the load inertia.
 Use “ramp to stop” for the safety of personnel, or to prevent material from being wasted in
applications where the motor must stop immediately after the drive stops. You must set the
deceleration time accordingly.
 If idling is allowed, or the load inertia is large, use “coast to stop”. For example, blowers,
punching machines and pumps
 Control of Motor Direction

Default: 0
Settings 0: Enable forward/ reverse
1: Disable reverse
2: Disable forward
 Enable the AC motor drives to run in the forward / reverse direction. You can use it to prevent a
motor from running in a direction that would cause injury or damage the equipment.
Digital Keypad Frequency Command Memory

Default: Read Only
Settings Read only
 If the keypad is the frequency command source, when Lv or Fault occurs, the parameter stores
the current frequency command.
 User-Defined Characteristics
Default: 0
Settings bit0–3: user-defined decimal places
0000b: no decimal place
0001b: one decimal place
0010b: two decimal places
0011b: three decimal places
12.1-00-15
bit 4–15: user-defined unit

000xh: Hz
001xh: rpm
002xh: %
003xh: kg
004xh: m/s
005xh: kW
006xh: HP
007xh: ppm
008xh: 1/m
009xh: kg/s
00Axh: kg/m
00Bxh: kg/h
00Cxh: lb/s
00Dxh: lb/m
00Exh: lb/h
00Fxh: ft/s
010xh: ft/m
011xh: m
012xh: ft
013xh: degC
014xh: degF
015xh: mbar
016xh: bar
017xh: Pa
018xh: kPa
019xh: mWG
01Axh: inWG
01Bxh: ftWG
01Cxh: psi
01Dxh: atm
01Exh: L/s
01Fxh: L/m
020xh: L/h
021xh: m3/s
022xh: m3/h
023xh: GPM
024xh: CFM
xxxxh: Hz
 bit 0–3: the control frequency F page, user-defined unit (Pr.00-04 = d10, PID feedback value) and
the number of decimal places (Pr.00-26) which supports up to three decimal places.
 bit 4–15: the control frequency F page, user-defined unit (Pr.00-04 = d10, PID feedback value)
and the displayed units for Pr.00-26.
12.1-00-16
Maximum User-Defined Value

Default: 0
Settings 0: Disable
0–65535 (when Pr. 00-25 set to no decimal place)
0.0–6553.5 (when Pr. 00-25 set to 1 decimal place)
0.00–655.35 (when Pr. 00-25 set to 2 decimal places)
0.000–65.535 (when Pr. 00-25 set to 3 decimal places)
 When Pr. 00-26 is NOT set to 0, the user-defined value is enabled. After selecting the displayed
unit and number of decimal points with Pr.00-25, the setting value of Pr.00-26 corresponds to
Pr.01-00 (Maximum motor operating frequency), and then the motor operation frequency has a
linear relationship with the displayed value on the digital keypad.
Example:
When the frequency set in Pr. 01-00 = 60.00Hz, the maximum user-defined value for Pr. 00-26
is 100.0%. This also means Pr. 00-25 is set at 0021h to select % as the unit.
NOTE
The drive display is controlled by the Pr. 00-25 setting when Pr. 00-25 is properly set and
Pr.00-26 is not 0.
User-Defined Value
Default: Read only
Settings Read only
 Pr. 00-27 displays the user-defined value when Pr. 00-26 is not set to 0.
 The user-defined function is valid only when Pr. 00-20 (frequency source) is set to digital keypad
or RS-485 communication.
LOCAL / REMOTE Mode

Default: 0
Settings 0: Standard HOA function
1: When switching between local and remote, the drive stops
2: When switching between local and remote, the drive runs with REMOTE
settings for frequency and operation status
3: When switching between local and remote, the drive runs with LOCAL
settings for frequency and operation status
4: When switching between local and remote, the drive runs with LOCAL
setting when switched to Local and runs with REMOTE settings when
switched to Remote for frequency and operation status.
 The default of Pr. 00-29 is 0 (standard Hand-Off-Auto function). Set the AUTO frequency and
operation source with Pr.00-20 and Pr.00-21. Set the HAND frequency and operation source with
Pr.00-30 and Pr.00-31. Select or switch AUTO / HAND mode by using the digital keypad
(KPC-CC01) or setting the multi-function input terminal MI = 41, 42.
 When you set the external terminal (MI) to 41 and 42 (AUTO / HAND mode), Pr.00-29 = 1,2,3,4
are disabled. The external terminal has the highest command priority, and Pr. 00-29 functions in
standard HOA mode.
 When you do not set Pr.00-29 to 0, the Local / Remote function is enabled, and the top right
corner of digital keypad KPC-CC01 (optional) displays LOC or REM (the display is available
12.1-00-17
when KPC-CC01 is installed with firmware version higher than version 1.021). Set the LOCAL
frequency and operation source with Pr.00-20 and Pr.00-21. Set the REMOTE frequency and
operation source with Pr.00-30 and Pr.00-31. Select or switch LOC / REM mode with the digital
keypad KPC-CC01 (optional) or set the multi-function input terminal MI = 56. The AUTO key of
the digital keypad is for the REMOTE function, and HAND key is for the LOCAL function.
 When you set the external terminal (MI) to 56 for LOC / REM mode selection, if you set Pr.00-29
to 0, then the external terminal function is disabled.
 When you set the external terminal (MI) to 56 for LOC / REM mode selection, if Pr.00-29 is not
set to 0, then AUTO / HAND key is disabled, and the external terminal has the highest command
priority. 
Master Frequency Command (HAND) Source

Default: 0
3: External UP/DOWN terminal (multi-function input terminal)
4: Pulse input without direction command (Pr. 10-16 without direction)
5: Pulse input with direction command (Pr. 10-16)
 Determines the master frequency source in HAND mode.
Operation Command (HAND) Source

Default: 0
1: External terminals. Keypad STOP disabled.
2: RS-485 communication. Keypad STOP disabled.
 Set the source of the master frequency in HAND mode.
 Pr. 00-20 and Pr. 00-21 are for the settings of frequency source and operation source in AUTO
mode. Pr. 00-30 and Pr. 00-31 are for the settings of frequency source and operation source in
HAND mode. You can switch the AUTO / HAND mode with the keypad KPC-CC01 (optional) or
the multi-function input terminal (MI) to set the master frequency source.
 The default for the frequency source or operation source is for AUTO mode. It returns to AUTO
mode whenever cycle the power. If you use a multi-function input terminal to switch between
AUTO and HAND mode, the highest priority is the multi-function input terminal. When the
external terminal is OFF, the drive does not accept any operation signal and cannot execute JOG.
12.1-00-18
 Digital Keypad STOP Function

Default: 0
Settings 0: Disable STOP key
1: Enable STOP key
 This parameter is valid when the digital keypad is not set as the operation source (Pr. 00-21≠0).
When Pr. 00-21=0, the STOP key on the digital keypad is not affected by the parameter.
 Homing mode
Default: 0000h
Settings:
Note: Forward run = clockwise (CW)

Reverse run = counterclockwise (CCW)
X 0: Forward run to home. Set PL forward limit as checkpoint.

1: Reverse run (CCW) to home. Set NL reverse limit (CCWL) as
checkpoint.
2: Forward run to home. Set ORG : OFF→ON as checkpoint.
3: Reverse to home. Set ORG : OFF→ON as checkpoint.
4: Forward run and search for Z-pulse as checkpoint.
5: Reverse run and search for Z-pulse as checkpoint.
6: Forward run to home. Set ORG: ON→OFF as checkpoint.
7: Reverse run to home. Set ORG : ON→OFF as checkpoint.
8: Define current position as home.
Y Set X to 0, 1, 2, 3, 6, 7
0: reverse run to Z pulse
1: continue forward run to Z pulse
2: Ignore Z pulse
Z When home limit is reached, set X to 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 first.
0: display error
1: reverse the direction
 Homing action is controlled by Pr. 00-40, Pr. 00-41, Pr. 00-42 and Pr. 02-01–02-08.
1. When Y=0, X=0 or Y=0, X=2

Speed
Posi tion
Z p ulse
CCWL /ORGP
12.1-00-19
2. When Y=0, X=1 or Y=0, X=3

Speed
Posi tion
Z p ulse
CWL/ORGP
3. When Y=1, X=2

Speed
Posi tion
Z p ulse
ORGP
4. When Y=1, X=3

Speed
Posi tion
Z p ulse
ORGP
5. When Y=2, X=2

Speed
Posi tion
ORGP
12.1-00-20
6. When Y=2, X=3

Speed
Position
ORGP
7. When Y=2, X=4

Speed
Position
Z pulse
8. When Y=2, X=5

Speed
Position
Z pulse
 Homing by Frequency 1
Default: 8.00
Settings 0.00–599.00Hz
 Homing by Frequency 2
Default: 2.00
 Controlled by multi-function input terminal Pr. 02-01–02-08 (44–47).
46: Homing (ORG)
47: Homing function enabled
 If the drive is not controlled by CAN or PLC, when setting Pr. 00-10 =1 (Control mode = P2P
position control), set the external input terminal to 47 (homing function enable) for homing.
 When Pr. 00-10 is set to 3, after homing is complete, you must set control mode (Pr. 00-10 = 1)
to execute P2P position control.
 Display Filter Time (Current)

Default: 0.100
Settings 0.001–65.535 sec.
 Minimize the current fluctuation displayed by digital keypad.
12.1-00-21
 Display Filter Time (Keypad)

Default: 0.100
 Minimize the display value fluctuation displayed by digital keypad.
Software Version (Date)

Default: ####
Settings Read only
 Displays the current drive software version by date.
12.1-00-22
01 Basic Parameters  You can be set this parameter during operation.
Maximum Operation Frequency

Default: 60.00 / 50.00
Settings 00.00–599.00 Hz
 Determines the AC motor drive’s maximum operation frequency range. This setting corresponds
to the maximum value for the analog input frequency setting signal (0 – +10 V, 4–20 mA,
0–20 mA, ±10 V).
 In normal load mode:
 VF, SVC, VFPG, FOCPG: 0–599 Hz
 FOC sensorless (IM/PM): 0–300H z/ 500 Hz
 In heave load mode:
 Output range: 0–300 Hz
Output Frequency of Motor 1（base frequency and motor rated frequency）

Output Frequency of Motor 2（base frequency and motor rated frequency）
Default: 60.00 / 50.00
 Set the value according to the motor’s rated frequency from the motor’s nameplate. If the motor’s
rated frequency is 60 Hz, set the value to 60 Hz. If the motor’s rated frequency is 50 Hz, set the
value to 50 Hz.
Output Voltage of Motor 1（base frequency and motor rated frequency）

Output Voltage of Motor 2（base frequency and motor rated frequency）
Default:
200.0 / 400.0 / 575.0 / 660.0
Settings 230V series: 0.0–255.0 V
460V series: 0.0–510.0 V
575V series: 0.0–637.0 V
690V series: 0.0–765.0 V
 Set the value according to the motor’s rated voltage from the motor’s nameplate. If the motor’s
rated voltage is 220 V, set the value to 220.0 V. If the motor’s rated voltage is 200 V, set the value
to 200.0 V.
 There are a wide variety of motors, but the power system for each country is different. The
convenient and economical way to solve this problem is to use an AC motor drive, which can deal
with different voltages and frequencies, while supporting the original characteristics and life of the
motor.
Mid-point Frequency 1 of Motor 1

Default: 3.00
12.1-01-1
 Mid-point Voltage 1 of Motor 1

Default:
11.0 / 22.0 / 0.0 / 0.0
460V series: 0.0–480.0 V
575V series: 0.0–637.0 V
690V series: 0.0–720.0 V
Default: 3.00
Default:
11.0 / 22.0 / 0.0 / 0.0
460V series: 0.0–480.0 V
575V series: 0.0–637.0 V
690V series: 0.0–720.0 V
Default: 1.50
Default:
5.0 / 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.0
460V series: 0.0–480.0 V
575V series: 0.0–637.0 V
690V series: 0.0–720.0 V
Default: 1.50
Default:
5.0 / 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.0
460V series: 0.0–480.0 V
575V series: 0.0–637.0 V
690V series: 0.0–720.0 V
Min. Output Frequency of Motor 1

Default: 0.50
12.1-01-2
 Min. Output Voltage of Motor 1

Default:
1.0 / 2.0 / 0.0 / 0.0
460V series: 0.0–480.0 V
575V series: 0.0–637.0 V
690V series: 0.0–720.0 V
Min. Output Frequency of Motor 2
Default: 0.50
 Min. Output Voltage of Motor 2
Default:
1.0 / 2.0 / 0.0 / 0.0
460V series: 0.0–480.0 V
575V series: 0.0–637.0 V
690V series: 0.0–720.0 V
 The V/F curve setting is usually set by the motor’s allowable loading characteristics. If the loading
characteristics exceeds the loading limit of the motor, you must pay more attention to the heat
dissipation, dynamic balance, and bearing lubrication of the motor.
 If the voltage is too high when the motor is at low frequencies, it may cause motor damage,
overheating, and may trigger stalling or over-current protection. To prevent motor damage or
motor fault, be careful when you set the voltage.
 Pr. 01-35 to Pr. 01-42 is the V/F curve for the motor 2. When multi-function input terminals Pr.
02-01–02-08 and Pr. 02-26–Pr. 02-31 are set to 14 and enabled, the AC motor drive will act as
the 2nd V/F curve.
 The diagram below shows the V/F curve for motor 1. You can also find the V/F curve for motor 2
from the same diagram.
12.1-01-3
Common settings for the V/F curve:

(1) General purpose
(2) For fan and hydraulic machinery
(3) High starting torque
Start-Up Frequency
Default: 0.50
 When the starting frequency is higher than the minimum output frequency, the drives’ output is
from the starting frequency to the setting frequency. Refer to the following diagram for details.
Fcmd: frequency command
Fstart: start-up frequency (Pr. 01-09)
fstart: actual start-up frequency of drive
Fmin: 4th output frequency setting (Pr. 01-07/ Pr. 01-41)
Flow: output frequency lower limit (Pr. 01-11)
 When Fcmd > Fmin and Fcmd < Fstart:
If Flow < Fcmd, drive runs directly by Fcmd.
If Flow ≥ Fcmd, drive runs by Fcmd, then rises to Flow according to acceleration time.
 The output frequency goes directly to 0 when decelerating to Fmin.
12.1-01-4
 Output Frequency Upper Limit

Default: 599.00
 Output Frequency Lower Limit
Default: 0.00
 Use the upper and lower limit output frequency settings to limit the actual output frequency. If the
frequency setting is higher than the upper limit (Pr. 01-10), the drive uses the upper limit
frequency. If output frequency is lower than lower limit (Pr. 01-11) and frequency setting is higher
than minimum frequency (Pr. 01-07), the drive uses the lower limit frequency. Set the upper limit
frequency > lower limit frequency (Pr.01-10 setting value must be > Pr.01-11 setting value).
 The upper output frequency limits the maximum output frequency of the drive. If the frequency
setting is higher than Pr.01-10, the Pr. 01-10 setting limits the output frequency.
 When the drive starts the slip compensation function (Pr.07-27) or PID feedback control, the drive
output frequency may exceed frequency command but is still limited by this setting.
12.1-01-5
 Related parameters: Pr.01-00 Maximum Operation Frequency, and Pr.01-11 Output Frequency
Lower Limit
 The lower output frequency limits the minimum output frequency of the drive. When the drive
frequency command or feedback control frequency is lower than this setting, the lower limit of the
frequency limits the drive output frequency.
 When the drive starts, it operates from the minimum output frequency (Pr. 01-07) and accelerates
to the setting frequency. It is not limited by the lower output frequency settings.
 Use the output frequency upper and lower limit settings to prevent operator misuse, overheating
caused by operating at a too low frequency, or damage caused by excessive speed.
 If the output frequency upper limit setting is 50Hz and the frequency setting is 60Hz, the
maximum output frequency is 50 Hz.
 If the output frequency lower limit setting is 10Hz and the minimum operation frequency setting
(Pr. 01-07) is 1.5 Hz, the drive operates at 10Hz when the frequency command is higher than Pr.
01-07 and less than 10 Hz. If the frequency command is less than Pr. 01-07, the drive stays in
ready status with no output.
 If the frequency output upper limit is 60Hz and the frequency setting is also 60Hz, only the
frequency command is limited in 60 Hz. The actual frequency output may exceed 60 Hz if the
drive starts the slip compensation function.
 Acceleration Time 1
 Deceleration Time 1
 JOG Acceleration Time
12.1-01-6
 JOG Deceleration Time

Default: 10.00
The default of motor drive with 30HP
and above: 60.00 / 60.0
Settings Pr.01-45=0: 0.00–600.00 seconds
Pr.01-45=1: 0.00–6000.0 seconds
 Use the acceleration time to determine the time required for the AC motor drive to accelerate
from 0.00Hz to maximum output frequency (Pr. 01-00).
 The acceleration and deceleration time are invalid when using Pr. 01-44 Auto-acceleration and
Auto-deceleration Setting.
 Select the acceleration and deceleration time 1, 2, 3, and 4 with the multi-function input terminals
settings. The defaults are acceleration and deceleration time 1.
 With the enabled torque limits and stall prevention functions, the actual acceleration and
deceleration time are longer than the above action time.
 Note that setting the acceleration time too short may trigger the protection function (Pr. 06-03
Over-current Stall Prevention during Acceleration or Pr. 06-01 Over-voltage Stall Prevention).
 Note that setting the acceleration time too short may cause motor damage or trigger drive
protection due to over-current during acceleration.
 Note that setting the deceleration time too short may cause motor damage or trigger drive
protection due to over-current during deceleration or over-voltage.
 Use suitable brake resistor (refer to Chapter 07 Optional Accessories) to decelerate in a short
time and prevent over-voltage.
 When you enable Pr. 01-24–Pr.01-27, the actual acceleration and deceleration time are longer
than the setting.
 JOG Frequency
Default: 6.00
 You can use both the external terminal JOG and F1 key on the optional keypad KPC-CC01 to set
the JOG function. When the JOG command is ON, the AC motor drive accelerates from 0 Hz to
the JOG frequency (Pr. 01-22). When the JOG command is OFF, the AC motor drive decelerates
from the JOG frequency to stop. The JOG acceleration and deceleration time (Pr. 01-20, Pr.
01-21) are the time to accelerate from 0.00 Hz to JOG frequency (Pr. 01-22).
 You cannot execute the JOG command when the AC motor drive is running. When the JOG
command is executing, other operation commands are invalid.
12.1-01-7
 First / Fourth Acceleration / Deceleration Frequency

Default: 0.00
 This function does not require the external terminal switching function; it switches the
acceleration and deceleration time automatically by the Pr.01-23 setting. If you set the external
terminal, it is based on the external terminal first, and not on Pr.01-23.
 When using this function, set the S-curve acceleration time to 0 if the fourth acceleration time is
set too short.
As the usage of Pr. 01-23, for instance, under Pr. 01-00=80 Hz and Pr. 01-23=40 Hz:
a. If Pr. 01-02=10s, Pr. 01-18=6s, then the 0–40 Hz acceleration time is 3s and 40–80 Hz
acceleration time is 5s.
b. If Pr. 01-13=8s, Pr. 01-19=2s, then 80–40 Hz deceleration time is 4s and 40–0 Hz
deceleration time is 1s.
 S-curve Acceleration Begin Time 1

 S-curve Acceleration Arrival Time 2
 S-curve Deceleration Begin Time 1
 S-curve Deceleration Arrival Time 2
Default: 0.20
Settings Pr.01-45=0: 0.00–25.00 seconds
Pr.01-45=1: 0.00–250.0 seconds
 It Sets a slow start when the drive begins to accelerate at the start. The acceleration and
deceleration curve adjust the S-curve acceleration and deceleration according to the parameter
value. When you enable this function, the drive has a different acceleration and deceleration
curve based on the acceleration and deceleration time.
 The S-curve function is disabled when you set the acceleration and deceleration time to 0.
 When Pr. 01-12, Pr. 01-14, Pr. 01-16, Pr. 01-18  Pr. 01-24 and Pr. 01-25,
the actual acceleration time = Pr. 01-12, Pr. 01-14, Pr. 01-16, Pr. 01-18 + (Pr. 01-24 + Pr. 01-25)/2
 When Pr. 01-13, Pr. 01-15, Pr. 01-17, Pr. 01-19  Pr. 01-26 and Pr. 01-27,
the actual deceleration time = Pr. 01-13, Pr. 01-15, Pr. 01-17, Pr. 01-19 + (Pr. 01-26 + Pr. 01-27)/2
Frequency
01-25 01-26
Time
01-24 01-27
12.1-01-8
Skip Frequency 1 (upper limit)

Skip Frequency 1 (lower limit)
Default: 0.00
Settings 0.00~599.00Hz
 Set the AC motor drive’s skip frequency. The drive’s frequency setting skips these frequency
ranges. However, the frequency output is continuous. There are no limits for these six parameters
and you can combine them. Pr.01-28 does not need to be greater than Pr.01-29; Pr.01-30 does
not need to be greater than Pr.01-31; Pr.01-32 does not need to be greater than Pr.01-33.
Pr.01-28–01-33 can be set as required. There is no size distinction among these six parameters.
 These parameters set the skip frequency ranges for the AC motor drive. You can use this function
to avoid frequencies that cause mechanical resonance. The skip frequencies are useful when a
motor has resonance vibration at a specific frequency bandwidth. Skipping this frequency avoids
the vibration. There are three frequency skip zones available.
 You can set the Frequency command (F) within the range of skip frequencies. Then the output
frequency (H) is limited to the lower limit of skip frequency ranges.
 When accelerating and decelerating, the output frequency still passes the skip frequency ranges.
Zero-speed Mode
Default: 0
Settings 0: Waiting for output
1: Zero-speed operation
2: Minimum frequency (Refer to Pr. 01-07, Pr. 01-41)
 When the frequency command of drive is less than Fmin (Pr. 01-07 or Pr. 01-41), the drive
operates according to the setting value.
 0: the AC motor drive is in waiting mode without voltage output from terminals U, V, W.
 1: the drive executes the DC brake by Vmin (Pr. 01-08 and Pr. 01-42) in V/F, FOC Sensorless,
and SVC modes. And it executes zero-speed operation in VFPG and FOCPG mode.
 2: the AC motor drive runs using Fmin (Pr. 01-07, Pr. 01-41) and Vmin (Pr. 01-08, Pr. 01-42) in
V/F, VFPG, SVC, FOC Sensorless and FOCPG modes.
12.1-01-9
 In V/F, VFPG, SVC and FOC Sensorless modes
 In FOCPG mode, when Pr. 01-34 is set to 2, the AC motor drive operates according to the setting.
V/F Curve Selection

Default: 0
Settings 0: V/F curve determined by Pr. 01-00–01-08
1: 1.5th V/F curve
2: 2nd V/F curve
 When setting to 0, refer to Pr. 01-01–01-08 for the motor 1 V/F curve. For motor 2, refer to
Pr. 01-35–01-42.
 When setting to 1 or 2, the second and third voltage frequency settings are invalid.
 If the load on the motor is a variable torque load (torque is in direct proportion to rotating speed,
such as the load of a fan or a pump), the load torque is low at low rotating speed. Decreasing the
input voltage to make the magnetic field of the input current smaller and reduce flux loss and iron
loss for the motor to increase efficiency.
 When you set the V/F curve to high power, it has lower torque at low frequency, and the drive is
not suitable for rapid acceleration and deceleration. Do NOT use this parameter for rapid
acceleration and deceleration.
12.1-01-10
 Auto-acceleration and Auto-deceleration Setting

Default: 0
Settings 0: Linear acceleration and linear deceleration
1: Auto-acceleration and linear deceleration
2: Linear acceleration and auto-deceleration
3: Auto-acceleration and auto-deceleration
4: Stall prevention by auto-acceleration and auto-deceleration (limited by Pr.
01-12 to Pr. 01-21)
 0 (linear acceleration and linear deceleration): the drive accelerates and decelerates according to
the setting for Pr. 01-12–01-19.
 1 or 2 (auto/linear acceleration and auto/linear deceleration): the drive reduces the mechanical
vibration and prevents the complicated auto-tuning processes. It does not stall during
acceleration and has no need for a brake resistor. It can also improve operation efficiency and
save energy.
 3 (auto-acceleration and deceleration–decelerate by actual load): the drive auto-detects the load
torque and accelerates from the fastest acceleration time and smoothest start current to the
setting frequency. When decelerating, the drive auto-detects the load re-generation and stops the
motor smoothly with the fastest deceleration time.
 4 (stall prevention by auto-acceleration and deceleration–refer to acceleration and deceleration
time): if the acceleration and deceleration is within a reasonable range, the drive accelerates and
decelerates according to Pr.01-12–01-19. If the acceleration and deceleration time is too short,
the actual acceleration and deceleration time are greater than the acceleration and deceleration
time settings.
12.1-01-11
Time Unit for Acceleration / Deceleration and S Curve

Default: 0
Settings 0: Unit 0.01 sec.
1: Unit 0.1 sec.
 CANopen Quick Stop Time
Default: 1.00
Settings Pr. 01-45=0: 0.00–600.00 sec.
Pr. 01-45=1: 0.0–6000.0 sec.
 Use this to set the time to decelerate from the maximum operation frequency (Pr. 01-00) to
0.00Hz by CANopen control.
 Regenerative Energy Restriction Control Method

Default: 0
Settings 0: Disable
1: Over voltage energy restriction
2: Traction energy control (TEC)
 Pr.01-49=0: the drive decelerates or stops based on original setting of deceleration.
 Pr.01-49=1: when decelerating, the motor drive is controlled based on Pr. 06-01 setting and the
DC BUS regenerative voltage. When the DC BUS voltage reaches Pr. 06-01 * 95%, the controller
is activated. When Pr. 06-01=0, the drive is controlled referring to the working voltage and DC
BUS regenerative voltage. The drive decelerates according to the setting of deceleration time,
and the actual maximum deceleration time is not less than the deceleration time setting.
 The actual deceleration time of the motor is greater than the deceleration time setting due to the
over voltage stall prevention action.
 When Pr.01-49=2, it can auto-tuning the output frequency and output voltage based on the
capability of the drive, increase consumption of the DC BUS energy, so the actual deceleration
time meets the parameter setting as possible as it could. When the application cannot reach the
expected deceleration time and therefore cause over-voltage error, this setting will be suggested
to use.
12.1-01-12
02 Digital Input/Output Parameter  This parameter can be set during operation.
Two-wire / Three-wire Operation Control

Default: 0
Settings 0: Two-wire mode 1, power on for operation control
1: Two -wire mode 2, power on for operation control
2: Three-wire, power on for operation control
 This parameter sets the configuration of the terminals (Pr.00-21=1 or Pr.00-31=1) which control
the operation. There are three different control modes listed in the following table.
Pr.02-00 Control Circuits of the External Terminal
Settings: 0
2-wire mode 1
FWD/STOP
REV/STOP
Settings: 1
2-wire mode 2
RUN/STOP
REV/FWD
Settings: 2
3-wire operation control
Multi-function Input Command 1 (MI1)

Default: 1
Default: 2
Default: 3
Default: 4
Input terminal of I/O extension card (MI10)
12.1-02-1

Default: 0
Settings
0: No function
1: Multi-step speed command 1/ multi-step position command 1
5: Reset
6: JOG command (By KPC-CC01 or external control)
7: Acceleration / deceleration speed inhibit
8: The 1st, 2nd acceleration / deceleration time selection
9: The 3rd, 4th acceleration / deceleration time selection
10: EF Input (Pr. 07-20)
11: Base Block (B.B) input from external
12: Output stop
13: Cancel the setting of auto-acceleration / auto-deceleration time
14: Switch between motor 1 and motor 2
15: Rotating speed command from AVI
16: Rotating speed command from ACI
17: Rotating speed command from AUI
18: Forced to stop (Pr. 07-20)
19: Digital up command
20: Digital down command
21: PID function disabled
22: Clear the counter
23: Input the counter value (MI6)
24: FWD JOG command
25: REV JOG command
26: TQC / FOC mode selection
27: ASR1/ ASR2 selection
29: Signal confirmation for Y-connection
30: Signal confirmation for -connection
31: High torque bias (Pr. 11-30)
32: Middle torque bias (Pr. 11-31)
33: Low torque bias (Pr. 11-32)
34: Switch between multi-step position and multi-step speed control
35: Enable single-point position control
36: Enable multi-step position learning function (valid at stop)
37: Enable full position control pulse command input
38: Disable write EEPROM function
39: Torque command direction
40: Force coasting to stop
41: HAND switch
42: AUTO switch
43: Enable resolution selection (Pr. 02-48)
46: Homing (ORG)
47: Enable homing function
48: Mechanical gear ratio switch
49: Enable drive
50: Slave dEb action to execute
51: Selection for PLC mode bit0
12.1-02-2
52: Selection for PLC mode bit1

53: Trigger CANopen quick stop
55: Brake release
56: Local / Remote Selection
 This parameter selects the functions for each multi-function terminal.
 The terminals of Pr. 02-26~Pr. 02-31 are set as the corresponded parameters of MI10~MI13
when using with optional card EMC-D42A. Pr. 02-30~Pr. 02-31 are virtual terminals.
 When being used as a virtual terminal, it needs to change the status (0/1: ON/OFF) of bit8~15 of
Pr. 02-12 by digital keypad KPC-CC01 or communication.
 If Pr. 02-00 is set to three-wire operation control, terminal MI1 is for the STOP contact. The
function set previously for this terminal is automatically invalid.
Summary of function settings

Take the normally opened contact (N.O.) for example, ON: contact is closed, OFF: contact is
open
Settings Functions Descriptions
0 No Function
Multi-step speed
1 command 1 / multi-step
position command 1
Multi-step speed
2 command 2 / multi-step You can set 15 steps of speed or 15 positions with the digital
position command 2 status of these 4 terminals. You can use 16-steps of speed if you
Multi-step speed include the master speed when setting as 15 steps of speed
3 command 3 / multi-step (refer to Parameter Group 04 Multi-step Speed Parameters).
position command 3
Multi-step speed
4 command 4/ multi-step
position command 4
5 Reset Use this terminal to reset the drive after clearing a drive fault.
This function is valid when the source of operation command is
external terminals.
Before executing this function, wait for the drive stop
completely. You can execute STOP command via the keypad
after enabling the function through Pr.00-32. Once the external
terminal receives OFF command, the motor stops in the JOG
deceleration time. Refer to Pr. 01-20~Pr. 01-22 for details.
6 JOG Command
12.1-02-3

When you enable this function, the drive stops acceleration or
deceleration immediately. After you disable this function, the AC
motor drive starts to accelerate or decelerate from the inhibit
point.
Acceleration/deceleration
7
Speed Inhibit
The 1st, 2nd acceleration /

8 deceleration time
You can select the acceleration and deceleration time of the drive
selection
with this function, or from the digital status of the terminals; there
The 3rd, 4th acceleration /
are four acceleration and deceleration selections.
9 deceleration time
selection
For external fault input. The drive decelerates according to the
EF Input Pr.07-20 setting, and the keypad shows “EF” (it shows the fault
10
(EF: External Fault) record when an external fault occurs). The drive keeps running
until the fault is cleared (terminal status restored) after RESET.
ON: the output of the drive stops immediately. The motor is in
Base block (B.B.) input
11 free run and the keypad displays the B.B. signal. Refer to
from external
Pr.07-08 for details.
When the switch is ON, output of the drive stops immediately

and the motor is in free run status. The drive is in output waiting
status until the switch is turned to OFF, and then the drive
restarts and runs to the current setting frequency.
Output Stop
12
(Output pause)
Cancel the setting of Set Pr.01-44 to one of the 01–04 setting modes before using this
13 auto-acceleration / function. When this function is enabled, OFF is for auto mode
auto-deceleration time and ON is for linear acceleration / deceleration.
Switch between motor 1 When the contact of this function is ON: use motor 2 parameters.
14
and motor 2 OFF: use motor 1 parameters.
ON: force the source of the frequency to be AVI. If the rotating
Rotating speed
15 speed commands are set to AVI, ACI and AUI at the same time,
command form AVI
the priority is AVI > ACI > AUI.
12.1-02-4

ON: force the source of the frequency to be ACI. If the rotating
Rotating speed
16 speed commands are set to AVI, ACI and AVI at the same time,
command form ACI
the priority is AVI > ACI.> AUI
ON: force the source of the frequency to be AUI. If the rotating
Rotating speed
17 speed commands are set to AVI, ACI and AVI at the same time,
command form AUI
the priority is AVI > ACI.> AUI
Forced to Stop
18 ON: the drive ramps to stop according to the Pr.07-20 setting.
(Pr. 07-20)
ON: the frequency of the drive increases or decreases by one
19 Digital up command unit. If this function remains ON continuously, the frequency
increases or decreases according to Pr.02-09 / Pr.02-10.
The Frequency command returns to zero when the drive stops,
20 Digital down command and the displayed frequency is 0.00 Hz. If you select Pr.11-00, bit
7 = 1, the frequency is not saved.
21 PID function disabled ON: the PID function is disabled.
ON: the current counter value is cleared and displays 0. The
22 Clear the counter
drive counts up when this function is disabled.
Input the counter value On: the counter value increases by 1. Use the function with
23
(MI6) Pr.02-19.
This function is valid when the source of the operation command
is external terminal. ON: the drive executes forward JOG. When
24 FWD JOG command executing the JOG command in torque mode, the drive
automatically switches to speed mode. The drive returns to
torque mode after the JOG command is complete.
This function is valid when the source of the operation command
is external terminal. ON: the drive executes reverse JOG. When
25 REV JOG command executing the JOG command in torque mode, the drive
automatically switches to speed mode. The drive returns to
torque mode after the JOG command is complete.
ON: TQC mode.
OFF: FOC mode.
TQC / FOC mode

26
selection
ON: the speed is adjusted by the ASR 2 setting. OFF: the speed
27 ASR1/ ASR2 selection
is adjusted by the ASR 1 setting. Refer to Pr.11-02 for details.
12.1-02-5

ON: the output of the drive stops immediately, displays “EF1” on
the keypad, and the motor is in free run status. The drive keeps
running until the fault is cleared after you press RESET on the
keypad (EF: External Fault).
28 Emergency stop (EF1)
Signal confirmation for When the control mode is V/F, ON: the drive operates by the first
29
Y-connection V/F.
Signal confirmation for When the control mode is V/F, ON: the drive operates by the
30
-connection second V/F.
31 High torque bias
32 Middle torque bias Refer to Pr. 11-30~Pr. 11-32 for details.
33 Low torque bias
ON: the corresponding 15-step speed for the multi-function
inputs 1–4 are 15 positions. Refer to Pr.04-16–Pr.04-44.
Switch between
34 multi-step position and
multi-step speed control
12.1-02-6

ON: the AC motor drive executes internal single-point position
control according to the setting for Pr.10-19. This function is
valid in FOCPG mode only.
Enable single-point
35
position control
ON/OFF: the drive uses the multi-function inputs 1–4 ON/OFF

status to find the corresponding multi-step positions and writes
the current motor position into the corresponding multi-step
position.
Enable multi-step
36 position learning function
(valid at stop)
12.1-02-7

When Pr.00-20 is set to 4 or 5, ON: the input pulse of the PG
card is the position command. When using this function, set
Pr.11-25 to 0.
Example: refer to the following diagram when using this function
with MIx=35 returning to homing position.
Enable full position

37 control pulse command
input
Disable write EEPROM

function ON: writing to EEPROM is disabled. Changed parameters are
38
(Parameters memory not saved after power off.
disable)
Torque command For torque control (Pr.00-10=2), when the torque command is
39
direction AVI or ACI, ON: negative torque.
40 Force coasting to stop ON: during operation, the drive free runs to stop.
1. When the MI terminal switches to OFF, it executes a STOP

command. Therefore, if the MI terminal switches to OFF
during operation, the drive stops.
41 HAND switch
2. Use the optional keypad KPC-CC01 to switch between
HAND and AUTO. The drive stops first, and then switches to
HAND or AUTO status.
3. The optional digital keypad KPC-CC01 displays the current
status of the drive (HAND / OFF / AUTO).
bit1 bit0
42 AUTO switch OFF 0 0
AUTO 0 1
HAND 1 0
OFF 1 1
Enable resolution
43 Refer to Pr. 02-48 for details.
selection
Signal input for reverse direction limit switch (NL). ON: the drive
uses the settings in Pr.00-40, 00-41, 00-42 to execute homing in
Reverse direction
44 a reverse direction (counter-clockwise).
homing (NL)
Note: NL means the input terminal detection is negative-edge
triggered or is regarded as N.O. (Normally Open).
12.1-02-8

Signal input for forward direction limit switch (PL). ON: the drive
uses the settings in Pr.00-40, 00-41, 00-42 to execute homing in
Forward direction homing
45 a forward direction (clockwise).
(PL)
Note: PL means input terminal detection is positive-edge
triggered or is regarded as N.C. (Normally Closed)
ORG point input. ON: the drive uses the setting in Pr.00-40,
46 Homing (ORG)
00-41, 00-42 to execute homing.
Pr.00-10=3 (homing mode), if the external terminal MIx=47 is
47 Enable homing function OFF, the drive ignores the HOME command and executes Point-
to-Point position control.
Mechanical gear ratio ON: the mechanical gear ratio switches to the second group.
48
switch Refer to Pr.10-04–Pr.10-07.
When the drive is enabled, the RUN command is valid.
When the drive is disabled, the RUN command is invalid.
49 Enable drive
When the drive is operating, the motor coasts to stop.
This function varies with MOx=45.
Slave dEb action to Slave receives dEb message from Master, avoids low voltage of
50
execute DC BUS, and coast to stop because of Lv error.
Selection for PLC mode PLC status bit1 bit0
51
bit0 Disable PLC function (PLC 0) 0 0
Trigger PLC to operation (PLC 1) 0 1
Selection for PLC mode Trigger PLC to stop (PLC 2) 1 0
52
bit1 No function 1 1
When this function is enabled under CANopen control, it will
Trigger CANopen quick
53 change to quick stop. Refer to Chapter 15 CANopen overview for
stop
more details.
This parameter needs to be used with Pr. 02-56. The main
purpose is to make sure if mechanical brake works or not after
triggering brake release command.
55 Brake release
If the action is right, mechanical brake will give signal to MI
terminal.
Please check time sequence chart for reference.
Use Pr. 00-29 to select for LOCAL/ REMOTE mode (refer to Pr.
00-29).
When Pr. 00-29 is not set to 0, on the digital keypad KPC-CC01 it
will display LOC/ REM status. (It will display on the KPC-CC01 if
56 Local / Remote Selection the firmware version is above version 1.021).
bit0
REM 0
LOC 1
 UP/DOWN Key Mode

Default: 0
Settings 0: UP / DOWN by acceleration / deceleration time
1: UP / DOWN constant speed (Pr. 02-10)
 Constant speed. The Accel. / Decel. Speed of the UP/ DOWN Key
Default: 0.001
Settings 0.001~1.000Hz/ms
 Use when the multi-function input terminals are set to 19, 20 (UP / DOWN command). The
frequency increases or decreases according to Pr.02-09 and Pr.02-10.
12.1-02-9
 When Pr.11-00 bit 7=1, the frequency is not saved. The Frequency command returns to zero
when the drive stops, and the displayed frequency is 0.00 Hz. At this time, the increasing or
decreasing frequency command (F) by using the UP or DOWN key is valid only when the drive is
running.
 When Pr.02-09 is set to 0: the increasing or decreasing frequency command (F) operates
according to the setting for acceleration or deceleration time (refer to Pr.01-12–01-19).
 When Pr.02-09 is set to 1: the increasing / decreasing frequency command (F) operates
according to the setting of Pr.02-10 (0.01–1.00 Hz/ms).
 Digital Input Response Time

Default: 0.005
Settings 0.000~30.000 sec.
 Use this parameter to set the response time of the digital input terminals FWD, REV, and
MI1–MI8.
 This function is to delay and confirm the digital input terminal signal. The time for delay is also the
time for confirmation. The confirmation prevents interference that could cause error in the input to
the digital terminals. But in the meanwhile, it delays the response time though confirmation
improves accuracy.
 When using MI8 as encoder pulse feedback input, this parameter will not be referred.
 Digital Input Operation Setting

Default: 0000h
Settings 0000h~FFFFh (0: N.O. ; 1: N.C.)
 The setting of this parameter is in hexadecimal.
 This parameter sets the status of the multi-function input signal (0: normally open; 1: normally
closed) and it is not affected by the status of SINK / SOURCE.
 bit2–bit15 correspond to MI1–MI14
12.1-02-10
 The default for bit 0 (MI1) is FWD terminal, and the default for bit 1 (MI2) is REV terminal. You
cannot use this parameter to change the input mode when Pr.02-00 ≠ 0.
 You can change the terminal ON / OFF status through communications.
For example: MI1 is set to 1 (multi-step speed command 1) and MI2 is set to 2 (multi-step speed
command 2). Then the forward + second step speed command = 10012 = 910 .
As long as Pr.02-12 = 9 is set through communications, there is no need to wire any
multi-function terminal to run forward with the second step speed.
bit15 bit14 bit13 bit12 bit11 bit10 bit9 bit8 bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
MI14 MI13 MI12 MI11 MI10 MI9 MI8 MI7 MI6 MI5 MI4 MI3 MI2 MI1
 Use Pr.11-42 bit 1 to select whether the FWD / REV terminal is controlled by Pr.02-12 bit 0 and
bit 1.
 Multi-function Output 1 (Relay1)
Default: 11
Default: 1
 Multi-function Output 3 (MO1)
Default: 66
 Output terminal of I/O extension card (MO10) or (RA10)
 Output terminal of I/O extension card (MO11) or (RA11)
 Output terminal of I/O extension card (RA12)
 Output terminal of I/O extension card (MO16 virtual terminal)
Default: 0
Settings
0: No function
1: Indication during RUN
2: Operation speed reached
3: Desired frequency reached 1 (Pr. 02-22)
4: Desired frequency reached 2 (Pr. 02-24)
5: Zero speed (Frequency command)
6: zero speed including STOP (Frequency command)
7: Over-torque 1 (Pr. 06-06–06-08)
8: Over-torque 2 (Pr. 06-09–06-11)
9: Drive is ready
12.1-02-11
10: Low voltage warning (Lv) (Pr. 06-00)

11: Malfunction indication
12: Mechanical brake release (Pr. 02-32)
13: Over-heat warning (Pr. 06-15)
14: Software brake signal indication (Pr. 07-00)
15: PID feedback error (Pr.08-13, 08-14)
17: Count value reached, does not return to 0 (Pr. 02-20)
18: Count value reached, returns to 0 (Pr. 02-19)
19: External interrupt B.B. input (Base Block)
20: Warning output
21: Over-voltage
22: Over-current stall prevention
23: Over-voltage stall prevention
24: Operation mode
25: Forward command
26: Reverse command
27: Output when current ≥ Pr. 02-33
28: Output when current < Pr. 02-33
29: Output when frequency ≥ Pr. 02-34
30: Output when frequency < Pr. 02-34
31: Y-connection for the motor coil
32: △ -connection for the motor coil
33: Zero speed (actual output frequency)
34: Zero speed including stop (actual output frequency)
39: Position reached (Pr. 10-19)
40: Speed reached (including Stop)
41: Multi-position reached
42: Crane function
43: Actual motor speed higher than Pr. 02-47
44: Low current output (use with Pr. 06-71~Pr. 06-73)
45: UVW output electromagnetic valve switch
46: Master dEb output
47: Closed brake output
49: Homing action complete output
50: Output control for CANopen
51: Analog output control for RS-485 (InnerCOM / MODBUS)
52: Output control for communication cards
12.1-02-12
65: Output for CANopen and RS-485

66: SO output logic A
67: Analog input signal level reached
68: SO output logic B
70: FAN warning detection output
 Use this parameter to set the function of the multi-function terminals.
 Pr. 02-36~Pr. 02-41 requires additional extension cards to display the parameters, the choices of
optional cards are EMC-D42A and EMC-R6AA.
 The optional card EMC-D42A provides 2 output terminals and can be used with Pr. 02-36~02-37.
 The optional card EMC-R6AA provides 6 output terminals and can be used with Pr. 02-36~02-41.
Summary of function settings
Take the normally open contact (N.O.) for example, ON: contact is closed, OFF: contact is open
0 No Function Output terminal with no function
1 Indication during RUN Active when the drive is not in STOP.
Operation speed Active when output frequency of the drive reaches the setting
2
reached frequency.
Desired Frequency
3 Active when the desired frequency (Pr. 02-22) is reached
reached 1 (Pr. 02-22)
Desired Frequency
4 Active when the desired frequency (Pr. 02-24) is reached.
reached 2 (Pr. 02-24)
Zero Speed (frequency Active when frequency command =0. (the drive must be at RUN
5
command) status)
zero speed including
6 STOP (Frequency Active when frequency command =0 or stopped.
command)
Active when the drive detects over-torque. Pr.06-07 sets the
over-torque detection level (motor 1), and Pr.06-08 sets the
7 Over-torque 1
over-torque detection time (motor 1).
Refer to Pr.06-06–06-08.
Active when the drive detects over-torque. Pr.06-10 sets the
over-torque detection level (motor 2), and Pr.06-11 sets the
8 Over-torque 2
over-torque detection time (motor 2).
Refer to Pr.06-09–06-11.
9 Drive is Ready Active when the drive is ON and with no error detected.
Active when the DC BUS voltage is too low. (refer to Pr. 06-00 low
10 Low voltage warning (Lv)
voltage level)
11 Malfunction Indication Active when fault occurs (except Lv stop).
When drive runs after Pr. 02-32, it will be ON. This function should
Mechanical Brake
12 be used with DC brake and it is recommended to use contact “b”
Release (Pr. 02-32)
(N.C.).
Active when IGBT or heat sink overheats; to prevent the drive
13 Over-heat warning
from shutting down due to over-heating (refer to Pr.06-15).
Software Brake Signal
14 Active when the soft brake function is ON. (refer to Pr. 07-00)
Indication
15 PID Feedback Error Active when the PID feedback signal error is detected.
16 Slip Error (oSL) Active when the slip error is detected.
When the drive executes external counter, this contact is active if
Count value reached, the count value is equal to the setting value for Pr.02-20.
17 does not return to 0 (Pr.
02-20) This contact is not active when the setting value for Pr.02-20 >
Pr.02-19.
12.1-02-13

Count value reached, When the drive executes the external counter, this contact is
18
returns to 0 (Pr. 02-19) active if the count value is equal to the setting value for Pr.02-19.
External interrupt B.B. Active when external interrupt (B.B.) stop output occurs in the
19
input (Base Block) drive.
20 Warning Output Active when the warning is detected.
21 Over-voltage Active when the over-voltage is detected.
Over-current Stall
22 Active when the over-current stall prevention is detected.
Prevention
Over-voltage Stall
23 Active when the over-voltage stall prevention is detected.
prevention
Active when the operation command is controlled by external
24 Operation Mode
terminal. (Pr. 00-21≠0)
25 Forward Command Active when the operation direction is forward.
26 Reverse Command Active when the operation direction is reverse.
Output when Current ≥
27 Active when current is ≥ Pr. 02-33.
Pr. 02-33
Output when Current <
28 Active when current is < Pr. 02-33
Pr. 02-33
Output when frequency
29 Active when frequency is ≥ Pr. 02-34.
≥ Pr. 02-34
Output when Frequency
30 Active when frequency is < Pr. 02-34.
< Pr. 02-34
Y-connection for the Active when Pr. 05-24=1, when frequency output is lower than Pr.
31
Motor Coil 05-23 minus 2Hz, and lasts longer than Pr. 05-25.
△ -connection for the Active when Pr. 05-24=1, when frequency output is higher than Pr.
32
Motor Coil 05-23 plus 2Hz, and lasts longer than Pr. 05-25.
Zero Speed (actual Active when the actual output frequency is 0. (the drive is in RUN
33
output frequency) mode)
Zero speed including
34 stop (actual output Active when the actual output frequency is 0 or stopped.
frequency)
Error Output Selection 1
35 Active when Pr. 06-23 is ON.
(Pr. 06-23)
(Pr. 06-24)
(Pr. 06-25)
(Pr. 06-26)
Position reached
39 Active when the PG position control point reaches Pr. 10-19.
(Pr. 10-19)
Speed reached Active when the output frequency reaches frequency setting or
40
(including speed) stop.
12.1-02-14
User can set any three multi-function input terminals to 41. The
current position action status of these three terminals will be
outputted. Example: if setting Pr. 02-36~02-38 to 41 and only the
multi-position of the second point has been done. Then, the
current status is RA (ON), RA (OFF) and MO1 (OFF). In this way,
their status is 010. bit0 is RA and so on.
MO2 MO1 RY2 RY1

Pr.02-17=41 Pr.02-16=41 Pr.02-14=41 Pr.02-13=41
Pr. 04-16 0 0 0 1
Pr. 04-18 0 0 1 0
Pr. 04-20 0 0 1 1
41 Multi-position reached Pr. 04-22 0 1 0 0
Pr. 04-24 0 1 0 1
Pr. 04-26 0 1 1 0
Pr. 04-28 0 1 1 1
Pr. 04-30 1 0 0 0
Pr. 04-32 1 0 0 1
Pr. 04-34 1 0 1 0
Pr. 04-36 1 0 1 1
Pr. 04-38 1 1 0 0
Pr. 04-40 1 1 0 1
Pr. 04-42 1 1 1 0
Pr. 04-44 1 1 1 1
Use this function with Pr. 02-32, Pr. 02-33, Pr. 02-34, Pr. 02-57
and Pr. 02-58.
42 Crane Function
The example of the crane application is in the following for your
reference.
Actual motor speed
43 Active when motor actual speed is higher than Pr. 02-47.
higher than Pr. 02-47
44 Low Current Output Use this function with Pr. 06-71–Pr. 06-73
Use this function with external terminal input = 49 (drive enabled)
and external terminal output = 45 (electromagnetic valve
enabled), and then the electromagnetic valve is ON or OFF
according to the status of the drive.
UVW output
45 electromagnetic valve
switch
12.1-02-15

When dEb rises at the master, MO sends a dEb signal to the
slave. Output the message when the master triggers dEb. This
46 Master dEb output ensures that the slave also triggers dEb. Then slave follows the
deceleration time of the master to stop simultaneously with the
master.
When drive stops, the corresponding multi-function terminal will

be ON if the frequency is less than Pr. 02-34. After it is ON, it will
be OFF when brake delay time exceeds Pr. 02-32.
47 Closed brake output
Homing Action Complete

49 Output when homing action is complete.
output
Control multi-function output terminals through CANopen.
To control RY2, set Pr. 02-14 = 50.
The mapping table of the CANopen DO is below:
Setting of
Physical
related Attribute Corresponding Index
terminal
parameters
RY1 Pr. 02-13 = 50 RW The bit0 at 2026-41
RY2 Pr. 02-14 = 50 RW The bit1 at 2026-41
MO1 Pr. 02-16 = 50 RW The bit3 at 2026-41
MO2 Pr. 02-17 = 50 RW The bit4 at 2026-41
Output control for
50
CANopen MO10 The bit5 at 2026-41
Pr. 02-36 = 50 RW
RY10 The bit5 at 2026-41
MO11 The bit6 at 2026-41
Pr. 02-37 = 50 RW
RY11 The bit6 at 2026-41
RY12 Pr. 02-38 = 50 RW The bit7 at 2026-41
RY13 Pr. 02-39 = 50 RW The bit8 at 2026-41
RY14 Pr. 02-40 = 50 RW The bit9 at 2026-41
RY15 Pr. 02-41 = 50 RW The bit10 at 2026-41
Refer to section 15-3-5 for more information.
12.1-02-16
For RS-485 interface (InnerCOM/ MODBUS) output.

Setting of
Physical Corresponding
related Attribute
terminal Index
parameters
RY1 Pr. 02-13 = 51 RW bit0 at 2640H
RY2 Pr. 02-14 = 51 RW bit1 at 2640H
Analog output control for MO1 Pr. 02-16 = 51 RW bit3 at 2640H
51 RS-485 (InnerCOM / MO2 Pr. 02-17 = 51 RW bit4 at 2640H
MODBUS) MO10 or
Pr. 02-36 = 51 RW
RA10 bit5 at 2640H
MO11 or
Pr. 02-37 = 51 RW
RA11 bit6 at 2640H
RA12 Pr. 02-38 = 51 RW bit7 at 2640H
RA13 Pr. 02-39 = 51 RW bit8 at 2640H
RA14 Pr. 02-40 = 51 RW bit9 at 2640H
RA15 Pr. 02-41 = 51 RW bit10 at 2640H
For communication output of communication cards

(CMC-MOD01, CMC-EIP01, CMC-PN01 and CMC-DN01)
Setting of
Physical Corresponding
related Attribute
terminal Address
parameters
RY1 Pr. 02-13 = 52 RW The bit0 of 2640H
RY2 Pr. 02-14 = 52 RW The bit1 of 2640H
MO1 Pr. 02-16 = 52 RW The bit3 of 2640H
Output control for MO2 Pr. 02-17 = 52 RW The bit4 of 2640H

52
communication cards MO10 or
RA10 Pr. 02-36 = 51 RW The bit5 of 2640H
MO11 or
RA15 Pr. 02-41= 51 RW The bit10 of 2640H
Output for CANopen and

65 To control output of CANopen & RS-485.
RS-485
Status of safety output
Status of drive
66 SO output logic A N.O. (MOx=66) N.C. (MOx=68)
Broken circuit Short circuit
Normal
(Open) (Close)
Short circuit Broken circuit
STO
(Close) (Open)
68 SO output logic B Short circuit Broken circuit
STL1~STL3
(Close) (Open)
The multi-function output terminals operate when the analog input

Analog input signal level level is between the high level and the low level.
67
reached Pr.03-44: Select one of the analog input channels (AVI, ACI) to be
compared.
12.1-02-17

Pr.03-45: The high level for the analog input, default is 50%.
Pr.03-46: The low level for the analog input, default is 10%.
If analog input > Pr.03-45, the multi-function output terminal
operates. If analog input < 03-46, the multi-function output
terminal stops output.
Fan warning detection
70 The terminal works when the internal fan warning activates
output
Example: Crane Application
It is recommended to be used with Dwell function as shown in the following:
 For crane application, when the MO is set to 42, the setting of Pr. 02-34 must be greater than Pr.
02-58; Pr. 02-33 must be greater than Pr. 02-57.
 To directly control drive’s AO/DO and read current AI/DI status via the standard MODBUS, by
adding the Remote IO function, the corresponding index of 26xx is as following:
2600h MI15 MI14 MI13 MI12 MI11 MI10 MI8 MI7 MI6 MI5 MI4 MI3 MI2 MI1 REV FWD
2640h - - - - - MO15 MO14 MO13 MO12 MO11 MO10 MO2 MO1 - RY2 RY1
2660h AVI - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
2661h ACI - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
2662h AUI - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
266Ah AI10 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
266Bh AI11 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
26A0h AFM1 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
26A1h AFM2 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
26AAh AO10 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
26ABh AO11 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
In addition, the AI and DI value can be read directly, while DO and AO must select MODBUS
control under the corresponding parameter function. The related parameter definition is as
following:
12.1-02-18
DO
Terminal Pr. Setting Indexes of MODBUS direct control
RY1 Pr. 02-13 = 51 The bit0 of 2640h
RY2 Pr. 02-14 = 51 The bit1 of 2640h
MO1 Pr. 02-16 = 51 The bit3 of 2640h
MO2 Pr. 02-17 = 51 The bit4 of 2640h
MO10 Pr. 02-36 = 51 The bit5 of 2640h
MO11 Pr. 02-37 = 51 The bit6 of 2640h
MO12 Pr. 02-38 = 51 The bit7 of 2640h
MO13 Pr. 02-39 = 51 The bit8 of 2640h
MO14 Pr. 02-40 = 51 The bit9 of 2640h
MO15 Pr. 02-41 = 51 The bit10 of 2640h
AO
Terminal Pr. Setting Indexes of MODBUS direct control
AFM1 Pr. 03-20=21 The value of 26A0h
AFM2 Pr. 03-23=21 The value of 26A1h
AFM10 Pr. 14-12=21 The value of 26AAh
AFM11 Pr. 14-13=21 The value of 26ABh
 Multi-function Output Setting

Default Setting: 0000h
Settings 0000h~FFFFh (0: N.O. ; 1:N.C.)
 This parameter is in hexadecimal.
 This parameter is set by a bit. If a bit is 1, the corresponding multi-function output acts in an
opposite way.
Example:
If Pr. 02-13=1 and Pr. 02-18=0, Relay 1 is ON when the drive runs and is open when the drive is
stopped.
If Pr. 02-13=1 and Pr. 02-18=1, Relay 1 is open when the drive runs and is closed when the drive
is stopped.
bit setting
MO20 MO19 MO18 MO17 MO16 MO15 MO14 MO13 MO12 MO11 MO10 MO2 MO1 Reserved RY2 RY1
 Terminal Counting Value Reached (returns to 0)

Default Setting: 0
Settings 0~65500
 The counter trigger can be set by the multi-function terminal MI6 (set Pr. 02-06 to 23). Upon
completion of counting, the specified multi-function output terminal will be activated (Pr. 02-13, Pr.
02-14, Pr. 02-36, Pr. 02-37 is set to 18). Pr. 02-19 cannot be set to 0.
 When the display shows c5555, the drive has counted 5,555 times. If display shows c5555, it
means that real counter value is between 55,550 to 55,559.
12.1-02-19
 Preliminary Counting Value Reached (does not return to 0)

Default Setting: 0
Settings 0~65500
 When the counter value counts from 1 and reaches this value, the corresponding multi-function
output terminal will be activated, provided one of Pr. 02-13, Pr. 02-14, Pr. 02-36, Pr. 02-37 set to
17 (Preliminary Count Value Setting). This parameter can be used for the end of the counting to
make the drive runs from the low speed to stop.
 Digital Output Gain（DFM）

Default: 1
Settings 1~166
 It is used to set the signal for the digital output terminals (DFM-DCM) and digital frequency output
(pulse X work period=50%). Output pulse per second = output frequency X Pr. 02-21.
 Desired Frequency Reached 1

Default: 60.00/50.00
 The Width of the Desired Frequency Attained 1
Default: 2.00
 Desired Frequency Reached 2
Default:: 60.00/50.00
 The Width of the Desired Frequency Reached 2

Default: 2.00
 Once output frequency reaches desired frequency and the corresponding multi-function output
terminal is set to 3 or 4 (Pr. 02-13, Pr. 02-14, Pr. 02-36 and Pr. 02-37), this multi-function output
terminal will be ON.
12.1-02-20
H
Fcmd=60Hz
42Hz
02-24=40Hz 40Hz
02-25=2Hz 38Hz
12Hz
02-22=10Hz 10Hz
02-23=2Hz 8Hz
T
02-13,02-14,
=3
02-36,02-37,
02-13,02-14,
02-36,02-37, =4
Brake Delay Time

Default: 0.000
 When the AC motor drive runs after Pr. 02-32 delay time, the corresponding multi-function output
terminal (12: mechanical brake release) will be ON. It has to use this function with DC brake.
12.1-02-21
 If this parameter is used without DC brake, it will be invalid. Refer to the following operation
timing.
 Output Current Level Setting for Multi-function Output Terminals

Default: 0
Settings 0~100%
 When output current is higher or equal to Pr. 02-33, it will activate multi-function output terminal
(Pr. 02-13, Pr. 02-14, Pr. 02-16, and Pr. 02-17 is set to 27).
 When output current is lower or equal to Pr. 02-33, it will activate multi-function output terminal
(Pr. 02-13, Pr. 02-14, Pr. 02-16, and Pr. 02-17 is set to 28).
 Output Boundary for Multi-function Output Terminals

Default: 3.00
Settings 0.00~599.00Hz (Motor speed when using PG)
 When output frequency is higher or equal to Pr. 02-34 (actual output frequency H ≥ Pr. 02-34), it
will activate the multi-function terminal (Pr. 02-13, Pr. 02-14, Pr. 02-16, Pr. 02-17 is set to 29).
 When output frequency is lower or equal to Pr. 02-34 (actual output frequency H < Pr. 02-34), it
will activate the multi-function terminal (Pr. 02-13, Pr. 02-14, Pr. 02-16, Pr. 02-17 is set to 30).
 External Operation Control Selection after Reset and Activate

Default: 0
Settings 0: Disable
1: Drive runs if the run command still exists after reset or re-boots.
Set value as 1:
 Status 1: After the drive is powered on and the external terminal for RUN stays ON, the drive
runs.
 Status 2: After clearing a fault once a fault is detected and the external terminal for RUN stays
ON, you can run the drive by pressing the RESET key.
12.1-02-22
 Motor Zero-speed Level

Default: 0
Settings 0~65535 rpm
 This parameter should be used with the multi-function output terminals (set to 43). It needs to be
used with PG card and motor with encoder feedback.
 Use this parameter to set the level of motor at zero-speed. When the speed is lower than this
setting, the corresponding multi-function output terminal that is set to 43 is ON, as shown below:
 Maximum Frequency of Resolution Switch

Default: 60.00
 Switch delay time of Maximum output frequency
Default: 0.000
Settings 0~65.000 sec.
 Use to improve unstable speed or unstable position due to insufficient analog resolution. Use with
the external terminal (setting to 43). After setting this parameter, you also need to adjust the
analog output resolution of the controller so as to work with the parameter function.
12.1-02-23
Display the Status of Multi-function Input Terminal

Default: Read only
 For Example:
When Pr.02-50 displays 0034h (hex) (that is, the value is 52 (decimal) and 110100 (binary)), it
means that MI1, MI3 and MI4 are ON.
12.1-02-24
Display the status of multi-function output terminal

Default: Read only
 For Example:
When Pr.02-51 displays 000 Bh (hex) (that is, the value is 11 (decimal) and 1011 (binary)), it
means that RY1, RY2, and MO1 are ON.
Display the External Output Terminals Used by PLC

Default: Read only
 Pr.02-52 shows the external multi-function input terminal that used by PLC.
12.1-02-25
 For Example:
When Pr.02-52 displays 0034h (hex) (that is, the value is 52 (decimal) and 110100 (binary)), it
means that MI1, MI3 and MI4 are used by PLC.
Display the External Multi-function Output Terminals Used by PLC

Default: Read only
 Pr. 02-53 shows the external multi-function output terminal that used by PLC.
 For Example:
When Pr.02-53 displays 0003h (hex) (that is, the value is 3 (decimal) and 0011 (binary)), it means
that RY1 and RY2 are used by PLC.
12.1-02-26
Display the Frequency Command Executed by External Terminal

Default: Read only
Settings 0.00~599.00Hz (Read only)
 When you set the source of the Frequency command as the external terminal, if Lv or Fault
occurs, the external terminal Frequency command is saved in this parameter.
Release Brake Check

Default: 0.000 sec.
 The parameter needs to be used with MIx=55. This is to be set for the time difference of
mechanical brake delay time and actual brake operation.
 Multi-function output terminal: Function 42: Brake Current Check Point

Default: 0
Settings 0~100%
 Multi-function output terminal (Function 42) : Brake Frequency Check Point
Default: 0.00
 Pr. 02-32, Pr. 02-33, Pr. 02-34, Pr. 02-57 and Pr. 02-58 can be applied on setting up cranes.
(Choose crane action #42 to set up multi-function output Pr. 02-13, Pr. 02-14, Pr. 02-16 and Pr.
02-17)
 When output current of a drive is higher than the setting of Pr. 02-33 Pivot Point of the Current (≥
Pr. 02-33) and when output frequency is higher than the setting of Pr. 02-34 Pivot Point of the
Frequency (≥ Pr. 02-34), choose #42 to set up Multi-function output Pr. 02-13, Pr. 02-14, Pr.
02-16 and Pr. 02-17 after the delay time set at Pr. 02-32.
 When the Pivot Point of the Current 's setting Pr. 02-57≠0 and when the output current of the
drive is lower than the setting of Pr. 02-57 (< Pr. 02-57), or when the output frequency is lower
than the setting of Pr.02-58 (< Pr. 02-58), then disable the setting #42 of the multi-function
output Pr. 02-13, Pr. 02-14, Pr. 02-16 and Pr. 02-17
12.1-02-27
 When Pr. 02-57 = 0, the output current is lower than the setting of Pr. 02-33 Pivot Point of the
current (< Pr. 02-33) or when output frequency is lower than the setting of Pr. 02-58(< Pr. 02-58),
disable the setting of #42 of the multi-function output Pr. 02-13, Pr. 02-14, Pr. 02-16 and Pr.
02-17.
 For crane application, when MOx=42, the setting of Pr. 02-34 must be greater than Pr. 02-58;
and Pr. 02-33 must be greater than Pr. 02-57.
Frequency Reached Detection Amplitude

Default: 0.00
IO Card Type
Default: Read only
Settings Read only
1: EMC-BPS01 Card
4: EMC-D611A Card
5: EMC-D42A Card
6: EMC-R6AA Card
11: EMC-A22A
DFM Output Selection
Default: 0
Settings 0: Use frequency with speed control as DFM output frequency
1: Use frequency with system accel./decel. as DFM output frequency
Internal/External Multi-function Input Terminals Selection

Default: 0000h
Settings 0000~FFFFh
 This parameter is used to select the terminals MI1~MI15 to be internal terminal or external
terminal. When the MIx has set as internal terminal, then the corresponding external terminal
function will be disabled.
 To activate internal terminals via Pr. 02-75 setting.
 The setting method is to convert binary number to hexadecimal number for input.
12.1-02-28
 For example: if setting MI1, MI3, MI4 to be internal terminals, the setting value should be
bit5x25+bit4x24+bit2x22= 1X25+1X24+1X22= 32+16+4=52 as shown in the following. The 522=32h,
Pr. 02-74=34h.
 Internal Multi-function Output Terminal Selection

Default: 0000h
Settings 0000~FFFFh
 This parameter is used to set the internal terminal action via keypad, communication or PLC.
 For example, if setting MI1, MI3 and MI4 to be ON, Pr.02-75 should be set to
bit5X25+bit4X24+bit2X22= 1X25+1X24+1X22= 32+16+4=522 =34h as shown in the following.
 The Local/Remote of Digital operation panel has the lowest priority.

 When the built-in PLC has use a MIx, the original function of this MIx can still be triggered via
virtual terminal.
 Pr. 02-74 and Pr. 02-75 can both do running change.
 Pr. 02-74 and Pr. 02-75 setting value are both memorized before power off.
 The virtual terminal trigger can still be selected by the setting of Pr. 02-12 Digital Input Operation
Setting (Pr. 02-12=0 N.O. or Pr. 02-12=1 N.C.)
12.1-02-29
03 Analog Input/Output Parameter  This parameter can be set during operation.
 Analog Input Selection (AVI)

Default: 1
 Analog Input Selection (ACI)
Default: 0
 Analog Input Selection (AUI)
Default: 0
Settings
0: No function
1: Frequency command (speed limit under torque control mode)
2: Torque command (torque limit under speed mode)
4: PID target value
13: PID compensation value
 When you use analog input as the PID reference target value, you must set Pr. 00-20 to 2 (analog
input).
Setting method 1: Pr. 03-00–03-02 set 1 as PID reference target input.
Setting method 2: Pr. 03-00–03-02 set 4 as PID reference target input.
If the setting value 1 and setting value 4 exist at the same time, the AVI input has highest priority
to become the PID reference target input value.
 When you use analog input as the PID compensation value, you must set Pr. 08-16 to 1 (source
of PID compensation value is analog input). You can see the compensation value with Pr. 08-17.
 When you use the frequency command or TQC speed limit, the corresponding value for 0–±10V /
4–20mA is 0–maximum output frequency (Pr. 01-00).
 When you use torque command or torque limit, the corresponding value for 0–±10V / 4–20mA is
0 to maximum output torque (Pr. 11-27).
 When you use the torque compensation, the corresponding value for 0–±10V / 4–20mA is 0–the
motor rated torque.
 The analog input AVI / ACI (use with Switch terminal to switch SW2 to 0–10V) supports KTY84.
The AUI does not support this function.
 When you use KTY84, you can only choose either AVI or ACI at the same time. The AVI is prior to
ACI.
12.1-03-1
 When the settings for Pr. 03-00–Pr. 03-02 are the same, the AVI input is selected first.
 Analog Input Bias (AVI)

Default: 0.0
Settings -100.0–100.0%
 Sets the corresponding AVI voltage for the external analog input 0.
 Analog Input Bias (ACI)

Default: 0.0
Settings -100.0–100.0%
 Sets the corresponding ACI voltage for the external analog input 0.
 Analog Voltage Input Bias (AUI)

Default: 0.0
Settings -100.0–100.0%
 Sets the corresponding AUI voltage for the external analog input 0.
 The corresponding external input voltage / current signal and the set frequency is 0–10V
(4–20mA) corresponds to 0–maximum frequency.
 Positive / Negative Bias Mode (AVI)

 Positive / Negative Bias Mode (ACI)
 Positive / Negative Bias Mode (AUI)
Default: 0
Settings 0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal to bias
2: Greater than or equal to bias
3: The absolute value of the bias voltage while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
 In a noisy environment, use negative bias to provide a noise margin. Do NOT use less than 1V to
set the operation frequency.
12.1-03-2
In the diagram below: Black line: Curve with no bias. Gray line: curve with bias
1.
2.
3.
12.1-03-3
4.
5.
6.
12.1-03-4
7.
8.
9.
12.1-03-5
10.
11.
12.
12.1-03-6
13.
14.
15.
12.1-03-7
16.
17.
18.
12.1-03-8
19.
20.
21.
12.1-03-9
22.
23.
24.
12.1-03-10
25.
26.
27.
12.1-03-11
28.
29.
30.
12.1-03-12
31.
32.
33.
12.1-03-13
34.
35.
36.
12.1-03-14
37.
38.
39.
12.1-03-15
40.
 Reverse Setting when Analog Signal Input is Negative Frequency

Default: 0
Settings 0: Negative frequency is not allowed. The digital keypad or external terminal
controls the forward and reverse direction.
1: Negative frequency is allowed. Positive frequency = run in forward
direction; negative frequency = run in reverse direction. The digital keypad
or external terminal control cannot switch the running direction.
 Use Pr.03-10 to enable running in the reverse direction command when a negative frequency
(negative bias and gain) is input to the AVI or ACI analog signal input (except AUI).
 Condition for negative frequency (reverse)
1. Pr. 03-10 = 1
2. Bias mode = Serve bias as the center
3. Corresponded analog input gain < 0 (negative); this makes the input frequency negative.
 In using the additional analog input function (Pr. 03-18 = 1), when analog signal is negative after
the addition, you can set this parameter to allow or not allow the reverse direction. The result after
adding is restricted by the “Condition for negative frequency (reverse)”.
 Analog Input Gain (AVI)

 Analog Input Gain (ACI)
 Analog Positive Input Gain (AUI)
 Analog Negative Input Gain (AUI)
Default: 100.0
Settings -500.0–500.0 %
 Use Pr. 03-03–Pr. 03-14 when the frequency command source is the analog voltage or current
signal.
 Analog Input Filter Time (AVI)

 Analog Input Filter Time (ACI)
 Analog Input Filter Time (AUI)
Default: 0.01
12.1-03-16
 There is often noisy in the analog signal from AVI, ACI and AUI, which affects the stability of the
control. Use these input delays to filter a noisy analog signal.
 When the time constant setting is too large, the control is stable but the control response is slow.
When the time constant setting is too small, the control response is faster but the control may be
unstable. For optimal setting, adjust the setting based on the control stability or the control
response.
 Analog Input Addition Function

Default: 0
Settings 0: Disable (AVI, ACI, AUI)
1: Enable
 When Pr. 03-18 is set to 1:
EX1: Pr. 03-00 = Pr. 03-01=1, Frequency command= AVI+ACI
EX2: Pr. 03-00 = Pr. 03-01 = Pr. 03-02 = 1, Frequency command = AVI+ACI+AUI
EX3: Pr. 03-00 = Pr. 03-02=1, Frequency command = AVI+AUI
EX4: Pr. 03-01 = Pr. 03-02=1, Frequency command = ACI+AUI
 When Pr. 03-18 is set to 0 and the analog input setting is the same, the priority for AVI, ACI and
AUI are AVI > ACI > AUI.
 Signal Loss Selection for Analog Input 4–20 mA

Default: 0
Settings 0: Disable
1: Continue operation at the last frequency
2: Decelerate to 0 Hz
 Determines the response when the 4–20mA signal is lost, when AVIc (Pr. 03-28 = 2) or ACIc (Pr.
03-29 = 0).
 When Pr. 03-28 is not set to 2, the voltage input to AVI terminal is 0–10V or 0–20mA, and the Pr.
03-19 is invalid.
 When Pr. 03-29 is not set to 0, the voltage input to ACI terminal is 0–10V or 0–20mA, and the Pr.
03-19 is invalid.
 When the setting is 1 or 2, the keypad displays the warning code “ANL”. It keeps blinking until the
ACI signal is recovered.
 When the motor drive stops, the warning condition does not continue to exist, so the warning
disappears.
12.1-03-17
 Multi-function Output 1 (AFM1)

Default: 0
 Multi-function Output 2 (AFM2)
Default: 0
Settings 0–25
Function Chart
0 Output frequency (Hz) Maximum frequency Pr. 01-00 is regarded as 100%.
1 Frequency command (Hz) Maximum frequency Pr. 01-00 is regarded as 100%.
2 Motor speed (Hz) Maximum frequency Pr. 01-00 is regarded as 100%.
3 Output current (rms) (2.5 X rated current) is regarded as 100%
4 Output voltage (2 X rated voltage) is regarded as 100%
5 DC BUS Voltage 450 V (900 V)=100%
6 Power factor -1.000–1.000=100%
7 Power (2 X rated power) is regarded as 100%
8 Output torque Full-load torque is regarded as 100%
9 AVI 0–10V = 0–100%
10 ACI 4–20mA = 0–100%
11 AUI -10–10V=0–100%
12 Iq current command (2.5 X rated current) is regarded as 100%
13 Iq feedback value (2.5 X rated current) is regarded as 100%
14 Id current command (2.5 X rated current) is regarded as 100%
15 Id feedback value (2.5 X rated current) is regarded as 100%
18 Torque command Rated torque is regarded as 100%
19 PG2 frequency command Maximum frequency Pr. 01-00 is regarded as 100%.
20 CANopen analog output CANopen communication analog output
21 RS-485 analog output For RS-485 (InnerCOM / MODBUS) control output
Communication card analog Communication analog output (CMC-MOD01,
22
output CMC-EIP01, CMC-PN01, CMC-DN01)
Pr. 03-32 and Pr. 03-33 control voltage output level.
23 Constant voltage output
0–100 % of Pr. 03-32 corresponds to 0–10 V of AFM1.
CANopen and RS-485 analog
25 For CANopen and InnerCOM control output
output
 Analog Output Gain 1 (AFM1)

Default: 100.0
 Analog Output Gain 2 (AFM2)
Default: 100.0
Settings 0.0–500.0 %
 Adjusts the voltage level outputted to the analog meter from the analog signal (Pr.03-20) output
terminal AFM of the drive.
12.1-03-18
 Analog Output 1 in REV Direction (AFM1)

Default: 0
 Analog Output 2 in REV Direction (AFM2)
Default: 0
Settings 0: Absolute value of output voltage
1: Reverse output 0 V; forward output 0–10 V
 AFM2 Output Bias

Default: 0.00
Settings -100.00–100.00 %
 Example 1, AFM2 0–10V is set to the output frequency, the output equation is:
10V * (output frequency / Pr. 01-00) * Pr. 03-24 + 10V * Pr. 03-27
 Example 2, AFM2 0–20mA is set to the output frequency, the output equation is:
20mA * (output frequency / Pr. 01-00) * Pr. 03-24 + 20mA * Pr. 03-27
 Example 3, AFM2 4–20mA is set to the output frequency, the output equation is:
4mA + 16mA * (output frequency / Pr. 01-00) * Pr. 03-24 + 16mA * Pr. 03-27
 This parameter sets the corresponding voltage for the analog output 0.
 AVI Terminal Input Selection

Default: 0
Settings 0: 0–10V
1: 0–20mA
2: 4–20mA
 ACI Terminal Input Selection

Default: 0
Settings 0: 4–20mA
1: 0–10V
2: 0–20mA
 When you change the input mode, verify that the external terminal switch (SW3, SW4)
corresponds to the setting for Pr. 03-28–Pr. 03-29.
12.1-03-19
PLC Analog Output Terminal Status

Default: Read only
Settings Monitor the status of PLC analog output terminals
 Pr. 03-30 displays the external multi-function output terminal that used by PLC.
 For Example:
When Pr. 03-30 displays 0002h (hex), it means that AFM2 is used by PLC.
 AFM2 Output Selection

Default: 0
Settings 0: 0–20mA output
1: 4–20mA output
l
 AFM1 DC Output Setting Level
 AFM2 DC Output Setting Level
Default: 0.00
Settings 0.00–100.00 %
AFM1 Filter Output Time


AFM2 Filter Output Time


Default: 0.01
 Multi-function MO Output by AI Level Source
Default: 0
Settings 0: AVI
1: ACI
2: AUI
 AI Upper Level
Default: 50.00
Settings -100.00–100.00 %
12.1-03-20
 AI Lower Level
Default: 10.00
Settings -100.00–100.00 %
 Multi-function output terminal 67 must work with Pr.03-44 to select input channels. When analog
input level is higher than Pr.03-45, multi-function output acts; when analog input level is lower
than Pr.03-46, multi-function output terminals stop outputting.
 When setting levels, AI upper level must be higher than AI lower level.
 Analog Input Curve Selection

Default: 0
Settings 0: Regular Curve
1: Three-point curve of AVI
2: Three-point curve of ACI
3: Three-point curve of AVI & ACI
4: Three-point curve of AUI
5: Three-point curve of AVI & AUI
6: Three-point curve of ACI & AUI
7: Three-point curve of AVI & ACI & AUI
 Sets the calculation method for analog input.
 When Pr. 03-50 = 0, all analog input signal is calculated by bias and gain.
 When Pr. 03-50 = 1, AVI calculates by frequency and voltage / current (Pr. 03-51–03-56), other
analog input signal calculates by bias and gain.
 When Pr. 03-50 = 2, ACI consulates by frequency and voltage / current (Pr. 03-57–03-62), other
 When Pr. 03-50 = 3, AVI and ACI calculate by frequency and voltage/ current (Pr. 03-51–03-62),
other analog input signal calculates by bias and gain.
 When Pr. 03-50 = 4, AVI calculates by frequency and voltage / current (Pr. 03-63–03-74), other
 When Pr. 03-50 = 5, AVI and AUI calculate by frequency and voltage / current (Pr. 03-51–03-56
and 03-63–03-74), other analog input signal calculates by bias and gain.
 When Pr. 03-50 = 6, ACI and AVI calculate by frequency and voltage / current (Pr. 03-57–03-74),
other analog input signal calculates by bias and gain.
 When Pr. 03-50 = 7, all analog input signal calculate by frequency and voltage / current (Pr.
03-51–03-74).
 AVI Lowest Point

Default:
0.00 / 0.00 / 4.00
Settings Pr. 03-28 = 0, 0.00–10.00V
Pr. 03-28 = 1, 0.00–20.00mA
Pr. 03-28 = 2, 0.00–20.00mA
12.1-03-21
 AVI Proportional Lowest Point

Default: 0.00
Settings -100.00–100.00 %
 AVI Mid-Point
Default:
5.00 / 10.00 / 12.00
Settings Pr. 03-28 = 0, 0.00–10.00 V
Pr. 03-28 = 1, 0.00–20.00 mA
Pr. 03-28 = 2, 0.00–20.00 mA
 AVI Proportional Mid-Point
Default: 50.00
Settings -100.00–100.00 %
 AVI Highest Point
Default:
10.00 / 20.00 / 20.00
Settings Pr. 03-28 = 0, 0.00–10.00 V
Pr. 03-28 = 1, 0.00–20.00 mA
Pr. 03-28 = 2, 0.00–20.00 mA
 AVI Proportional High Point
Default: 100.00
Settings -100.00–100.00 %
 When Pr. 03-28 = 0, AVI setting is 0–10 V and the unit is in voltage (V).
 When Pr. 03-28 ≠ 0, AVI setting is 0–20 mA or 4–20 mA and the unit is in current (mA).
 When you set the analog input AVI to frequency command, 100% corresponds to Fmax (Pr.
01-00 maximum operation frequency).
 The requirement for these three parameters (Pr. 03-51, Pr. 03-53 and Pr. 03-55) is Pr. 03-51 < Pr.
03-53 < Pr. 03-55. The values for three proportional points (Pr. 03-52, Pr. 03-54 and Pr. 03-56)
have no limits. Values between two points are calculated by a linear equation. The ACI and AUI
are same as AVI.
 The output percentage 0% when the AVI input value is lower than the lowest point setting.
Example: Pr. 03-51 = 1 V; Pr. 03-52 = 10 %. The output is 0 % when AVI input is lower than 1V. If
the AVI input varies between 1V and 1.1V, the drive’s output frequency is between 0% and 10%.
12.1-03-22
 ACI Lowest Point

Default:
4.00 / 0.00 / 0.00
Settings Pr. 03-29 = 0, 0.00–20.0 mA
Pr. 03-29 = 1, 0.00–10.00 V
Pr. 03-29 = 2, 0.00–20.00 mA
 ACI Proportional Low Point
Default: 0.00
Settings -100.00–100.00 %
 ACI Mid-Point
Default:
12.00 / 5.00 / 10.00
Settings Pr. 03-29 = 0, 0.00–20.00 mA
Pr. 03-29 = 1, 0.00–10.00 V
Pr. 03-29 = 2, 0.00–20.00 mA
 ACI Proportional Mid-Point
Default: 50.00
Settings -100.00–100.00 %
12.1-03-23
 ACI Highest Point

Default:
20.00 / 10.00 / 20.00
Settings Pr. 03-29 = 0, 0.00–20.00mA
Pr. 03-29 = 1, 0.00–10.00V
Pr. 03-29 = 2, 0.00–20.00mA
 ACI Proportional Highest Point
Default: 100.00
Settings -100.00–100.00%
 When Pr. 03-29 = 1, ACI setting is 0–10V and the unit is in voltage (V). When Pr. 03-29 ≠ 1, ACI
setting is 0–20mA or 4–20mA and the unit is in current (mA).
 When you set the analog input ACI to frequency command, 100% corresponds to Fmax (Pr.
01-00 maximum operation frequency).
have no limits. Values between two points are calculated by a linear equation.
 The output percentage is 0% when the ACI input value is lower than the lowest point setting.
Example:
Pr. 03-57 = 2 mA; Pr. 03-58 = 10 %. The output becomes 0 % when AVI input is lower than 2 mA.
If the ACI input varies between 2 mA and 2.1 mA, the drive’s output frequency oscillates between
0 % and 10%.
 Positive AUI Voltage Lowest Point

Default: 0.00
Settings 0.00–10.00 V
 Positive AUI Voltage Proportional Lowest Point
Default: 0.00
Settings -100.00–100.00 %
 Positive AUI Voltage Mid-Point
Default: 5.00
 Positive AUI Voltage Proportional Mid-Point
Default: 50.00
Settings -100.00–100.00 %
 Positive AUI Voltage Highest Point
Default: 10.00
 Positive AUI Voltage Proportional Highest Point
Default: 100.00
Settings -100.00–100.00 %
 When you set the positive voltage AUI to the frequency command, 100% corresponds to Fmax
(Pr. 01-00 maximum operation frequency) and the motor runs in the forward direction.
12.1-03-24
have no limits. Values between two points are calculated by a linear equation.
 Positive AUI input voltage is lower than Low Point, output proportional is 0%.
For example:
Pr. 03-63 = 1V; Pr. 03-64 = 10%. The output will become 0% when the input is lower than 1V. If
the AUI input varies between 1V and 1.1V, the drive’s output frequency oscillates between 0%
and 10%.
 Pr. 03-51~03-68 is able to set the open circuit corresponding function of analog input value and
max. operation frequency (Pr. 01-00), as shown in the figure below:
 Negative AUI Voltage Highest Point

Default: 0.00
Settings -10.00–0.00 V
 Negative AUI Voltage Proportional Highest Point
Default: 0.00
Settings -100.00–100.00 %
 Negative AUI Voltage Mid-Point
Default: -5.00
 Negative AUI Voltage Proportional Mid-Point
Default: -50.00
Settings -100.00–100.00 %
 Negative AUI Voltage Lowest Point
Default: -10.00
 Negative AUI Voltage Proportional Lowest Point
Default: -100.00
Settings -100.00–100.00 %
 When you set the negative voltage AUI to frequency command, 100% corresponds to Fmax (Pr.
01-00 maximum operation frequency) and the motor runs in the reverse direction.
12.1-03-25
have not limits. Values between two points are calculated by a linear calculation.
 The output % becomes 0% when the negative AUI input value is lower than the lowest point
setting. For example:
Pr. 03-69 = -1V; Pr. 03-70 = 10%, then the output becomes 0% when the AUI input is ≥ -1V. If the
AUI input varies between -1 V and -1.1 V, the drive’s output frequency oscillates between 0%
and 10%.
12.1-03-26
04 Multi-step Speed Parameters  This parameter can be set during operation.
 1st Step Speed Frequency

 2nd Step Speed Frequency
 3rd Step Speed Frequency
 4th Step Speed Frequency
Default: 0.00
 Use the multi-function input terminals (refer to settings 1–4 of Pr. 02-01–02-08 and Pr.
02-26–02-31 Multi-function Input Command) to select the multi-step speed command (the
maximum is 15th step speed). Pr. 04-00 to Pr. 04-14 set the multi-step speed frequency as shown
in the following diagram.
 The external terminal/digital keypad/communication controls the RUN and STOP commands with
Pr.00-21.
 You can set each multi-step speed between 0.00–599.00 Hz during operation.
 Explanation for the timing diagram of the multi-step speed and external terminals
The related parameter settings are:
1. Pr. 04-00–04-14: sets the 1st to 15th multi-step speed (to set the frequency of each step speed)
2. Pr. 02-01–02-08 and Pr. 02-26–02-31: sets the multi-function input terminals (multi-step speed
command 1–4)
 Related parameters:
 Pr. 01-22 JOG Frequency
 Pr. 02-01 Multi-function Input Command 1 (MI1)
12.1-04-1
 Position Command 1 (Rotation)

 Default: 0
 Settings -30000–30000
 To switch the target position for the external terminal, set the multi-function input command
Pr.02-01 = 1, Pr.02-02 = 2, Pr.02-03 = 3, Pr.02-04 = 4 by selecting the P2P target position with the
multi-step speed.
 Setting: Target Position = Pr. 04-15 × (Pr. 10-01*4) + Pr. 04-16
12.1-04-2
Multi-step
Target Position of P2P Maximum Speed of P2P
Speed Status
0000 0 11-00 bit8=0 11-00 bit8=1
0001 Position 1 04-15 04-16 11-43 04-00
0010 Position 2 04-17 04-18 04-01
0011 Position 3 04-19 04-20 04-02
0100 Position 4 04-21 04-22 04-03
0101 Position 5 04-23 04-24 04-04
0110 Position 6 04-25 04-26 04-05
0111 Position 7 04-27 04-28 04-06
1000 Position 8 04-29 04-30 11-43 04-07
1001 Position 9 04-31 04-32 04-08
1010 Position 10 04-33 04-34 04-09
1011 Position 11 04-35 04-36 04-10
1100 Position 12 04-37 04-38 04-11
1101 Position 13 04-39 04-40 04-12
1110 Position 14 04-41 04-42 04-13
1111 Position 15 04-43 04-44 04-14
 Position Command 1 (Pulse)

Default: 0
Settings -32767–32767
 Refer to Pr. 02-01–02-08 (Multi-function Input Command) for the description on setting 34 (Switch
between multi-step position and multi-step speed control), setting 36 (Enable multi-step position
learning function) and setting 35 (Enable single-point position control).
 Multi-function input 35 (Enable single-point position control) switches between multi-step speed
and multi-step position with multi-function input 34 (when enabled). You can select 16 positions.
Multi-step position corresponding MI4 MI3 MI2 MI1 Multi-step speed corresponding
10-19 0 0 0 0 Positioning for Encoder Position
04-16 Position command 1 (pulse) 0 0 0 1 04-00 1st step speed frequency
04-18 Position command 2 (pulse) 0 0 1 0 04-01 2nd step speed frequency
04-20 Position command 3 (pulse) 0 0 1 1 04-02 3rd step speed frequency
12.1-04-3
Multi-step position corresponding MI4 MI3 MI2 MI1 Multi-step speed corresponding
04-22 Position command 4 (pulse) 0 1 0 0 04-03 4th step speed frequency
 PLC Buffer 0

 PLC Buffer 1
 PLC Buffer 2
 PLC Buffer 3
 PLC Buffer 4
 PLC Buffer 5
 PLC Buffer 6
 PLC Buffer 7
 PLC Buffer 8
 PLC Buffer 9
 PLC Buffer 10
Default: 0
Settings 0–65535
 You can combine the PLC buffer with the built-in PLC function for a variety of applications.
12.1-04-4
 PLC Application Parameter 0

PLC Application Parameter 15
Default: 0
Settings 0–65535
 Pr. 04-70–Pr. 04-99 are user-defined parameters. You can combine these 30 PLC Application
Parameters with the PLC programming for a variety of applications.
12.1-04-5
05 Motor Parameters  This parameter can be set during operation.
Motor Parameter Auto-Tuning

Default: 0
Settings 0: No function
2: Static auto-tuning for induction motor
4: Dynamic test for PM magnetic pole (with the running in forward direction)
6: Advanced rolling auto-tuning for IM flux curve
12: FOC Sensorless inertia estimation
 Refer to Section 12-2 “Adjustment and Application” for more details of motor adjustment process.
Full-load Current for Induction Motor 1 (A)

Default: Depending on
the model power
Settings Depending on the model power
 Sets this value according to the rated current of the motor as indicated on the motor nameplate.
 The default is 90% of the drive’s rated current.
Example: The rated current for a 7.5 HP (5.5 kW) is 25 A. The default is 22.5 A.
The setting range is between 40%–120% of the rated current.
(25 * 40% = 10 A and 25 * 120% = 30 A)
 Rated Power for Induction Motor 1 (kW)

the model power
Settings 0.00–655.35 kW
 Sets the rated power for motor 1. The default is the drive’s power value.
 Rated Speed for Induction Motor 1 (rpm)

the motor pole number
Settings 0–xxxx (Depending on the motor pole number)
 Sets the rated speed for the motor as indicated on the motor nameplate.
 Pr. 01-01 and Pr. 05-04 determine the maximum rotor speed for IM.
For example: Pr. 01-01=20Hz, Pr. 05-04=2, according to the equation 120 x 20 Hz / 2 = 1200 rpm
and take integers. Due to the slip of the IM, the maximum setting value for Pr. 05-03 is 1199rpm
(1200rpm – 1).
12.1-05-1
Number of Poles for Induction Motor 1

Default: 4
Settings 2–64
 Sets the number poles for the motor (must be an even number).
 Set up Pr. 01-01 and Pr. 05-03 before setting up Pr. 05-04 to make sure the motor operates
normally. Pr. 01-01 and Pr. 05-03 determine the maximum set up number poles for the IM.
For example: Pr. 01-01 = 20 Hz and Pr. 05-03 = 39 rpm, according to the equation 120 x 20Hz /
39rpm = 61.5 and take even number, the number of poles is 60. Therefore, Pr. 05-04 can be set
to the maximum of 60 poles.
No-load Current for Induction Motor 1 (A)

Default: Depending
on the model power
Settings 0.0–Pr. 05-01 default
 For model with 110kW and above, default setting is 20% of motor rated current.
Stator Resistance (Rs) for Induction Motor 1

Default: Depending
on the model power
Settings 0.000–65.535 Ω
Rotor Resistance (Rr) for Induction Motor 1

Default: 0.000
Settings 0.000–65.535 Ω
Magnetizing Inductance (Lm) for Induction Motor 1

Stator Inductance (Lx) for Induction Motor 1
Default: 0.0
Settings 0.0–6553.5 mH
Full-load Current for Induction Motor 2 (A)

Default: Depending
on the model power
 Set this value according to the rated current of the motor as indicated on the motor nameplate.
The default 90% of the drive’s rated current.
Example: The rated current for a 7.5 HP (5.5 kW) motor is 25 A. The default is 22.5 A.
The setting range is between 40 %–120 % of rated current.
25 * 40 % = 10 A and 25 * 120 % = 30 A
12.1-05-2

the model power
 Set the rated power for motor 2. The default is the drive’s power value.

Settings 0–xxxx (Depending on the motor pole number)
 Pr. 01-01 and Pr. 05-04 determine the maximum rotor speed of IM.
For example: Pr. 01-01 = 20Hz, Pr. 05-04 = 2, according to the equation 120 x 20 Hz / 2 = 1200
rpm and take integers. Due to the slip of the IM, the maximum setting value for Pr. 05-15 is 1199
rpm (1200 rpm – 1).
Number of poles for Induction Motor 2

Default: 4
Settings 2–64
 Sets the number of poles for the motor (must be an even number).
normally. Pr. 01-35 and Pr. 05-15 determine the maximum set up number of poles.
39 rpm = 61.5 and take even number, the number of poles is 60. Therefore, Pr. 05-16 can be set

Default: Depending
on the model power
Settings 0.00–Pr. 05-13 default
Stator Resistance (Rs) for Induction Motor 2

Default: Depending
on the model power
Settings 0.000–65.535 Ω
Rotor Resistance (Rr) for Induction Motor 2

Default: 0.000
Settings 0.000–65.535 Ω
12.1-05-3

Stator Inductance (Lx) for Induction Motor 2
Default: 0.0
Induction Motor 1/ 2 Selection
Default: 1
Settings 1: Motor 1
2: Motor 2
 Sets the motor currently operated by the AC motor drive.
 Frequency for Y-connection / ∆-connection Switch for an Induction Motor

Default: 60.00
Y-connection / ∆-connection Switch for Induction Motor
Default: 0
Settings 0: Disable
1: Enable
 Delay Time for Y-connection / ∆-connection Switch for an Induction Motor
Default: 0.200
 You can apply Pr. 05-23–Pr. 05-25 in a wide range of motors, and the motor coil executes the
Y-connection / -connection switch as required. The wide range motors are related to the motor
design. In general, the motor has higher torque with low speed Y-connection, and has higher
speed with high speed -connection).
 Pr. 05-24 enables and disables the switch of Y-connection / -connection.
 When you set Pr. 05-24 as 1, the drive uses the Pr. 05-23 setting and current motor frequency,
and switches the current motor to Y-connection or -connection. You can switch the relevant
motor parameter settings simultaneously.
 Pr. 05-25 sets the switch delay time of Y-connection / -connection.
 When the output frequency reaches Y-connection / -connection switch frequency, the drive
delays according to Pr. 05-25 before activating the multi-function output terminals.
12.1-05-4
Accumulated Watt-hour for a Motor (W-hour)

Default: 0.0
Settings Read only
Accumulated Watt-hour for a Motor in Low Word (kW-hour)
Default: 0.0
Settings Read only
Accumulated Watt-hour for a Motor in High Word (MW-hour)
Default: 0
Settings Read only
 Pr.05-28–05-30 records the amount of power consumed by the motors. The accumulation begins
when the drive is activated and the record is saved when the drive stops or turns OFF. The
amount of consumed watts continues to accumulate when the drive is activated again. To clear
the accumulation, set Pr. 00-02 as 5 to return the accumulation record to 0.
 The accumulated total watts of the motor per hour = Pr. 05-30 x 1000000 + Pr. 05-29 x 1000 + Pr.
05-28 Wh
Example: When Pr. 05-30 = 76 MWh and Pr. 05-29 = 150 kWh, Pr. 05-28 = 400 Wh (or 0.4kWh),
the accumulated total kilowatts of the motor per hour = 76 x 1000000 + 150 x 1000 + 40 =
76150400Wh = 76150.4kWh
12.1-05-5
Accumulated Motor Operation Time (Min)

Default: 0
Settings 0–1439
Accumulated Motor Operation Time (Day)
Default: 0
Settings0–65535
 Use Pr. 05-31 and Pr. 05-32 to record the motor operation time. To clear the operation time, set Pr.
05-31 and Pr. 05-32 as 00. An operation time shorter than 60 seconds is not recorded.
Induction Motor (IM) or Permanent Magnet Synchronous Motor Selection

Default: 0
Settings 0: IM (Induction Motor)
1: SPM (Surface permanent magnet motor)
2: IPM (Interior permanent magnet motor)
Full-load current for a Permanent Magnet Motor
Default: Depending
on the model power
 Sets the full-load current for the motor according to motor’s nameplate. The default is 90% of the
drive’s rated current.
 For example: The rated current of a 7.5 HP (5.5 kW) is 25 A. The default is 22.5A.
The setting range is between 40%–120% of rated current.
25 * 40 % = 10 A and 25 * 120 % = 30 A
 Rated Power for a Permanent Magnet Motor

the model power
 Sets the rated power for the permanent magnet synchronous motor. The default is the drive’s
power value.
 Rated speed for a Permanent Magnet Motor

Default: 2000
Settings 0–65535 rpm
Pole number for a Permanent Magnet Motor

Default: 10
Settings 0–65535
System Inertia for a Permanent Magnet Motor
Default: Depending
on the motor power
Settings 0.0–6553.5 kg-cm2
 Default values are as below:
12.1-05-6
Rated Power
0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 9.3 11
[kW]
Rotor inertia
1.2 3.0 6.6 15.8 25.7 49.6 82.0 121.6 177.0
[kg-cm2]
Rated Power 54 and

14.1 18.2 27 33 40 46 54
[kW] above
Rotor inertia
211.0 265.0 308.0 527.0 866.0 1082.0 1267.6 1515.0
[kg-cm2]
Stator Resistance for a Permanent Magnet Motor

Default: 0.000
Settings 0.000–65.535 
Permanent Magnet Motor Ld
Default: 0.00
Permanent Magnet Motor Lq
Default: 0.00
 PG Offset Angle for a Permanent Magnet Motor
Default: 0
Settings 0.0–360.0°
 When you set Pr. 05-00 as 4, the drive detects the offset angle and writes it into Pr. 05-42.
 Ke Parameter of a Permanent Magnet Motor

Default: 0
Settings 0–65535 V / krpm
 Permanent magnet motor parameter Ke (Vphase, rms / krpm)
 When Pr. 05-00 = 5, parameter Ke is calculated according to the motor’s actual operation.
 When Pr. 05-00 = 13, parameter Ke is automatically calculated according to the motor power,
current and rotor speed.
12.1-05-7
06 Protection Parameters  This parameter can be set during operation.
 Low Voltage Level

Default:
Settings 230V series:
Frame A–D (including D0): 150.0–220.0 VDC 180.0
Frame E and above: 190.0–220.0 VDC 200.0
460V series:
Frame A–D (including D0): 300.0–440.0 VDC 360.0
Frame E and above: 380.0–440.0 VDC 400.0
575V series: 420.0–520.0 VDC 470.0
690V series: 450.0–660.0 VDC 480.0
 Sets the Low Voltage (Lv) level. When the DC BUS voltage is lower than Pr. 06-00, the drive
stops output and the motor free runs to a stop.
 If the Lv fault is triggered during operation, the drive stops output and the motor free runs to a
stop. There are three Lv faults: LvA (Lv during acceleration), Lvd (Lv during deceleration), and
Lvn (Lv in constant speed) that are triggered according to the status of acceleration or
deceleration. You must press RESET to clear the Lv fault. The drive automatically restarts if you
set to restart after momentary power loss (refer to Pr.07-06 Restart after Momentary Power Loss
and Pr.07-07 Allowed Power Loss Duration for details).
 If the Lv fault is triggered when the drive is in STOP status, the drive displays LvS (Lv during stop),
which is not recorded, and the drive restarts automatically when the input voltage is higher than
Pr. 06-00 + Lv return level (as listed below).
Lv Return Level 230V 460V 575V 690V
Frame A–D 30VDC 60VDC 100VDC
100VDC
Frame E–H 40VDC 80VDC 120VDC
V
DC Bus Voltage
Lv Return Level
06-00
Lv Error
time
 Over-voltage Stall Prevention

Default:
380.0/760.0/920.0/1087.0
Settings 230V series: 0.0–450.0 VDC
460V series: 0.0–900.0VDC
575V series: 0.0–920.0 VDC
690V series: 0.0–1087.0 VDC
0: Disabled
12.1-06-1
 Setting Pr. 06-01 to 0.0 disables the over-voltage stall prevention function (connected with
braking unit or braking resistor). Use this setting when braking units or resistors are connected to
the drive.
 Setting Pr.06-01 to a value > 0 enables the over-voltage stall prevention. This setting refers to the
power supply system and loading. If the setting is too low, then over-voltage stall prevention is
easily activated, which may increase the deceleration time.
 Pr. 01-13, Pr. 01-15, Pr. 01-17, Pr. 01-19 Deceleration Time 1–4
 Pr. 02-13–Pr. 02-14 Multiple-function Output (Relay 1 and 2)
 Pr. 02-16–Pr. 02-17 Multiple-function output (MO 1 and 2)
 Pr. 06-02 Selection for Over-voltage Stall Prevention.
 Selection for Over-voltage Stall Prevention

Default: 0
Settings 0: Traditional over-voltage stall prevention
1: Smart over-voltage stall prevention
 Use this function when you are unsure about the load inertia. When stopping under normal load,
the over-voltage does not occur during deceleration and meet the deceleration time setting.
Sometimes it may not stop due to over-voltage during decelerating to STOP when the load
regenerative inertia increases. In this case, the AC motor drive extends the deceleration time
automatically until the drive stops.
 When you set Pr.06-02 to 0, during deceleration the motor exceeds the synchronous speed due
to load inertia. In this case, the motor becomes an electrical generator. The DC BUS voltage may
exceed its maximum allowable value due to motor regeneration in some situations, such as
loading inertia being too high or deceleration time being set too short. When you enable
traditional over-voltage stall prevention and the DC BUS voltage detected is too high, the drive
stops decelerating (output frequency remains unchanged) until the DC BUS voltage drops below
the setting value.
12.1-06-2
 When you set Pr. 06-02 to 1, to use smart over-voltage stall prevention during deceleration, the
drive maintains the DC BUS voltage when decelerating and prevents the drive from ov.
 When you enable the over-voltage stall prevention, the drive’s deceleration time is longer than
the setting.
 If you encounter any problem with deceleration time, refer to the following guides for
troubleshooting.
1. Increase the deceleration time to a suitable value.
2. Install a brake resistor (refer to Section 7-1 All Brake Resistors and Brake Units Used in AC
motor Drives for details) to dissipate the electrical energy that is regenerated from the motor.
 Pr. 01-13, Pr. 01-15, Pr. 01-17, Pr. 01-19 Deceleration Time 1–4
 Pr. 02-13–Pr. 02-14 Multiple-function Output (Relay 1 and 2)
 Pr. 02-16–Pr. 02-17 Multiple-function Output (MO1 and 2)
 Pr. 06-01 Over-voltage Stall Prevention.
 Over-current Stall Prevention during Acceleration
Settings 230V/460V series

Normal duty: 0–160% (100%: drive’s rated current) Default: 120
Heavy duty: 0–180% (100%: drive’s rated current) Default: 120
575V/690V series
Light duty: 0–125% (100%: drive’s rated current) Default: 120
 This parameter only works in VF, VFPG, and SVC control mode.
 If the motor load is too large or the drive’s acceleration time is too short, the output current of the
drive may be too high during acceleration, and it may cause motor damage or trigger protection
functions (oL or oc). Use this parameter to prevent these situations.
 During acceleration, the output current of the drive may increase abruptly and exceed the value
of Pr. 06-03. In this case, the drive stops accelerating and keeps the output frequency constant,
and then continues to accelerate until the output current decreases.
12.1-06-3
 When you enable the over-current stall prevention, the drive’s acceleration time is longer than the
setting.
 When the over-current stall prevention occurs because the motor capacity is too small or
operates in the default, decrease the Pr.06-03 setting value.
 When you encounter any problem with the acceleration time, refer to the following guides for
troubleshooting.
1. Increase the acceleration time to a suitable value.
2. Set Pr. 01-44 Auto Acceleration / Deceleration Setting to 1, 3 or 4 (auto-acceleration).
 Pr. 01-12, Pr. 01-14, Pr. 01-16, Pr. 01-18 Acceleration Time 1–4
 Pr. 01-44 Auto Acceleration / Deceleration Setting
 Pr. 02-13–02-14 Multi-function Output 1 (RY1 and RY2)
 Pr. 02-16–02-17 Multi-function Output (MO1 and 2)
 Over-current Stall Prevention during Operation
Settings 230V/460V series

575V/690V series
Light duty: 0–125% (100%: drive’s rated current) Default: 120
 This parameter only works in VF, VFPG, and SVC control modes.
 This is a protection for the drive to decrease output frequency automatically when the motor
over-loads abruptly during constant motor operation.
 If the output current exceeds the setting value for Pr. 06-04 when the drive is operating, the drive
decreases output frequency (according to Pr. 06-05) to prevent the motor from stalling. If the
output current is lower than the setting value for Pr. 06-04, the drive accelerates (according to Pr.
06-05) again to the setting frequency.
12.1-06-4
 Acceleration / Deceleration Time Selection of Stall Prevention at Constant Speed

Default: 0
Settings 0: By current acceleration / deceleration time
1: By the 1st acceleration / deceleration time
2: By the 2nd acceleration / deceleration time
3: By the 3rd acceleration / deceleration time
4: By the 4th acceleration / deceleration time
5: By automatic acceleration / deceleration
 Sets the acceleration / deceleration time selection when stall prevention occurs at constant
speed.
 Over-torque Detection Selection (OT1)

Default: 0
1: Continue operation after over-torque detection during constant speed
operation
2: Stop after over-torque detection during constant speed operation
3: Continue operation after over-torque detection during RUN
 Over-torque Detection Selection (OT2)
Default: 0
operation
 When you set Pr. 06-06 and Pr. 06-09 to 1 or 3, a warning message displays, but there is no error
record.
 When you set Pr. 06-06 and Pr. 06-09 to 2 or 4, a warning message displays and there is an error
record.
12.1-06-5
 Over-torque Detection Level (OT1)

Default: 120
Settings 10–250% (100% corresponds to the rated current of the drive)
Default: 0.1
Default: 120
 Over-torque Detection Time (OT2)
Default: 0.1
 When the output current exceeds the over-torque detection level (Pr. 06-07 or Pr. 06-10) and
exceeds the over-torque detection time (Pr. 06-08 or Pr. 06-11), the over-torque detection follows
the setting of Pr. 06-06 and Pr. 06-09.
 When you set Pr. 06-06 or Pr. 06-09 to 1 or 3, an ot1 / ot2 warning displays while the drive keeps
running. The warning remains on until the output current is smaller than 5% of the over-torque
detection level.
 When you set Pr. 06-06 or Pr. 06-09 to 2 or 4, an ot1 / ot2 warning displays and the drive stops
running after over-torque detection. The drive keeps running after you manually reset it.
12.1-06-6
 Current Limit
Default: 170
 Sets the maximum output current of the drive. Use Pr.11-17–Pr.11-20 to set the drive’s output
current limit.
 When setting the control mode as VF, SVC or VFPG, if the output frequency of the drive reaches
this current limit, the output frequency decreases automatically. It works like the current stall
prevention.
 Electronic Thermal Relay Selection (Motor 1)

 Electronic Thermal Relay Selection (Motor 2)
Default: 2
Settings 0: Inverter motor (with external forced cooling)
1: Standard motor (motor with fan on the shaft)
2: Disable
 Prevents self-cooled motor from overheating under low speed. Use an electronic thermal relay to
limit the drive’s output power.
 Setting the parameter to 0 is suitable for an inverter motor (motor fan using an independent
power supply). For this kind of motor, there is no significant correlation between cooling capacity
and motor speed. Therefore, the action of electronic thermal relays remains stable in low speed
to ensure the load capability of the motor in low speed.
 Setting the parameter to 1 is suitable for standard motor (motor fan is fixed on the rotor shaft). For
this kind of motor, the cooling capacity is lower in low speed; therefore, the action of an electronic
thermal relay reduces the action time to ensure the life of motor.
 When the power is cycled frequently, if the power is switched OFF, the electronic thermal relay
protection is reset; therefore even setting the parameter to 0 or 1 may not protect the motor well.
If there are several motors connected to one drive, install an electronic thermal relay in each
motor.
 Electronic Thermal Relay Action Time 1 (Motor 1)

 Electronic Thermal Relay Action Time 2 (Motor 2)
Default: 60.0
 Set the parameter to 150% of motor rated current and use with the setting of Pr.06-14 and
Pr.06-28 to prevent motor damage due to overheating. When it reaches the setting, the drive
displays “EoL1 / EoL2”, and the motor free runs to stop.
 Use this parameter to set the action time of the electronic thermal relay. It works based on the I2t
characteristic curve of electronic thermal relay, the output frequency and current of the drive, and
the operation time to prevent the motor from overheating.
12.1-06-7
 The action of electronic thermal relay depends on the setting for Pr. 06-13 and Pr. 06-27.
1. Pr. 06-13 or Pr. 06-27 set to 0 (using inverter motor):
When the output current of motor drive is higher than 150% of motor rated current (refer to the
motor cooling curve with independent fan), motor drive starts to count the time. The electronic
thermal relay acts when the accumulated time exceeds Pr. 06-14 or Pr. 06-28.
2. Pr. 06-13 or Pr. 06-27 is set to 1 (using standard motor):
When the output current of the drive is higher than 150% of the motor rated current (refer to
the motor cooling curve with shaft-fixed fan), the drive starts to count the time. The electronic
thermal relay acts when the accumulated time exceeds Pr. 06-14 or Pr. 06-28.
3. If the motor’s rated current (Pr. 05-01) is not set, then set 90% of the drive’s rated current (Pr.
00-01) as the default value of this parameter.
 The actual electronic thermal relay action time adjusts according to the drive output current
(shown as the motor loading rate %). The action time is short when the current is high, and the
action time is long when the current is low. Refer to the following chart: (The motor cooling curve
with shaft-fixed fan and motor cooling curve with independent fan F = 50 Hz are the same one.)
 Temperature Level Over-heat (oH) Warning

Default: 105.0
Settings 0.0–110.0ºC
 If Pr. 06-15 is set to 110ºC, when the temperature reaches 110ºC, the drive stops with an IGBT
over-heat fault.
 For Frame C and above, when IGBT temperature is above Pr. 06-15 minus 15ºC, the cooling fan
enhances performance to 100%; however, when IGBT temperature is below 35ºC of Pr. 06-15
and the temperature of CAP is below 10ºC of capacitor oH warning level (Pr. 06-51), the cooling
fan resets. The temperature 35ºC is the criterion if Pr. 06-15 is set below 35ºC.
12.1-06-8
 Stall Prevention Limit Level (Weak Magnetic Area Current Stall Prevention Level)
Default: 100
Settings 0–100% (Refer to Pr. 06-03, Pr. 06-04)
 Sets the over-current stall prevention level when operation frequency is larger than Pr.01-01. This
parameter only works during acceleration.
 Example: Pr. 06-03 = 150%, Pr. 06-04 = 100% and Pr. 06-16 = 80%, when the operation
frequency is larger than Pr. 01-01, the over-current stall prevention Level during acceleration is:
Pr. 06-03 × Pr. 06-16 = 150 × 80% = 120%.
 Pr. 06-16 is invalid when the over-current stall prevention activates according to Pr. 06-04 at
constant speed.
Fault Record 1
Fault Record 2
Fault Record 3
Fault Record 4
Fault Record 5
Fault Record 6
Settings
0: No fault record
1: Over-current during acceleration (ocA)
2: Over-current during deceleration (ocd)
3: Over-current during constant speed(ocn)
4: Ground fault (GFF)
5: IGBT short-circuit (occ)
6: Over-current at stop (ocS)
7: Over-voltage during acceleration (ovA)
8: Over-voltage during deceleration (ovd)
9: Over-voltage during constant speed (ovn)
10: Over-voltage at stop (ovS)
11: Low-voltage during acceleration (LvA)
12: Low-voltage during deceleration (Lvd)
13: Low-voltage during constant speed (Lvn)
14: Low-voltage at stop (LvS)
15: Phase loss protection (OrP)
16: IGBT over-heat (oH1)
17: Capacitance over-heat (oH2)
18: tH1o (TH1 open: IGBT over-heat protection error)
19: tH2o (TH2 open: capacitance over-heat protection error)
21: Drive over-load (oL)
24: Motor PTC overheat (oH3) (PTC / PT100)
12.1-06-9

28: Low current (uC)
29: Home limit error (LMIT)
30: Memory write-in error (cF1)
31: Memory read-out error (cF2)
33: U-phase current detection error (cd1)
34: V-phase current detection error (cd2)
35: W-phase current detection error (cd3)
36: Clamp current detection error (Hd0)
37: Over-current detection error (Hd1)
38: Over-voltage detection error (Hd2)
39: IGBT short-circuit detection error (Hd3)
40: Auto-tuning error (AUE)
41: PID feedback loss (AFE)
42: PG feedback error (PGF1)
43: PG feedback loss (PGF2)
44: PG feedback stall (PGF3)
45: PG slip error (PGF4)
48: Analog current input loss (ACE)
49: External fault input (EF)
51: External Base Block (bb)
52: Password error (PcodE)
58: Communication Time-out (CE10)
60: Brake transistor error (bF)
61: Y-connection / ∆-connection switch error (ydc)
62: Deceleration Energy Backup error (dEb)
64: Electromagnet switch error (ryF)
65: PG Card Error (PGF5)
68: Sensorless estimated speed have wrong direction
69: Sensorless estimated speed is over speed
70: Sensorless estimated speed deviated
71: Watchdog
72: Channel 1 (STO1–SCM1) safety loop error (STL1)
73: External safety gate (S1)
75: External brake error
12.1-06-10
76: Safe Torque Off (STO)

77: Channel 2 (STO2–SCM2) safety loop error (STL2)
78: Internal loop error (STL3)
82: U phase output phase loss (OPHL)
83: V phase output phase loss (OPHL)
84: W phase output phase loss (OPHL)
85: PG-02U ABZ hardware disconnection
86: PG-02U UVW hardware disconnection
87: oL3 Low frequency overload protection
89: RoPd initial rotor position detection error
90: Inner PLC function is forced to stop
93: CPU error
101: CANopen software disconnect 1 (CGdE)
102: CANopen software disconnect 2 (CHbE)
104: CANopen hardware disconnect (CbFE)
105: CANopen index setting error (CldE)
106: CANopen slave station number setting error (CAdE)
107: CANopen index setting exceed limit (CFrE)
111: Internal communication overtime error (ictE)
112: PM sensorless shaft Lock error
142: Auto-tuning error 1 (no feedback current error) (AUE1)
143: Auto-tuning error 2 (motor phase loss error) (AUE2)
144: Auto-tuning error 3 (no-load current I0 measuring error) (AUE3)
148: Auto-tuning error (leakage inductance Lsigma measuring error) (AUE4)
 When the fault occurs and forces stopping, the fault is recorded in this parameter.
 During stop with low voltage Lv (LvS warning), there is no error record. During operation with
mid-low voltage Lv (LvA, Lvd, Lvn error), there is a record.
 When dEb function is valid and enabled, the drive executes dEb and records fault code 62 to Pr.
06-17–Pr. 06-22 simultaneously.
 Fault Output Option 1

Default: 0
Settings 0–65535 sec. (refer to bit table for fault code)
 Use these parameters with multi-function output terminal (set to 35–38) for the specific
requirement. When the fault occurs, the corresponding terminals activate. Convert the binary
value to decimal value before you enter the value for Pr. 06-23–Pr. 06-26.
12.1-06-11
bit0 bit1 bit2 bit3 bit4 bit5 bit6

Fault Code
current Volt. OL SYS FBK EXI CE
0: No fault record
1: Over-current during acceleration (ocA) ●
2: Over-current during deceleration (ocd) ●
3: Over-current during constant speed(ocn) ●
4: Ground fault (GFF) ●
5: IGBT short-circuit (occ) ●
6: Over-current at stop (ocS) ●
7: Over-voltage during acceleration (ovA) ●
8: Over-voltage during deceleration (ovd) ●
9: Over-voltage during constant speed (ovn) ●
10: Over-voltage at stop (ovS) ●
11: Low-voltage during acceleration (LvA) ●
12: Low-voltage during deceleration (Lvd) ●
13: Low-voltage during constant speed (Lvn) ●
14: Low-voltage at stop (LvS ) ●
15: Phase loss protection (OrP) ●
16: IGBT over-heat (oH1) ●
17: Capacitance over-heat (oH2) ●
18: tH1o (TH1 open) ●
19: tH2o (TH2 open) ●
21: Drive over-load (oL) ●
22: Electronics thermal relay protection 1 (EoL1) ●
23: Electronics thermal relay 2 protection (EoL2) ●
24: Motor PTC overheat (oH3) (PTC / PT100) ●
26: Over-torque 1 (ot1) ●
27: Over-torque 2 (ot2) ●
28: Low current (uC) ●
29: Home limit error (LMIT) ●
30: Memory write-in error (cF1) ●
31: Memory read-out error (cF2) ●
33: U-phase current detection error (cd1) ●
34: V-phase current detection error (cd2) ●
35: W-phase current detection error (cd3) ●
36: Clamp current detection error (Hd0) ●
37: Over-current detection error (Hd1) ●
38: Over-voltage detection error (Hd2) ●
39: IGBT short-circuit detection error (Hd3) ●
40: Auto-tuning error (AUE) ●
12.1-06-12

Fault Code
41: PID feedback loss (AFE) ●
42: PG feedback error (PGF1) ●
43: PG feedback loss (PGF2) ●
44: PG feedback stall (PGF3) ●
45: PG slip error (PGF4) ●
48: Analog current input loss (ACE) ●
49: External fault input (EF) ●
50: Emergency stop (EF1) ●
51: External Base Block (bb) ●
52: Password error (Pcod) ●
54: Communication error (CE1) ●
58: Communication time-out (CE10) ●
60: Brake transistor error (bF) ●
61: Y-connection/∆-connection switch error (ydc) ●
62: Deceleration Energy Backup error (dEb) ●
63: Slip error (oSL) ●
64: Electromagnet switch error (ryF) ●
65: PG Card Error (PGF5) ●
68: Sensorless estimated speed have wrong
●
direction
69: Sensorless estimated speed is over speed ●
70: Sensorless estimated speed deviated ●
72: Channel 1 (STO1–SCM1) safety loop error
●
(STL1)
73: External safety gate S1 ●
75: external brake error ●
76: Safe Torque Off (STO) ●
77: Channel 2 (STO2–SCM2) safety loop error
●
(STL2)
78: Internal loop error (STL3) ●
82: U phase output phase loss (OPHL) ●
83: V phase output phase loss (OPHL) ●
84: W phase output phase loss (OPHL) ●
85: PG-02U ABZ hardware disconnection ●
86: PG-02U UVW hardware disconnection ●
12.1-06-13

Fault Code
89: Initial rotor position detection error ●
90: Inner PLC function is forced to stop ●
101: CANopen software disconnect 1 (CGdE) ●
102: CANopen software disconnect 2 (CHbE) ●
104: CANopen hardware disconnect (CbFE) ●
105: CANopen index setting error (CldE) ●
106: CANopen slave station number setting error
●
(CAdE)
107: CANopen index setting exceed limit (CFrE) ●
111: Internal communication overtime error (ictE) ●
112: PM sensorless shaft Lock error ●
 PTC Detection Selection / PT100 Motion

Default: 0
Settings 0: Warn and continue operation
3: No warning
 Sets the operation mode of a drive after you set Pr. 06-29 to define PTC / PT100 / KTY84
detection.
 PTC Level / KTY84 Level

Default: 50.0
 When Pr. 06-86 = 0, the setting range is 0.0–100.0, with unit %, and the default is 50.0%.
When Pr. 06-86 = 1, the setting range is 0.0–150.0, with unit ºC, and the default is 125.0ºC
 Sets AVI/ACI/AUI analog input function Pr. 03-00–03-02 to 6 [Positive Temperature Coefficient
(P.T.C.) thermistor input value].
 The AUI terminal does not support KTY84-130.
 Use this to set the PTC / KTY84 level, the corresponding value for 100% is the analog input
maximum value.
 When Pr. 06-86 is set as KTY84, Pr. 06-30 setting range and the unit changes automatically.
Frequency Command for Malfunction

Default: Read only
 When a malfunction occurs, check the current frequency command. If it happens again, it
overwrites the previous record.
12.1-06-14
Output Frequency at Malfunction

Default: Read only
 When a malfunction occurs, check the current output frequency. If it happens again, it overwrites
the previous record.
Output Voltage at Malfunction

Default: Read only
 When a malfunction occurs, check the current output voltage. If it happens again, it overwrites the
previous record.
DC Voltage at Malfunction
Default: Read only
 When a malfunction occurs, check the current DC voltage. If it happens again, it overwrites the
previous record.
Output Current at Malfunction

Default: Read only
Settings 0.0–6553.5 Amp
 When a malfunction occurs, check the current output current. If it happens again, it overwrites the
previous record.
IGBT Temperature at Malfunction

Default: Read only
Settings -3276.7–3276.7ºC
 When a malfunction occurs, check the current IGBT temperature. If it happens again, it
Capacitance Temperature at Malfunction

Default: Read only
Settings -3276.7–3276.7ºC
 When a malfunction occurs, check the current capacitance temperature. If it happens again, it
Motor Speed in rpm at Malfunction

Default: Read only
Settings -32767–32767 rpm
 When a malfunction occurs, check the current motor speed in rpm. If it happens again, it
12.1-06-15
Torque Command at Malfunction

Default: Read only
Settings -32767–32767%
 When a malfunction occurs, check the current torque command. If it happens again, it overwrites
the previous record.
Status of the Multi-function Input Terminal at Malfunction

Default: Read only
Settings 0000h–FFFFh
Status of the Multi-function Output Terminal at Malfunction
Default: Read only
 When a malfunction occurs, check the status of multi-function input / output terminals. If it
happens again, it overwrites the previous record.
Drive Status at Malfunction

Default: Read only
 When a malfunction occurs, check the current drive status (communication address 2101H). If it
happens again, it overwrites the previous record.
 STO Latch Selection

Default: 0
Settings 0: STO latch
1: STO no latch
 Pr. 06-44 = 0: STO Alarm Latch. After you clear the cause of the STO Alarm, use a Reset
command to clear the STO Alarm.
 Pr. 06-44 = 1: STO Alarm no Latch. After you clear the cause of the STO Alarm, the STO Alarm
clears automatically.
 All of STL1–STL3 errors are “Alarm Latch” mode (in STL1–STL3 mode, the Pr. 06-44 function is
no effective).
 Treatment to Output Phase Loss Protection (OPHL)

Default: 3
3: No warning
 The OPHL protect function is active when the setting is not 3.
 Detection Time of Output Phase Loss

Default: 3.000
12.1-06-16
 Current Detection Level for Output Phase Loss

Default: 1.00
Settings 0.00–100.00%
 DC Brake Time of Output Phase Loss
Default: 0.000
 Setting Pr. 06-48 to 0 disables the OPHL detection function.
 Status 1: The drive is in operation
When any phase is less than the Pr. 06-47 setting, and exceeds the Pr. 06-46 setting time, the
drive executes according to the Pr. 06-45 setting.
 Status 2: The drive is in STOP; Pr. 06-48 = 0 ; Pr. 07-02 ≠ 0

After the drive starts, the DC brake operates according to Pr. 07-01 and Pr. 07-02. During this
period, OPHL detection is not active. After the DC brake action is completed, the drive starts to
run, and enables the OPHL protection as mentioned above for status 1.
12.1-06-17
 Status 3: The drive is in STOP; Pr. 06-48 ≠ 0; Pr. 07-02 ≠ 0

When the drive starts, it executes Pr. 06-48 first, and then executes Pr. 07-02 (DC brake). The DC
brake current level in this state includes two parts: one is 20 times the Pr. 06-47 setting value in Pr.
06-48 setting time; the other is the Pr. 07-01 setting value in Pr. 07-02 setting time. In this period,
if an OPHL happens within the time for Pr. 06-48, the drive executes the Pr. 06-45 setting after the
drive starts counting for half the time of Pr. 06-48.
Status 3-1: Pr. 06-48 ≠ 0, Pr. 07-02 ≠ 0 (No OPHL detected before operation)
Status 3-2: Pr. 06-48≠0, Pr. 07-20≠0 (OPHL detected before operation)
12.1-06-18
 Status 4: The drive is in STOP; Pr. 06-48 ≠ 0; Pr. 07-02 = 0

When the drive starts, it executes Pr. 06-48 as the DC brake. The DC brake current level is 20
times the Pr. 06-47 setting value. In this period, if an OPHL happens within the time for Pr. 06-48,
the drive executes the Pr. 06-45 setting after the drive starts counting for half the time of Pr.06-48.
Status 4-1: Pr. 06-48 ≠ 0, Pr. 07-02 = 0 (No OPHL detected before operation)
Status 4-2: Pr. 06-48 ≠ 0, Pr. 07-02 = 0 (OPHL detected before operation)
 LvX Auto-reset
Default: 0
Settings 0: Disable
1: Enable
 Time for Input Phase Loss Detection
Default: 0.20
12.1-06-19
Capacitor oH Warning Level

Default: Depending
on the model power
Settings 0.0–110.0 degree
 Sets the over-heat warning level of the drive’s internal DCBUS capacitor.
 When the setting is less than 10.0 degree, the drive uses its internal capacitor oH warning level.
 Ripple of Input Phase Loss

Default:
30.0/60.0/75.0/90.0
460V series: 0.0–320.0 VDC
575V series: 0.0–400.0 VDC
690V series: 0.0–480.0 VDC
 Detected Input Phase Loss (OrP) Action
Default: 0
Settings 0: Warn and ramp to stop
 When the drive detects the DC BUS ripple exceeds the setting for Pr. 06-52, and lasts for the time
of Pr. 06-50 plus 30 seconds, the drive executes the input phase loss protection according to Pr.
06-53.
 During the time of Pr. 06-50 plus 30 seconds, if the DCBUS ripple drops lower than the setting for
Pr. 06-52, the Orp protection recalculates.
 Derating Protection
Default: 0
Settings 0: Constant rated current and limit carrier wave by load current and
temperature
1: Constant carrier frequency and limit load current by setting carrier wave
2: Constant rated current (same as setting 0), but close current limit
 The maximum output frequency and its corresponded carrier frequency lower limit under each
control mode:
 VF, SVC and VFPG: 600Hz, 6K
 FOCPG: 600Hz, 12K
 FOC sensorless (IM): 300Hz, 6K
 FOC sensorless (PM): 500Hz, 10K
 Setting 0:
When the operating point is greater than the derating curve, the rated current is constant,
and carrier frequency (Fc) output by the drive decreases automatically according to the ambient
temperature, overload output current and overload time. If overloads are not frequent, and the
concern is only about the carrier frequency operating with the rated current for a long time, and
changes to the carrier wave due to short overload are acceptable, set to 0.
12.1-06-20
Refer to Section 9-7 “Derating Curve of Ambient Temperature” for the level of carrier
frequency. Take VFD007C43A Normal Duty for example: ambient temperature 50ºC, UL Open
Type, and independent installation. When the carrier frequency is set to 15kHz, it corresponds to
75% of the rated output current. When the output current is higher than this value, it
automatically decreases the carrier wave according to the ambient temperature, output current
and overload time. At this time, the overload capacity of the drive is still 120% of the rated
current.
 Setting 1:
When the operating point exceeds derating curve 1, the carrier frequency is fixed to the set
value. Select this mode if the change of carrier wave and motor noise caused by ambient
temperature and frequent overload are not acceptable. Refer to Pr.00-17.
Refer to Section 9-7 “Derating Curve of Ambient Temperature” for the derating level of the
rated current. Take VFD007C43A Normal Duty for example, when the carrier frequency
maintains at 15kHz, the rated current decreases to 72%. The oL protection executes when the
current is 120%*72%=86% for one minute; therefore, it must operate by the curve to keep the
carrier frequency.
 Setting 2:
The protection method and action are the same as setting it to 0, but this disables the
current limit when output current is the derating ratio ×180% (default value). The advantage is
that this can provide a higher starting output current when the carrier frequency setting is higher
than the default. The disadvantage is that the carrier wave derates easily when it overloads.
Example: when Pr. 06-55 = 0 or 1, over-current stall prevention level = ratio * Pr. 06-03. When Pr.
06-55 = 2, the over-current stall prevention level = Pr. 06-03.
 Use with the settings for Pr. 00-16 and Pr. 00-17.
 The ambient temperature also affects the derating; refer to Section 9-7 “Ambient Temperature
Derating Curve”. Take VFD007C43A Normal Duty for example, ambient temperature 50ºC, UL
Open Type, and independent installation. When the carrier frequency is set to 15kHz, it
corresponds to 72% of the rated output current. The ambient temperature 60ºC corresponds to
72% * 80% of the rated output current.
 PT100 Voltage Level 1

Default: 5.000
Settings 0.000–10.000 V
 PT100 Voltage Level 2
Default: 7.000
Settings 0.000–10.000V
 Condition settings: Pr. 06-57 > Pr. 06-56.
 PT100 Level 1 Frequency Protection

Default: 0.00
12.1-06-21
 PT100 Activation Level 1 Protection Frequency Delay Time

Default: 60
Settings 0–6000 sec.
 PT100 operation instructions
(1) Use voltage type analog input (AVI, AUI, and ACI voltage 0–10 V) and select PT100 mode.
(2) Select one of the voltage type analog inputs below: (a) AVI (Pr. 03-00=11), (b) AUI (Pr.
03-02=11), or (c) ACI (Pr. 03-01=11 and Pr. 03-29=1).
(3) When selecting Pr. 03-01 = 11 and Pr. 03-29 = 1, you must switch SW4 to 0–10V for the
external I/O board.
(4) The AFM2 outputs constant voltage or current, then Pr. 03-23 = 23. You must switch AFM2
SW2 to 0–20mA for the external I/O board, and set AFM2 output level to 45% (Pr. 03-33 =
45%) of 20 mA = 9 mA.
(5) Use Pr. 03-33 to adjust the constant voltage or constant current of the AFM2 output; the
setting range is 0–100.00%.
(6) There are two types of action levels for PT100. The diagram below shows the PT100
protecting action.
(7) PT100 wiring diagram:
Figure 1
12.1-06-22
 When Pr. 06-58 = 0.00Hz, PT100 function is disabled.
Example:
When using PT100, if the motor temperature is higher than 135ºC (275°F), the drive starts to
count the delay time for auto-deceleration (Pr. 06-59). The drive decreases the motor frequency
to the setting for Pr. 06-58 when it reaches the delay time count value. The drive operates at the
frequency set for Pr.06-58 until the motor temperature is lower than 135°C (275°F). If the motor
temperature is higher than 150°C (302°F), the drive automatically decelerates to STOP and
displays the warning “oH3”.
Set up process:
1. Switch AFM2 to 0–20mA on the I/O control terminal block. (Refer to Figure 1, PT100 wiring
diagram)
2. Wiring (Refer to Figure 1, PT100 wiring diagram):
Connect external terminal AFM2 to (+)
Connect external terminal ACM to (-)
Connect external terminals AFM2 and AVI to “short-circuit”
3. Set Pr. 03-00 = 11, Pr. 03-23 = 23 or Pr. 03-33 = 45% (9mA)
4. Refer to the RTD temperature and resistance comparison table
Temperature = 135ºC, resistance = 151.71; input current: 9mA, voltage: about 1.37VDC
Temperature = 150ºC, resistance = 157.33; input current: 9mA, voltage: about 1.42VDC
5. When the RTD temperature > 135ºC, the drive decelerates to the specified operation
frequency automatically. Then, Pr. 06-56 = 1.37 and Pr. 06-58 = 10 Hz. When Pr. 06-58 = 0,
it disables the specified operation frequency.
6. When the RTD temperature > 150ºC, the drive outputs a fault, decelerates to STOP, and
displays the warning “oH3”. Then, Pr. 06-57 = 1.42 and Pr. 06-29 = 1 (warn and ramp to
stop).
 Software Detection GFF Current Level

Default: 60.0
Settings 0.0–6553.5 %
 Software Detection GFF Filter Time
Default: 0.10
 When the drive detects that the unbalanced three-phase output current is higher than the setting
for Pr. 06-60, GFF protection activates. The drive then stops output.
 dEb Reset Bias Level

Default: 20.0 / 40.0
460V series: 0.0–200.0 VDC
 Prevents action vibration caused by dEb action level = reset level. dEb active level + Pr. 06-62 =
dEb reset bias level.
12.1-06-23
Operation Time of Fault Record 1 (Day)

Default: Read only
Settings 0–65535 days
Operation Time of Fault Record 1 (Min.)

Default: Read only
Settings 0–1439 min.
 If there is any malfunctions when the drive operates, Pr. 06-17–Pr. 06-22 records the
malfunctions, and Pr. 06-63–Pr. 06-70 records the operation time for four sequential malfunctions.
Check if there is any problem with the drive according to the interval of the recorded fault.
Example:
The first error: ocA occurs after motor drive operates for 1000 minutes.
The second error: ocd occurs after another 1000 minutes.
The third error: ocn occurs after another 1000 minutes.
The fourth error: ocA occurs after another 1000 minutes.
The fifth error: ocd occurs after another 1000 minutes.
The sixth error: ocn occurs after another 1000 minutes.
Then Pr.06-17–06-22 and Pr.06-63–06-70 are recorded as follows:
1st fault 2nd fault 3rd fault 4th fault 5th fault 6th fault
Pr.06-17 ocA ocd ocn ocA ocd ocn
Pr.06-18 0 ocA ocd ocn ocA ocd
Pr.06-19 0 0 ocA ocd ocn ocA
Pr.06-20 0 0 0 ocA ocd ocn
Pr.06-21 0 0 0 0 ocA ocd
Pr.06-22 0 0 0 0 0 ocA
Pr.06-63 0 1 2 2 3 4
Pr.06-64 1000 560 120 1120 680 240
Pr.06-65 0 0 1 2 2 3
Pr.06-66 0 1000 560 120 1120 680
Pr.06-67 0 0 0 1 2 2
Pr.06-68 0 0 1000 560 120 1120
Pr.06-69 0 0 0 0 1 2
Pr.06-70 0 0 0 1000 560 120
※By examining the time record, you can see that that the last fault (Pr.06-17) happened after the
drive ran for 4 days and 240 minutes.
12.1-06-24
 Low Current Setting Level

Default: 0.0
 Low Current Detection Time
Default: 0.00
 Low Current Action

Default: 0
2: Warn and ramp to stop by the 2nd deceleration time
 The drive operates according to the setting for Pr. 06-73 when the output current is lower than the
setting for Pr. 06-71 and when the time of the low current exceeds the detection time for Pr. 06-72.
Use this parameter with the external multi-function output terminal 44 (for low current output).
 The low current detection function does not execute when drive is in sleep or standby status.
 Sets Pr. 06-71 low current level according to the drive’s rated current, the equation is Pr. 00-01
(drive’s rated current) x Pr. 06-71 (low current setting level)% = low current detection level (A).
The drive changes the setting for Pr. 00-01 (rated current) according to the setting for Pr. 00-16
(load selection).
 PTC Type
Default: 0
Settings 0: PTC
1: KTY84-130
 When using KTY84-130, a divider resistance (2kΩ , power > 1/4W, ±0.1%) is needed.
 Wiring diagram is as below:
12.1-06-25
T (°C) C2000 / KTY84-130 Temperature and voltage diagram

200
y = 79.717x - 156.64
100
C2000
Linear (C2000)
0
1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 3.50 4.00
-100
Analog voltage (V)
 When the temperature exceeds the setting level, an oH3 error occurs to the drive. Reset
conditions: when the temperature is below the trigger level -5ºC, the oH3 error is cleared.
 When the KTY is not connected, or the KTY is burned, the calculated temperature is beyond
-40–150ºC, the temperature is displayed as its lower limit (-40ºC) or upper limit (150ºC) without
additional error information. At this time, the drive still trips up the oH3 error, check if the
installation is correct.
 When the temperature detection warning occurs to the KTY-84, select the action according to Pr.
06-29.
12.1-06-26
07 Special Parameters  This parameter can be set during operation.
 Software Brake Level

Default:
370.0/740.0/895.0/1057.0
460V series: 700.0–900.0 VDC
575V series: 850.0–1116.0 VDC
690V series: 939.0–1318.0 VDC
 Sets the brake transistor level for the DC BUS voltage. Choose a suitable brake resistor to
achieve the best deceleration. Refer to Chapter 7 Optional Accessories for information about
brake resistors.
 This parameter is only valid for the models below 30kW of 460 series and 22kW of 230 series.
 DC Brake Current Level

Default: 0
Settings 0–100%
 Sets the level of the DC brake current output to the motor during start-up and stop. When you set
the DC brake current percentage, the rated current is regarded as 100%. Start with a low DC
brake current level, and increase it slowly until the proper brake torque is reached. However, to
avoid burning the motor, the DC brake current can NOT exceed the rated current. Therefore, DO
NOT use the DC brake for mechanical retention, otherwise injury or accident may occur.
 The PM has the magnetic field itself, using the DC brake may possibly cause the motor run in a
reverse direction, therefore, it is not recommended to use DC brake for PM.
 DC Brake Time at RUN

Default: 0.0
 The motor may continue rotating after the drive stops output due to external forces or the inertia
of the motor itself. If you use the drive with the motor rotating, it may cause motor damage or
trigger drive protection due to over-current. This parameter outputs DC current, generating torque
to force the motor stop to get a stable start before motor operation. This parameter determines
the duration of the DC brake current output to the motor when the drive starts up. Setting this
parameter to 0.0 disables the DC brake at start-up.
 The PM has the magnetic field itself, using the DC brake may possibly cause the motor run in a
reverse direction, therefore, it is not recommended to use DC brake for PM. Use Pr. 10-49 zero
voltage command to force the motor decelerate or to stop.
 DC Brake Time at STOP

Default: 0.0
 The motor may continue rotating after the drive stops output due to external forces or the inertia
of the motor itself. This parameter outputs DC current, generating torque to force the drive stop
after the drive stops output to make sure that the motor stops.
12.1-07-1
 This parameter determines the duration of the DC brake current output to the motor when braking.
To enable DC brake at STOP, set Pr. 00-22 (Stop Method) to 0 (ramp to stop). The DC brake is
invalid when Pr. 07-03 is set to 0.0.
 Related parameters: Pr. 00-22 Stop Method, Pr. 07-04 DC Brake Frequency at STOP.
 DC Brake Frequency at STOP

Default: 0.00
 This parameter determines the start frequency of the DC brake before the drive ramps to stop.
When this setting is less than Pr.01-09 (Start-up Frequency), the start frequency of the DC brake
starts from the minimum frequency.
 Use the DC brake before running the motor when the load is movable at stop, such as with fans
and pumps. The motor is in free operating status and in unknown rotation direction before the
drive starts up. Execute the DC brake before you start the motor.
 Use DC Brake at STOP when you need to brake the motor quickly or to control the positioning,
such as with cranes or cutting machines.
 Voltage Increasing Gain

Default: 100
Settings 1–200%
 When using speed tracking, adjust Pr. 07-05 to slow down the increasing voltage gain if there are
errors such as oL or oc; however, the speed tracking time will be longer.
 Restart after Momentary Power Loss

Default: 0
Settings 0: Stop operation
1: Speed tracking by speed before the power loss
 Determines the operation mode when the drive restarts from a momentary power loss.
 The power system connected to the drive may power off momentarily due to many reasons. This
function allows the drive to keep outputting after the drive is repowered and does not cause the
drive to stop.
 Setting 1: Frequency tracking begins before momentary power loss and accelerates to the
master Frequency command after the drive output frequency and motor rotator speed are
synchronous. Use this setting when there is a lot of inertia with little resistance on the motor load.
12.1-07-2
For example, in equipment with a large inertia flywheel, there is NO need to wait until the
flywheel stops completely after a restart to execute the operation command; therefore, it saves
time.
 Setting 2: Frequency tracking starts from the minimum output frequency and accelerates to the
master Frequency command after the drive output frequency and motor rotator speed are
synchronous. Use this setting when there is little inertia and large resistance.
 In PG control mode, the AC motor drive executes the speed tracking function automatically
according to the PG speed when this setting is NOT set to 0.
 This function is only valid when the RUN command is enabled.
 Allowed Power Loss Duration

Default: 2.0
 Determines the maximum time of allowable power loss. If the duration of a power loss exceeds
this parameter setting, the AC motor drive stops output.
 Pr.07-06 is valid when the maximum allowable power loss time is  20 seconds and the AC motor
drive displays “Lv”. If the AC motor drive is powered off due to overload, even if the maximum
allowable power loss time is  20 seconds, the operation mode set in Pr.07-06 does not execute.
 Base block Time

Default: Depending
on the model power
 When momentary power loss is detected, the AC motor drive blocks its output and then waits for
a specified period of time (determined by Pr. 07-08, called Base Block Time) before resuming
operation. Set this parameter to the time that allows the residual voltage at the output side to
decrease to 0 V before activating the drive again.
 This parameter is not only for the B.B. time, but also is the re-start delay time after free run.
 The RUN command during a free run operation is memorized, and runs or stops with the last
frequency command after the delay time.
 This delay time is only applicable in “Re-start after coast to stop” status, and does not limit ramp
to stop. The coast to stop can be caused by various control command source, or by errors.
 Following table is the recommended setting for re-start delay time of each model power. You must
set Pr. 07-08 according to this table (the default of each model power is based on this table as
well).
kW 007 015 022 037 055 075 110 150 185 220 300 370 450 550 750 900
HP 1 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 120
Delay time (sec.) 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8
kW 1100 1320 1600 1850 2200 2800 3150 3550 4000 5000
HP 150 175 215 250 300 375 425 475 536 650
Delay time (sec.) 1.9 2 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8
12.1-07-3
12.1-07-4
 Current Limit of Speed Tracking

Default: 100
Settings 20–200%
 The AC motor drive executes speed tracking only if the output current is greater than the value
set in Pr. 07-09.
 The maximum current for speed tracking affects the synchronous time. The larger the parameter
setting is, the faster the synchronization occurs. However, if the parameter setting is too large, the
overload protection function may be activated.
 Restart after Fault Action

Default: 0
Settings 0: Stop operation
1: Speed tracking by current speed
 Faults include: bb, oc, ov and occ. To restart after oc, ov and occ, you can NOT set Pr. 07-11 to 0.
 Number of Times of Restart after Fault

Default: 0
Settings 0–10
 After fault (oc, ov and occ) occurs, the AC motor drive can reset and restart automatically up to 10
times. When Pr. 07-11 is set to 0, the auto-reset / restart function is disabled after fault. The drive
re-starts according to the setting for Pr. 07-10.
 If the number of faults exceeds the Pr. 07-11 setting, the drive does not reset and restart until you
press “RESET” manually and execute the operation command again.
 Speed Tracking during Start-up

Default: 0
Settings 0: Disable
1: Speed tracking by maximum output frequency
2: Speed tracking by motor frequency at start
 Speed tracking is suitable for punch, fans and other large inertia loads. For example, a
mechanical punch usually has a large inertia flywheel, and the general stop method is coast to
stop. If it needs to be restarted again, the flywheel may take 2–5 minutes or longer to stop. This
parameter setting allows you to start the flywheel operating again without waiting until the
flywheel stops completely. If you can use the speed feedback function (PG + Encoder), this
speed tracking function will be faster and more accurate. Set Pr. 07-09 as the tartget of the output
current (the maximum current of speed tracking).
12.1-07-5
 When using PM, Pr. 07-12 ≠ 0, the speed tracking function is enabled. When Pr. 07-12 = 1, 2 or 3,
the output frequency converts to the actual rotor speed from zero-speed.
 dEb Function Selection

Default: 0
Settings 0: Disable
1: dEb with auto-acceleration / auto-deceleration, the drive does not output
the frequency after the power is restored.
2: dEb with auto acceleration / auto-deceleration, the drive outputs the
frequency after the power is restored.
3: dEb low-voltage control, then increase to 350VDC / 700VDC and decelerate
to stop
4: dEb high-voltage control of 350VDC / 700VDC and decelerate to stop
 dEb (Deceleration Energy Backup) lets the motor decelerate to stop when momentary power loss
occurs. When the power loss is instantaneous, use this function to let the motor decelerate to
zero speed. If the power recovers at this time, the drive restarts the motor after the dEb return
time.
 Lv return level: Default value depends on the drive power model
Frame A, B, C, D = Pr. 06-00 + 60V/30V (230V series)
Frame E and above = Pr. 06-00 + 80V/40V (230V series)
 Lv level: Default = Pr. 06-00
 During dEb operation, other protection such as ryF, ov, oc, occ and EF may interrupt it, and these
error codes are recorded.
 The STOP (RESET) command does not work during the dEb auto-deceleration, and the drive
continues decelerating to stop. To make the drive coast to stop immediately, use another function
(EF) instead.
 The B.B. function does not work when executing dEb. The B.B. function is enabled after the dEb
function finishes.
 Even though the Lv warning does not display during dEb operation, if the DC BUS voltage is
lower than the Lv level, MOx = 10 (Low voltage warning) still operates.
 The following explains the dEb action:
When the DC voltage drops below the dEb setting level, the dEb function starts to work (soft start
relay remains closed), and the drive executes auto-deceleration.
 Situation 1: Momentary power loss, or power current too low and unstable, or power supply
sliding down because of sudden heavy load.
Pr. 07-13=1, “dEb active, DC BUS voltage returns, output frequency does not return” and power
recovers.
When the power recovers and DC BUS voltage exceeds the dEb return level, the drive linearly
decelerates to 0 Hz and stops. The keypad displays the ”dEb” warning until you manually reset
it, so that you can see the reason for the stop.
12.1-07-6
 Situation 2: Momentary power loss, or power current too low and unstable, or power supply
sliding down because of sudden heavy load.
Pr. 07-13=2 “dEb active, DC BUS voltage returns, output frequency returns” and power
recovers.
During the dEb deceleration (includes 0 Hz run), if the power recovers higher than dEb
return level, the drive maintains the frequency for the set time of Pr. 07-14 (default = 3 sec.)
and then accelerates again. The dEb warning on the keypad clears automatically.
12.1-07-7
 Situation 3: Power supply unexpected shut down or power loss

Pr. 07-13=1 “dEb active, DC BUS voltage returns, the output frequency does not return” and
the power does not recover.
The keypad displays the “dEb” warning and stops after decelerating to the lowest running
frequency. When the DC BUS voltage is lower than the Lv level, the drive disconnects the
soft start relay until the power completely runs out.
 Situation 4:
Pr. 07-13=2 “dEb active, DCBUS voltage returns, the output frequency returns” and power
does not recover.
The drive decelerates to 0 Hz. The DC BUS voltage continues to decrease until the voltage
is lower than the Lv level, and then the drive disconnects the soft start relay. The keypad
displays “dEb” warning until the drive completely runs out of power.
 Situation 5:
Pr. 07-13=2 “dEb low voltage control, when the speed is lower than 1/4 rated motor speed,
DCBUS voltage rises to 350VDC / 700VDC, the drive ramps to stop.
The drive decelerates to 0 Hz. The DC BUS voltage continues to decrease until the voltage
is lower than the Lv level, and then the drive disconnects the soft start relay. The soft start
relay closes again after the power recovers and the DC BUS voltage is higher than the Lv
return level. When the DC BUS voltage is higher than the dEb return level, the drive
maintains the frequency for the set time of Pr. 07-14 (default = 3 sec.) and starts to
accelerate linearly, and the dEb warning on the keypad clears automatically.
 Situation 6:
Pr. 07-13=4, dEb high-voltage control
When dEb occurs, the DC BUS voltage control level rises to 350VDC / 700VDC to ramp to stop.
Even though the power recovers and the frequency does not return, dEb activates until the
motor decelerates to 0Hz.
12.1-07-8
(1) When dEb activates, it sends dEb warning. When the output frequency reaches 0Hz, the
operation status is STOP and disables the dEb function, the dEb warning continues.
(2) If power does not recover, the DC BUS voltage drops until reaches the Lv level, the drive
LvS error occurs (keypad displays LvS error that covers the dEb display), the Soft Start
Relay will be OFF.
 dEb Function Reset Time

Default: 3.0
 dEb (Deceleration Energy Backup) lets the motor decelerate to stop when momentary power
loss occurs. When the power loss is instantaneous, use this function to let the motor decelerate
to zero speed.
 Dwell Time at Acceleration

Default: 0.00
 Dwell Time at Deceleration
Default: 0.00
Settings 0.00–600.00 sec .
 Dwell Frequency at Acceleration
Default: 0.00
 Dwell Frequency at Deceleration
Default: 0.00
 In the heavy load situation, Dwell can make stable output frequency temporarily, such as crane or
elevator.
 When the load is heavier, use Pr. 07-15–Pr. 07-18 to avoid ov or oc protection.
12.1-07-9
 Fan Cooling Control

Default: 0
Settings 0: Fan always ON
1: Fan is OFF after AC motor drive stops for one minute
2: Fan is ON when AC motor drive runs; fan is OFF when AC motor drive
stops
3: Fan turns ON when temperature (IGBT) reaches around 60oC
4: Fan always OFF
 Use this parameter to control the fan.
 0: Fan runs immediately when the drive power is turned ON.
 1: Fan runs when AC motor drive runs. One minute after AC motor drive stops, the fan is OFF.
 2: Fan runs when AC motor drive runs and stops immediately when AC motor drive stops.
 3: When temperature of the IGBT or capacitance is higher than 60°C, the fan runs.
When temperature of the IGBT and capacitance are both lower than 40°C, the fan stops.
 4: Fan is always OFF
 The control parameters for the applicable fan of each frame are as below:
Frame Heat Sink Fan Capacitor Fan
A Pr. 07-19 No capacitor fan
B Pr. 07-19 Pr. 07-19
Pr. 07-19
C Pr. 07-19
230V series: always ON
D0 Pr. 07-19 Pr. 07-19
D Pr. 07-19 ON
E Pr. 07-19 Pr. 07-19
F Pr. 07-19 Pr. 07-19
G Pr. 07-19 No capacitor fan
H Pr. 07-19 No capacitor fan
 Emergency Stop (EF) & Force to Stop Selection

Default: 0
Settings 0: Coast to stop
1: Stop by the 1st deceleration time
2: Stop by the 2nd deceleration time
3: Stop by the 3rd deceleration time
4: Stop by the 4th deceleration time
6: Automatic deceleration
 When the multi-function input terminal is set to EF input (setting 10) or force to stop (setting 18)
and the terminal contact is ON, the drive stops according to the setting of this parameter.
12.1-07-10
 Automatic Energy-saving Selection

Default: 0
Settings 0: Disable
1: Enable
 When energy-saving is enabled, the motor acceleration operates with full voltage. During
constant speed operation, it automatically calculates the best voltage value according to the load
power. This function is not suitable for fluctuating loads or loads which are nearly full during
operation.
 When the output frequency is constant (that is, constant operation), the output voltage decreases
automatically as the load decreases. Therefore, the drive operates with minimum multiplication of
voltage and current (electric power).
 FOCPG IM:
Steady-speed: Torque current is lower than rated current for 0.35 times and entry into energy
saving mode after 5 seconds.
Return: Torque current is higher than 0.5 times of rated current.
12.1-07-11
 VF, VFPG, SVC mode:

Steady-speed: When output is light load, entry into energy saving mode after 5 seconds.
Return: When the drive is continuously adding loads, or in non-steady speed status.
 FOCPM and FOC sensorless control mode, disable.
 Energy-saving Gain
Default: 100
Settings 10–1000%
 When Pr. 07-21 is set to 1, use this parameter to adjust the energy-saving gain. The default is
100%. If the result is not satisfactory, adjust it by decreasing the setting value. If the motor
oscillates, then increase the setting value.
 In certain applications such as high speed spindles, the temperature rise in the motor is a major
concern. When the motor is not in working state, reduce the motor current to a lower level.
Reduce this parameter setting to meet this requirement.
 Auto Voltage Regulation (AVR) Function

Default: 0
Settings 0: Enable AVR
1: Disable AVR
2: Disable AVR during deceleration
 The rated voltage of the motor is usually 200VAC–240VAC (380VAC–480VAC), 60Hz/50Hz and the
input voltage of the AC motor drive may vary between 170VAC–264VAC (323VAC–528VAC),
50Hz/60Hz. Therefore, when the AC motor drive is used without the AVR function, the output
voltage is the same as the input voltage. When the motor runs at the voltage exceeding
12%–20% of the rated voltage, it causes higher temperature, damaged insulation, and unstable
torque output, which result in losses due to shorter motor lifetime.
 The AVR function automatically regulates the output voltage of the AC motor drive to the motor
rated voltage. For example, if the V/F curve is set at 200VAC / 50Hz and the input voltage is at
200VAC to 264VAC, then the drive automatically reduces the output voltage to the motor to a
maximum of 200VAC / 50Hz. If the input voltage is at 170VAC to 200VAC, the output voltage to
motor and input power are in direct proportion.
 0: When the AVR function is enabled, the drive calculates the output voltage according to the
actual DC BUS voltage. The output voltage does NOT change when the DC BUS voltage
changes.
12.1-07-12
 1: When the AVR function is disabled, the drive calculates the output voltage according to the
actual DC BUS voltage. The DC BUS voltage changes the output voltage, and may cause
insufficient or over-current or shock.
 2: the drive disables the AVR function when decelerating to stop, and may accelerate to brake.
 When the motor ramps to stop, the deceleration time is shorter when setting this parameter to 2
with auto-acceleration and deceleration, and the deceleration is quicker and more stable.
 When the control mode is set as FOCPG or TQCPG, it is recommended to set this parameter to 0
(enable AVR).
 Torque Command Filter Time (V/F and SVC Control Mode)

Default: 0.500
 When the setting is too long, the control is stable but the control response is delayed. When the
setting is too short, the response is quick but the control may be unstable. Adjust the setting
according to the stability of the control and response times.
 Slip Compensation Filter Time (V/F and SVC Control Mode)

Default: 0.100
 Change the compensation response time with Pr.07-24 and Pr.07-25.
 If you set Pr.07-24 and Pr.07-25 to 10 seconds, the compensation response time is the slowest;
however, the system may be unstable if you set the time too short.
 Torque Compensation Gain (V/F and SVC control mode)

Default: 0
Settings IM: 0–10 (when Pr. 05-33 = 0)
PM: 0–5000 (when Pr. 05-33 = 1 or 2)
 Only applicable in IMVF and PMSVC control mode.
 With a large motor load, a part of drive output voltage is absorbed by the stator winding resistor;
therefore, the air gap magnetic field is insufficient. This causes insufficient voltage at motor
induction and results in excessive output current but insufficient output torque. Auto-torque
compensation can automatically adjust the output voltage according to the load and keep the air
gap magnetic fields stable to get the optimal operation
 In the V/F control, the voltage decreases in direct proportion with decreasing frequency. It
reduces the torque decrease at low speed due to the AC impedance while the DC resistor is
unchanged. The auto-torque compensation function increases the output voltage at low
frequency to get a higher starting torque.
 When the compensation gain is set too large, it may cause motor over-flux and result in a too
large output current, overheating the motor or triggering the protection function.
 This parameter affects the output current when the drive runs. But the effect is smaller at the
low-speed area.
 Set this parameter higher when the no-load current is too large, but the motor may vibrate if the
setting is too high. If the motor vibrates when operating, reduce the setting.
12.1-07-13
 Slip Compensation Gain (V/F and SVC control mode)

Default: 0.00
(1.00 in SVC mode)
 The induction motor needs constant slip to produce magnetic torque. It can be ignored at higher
motor speeds, such as rated speed or 2–3% of slip.
 In operation, the slip and the synchronous frequency are in reverse proportion to produce the
same magnetic torque. The slip is larger with the reduction of synchronous frequency. The motor
may stop when the synchronous frequency decreases to a specific value. Therefore, the slip
seriously affects the motor speed accuracy at low speed.
 In another situation, when you use an induction motor with the drive, the slip increases when the
load increases. It also affects the motor speed accuracy.
 Use this parameter to set the compensation frequency, and reduce the slip to maintain the
synchronous speed when the motor runs at the rated current in order to improve the accuracy of
the drive. When the drive output current is higher than Pr.05-05 (No-load Current of Induction
Motor 1 (A)), the drive compensates the frequency with this parameter.
 This parameter is set to 1.00 automatically when Pr.00-11 (Speed Control Method) is changed
from V/F mode to vector mode. Apply the slip compensation after load and acceleration. Increase
the compensation value from small to large gradually; add the output frequency with motor rated
slip * Pr.07-27 (Slip Compensation Gain) when the motor is at the rated load. If the actual speed
ratio is slower than expected, increase the parameter setting value; otherwise, decrease the
setting value.
 Slip Deviation Level

Default: 0
Settings 0.0–100.0%
0: No detection
 Over Slip Deviation Detection Time
Default: 1.0
 Over Slip Deviation Treatment
Default: 0
3: No warning
 Pr. 07-29 to Pr. 07-31 set the allowable slip level / time and the over-slip action when the drive is
running.
12.1-07-14
 Motor Shock Compensation Factor

Default: 1000
Settings 0–10000
0: Disable
 If there are current wave motions in the motor in some specific area, setting this parameter can
effectively improve this situation. When running with high frequency or PG, set this parameter to 0.
When the current wave motion occurs in low frequency and high-power, increase the value for Pr.
07-32.
 Auto-restart Interval of Fault

Default: 60.0
 When a reset / restart occurs after a fault, the drive uses Pr. 07-33 as a timer and starts counting
the numbers of faults within this time period. Within this period, if the number of faults does not
exceed the setting for Pr. 07-11, the counting clears and starts from 0 when the next fault occurs.
 PMSVC Voltage Feedback Forward Gain

Default: 1.00
 Adjusts the PMSVC voltage feedback forward gain, and to meet the demand of rapid feedback
application.
 Pr. 07-38=1.00 means forward feedback = Ke * motor rotor speed
 Refer to Section 12-2 “PMSVC adjustment” for details.
 dEb Gain (Kp)

Default: 8000
Settings 0–65535
 dEb Gain (Ki)
Default: 150
Settings 0–65535
 Sets the PI gain of DC BUS voltage controller when the dEb function activates.
 If the DCBUS voltage drops too fast, or the speed vibration occurs during deceleration after the
dEb function activates, adjust Pr. 07-62 and Pr. 07-63. Increase the Kp setting to accelerate the
control response, but the vibration may occurs if the setting is too large. Use Ki parameter to
decrease the steady-state error to zero, increase the setting to accelerate the response speed.
12.1-07-15
08 High-function PID Parameters  This parameter can be set during operation.
 Terminal Selection of PID Feedback

Default:0
1: Negative PID feedback: by analog input (Pr. 03-00–03-02)
2: Negative PID feedback: by PG card pulse input, without direction
(Pr. 10-02)
3: Negative PID feedback: by PG card pulse input, with direction
(Pr. 10-02)
4: Positive PID feedback: by analog input (Pr. 03-00–03-02)
5: Positive PID feedback: by PG card pulse input, without direction
(Pr. 10-02)
6: Positive PID feedback: by PG card pulse input, with direction
(Pr. 10-02)
7: Negative PID feedback: by communication protocol
8: Positive PID feedback: by communication protocol
 Pr. 08-00 ≠ 0 enables the PID function.
 Negative feedback means:
+target value – feedback. The detection value increases by increasing the output frequency.
 Positive feedback means:
-target value + feedback. The detection value decreases by increasing the output frequency.
 When Pr. 08-00 ≠ 7 neither ≠ 8, the input value is disabled. The value of the setting does not
remain the same after the drive is off.
 Related applicable parameters: Pr. 00-20, Pr. 03-00–03-02
When enable the PID function (Pr. 08-00 ≠ 0), if Pr. 00-20 is set to 2 “External analog input”, Pr.
03-00–03-02 need to be set to 4 “PID target value” accordingly.
12.1-08-1
Master Frequency Command (AUTO) Source / Source Selection of the PID Target
Default: 0
1: RS-485 serial communication
2: External analog input (Refer to Pr. 03-00)
3: External UP/DOWN terminal
4: Pulse input without direction command (Pr. 10-16 without direction), use
with PG card
5: Pulse input with direction command (Pr. 10-16), use with PG card
 Analog Input Selection (AVI)

 Analog Input Selection (ACI)
 Analog Input Selection (AUI)
Default: 0
Settings
4: PID target value
Common applications for PID control:

 Flow control: Use a flow sensor to feedback the flow data and perform accurate flow
control.
 Pressure control: Use a pressure sensor to feedback the pressure data and perform
precise pressure control.
 Air volume control: Use an air volume sensor to feedback the air volume data to achieve
excellent air volume regulation.
 Temperature control: Use a thermocouple or thermistor to feedback temperature data for
comfortable temperature control.
 Speed control: Use a speed sensor or encoder to feedback motor shaft speed or input
another machine speed as a target value for closed loop speed control of the master-slave
operation. Pr.10-00 sets the PID set point source (target value).
PID control loop:
12.1-08-2
Concept of PID control

 Proportional gain (P):
The output is proportional to input. With only proportional gain control, there is always a
steady-state error.
Adjustment: Turn off the Ti and Td, or remain Ti and Td in constant value, then adjust the
proportional gain (P).
Increase: Faster status feedback, but excessive adjustment will increase the overshoot.
Decrease: Smaller overshoot, but excessive adjustment will slow down the transient
response.
 Integral time (I):
The controller output is proportional to the integral of the controller input. To eliminate the
steady-state error, add an “integral part” to the controller. The integral time controls the
relation between integral part and the error. The integral part increases over time even if
the error is small. It gradually increases the controller output to eliminate the error until it is
zero. This stabilizes the system without a steady-state error by using proportional gain
control and integral time control.
Adjustment: The integral time (I) accumulates from the time difference, if the vibration cycle
is longer than the setting for integral time, the integration enhances. Increase
the integral time (I) to reduce the vibration.
Increase: Reduce the overshoot, excessive adjustment causes worse transient response.
Decrease: Faster transient response, but the transient time will be longer, and takes more
time to achieve the steady state. Excessive adjustment causes larger
overshoot.
 Differential control (D):
The controller output is proportional to the differential of the controller input. During
elimination of the error, oscillation or instability may occur. Use the differential control to
suppress these effects by acting before the error. That is, when the error is near zero, the
differential control should be zero. Use proportional gain (P) and differential control (D) to
improve the system state during PID adjustment.
Adjustment: When the vibration cycle is shorter and continuous, it means that the
differential time setting is too large, and causes excessive output. Decrease
the setting of D gain to reduce the vibration. If the D gain is set to 0, adjust the
PID control again.
Using PID control in a constant pressure pump feedback application:

Set the application’s constant pressure value (bar) to be the set point of PID control. The
pressure sensor sends the actual value as the PID feedback value. After comparing the PID set
point and PID feedback, an error displays. The PID controller calculates the output by using
proportional gain (P), integral time (I) and differential time (D) to control the pump. It controls the
drive to use a different pump speed and achieves constant pressure control by using a 4–20mA
signal corresponding to 0–10 bar as feedback to the drive.
12.1-08-3
 Pr. 00-04 = 10 (Display PID feedback (b) (%)).

 Pr. 01-12 Acceleration Time is set as according to actual conditions.
 Pr. 01-13 Deceleration Time is set as according to actual conditions.
 Pr. 00-21 = 0 to operate through the digital keypad.
 Pr. 00-20 = 0, the digital keypad controls the set point.
 Pr. 08-00 = 1 (Negative PID feedback from analog input)
 ACI analog input Pr. 03-01 = 5, PID feedback signal.
 Pr. 08-01–08-03 is set according to actual conditions:
If there is no vibration in the system, increase Pr. 08-01 (Proportional Gain (P))
If there is no vibration in the system, decrease Pr. 08-02 (Integral Time (I))
If there is no vibration in the system, increase Pr. 08-03 (Differential Time(D))
 Refer to Pr. 08-00 to Pr. 08-21 for PID parameter settings.
 Proportional Gain (P)

Default: 1.0
 1.0: Kp gain is 100%; if the setting is 0.5, Kp gain is 50%.
 Determines the deviation response of Proportional gain (P). Eliminates the system error; usually
used to decrease the error and get faster response speed. it also reduces the steady-state error.
But if you set the value too high, it may cause system oscillation and instability.
 If you set the other two gains (I and D) to zero, proportional control is the only effective
parameter.
 Integral Time (I)

Default: 1.00
0.00: No integral
 Use the integral controller to eliminate the error during stable system operation. The integral
control does not stop working until the error is zero. The integral is affected by the integral time.
12.1-08-4
The smaller the integral time, the stronger integral action. It is helpful to reduce overshoot and
oscillation for a stable system. Accordingly, the speed to lower the steady-state error decreases.
The integral control is often used with the other two controls for the PI controller or PID
controller.
 Sets the integral time of the I controller. When the integral time is long, there is a small I
controller gain, with slower response and slow external control. When the integral time is short,
there is a large I controller gain, with faster response and rapid external control.
 When the integral time is too short, it may cause system oscillation.
 Set Integral Time to 0.00 to disable Pr. 08-02.
 Differential Time (D)

Default: 0.00
 Use the differential controller to show the system error change, as well as to preview the change
in the error. You can use the differential controller to eliminate the error in order to improve the
system state. Using a suitable differential time can reduce overshoot and shorten adjustment
time; however, the differential operation increases noise interference. Note that a too large
differential causes more noise interference. In addition, the differential shows the change and
the output is 0 when there is no change. Note that you cannot use the differential control
independently. You must use it with the other two controllers for the PD controller or PID
controller.
 Sets the D controller gain to determine the error change response. Using a suitable differential
time reduces the P and I controllers overshoot to decrease the oscillation for a stable system. A
differential time that is too long may cause system oscillation.
 The differential controller acts on the change in the error and cannot reduce the interference. Do
not use this function when there is significant interference.
 Upper Limit of Integral Control

Default: 100.0
 Defines an upper bound for the integral gain (I) and therefore limits the master frequency. The
formula is: Integral upper bound = Maximum Operation Frequency (Pr. 01-00) x Pr. 08-04 %.
 An excessive integral value causes a slow response due to sudden load changes and may
cause motor stall or machine damage.
 PID Output Command Limit

Default: 100.0
 Defines the percentage of the output frequency limit during the PID control. The formula is
Output Frequency Limit = Maximum Operation Frequency (Pr. 01-00) x Pr. 08-05 %.
12.1-08-5
 PID Feedback Value by Communication Protocol

Default: Read only
Settings -200.00%–200.00%
 Use communication to set the PID feedback value when the PID feedback input is set to
communication (Pr.08-00 = 7 or 8).
 PID Delay Time

Default: 0.0
PID Mode Selection
Default: 0
Settings 0: Serial connection
1: Parallel connection
 0: Serial connection, use conventional PID control structure.
1: Parallel connection, the proportional gain, integral gain and differential gain are independent.
You can customize the P, I and D value to fit your application.
 Pr. 08-07 determines the primary low pass filter time when in PID control. Setting a large time
constant may slow down the drive’s response rate.
 PID control output frequency is filtered with a primary low pass function. This function can filter a
mix frequencies. A long primary low pass time means the filter degree is high and a short
primary low pass time means the filter degree is low.
 Inappropriate delay time setting may cause system error.
 PI Control:
Controlled only by the P action, so the deviation cannot be entirely eliminated. In general, to
eliminate residual deviations, the P + I controls. When you use the PI control, it eliminates the
deviation caused by the targeted value changes and the constant external interferences.
However, if the I action is too powerful, it delays the responde when there is rapid variation. You
can use the P action by itself to control the loading system with the integral components.
 PD Control:
When deviation occurs, the system immediately generates an operation load that is greater than
the load generated only by the D action to restrain deviation increment. If the deviation is small,
the effectiveness of the P action decreases as well. The control objects include applications with
integral component loads, which are controlled by the P action only. Sometimes, if the integral
component is functioning, the whole system may vibrate. In this case, use the PD control to
reduce the P action’s vibration and stabilize the system. In other words, this control is useful with
no brake function’s loading over the processes.
 PID Control:
Use the I action to eliminate the deviation and the D action to reduce vibration; then combine
this with the P action for the PID control. Use the PID method for a control process with no
deviations, high accuracies and a stable system.
12.1-08-6
Serial Connection
Parallel Connection
 Feedback Signal Detection Time

Default: 0.0
 Pr. 08-08 is valid only for ACI 4–20mA.
 This parameter sets the detection time for abnormal PID signal feedback. Setting the detection
time to 0.0 disables the detection function.
 Feedback Signal Fault Treatment

Default: 0
 This parameter is valid only for ACI 4–20mA.
 AC motor drive acts when the analog PID feedback is abnormal.
 Sleep Reference
Default: 0.00
 Determines the sleep frequency, and if the sleep time and the wake-up frequency are enabled
or disabled. Pr. 08-10 = 0: Disabled; Pr. 08-10 ≠ 0: Enabled.
12.1-08-7
 Wake-up Frequency
Default: 0.00
 When Pr. 08-18 = 0, the unit for Pr. 08-10 and that for Pr. 08-11 switch to frequency. The settings
are become 0–600.00 Hz.
 When Pr. 08-18=1, the unit for Pr. 08-10 and that for Pr. 08-11 switch to percentage. The
settings then are to 0–200.00%.
 The percentage is based on the current command value, not the maximum value. For example,
if the maximum value is 100 kg, and the current value is 30kg, then if Pr. 08-11 = 40%, the value
is 12 kg.
 Pr. 08-10 uses the same logic for calculation.
 Sleep Time
Default: 0.0
 When the frequency command is smaller than the sleep frequency and less than the sleep time,
the frequency command is equal to the sleep frequency. However, the frequency command
remains at 0.00 Hz until the frequency command becomes equal to or larger than the wake-up
frequency.
 PID Deviation Level

Default: 10.0
 PID Deviation Time
Default: 5.0
 When the PID control function is normal, it should calculate the value within a period of time that
is close to the target value.
 Refer to the PID control diagram for details. When executing PID feedback control, if |PID
reference target value – detection value| > Pr. 08-13 PID Deviation Level and exceeds Pr. 08-14
setting, it is judged as a PID control fault, and the multi-function output MOx = 15 (PID feedback
error) activates.
 PID Feedback Filter Time

Default: 5.0
 PID Compensation Selection

Default: 0
Settings 0: Parameter setting (Pr. 08-17)
1: Analog input
 0: The setting for Pr. 08-17 gives the PID compensation value.
 1: Set the analog input (Pr. 03-00–03-02) to 13, then the PID compensation value of analog
input is displayed on Pr. 08-17. At this time, Pr. 08-17 is read only).
12.1-08-8
 PID Compensation
Default: 0.0
Settings -100.0–100.0%
 The PID compensation value = maximum PID target value × Pr. 08-17. For example, if the
maximum operaiton frequency Pr. 01-00 = 60.00 Hz, Pr. 08-17 = 10.0%, the PID compensation
value increases the output frequency 6.00Hz. 60.00Hz × 100.00% × 10.0% = 6.00Hz
Sleep Mode Function Setting

Default: 0
Settings 0: Refer to PID output command
1: Refer to PID feedback signal
 0: The unit for Pr. 08-10 and that for Pr. 08-11 switch to frequency. The settings then are between
0–599.00 Hz.
 1: The unit for Pr. 08-10 and that for Pr. 08-11 switch to percentage. The settings then are
between 0–200.00%.
 Wake-up Integral Limit

Default: 50.0
 The wake-up integral limit for the drive prevents suddenly running at high speed when the drive
wakes up. The wake-up integral frequency limit = (Pr. 01-00 × Pr. 08-19%)
 Reduces the reaction time from sleep to wake-up.
Enable PID to Change the Operation Direction

Default: 0
Settings 0: Operation direction cannot be changed
1: Operation direction can be changed
 Wake-up Delay Time
Default: 0.00
 Refer to Pr. 08-18 for more information.
PID Control Flag


Default: 0000h
Settings bit0 = 1, PID running in reverse follows the setting for Pr. 00-23
bit0 = 0, PID running in reverse follows PID’s calculated value
bit1 = 1, second decimal place of PID Kp
bit1 = 0, first decimal place of PID Kp
 bit0 = 1: Valid when enables PID running in reverse (Pr. 08-21 = 1).
 bit0 = 0, if the PID calculated value is positive, the direction is forward. If the PID calculated value
is negative, the direction is reverse.
There are three scenarios for sleep and wake-up frequency. Refer to following explanations:
12.1-08-9
1) Frequency Command (PID is not in use, Pr. 08-00 = 0, only works in VF mode)
When the output frequency ≤ the sleep frequency, and the drive reaches the preset sleep
time, then the the drive is in sleep mode.
When the frequency command reaches the wake-up frequency, the drive starts to count the
wake-up delay time. When the drive reaches the wake-up delay time, the drive begins
acceleration time to reach the frequency command value.
2) Frequency Command Calculation of the Internal PID (Use PID, Pr. 08-00≠0 and Pr. 08-18=0)
When the PID calculation reaches the sleep frequency, the drive starts to count the sleep
time and the output frequency starts to decrease. If the drive exceeds the preset sleep time, it
goes directly to sleep mode (0Hz). If the drive does not reach the sleep time, it remains at the
lower limit (if there is a preset of lower limit.), or it remains at the lowest output frequency set at Pr.
01-07 and waits to reach the sleep time before it goes into sleep mode (0Hz).
When the calculated frequency command reaches the wake-up frequency, the drive starts to
count the wake-up delay time. Once it reaches the wake-up delay time, the drive starts the
acceleration time to reach the PID frequency command value.
12.1-08-10
3) PID Feedback Rate Percentage (Use PID, Pr. 08-00 ≠ 0 and Pr. 08-18 = 1)
When the PID feedback rate reaches the sleep level percentage, the drive starts to count the
sleep time. The output frequency also decreases. If the drive exceeds the preset sleep time, it
goes to sleep mode (0 Hz). If the drive does not reach the sleep time, it remains at the lower limit
(if there is a preset of lower limit.), or it remains at the lowest output frequency set for Pr.01-07
and waits to reach the sleep time before going into sleep mode (0 Hz).
When the PID feedback value reaches the wake-up percentage, the drive starts to count the
wake-up delay time. Once it reaches the wake-up delay time, the drive starts the acceleration
time to reach the PID frequency command value.
Example 01: PID negative feedback

 Pr. 08-10 must > Pr. 08-11
PID
 30kg is the reference Area
Physical quantity
 Set the parameter:
>12kg, the drive goes
Pr. 03-00 = 5 (AVI is PID feedback)
Sleep area into sleepotor goes
Pr. 08-00 = 1 (PID negative feedback: AVI
into sleep
simulation input function select)
between 6kg and
Pr. 08-10 = 40% (Sleep reference:
Excessive 12kg, the drive
12kg = 40%*30kg)
area remains in current
Pr. 08-11 = 20% (Wake-up reference:
state
6kg = 20%*30kg)
<6kg, the drive
Case 01: If feedback >12kg, frequency decreases.
Wake-up area wakes-upmotor
Case 02: If feedback <6kg, frequency increases.
wakes-up
12.1-08-11
Example 02: PID positive feedback

 Pr. 08-10 must < Pr. 08-11
Area PID
 30kg is the reference
Physical quantity
 Set the parameter:
>36kg, the drive goes
Pr. 03-00 = 5 (AVI is PID feedback)
Sleep area into sleepmotor goes
Pr. 08-00 = 4 (PID positive feedback: AVI
into sleep
simulation input function select)
between 33kg and
Pr. 08-10 = 110% (Sleep reference: Excessive
36kg, the drive remains
33kg = 110%*30kg) area
in the current state
Pr. 08-11 = 120% (Wake-up reference:
Wake-up <33kg, the drive
36kg = 120%*30kg)
area wakes-up
Case 01: If feedback <33kg, frequency decreases.
Case 02: If feedback >36kg, frequency increases.
12.1-08-12
09 Communication Parameters  The parameter can be set during the operation.
8 1
Modbus RS- 485
When us ing communication devi ces, Pin 1~2,7,8: Reserv ed
connects AC dr ive with P C by us ing Pin 3, 6: GND
Delta IFD6530 or IFD6500. Pin 4: SG-
RS-485 Pin 5: SG+
 Communication Address
Default: 1
Settings 1–254
 If RS-485 serial communication controls the AC motor drive, you must set the communication
address for this drive in this parameter. Each AC motor drive’s communication address must be
different.
 COM1 Transmission Speed

Default: 9.6
Settings 4.8–115.2Kbps
 Sets the transmission speed of the computer and the drive.
 Options are 4.8Kbps, 9.6Kbps, 19.2Kbps, 38.4Kbps, 57.6Kbps, and 115.2Kbps; otherwise, the
transmission speed is set to the default 9.5Kbps.
 COM1 Transmission Fault Treatment

Default: 3
 Sets the response for Modbus communication errors in with the host. Set the detection time in
Pr. 09-03.
 COM1 Time-out Detection

Default: 0.0
 Sets the communication transmission time-out.
 COM1 Communication Protocol

Default: 1
Settings 1：7, N, 2 (ASCII)
2：7, E, 1 (ASCII)
3：7, O, 1 (ASCII)
4：7, E, 2 (ASCII)
5：7, O, 2 (ASCII)
6：8, N, 1 (ASCII)
7：8, N, 2 (ASCII)
12.1-09-1
8：8, E, 1 (ASCII)
9：8, O, 1 (ASCII)
10：8, E, 2 (ASCII)
11：8, O, 2 (ASCII)
12：8, N, 1 (RTU)
13：8, N, 2 (RTU)
14：8, E, 1 (RTU)
15：8, O, 1 (RTU)
16：8, E, 2 (RTU)
17：8, O, 2 (RTU)
 Control by PC (Computer Link)
When using the RS-485 serial communication interface, you must specify each drive’s
communication address in Pr. 09-00. The computer then implements control using the drives’
individual addresses.
 MODBUS ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange): Each byte of data is
the combination of two ASCII characters. For example, one byte of data: 64 Hex, shown as ‘64’
in ASCII, consists of ‘6’ (36Hex) and ‘4’ (34Hex).
1. Code Description
The communication protocol is in hexadecimal, ASCII: ”0”…“9”, “A”…“F”, every hexadecimal
value represents an ASCII code. The following table shows some examples.
Character ‘0’ ‘1’ ‘2’ ‘3’ ‘4’ ‘5’ ‘6’ ‘7’
ASCII code 30H 31H 32H 33H 34H 35H 36H 37H
Character ‘8’ ‘9’ ‘A’ ‘B’ ‘C’ ‘D’ ‘E’ ‘F’

ASCII code 38H 39H 41H 42H 43H 44H 45H 46H
2. Data Format
10-bit character frame (For ASCII):
(7, N, 2)
Start Stop Stop

bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
bit bit
7-data bits
10-bits character frame
(7, E, 1)
Start Even Stop

bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 parity bit
7-data bits
12.1-09-2
(7, O, 1)
Start Odd Stop

bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 parity bit
7-data bits
11-bit character frame (For RTU):

(8, N, 2)
Start Stop Stop
bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 bit bit
8-data bits
(8, E, 1)
Start Even Stop

bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
parity bit
8-data bits
(8, O, 1)
Start Odd Stop

bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
parity bit
8-data bits
3. Communication Protocol
Communication Data Frame:
ASCII mode:
STX Start character = ‘:’ (3AH)
Address High Communication address:
Address Low one 8-bit address consists of 2 ASCII codes
Function High Command code:
Function Low one 8-bit command consists of 2 ASCII codes
DATA (n-1) Contents of data:
……. n x 8-bit data consists of 2n ASCII codes
DATA 0 n ≤ 16, maximum of 32 ASCII codes (20 sets of data)
LRC Check High LRC checksum:
LRC Check Low one 8-bit checksum consists of 2 ASCII codes
END High End characters:
END Low END1= CR (0DH), END0= LF(0AH)
12.1-09-3
RTU mode:
START Defined by a silent interval of more than 10 ms
Address Communication address: 8-bit address
Function Command code: 8-bit command
DATA (n-1)
Contents of data:
…….
N × 8-bit data, n ≤ 16
DATA 0
CRC Check Low CRC checksum:
CRC Check High one 16-bit checksum consists of 2 8-bit characters
END Defined by a silent interval of more than 10 ms
Communication Address (Address)

00H: broadcast to all AC motor drives
01H: AC motor drive of address 01
0FH: AC motor drive of address 15
10H: AC motor drive of address 16
:
FEH: AC motor drive of address 254
Function (Function code) and DATA (data characters)

03H: read data from a register
06H: write to a single register
Example: Reading two continuous data from register address 2102H, AMD address is 01H.
ASCII mode:
Command Message: Response Message
STX ‘:’ STX ‘:’
‘0’ ‘0’
Address Address
‘1’ ‘1’
‘0’ ‘0’
Function Function
‘3’ ‘3’
‘2’ Number of register ‘0’
‘1’ (count by byte) ‘4’
Starting register
‘0’ ‘1’
‘2’ Content of starting ‘7’
‘0’ register 2102H ‘7’
Number of register ‘0’ ‘0’
(count by word) ‘0’ ‘0’
‘2’ ‘0’
Content of register 2103H
‘D’ ‘0’
LRC Check
‘7’ ‘0’
CR ‘7’
END LRC Check
LF ‘1’
CR
END
LF
12.1-09-4
RTU mode:
Address 01H Address 01H
Function 03H Function 03H
21H Number of register
Starting data register 04H
02H (count by byte)
Number of register 00H Content of register 17H
(count by word) 02H address 2102H 70H
CRC Check Low 6FH Content of register 00H
CRC Check High F7H address 2103H 00H
CRC Check Low FEH
CRC Check High 5CH
06H: single write, write single data to a register.

Example: Writing data 6000 (1770H) to register 0100H. AMD address is 01H.
ASCII mode:
‘0’ ‘0’
Address Address
‘1’ ‘1’
‘0’ ‘0’
Function Function
‘6’ ‘6’
‘0’ ‘0’
‘1’ ‘1’
Target register Target register
‘0’ ‘0’
‘0’ ‘0’
‘1’ ‘1’
‘7’ ‘7’
Register content Register content
‘7’ ‘7’
‘0’ ‘0’
‘7’ ‘7’
LRC Check LRC Check
‘1’ ‘1’
CR CR
END END
LF LF
RTU mode:
Address 01H Address 01H
Function 06H Function 06H
01H 01H
00H 00H
17H 17H
Register content Register content
70H 70H
CRC Check Low 86H CRC Check Low 86H
CRC Check High 22H CRC Check High 22H
10H: write multiple registers (write multiple data to registers). The system can write up to 20 sets
of data simultaneously.
Example: Set the multi-step speed of an AC motor drive (address is 01H),
Pr. 04-00 = 50.00 (1388H), Pr. 04-01 = 40.00 (0FA0H).
12.1-09-5
ASCII Mode
ADR 1 ‘0’ ADR 1 ‘0’
ADR 0 ‘1’ ADR 0 ‘1’
CMD 1 ‘1’ CMD 1 ‘1’
CMD 0 ‘0’ CMD 0 ‘0’
‘0’ ‘0’
‘5’ ‘5’
‘0’ ‘0’
‘0’ ‘0’
‘0’ ‘0’
Number of register ‘0’ Number of register ‘0’
(count by word) ‘0’ (count by word) ‘0’
‘2’ ‘2’
Number of register ‘0’ ‘E’
LRC Check
(count by byte) ‘4’ ‘8’
‘1’ CR
END
‘3’ LF
The first data content
‘8’
‘8’
‘0’
‘F’
The second data content
‘A’
‘0’
‘9’
LRC Check
‘A’
CR
END
LF
RTU mode:
Command Message: Response Message:
ADR 01H ADR 01H
CMD 10H CMD 10H
05H 05H
00H 00H
Number of register 00H Number of register 00H
(Count by word) 02H (Count by word) 02H
Quantity of data (byte) 04 CRC Check Low 41H
13H CRC Check High 04H
The first data content
88H
0FH
The second data content
A0H
CRC Check Low ‘9’
CRC Check High ‘A’
Check sum
ASCII mode:
LRC (Longitudinal Redundancy Check) is calculated by summing up the values of the bytes from
ADR1 to last data character then calculating the hexadecimal representation of the
2’s-complement negation of the sum.
Example:
01H + 03H + 21H + 02H + 00H + 02H = 29H, the 2’s-complement negation of 29H is D7H.
12.1-09-6
RTU mode:
CRC (Cyclical Redundancy Check) is calculated by the following steps:
Step 1: Load a 16-bit register (called CRC register) with FFFFh.
Step 2: Exclusive OR the first 8-bit byte of the command message with the low order byte of the
16-bit CRC register, putting the result in the CRC register.
Step 3: Examine the LSB of CRC register.
Step 4: If the LSB of CRC register is 0, shift the CRC register one bit to the right, fill MSB with
zero, then repeat step 3. If the LSB of CRC register is 1, shift the CRC register one bit to
the right, fill MSB with zero, Exclusive OR the CRC register with the polynomial value
A001H, then repeat step 3.
Step 5: Repeat step 3 and 4 until you perform eight shifts. This processes a complete 8-bit byte.
Step 6: Repeat step 2 through 5 for the next 8-bit byte of the command message. Continue doing
this until all bytes are processed. The final contents of the CRC register are the CRC
value. When transmitting the CRC value in the message, the upper and lower bytes of
the CRC value must be swapped, that is, the lower order byte is transmitted first.
The following is an example of CRC generation using C language. The function takes two
arguments:
Unsigned char* data  a pointer to the message buffer
Unsigned char length  the quantity of bytes in the message buffer
The function returns the CRC value as a type of unsigned integer.
Unsigned int crc_chk(unsigned char* data, unsigned char length)
{
int j;
unsigned int reg_crc=0xffff;
while(length--){
reg_crc ^= *data++;
for(j=0;j<8;j++){
if(reg_crc & 0x01){ /* LSB(b0)=1 */
reg_crc=(reg_crc>>1) ^ 0xa001;
}else{
reg_crc=reg_crc >>1;
}
}
}
return reg_crc; // return register CRC
12.1-09-7
4. Address list
AC motor drive parameters

Modbus
Function
address
GG is the parameter group, nn is the parameter number; for example, the address of
GGnnH
Pr. 04-10 is 040AH.
Control command (20xx)

Modbus
R/W Function
address
00B: No function
01B: Stop
bit1–0
10B: Run
11B: JOG + RUN
bit3–2 Reserved
00B: No function
01B: FWD
bit5–4
10B: REV
11B: Change direction
00B: 1st acceleration / deceleration
01B: 2nd acceleration / deceleration
bit7–6
10B: 3rd acceleration / deceleration
11B: 4th acceleration / deceleration
000B: Master speed
0001B: 1st Step speed frequency
2000H RW 0010B: 2nd Step speed frequency
0011B: 3rd Step speed frequency
0100B: 4th Step speed frequency
bit11–8
bit12 1: Enable bit06–11 function
bit15 Reserved
2001H RW Frequency command (XXX.XX Hz)
bit0 1: E.F. ON
bit1 1: Reset
2002H RW
bit2 1: Base block (B.B) ON
bit15–3 Reserved
Status monitor read only (21xx)

Modbus
R/W Function
address
High byte: Warn Code
2100H R
Low Byte: Error Code
12.1-09-8
Modbus
R/W Function
address
AC motor drive operation status
bit1–0 00B: Drive stops
01B: Drive decelerating
10B: Drive standby
11B: Drive operating
bit2 1：JOG Command
Operation Direction
bit4–3 00B: FWD run
01B: From REV run to FWD run
10B: From FWD run to REV run
2101H R
11B: REV run
bit8 1: Master frequency controlled by communication interface
bit9 1: Master frequency controlled by analog/external signal
bit10 1: Operation command controlled by communication interface

bit11 1: Parameter locked
bit12 1: Enable to copy parameters from keypad
bit15–13 Reserved
2102H R Frequency command (XXX.XX Hz)
2103H R Output frequency (XXX.XX Hz)
Output current (XX.XX A). When current is higher than 655.35, it shifts the
2104H R
decimal as (XXX.X A). The decimal can refer to High byte of 211F.
2105H R DC BUS Voltage (XXX.X V)
2106H R Output voltage (XXX.X V)
2107H R Current step number of multi-step speed operation
2108H R Reserved
2109H R Counter value
210AH R Power factor angle (XXX.X)
210BH R Output torque (XXX.X %)
210CH R Actual motor speed (XXXXX rpm)
210DH R Number of PG feedback pulses (0–65535)
210EH R Number of PG2 pulse commands (0–65535)
210FH R Power output (X.XXX kW)
2116H R Multi-function display (Pr. 00-04)
Maximum Operation Frequency (Pr. 01-00) or Maximum User-defined Value
(Pr. 00-26)
When Pr. 00-26 is 0, this value is equal to Pr. 01-00 setting
211BH R When Pr. 00-26 is not 0, and the command source is keypad, this value =
Pr. 00-24 * Pr. 00-26 / Pr. 01-00
When Pr. 00-26 is not 0, and the command source is 485, this value = Pr.
09-10 * Pr. 00-26 / Pr. 01-00
211FH R High byte: decimal of current value (display)
Status monitor read only (22xx)

Modbus
RW Function
address
Display output current (A). When current is higher than 655.35, it shifts the
2200H R
decimal as (XXX.X A). The decimal can refer to High byte of 211F.
2201H R Display counter value (c)
2202H R Actual output frequency (XXXXX Hz)
2203H R DC BUS voltage (XXX.X V)
2204H R Output voltage (XXX.X V)
12.1-09-9
Modbus
RW Function
address
2205H R Power angle (XXX.X)
2206H R Display actual motor speed kW of U, V, W (XXXXX kW)
Display motor speed in rpm estimated by the drive or encoder feedback
2207H R
(XXXXX rpm)
Display positive/negative output torque in %, estimated by the drive (t0.0:
2208H R
positive torque, -0.0: negative torque) (XXX.X %)
2209H R Display PG feedback (see NOTE 1 in Pr. 00-04)
220AH R PID feedback value after enabling PID function (XXX.XX %)
Display signal of AVI analog input terminal, 0–10V corresponds to
220BH R
0.00–100.00% (1.) (see NOTE 2 in Pr. 00-04)
Display signal of ACI analog input terminal, 4–20mA / 0–10V corresponds to
220CH R
0.00–100.00% (2.) (see NOTE 2 in Pr. 00-04)
Display signal of AUI analog input terminal, -10V–10V corresponds to
220DH R
-100.00–100% (3.) (see NOTE 2 in Pr. 00-04)
220EH R IGBT temperature of drive power module (XXX.X ºC)
220FH R The temperature of capacitance (XXX.X ºC)
The status of digital input (ON/OFF), refer to Pr. 02-12
2210H R
(see NOTE 3 in Pr. 00-04)
The status of digital output (ON/OFF), refer to Pr. 02-18
2211H R
2212H R The multi-step speed that is executing (S)
The corresponding CPU pin status of digital input (d.)
2213H R
The corresponding CPU pin status of digital output (O.)
2214H R
Number of actual motor revolution (PG1 of PG card) (P.) it starts from 9
2215H R when the actual operation direction is changed or the keypad displays at
stop is 0. The maximum is 65535
2216H R Pulse input frequency (PG2 of PG card) (XXX.XX Hz)
2217H R Pulse input position (PG card PG2), the maximum setting is 65535.
2218H R Position command tracing error
2219H R Display times of counter overload (XXX.XX %)
221AH R GFF (XXX.XX %)
221BH R DCBUS voltage ripples (XXX.X V)
221CH R PLC register D1043 data (C)
221DH R Number of poles of a permanent magnet motor
221EH R User page displays the value in physical measure
221FH R Output Value of Pr. 00-05 (XXX.XX Hz)
Number of motor turns when drive operates (saves when drive stops, and
2220H R
resets to zero when operating)
Operating position of the motor (saves when drive stops, and resets to zero
2221H R
when operating)
2222H R Fan speed of the drive (XXX %)
2223H R Control mode of the drive 0: speed mode 1: torque mode
2224H R Carrier frequency of the drive (XX kHz)
2225H R Reserve
Drive
status 00b: No direction
bit1–0 01b: Forward
10b: Reverse
2226H R
bit3–2 01b: Drive ready
10b: Error
bit4 0b: Motor drive did not output
1b: Motor drive did output
12.1-09-10
Modbus
RW Function
address
bit5 0b: No alarm
1b: Alarm
2227H R Drive’s estimated output torque (positive or negative direction) (XXXX Nt-m)
2228H R Torque command (XXX.X %)
2229H R kWh display (XXXX.X)
222AH R PG2 pulse input in Low Word
222BH R PG2 pulse input in High Word
222CH R Motor actual position in Low Word
222DH R Motor actual position in High Word
222EH R PID reference (XXX.XX %)
222FH R PID offset (XXX.XX %)
2230H R PID output frequency (XXX.XX Hz)
2231H R Hardware ID
Remote IO (26xx)
Modbus
RW Function
address
2601H R Each bit corresponds to different terminal input contact
2602H R Each bit corresponds to different terminal input contact
2603H–
R Reserved
2640H
2641H RW Each bit corresponds to different terminal output contact
2642H–
R Reserved
2660H
2661H R AVI proportional value
2662H R ACI proportional value
2663H R AUI proportional value
2664H–
R Reserved
266AH
266BH R Expansion card AI10, 0.0–100.0 % (EMC-A22A)
266CH R Expansion card AI11, 0.0–100.0 % (EMC-A22A)
266DH–
R Reserved
26A0H
26A1H RW AFM1 output proportional value
26A2H RW AFM2 output proportional value
26A3H–
R Reserved
26AAH
26ABH RW Expansion card AO10, 0.0–100.0 % (EMC-A22A)
26ACH RW Expansion card AO11, 0.0–100.0 % (EMC-A22A)
5. Exception response:
When the drive is using the communication connection, if an error occurs, the drive responds
to the error code and sets the highest bit (bit 7) of code to 1 (function code AND 80H) then
responds to the control system to signal that an error occurred.
If the keypad displays “CE-XX” as a warning message, “XX” is the error code at that time.
Refer to the table of error codes for communication error for reference.
12.1-09-11
Example:
ASCII mode: RTU mode:
STX ‘:’ Address 01H
‘0’ Function 86H
Address
‘1’ Exception code 02H
‘8’ CRC Check Low C3H
Function
‘6’ CRC Check High A1H
‘0’
Exception code
‘2’
‘7’
LRC Check
‘7’
CR
END
LF
The explanation of exception codes:

Error code Explanation
1 Function code is not supported or unrecognized.
2 Address is not supported or unrecognized.
3 Data is not correct or unrecognized.
4 Fail to execute this function code
 Communication Response Delay Time

Default: 2.0
Settings 0.0–200.0ms
 Sets the response delay time after the AC motor drive receives a communication command as
shown in the following.
Communication Main Frequency

Default: 60.00
 When you set Pr. 00-20 to 1 (RS-485 serial communication), the AC motor drive saves the last
frequency command into Pr. 09-10 when there is abnormal power off or momentary power loss.
After the drive reboots when power is restored, it checks the frequency in Pr. 09-10 if no new
frequency command is input. When a frequency command of RS-485 changes (the frequency
command source must be set as Modbus), this parameter also changes.
 Block Transfer 1
12.1-09-12
Default: 0000h
Settings 0000–FFFFh
 There is a group of block transfer parameters available in the AC motor drive (Pr. 09-11–Pr.
09-26). Using communication code 03H, you can store the parameters (Pr. 09-11–Pr. 09-26)
that you want to read.
 For example: according to the Address List (as shown in the table below), Pr. 01-42 is shown as
012A. Set Pr. 09-11 to 012Ah (the minimum voltage of Pr. 01-42 M2 is 2.0V), and use Pr. 09-11
(communication address 090B) to read the communication parameter, the read value is 2.0.
AC motor drive GG is the parameter group, nn is the parameter number; for

GGnnH
parameters example, the address of Pr. 04-10 is 040AH.
Communication Decoding Method

Default: 1
Settings 0: Decoding Method 1 (20xx)
1: Decoding Method 2 (60xx)
Decoding Method 1 Decoding Method 2

Digital Keypad Digital keypad controls the drive action regardless of decoding method 1 or 2.
External Terminal External terminal controls the drive action regardless of decoding method 1 or 2.
Source of
RS-485 Refer to address: 2000h–20FFh Refer to address: 6000h–60FFh
Operation
CANopen Refer to index: 2020-01h–2020-FFh Refer to index:2060-01h–2060-FFh
Control
Communication Card Refer to address: 2000h–20FFh Refer to address: 6000h–60FFh
PLC PLC command controls the drive action regardless of decoding method 1 or 2.
Internal Communication Protocol

Default: 0
Settings 0: Modbus 485
-1: Internal Communication Slave 1
12.1-09-13
-10: Internal Communication Master

-12: Internal PLC Control
 When it is defined as internal communication, refer to Section 16-10 for Main Control Terminal
of Internal Communication.
 When it is defined as internal PLC control, refer to Section 16-12 for Remote IO control
application (using MODRW).
 PLC Command Force to 0

Default: 0
Setting bit0: Before PLC scan, set the PLC target frequency = 0
bit1: Before PLC scan, set the PLC target torque = 0
bit2: Before PLC scan, set the speed limit of torque control mode = 0
 Defines whether to clear the frequency command or speed command to 0 before the PLC scan
time sequence.
PLC Address
Default: 2
Settings 1–254
CANopen Slave Address
Default: 0
Settings 0: Disable
1–127
CANopen Speed
Default: 0
Settings 0: 1Mbps
1: 500Kbps
2: 250Kbps
3: 125Kbps
4: 100Kbps (Delta only)
5: 50Kbps
CANopen Warning Record
Default: Read only
Settings bit0: CANopen Guarding Time-out
bit1: CANopen Heartbeat Time-out
bit2: CANopen SYNC Time-out
bit3: CANopen SDO Time-out
bit4: CANopen SDO buffer overflow
bit5: CANopen hardware disconnection warning (Can Bus OFF)
bit6: Error protocol of CANopen
bit8: The setting values of CANopen indexes are fail
bit9: The setting value of CANopen address is fail
bit10: The checksum value of CANopen indexes is fail
12.1-09-14
CANopen Decoding Method

Default: 1
Settings 0: Disable (Delta-defined decoding method)
1: Enable (CANopen DS402 Standard protocol)
CANopen Communication Status
Default: 0
Settings 0: Node Reset State
1: Com Reset State
2: Boot up State
3: Pre-operation State
4: Operation State
5: Stop State
CANopen Control Status
Default: Read Only
Settings 0: Not ready for use state
1: Inhibit start state
2: Ready to switch on state
3: Switched on state
4: Enable operation state
7: Quick stop active state
13: Error reaction activation state
14: Error state
CANopen Master Function
Default: 0
Settings 0: Disable
1: Enable
CANopen Master Address
Default: 100
Settings 0–127
Communication Card Identification
Default: Read only
Settings 0: No communication card
1: DeviceNet Slave
2: Profibus-DP Slave
3: CANopen Slave / Master
4: MODBUS-TCP Slave
5: EtherNet / IP Slave
6: EtherCAT
12: PROFINET
12.1-09-15
Firmware Version of Communication Card

Default: Read only
Settings Read only
Product Code
Default: Read only
Settings Read only
Error Code
Default: Read only
Settings Read only
 Communication Card Address (for DeviceNet and PROFIBUS)

Default: 1
Settings DeviceNet: 0–63
Profibus-DP: 1–125
 Communication Card Speed Setting (for DeviceNet)

Default: 2
Settings Standard DeviceNet:
0: 125Kbps
1: 250Kbps
2: 500Kbps
3: 1Mbps (Delta only)
Non-standard DeviceNet: (Delta only)
0: 10Kbps
1: 20Kbps
2: 50Kbps
3: 100Kbps
4: 125Kbps
5: 250Kbps
6: 500Kbps
7: 800Kbps
8: 1Mbps
 Other Communication Card Speed Setting (for DeviceNet)
Default: 0
Settings 0: Standard DeviceNet
In this mode, the baud rate can only be 125Kbps, 250Kbps, 500Kbps in
standard DeviceNet speed.
1: Non-standard DeviceNet
In this mode, the baud rate of DeviceNet can be the same as that for
CANopen (0–8).
 Use with Pr. 09-71.
 Setting 0: The baud rate can only be set to 125Kbps, 250Kbps and 500Kbps.
12.1-09-16
 Setting 1: The DeviceNet communication rate can be the same as that for CANopen (setting
0–8).
 Communication Card IP Configuration (for MODBUS TCP)

Default: 0
Settings 0: Static IP
1: Dynamic IP (DHCP)
 Setting 0: Set the IP address manually.
 Setting 1: IP address is automatically set by the host controller.
 Communication Card IP Address 1 (for MODBUS TCP)

Default: 0
Settings 0–65535
 Use Pr. 09-76–09-79 with a communication card.
 Communication Card Address Mask 1 (for MODBUS TCP)

Default: 0
Settings 0–65535
 Communication Card Gateway Address 1 (for MODBUS TCP)
Default: 0
Settings 0–65535
 Communication Card Password (Low word) (for MODBUS TCP)
 Communication Card Password (High word) (for MODBUS TCP)
Default: 0
Settings 0–99
 Reset Communication Card (for MODBUS TCP)
Default: 0
Settings 0: Disable
1: Reset, return to default
12.1-09-17
 Additional Settings for the Communication Card (for MODBUS TCP)

Default: 1
Settings bit0: Enable IP Filter
bit1: Enable internet parameters (1bit)
When IP address is set, this bit is enabled. After updating the
communication card parameters, this bit changes to disabled.
bit2: Enable login password (1bit)
When you enter the login password, this bit is enabled. After updating
the communication card parameters, this bit changes to disable.
Communication Card Status (for MODBUS TCP)
Default: 0
Settings bit0: Enable password
When the communication card is set with a password, this bit is
enabled. When the password is cleared, this bit is disabled.
12.1-09-18
10 Speed Feedback Control Parameters

 This parameter can be set during operation.
In this parameter group, ASR stands for Adjust Speed Regulator and PG stands for Pulse Generator.
Encoder Type Selection

Default: 0
Settings 0: Disabled
1: ABZ
2: ABZ (Delta encoder for Delta Servo motor)
3: Resolver
4: ABZ/UVW
5: MI8 single phase pulse input
 When using PG expansion card EMC-PG01L or EMC-PG01O, set Pr.10-00=1. These
expansion cards are applicable for induction motor (IM) only.
 When using EMC-PG01U, set Pr. 10-00=2 (Delta encoder), and make sure SW1 is switched to
D (Delta type). If the setting for Pr. 10-00, Pr. 10-01 and Pr. 10-02 has changed, please turn off
the drive’s power and reboot to prevent permanent magnetic motor (PM) stall. This mode is
recommended to use for PM.
 When using EMC-PG01U, set Pr. 10-00=4 (Standard ABZ/UVW Encoder), and make sure SW1
is switched to S (Standard Type). This mode is applicable for both IM and PM.
 When using EMC-PG01R, set Pr. 10-00=3, and set Pr. 10-01 to 1024 ppr, then set Pr. 10-30
after verifying the pole numbers of the resolver.
 When using MI8 single-phase pulse input as frequency command, the Pr. 10-02 must set to“5:
Single-phase input”. The drive calculates the MI8 single-phase pulse input speed when the
control modes are VF, VFPG, SVC, IM/PM FOC Sensorless and IM/PM TQC Sensorless. If you
use the MI8 single-phase pulse input for speed feedback in closed-loop control, you can only
use it in VFPG closed-loop control mode.
Encoder Pulses per Revolution

Default: 600
Settings 1–20000
 This parameter sets the encoder pulses per revolution (ppr). It is a feedback control signal
source when using PG. The encoder sets the number of pulses for the motor rotating through
one rotation. The A/B phase cycle generates the pulse number.
 This setting is also the encoder resolution. The speed control is more accurate with higher
resolution.
 If you set this parameter incorrectly, it may cause motor stall, drive over-current, or a magnetic
pole origin detection error for the PM in closed-loop control. When using the PM, you must
perform the pole zero point detection (Pr.05-00 = 4) again if you modify the content of this
parameter.
12.1-10-1
Encoder Input Type Setting

Default: 0
Settings 0: Disable
1: A/B phase pulse input, run forward if the A-phase leads the B-phase by 90
degrees.
2: A/B phase pulse input, run forward if the B-phase leads the A-phase by 90
degrees.
3: Phase A is a pulse input and phase B is a direction input

(L = reverse direction, H = forward direction).

(L = forward direction, H = reverse direction).
5: Single-phase input
 Position control: the PG2 pulse affects the PG1 pulse tracking position.
1. When PG2 is single-pulse, and PG1 is A/B phase pulse, the frequency of position control
should be (input pps*2) / (PG1 ppr *4) at constant speed.
2. When PG2 and PG1 are either single-pulse (or both A/B phase pulse), the frequency of
position control should be (input pps*2) / (PG1 ppr*2) at constant speed.
3. Due to the edge trigger of the pulse input, the input of A/B phase pulse should be read as 4
times of the frequency; and the single-phase input should be read as twice of the frequency.
For inputs with the same pps, the single-phase tracking frequency will be half of the
double-phase frequency.
 Velocity control: PG2 acts according to the setting for Pr. 10-01 (PG1 ppr), and will not be
affected by PG1 pulse (single-phase input or A/B phase pulse). When the setting for Pr. 10-00, Pr.
12.1-10-2
10-01 and Pr. 10-02 are changed, cycle the power of the motor drive.
1. The speed formula is (input ppr) / (PG1 ppr), when PG1 ppt = 2500, PG2 is single-phase
input, and the input pps is 1000 (1000 pulse per second), the speed should be
(1000 / 2500) = 0.40Hz.
2. The same pps inputs of A/B phase pulse or single-phase pulse input should get the same
frequency command.
 Frequency Division Output Setting (Denominator)

Default: 1
Settings 1–255
 Sets the denominator for the frequency division of the PG card feedback and output. When you
set it to 2 with feedback 1024 ppr, PG OUT (pulse output) of PG card is 1024 / 2 = 512 ppr.
 Electrical Gear at Load Side A1

 Electrical Gear at Motor Side B1
 Electrical Gear at Load Side A2
 Electrical Gear at Motor Side B2
Default: 100
Settings 1–65535
 Use Pr. 10-04–Pr. 10-07 with the multi-function input terminal (set to 48) to switch to Pr.
10-04–Pr. 10-05 or Pr. 10-06–Pr. 10-07, as the following shows.
 Treatment for Encoder / Speed Observer Feedback Fault

Default: 2
 Detection Time of Encoder / Speed Observer Feedback Fault

Default: 1.0
0: Disable
 When there is an encoder loss, an encoder signal error, a pulse signal setting error or a signal
error, if the duration exceeds the detection time for the encoder feedback fault (Pr. 10-09), the
encoder signal error occurs. Refer to Pr. 10-08 for encoder feedback fault treatment.
12.1-10-3
 When the speed controller signal is abnormal, if time exceeds the detection time for the encoder
feedback fault (Pr. 10-09), the feedback fault occurs. Refer to Pr. 10-08 for the encoder
feedback fault treatment.
 Encoder / Speed Observer Stall Level

Default: 115
Settings 0–120%
0: No function
 This parameter determines the maximum encoder feedback signal allowed before a fault occurs.
The maximum operation frequency for Pr.01-00 = 100%
 Detection Time of Encoder / Speed Observer Stall

Default: 0.1
 Encoder / Speed Observer Stall Action
Default: 2
 When the drive output frequency exceeds the encoder/ speed observer stall level (Pr. 10-10),
the drive start to count the time. When the error time exceeds the encoder/ speed observer stall
detection time (Pr. 10-11), the drive implements the encoder stall treatment.
 Encoder / Speed Observer Slip Range

Default: 50
Settings 0–50%
0: Disable
 Detection Time of Encoder/ Speed Observer Slip
Default: 0.5
 Encoder / Speed Observer Stall and Slip Error Action
Default: 2
 This parameter acts on the settings for Pr. 10-13–Pr. 10-15:
When the value of (rotation speed – motor frequency) exceeds the Pr. 10-13 setting, and the
detection time exceeds Pr. 10-14; the drive starts to count the time. If the detection time exceeds
Pr. 10-14, the encoder feedback signal error occurs. Refer to Pr.10-15 for the encoder stall and
slip error treatment.
12.1-10-4
 Pulse Input Type Setting

Default: 0
Settings 0: Disable
1: A/B phase pulse input, run forward if the A-phase leads the B-phase by 90
degrees.
2: A/B phase pulse input, run forward if the B-phase leads the A-phase by 90
degrees.

(L = reverse direction, H = forward direction).

(L = forward direction, H = reverse direction).
5: MI8 single-phase pulse input

 When this setting is different from the Pr. 10-02 setting and the source of the frequency
command is pulse input (Pr. 00-20 set to 4 or 5), it causes a four-time frequency problem .
Example:
Assume that Pr. 10-01=1024, Pr. 10-02=1, Pr. 10-16=3, Pr. 00-20=5, MIx = 37 and ON, then the
pulse needed to rotate the motor one revolution is 4096 (1024*4).
 Assume that Pr. 10-01=1024, Pr. 10-02=1, Pr. 10-16=1, Pr. 00-20=5, MIx = 37 and ON, the
pulse needed to rotate the motor one revolution is 1024 (1024*1).
 Position control diagram
12.1-10-5
 Setting procedure of MI8 single-phase pulse input:

Pr. 00-20=4, Pulse input without direction command
Pr.10-01 set as the ppr number of each rotation.
Pr.10-16=5, MI8 single-phase pulse input
 MI8 input and PG2 input could both exist at the same time. But PG card Pr. 10-00 and Pr. 10-16
cannot be set as MI8 at the same time.
 Electrical Gear A
 Electrical Gear B
Default: 100
Settings 1–65535
 Rotation speed = pulse frequency / encoder pulses (Pr. 10-01) * Electrical Gear A / Electrical
Gear B.
 Positioning for Encoder Position

Default: 0
Settings -32767–2400
 Determines the internal position in the position mode.
 Use this with the multi-function input terminal setting = 35 (enable position control).
 When set to 0, it is the Z-phase position of the encoder.
 The setting range is affected by Pr. 10-01 and Pr. 10-02.
Example:
When Pr. 10-01 = 2500, Pr. 10-02 = 1 or 2, the setting range for Pr. 10-19 is -32767–10000.
When Pr. 10-01 = 1024, Pr. 10-02 = 1 or 2, the setting range for Pr. 10-19 is -32767–4096.
When Pr. 10-01 = 2500, Pr. 10-02 = 3, 4 or 5, the setting range for Pr. 10-19 is -32767–2500.
 Error Range for Encoder Position Reached

Default: 10
Settings 0–65535 pulses
 This parameter determines the range for the internal positioning position reached.
Example:
When you set the position for Pr.10-19 (Positioning for Encoder Position) and Pr.10-20 to 1000,
it reaches the position if the position is between 990–1010 after positioning.
 Filter Time (PG2)

Default: 0.100
 When you set Pr. 00-20 to 5 and the multi-function input terminal to 37 (OFF), the system treats
the pulse command as a Frequency command. Use this parameter to suppress the speed
command jump.
12.1-10-6
 FOC & TQC Function Control

Default: 0
Settings bit0: ASR controller under torque control
(0: use PI as ASR; 1: use P as ASR)
bit11: Activate DC brake when executing the zero torque command
(0: ON; 1: OFF)
bit12: FOC Sensorless mode, crossing zero means the speed goes from
negative to positive or positive to negative
(0: determined by stator frequency; 1: determined by speed command)
bit15: Direction control in open-loop status
(0: Switch ON direction control; 1: Switch OFF direction control)
 Set bit = 0 for closed-loop; any other bit setting for open-loop.
 FOC Bandwidth for Speed Observer

Default: 40.0
 Setting the speed observer to a higher bandwidth could shorten the speed response time but
creates greater noise interference during the speed observation.
 FOC Minimum Stator Frequency

Default: 2.0
Settings 0.0–10.0% fN
 Use this parameter to set the stator frequency minimum level in operation status. This setting
ensures the stability and accuracy of observer and avoids interferences from voltage, current
and motor parameter. fN is the motor rated frequency.
 FOC Low-pass Filter Time Constant

Default: 50
Settings 1–1000ms
 This parameter sets the low-pass filter time constant of a flux observer at start-up. If you cannot
activate the motor during high speed operation, lower the setting for this parameter.
 FOC Gain of Excitation Current Rise Time

Default: 100
Settings 33–100%Tr (Tr: rotor time constant)
 Sets the drive’s excitation current rise time when it activates in sensorless torque mode. When
the drive’s activation time is too long in torque mode, adjust this parameter to a shorter time
value.
 Top Limit of Frequency Deviation

Default: 20.00
 Limits the maximum frequency deviation.
 If you set this parameter too high, an abnormal feedback malfunction occurs.
12.1-10-7
 If the application needs a higher setting for Pr. 10-29, note that a higher setting results in larger
motor slip, which causes a PG Error (PGF3, PGF4). In this case, you can set Pr. 10-10 and Pr.
10-13 to 0 to disable PGF3 and PGF4 detection, but you must make sure the PG wiring and
application are correct; otherwise, it may lose the instant PG protection. Pr. 10-29 setting too
high is not commonly done.
Resolver Pole Pair

Default: 1
Settings 1–50
 To use the Pr. 10-30 function, you must set Pr. 10-00=3 (Resolver Encoder) first.
 I/F Mode, Current Command

Default: 40
Settings 0–150% of motor rated current
 Sets the current command for the drive in low speed area (low speed area: frequency command
< Pr. 10-39). When the motor stalls on heavy-duty start-up or forward/ reverse with load,
increase the parameter value. If the inrush current is too high and causes oc stall, then
decrease the parameter value.
 PM FOC Sensorless Speed Estimator Bandwidth

Default: 5.00
 Sets the speed estimator bandwidth. Adjust the parameter to change the stability and the
accuracy of the motor speed.
 If there is low frequency vibration (the waveform is similar to sine wave) during the process, then
increase the bandwidth. If there is high frequency vibration (the waveform shows extreme
vibration and is like a spur), then decrease the bandwidth.
 PM Sensorless Speed Estimator Low-pass Filter Gain

Default: 1.00
 Changes the response speed of the speed estimator.
 If there is low frequency vibration (the waveform is similar to the sine wave) during the process,
then increase the gain. If there is high frequency vibration (the waveform shows extreme
vibration and is like a spur), then decrease the gain.
 ARM (Kp) Gain

Default: 1.00
 ARM (Ki) Gain
Default: 0.20
 Active Magnetic Regulator Kp / Ki, affects the response of magnetic regulation in the low
magnetic area.
12.1-10-8
 If entering the low magnetic area and the input voltage (or DC BUS) plummets (e.g. an unstable
power net causes instant insufficient voltage, or a sudden load that makes DC BUS drop), which
causes the ACR diverge and oc, then increase the gain. If the Id value of a spur creates large
noise in high-frequency output current, decrease the gain to reduce the noise. Decrease the gain
will slow down the response.
 PM Sensorless Control Word

Default: 0000h
bit No. Function Description

0: Start in IF mode
2 Choose a control mode to start.
1: Start in VF mode
0: Stop in IF mode
3 Choose a mode to stop.
1: Stop in VF mode
0: When lower than Pr. 10-40, coast to stop
5 Choose a control mode to stop
1: When lower than Pr. 10-40, ramp to stop
 Frequency Point to Switch from I/F Mode to PM Sensorless Mode

Default: 20.00
 Sets the frequency for the switch point from low frequency to high frequency.
 If the switch point is too low, the motor does not generate enough back-EMF to let the speed
estimator measure the rotor right position and speed, and causes stall and oc when running at
the switch point frequency
 If the switch point is too high, the active area of I/F is too wide, which generates more current and
cannot save energy. If the current value for Pr. 10-31 is too high, the high switch point makes the
drive continue to output with the setting value for Pr. 10-31.
 Frequency Point to Switch from PM Sensorless Mode to I/F Mode

Default: 20.00
 Sets the switch point from high frequency to low frequency.
 If the switch point is too low, the motor does not generate enough back-EMF to let the speed
estimator measure the rotor right position and speed when running at the switch point frequency.
 If the switch point is too high, the active area of I/F is too wide, which generates more current and
cannot save energy. If the current of Pr. 10-31 is too high, the high switch point makes the drive
continue to output with the setting value for Pr. 10-31).
 I/F Mode, Id Current Low Pass-Filter Time

Default: 0.2
 Sets the filter time for Pr. 10-31. Smoothly increases the magnetic field to the current command
setting value under the I/F mode.
12.1-10-9
 If you want to slowly increase the size of Id, increase the filter time to avoid a Step phenomenon
occurs when starting current output. When decrease the filter time (minimum value is 0), the
current rises faster, then a Step phenomenon occurs.
 Initial Angle Detection Pulse Value

Default: 1.0
Settings 0.0–3.0
 The angle detection is fixed to 3: Use the pulse injection method to start. The parameter
influences the value of the pulse during the angle detection. The larger the pulse, the higher the
accuracy of rotator’s position. A larger pulse might cause oc.
 Increase the parameter when the running direction and the command are opposite during
start-up. If oc occurs at start-up, then decrease the parameter.
 Refer to Section 12-2 Adjustment & Application for detailed motor adjustment procedure.
PG Card Version
Default: Read only
 Corresponding version reference:
PG02U 21.XX
PG01U 31.XX
PG01O / PG01L 11.XX
PG02O / PG02L 14.XX
PG01R 41.XX
 Zero Voltage Time during Start-up

Default: 00.000
 This parameter is valid only when the setting of Pr. 07-12 (Speed Tracking during Start-up) = 0.
 When the motor is in static status at start-up, this increases the accuracy when estimating
angles. In order to put the motor in static state, set the three-phase drive output to 0 V to the
motor. The Pr. 10-49 setting time is the length of time when three-phase output at 0 V.
 It is possible that even when you apply this parameter, the motor cannot go into the static state
because of inertia or some external force. If the motor does not go into the static state in 0.2
seconds, increase this setting value appropriately.
 If Pr. 10-49 is too high, the start-up time is longer. If it is too low, then the braking performance is
weak.
 Reverse Angle Limit (Electrical Angle)

Default: 10.00
Settings 0.00–30.00 degree
 When the drive is running forward, if a sudden reverse run occurs and the reverse angle
exceeds the setting for Pr. 10-50, then a ScRv error occurs.
 This parameter is valid only when the setting of Pr. 07-28 =11 (enable textile machine).
 If the estimated tolerance of start-up angle detection is larger, and causes a reverse run of the
motor, this parameter can limit the reverse angle.
12.1-10-10
 Decrease the parameter setting to prevent large reverse angle. If the tolerance is bigger, then
increase the parameter setting. If the load is too large at this moment, it may cause oc.
 Injection Frequency
Default: 500
Settings 0–1200Hz
 This parameter is a high frequency injection command in IPM HFI sensorless control mode and
usually you do not need to adjust it. If a motor’s rated frequency (for example, 400Hz) is too
close to the frequency setting for this parameter (that is, the Default of 500Hz), it affects the
accuracy of the angle detection. Refer to the setting for Pr. 01-01 before you adjust this
parameter.
 If the setting value for Pr. 00-17 is lower than Pr. 10-51*10, then increase the frequency of the
carrier wave.
 Pr. 10-51 is valid only when Pr. 10-53=2.
 Injection Magnitude
Default:
15.0/ 30.0/ 30.0/ 30.0
Settings 0.0–200.0V
230V series: 0.0–100.0V
460V series: 0.0–200.0V
575V series: 0.0–200.0V
690V series: 0.0–200.0V
 The parameter is the magnitude command for the high frequency injection signal in IPM
Sensorless control mode.
 Increasing the parameter can increase the accuracy of the angle estimation, but the
electromagnetic noise might be louder if the setting value is too high.
 The system uses this parameter when the motor’s parameter is “Auto”. This parameter
influences the angle estimation accuracy.
 When the ratio of the salient pole (Lq/Ld) is lower, increase Pr. 10-52 to make the angle
detection more accurate.
 Pr. 10-52 is valid only when Pr. 10-53=2.
 PM Initial Rotor Position Detection Method

Default: 0
Settings 0: Disable
1: Internal 1/4 rated current attracting the rotor to zero degrees
3: Pulse injection
 Set to 2 for IPM; set to 3 for SPM. If these settings cause problems, then set the parameter to 1.
12.1-10-11
11 Advanced Parameters  This parameter can be set during operation.
In this parameter group, ASR stands for Adjust Speed Regulator

System Control
Default: 0000h
Settings bit0: Auto-tuning for ASR and APR
bit2: Zero servo
bit6: 0Hz linear-cross
bit8: Maximum speed for point-to-point position control
 bit0=0: Manual adjustment for ASR and APR gain, Pr. 11-06–Pr. 11-11 are valid and Pr.
11-03–Pr. 11-05 are invalid.
bit0=1: Auto-adjustment for ASR and APR gain, the system automatically generates an ASR
setting, Pr. 11-06–Pr. 11-11 are invalid and Pr. 11-03–Pr. 11-05 are valid.
 When the drive needs to keep a certain torque at zero-speed, or it needs a steady frequency
output at extreme low speed, increase Pr. 11-05 zero-speed bandwidth appropriately. When the
speed is in high-speed area, if the output current trembles seriously and makes the drive vibrate,
then decrease the high-speed bandwidth.
For example:
Response:
Manual gain
[Pr. 11-10, Pr. 11-11] > [Pr. 11-06, Pr. 11-07] > [Pr. 11-08, Pr. 11-09]
Auto gain Pr. 11-05 = 15 Hz, Pr. 11-03 = 10 Hz, Pr. 11-04 = 8 Hz
12.1-11-1
 bit1=0: no function.
bit1=1: Inertia estimation function is enabled. bit1 setting would not activate the estimation
process, set Pr. 05-00=12 to begin FOC/TQC Sensorless inertia estimating.
 bit2=0: no function.
bit2=1: when frequency command is less than Fmin (Pr. 01-07), it will use the zero-servo
function as position control.
 bit6 0Hz linear-cross function: keeps the S-Curve in linear-cross the 0Hz point when the S
acceleration/ deceleration curves (Pr. 01-24–Pr. 01-27) are set, and the forward/ reverse run
cross 0Hz.
bit6=1: The S acceleration/ deceleration curves (Pr. 01-24–Pr. 01-27) do NOT affect the drive
12.1-11-2
starts and stops. Forward / reverse rotation crosses the zero point in linear.
bit6=0: The S acceleration / deceleration curves (Pr. 01-24–Pr. 01-27) affect the drive starts and
stops. Forward / reverse rotation crosses the zero point after the S-Curve.
Pr. 11-00 bit6=1 Pr. 11-00 bit6=1
 bit 7=0: Save the frequency before power is OFF. When power is ON again, the saved
frequency is displayed.
bit7=1: Do not save the frequency before power is OFF. When power is ON again, 0.00 Hz is the
displayed frequency.
 bit8=0: Pr. 11-43 sets the maximum speed for point-to-point position control
bit8=1: The external multi-speed terminal sets the maximum speed for point-to-point position
control. When the external multi-speed terminal is 0, Pr. 11-43 sets the maximum speed.
Per Unit of System Inertia

Default: 256
Settings 1–65535 (256=1PU)
 To get the system inertia from Pr. 11-01, user needs to set Pr. 11-00 to bit1 = 1 and execute
continuous forward/reverse running.
 When Pr. 11-01 = 256, it is 1PU. So if you use a 2HP motor, the 2HP motor inertia is 4.3 kg-cm2
according to the table below. If Pr. 11-01 = 10000 after tuning, the system inertia is (10000 / 256)
x 4.3 kg-cm2.
 Perform the operation test with load based on the inertia after tuning. Run the motor in
acceleration, deceleration, and steady speed and observe the values. If values between speed
feedback and speed command are close, steady-state error is small and overshoot is less, then
this inertia is a better one.
 If the Iq current command from ASR has high-frequency glitch, then decrease the setting. If the
response time of sudden loading is too slow, then increase the setting.
 When using torque mode as the control mode, perform the tuning with speed mode first to see if
the tuned inertia can work normally. After verifying with speed mode, change the control mode to
torque mode.
12.1-11-3
Unit of induction motor system inertia is kg-cm2:

Power Setting Power Setting Power Setting
1HP 2.3 25HP 142.8 175HP 2150.0
2HP 4.3 30HP 176.5 250HP 2800.0
3HP 8.3 40HP 202.5 300HP 3550.0
5HP 14.8 50HP 355.5 375HP 5139.0
7.5HP 26.0 60HP 410.8 425HP 5981.0
10HP 35.8 75HP 494.8 475HP 7053.0
12HP 54.8 100HP 1056.5 600HP 9643.0
15HP 74.3 125HP 1275.3 650HP 10734.0
20HP 95.3 150HP 1900.0 750HP 13000.0
The base value for induction motor system inertia is set by Pr. 05-38 and the unit is in kg-cm2.
 ASR1 / ASR2 Switch Frequency

Default: 7.00
 Sets the low-speed and high-speed ASR switching point in the FOC area. Provides flexibility to
meet two needs: in the high-speed region of the estimator switch point it has a high response,
and in the low-speed region of the estimator switch point it has a lower response. The
recommended switching point is higher than Pr. 10-39.
 A low setting does not cover Pr. 10-39. If the setting is too high, the high-speed range is too
narrow.
 ASR1 Low-speed Bandwidth

Default: 10
Settings 1–40Hz (IM) / 1–100Hz (PM)
 ASR2 High-speed Bandwidth
Default: 10
 Zero-speed Bandwidth
Default: 10
 After estimating inertia and setting Pr. 11-00 bit0=1 (auto-tuning), you can adjust Pr. 11-03, Pr.
11-04 and Pr. 11-05 separately according to the speed response. The larger the setting value, the
faster the response. Pr. 11-02 is the switch frequency for the low-speed / high-speed bandwidth.
 The position control pulse command (MIx=37) and P2P position control Kp gain can adjust Pr.
11-05. The higher the value, the lower the steady-state error.
 ASR 1 Gain
Default: 10
Settings 0–40 Hz (IM) / 1–100Hz (PM)
 ASR 1 Integral Time
Default: 0.100
12.1-11-4
 ASR 2 Gain
Default: 10
 ASR 2 Integral Time
Default: 0.100
 ASR Gain of Zero Speed
Default: 10
 ASR Integral Time of Zero Speed
Default: 0.100
 ASR Speed Feed Forward Gain
Default: 0
Settings 0–150%
 This function enables when Pr. 11-00 bit0 = 1.
 Increase the setting for Pr.11-12 to redcue the command tracking difference, and improve the
speed response. Use this function for speed tracking applications.
 Set Pr.11-01 correctly to get excellent improvement of the speed response.
 PDFF Gain Value

Default: 30
Settings 0–200%
 This parameter is invalid when Pr. 05-24 = 1.
 This parameter is valid only when Pr. 11-00 bit0 = 1.
 After you finish estimating and set Pr. 11-00 bit0=1 (auto-tuning), use Pr. 11-13 to reduce
overshoot, but a shift of the curve may occur earlier. Set Pr. 11-13 = 0, when the acceleration
time fits the applicable demand, but an overshoot occurs, increase Pr. 11-13 to “the best
acceleration without overshoot”.
 Increase Pr. 11-13 to improve the overshoot of speed tracking, but an excessive value may
reduce the transient response.
 Increase Pr. 11-13 to enhance the system stiffness in high-speed steady state, and reduce the
speed transient fluctuation at suddenly loading.
12.1-11-5
 Set Pr.11-01 correctly to get excellent improvement of the speed response.
 ASR Output Low-pass Filter Time

Default: 0.008
 Use this to set the ASR command filter time.
 Notch Filter Depth

Default: 0
Settings 0–20db
 Notch Filter Frequency
Default: 0.00
 Sets the resonance frequency of mechanical system and suppresses the mechanical system
resonance.
 The higher the setting value for Pr. 11-15, the better the mechanical resonance is suppressed.
 The notch filter frequency is the mechanical frequency resonance.
 Forward Motor Torque Limit Quadrant I

 Forward Regenerative Torque Limit Quadrant II
 Reverse Motor Torque Limit Quadrant III
 Reverse Regenerative Torque Limit Quadrant IV
Default: 500
Settings 0–500%
 FOCPG & FOC Sensorless mode:
The drive rated current = 100%. The setting value for Pr. 11-17–Pr. 11-20 is compared with Pr.
03-00 = 7, 8, 9, 10. The minimum of the comparison result is the torque limit. Refer to the torque
limit diagram below.
 TQCPG and TQC Sensorless mode:
The function of Pr. 11-17–Pr. 11-20 is the same as FOC; however, in this case, the torque
command limits the output torque. The minimum value between Pr. 11-17–11-20 and Pr. 06-12
becomes the current output torque limit.
 VF, VFPG and SVC mode:
12.1-11-6
Pr. 11-17–Pr. 11-20 limit the output current, the percentage base value is the drive’s rated
current (not the motor’s rated current). The minimum value between Pr. 11-17–11-20 and
Pr.06-12 becomes the current output limit. In acceleration and steady state operation, when the
output current reaches the limit, the ocA (over-current during acceleration) protection or
over-current stall prevention under steady-state operation acts. The output frequency drops, and
recovers when the output current is lower than the limit value.
 Calculation equation for the motor rated torque:
P(W )
Motor rated torque = T ( N .M )  ; P(W) value = Pr. 05-02 (Pr. 05-14);
 (rad / s)
RPM  2
ω(rad/s) value = Pr. 05-03 (Pr. 05-15);  rad / s
60
 The control mode is based on 100% motor rated current except for these four modes:
IM: VF, VFPG, SVC / PM: PMSVC modes.
 Flux Weakening Curve for Motor 1 Gain Value

Default: 90
Settings 0–200%
12.1-11-7
 Flux Weakening Curve for Motor 2 Gain Value

Default: 90
Settings 0–200%
 Adjusts the output voltage for the flux-weakening curve.
 For the spindle application, use this adjustment method:
1. Use it to adjust the output voltage when exceeding rated frequency.
2. Monitor the output voltage.
3. Adjust the Pr. 11-21 (motor 1) or Pr. 11-22 (motor 2) setting to make the output voltage reach
the motor rated voltage.
4. The larger the setting value, the greater the output voltage.
 Flux Weakening Area Speed Response

Default: 65
Settings 0: Disable
0–150%
 Controls the speed in the flux weakening area. The larger the value set for Pr. 11-23, the faster
the acceleration/deceleration. In general, you do not need to adjust this parameter.
 APR Gain
Default: 10.00
Settings 0.00–40.00 (IM) / 0–100.00Hz (PM)
 Sets the Kp gain of the internal position (MIx=35).
 Gain Value for the APR Feed Forward

Default: 30
Settings 0–100
 This applies only to the internal position (MIx = 35) and position control pulse command (MIx =
37). A larger value can shorten the pulse differential and speed up the position response;
however, it may cause overshoot.
 APR Curve Time

Default: 3.00
 This is valid when the multi-function input terminal is set to 35 (ON). The larger the setting value,
the longer the position time.
12.1-11-8
 Max. Torque Command

Default: 100
Settings 0–500%
 Determines the upper limit of the torque command (motor rated torque is 100%).
 Calculation equation for the motor rated torque:
P(W )
Motor rated torque: T ( N .M )  ; P(W) value = Pr. 05-02 (Pr. 05-14);
 (rad / s)
RPM  2
60
 Torque Offset Source
Default: 0
Settings 0: Disable
2: Pr. 11-29
3: Controlled by external terminal (Pr. 11-30–Pr. 11-32)
 Determines the source for the torque offset.
 When it is set to 3 (external terminal control), the torque offset source follows Pr. 11-30, Pr.
11-31 or Pr. 11-32 as the combination of MI setting as 31, 32 or 33 commands. Refer to the
following chart:
Normally open (N.O.) contact: ON= contact closed, OFF= contact open
Pr. 11-32 Pr. 11-31 Pr. 11-30
Torque Offset
MIx = 33 (Low) MIx = 32 (Mid) MIx = 31 (High)
OFF OFF OFF None
OFF OFF ON Pr. 11-30
OFF ON OFF Pr. 11-31
OFF ON ON Pr. 11-30 + Pr. 11-31
ON OFF OFF Pr. 11-32
ON OFF ON Pr. 11-30 + Pr. 11-32
ON ON OFF Pr. 11-31 + Pr. 11-32
ON ON ON Pr. 11-30 + Pr. 11-31 + Pr. 11-32
 Torque Offset Setting

Default: 0.0
Settings -100.0%–100.0%
 Determines the torque offset command. The motor rated torque is 100%.
 The calculation equation for the motor rated torque:
P(W )
 (rad / s)
RPM  2
60
12.1-11-9
 High Torque Compensation

Default: 30.0
Settings -100.0%–100.0%
 Middle Torque Compensation
Default: 20.0
Settings -100.0%–100.0%
 Low Torque Compensation
Default: 10.0
Settings -100.0%–100.0%
 When Pr. 11-28 is set to 3, the torque-offset source uses Pr. 11-30, Pr. 11-31 or Pr. 11-32
determined by the multi-function input terminals setting (31, 32 or 33). The motor rated torque is
100%.
 The calculation equation for the motor rated torque:
P(W )
 (rad / s)
RPM  2
60
 Torque Command Source
Default: 0
Settings 0: Digital Keypad
1: RS-485 communication (Pr. 11-34)
3: CANopen
5: Communication expansion card
 When you set Pr. 11-33 to 0 or 1, set the torque command in Pr. 11-34.
 When you set Pr. 11-33 to 2, 3 or 5, Pr. 11-34 only displays the torque command.
 Torque Command
Default: 0.0
Settings -100.0–100.0% (Pr. 11-27=100%)
 This parameter is for the torque command. When you set Pr. 11-27 to 250% and Pr. 11-34 to
100%, the actual torque command = 250 × 100% = 250% motor rated torque.
 The drive saves the setting before power is OFF.
 Torque Command Filter Time

Default: 0.000
 When the setting is too long, the control is stable but the control response is delayed. When the
setting is too short, the response is quick but the control may be unstable. Adjust the setting
according to the stability of the control and response for the application.
12.1-11-10
Speed Limit Selection

Default: 0
Settings 0: Set by Pr. 11-37 (Forward Speed Limit) and Pr. 11-38 (Reverse Speed Limit)
1: Set by Pr. 11-37, Pr. 11-38 and Pr. 00-20 (Source of Master Frequency
Command)
2: Set by Pr. 00-20 (Source of Master Frequency Command).
 Speed limit function: when you use the torque control mode, if the torque command is greater
than the load, the motor accelerates until the motor speed equals the speed limit. At this time, it
switches to speed control mode to stop acceleration.
 Pr. 11-36=1:
When the torque command is positive, the forward speed limit is Pr. 00-20 and the reverse
speed limit is Pr. 11-38.
When the torque command is negative, the forward speed limit is Pr. 11-37 and the reverse
speed limit is Pr. 00-20.
For example: In an unwind application, the torque command direction is different from the motor
operating direction, and this indicates that the load drives the motor. The speed limit must be Pr.
11-37 or Pr. 11-38. In normal applications, when the motor drives the load and the torque
command is in the same direction as the speed limit, only then you can set the speed limit
according to Pr. 00-20.
 About the keypad display, refer to the LED function descriptions in Chapter10 “Digital Keypad”.
In torque control, the F page of keypad displays the present speed limit value.
 Forward Speed Limit (Torque Mode)

Default: 10
Settings 0–120%
12.1-11-11
 Reverse Speed Limit (Torque Mode)

Default: 10
Settings 0–120%
 These parameters define the speed limit in the forward and reverse directions in torque mode
(Pr. 01-00 maximum operation frequency = 100%).
Zero Torque Command Mode Selection

Default: 0
Settings 0: Torque mode
1: Speed mode
 This parameter is only valid in TQCPG IM and TQCPG PM, and it defines the mode when the
speed limit is 0% or 0Hz.
 When you set Pr. 11-39 to 0, and the speed limit is 0% or 0Hz, the motor generates an excitation
current, and the torque command Pr. 11-34 limits the torque.
 When you set Pr. 11-39 to 1, and the speed limit is 0% or 0Hz, the AC motor drive can generate
output torque through the speed controller (the torque limit is Pr. 06-12), and the control mode
changes from TQC + PG to FOC + PG mode. The motor has a holding torque. If the speed
command is not 0, the drive automatically changes it to 0.
 Point-to-Point Position Control Command Source

Default: 0
Settings 0: External terminal
2: RS-485
3: CANopen
5: Communication card
 System Control Flag
Default: 0000h
bit No. Function Description

0: The speed control in torque mode, the maximum
Current limit selection of the current limit is the torque command.
0
speed control in torque mode 1: The speed control in torque mode, the maximum
current limit is Pr. 06-12.
0: FWD/ REV cannot be controlled by Pr. 02-12 bit0 & 1
1 FWD / REV action control
1: FWD/ REV can be controlled by Pr. 02-12 bit0 & 1
 Point- to-Point Position Control Maximum Frequency

Default: 10.00
 Point-to-Point Position Control Acceleration Time
Default: 1.00
12.1-11-12
 Point-to-Point Position Control Deceleration Time

Default: 3.00
Torque Output Filter Gain

Default: 0.050
Settings 0.000–65.535
 Sets the filter gain of the torque output display (keypad display and communication read),
including Pr. 00-04 = 8 displays the output torque (%) that the drive calculates, the output torque
(XXX.X %) of communication address 210B and the positive / negative output torque (%) that
2208 drive calculates (XXX.X %).
12.1-11-13
13 Application Parameters by Industry

Application Selection
Default: 0
Settings 0: Disabled
1: User-defined Parameter
2: Compressor (IM)
3: Fan
4: Pump
10: Air Handling Unit, AHU
 Note: after you select the macro, some of the default values adjust automatically according to
the application selection.
 Group setting 02: Compressor (IM)
The following table lists the relevant compressor application parameters.
Pr. Explanation Settings
00-11 Speed control mode 0 (V/F control)
00-16 Load selection 0 (Normal load)
00-17 Carrier frequency Default setting
Master frequency command source (AUTO)
00-20 2 (External analog input)
/ Source selection of the PID target
00-21 Operation command source (AUTO) 1 (External terminals)
00-22 Stop method 0 (Ramp to stop)
00-23 Control of motor direction 1 (Disable reverse)
01-00 Maximum operation frequency Default setting
01-01 Output frequency of motor 1 Default setting
01-02 Output voltage of motor 1 Default setting
01-03 Mid-point frequency 1 of motor 1 Default setting
01-04 Mid-point voltage 1 of motor 1 Default setting
01-07 Minimum output frequency of motor 1 Default setting
01-08 Minimum output voltage of motor 1 Default setting
01-11 Output frequency lower limit 20 (Hz)
01-12 Acceleration time 1 20 (s)
01-13 Deceleration time 1 20 (s)
03-00 Analog input selection (AVI) 0 (No function)
03-01 Analog input selection (ACI) 1 (Frequency command)
05-01 Full-load current for induction motor 1 (A) Default setting
05-03 Rated speed for induction motor 1 (rpm) Default setting
05-04 Number of poles for induction motor 1 Default setting
12.1-13-1
 Group setting 03: Fan

The following table lists the relevant fan setting application parameters.
00-16 Load selection 0 (Normal load)
00-17 Carrier frequency Default setting
00-22 Stop method 1 (Coast to stop)
00-30 Master frequency command (HAND) source 0 (Digital keypad)
00-31 Operation Command (HAND) source 0 (Digital keypad)
01-10 Output frequency upper limit 50 (Hz)
01-43 V/F curve selection 2 (Second V/F curve)
02-05 Multi-function input command 5 (MI5) 16 (Rotating speed command from ACI)
03-00 Analog input selection (AVI) 1 (Frequency command)
03-01 Analog input selection (ACI) 1 (Frequency command)
03-28 AVI terminal input selection 0 (0–10 V)
03-29 ACI terminal input selection 1 (0–10 V)
03-31 AFM output selection 0 (0–10 V)
03-50 Analog input curve selection 1 (three-point curve of AVI)
2 (Speed tracking by minimum output
07-06 Restart after momentary power loss
frequency)
07-11 Number of times of restart after fault 5 (times)
07-33 Auto-restart interval of fault 60 (s)
12.1-13-2
 Group setting 04: Pump

The following table lists the relevant pump setting application parameters.
00-16 Load Selection 0 (Normal load)
01-10 Output frequency upper limit 50 (Hz)
01-43 V/F curve selection 2 (Second V/F curve)
frequency)
07-11 Number of times of restart after fault 5
12.1-13-3
 Group setting 10: Air Handling Unit, AHU

The following table lists the relevant AHU setting application parameters.
Pr Explanation Settings
00-04 Content of multi-function display 2
00-16 Load Selection 0 (Normal load)
00-20 2 or 0
00-21 Operation command source (AUTO) 1 or 0
00-22 Stop method 1 (Coast to stop)
00-30 Master frequency command (HAND) source 0 (Digital keypad)
00-31 Operation Command (HAND) source 0 (Digital keypad)
01-00 Maximum operation frequency 50
01-01 Output frequency of motor 1 50
01-02 Output voltage of motor 1 380
01-07 Minimum output frequency of motor 1 0.1
01-10 Output frequency upper limit 50
01-11 Output frequency lower limit 35
01-34 Zero-speed mode 2
01-43 V/F curve selection 2
02-05 Multi-function input command 5 (MI5) 16 or 17
02-13 Multi-function output 1 RLY1 11
02-14 Multi-function output 2 RLY2 1
03-00 Analog input selection (AVI) 1
03-01 Analog input selection (ACI) 1
03-02 Analog input selection (AUI) 1
03-28 AVI terminal input selection 0
03-29 ACI terminal input selection 1
03-20 Multi-function output 1 (AFM1) 0
03-23 Multi-function output 2 (AFM2) 0
03-31 AFM2 output selection 0 or 1
03-50 Analog input curve selection 4 (three-point curve of AUI)
frequency)
07-11 Number of times of restart after fault 5 (times)
12.1-13-4
14 Extension Card Parameter

 Extension Card Input Terminal Selection (AI10)
 Extension Card Input Terminal Selection (AI11)
Default: 0
Settings 0: Disable
1: Frequency command
2: Torque command (torque limit in speed mode)
4: PID target value
13: PID compensation amount
 When the setting for Pr. 14-00 and Pr. 14-01 are the same, the AI10 is selected first.
 Analog Input Filter Time (AI10)

 Analog Input Filter Time (AI11)
Default: 0.01
 The input analog signal of terminal AI1 and AI2 often includes interferences, which will affect the
stability of the control. Use these input delays to filter a noisy analog signal.
 When the setting for the time constant is too large, the control is stable but the control response
is slow. When the setting for time constant is too small, the control response is faster but the
control may be unstable. For optimal setting, adjust the setting according to the control stability
or the control response.
 Analog Input 4–20mA Signal Loss Selection (AI10)

 Analog Input 4–20mA Signal Loss Selection (AI11)
Default: 0
Settings 0: Disable
1: Continue operation at the last frequency
2: Decelerate to 0Hz
 This parameter determines the treatment when the 4–20 mA signal is lost, when Pr. 14-18 = 2,
Pr. 14-19 = 2.
12.1-14-1
 When the setting for Pr. 14-18 or Pr. 14-19 are 0 or 1, the voltage input to AVI and ACI terminal
is 0–10 V or 4–20 mA. At this moment, Pr. 14-10 and Pr. 14-11 are invalid.
 Setting 1 or 2: Displays the warning code “ANL” on the keypad. It continues blinking until the
lost ACI signal is recovered.
 When the motor drive stops, the warning condition does not continue to exist, so the warning
disappears.
 Extension Card Output Terminal Selection (AO10)

 Extension Card Output Terminal Selection (AO11)
Default: 0
Settings 0–23
 Refer to the function chart below for details setting.
Function Chart
0 Output frequency (Hz) Maximum frequency Pr.01-00 is processed as 100%.
1 Frequency command (Hz) Maximum frequency Pr.01-00 is processed as 100%.
2 Motor speed (Hz) Maximum frequency Pr.01-00 is processed as 100%.
3 Output current (rms) (2.5 ᵡ rated current) is processed as 100%
4 Output voltage (2 ᵡ rated voltage) is processed as 100%
5 DC BUS voltage 450V (900V)=100%
6 Power factor -1.000–1.000=100%
7 Power (2 ᵡ rated power) is processed as 100%
8 Torque Full load torque = 100%
9 AVI 0–10 V = 0–100%
10 ACI 4–20 mA = 0–100%
11 AUI -10–10V = 0–100%
12 Iq current command (2.5 ᵡ rated current) is processed as 100%
13 Iq feedback value (2.5 ᵡ rated current) is processed as 100%
14 Id current command (2.5 ᵡ rated current) is processed as 100%
15 Id feedback value (2.5 ᵡ rated current) is processed as 100%
18 Torque command Rated torque of motor = 100%
19 PG2 frequency command Maximum frequency Pr.01-00 is processed as 100%.
20 CANopen analog output For CANopen communication analog output
21 RS-485 analog output For RS-485 (InnerCOM / MODBUS) analog output
Communication card For communication analog output (CMC-MOD01, CMC-EIP01,
22
analog output CMC-PN01, CMC-DN01)
Pr. 03-32 controls the voltage output level.
23 Constant voltage output
0–100% of Pr. 03-32 corresponds to 0–10V of AFM.
CANopen and RS-485
25 For CANopen and InnerCOM control output
analog output
12.1-14-2
 Analog Output 1 Gain (AO10)

 Analog Output 1 Gain (AO11)
Default: 100.0
 Adjusts the voltage level outputted to the analog meter from the analog signal (Pr. 14-12,
Pr. 14-13) output terminal AFM of the drive.
 Analog Output 1 in REV Direction (AO10)

 Analog Output 1 in REV Direction (AO11)
Default: 0
Settings 0: Absolute output voltage value
1: Reverse output 0V; forward output 0–10V
2: Reverse output 5–0V; forward output 5–10V
 Determines the voltage reverse output when AO10 and AO11 are set as 0–10 V (Pr. 14-36 = 2,
Pr. 14-37 = 2).
 Extension Card Input Selection (AI10)

Default: 0
Settings 0: 0–10V (AVI10)
1: 0–20mA (ACI10)
2: 4–20mA (ACI10)
 Extension Card Input Selection (AI11)
Default: 0
Settings 0: 0–10V (AVI11)
1: 0–20mA (ACI11)
2: 4–20mA (ACI11)
 When you change the input mode, verify that the switch position of external terminal (AI10, AI11)
is correct.
 AO10 DC Output Setting Level

 AO11 DC Output Setting Level
Default: 0.00
Settings 0.00–100.00%
12.1-14-3
 AO10 Filter Output Time

 AO11 Filter Output Time
Default: 0.01
 AO10 Output Selection

 AO11 Output Selection
Default: 0
Settings 0: 0–10V
1: 0–20mA
2: 4–20mA
12.1-14-4
12-2 Adjustment & Application

12-2-1 Standard IM Motor Adjustment Procedure
Flow chart
12.2-00-1
FOC sensorless control diagram
Adjustment procedure
1. Parameter reset to default, Pr.00-02 = 10 or 9
(To avoid other parameters that are not related affecting the motor controlling)
2. Set up motor parameters according to the nameplate on the motor

Pr. 01-01 Output Frequency of Motor 1
Pr. 01-02 Output Voltage of Motor 1
Pr. 05-01 Full-load Current for Induction Motor 1
Pr. 05-02 Rated Power for Induction Motor 1
Pr. 05-03 Rated Speed for Induction Motor 1
Pr. 05-04 Number of Poles for Induction Motor 1
12.2-00-2
3. Press “RUN” to start auto-tuning of IM magnetic flux curve dynamic test for Pr.05-00 = 1 or 6 (motor is
running). Make sure the motor executes auto-tuning under break-away load condition. Check if there
are motor parameters after auto-tuning.
Pr. 05-06 Stator Resistance (Rs) for Induction Motor 1
Pr. 05-07 Rotor Resistance (Rr) for Induction Motor 1
Pr. 05-08 Magnetizing Inductance (Lm) for Induction Motor 1
Pr. 05-09 Stator Inductance (Lx) for Induction Motor 1
4. Execute estimation of the motor inertia (optional). Press “RUN” to start the estimation after finishing
the settings for the parameters mentioned below.
Pr. 00-10 = 2, torque mode
Pr. 00-13 = 2, TQC sensorless
Pr. 05-00 = 12, FOC sensorless inertia estimation (motor is running)
After inertia estimation is finished, check if the estimated value for Pr. 11-01 is reasonable,
refer to the base value table below. (Unit: kg-cm2)

1HP 2.3 25HP 142.8 175HP 2150.0
2HP 4.3 30HP 176.5 250HP 2800.0
3HP 8.3 40HP 202.5 300HP 3550.0
5HP 14.8 50HP 355.5 375HP 5139.0
7.5HP 26.0 60HP 410.8 425HP 5981.0
10HP 35.8 75HP 494.8 475HP 7053.0
12HP 54.8 100HP 1056.5 600HP 9643.0
15HP 74.3 125HP 1275.3 650HP 10734.0
20HP 95.3 150HP 1900.0 750HP 13000.0
5. Execute IM sensorless FOC mode, set up the following parameters:

Pr. 00-10 = 0, set as speed mode
Pr. 00-11 = 5, set as FOC sensorless mode
Pr. 11-00 bit0 =1, use ASR gain auto-tuning
Press “RUN” and start the Test with no-load. Accelerate the motor to the rated speed, and then
decelerate to stop, check if the motor runs smoothly.
If the motor runs smoothly, then the setting for IM Sensorless FOC is completed.
If the motor does not run smoothly, or fails to start at low-frequency, then refer to the
following steps for adjustment.
6. Select auto-tuning gain (Pr. 11-00 bit0=1), adjust ASR parameters according to the speed response.
Pr. 11-00 bit0 =1, use auto-tuning for ASR
Pr. 11-03 ASR1 low-speed bandwidth (When the acceleration of low-speed cannot follow the
acceleration command, increase the low-speed bandwidth)
Pr. 11-04 ASR2 high-speed bandwidth (When the acceleration in high speed causes vibration or
cannot follow the acceleration command, increase high-speed bandwidth)
Pr. 11-05 Zero-speed bandwidth (If the response of start-up is slow or incapable, increase
zero-speed bandwidth)
The bigger the setting value for ASR bandwidth, the faster the response.
12.2-00-3
The low-speed bandwidth cannot be set too high, or the observer will diverge.
7. Adjust the setting of FOC speed observer and per-unit value of inertia (common problems)
 Pr. 10-25: Set up FOC bandwidth of speed observer
Situation 1. Speed command changes rapidly, but speed response cannot follow.
(Speed response is too slow→ Increase the setting value)
Situation 2. The noise of the observer is too large, and causes the operation diverged.
(Speed noise is too large→Decrease)
 Pr. 11-01: Set up per unit of system inertia
Situation 1. The inrush current is too high at start-up, and causes an oc error.
Situation 2. An ocn error occurs during RUN or STOP, and the motor runs randomly.
 Check Pr. 11-01 whether the JM per-unit of system inertia is too large.
 Decrease Pr. 10-25 FOC bandwidth for speed observer, or Pr. 11-05 zero-speed
bandwidth.
8. Related parameters
Speed Control Mode
Default: 0
Settings 0: IMVF (IM V/F control)
1: IMVFPG (IM V/F control+ Encoder)
2: IM/PM SVC(IM/PM space vector control)
4: PMFOCPG（PM FOC + Encoder）
5: IMFOC Sensorless (IM FOC sensorless)
6: PM Sensorless (PM FOC sensorless)
7: IPM Sensorless (Interior PM FOC sensorless)
Output Frequency of Motor 1 (Base Frequency and Motor Rated Frequency)

Default: 60.00 / 50.00
 Set this value according to the motor’s rated frequency from the motor’s nameplate. If the
motor’s rated frequency is 60Hz, set the value to 60Hz. If the motor’s rated frequency is 50Hz,
set the value to 50Hz.
12.2-00-4
Output Voltage of Motor 1 (Base Frequency and Motor Rated Frequency)

Default:
200.0/ 400.0/ 575.0/ 660.0
Settings 230V series: 0.0–255.0V
460V series: 0.0–510.0V
575V series: 0.0–637.0V
690V series: 0.0–765.0V
 Set this value according to the motor’s rated voltage from the motor’s nameplate. If the motor’s
rated voltage is 220V, set the value to 220.0V. If the motor’s rated voltage is 200V, set the value
to 200.0V.
 There is a wide variety of motors, but the power system for each country is difference. The
convenient and economical way to solve this problem is to use an AC motor drive, which can
deal with different voltages and frequencies, while supporting the original characteristic and life
of the motor.
Motor Parameter Auto-tuning

Default: 0
2: Static auto-tuning for induction motor (IM)
4: Dynamic test for PM magnetic pole (with the running in forward direction)
6: Advanced rolling auto-tuning for IM flux curve
12: FOC Sensorless inertia estimation
Default: Depending
on the model power
 Sets the rated power for motor 1. The default is the drive’s power value.

Settings 0–XXXX (Depending on the motor pole number)
 Pr. 01-01 and Pr. 05-04 determine the maximum rotor speed for IM.
For example: Pr. 01-01=20Hz, Pr. 05-04=2, according to the equation 120 x 20 Hz / 2 = 1200 rpm
and take integers. Due to the slip of the IM, the maximum setting value for Pr. 05-03 is 1199rpm
(1200rpm – 1).
12.2-00-5
Number of Poles for Induction Motor 1

Default: 4
Settings 2–64
 Sets the number poles for the motor (must be an even number).
normally. Pr. 01-01 and Pr. 05-03 determine the maximum set up number poles for the IM.
39 rpm = 61.5 and take even number, the number of poles is 60. Therefore, Pr. 05-04 can be set

the model power
Settings 0 to the factory setting in Pr.05-01
Stator Resistance(Rs) for Induction Motor 1

the model power
Settings 0.000–65.535Ω
Rotor Resistance(Rr) for Induction Motor 1
Default: 0.000
Settings 0.000–65.535Ω

Stator inductance (Lx) for Induction Motor 1
Default: 0.0
Settings 0.0–6553.5mH
 FOC Bandwidth for Speed Observer

Default:40.0
 Setting the speed observer to a higher bandwidth could shorten the speed response time, but
creates greater noise interference during the speed observation.
System Control
Default: 0000h
Settings bit0: Auto-tuning for ASR and APR
bit2: Zero servo
bit6: 0Hz linear-cross
bit8: Maximum speed for point-to-point position control
12.2-00-6
 bit0 = 0: Manual adjustment for ASR and APR gain, Pr. 11-06–Pr. 11-11 are valid and Pr.
11-03–Pr. 11-05 are invalid.
bit0 = 1: Auto-tuning for ASR and APR gain, the system automatically generates an ASR setting,
Pr. 11-06–Pr. 11-11 are invalid and Pr. 11-03–Pr. 11-05 are valid.
 When the drive needs to keep a certain torque at zero-speed, or it needs a steady frequency
output at extreme low speed, increase Pr. 11-05 zero-speed bandwidth appropriately. When the
speed is in high-speed area, if the output current trembles seriously and makes the drive vibrate,
then decrease the high-speed bandwidth.
For example:
Response:
Manual gain
[Pr. 11-10, Pr. 11-11] > [Pr. 11-06, Pr. 11-07] > [Pr. 11-08, Pr. 11-09]
Auto gain Pr. 11-05 = 15 Hz, Pr. 11-03 = 10 Hz, Pr. 11-04 = 8 Hz
12.2-00-7
 bit1 = 0: no function.
bit1 = 1: Inertia estimation function is enabled. bit1 setting would not activate the estimation
process, set Pr. 05-00 = 12 to begin FOC / TQC Sensorless inertia estimating.
Per Unit of System Inertia

Default: 256
Settings 1–65535 (256=1PU)
 To get the system inertia from Pr.11-01, user needs to set Pr.11-00 to bit1=1 and execute
continuous forward / reverse running.
 When Pr. 11-01 = 256, it is 1PU. So if you use a 2HP motor, the 2HP motor inertia is 4.3 kg-cm2
according to the table below. If Pr. 11-01 = 10000 after tuning, the system inertia is (10000 / 256)
x 4.3 kg-cm2.
 Perform the operation test with load based on the inertia after tuning. Run the motor in
acceleration, deceleration, and steady speed and observe the values. If values between speed
feedback and speed command are close, steady-state error is small and overshoot is less, then
this inertia is a better one.
 When using torque mode as the control mode, perform the tuning with speed mode first to see
if the tuned inertia can work normally. After verifying with speed mode, change the control mode
to torque mode.
 If the Iq current command from ASR has high-frequency glitch, then decrease the setting. If the
response time of sudden loading is too slow, then increase the setting.
12.2-00-8
Unit of induction motor system inertia is kg-cm2:

1HP 2.3 25HP 142.8 175HP 2150.0
2HP 4.3 30HP 176.5 250HP 2800.0
3HP 8.3 40HP 202.5 300HP 3550.0
5HP 14.8 50HP 355.5 375HP 5139.0
7.5HP 26.0 60HP 410.8 425HP 5981.0
10HP 35.8 75HP 494.8 475HP 7053.0
12HP 54.8 100HP 1056.5 600HP 9643.0
15HP 74.3 125HP 1275.3 650HP 10734.0
20HP 95.3 150HP 1900.0 750HP 13000.0
The base value for PM system inertia is set by Pr.05-38 and the unit is in kg-cm2.
 ASR1 / ASR2 Switch Frequency

Default: 7.00
 Sets the low-speed and high-speed ASR switching point in the FOC area. Provides flexibility to
meet two needs: in the high-speed region of the estimator switch point it has a high response,
and in the low-speed region of the estimator switch point it has a lower response. The
recommended switching point is higher than Pr. 10-39.
 A low setting does not cover Pr. 10-39. If the setting is too high, the high-speed range is too
narrow.
 ASR1 Low-speed Bandwidth

Default: 10
 ASR2 High-speed Bandwidth
Default: 10
 Zero-speed Bandwidth
Default: 10
 After estimating inertia and setting Pr.11-00 bit0=1 (auto-tuning), you can adjust Pr.11-03, Pr.
11-04 and Pr. 11-05 separately according to the speed response. The larger the setting value,
the faster response you. Pr. 11-02 is the switch frequency for the low-speed / high-speed
bandwidth.
 The position control pulse command (MIx=37) and P2P position control Kp gain can adjust Pr.
11-05. The higher the value, the lower the steady-state error.
12.2-00-9
12-2-2 Standard PM Motor Adjustment Procedure
12-2-2-1 Pr.00-11=4 PM FOC+PG
1. Control Diagram
(A) PM FOC+PG Control Diagram (applicable for C2000 V2.04 and above)
(B) PM TQC+PG Control Diagram (applicable for C2000 V2.04 and above)
12.2-00-10
2. PM FOC+PG Adjustment Procedure (* the number marked on the procedure corresponds to the
number of following adjustment explanations)
 PM FOC+PG Motor Parameter Adjustment Procedure
12.2-00-11
7.Re-power after Power Off
8.PM Motor Inertia Estimation

1) Pr.00-11=4 FOCPG control
2) Set the running frequency to 2/3 of the motor rated
frequency.
3) Set the accel./decel. time as 1/10 of the default value.
(Adjust the accel./decel time based on the load inertia.
The smaller the inertia is, the shorter the accel./decel.
time will be)
4) Check connection of the load and the motor
5) Pr.11-00=bit1=1 inertia estimation（for FOCPG mode）
Press’RUN’
Rapid forward/reverse run repeatedly
Observe the system inertia per-unit
Pr.11-01
If the value does not change (inertia

estimation error), decrease the Observe if Pr.11-
frequency command, and re-estimate 01 has changed?
NO
the inertia
YES
Different load inertia will have
different converging speed. The
Continue forward/backward running, Observe if the inertia larger the intertia is, the slower
so the inertia estimation can estimation of Pr.11-01 it will converge. Which needs to
converge to small changing has converged to small
NO changes? estimate for several times.
differences.
YES
Press’STOP’
1) Press 'ENTER’ at the display
screen of the last inertia
estimation of Pr.11-01
2) Set Pr.11-00=bit 1 as 0
3) Set the accel./decel time to
default value
9.No-load
Trial Run
 Basic Motor Parameters Adjustment
1. Parameter reset:
Pr.00-02=9 (50Hz) or 10 (60Hz), reset parameter to the default value.
2. Select IPM motor type:
Pr.05-33=1 (SPM) or 2 (IPM)
3. Motor nameplate parameter setting:
Parameter Description
Pr.01-01 Rated frequency (Hz)
Pr.01-02 Rated voltage (VAC)
Pr.05-33 PM motor type (IPM or SPM)
Pr.05-34 Rated current (A)
12.2-00-12
Pr.05-35 Rated power (kW)
Pr.05-36 Rated rotor speed (RPM)
Pr.05-37 Number of poles for the motor (poles)
4. PM parameter auto-tuning:
Rolling auto-tuning for PM (without load) Pr.05-00=5 or static auto-tuning for PM
(Pr.05-00=13)
Set Pr.05-00=5 or 13 and press “RUN” key to finish motor auto-tuning, then you will get the
following parameters:
Pr.05-39 Stator resistance for a permanent magnet motor (Ω)
Pr.05-40 Permanent magnet motor Ld (mH)
Pr.05-41 Permanent magnet motor Lq (mH)
Ke parameter of a permanent magnet motor (Vphase，rms / krpm)
(When Pr.05-00=5, the Ke parameter is measured based on the
Pr.05-43 actual motor rotation.)
(When Pr.05-00=13, the Ke parameter is automatically calculated
based on the motor power, current and rotor speed.)
If an auto-tuning error (AUE) occurs, refer to Section 14 “Error Codes and Descriptions” for
further treatment.
AUE Error (code) Description
AUE (40) Auto-tuning error
AUE1 (142) Auto-tuning error 1 (No feedback current error)
AUE2 (143) Auto-tuning error 2 (Motor phase loss error)
AUE3 (144) Auto-tuning error 3 (No-load current I0 measuring error)
Auto-tuning error 4 (Leakage inductance Lsigma measuring
AUE4 (148)
error)
5. Set encoder parameter
Check the encoder power and input type, make sure it is used with correct PG card.
PG Card Type
EMC-PG01L EMC-PG01O EMC-PG01U EMC-PG01R
EMC-PG02L EMC-PG02O EMC-PG02U -
Related parameters:
(1) Pr. 10-00: Encoder type selection
(2) Pr. 10-01: Encoder pulses per revolution
(3) Pr. 10-02: Encoder input type setting = 1 (Phases A and B are pulse inputs, forward
direction if A-phase leads B-phase by 90 degrees)
6. Measure the initial magnetic pole angle of PM
(1) Set Pr.05-00=4 (dynamic test for PM magnetic pole)
(2) Press “RUN” key to proceed the PM magnetic pole measurement, and to get the offset
angle.
Note 1: It is suggested to measure the offset angle more than twice, to make sure the angle
tolerance is within ±5 degree.
Note 2: Verify the encoder and PG card are connected in the right order.
12.2-00-13
7. Cycle the power.

8. Execute inertia estimation for PM
(1) Set Pr. 00-11 = 4 FOCPG control.
(2) Set the operation frequency command to 2/3 of the motor’s rated frequency.
(3) Set the acceleration / deceleration time (Pr. 01-12, Pr. 01-13) to 1/10 of the default time.
(Adjust the acceleration / deceleration time according to the load inertia. The smaller the
load inertia, the shorter the acceleration / deceleration time is set).
(4) Check if the load and the motor is connected.
(5) Set Pr. 11-00 bit1 = 1 inertia estimate (only in FOCPG mode).
(6) Press “RUN” key to proceed the inertia
Quickly run the motor in forward and reverse direction repeatedly, and observe the
inertia estimated value of Pr. 11-01 for the keypad.
a. If the system inertial estimated value of Pr. 11-01 does not change ( = default 256), it
means the inertia estimation is wrong. Reduce the frequency command and estimate
the inertia again.
b. If the system inertia estimated value of Pr. 11-01 is still a lot different from the
estimated value of FWD/REV operation, continue the estimation in forward / reverse
operating direction to restraint the estimated inertia to small difference.
(7) Press “STOP” key to obtain the estimated inertia value:
a. Press “ENTER” to confirm the input value at the displayed page of the last estimated
inertia value of Pr. 11-01.
b. Set Pr.11-01 bit1 = 0, return the control mode to speed mode.
c. Set the acceleration / deceleration time (Pr. 01-12, Pr. 01-13) back to the default value.
12.2-00-14
II. PM FOC+PG No-load/ Light-load Adjustment Procedure
9.No-load
Trial Run
Set 10Hz frequency

command to proceed
encoder running test
RUN
Set Pr.10-02 input =2

(Phase B leads 90 degree A1. Start running in
in a forward run the reverse direction?
command the phase A) YES
NO PGF Error Type:
PGF1: PG feedback error
Refer to Chapter 14 PGF2: PG feedback loss
A2. PGFx error or
“Error Code” for abnormal speed?
PGF3: PG feedback stall
further treatment PGF4: PG slip error
YES PGF5: PG hardware error
NO
10.No-load/Light
Load Running Test
a. Set speed regulator ASR

Pr.11-00=1 ASR auto-tuning
b. No-load/ Light-load started,
auto accel./decel. testing
Increase ASR1 low-speed bandwidth Decrease ASR1 low-speed bandwidth

Pr.11-03 Pr.11-03
Increase ASR2 high-speed bandwidth Decrease ASR2 high-speed bandwidth
Pr.11-04 Pr.11-04
NO B1.Accelerated
The rotor speed cannot rated frequency High-frequency oscillation
follow the accel. time stable? of output frequency
YES
Increase ASR2 high-speed

bandwidth Pr.11-04
NO B2. Is the max.

Oscillation or motor stall at output frequency
max. rotor speed reachable?
YES
11. Running Test

with Load
12.2-00-15
 No-load/ Light duty Running Adjustment
9. No-load trial run

Set the frequency command to 10Hz to proceed the encoder running test:
A1. If the motor starts in a reverse direction.
If the motor starts in a reverse direction, set the encoder input type Pr. 10-02 = 2 (phases
A and B are pulse inputs, forward direction if B-phase leads A-phase by 90 degrees.)
A2. Observe if a PGFx error is displayed on the keypad, or the motor runs in an abnormal
speed.
If the PGFx error is displayed or the motor runs in an abnormal speed, refer to Section 14
“Fault Codes and Descriptions” or the following table for PGFx error type and further
treatment.
PGF Error (code) Description Solution

PGF1 (42) PG feedback error Check parameter setting of Pr.10-00–10-02
PGF2 (43) PG feedback loss Check the wiring of encoder and PG card
PGF3 (44) PG feedback stall Check the wiring of encoder and PG card
Check the pulse setting of Pr.10-01
PGF4 (45) PG slip error
Check the wiring of encoder and PG card
Check if the PG card is installed on the
PGF5 (65) PG hardware error correct slot position
Check the setting parameter of the encoder
10. No-load / light duty running test

a. Set the speed regulator (ASR) as Pr.11-00=1, and set the ASR gain as auto-tuning.
b. Start the motor with no-load / light duty and proceed acceleration / deceleration test.
B1. Accelerate to the rated frequency and observe if the motor runs stably.
- If the output rotor speed cannot follow the acceleration time, increase Pr.11-04 (ASR2
high-speed bandwidth) or Pr.11-03 (ASR1 low-speed bandwidth).
- If a high-frequency oscillation occurs in the output frequency, decrease Pr.11-04 (ASR2
high-speed bandwidth) or Pr.11-03 (ASR1 low-speed bandwidth).
B2. Accelerate the motor to the maximum frequency and observe if it runs stably.
If an oscillation occurs or motor stalls at maximum rotor speed during operation, increase
Pr.11-04 (ASR2 high-speed bandwidth) or Pr.00-17 (Carrier frequency).
Setting curve of speed regulator (ASR) and related parameter:
12.2-00-16
Parameter Description Default

Pr.11-00 System control 0
Pr.11-01 Per unit of system inertia 256
ASR1/ASR2 switch frequency
Pr.11-02 (it is suggested to set the switch frequency 7Hz
higher than Pr.10-39)
Pr.11-03 ASR1 low-speed bandwidth 10Hz
Pr.11-04 ASR2 high-speed bandwidth 10Hz
Pr.11-05 ASR zero-speed bandwidth 10Hz
 PM FOC+PG With-load starting adjustment procedure
 With-load Operation Adjustment:
C1. Low-frequency load performance, when the drive operates under ASR1/ASR2 switch
frequency (Pr.11-02):
a. If the low-speed frequency cannot start-up with load or the rotor speed is not smooth,
increase Pr.11-03 (ASR1 low-speed bandwidth), or increase Pr.11-01 (Per-unit system
inertia).
b. If an oscillation or over current (oc) error occurs at low-speed frequency, decrease Pr.11-
(ASR1 low-speed bandwidth) or decrease Pr.11-01 (Per-unit system inertia).
12.2-00-17
C2. With-load accelerating performance testing in heavy-load status, accelerate the motor to the
rated rotor speed according to the acceleration time.
a. If the motor rotor speed cannot follow the acceleration time, and the response is too
slow, increase Pr.11-04 (ASR2 high-speed bandwidth) and Pr.11-03 (ASR1 low-speed
bandwidth); if the response speed is still not enough, increase 10% of the per-unit
system inertia for Pr.11-01 each time.
b. If an excessive acceleration causes an oscillation or ocA error, decrease Pr.11-04
(ASR2 high-speed bandwidth) and Pr.11-03 (ASR1 low-speed bandwidth).
12-2-2-2 PM FOC+PG Adjustment Parameters
Refer to Section 12-1 “Description of Parameter Settings” for detailed information.

Setting
Parameter Description Unit Default
Range
Encoder Setting Parameters
Pr.10-00 Encoder type selection N/A 0 0–5
Pr.10-01 Encoder pulses per revolution ppr 600 1–20000
Pr.10-02 Encoder input type setting N/A 0 0–5
Motor Performance Control Parameters
Pr.11-00 System control bit 0 0–8
Pr.11-01 Per-unit of system inertia N/A 256 1–65535
Pr.11-02 ASR1 / ASR2 switch frequency Hz 7 5.00–599
1–100 (PM)
Pr.11-03 ASR1 low-speed bandwidth Hz 10
1–40 (IM)
1–100 (PM)
Pr.11-04 ASR2 high-speed bandwidth Hz 10
1–40 (IM)
1–100 (PM)
Pr.11-05 Zero-speed bandwidth Hz 10
1–40 (iM)
12.2-00-18
12-2-3 PM Motor Adjustment (PM SVC)
12-2-3-1 Permanent magnet motor space vector control (PM SVC) Pr. 00-11 = 2
1. Control Diagram
PM SVC control diagram (applicable for C2000 V2.04 and above)
12.2-00-19
2. PM SVC Adjustment Procedure (* the number marked on the procedure corresponds to the
number of following adjustment explanations)
I. PM SVC motor parameters adjustment
12.2-00-20
1. Parameter reset:
2. Select PM motor type:
Pr.05-33=1 (SPM) or 2 (IPM)
Rolling auto-tuning for PM (without load) Pr.05-00=5 or static auto-tuning for PM (Pr.05-00=13)
Pr.05-38 System inertia for a permanent magnet motor (kg-cm2)
further treatment.
AUE4 (148)
error)
5. Set control mode
Control mode for the drive: Pr. 00-10 = 0: Speed mode
Control mode for the motor: Pr. 00-11 = 2: PM SVC mode
6. After setting the control mode, cycle the power.
12.2-00-21

Set Pr.10-53 PM initial rotor position detection method
0: Disable
1: Internal 1/4 rated current attracting the rotor to zero degrees
3: Pulse injection
(Set to 2 for IPM; set to 3 for SPM. If these settings cause problems, then set the parameter to
1.)
II. PMSVC Adjustment for Operation without Load / with Light duty
8. No-load
Running
SPM > Increase Pr.10-42 SPM > Decrease Pr.10-42
Initial angle detection pulse Initial angle detection pulse value
value
（Too high pulse bandwidth may
IPM > Increase Pr.10-52
Injection magnitude cause ocA）
角度偵測脈衝頻寬
A1. Start running

NO direction is
Start running Press RUN, then ocA
direction error correct? (over current) occurs
YES
A2. No-load current

Increase torque offset runs with ½ of rated
Pr.07-26 rotor speed
No-load current is
NO No-load running 10%~20% of rated
current is normal? current range
No-load current is too high
Increase low-pass filter gain YES Increase low-pass filter gain

Pr.10-34 Pr.10-34
Increase speed estimation Decrease speed estimation
bandwidth Pr.10-32 bandwidth Pr.10-32
NO
Output frequency A3. Acceleration to
Periodic low-frequency wave rated frequency is Strongly high-frequency
stable? vibration of output frequency
YES
Increase low-pass filter gain Pr.10-34

Increase carrier frequency Pr.00-17
（Carrier frequency need to be >10
times of the max. output frequency)
A4. Reach
NO
max. output
Motor stall at max.
rotor speed frequency?
YES
9. Running Test
with Load
12.2-00-22
 Adjustment for Operation with Light duty
8. Start the motor with no-duty / light-duty, and operates to 1/2 of the rated rotor speed
A1. Start operation direction:
a. If the start operation direction is wrong
SPM: increase the current proportion for Pr. 10-42 (Initial angle detection pulse value) to
improve the accuracy of the angle detection.
IPM: Increase the voltage for Pr. 10-52 (Injection magnitude) to improve the accuracy of
the angle detection.
b. If an ocA error occurs when pressing RUN to start the motor, decrease the current
proportion for Pr. 10-42 (Initial angle detection pulse value). An excessive pulse current
may cause ocA error easily.
A2. Operates the motor in 1/2 of the rated rotor speed, adjust the no-load operating current
If the no-load operating current exceeds 20% of the rated current, increase Pr. 07-26
(Torque compensation gain) and observe the no-load operating current.
A3. Accelerate to rated frequency and observe if the motor operates stably.
a. If the motor output rotor speed presents periodic low-frequency wave, increase Pr. 10-34
(PM sensorless speed estimator low-pass filter gain), or increase Pr. 10-32 (PM FOC
sensorless speed estimator bandwidth).
b. If the output frequency reflects high-frequency vibration, decrease Pr. 10-34 or decrease
Pr. 10-32.
A4. Accelerate the motor to the maximum rotor speed, and observe if it operates stably.
If the motor stalls when accelerating to the maximum rotor speed, then increase Pr. 10-34
PM Sensorless Speed Estimator Low-pass Filter Gain, or increase Pr. 00-17 Carrier
Frequency (you must set the carrier frequency larger than 10 times of the maximum output
frequency)
12.2-00-23
III. PM SVC Carrier Start-up Adjustment
12.2-00-24
 Heavy Load Operation Adjustment

9. Load operating test
B1. Low-frequency loading performance is below 1/10 of rated frequency:
a. If the low-frequency loading performance is insufficient, or the rotor speed is not smooth,
increase Pr. 10-31 (Current command of I/F mode).
b. If the low-frequency current is large, decrease Pr. 10-31 (Current command of I/F mode).
B2. Test the with-load accelerating performance:
When the motor operates in 1/10 of rotor speed and above, if the speed cannot follow the
acceleration time during accelerating, or the current stalls, increase Pr. 07-38 (PMSVC
voltage feedback forward gain).
10. Stability test at constant speed operation: if the motor operates stably at constant speed
Pr. 10-32.
12-2-3-2 PMSVC Related Parameters
Refer to Section 12-1 Description of Parameter Settings for more details.

Setting
Parameter Description Unit Default
Range
Pr.07-24 Torque command filter time sec. 0.5 0.001–10
Pr.07-26 Torque compensation gain N/A 0 0–5000
Pr.07-38 PMSVC voltage feedback forward gain N/A 1.0 0.5–2.0
Pr.10-31 I/F mode, current command % 40 0–150
Pr.10-32 PM FOC sensorless speed estimator bandwidth Hz 5.00 0.00–600
PM sensorless speed estimator low-pass filter
Pr.10-34 N/A 1.00 0.00–655.35
gain
Frequency point to switch from I/F mode to PM
Pr.10-39 Hz 20.00 0.00–599.00
sensorless mode
Frequency point to switch from PM sensorless
Pr.10-40 Hz 20.00 0.00–599.00
mode to V/F mode
Initial Angle Estimating Parameters
Pr.10-42 Initial angle detection pulse value N/A 1.0 0.0 –3.0
Pr.10-51 Injection frequency Hz 500 0–1200
15.0 /
Pr.10-52 Injection magnitude V 0.0–200.0
30.0
PM initial rotor position detection method
0: Disable
1: Internal 1/4 rated current attracting the rotor to
Pr.10-53 N/A 0 0–3
zero degrees
3: Pulse injection
12.2-00-25
12-2-4 IPM Adjustment
12-2-4-1 Pr.00-11=7 Interior PM FOC sensorless vector control (IPM sensorless)
1. Control Diagram
IPM sensorless FOC mode (applicable for C2000 V2.04 and above)
※ PM Sensorless FOC control is the control method dedicated for IPM, it uses the high salient
pole characteristic (Lq > Ld) of IPM to detect the positions of NS magnetic poles. By doing this,
it calculates the motor’s rotor position at low-speed frequency.
12.2-00-26
2. IPM Sensorless FOC Control Adjustment Procedure (* the number marked on the procedure
corresponds the number of following adjustment explanations)
I. IPM Sensoress FOC Mode Motor Parameters Adjustment
PM FOC Sensorless
Adjustment Procedure 1. Parameter Reset
（Ver.2.04 and above) Pr.00-02=9 or 10
2. Pr.05-33 Motor type=2 (IPM)

FOC Sensorless control
( For IPM motor)
3. Motor Parameter Setting
Pr.01-01 Rated Frequency
Pr.01-02 Rated Voltage
Pr.05-34 Full-load Current
Pr.05-35 Rated Power
Pr.05-36 Rated Rotor Speed
Pr.05-37 Motor Poles
4. Motor Parameter Auto-Tuning

Pr.05-00=5
（PM parameters dynamic measuring）
Or Pr.05-00=13
（PM parameters static measuring）
Press 'RUN’
Check Motor Parameters

Pr.05-39 Rs stator resistance
1. AUE auto-tuning error Pr.05-40 Permanent magnet
2. Measured resistance, NO motor Ld
Motor auto-tuning Pr.05-41 Permanent magnet
inductance or back successful? motor Lq
EMF error
Pr.05-43 Ke parameter
YES
5. Set Control Mode

Pr.00-10=0 Speed mode
Pr.00-11=7 FOC Sensorless control
6. Re-power after Power Off
PM FOC Sensorless Control

7. Initial Angle Detection The initial angle is only
Pr.10-53 angle detection detected by “2” high
frequency injection, and cannot
2：High frequency injection be changed.
8. No-load
Running
12.2-00-27

1. Parameter reset:
2. Select IPM motor type:
Pr.05-33=2 (IPM)
Rolling auto-tuning for PM (without load) Pr.05-00=5 or static auto-tuning for PM
(Pr.05-00=13)
further treatment.
AUE4 (148)
error)
5. Set control mode
Control mode for the drive: Pr. 00-10 = 0: Speed mode
Control mode for the motor: Pr. 00-11 = 7: Interior PM FOC Sensorless
6. After auto-tuning, cycle the power.
When Pr.00-11=7 PM FOC Sensoreless mode, the initial magnetic pole angle detection
method is high frequency injection.
12.2-00-28
II. IPM Sensorless FOC Mode – No-load / Light-duty Adjustment
8. No-load
Running
(a) Set speed regulator ASR

Pr.11-00=1 ASR auto-tuning
(b) No-load started to ½ rated
rotor speed
Increase Pr.10-52 injection magnitude Increase Pr.10-52

Increase Pr.10-42 initial angle detection
pulse value
Angle detection of high
(Note: too large pulse may cause oc error) frequency injection
Started with correct

Wrong started direction direction? When the motor rated frequency
NO
causes ocA approaches
YES
9. No-load/Light-load
Acceleration Test
YES
Increase ASR2 bandwidth Decrease ASR2 bandwidth
Pr.11-04 Pr.11-04
NO A1. Rated frequency

Cyclicity low-frequency wave runs stable? Strong high-frequency
of the motor frequency vibration of output frequency
YES
Increase speed estimation
bandwidth Pr.10-32
Increase low-pass filter gain
Pr.10-34
NO A2. Reach max.

Vibration or motor stall at max. output frequency?
rotor speed
YES
10. Running Test

with Load
12.2-00-29
 No-load / Light-duty Operation Adjustment

8. Start the motor with no-duty
(a) Set Pr.11-00 = 1 Auto-tuning for ASR and APR
(b) Start the motor without load, and operates the motor to 1/2 of rated rotor speed
a. If the start direction is wrong, starting rotation is not smooth (ocA) or the motor salient ratio
(Lq / Ld) is low, increase Pr. 10-52 (Injection Magnitude) and Pr. 10-42 (Initial Angel
Detection Pulse Value) to improve the accuracy of the angle detection.
b. If Pr. 10-51 (Injection frequency) is close to the rated motor frequency (Pr. 01-01), then
increase Pr.10-51 to avoid the angle detection difference caused by motor rated frequency.
9. Acceleration test with no-duty / light-duty
A1. Accelerate to rated frequency and observe if the motor operates stably.
(ASR2 high-speed bandwidth), or increase Pr. 10-32 (PM FOC sensorless speed
estimator bandwidth).
b. If the output frequency reflects high-frequency vibration, decrease Pr.11-04 or decrease
Pr.10-32.
A2. Accelerate the motor to the maximum frequency, and observe if it operates stably.
If the motor stalls when accelerating to the maximum rotor speed, increase Pr.10-32 (PM
FOC sensoress speed estimator bandwidth) and Pr.10-34 (PM sensorless speed
estimator low-pass filter gain).
※ Setting curve of speed regulator (ASR) and related parameters:
Parameter Description Default

Pr.11-00 System control 0
Pr.11-01 Per unit of system inertia 256
ASR1 / ASR2 switch frequency
Pr.11-02 (it is suggested to set the switch 7Hz
frequency higher than Pr.10-39)
Pr.11-03 ASR1 low-speed bandwidth 10Hz
Pr.11-04 ASR2 high-speed bandwidth 10Hz
Pr.11-05 Zero-speed bandwidth 10Hz
12.2-00-30
III. IPM Sensoress FOC Mode – Load Starting Adjustment
10. Running Test

with Load
B1. Low-frequency loaded

performance
（Frequency of Pr.10-39 and below）

Pr.11-03 Pr.11-03
Increase system inertia Decrease system inertia
Pr.11-01 Pr.11-01
Increase speed estimation bandwidth Decrease speed estimation bandwidth
Pr.10-32 Pr.10-32
Low-frequency
NO
loaded performance
Low-frequency cannot start with normal? Low-frequency over
load or rotates not well current causes wave or oc
YES
B2. Loaded acceleration

performance test

Pr.11-04 Pr.11-04
Pr.11-03 Pr.11-03
NO Accelerated rated
frequency is normal?
Cannot follow the accel. time, Over-acceleration causes
the response is too slow vibration or ocA
YES
11. Steady State Test at

Constant Speed Run

Increase low-pass filter gain Decrease low-pass filter gain
Pr.10-34 Pr.10-34
NO Constant speed
Cyclicity low-frequency wave operation normal? Strong high-frequency
of motor frequency vibration of motor frequency
YES
Finish
12.2-00-31
 Load Operation Adjustment

10. Load operating test
B1. Low-frequency loading performance, when the switch frequency is below Pr.10-39:
a. When the low-frequency cannot start the motor with load, or the rotor speed is not smooth,
increase Pr.11-03 (ASR1 low-speed bandwidth) or Pr.11-01 (Per-unit of system inertia); if
the above adjustment cannot meet the requirement, then increase Pr.10-32 (PM FOC
b. When frequency outputs, low-frequency operating current is large or an oc error occurs,
decrease Pr.11-03 and Pr.11-01; or decrease Pr.10-32.
B2. Acceleration performance test under heavy-duty status, accelerate the motor to rated
rotor speed according to the acceleration time:
a. If the motor cannot follow the acceleration time, and the response is too slow, increase
Pr.11-04 (ASR2 high-speed bandwidth) and Pr.11-03 (ASR1 low-speed bandwidth).
b. If an excessive acceleration causes vibration or ocA error, decrease Pr.11-04 and
Pr.11-03.
11. Stability test at constant speed operation: if the motor operates stably at constant speed
Pr. 10-32.
12-2-4-2 IPM sensorless FOC Mode Related Parameters:

Refer to Section 12-1 Description of Parameter Settings for more details.
Parameter Description Unit Default Setting Range
Pr.10-32 PM FOC sensorless speed estimator bandwidth Hz 5.00 0.00–600
Pr.10-34 PM sensorless speed estimator bandwidth N/A 1.00 0.00–655.35
Pr.10-35 AMR (Kp) gain N/A 1.00 0.00–3.00
Pr.10-36 AMR (Ki) gain N/A 0.20 0.00–3.00
Frequency point to switch from I/F mode to PM
Pr.10-39 Hz 20.00 0.00–599
sensorless mode
Frequency point to switch from PM sensorless
Pr.10-40 Hz 20.00 0.00–599
mode to V/F mode
Pr.10-42 Initial angle detection pulse value N/A 1.0 0.0–3.0
Initial Angle Estimating Parameters
Pr.10-51 Injection frequency (for IPM) Hz 500 0–1200
15.0 /
Pr.10-52 Injection magnitude (for IPM) V 0.0–200.0
30.0
Pr.10-53 PM initial rotor position detection method N/A 0 0–3
Motor Performance Control Parameters
Pr.11-00 System control bit 0 0–8
Pr.11-02 ASR1 / ASR2 switch frequency Hz 7 5.00–599
1–100 (PM)
Pr.11-03 ASR1 low-speed bandwidth Hz 10
1–40 (IM)
1–100 (PM)
Pr.11-04 ASR2 high-speed bandwidth Hz 10
1–40 (IM)
1–100 (PM)
Pr.11-05 Zero-speed bandwidth Hz 10
1–40 (IM)
12.2-00-32
Chapter 13 Warning CodesC2000
Chapter 13 Warning Codes
ID No. Display on LCM Keypad Warning Name Description
Communication error 1
1 (CE1)
RS-485 Modbus illegal function code
Action and Reset

Action level When the function code is not 03, 06, 10 and 63
Action time Immediately act
Warning setting parameter N/A
“Warning” occurs when Pr. 09-02=0 and the motor drive keeps running. The
Reset method
drive resets automatically when receiving the correct function code.
Reset condition Immediately reset
Record N/A
Cause Corrective Actions
Incorrect communication
Check if the communication command is correct.
command from upper unit
Verify the wiring and grounding of the communication circuit. It is recommended
Malfunction caused by interference to separate the communication circuit from the main circuit, or wire in 90 degree
for effective anti-interference performance.
Different communication setting
Check if the setting for Pr. 09-02 is the same as the setting for the upper unit.
from the upper unit
Disconnection or bad connection
Check the cable and replace it if necessary.
of the cable
2 (CE2)
RS-485 Modbus illegal data address
Action and Reset

Action level When the input data address is incorrect
Reset method
drive resets automatically when receiving the correct data address.
Record N/A
from the upper unit
of the cable
13-1
3 (CE3)
RS-485 Modbus illegal data value
Action and Reset

Action level When the length of communication data is too long
Reset method
drive resets automatically when receiving the correct communication data value.
Record N/A
from the upper unit
of the cable
4 (CE4)
RS-485 Modbus data is written to read-only address
Action and Reset

Action level When the data is written to read-only address
Reset method drive resets automatically when receiving the correct written address of
communication data.
Record N/A
from the upper unit
Check the cable and replace it if is necessary.
of the cable
13-2
Communication error
5 10 (CE10)
RS-485 Modbus transmission time-out
Action and Reset

When the communication time exceeds the detection time of Pr. 09-03
Action level
communication time-out
Action time Setting for Pr. 09-03
Reset method
drive resets automatically when receiving the next communication packet.
Record N/A
The upper unit does not transmit
Check if the upper unit transmits the communication command within the setting
the communication command
time for Pr. 09-03.
within Pr. 09-03 setting time
Check if the setting for Pr.09-02 is the same as the setting for the upper unit.
from the upper unit
of the cable
Save error 1
7 (SE1)
Keypad COPY error 1: Keypad copy time-out
Action and Reset

“SE1” warning occurs when the keypad does not transmit the COPY command
Action level to the drive, and does not transmit any data to the drive again in 10 ms at the
time you copy the parameters to the drive.
Action time 10 ms
Reset method Manual reset
Record N/A
Communication connection error SE1: The causes of error are mostly communication problems between the
keypad and control board. Potential causes include communication signal
interference and the unacceptable communication command to the Slave.
Keypad error
Check if the error occurs randomly, or only occurs when copying certain
parameters (the error displays on the upper right corner of the copy page). If you
Control board error cannot clear the error, please contact Delta.
13-3
Save error 2
8 (SE2)
Keypad COPY error 2: parameter writing error
Action and Reset

“SE2” warning occurs when writing the parameters incorrectly at the time you
Action level copy parameters to the drive. For example, you copy the new firmware version
with added parameters to the drive with old firmware version.
Action time N/A
Record N/A
SE2: In this stage, the copied data has been transmitted to the Slave.
The Slave compares and processes the copied data, and then saves the data to
the Data ROM. During the process, the data error (should be attribution error)
Add new parameters to the new may occur, or the data cannot be saved to EEPROM. At this time, the warning
firmware version. occurs.
It is suggested to check the status of Data ROM and remove the error causes
first.
If you cannot clear the error, please contact Delta.
Verify the wiring and grounding of the main circuit, control circuit and the
Malfunction caused by interference
encoder for effective anti-interference performance.

The AC motor drive detects over-heating of IGBT, and
IGBT over-heating over the protection level of oH1 warning. (When Pr.
9 warning (oH1) 06-15 is higher than the IGBT over-heating level, the
drive shows oH1 error without displaying oH1 warning.)
Action and Reset
Action level Pr. 06-15
“oH1” warning occurs when IGBT temperature is higher than Pr. 06-15 setting
Action time
value.
Reset method Auto-reset
The drive auto-resets when IGBT temperature is lower than oH1 warning level
Reset condition
minus (–) 5°C
Record N/A
1. Check the ambient temperature.
Check if the ambient temperature
2. Regularly inspect the ventilation hole of the control cabinet.
or temperature inside the cabinet
3. Change the installed place if there are heating objects, such as braking
is too high, or if there is obstruction
resistors, in the surroundings.
in the ventilation hole of the control
4. Install/ add cooling fan or air conditioner to lower the temperature inside the
cabinet.
cabinet.
Check if there is any obstruction on
Remove the obstruction or replace the cooling fan.
the heat sink or if the fan is running
Insufficient ventilation space Increase ventilation space of the drive.
1. Decrease loading.
Check if the drive matches the
2. Decrease the carrier.
corresponded loading
3. Replace with a drive with larger capacity.
The drive has run 100% or more of
Replace with a drive with larger capacity.
the rated output for a long time
13-4
Capacitor over-heat
10 warning (oH2)
The drive has detected over heat of the capacitor
Action and Reset

Action level oH2 error level minus (–) 5°C
The oH2 warning occurs when the capacitor temperature is higher than oH2
Action time
warning level
The drive auto-resets when the capacitor temperature is lower than oH2 error
Reset condition
level minus (–) 10°C
Record N/A
1. Check the ambient temperature.
or temperature inside the cabinet
is too high, or if there is obstruction
in the ventilation hole of the control
cabinet.
cabinet.
Remove the obstruction or replace the cooling fan.
the heat sink or if the fan is running
1. Decrease loading.
2. Decrease the carrier.
corresponded loading
3. Replace with a drive with larger capacity.
The drive has run 100% or more of
Replace with a drive with larger capacity.
the rated output for a long time
Unstable power Install reactor(s).
The load changes frequently Reduce the changes of the load.
oH1/ oH2 warning level

oH warning
Model oH1 oH2
oH1 warning = (Pr.06-15)
VFD007C23A
VFD015C23A 95
VFD022C23A
VFD037C23A 100
VFD055C23A
VFD075C23A 80
VFD110C23A
VFD150C23A oH1 Warning = oH1 – 5
110
VFD185C23A 75 oH2 Warning = oH2 – 5
VFD220C23A
VFD300C23A/E
VFD370C23A/E
VFD450C23A/E
65
VFD550C23A/E
VFD750C23A/E
VFD900C23A/E
VFD007C43A/E
95
VFD015C43A/E
VFD022C43A/E 100
oH1 Warning = oH1 – 5
VFD037C43A/E 110 105
VFD040C43A/E
100
VFD055C43A/E
VFD075C43A/E 80
13-5
oH warning
Model oH1 oH2
VFD110C43A/E
80
VFD150C43A/E
VFD185C43A/E
VFD220C43A/E 85
VFD300C43A/E
VFD370C43S/U
VFD450C43S/U
VFD550C43A/E
VFD750C43A/E
65 oH1 Warning = oH1 – 5
VFD900C43A/E 110
VFD1100C43A/E
VFD1320C43A/E
VFD1600C43A/E
VFD1850C43A/E
VFD2200C43A/E
VFD2800C43A/E
70
VFD3150C43A/E
VFD3550C43A/E
VFD4500C43A/E
VFD015C53A 100
VFD022C53A 105 85
VFD037C53A
VFD055C53A
VFD075C53A 100
70
VFD110C53A
VFD150C53A
VFD185C63B
VFD220C63B
90 85
VFD300C63B
VFD370C63B
VFD450C63B
100
VFD550C63B
VFD750C63B
VFD900C63B
65
VFD1100C63B oH1 Warning = oH1 – 5
VFD1600C63B
VFD2000C63B
110
VFD2500C63B
VFD3150C63B
VFD4000C63B
70
VFD4500C63B
VFD5600C63B
VFD6300C63B
13-6
PID feedback error PID feedback loss (warning for analog feedback signal;
11 (PID) works only when PID enables)
Action and Reset

Action level When the analog input is lower than 4mA (only detects analog input of 4–20mA)
Action time Pr. 08-08
Pr. 08-09
0: Warn and keep operation
Warning setting parameter 1: Warn and ramp to stop
“Warning” occurs when Pr. 08-09=0 or 3. The “Warning” automatically
Auto
Reset method clears when the feedback signal is larger than 4mA.
Manual “Error” occurs when Pr. 08-09=1 or 2. You must reset manually.
Records when Pr. 08-09=1 or 2 (“Error”).
Record
Does not record when Pr. 08-09=3 (“Warning”).
Loose or broken PID feedback Tighten the terminals again.
wiring Replace with a new cable.
Feedback device malfunction Replace with a new feedback device.
If the PID error still occurs after checking all the wiring, return to the factory for
Hardware error
repair.
ACI analog signal loss Analog input current loss (including all analog 4–20mA
12 (AnL) signals)
Action and Reset

Action level When the analog input is lower than 4mA (only detects analog input 4–20mA)
Pr. 03-19
0: Disable
Warning setting parameter 1: Continue operation at the last frequency (warning, keypad displays ANL)
2: Decelerate to 0Hz (warning, keypad displays ANL)
“Warning” occurs when Pr. 03-19=1 or 2. The “Warning automatically
Auto
Reset method clears when the analog input signal is larger than 4mA.
Manual “Error” occurs when Pr. 03-19=3. You must reset manually.
Record Does not record when Pr. 03-19=1 or 2 (“Warning”).
Tighten the terminals again.
Loose or broken ACI wiring
Replace with a new cable.
External device error Replace new device.
If the AnL error still occurs after checking all the wiring, return to the factory for
Hardware error
repair.
13-7
Under current
13 (uC)
Low current
Action and Reset

Pr. 06-73
0: No function
Warning setting parameter 1: Warn and coast to stop
2: Warn and ramp to stop by 2nd deceleration time
3: Warn and operation continue
“Warning” occurs when Pr. 06-73=3. The “Warning” automatically
Auto
Reset method clears when the output current is > (Pr. 06-71+0.1A).
Manual “Error” occurs when Pr. 06-73=1 and 2. You must reset manually.
Record Does not record when Pr. 06-73=3 and uC displays “Warning”.
Broken motor cable Exclude the connection issue of the motor and its load.
Improper setting for the low current
Set the proper settings for Pr. 06-71, Pr. 06-72 and Pr. 06-73.
protection
Check the loading status.
Low load
Make sure the loading matches the motor capacity.
PG feedback warning
15 (PGFb)
PG feedback error warning
Action and Reset

Action level Motor runs in a reverse direction to the direction of frequency command
Pr. 10-08=0
0: Warn and operation continue
Warning setting parameter
Reset condition “Warning” automatically clears when the drive stops
Record N/A
Incorrect encoder parameter
Reset encoder parameter (Pr. 10-02).
setting
Check if the connection of encoder
Wiring again.
is loss
Broken PG card or PG encoder Replace with a new PG card or encoder.
Verify wiring of the control circuit, and wiring/grounding of the main circuit to
prevent interference.
13-8
Over speed warning

17 (oSPd)
Over speed warning
Action and Reset

Action level The encoder feedback speed > Pr. 10-10
Pr. 10-12=0
Reset method “Warning” automatically clears when the drive stops
Reset condition “Warning” automatically clears when the drive stops
Record N/A
Improper setting for Pr. 10-25 FOC
Decrease setting value for Pr. 10-25.
bandwidth of speed observer
Improper bandwidth setting for
Increase the bandwidth setting for ASR speed controller.
ASR speed controller
Incorrect motor parameter setting Reset motor parameter and run parameter tuning.
Deviation Warning
18 (dAvE)
Over speed deviation warning
Action and Reset

Pr. 10-15=0
Reset condition After the drive stops
Record N/A
Improper parameter setting for the
Reset proper value for Pr. 10-13 and Pr. 10-14.
slip error
Improper setting for ASR
Reset ASR parameters.
parameter and acceleration/
Set proper accel./ decel. time.
deceleration
Accel./ Decel. time is too short Reset proper accel./ decel. time.
Motor locked Remove the causes of motor locked.
Mechanical brake is not released Check the active timing of the system.
Incorrect parameter setting of
torque limit Adjust to proper setting value.
(Pr. 06-12, Pr. 11-17–20)
13-9
Phase loss
19 (PHL)
Input phase loss warning
Action and Reset

Action level One of the phases outputs less than Pr. 06-47
Pr. 06-45=0
Reset condition After the drive stops
Record N/A
Phase loss of the input power Verify wiring of the main circuit.
Single phase power input on a
Use the model with voltage that matches the power.
three-phase model
If the power of main circuit works well, check if the MC of the main circuit is
broken.
The power voltage has changed
Cycle the power after verifying the power is normal. If PHL still occurs, return to
the factory for repair.
Loose wiring terminal of input
Tighten the terminal screws with the torque listed in the user manual.
power
Check if the input cable of 3-phase Make sure the wiring is correct.
power is broken Replace the broken part of the cable.
The voltage of input power has Check setting for Pr. 06-50 (Time for Input Phase Loss Detection) and Pr. 06-52
changed (Ripple of Input Phase Loss).
Unbalance three-phase of the
Check the status of 3-phase power.
input power
13-10
Over-torque 1
20 (ot1)
Over-torque 1 warning
Action and Reset

Pr. 06-06=1 or 3
0: No function
Warning setting parameter operation
Reset method When input current < (Pr. 06-07 – 5%), the Ot1 warning automatically clears
Reset condition When input current < (Pr. 06-07 – 5%), the Ot1 warning automatically clears
Record N/A
Incorrect parameter setting Configure the settings for Pr. 06-07 and Pr. 06-08 again.
Mechanical error (e.g. mechanical
Remove the causes of malfunction.
lock due to over-torque)
Decrease the loading.
The load is too large
Replace with a motor with larger capacity.
Accel./ Decel. time and working
Increase the setting values for Pr. 01-12–01-19 (accel./ decel. time)
cycle is too short
Adjust the settings for Pr. 01-01–01-08 (V/F curve), especially the setting value
V/F voltage is too high for the mid-point voltage (if the mid-point voltage is set too small, the load
capacity decreases at low-speed).
The motor capacity is too small Replace with a motor with larger capacity.
Over-load during low-speed Decrease the loading during low-speed operation.
operation Increase the motor capacity.
The torque compensation is too Adjust the torque compensation value (Pr. 07-26 torque compensation gain)
large until the output current decreases and the motor does not stall.
Improper parameter settings for
Correct the parameter settings for speed tracking.
the speed tracking function
Start the speed tracking function.
(including restart after momentary
Adjust the maximum current for Pr. 07-09 speed tracking.
power loss and restart after fault)
13-11
Over-torque
21 (ot2)
Over-torque 2 warning
Action and Reset

Pr. 06-09=1 or 3
0: No function
Warning setting parameter operation
Reset method When output current < (Pr. 06-10 – 5%), the Ot2 warning automatically clears
Reset condition When output current < (Pr. 06-10 – 5%), the Ot2 warning automatically clears
Record N/A
Incorrect parameter setting Configure the settings for Pr. 06-10 and Pr. 06-11
Mechanical error (e.g. mechanical
lock due to over-torque)
Increase the setting values for Pr. 01-12–01-19 (accel./ decel. time)
cycle is too short
Adjust the V/F curve (Motor 2, Pr. 01-35–01-42), especially the setting value for
V/F voltage is too high the mid-point voltage (if the mid-point voltage is set too small, the load capacity
decreases at low-speed).
The motor capacity is too small Replace with a motor with larger capacity.
Over-load during low-speed Decrease the loading during low-speed operation.
The torque compensation is too Adjust the torque compensation value (Pr. 07-26 torque compensation gain)
large until the output current decreases and the motor does not stall.
Start speed tracking function.
Adjust the maximum current for Pr. 07-09 speed tracking.
13-12
Motor over-heating warning.

Motor over-heating
22_1 (oH3) PTC
The AC motor drive detects the temperature inside the
motor is too high
Action and Reset

Action level Pr. 03-00=6 (PTC), PTC input level > Pr. 06-30 (default=50%)
Error treatment: Pr. 06-29
0: Warn and keep operating
Warning setting parameter 3: No warning
When Pr. 06-29=0 and when the temperature is ≦ Pr. 06-30 level, the oH3
warning automatically clears.
When Pr. 06-29=0 (“Warning”), it automatically resets.
When Pr. 06-29=0, oH3 displays “Warning”. When the temperature is ≦ Pr.
Reset method
06-30 level, the oH3 warning automatically clears.
When the temperature is ≦ Pr. 06-30 level, the oH3 warning automatically
Reset condition
clears.
Record N/A
Motor locked Clear the motor lock status.
Change the installed place if there are heating devices in the surroundings.
Ambien temperature is too high
Install/ add cooling fan or air conditioner to lower the ambient temperature.
Motor cooling system error Check the cooling system to make it work normally.
Motor fan error Replace the fan.

Decrease low-speed operation time.
Operates at low-speed too long Change to dedicated motor for the drive.
Increase the motor capacity.
Increase setting values for Pr. 01-12–01-19 (accel./ decel. time).
cycle is too short
Adjust settings for Pr. 01-01–01-08 (V/F curve), especially the setting value for
V/F voltage is too high the mid-point voltage (if the mid-point voltage is set too small, the load capacity
decreases at low-speed).
Check if the motor rated current
Configure the correct rated current value of the motor again.
matches the motor nameplate
Check if the PTC is properly set
Check the connection between PTC thermistor resistor and the heat protection.
and wired
Check if the setting for stall
Set the stall prevention to the proper value.
prevention is correct
Unbalance three-phase
Replace the motor.
impedance of the motor
Harmonics is too high Use remedies to reduce harmonics.
13-13
Motor over-heating warning.

Motor over-heating
22_2 (oH3) PT100
The AC motor drive detects the temperature inside the
motor is too high.
Action and Reset

Action level Pr. 03-00=11 (PT100), PT100 input level > Pr. 06-57 (default=7V)
Error treatment: Pr. 06-29
Warning setting parameter 3: No warning
When Pr. 06-29=0 and when the temperature is < Pr. 06-56 level, the oH3
If the temperature is between Pr. 06-56 and Pr. 06-57, the frequency outputs
according to the operating frequency setting for Pr. 06-58.
When Pr. 06-29=0, oH3 displays “Warning”. When the temperature is < Pr.
Reset method
06-56 level, the oH3 warning automatically clears.
When the temperature is < Pr. 06-56 level, the oH3 warning automatically
Reset condition
clears.
Record N/A
Motor locked Clear the motor lock status.
Decrease loading.
Ambien temperature is too high

Operates at low-speed too long Change to dedicated motor for the drive.
Increase the setting values for Pr. 01-12–01-19 (accel./ decel. time).
cycle is too short
Adjust the settings for Pr. 01-01–01-08 (V/F curve), especially the setting value
V/F voltage is too high for the mid-point voltage (if the mid-point voltage is set too small, the load
capacity decreases at low-speed).
Configure the correct rated current value of the motor again.
matches the motor nameplate
Check if the PT100 is properly set Check the connection between PT100 thermistor resistor and the heat
and wired protection.
Unbalance three-phase
Replace the motor.
Harmonics is too high Use remedies to reduce harmonics.
13-14

Over slip warning.
By using the maximum slip (Pr. 10-29) as the base,
Over slip warning
24 (oSL)
when the drive outputs at constant speed, and the F>H
or F<H exceeds Pr. 07-29 level and Pr. 07-30 setting
time, 100% Pr. 07-29 = Pr. 10-29.
Action and Reset
When the drive outputs at constant speed, and F>H or F<H exceeds the Pr.
Action level
07-29 level
Pr. 07-31=0 Warning
3: No warning
When Pr. 07-31=0 and when the drive outputs at constant speed, and F>H or
Reset method F<H no longer exceeds the Pr. 07-29 level, the oSL warning automatically
clears.
Reset condition N/A
Record N/A
Check if the motor parameter is
Check the motor parameter.
correct
The load is too large Decrease the loading.
Check if the settings for Pr. 07-29,
Pr. 07-30 and Pr. 10-29 are Check the parameter settings for oSL protection.
properly set
Auto tuning Parameter auto-tuning is processing.

25 (tUn) When running auto-tuning, the keypad displays “tUn”.
Action and Reset

When running Pr. 05-00 motor parameter auto-tuning, the keypad displays
Action level
“tUn”.
Action time N/A
When auto-tuning is finished and no error occurs, the warning automatically
Reset method
clears.
Reset condition When auto-tuning is finished and no error occurs.
Record N/A
The motor parameter is running
When the auto-tuning is finished, the warning automatically clears.
auto-tuning
13-15
Output phase loss

28 (OPHL)
Output phase loss
Action and Reset

Action time N/A
Pr. 06-45
3: No warning
If Pr. 06-45 is set to 0, the OPHL warning automatically clears after the drive
Reset method
stops.
Reset condition N/A
Record N/A
Unbalanced three-phase
Replace the motor.
Check the cable.
Check if the wiring is incorrect
Replace the cable.
Check if the motor is a
Choose a three-phase motor.
single-phase motor
Check if the control board cable is loose. If yes, reconnect the cable and run the
drive to test. If the error still occurs, return to the factory for repair.
Check if the current sensor is
Check if the three-phase current is balanced with a current clamp meter. If the
broken
current is balanced and the OPHL error still shows on the display, return to the
factory for repair.
If capacity of the drive is larger
Choose the matches capacity of the drive and motor.
than the motor
Copy model error 3

30 (SE3)
Keypad COPY error 3: copy model error
Action and Reset

“SE3” warning occurs when different drive identity codes are found during
Action level
copying parameters.
Action time Immediately act when the error is detected
Reset condition N/A
Record N/A
Keypad copy between different
It is mainly to prevent parameter copies between different HP/models.
power range drives
13-16
CANopen guarding
36 time-out (CGdn)
CANopen guarding time-out 1
Action and Reset

When CANopen Node Guarding detects that one of the slaves does not
Action level response, the CGdn error displays.
The upper unit sets factor and time during configuration.
Action time The time that upper unit sets during configuration
Reset condition The upper unit sends a reset package to clear this fault.
Record N/A
The guarding time is too short, or
Increase the guarding time (Index 100C) and detection times.
less detection times
1. Verify the wiring and grounding of the communication circuit. It is
recommended to separate the communication circuit from the main circuit,
Malfunction caused by interference or wire in 90 degree for effective anti-interference performance.
2. Make sure the communication circuit is wired in series.
3. Use CANopen cable or add terminating resistance.
CANopen heartbeat
37 error (CHbn)
CANopen heartbeat error
Action and Reset

When CANopen Heartbeat detects that one of the slaves does not response, the
CHbn error shows.
Action level
The upper unit sets the confirming time of producer and consumer during
configuration.
Action time
configuration.
Reset condition The upper unit sends a reset package to clear this fault
Record When Pr. 00-21≠3, CHbn is a “Warning”, and the warning is not recorded
The heartbeat time is too short Increase heartbeat time (Index 1016)
Communication cable is broken or
Check or replace the communication cable.
bad connected
13-17
CANopen bus off error

39 (CbFn)
CANopen BUS off error
Action and Reset

Hardware When CANopen card is not installed, CbFn fault will occur.
When the master received wrong communication package, CbFn
fault will occur.
Action level
Software Too much interference on BUS
When the CAN_H and CAN_L communication cable is short, the
master receives wrong package, and CbFn fault occurs.
Action time Immediately act when the fault is detected
Reset method Manual Reset
Reset condition Cycle the power
Record When Pr. 00-21≠3, CbFn is a “Warning”, and the warning is not recorded
Check if the CANopen card is
Make sure the CANopen card is installed.
installed
Check if the CANopen speed is
Reset CANopen speed (Pr. 09-37)
correct
bad connected
CANopen index error

40 (CIdn)
CANopen Index error
Action and Reset

Action level CANopen communication Index error
Reset condition Upper unit sends a reset package to clear this fault
Record When Pr. 00-21≠3, Cldn is a “Warning”, and the warning is not recorded
Incorrect setting of CANopen
Reset CANopen Index (Pr. 00-02=7)
index
13-18
CANopen station
41 address error (CAdn)
CANopen station address error (only supports 1–127)
Action and Reset

Action level CANopen station address error
Reset condition Pr. 00-02=7
Record When Pr. 00-21≠3, CAdn is a “Warning”, and the warning is not recorded
1. Disable CANopen (Pr. 09-36=0)
2. Reset CANopen (Pr. 00-02=7)
station address
3. Reset CANopen station address (Pr. 09-36)
CANopen memory
42 error (CFrn)
CANopen memory error
Action and Reset

When the user update firmware version of the control board, the FRAM internal
Action level
data will not be changed, then CFrn fault will occur.
Record When Pr. 00-21≠3, CFrn is a “Warning”, and the warning is not recorded
CANopen internal memory error 2. Reset CANopen (Pr. 00-20=7)
13-19
CANopen SDO SDO transmission time-out (only shows on master

43 time-out (CSdn) station)
Action and Reset

When the CANopen master transmits SDO command, and the Slave response
Action level
“time-out”, CSdn warning will occur.
When the master resends a SDO command and receives the response, the
Reset method
Reset condition N/A
Record N/A
Slave is not connected Connect slave and CANopen BUS.
The synchronize cycle is set too
Increase the synchronization time (Index 1006)
short
Check the status of the cable, or replace the cable.
of the communication cable
CANopen SDO
44 receives register CANopen SDO receives register overflow
overflow (CSbn)
Action and Reset

Action level The upper unit sends too much SDO and causes buffer overflow
Reset method The upper unit sends a reset package to clear the warning.
Reset condition N/A
Record N/A
Check if the master sends too much SDO command. Make sure the master
Too much SDO from the upper unit
sends SDO command according to the command format.
13-20
CANopen format error

46 (CPtn)
CANopen protocol format error
Action and Reset

The slave detects that data from the upper unit cannot be recognized, and then
Action level
shows CPtn warning
Action time Immediately displays when the fault is detected
Reset method The upper unit sends a reset packet to clear the warning
Reset condition N/A
Record N/A
The upper unit sends incorrect Make sure the master sends the packet based on CANopen DS301 standard
communication packet command format.
RTC adjust
47 (PLrA)
PLC (RTC) is not adjusted
Action and Reset

When using RTC function for PLC program, and PLC detects unreasonable
Action level
RTC time, PLrA warning displays.
Auto Stops the PLC and runs again, the warning automatically clears
Reset method
Manual Manual reset to clear this warning
Record N/A
When using RTC function for PLC
program, and the drive is power off
over 7 days or KPC-CC01 does
1. Stop the PLC program and restart it.
not connect to the drive for a long
2. Adjust the RTC time and cycle the power.
time, the RTC time is different with
the internal calculated time when
re-connect the keypad to the drive.
KPC-CC01 does not adjust the
Adjust the RTC time and cycle the power.
RTC time
PLC detects unreasonable RTC 1. Stop the PLC program and restart it.
time 2. Cycle the power.
1. Stop the PLC program and restart it.
Replace with a new KPC-CC01
2. Cycle the power.
13-21
InnerCOM error
48 (PLiC)
InnerCOM error
Action and Reset

Action level N/A
Action time N/A
Reset method N/A
Reset condition When InnerCOM is back to normal condition, the warning automatically clears
Record N/A
Communication cable is loose Check the connection of the communication cable
to separate the communication circuit from the main circuit, or wire in 90 degree
Malfunction caused by interference for effective anti-interference performance.
It recommended to install terminal resistor(s) on the first and the last unit of the
communication circuit.
Keypad RTC time-out

49 (PLrt)
PLC (RTC) error
Action and Reset

Action level N/A
Action time N/A
Reset method N/A
Record N/A
KPC-CC01 is not connected to the
control board while using the RTC Do not remove the KPC-CC01 keypad while using RTC function.
function
13-22
PLC opposite defect

50 (PLod)
PLC download error warning
Action and Reset

During PLC downloading, the program source code detects incorrect address
Action level
(e.g. the address exceeds the range), then the PLod warning shows.
Check if the program is correct and re-download the program. If the fault does
Reset method
not exist, the warning automatically clears.
Reset condition N/A
Record N/A
Incorrect component number is
found when downloading the PLC Use the correct component number.
program
PLC save memory

51 error Data error during PLC operation
(PLSv)
Action and Reset

The program detects incorrect written address (e.g. the address has exceeds
Action level
the range) during PLC operation, then the PLSv warning shows.
Reset method
Reset condition N/A
Record N/A
An incorrect written address is
Make sure the write-in address is correct and re-download the program.
detected during PLC operation
13-23
52 Data defect (PLdA) Data error during PLC operation
Action and Reset

The program detects incorrect write-in address when translating the program
Action level
source code, then PLSv warning acts.
Reset method
Reset condition N/A
Record N/A
During PLC operation, the external
Modbus has written/read incorrect Check if the upper unit transmits the correct command
data to internal PLC program
Function defect
53 (PLFn)
PLC download function code error
Action and Reset

The program detects incorrect command (unsupported command) during PLC
Action level
downloading, then PLFn warning acts.
Reset method
Reset condition N/A
Record N/A
Unsupported command has used
Check if the firmware of the drive is the old version. If yes, please contact Delta.
while downloading the program
13-24
PLC buffer overflow

54 (PLor)
PLC register overflow
Action and Reset

When PLC runs the last command and the command exceeds the maximum
Action level
capacity of the program, the PLor warning shows.
Reset method
Reset condition N/A
Record N/A
1. Disable PLC
The program detects source code 2. Delete PLC program (Pr. 00-02=6)
error during PLC operation 3. Enable PLC
4. Re-download PLC program
Function defect
55 (PLFF)
Function code error during PLC operation
Action and Reset

The program detects incorrect command (unsupported command) during PLC
Action level
operation, then PLFF warning shows.
Warning setting parameter NA
Reset method
Reset condition N/A
Record N/A
The PLC runs an incorrect When starting the PLC function and there is no program in the PLC, the PLFF
command during operation warning shows. This is a normal warning, please download the program.
13-25
Checksum error
56 (PLSn)
PLC checksum error
Action and Reset

Action level PLC checksum error is detected after power on, then PLSn warning shows
Reset method
Reset condition N/A
Record N/A
1. Disable PLC
The program detects checksum 2. Remove PLC program (Pr. 00-02=6)
error during PLC operation 3. Enable PLC
No end command
57 (PLEd)
PLC end command is missing
Action and Reset

The “End” command is missing until the last command is executed, the PLEd
Action level
warning shows
Reset method
Reset condition N/A
Record N/A
1. Disable PLC
There is no “END” command 2. Remove PLC program (Pr. 00-02=6)
during PLC operation 3. Enable PLC
13-26
PLC MCR error

58 (PLCr)
PLC MCR command error
Action and Reset

The MC command is detected during PLC operation, but there is no
Action level
corresponded MCR command, then the PLCr warning shows.
Reset method
Reset condition N/A
Record N/A
The MC command is continuously The MC command cannot be used continuously for 9 times. Check and reset the
used for more than 9 times program, then re-download the program.
PLC download fail

59 (PLdF)
PLC download fail
Action and Reset

PLC download fail due to momentary power loss during the downloading, when
Action level
power is ON again, PLdF warning shows.
Reset method
Reset condition N/A
Record N/A
PLC download is forced to stop, so
Check if there is any error in the program and re-download the PLC program
the program write-in is incompleted
13-27
PLC scan time fail

60 (PLSF)
PLC scan time exceeds the maximum allowable time
Action and Reset

When the PLC scan time exceeds the maximum allowable time (400ms), PLSF
Action level
warning shows.
Reset method
Reset condition N/A
Record N/A
The PLC scan time exceeds the
Check if the source code is correct and re-download the program
maximum allowable time (400ms)
CAN/M guarding error

61 (PCGd)
CANopen Master guarding error
Action and Reset

When CANopen Master Node Guarding detects that one of the Slaves does not
Action level
response, the PCGd warning will display
Reset method
Reset condition N/A
Record N/A
Slave is not connected or
CANopen BUS cable is not Connect the Slave and CANopen BUS
connected
1. Verify wiring/grounding of the communication circuit. It is recommended to
separate the communication circuit from the main circuit, or wire in 90
Malfunction caused by interference degree for effective anti-interference performance.
bad connected
13-28
CAN/M BUS off

62 (PCbF)
CANopen Master BUS off
Action and Reset

When the CANopen master detects error packets more than 255 during the BUS
off detection, or when the CANopen card is not installed, the PCbF warning
Action level displays.
If the BUS cable is not connected, the drive will not receive issues packet, and
the PCbF warning will not display.
Reset method Cycle the power
Reset condition N/A
Record N/A
bad connected
CAN/M node lack

63 (PCnL)
CANopen Master node error
Action and Reset

When the CANopen master configures different setting nodes from the actual
Action level
nodes, the PCnL warning displays.
When connect BUS to the original slave, or change the configured node
Reset method
numbers to meet the actual node quantity, the warning automatically clears.
Reset condition N/A
Record N/A
The configured node quantity is Connect BUS to the original slave, or change the configured node numbers to
different from the actual nodes meet the actual node quantity
bad connected
13-29
CAN/M cycle time-out

64 (PCCt)
CANopen Master cycle time-out
Action and Reset

When the transmitted packet from CANopen master exceeds the maximum
Action level
allowable quantity in a certain time, the PCCt warning displays.
The warning automatically clears when changing the configuration and
Reset method
re-executing the program.
Reset condition N/A
Record N/A
When the transmitted packet from
CANopen master exceeds the
Increase the time setting of D1090 synchronization cycle
maximum allowable quantity in a
certain time
CAN/M SDO over

65 (PCSF)
CANopen Master SDO overflow
Action and Reset

When the CANopen master transmits too much SDO that causes buffer
Action level
overflow, the PCSF warning displays
Reset method Cycle the power, or stop the PLC and run the PLC again
Reset condition N/A
Record N/A
Internal PLC transmits too much The PLC program needs to confirm receiving the SDO feedback data before
SDO at once sending another SDO command.
13-30
CAN/M SDO time-out

66 (PCSd)
CANopen Master SDO time-out
Action and Reset

When the CANopen master sends a SDO command, and the BUS is too busy to
Action level
transmit the command, PCSd warning displays.
Reset method The warning automatically clears when the SDO transmits normally.
Reset condition N/A
Record N/A
When the CANopen master
transmits a SDO command, and
Check if the Slave responds within 1 second.
does not receive feedback from
the Slave within 1 sec.
CAN/M address error

67 (PCAd)
CANopen Master station address error
Action and Reset

When the CANopen master detects an incorrect or repeated station address
Action level
from the Slave, the PCAd warning displays.
The warning automatically clears when reset the station address and run the
Reset method
program again.
Reset condition N/A
Record N/A
When the CANopen master
detects an incorrect or repeated Set the correct slave station address.
station address from the Slave
13-31

When the drive receives an incorrect packet, it means
CAN/M time-out that there is interference or the command from the
68 (PCTo) upper unit does not meet the CANopen command
format.
Action and Reset
Action level N/A
Action time Immediately acts when receiving the command
Reset method The warning automatically clears after receives another normal packet
Reset condition N/A
Record N/A
The command from the upper unit
does not meet the CANopen Please contact Delta for further confirmation.
format
Duplicate MAC ID error

70 ExCom ID fail (ECid)
Node address setting error
Action and Reset

Duplicate setting of MAC ID
Action level
Node address setting error
Action time N/A
Reset method Correct the setting and cycle the power
Reset condition N/A
Record N/A
The setting address exceeds the
Check the address setting of the communication card (Pr. 09-70)
range (0–63)
The speed setting exceeds the
Standard: 0–2, non-standard: 0–7
range
The address is duplicated with
Reset the address
other nodes on the BUS
13-32
ExCom power loss

71 (ECLv)
Low voltage of communication card
Action and Reset

Action level The 5V power that drive provides to communication card is to low
Action time Immediately acts
Reset method Re-power
Reset condition N/A
Record N/A
1. Switch the communication card to other C2000 drives and observe if there is
ECLv warning shown. If yes, replace with a new communication card; if not,
The 5V power that drive provides
replace the drive.
to communication card is to low
2. Use another communication card to test if the ECLv warning has shown as
well. If not, replace the card; if yes, replace the drive.
The card is loose Make sure the communication card is well inserted.
ExCom test mode

72 (ECtt)
Communication card is in the test mode
Action and Reset

Action level Communication card is in the test mode
Reset method Cycle the power and enter the normal mode
Reset condition N/A
Record N/A
Communication command error Cycle the power
The communication card detects too much errors in the

ExCom Bus off
73 (ECbF)
BUS, then enters the BUS-OFF status and stop
communicating
Action and Reset

Action level When the drive detects BUS-off (for DeviceNet)
Reset condition N/A
Record N/A
Poor connection of the cable Re-connect the cable
Bad quality of the cable Replace the cable
13-33
ExCom no power
74 (ECnP)
There is no power supply on the DeviceNet
Action and Reset

Action level There is no power supply on the DeviceNet
Reset method Re-power
Reset condition N/A
Record N/A
The drive detects that DeviceNet
Check if the cable and power is normal. If yes, return to the factory for repair.
has no power
ExCom factory defect

75 (ECFF)
Factory default setting error
Action and Reset

Action level Factory default setting error
Reset condition N/A
Record N/A
Factory default setting error Use DCISoft to reset to the default value.
ExCom inner error

76 (ECiF)
Serious internal error
Action and Reset

Action level Internal memory saving error
Reset condition N/A
Record N/A
Noise interference prevent interference.
Cycle the power.
Reset to the default value and check if the error still exists. If yes, replace the
The memory is broken
communication card.
13-34
ExCom IO Net break

77 (ECio)
IO connection break off
Action and Reset

Action level IO connection between the communication card and the master is broken off
Record N/A
The cable is loose Re-install the cable
Incorrect parameter setting for
Check the setting for master communication parameter
master communication
ExCom Parameter
78 data error Profibus parameter data error
(ECPP)
Action and Reset

Action level N/A
Action time N/A
Record N/A
The GSD file is incorrect Get the correct GSD file from the software
ExCom configuration
79 data error Profibus configuration data error
(ECPi)
Action and Reset

Action level N/A
Action time N/A
Record N/A
The GSD file is incorrect Get the correct GSD file from the software
13-35
Ethernet link fail

80 (ECEF)
Ethernet cable is not connected
Action and Reset

Action level Hardware detection
Reset condition N/A
Record N/A
Ethernet cable is loose Re-connect the cable
Bad quality of Ethernet cable Replace the cable
Communication
Communication time-out for communication card and
81 time-out
the upper unit
(ECto)
Action and Reset

Action level N/A
Action time N/A
Reset method N/A
CMC-EC01: auto resets when the communication with the upper unit is back to
Reset condition
normal
Record N/A
Communication card is not
Check if the connection of the communication cable is correct
connected with the upper unit
Communication error of the upper
Check if the communication of the upper unit is normal
unit
Checksum error
82 (ECCS)
Checksum error for communication card and the drive
Action and Reset

Action level Software detection
Action time N/A
Reset condition Immediately resets
Record N/A
Noise interference
13-36
Return defect
83 (ECrF)
Communication card returns to the default setting
Action and Reset

Action level Communication card returns to the default setting
Action time N/A
Record N/A
Communication card is returning to
No actions.
default setting
Modbus TCP over MODBUS TCP exceeds maximum communication

84 (Eco0) value
Action and Reset

Record N/A
The Master communication value
is more than the allowable quantity Reduce Master communication value
of the communication card
The upper unit is online without
communicating, and does not Revise program of upper unit, the communication should be break off when it is
break off the MODBUS TCP link, not used for a long time
causes occupy connection
A new MODBUS TCP connection
is built every time when the upper
Revise program of upper unit: use the same MODBUS TCP connection when
unit is connected to the
connected to the same communication card
communication card, which
caused occupy connection
13-37
EtherNet/IP over
85 (ECo1)
Ethernet/IP exceeds maximum communication value
Action and Reset

Record N/A
The Master communication value
is more than the allowable quantity Reduce Master communication value
of the communication card
The upper unit is online without
communicating, and does not Revise program of upper unit, the communication should be break off when it is
break off the MODBUS TCP link, not used for a long time
causes occupy connection
A new MODBUS TCP connection
is built every time when the upper
Revise program of upper unit: use the same MODBUS TCP connection when
unit is connected to the
connected to the same communication card
communication card, which
caused occupy connection
86 IP fail (ECiP) IP setting error
Action and Reset

Reset condition Immediate reset
Record N/A
IP conflict Reset IP
DHCP IP configuration error MIS check if DHCP Server works normally
13-38
Mail warning: Alarm mail will be sent when the

87 Mail fail (EC3F)
communication card establishes alarm conditions
Action and Reset

Action level Communication card establishes alarm conditions
Record N/A
Communication card establishes
No actions
alarm conditions
ExCom busy Communication card busy: too much packets are

88 (ECbY) received
Action and Reset

Action time N/A
Reset condition N/A
Record N/A
Communication packets are too
much for the communication card Reduce communication packets
to process
ExCom card break

89 (ECCb)
Communication card break off warning
Action and Reset

Action level Communication card break off
The time between communicatcion card break off and ECCb displays:
1. EtherNet/IP: 3 sec.
2. Modbus TCP: 3 sec.
Action time
3. DeviceNet: 1 sec.
4. PROFIBUS: 1 sec.
5. EtherCAT: 0.1 sec.
Reset method Auto resets after communication card is re-installed
Record N/A
Communication card break off Re-install communication card
13-39
Copy PLC password error.

Copy PLC: password
90 error (CPLP)
When KPC-CC01 is processing PLC copy and the PLC
password is incorrect, the CPLP warning shows.
Action and Reset

Action level PLC password is incorrect
Reset condition Directly resets
Record N/A
PLC password is incorrect Reset and enter correct PLC password
Copy PLC: Read mode

91 error (CPL0)
Copy PLC Read mode error
Action and Reset

Action level When copy PLC read mode with incorrect process
Record N/A
When copy PLC read mode and
Cycle the power and copy PLC read mode again
the process is incorrect
Copy PLC: Write mode

92 (CPL1)
Copy PLC write mode error
Action and Reset

Action level Copy PLC write mode with incorrect process
Record N/A
When copy PLC write mode and
Cycle the power and copy PLC read mode again
the process is incorrect
13-40
Copy PLC version error.

Copy PLC: version
93 error (CPLv)
When non-C2000 built-in PLC is copied to C2000 drive,
the CPLv warning shows
Action and Reset

Record N/A
Non-C2000 PLC program is copied Check if the copied PLC program is for C2000.
to C2000 Use the correct C2000 PLC program.
Copy PLC: size error

94 (CPLS)
Copy PLC Capacity size error
Action and Reset

Record N/A
The PLC copied to C2000 exceeds Check if the copied PLC program is for C2000
the allowable capacity Use C2000 PLC program with correct capacity
Copy PLC: PLC KPC-CC01 Copy PLC function should be executed

95 function (CPLF) when PLC is off
Action and Reset

Record N/A
PLC function is enabled when
Disable PLC function first, then run the PLC copy function again
KPC-CC01 is running copy PLC
13-41
Copy PLC: time-out

96 (CPLt)
Copy PLC time out
Action and Reset

Record N/A
KPC-CC01 is removed while
The KPC-CC01 cannot be removed during the PLC copy process
copying PLC program
101 InrCOM time-out (ictn) Internal communication time-out
Action and Reset

When Pr. 09-31=(-1) – (-10) (no -9) and the internal communication between
Action level
Master and Slave is abnormal, the ictn warning shows.
The warning automatically clears when the communication is back to normal
Reset condition
condition
Record N/A
Verify wiring/grounding of the communication circuit. It is recommended to
Malfunction caused by interference separate the communication circuit from the main circuit, or wire in 90 degree for
effective anti-interference performance.
Different communication
Check if the setting for Pr. 09-02 is the same as the setting for upper unit
conditions with the upper unit
Communication cable break off or
Check the cable status or replace the cable
not connected well
13-42
Estimated speed Estimated speed is in a reverse direction with motor

105 reverse (SpdR) actual running direction
Action and Reset

Pr. 10-08
Record N/A
The motor runs in reverse direction
Check if the motor is hold when started, or start the motor with speed source.
at start
The difference between motor Normally the Rr value of IM is Rs*0.7. If there is much difference of the
parameter measured Rr and Rs measured value (e.g. Rr=Rs*0.3), proceed the motor parameter auto-tuning
value is too large again.
Insufficient output torque is
dragged to the reverse direction by Increase the current limit of Pr. 06-12, so as to increase the output torque.
the load.
Deceleration energy
123 backup (dEb)
Deceleration energy backup
Action and Reset

Action time N/A
0: Disable
1: dEb with auto accel./decel., the output frequency will note return after power
reply.
Warning setting parameter 2: dEb with auto accel./decel., the output frequency will return after power reply.
3: dEb low-voltage control, then increase to 350VDC/700VDC and decelerate to
stop.
4: dEb high-voltage control of 350VDC/700VDC and decelerate to stop
Record N/A
Instantaneous power off or low
voltage and unstable/ sudden
Check the power consumption
heavy load of the power that cause
the voltage drop
Unexpected power off Check the power consumption
13-43
13-44
Chapter 14 Fault Codes and DescriptionsC2000
Chapter 14 Fault Codes and Descriptions
* : Refer to setting of Pr. 06-17–Pr. 06-22.

ID* Display on LCM Keypad Fault Name Fault Descriptions
Output current exceeds 2.4 times of rated current during
Over-current during acceleration.
1 acceleration When ocA occurs, the drive closes the gate of the
(ocA) output immediately, the motor runs freely, and the
display shows an ocA error.
Action and Reset
Action level 240% of rated current
Fault treatment parameter N/A
Reset condition Reset in 5 sec. after the fault is cleared
Record Yes
1. Increase the acceleration time
2. Increase the acceleration time of S curve
Acceleration time is too short 3. Set auto-acceleration and auto-deceleration parameter (Pr. 01-44)
4. Set over-current stall prevention function (Pr. 06-03)
5. Replace the drive with a larger capacity model.
Short circuit at motor output due to Check the motor cable and remove causes of the short circuits, or replace the
poor insulation wiring cable before turning on the power.
Check for possible burnout or Check the motor insulation value with megger. Replace the motor if the
aging insulation of the motor insulation is poor.
Check if the output current during the whole working process exceeds the AC
The load is too large. motor drive’s rated current. If yes, replace the AC motor drive with a larger
capacity model.
Impulsive change of the load Reduce the load or increase the capacity of AC motor drive.
Use special motor or motor with Check the motor capacity (the rated current on the motor’s nameplate should ≦
larger capacity than the drive the rated current of the drive)
Use ON/OFF controller of an
Check the action timing of the contactor and make sure it is not turned ON/OFF
electromagnetic contactor at the
when the drive outputs the voltage.
output (U/V/W) of the drive
Adjust V/F curve setting and frequency/voltage. When the fault occurs, and the
V/F curve setting error
frequency voltage is too high, reduce the voltage.
Adjust the torque compensation (refer to Pr.07-26 torque compensation gain)
Torque compensation is too large
until the output current reduces and the motor does not stall.
Verify the wiring of the control circuit and wiring/grounding of the main circuit to
The motor starts when in free run Enable the speed tracking during start-up of Pr. 07-12.
1. Start the speed tracking function.
2. Adjust the maximum current for Pr. 07-09 speed tracking.
Check the settings for Pr. 00-11 control mode:
Incorrect combination of control
1. For IM, Pr. 00-11=0, 1, 2, 3, 5
mode and used motor
2. For PM, Pr. 00-11=4, 6, or 7
The length of motor cable is too Increase AC motor drive’s capacity.
long Install AC reactor(s) on the output side (U/V/W).
14-1
The ocA occurs due to short circuit or ground fault at the output side of the drive.
Check for possible short circuits between terminals with the electric meter:
Hardware failure B1 corresponds to U, V, W; DC- corresponds to U, V, W; corresponds to U,
V, W.
If short circuit occur, return to the factory for repair.
14-2

Output current exceeds 2.4 times of rated current during
Over-current during deceleration.
2 deceleration When ocd occurs, the drive closes the gate of the
(ocd) output immediately, the motor runs freely, and the
display shows an ocd error.
Action and Reset
Record Yes
1. Increase the deceleration time
2. Increase the deceleration time of S-curve
Deceleration time too short 3. Set auto-acceleration and auto-deceleration parameter (Pr. 01-44)
4. Set over-current stall prevention function (Pr. 06-03)
5. Replace the drive with a larger capacity model
Check if the mechanical brake of
Check the action timing of the mechanical brake
the motor activates too early
Short-circuit at motor output due to Check the motor cable and remove causes of the short circuits, or replace the
Check for possible burnout or Check the motor insulation value with megger. Replace the motor if the
aging insulation of the motor insulation is poor.
Check if the output current during the whole working process exceeds the AC
The load is too large motor drive’s rated current. If yes, replace the AC motor drive with a larger
capacity model.
Use special motor or motor with Check the motor capacity (the rated current on the motor’s nameplate should ≦
larger capacity than the drive the rated current of the drive)
Adjust V/F curve settings and frequency/voltage. When the fault occurs, and the
The length of motor cable is too Increase AC motor drive’s capacity
long Install AC reactor(s) on the output side (U/V/W)
The ocd occurs due to short circuit or ground fault at the output side of the drive.
Check for possible short circuits between terminals with the electric meter:
Hardware error B1 corresponds to U, V, W; DC- corresponds to U, V, W; corresponds to U,
V, W.
If short circuits occur, return to the factory for repair.
Check if the setting of stall
14-3

Output current exceeds 2.4 times of the rated current
Over-current during during constant speed.
3 steady operation When ocn occurs, the drive closes the gate of the output
(ocn) immediately, the motor runs freely, and the display
shows an ocn error.
Action and Reset
Record Yes
Short-circuit at motor output due to Check the motor cable and remove causes of the short circuits, or replace the
Check for possible shaft lock, Troubleshoot the motor shaft lock.
burnout or aging insulation of the Check the motor insulation value with megger. Replace the motor if the
motor insulation is poor.
Use special motor or motor with Check motor capacity (the rated current on the motor’s nameplate should ≦ the
larger capacity than the drive rated current of the drive)
Adjust V/F curve settings and frequency/voltage. When the fault occurs, and the
Adjust over-torque offset value (Refer to Pr. 07-26 torque compensation gain),
Over-torque offset value too high
until the output current is reduced and not motor stall.
Torque compensation is too large.
The length of motor cable is too Increase the AC motor drive’s capacity.
long Install AC reactor(s) on the output side (U/V/W).
The ocn occurs due to short circuit or ground fault at the output side of the drive.
Check for possible short circuit between terminals with the electric meter:
Hardware failure B1 corresponds to U, V, W; DC- corresponds to U, V, W; corresponds to U,
V, W.
If short circuits occur, return to the factory for repair.
14-4

When (one of) the output terminal(s) is grounded, short
circuit current is larger than Pr. 06-60 setting value, and
the detection time is longer than Pr. 06-61 time setting,
4 Ground fault (GFF)
GFF occurs.
NOTE: the short circuit protection is provided for AC
motor drive protection, not to protect the user.
Action and Reset
Action level Pr. 06-60 (Default = 60%)
Action time Pr. 06-61 (Default = 0.10 sec.)
Record Yes
Motor burnout or aging insulation Check the motor insulation value with megger. Replace the motor if the
occurred insulation is poor.
Troubleshoot the short circuit.
Short circuit due to broken cable
Replace the cable.
Larger stray capacitance of the If the motor cable length exceeds 100m, decrease the setting value for carrier
frequency.
cable and terminal Take remedies to reduce stray capacitance.
Verify the grounding and wiring of the communication circuit. It is recommended
for effective sufficient anti-interference performance.
Cycle the power after checking the status of motor, cable and cable length. If
Hardware failure
GFF still exists, return to the factory for repair.
IGBT short circuit

Short-circuit is detected between upper bridge and
5 between upper bridge
lower bridge of the IGBT module
and lower bridge (occ)
Action and Reset

Action level Hardware protection
Record Yes
IGBT error Check the motor wiring.
Short-circuit detecting circuit error Cycle the power, if occ still exists, return to the factory for repair.
14-5

Over-current or hardware failure in current detection at
Over-current at stop stop.
6 (ocS) Cycle the power after ocS occurs. If the hardware failure
occurs, the display shows cd1, cd2 or cd3.
Action and Reset
Record Yes
Check if other error code such as cd1–cd3 occur after cycling the power. If yes,
Hardware failure
return to the factory for repair.

DC BUS over-voltage during acceleration.
Over-voltage during
When ovA occurs, the drive closes the gate of the
7 acceleration
output, the motor runs freely, and the display shows an
(ovA)
ovA error.
Action and Reset
230V series: 410VDC
460V series: 820VDC
Action level
575V series: 1116VDC
Action time Immediately act when DC BUS voltage is higher than the level
Reset condition Reset only when DC BUS voltage is lower than 90% of the over-voltage level
Record Yes
Acceleration is too slow (e.g. hen Decrease the acceleration time
lifting load decreases acceleration Use brake unit or DC BUS
time) Replace the drive with a larger capacity model.
The setting for stall prevention
level is smaller than no-load The setting for stall prevention level should be larger than no-load current
current
Check if the input voltage is within the rated AC motor drive input voltage range,
Power voltage is too high
and check for possible voltage spikes.
ON/OFF switch action of phase-in If the phase-in capacitor or active power supply unit acts in the same power
capacitor in the same power system, the input voltage may surge abnormally in a short time. In this case,
system install an AC reactor.
Use over-voltage stall prevention function (Pr. 06-01)
Regenerative voltage of motor
Use auto-acceleration and auto-deceleration setting (Pr. 01-44)
inertia
Use a brake unit or DC BUS
Check if the over-voltage warning occurs after acceleration stops.
When the warning occurs, do the following:
Acceleration time is too short 1. Increase the acceleration time
2. Set Pr. 06-01 over-voltage stall prevention
3. Increase setting value for Pr. 01-25 S-curve acceleration arrival time 2
The ground short circuit current charges the capacitor in the main circuit through
the power. Check if there is ground fault on the motor cable, wiring box and its
Motor ground fault
internal terminals.
Troubleshoot the ground fault.
Incorrect wiring of brake resistor or
Check the wiring of brake resistor and brake unit.
brake unit
14-6

DC BUS over-voltage during deceleration.
Over-voltage during
When ovd occurs, the drive closes the gate of the
8 deceleration
output immediately, the motor runs freely, and the
(ovd)
display shows an ovd error.
Action and Reset
230V series: 410VDC
460V series: 820VDC
Action level
Reset condition Reset only when DC BUS voltage is lower than 90% of the over-voltage level
Record Yes
1. Increase the setting value of Pr. 01-13, Pr. 01-15, Pr. 01-17 and Pr. 01-19
(deceleration time)
2. Connect brake resistor, brake unit or DC BUS on the drive.
Deceleration time is too short, 3. Reduce the brake frequency.
causing too large regenerative 4. Replace the drive with a larger capacity model.
energy of the load 5. Use S-curve acceleration/deceleration.
6. Use over-voltage stall prevention (Pr. 06-01).
7. Use auto-acceleration and auto-deceleration (Pr. 01-44).
8. Adjust braking level (Pr. 07-01 or the bolt position of the brake unit).
level is smaller than no-load The setting for stall prevention level should be larger than no-load current
current
Motor ground fault
internal terminals.
Check the wiring of brake resistor or brake unit.
brake unit
14-7

DC BUS over-voltage at constant speed.
Over-voltage at
When ovn occurs, the drive closes the gate of the
9 constant speed
output immediately, the motor runs freely, and the
(ovn)
display shows an ovn error.
Action and Reset
230V series: 410VDC
460V series: 820VDC
Action level
Reset condition Reset only when DC BUS voltage is lower than 90% of over-voltage level
Record Yes
1. Connect brake resistor, brake unit or DC BUS to the drive.
2. Reduce the load.
Impulsive change of the load
3. Replace to drive with a larger capacity model.
4. Adjust braking level (Pr. 07-01 or bolt position of the brake unit).
level is smaller than no-load The setting of stall prevention level should be larger than no-load current
current
Regenerative voltage of motor Use over-voltage stall prevention function (Pr. 06-01)
inertia Use a brake unit or DC BUS
The ground short-circuit current charges the capacitor in the main circuit through
Motor ground fault
internal terminals.
brake unit
14-8
Over-voltage at stop
10 (ovS)
Over-voltage at stop
Action and Reset

230V series: 410VDC
460V series: 820VDC
Action level
Reset condition Reset only when DC BUS voltage is lower than 90% of over-voltage level
Record Yes
ON/OFF switch action of phase-in If the phase-in capacitor or active power supply unit activates in the same power
brake unit
Hardware failure in voltage Check if other error code such as cd1–cd3 occur after cycling the power. If yes,
detection return to the factory for repair.
Motor ground fault
internal terminals.
Low-voltage during
DC BUS voltage is lower than Pr. 06-00 setting value
11 acceleration
during acceleration
(LvA)
Action and Reset

Action level Pr. 06-00 (Default = depending on the model)
Action time Immediately act when DC BUS voltage is lower than Pr. 06-00
Reset when DC BUS voltage is higher than Pr. 06-00 + 30V (Frame A–D) / 40V
Reset condition
(Frame E and below)
Record Yes
Power-off Improve power supply condition.
Power voltage changes Adjust voltage to the power range of the drive
Start up the motor with large Check the power system.
capacity Increase the capacity of power equipment.
Reduce the load.
The load is too large Increase the drive capacity.
Increase the acceleration time.
DC BUS Install DC reactor(s).
Check if there is short-circuit plate
Connect short circuit plate or DC reactor between terminal +1 and +2.
or any DC reactor installed
If the error still exists, return to the factory for repair.
between terminal +1 and +2
14-9
Low-voltage during
DC BUS voltage is lower than Pr. 06-00 setting value
12 deceleration
during deceleration
(Lvd)
Action and Reset

Action time Immediately act when DC BUS voltage is lower than Pr. 06-00
Fault treatment parameter NA
Reset when DC BUS voltage is higher than Pr. 06-00 + 30V (Frame A–D) / 40V
Reset condition
(Frame E and above)
Record Yes
Power voltage changes Adjust voltage to the power range of the drive.
Reduce the load.
Sudden load
Increase the drive capacity.
Low-voltage at
DC BUS voltage is lower than Pr. 06-00 setting value at
13 constant speed
constant speed
(Lvn)
Action and Reset

Action time Immediately act when DCBUS voltage is lower than Pr. 06-00
Fault treatment parameter NA
Reset when DCBUS voltage is higher than Pr. 06-00 + 30V (Frame A–D) / 40V
Reset condition
(Frame E and above)
Record Yes
Power voltage changes Adjust voltage to the power range of the drive
Reduce the load.
Sudden load
14-10
1. DC BUS voltage is lower than Pr. 06-00 setting

Low-voltage at stop
14 (LvS)
value at stop
2. Hardware failure in voltage detection
Action and Reset

Action time Immediately act when DCBUS voltage is lower than Pr. 06-00
Manual/ auto
230V series:
Frame A–D = Lv level + 30VDC + 500ms
Frame E and above = Lv level + 40VDC + 500ms
460V series:
Frame A–D = Lv level + 60VDC + 500ms
Reset method Frame E and above = Lv level + 80VDC + 500ms
575V series:
Frame A–D = Pr. 06-00 + 100.0VDC
Frame E and above = Pr. 06-00 + 120.0VDC
690V series:
Frame A–D = Pr. 06-00 + 100.0VDC
Frame E and above = Pr. 06-00 + 100.0VDC
Reset condition 500ms
Record Yes
Incorrect drive models Check if the power specification matches the drive.
Adjust voltage to the power range of the drive.
Power voltage changes Cycle the power after checking the power. If LvS error still exists, return to the
factory for repair.
Phase loss protection

15 (OrP)
Phase loss of power input
Action and Reset

Action level DC BUS is lower than Pr. 07-00, and DC BUS ripple is higher than Pr. 06-52
Action time N/A
Fault treatment parameter Pr. 06-53
Reset condition Immediately reset when DCBUS is higher than Pr. 07-00
Record Yes
Phase loss of input power Correctly install the wiring of the main circuit power.
Single phase power input to
Choose the model whose power matches the voltage.
three-phase model
If the main circuit power works normally, verify the main circuit.
Power voltage changes Cycle the power after checking the power, if OrP error still exists, return to the
factory for repair.
Loose wiring terminal of input Tighten the terminal screws according to the torque described in the user
power manual.
The input cable of three-phase Wire correctly.
power is cut off Replace the cut off cable.
Input power voltage changes too Verify the setting value for Pr. 06-50 Time for Input Phase Loss Detection and
much Pr. 06-52 Ripple of Input Phase Loss
Unbalanced three-phase of input
Check the power three-phase status.
power
14-11
IGBT overheating
16 (oH1)
IGBT temperature exceeds the protection level
Action and Reset

When Pr.06-15 is higher than the IGBT overheating protection level, oH1 error
Action level
occurs instead of oH1 warning.
IGBT temperature exceeds the protection level for more than 100ms, oH1 error
Action time
occurs.
Reset condition Reset only when IGBT temperature is lower than oH1 error level minus (-) 10°C
Record Yes
1. Check ambient temperature.
or temperature inside the control
cabinet is too high, or if there is
obstruction in the ventilation hole
of the control cabinet.
cabinet.
the heat sink or if the fan is Remove the obstruction or replace the cooling fan.
running.
1. Reduce the load
2. Reduce the carrier
corresponding load
The drive has run 100% or more
than 100% of the rated output for a Replace the drive with a larger capacity model.
long time
14-12
Heatsink overheating
17 (oH2)
Capacitance temperature exceeds the protection level
Action and Reset

Action level Refer to the table below for oH2 level of each models
When capacitance temperature exceeds the protection level for more than
Action time
100ms, oH2 error occurs
Reset condition Reset when capacitance temperature is lower than oH2 error level minus (-) 10°C
Record Yes
1. Check ambient temperature.
or temperature inside the control
cabinet is too high, or if there is
obstruction in the ventilation hole
of the control cabinet.
cabinet.
the heat sink or if the fan is Remove the obstruction or replace the cooling fan.
running.
1. Reduce the load
2. Reduce the carrier
corresponding load
The drive has run 100% or more
than 100% of the rated output for a Replace the drive with a larger capacity model.
long time
Unstable power Install reactor(s)
Load changes frequently Reduce load changes
oH1/ oH2 warning level

oH warning
Model oH1 oH2
VFD007C23A
VFD015C23A 95
VFD022C23A
VFD037C23A 100
VFD055C23A
VFD075C23A 80
VFD110C23A
VFD150C23A oH1 Warning = oH1 – 5
110
VFD185C23A 75 oH2 Warning = oH2 – 5
VFD220C23A
VFD300C23A/E
VFD370C23A/E
VFD450C23A/E
65
VFD550C23A/E
VFD750C23A/E
VFD900C23A/E
VFD007C43A/E
95
VFD015C43A/E
VFD022C43A/E 100
VFD037C43A/E 105 oH1 Warning = oH1 – 5
110
VFD040C43A/E oH2 Warning = oH2 – 5
100
VFD055C43A/E
VFD075C43A/E
80
VFD110C43A/E
14-13
oH warning
Model oH1 oH2
VFD150C43A/E 80
VFD185C43A/E
VFD220C43A/E 85
VFD300C43A/E
VFD370C43S/U
VFD450C43S/U
VFD550C43A/E
VFD750C43A/E
65
110
VFD1320C43A/E
VFD1600C43A/E
VFD1850C43A/E
VFD2200C43A/E
VFD2800C43A/E
70
VFD3150C43A/E
VFD3550C43A/E
VFD4500C43A/E
VFD015C53A 100
VFD022C53A 105 85
VFD037C53A
VFD055C53A
VFD075C53A 100
70
VFD110C53A
VFD150C53A
VFD185C63B
VFD220C63B
90 85
VFD300C63B
VFD370C63B
VFD450C63B
100
VFD550C63B
VFD750C63B
VFD900C63B
65
VFD1600C63B
VFD2000C63B
110
VFD2500C63B
VFD3150C63B
VFD4000C63B
70
VFD4500C63B
VFD5600C63B
VFD6300C63B
14-14
IGBT temperature
18 detection failure IGBT hardware failure in temperature detection
(tH1o)
Action and Reset

Action level NTC broken or wiring failure
When the IGBT temperature is higher than the protection level, and detection
Action time
time exceeds 100ms, the tH1o protection activates.
Record Yes
Wait for 10 minutes, and then cycle the power. Check if tH1o protection still
Hardware failure
exists. If yes, return to the factory for repair.
Capacitor hardware
19 error Hardware failure in capacitor temperature detection
(tH2o)
Action and Reset

Action level NTC broken or wiring failure
When the IGBT temperature is higher than the protection level, and detection
Action time
time exceeds 100ms, the tH2o protection activates.
Record Yes
Wait for 10 minutes, and then cycle the power. Check if tH2o protection still
Hardware failure
exists. If yes, return to the factory for repair.
14-15

The AC motor drive detects excessive drive output
current. The overload capacity sustains for 1 minute
21 Over load (oL)
when the drive outputs 120% of the drive’s rated output
current.
Action and Reset
Action level Based on over load curve and derating curve.
When the load is higher than the protection level and exceeds allowable time,
Action time
the oL protection activates.
Record Yes
The load is too large Reduce the load
Accel./Decel. time or the working
Increase the setting value for Pr. 01-12–01-19 (accel./decel time)
cycle are too short
Adjust the settings for Pr.01-01–01-08 (V/F curve), especially the setting value
for the mid-point voltage (if the mid-point voltage is set too low, the load capacity
V/F voltage is too high
decreases at low speed).
Refer to the V/F curve selection of Pr.01-43.
The capacity of the drive is too
Replace the drive with a larger capacity model.
small
Reduce the load during low-speed operation.
Overload during low-speed
operation
Decrease the carrier frequency of Pr. 00-17.
Adjust the torque compensation (refer to Pr. 07-26 Torque Compensation Gain)
prevention is correct.
Check the status of three-phase motor.
Output phase loss
Check if the cable is broken or the screws are loose.
2. Adjust the maximum current for Pr.07-09 speed tracking.
14-16
Electronics thermal
Electronics thermal relay 1 protection. The drive coasts
22 relay 1 protection
to stop once it activates.
(EoL1)
Action and Reset

Action level Start counting when output current > 105% of motor 1 rated current
Pr. 06-14 (if the output current is larger than 105% of motor 1 rated current again
Action time
within 60 sec., the counting time reduces and is less than Pr. 06-14)
Record Yes
The load is too large Reduce the load.
Increase the setting values for Pr. 01-12–01-19 (Accel./Decel time)
cycle is too short
Refer to the V/F curve selection of Pr.01-43.
operation.
When using a general motor, even
Replace the drive with a dedicated to VFD model.
it operates below rated current, an
overload may still occur during
low-speed operation.
When using VFD dedicated
motors, Pr. 06-13=0 (electronic Pr. 06-13=1 electronic thermal relay selection motor 1 = standard motor (motor
thermal relay selection motor 1 = with fan on the shaft).
inverter motor)
Incorrect value of electronic
Reset to the correct motor rated current.
thermal relay
The maximum motor frequency is
Reset to the correct motor rated frequency.
set too low
Set Pr. 06-13=2 electronic thermal relay selection motor 1= disable, and install
One drive to multiple motors
thermal relay on each motor.
until the current reduces and the motor does no stall.
Motor fan error Check the status of the fan, or replace the fan.
Replace the motor.
14-17
Electronic thermal
Electronic thermal relay 2 protection. The drive coasts
23 relay 2 protection
to stop once it activates.
(EoL2)
Action and Reset

Action level Start counting when output current > 105% of motor 2 rated current
Pr. 06-28 (If the output current is larger than 105% of motor 2 rated current again
Action time
within 60 sec., the counting time reduces and is less than Pr. 06-28)
Record Yes
The load is too large Reduce the load
Increase the setting values for Pr.01-12–01-19 (accel./decel. time)
cycle are too short
Refer to the V/F curve selection setting of Pr.01-43.
operation.
When using general motor, even it
Replace the drive with a dedicated to VFD model.
operates below rated current, an
overload may still occur during
low-speed operation.
When using VFD dedicated
motors, Pr. 06-27=0 (electronic Pr. 06-27=1 Electronic thermal relay selection motor 2 = standard motor (motor
thermal relay selection motor 2 = 0 with fan on the shaft).
inverter motor)
Incorrect value of electronic
Reset to the correct motor rated current.
thermal relay
The maximum motor frequency is
Reset to the correct motor rated frequency.
set too low
Set Pr. 06-27=2 Electronic thermal relay selection motor 2 = disable, and install
One drive to multiple motors
thermal relay on each motor.
Motor fan error Check the status of the fan, or replace the fan.
Replace the motor.
14-18
Motor overheating (PTC) (Pr. 03-00 – Pr. 03-02=6

Motor overheating
24_1 (oH3) PTC
PTC), when PTC input > Pr. 06-30, the fault treatment
acts according to Pr. 06-29.
Action and Reset

Action level PTC input value > Pr. 06-30 setting (Default = 50%)
Pr. 06-29
Fault treatment parameter 1: Warn and ramp to stop
3: No warning
When Pr. 06-29=0, oH3 is a “Warning”. The “Warning” is automatically cleared.
Reset method
When Pr. 06-29=1 or 2, oH3 is a “Fault”. You must reset manually.
Record When Pr. 06-29=1 or 2, oH3 is a “Fault”, and the fault is recorded.
Motor shaft lock Remove the shaft lock.
Reduce the load.
Ambient temperature is too high
Operate at low-speed too long. Replace the motor with a dedicated to VFD model.
Accel./Decel. time and working
Increase the setting values for Pr. 01-12–01-19 (accel./decel. time)
cycle are too short
Adjust settings for Pr.01-01–01-08 (V/F curve), especially the setting value for
V/F voltage is too high the mid-point voltage (if the mid-point voltage is set too low, the load capacity
matches that on the motor Reset to the correct motor rated current.
nameplate.
Check if the PTC is properly set
Check the connection between PTC thermistor and the heat protection.
and wired.
Replace the motor.
Harmonics are too high. Use remedies to reduce harmonics.
14-19
Motor overheating (PT100) (Pr. 03-00 – Pr. 03-02=11

Motor overheating
24_2 (oH3) PT100
PT100). When PT100 input > Pr. 06-57 (default = 7V),
the fault treatment acts according to Pr. 06-29.
Action and Reset

Action level PT100 input value > Pr. 06-57 setting (default = 7V)
Pr. 06-29
3: No warning
When Pr. 06-29=0 and the temperature < Pr. 06-56, oH3 is automatically
Reset method cleared.
When Pr. 06-29=1 or 2, oH3 is a “Fault”. You must reset manually.
Record When Pr. 06-29=1 or 2, oH3 is a “Fault”, and the fault is recorded.
Motor shaft lock Remove the shaft lock.
Reduce the load.
Change the installed place If there are heating devices in the surroundings.
Ambient temperature is too high
Operate at low-speed too long Replace the motor with a dedicated to VFD model.
Increase the setting values for Pr. 01-12–Pr.01-19 (accel./decel. time)
cycle are too short
matches that on the motor Reset to the correct motor rated current.
nameplate.
Check if the PT100 is properly set
Check connection of PT100 thermistor.
and wired.
Replace the motor.
Harmonics are too high Use remedies to reduce harmonics.
14-20
When output current exceeds the over-torque detection

Over torque 1 level (Pr.06-07) and exceeds over-torque detection time
26 (ot1) (Pr.06-08), and when Pr.06-06 or Pr.06-09 is set to 2 or
4, the ot1 error displays.
Action and Reset

Pr. 06-06
0: No function
1: Continue operation after Over-torque detection during constant speed
Fault treatment parameter operation
2: Stop after Over-torque detection during constant speed operation
3: Continue operation after Over-torque detection during RUN
When Pr. 06-06=1 or 3, ot1 is a “Warning”. The warning is
Reset method Auto
automatically cleared when the output current < (Pr. 06-07 – 5%)
Reset condition
Manual When Pr. 06-06=2 or 4, ot1 is a “Fault”. You must reset manually.
Record Immediately reset
Active level When Pr. 06-06=2 or 4, ot1 is a “Fault”, and the fault is recorded.
Incorrect parameter setting Reset Pr. 06-07 and Pr. 06-08
Mechanical failure (e.g.
over-torque, mechanical lock)
Reduce the load.
Replace the motor with a larger capacity model.
Increase the setting values for Pr. 01-12–Pr. 01-19 (accel./decel. time)
cycle are too short
The motor capacity is too small Replace the motor with a larger capacity model.
Overload during low-speed Decrease low-speed operation time.
speed tracking function (including
restart after momentary power loss
and restart after fault)
14-21
When output current exceeds the over-torque detection

Over torque 2 level (Pr.06-10) and exceeds over-torque detection time
27 (ot2) (Pr.06-11), and when Pr.06-09 is set to 2 or 4, the ot2
error displays.
Action and Reset

Pr. 06-09
0: No function
1: Continue operation after Over-torque detection during constant speed
Fault treatment parameter operation
2: Stop after Over-torque detection during constant speed operation
3: Continue operation after Over-torque detection during RUN
When Pr. 06-09=1 or 3, ot2 is a “Warning”. The warning is
Reset method Auto
automatically cleared when the output current < (Pr. 06-10 – 5%).
Reset condition
Manual When Pr. 06-09=2 or 4, ot2 is a “Fault”. You must reset manually.
Active level When Pr. 06-09=2 or 4, ot2 is a “Fault”, and the fault is recorded.
Incorrect parameter setting Reset Pr. 06-07 and Pr. 06-08
Mechanical failure (e.g.
over-torque, mechanical lock)
Reduce the load.
The load is too large.
Increase the setting values for Pr.01-12–01-19 (accel./decel. time).
cycle are too short
V/F voltage is too high for the mid-point voltage (if the mid-point voltage is set too low, the load capacity
The motor capacity is too small Replace the motor with a larger capacity model.
Overload during low-speed Decrease low-speed operation time.
speed tracking function (including
restart at momentary power loss
and restart after fault)
14-22
Under current
28 (uC)
Low current detection
Action and Reset

Pr. 06-73
0: No function
Fault treatment parameter 1: warn and coast to stop
2: warn and ramp to stop by 2nd deceleration time
3: warn and operation continue
When Pr. 06-73=3, uC is a “Warning”. The warning is automatically
Reset method Auto
cleared when the output current > (Pr. 06-71+0.1A).
Reset condition
Manual When Pr. 06-73=1 or 2, uC is a “Fault”. You must reset manually.
Active level When Pr. 06-71=1 or 2, uC is a “Fault”, and the fault is recorded.
Motor cable disconnection Troubleshoot the connection between the motor and the load.
Improper setting of low-current
Reset Pr. 06-71, Pr. 06-72 and Pr. 06-73 to proper settings.
protection
Check the load status.
The load is too low
Check if the motor capacity matches the load.
When MIx=45 (forward run limit) or MIx=44 (backward

29 Limit Error (LMIT) run limit) act during operation, LMIT error shows.
Action and Reset

Action level MIx=44 (backward run limit) or MIx=45(forward run limit)
Record Yes
The limit ON/OFF switch is on
Install the limit ON/OFF switch to correct position.
incorrect position
Deceleration time is too long, Reduce deceleration time.
causing the motor cannot stop at Adjust setting values for brake level (Pr. 07-01 or the insert position on the brake
limited position unit).
The motor cannot stop due to
Reset the over-voltage stall prevention.
over-voltage stall prevention
Verify wiring of the control circuit and wiring/grounding of the main circuit to
14-23
EEPROM write error

30 (cF1)
Internal EEPROM cannot be programmed
Action and Reset

Action level Firmware internal detection
Action time cF1 acts immediately when the drive detects the fault
Record Yes
Press “RESET” key or reset the parameter to the default setting, if cF1 still
Internal EEPROM cannot be
exists, return to the factory for repair.
programmed
Cycle the power, if cF1 still exists, return to the factory for repair.
EEPROM read error

31 (cF2)
Internal EEPROM cannot be read
Action and Reset

Action level Firmware internal detection
Action time cF2 acts immediately when the drive detects the fault
Record Yes
Press “RESET” key or reset the parameter to the default setting, if cF2 still
Internal EEPROM cannot be read exists, return to the factory for repair.
Cycle the power, if cF2 error still exists, return to the factory for repair.
U-phase error
33 (cd1)
U-phase current detection error when power is ON
Action and Reset

Action time cd1 acts immediately when the drive detects the fault
Reset method Power-off
Reset condition N/A
Record Yes
Cycle the power.
Hardware failure
If cd1 still exists, return to the factory for repair.
14-24
34 V-phase error (cd2) V-phase current detection error when power ON
Action and Reset

Reset condition N/A
Record Yes
Cycle the power.
Hardware failure
W-phase error
35 (cd3)
W-phase current detection error when power ON
Action and Reset

Reset condition N/A
Record Yes
Cycle the power.
Hardware failure
cc hardware failure cc (current clamp) hardware protection error when

36 (Hd0) power is ON
Action and Reset

Action time Hd0 acts immediately when the drive detects the fault
Reset condition N/A
Record Yes
Cycle the power.
Hardware failure
If Hd0 still exists, return to the factory for repair.
14-25
Oc hardware error
37 (Hd1)
oc hardware protection error when power is ON
Action and Reset

Reset condition N/A
Record Yes
Cycle the power.
Hardware failure
ov hardware error
38 (Hd2)
ov hardware protection error when power is ON
Action and Reset

Reset condition N/A
Record Yes
Cycle the power.
Hardware failure
occ hardware error Protection error of occ IGBT short-circuit detection

39 (Hd3) when power is ON
Action and Reset

Reset condition N/A
Record Yes
Cycle the power.
Hardware failure
14-26
Auto-tuning error
40 (AUE)
Motor auto-tuning error
Action and Reset

Record Yes
Press “STOP” key during
Re-execute auto-tuning.
auto-tuning
Check motor capacity and related parameters.
Incorrect motor capacity (too large
Set the correct parameters, that is Pr. 01-01–Pr. 01-02.
or too small) and parameter setting
Set Pr.01-00 larger than motor rated frequency.
Incorrect motor wiring Check the wiring.
Motor shaft lock Remove the cause of motor shaft lock.
The electromagnetic contactor is
ON at output side (U/V/W) of the Make sure the electromagnetic valve is OFF.
drive
Reduce the load.
The load is too large.
Accel./Decel. time is too short Increase the setting values for Pr. 01-12–Pr. 01-19 (Accel./Decel. time).
PID feedback loss (analog feedback signal is only valid

41 PID loss ACI (AFE)
when the PID function is enabled)
Action and Reset

Action level When the analog input < 4mA (only detects 4–20mA analog input)
Pr. 08-09
0: warn and keep operation
Fault treatment parameter 1: warn and ramp to stop
2: warn and coast to stop
3: warn and operate at last frequency
When Pr. 08-09=3 or 4, AFE is a “Warning”. When the feedback signal
Auto
Reset method is > 4mA, the ”Warning” is automatically cleared.
Manual When Pr. 08-09=1 or 2, AFE is a “Fault”. You must reset manually.
When Pr. 08-09=1 or 2, AFE is a “Fault”, and the fault is recorded; when Pr.
Record
08-09=3 or 4, AFE is a “Warning”, and the warning is not recorded.
PID feedback cable is loose or cut Tighten the terminal.
off Replace the cable with a new one.
Feedback device failure Replace the device with a new one.
Hardware failure Check all the wiring. If AFE fault still exists, return to the factory for repair.
14-27
PG feedback error The motor runs in a reverse direction to the frequency

42 (PGF1) command direction.
Action and Reset

Pr. 10-08
Fault treatment parameter
1: warn and ramp to stop
Record Yes
Incorrect parameter setting of
Reset encoder parameter (Pr. 10-02).
encoder
Check wiring of the encoder Re-wire the encoder.
PG card or PG encoder failure Replace PG card or encoder with a new one.
Verify wiring of the control circuit and wiring/grounding of the main circuit to
PG feedback loss Pr. 10-00 and Pr. 10-02 is not set in the PG control
43 (PGF2) mode. When press “RUN” key, PGF2 fault occurs.
Action and Reset

Record Yes
Incorrect setting of encoder
Reset encoder parameters (Pr. 10-00 and Pr. 10-02)
parameter
Incorrect selection of the control
Choose the correct control mode.
mode
14-28

Under PG mode, when the motor frequency exceeds
the encoder observer stall level (Pr. 10-10) and starts to
PG feedback stall
44 (GF3)
count, the fault time is longer than the detection time of
encoder observer stall (Pr. 10-11), then PGF3 fault
occurs.
Action and Reset
Pr. 10-12
Record Yes
Incorrect setting of encoder
Reset encoder parameter (Pr. 10-01)
parameter
Pr. 01-00 is set too small Set proper value for Pr. 01-00.
Incorrect setting for ASR Reset ASR parameters.
parameters and accel./decel. time Set correct accel./decel. time.
Incorrect setting for PG feedback
Reset proper values for Pr. 10-10 and Pr. 10-11
stall
Under PG mode, when the motor frequency exceeds

PG slip error encoder observer slip range (Pr. 10-13) and starts to
45 (PGF4) count, the fault time is longer than the detection time of
encoder observer slip (Pr. 10-14), PGF4 fault occurs.
Action and Reset

Pr. 10-15
When Pr. 10-15=0, PGF4 is a “Warning”, when the deviation between
Auto output frequency and motor frequency is smaller than the encoder
Reset method
observer slip range, the warning is automatically cleared.
Manual When Pr. 10-15=1 or 2, PGF4 is a “Fault”. You must reset manually.
Record When Pr. 10-15=1 or 2, PGF4 is a “Fault”, and the fault is recorded.
Incorrect settings for PG feedback
Reset correct values for Pr. 10-13 and Pr. 10-14.
parameters
Incorrect settings for ASR Reset ASR parameters.
parameters and accel./decel. time Set correct accel./decel time.
Incorrect settings of encoder
Reset encoder parameters (Pr. 10-01).
parameters
Accel./Decel. time is too short Reset proper accel./decel. time.
Incorrect settings of torque limit
parameters (Pr. 06-12, Pr. Reset proper setting values for Pr. 06-12 and Pr. 11-17–Pr. 17-20.
11-17–20)
Motor shaft lock Remove causes of motor shaft lock.
Mechanical brake is not released Check the action sequence of the system.
14-29
ACI loss Analog input loss (including all the 4–20mA analog
48 (ACE) signal)
Action and Reset

Action level When the analog input is < 4mA (only detects 4–20mA analog input)
Pr. 03-19
0: Disable
1: Continue operation at the last frequency (warning, ANL is displayed on the
keypad)
2: Decelerate to stop (warning, ANL is displayed on the keypad)
When Pr. 03-19=1 or 2, ACE is a “Warning”. When analog input signal
Auto
Reset method is > 4mA, the warning is automatically cleared.
Manual When Pr. 03-19=3, ACE is a “Fault”. You must reset manually.
Record When Pr. 03-19=3, ACE is a “Fault”, and the fault is recorded.
Tighten the terminal.
ACI cable is loose or cut off
Replace the cable with a new one.
External device failure Replace the device with a new one.
Hardware failure Check all the wiring. If ACE still exists, return to the factory for repair.
External fault. When the drive decelerates based on the

49 External fault (EF)
setting of Pr. 07-20, the EF fault displays on the keypad.
Action and Reset

Action level MIx=EF and the MI terminal is ON
Pr. 07-20
0: Coast to stop
1: Stop by 1st deceleration time
2: Stop by 2nd deceleration time
3: Stop by 3rd deceleration time
4: Stop by 4th deceleration time
6: Automatic deceleration (Pr. 01-46)
Reset condition Manual reset only after the external fault is cleared (terminal status is recovered)
Record Yes
External fault Press RESET key after the fault is cleared.
14-30
When the contact of MIx=EF1 is ON, the output stops

Emergency stop
50 (EF1)
immediately and displays EF1 on the keypad. The
motor is in free running.
Action and Reset

Action level MIx=EF1 and the MI terminal is ON
Reset condition Manual reset only after the external fault is cleared (terminal status is recovered)
Record Yes
Verify if the system is back to normal condition, and then press “RESET” key to
When MIx=EF1 activates
go back to the default.
When the contact of MIx=bb is ON, the output stops

External base block
51 (bb)
immediately and displays bb on the keypad. The motor
is in free running.
Action and Reset

Action level MIx=bb and the MI terminal is ON
Reset method The display “bb” is automatically cleared after the fault is cleared.
Reset condition N/A
Record No
Verify if the system is back to normal condition, and then press “RESET” key to
When MIx=bb activates
go back to the default.
Password is locked
52 (Pcod)
Entering the wrong password three consecutive times
Action and Reset

Action level Entering the wrong password three consecutive times
Reset condition Power-off
Record Yes
1. Input the correct password after rebooting the motor drive.
2. If you forget the password, do the following steps:
Step 1: Input 9999 and press ENTER.
Incorrect password input through Step 2: Repeat step 1. Input 9999 and press ENTER.
Pr. 00-07 (You need to finish step 1 and step 2 within 10 seconds. If you don’t finish
the two steps in 10 seconds, try again.)
3. The parameter settings return to the default when the “Input 9999” process
is finished.
14-31
Illegal command
54 (CE1)
Communication command is illegal
Action and Reset

Action level When the function code is not 03, 06, 10, or 63.
Record No
command from the upper unit
from the upper unit
of the cable
Illegal data address

55 (CE2)
Data address is illegal
Action and Reset

Action level When the data address is correct.
Record No
from the upper unit
of the cable
14-32
Illegal data value

56 (CE3)
Data value is illegal
Action and Reset

Action level When the data length is too long
Record No
from the upper unit
of the cable
Data is written to
57 read-only address Data is written to read-only address
(CE4)
Action and Reset

Action level When the data is written to read-only address.
Record No
from the upper unit
of the cable
14-33
MODBUS transmission
58 time-out MODBUS transmission time-out occurs
(CE10)
Action and Reset

Action level When the communication time exceeds the detection time for Pr.09-03 time-out.
Pr. 09-02
Record Yes
The upper unit does not transmit
Check if the upper unit transmits the communication command within the setting
the communication command
time for Pr.09-03.
within Pr.09-03 setting time.
from the upper unit
of the cable
Brake transistor error The brake transistor of the motor drive is abnormal. (for
60 (bF) the models with built-in brake transistor)
Action and Reset

Record Yes
1. Press “RESET” key to go back to the default. If bF still exists, return to the
factory for repair.
Hardware error 2. Power off the motor drive since the internal circuit is abnormal. Use a meter
to check if it is short-circuit between B2 to DC-. If short-circuit exists, return
to the factory for repair.
Malfunction caused by interference Verify wiring/grounding of the main circuit to prevent interference.
Using the incorrect brake resistor Check if the resistance value of the brake resistor matches to the drive.
Incorrect wiring of the brake
Refer to the optional accessories instruction in chapter 7, and verify the wiring.
resistor
14-34
Y-connection /
Δ-connection
61 switch error
An error occurs when Y-Δ switches
(ydc)
Action and Reset

1. ydc occurs when the confirmation signals of Y-connection and Δ-connection
Action level are conducted at the same time.
2. If any of confirmation signals is not conducted within Pr. 05-25, ydc occurs.
Can be reset only when the confirmation signal of Y-connection is conducted if it
Reset condition is Y-connection, or when the confirmation signal of Δ-connection is conducted if
it is Δ-connection.
Record Yes
The electromagnetic valve
Check if the electromagnetic valve works normally.
operates incorrectly during Y-Δ
If not, replace it.
switch.
Incorrect parameter setting Check if related parameters are all set up and set correctly.
The wiring of Y-Δ switch function is
Check the wiring.
incorrect
When Pr. 07-13 is not 0, and the power is suddenly off,

Deceleration energy
causing the DCBUS voltage lower than the dEb action
62 backup error
level, the dEb function acts and the motor ramps to
(dEb)
stop. Then dEb displays on the keypad.
Action and Reset

Action level When Pr. 07-13 is not 0, and the DCBUS voltage is lower than the level of dEb.
When Pr. 07-13=2 (dEb with auto-acceleration / auto-deceleration, the
Auto drive outputs the frequency after the power is restored): dEb is
automatically cleared.
Reset method When Pr. 07-13=1 (dEb with auto-acceleration / auto-deceleration, the
drive does not output the frequency after the power is restored): The
Hand
drive stops when dEb acts and the rotation speed becomes 0 Hz, then
the drive can be reset manually.
Auto: The fault is automatically cleared.
Reset condition
Hand: When the drive decelerates to 0 Hz.
Record Yes
Unstable power source or the
Check the power system.
power is off
There is any other large load 1. Replace power system with a larger capacity.
operates in the power system 2. Use a different power system from the large load system.
14-35

On the basis of the maximum slip limit set via Pr. 10-29,
the speed deviation is abnormal. When the motor drive
outputs at constant speed, F>H or F<H exceeds the
63 Over slip error (oSL)
level set via Pr. 07-29, and it exceeds the time set via
Pr. 07-30, oSL shows. oSL occurs in induction motors
only.
Action and Reset
Pr. 07-29
Action level
100% of Pr. 07-29 = the maximum limit of the slip frequency (Pr. 10-29)
Pr. 07-31
3: No warning
Pr. 07-31=0 is a warning.
When the motor drive outputs at constant speed, and F>H or F<H
Auto
Reset method does not exceed the level set via Pr. 07-29 anymore, oSL warning will
be cleared automatically.
Hand When Pr. 07-31=1 or 2, oSL is an error, and it needs to reset manually.
Record Pr. 07-31=1 or 2, oSL is “Fault”, and will be recorded.
Any of the motor parameters in
parameter group 5 may be Check the motor parameters
incorrect
Overload Decrease the load
Any of the setting value of Pr.
07-29, 07-30, and 10-29 is Check the setting of oSL protection function related parameters
improper
Electric valve switch

64 error (ryF)
Electric valve switch error when executing Soft Start
Action and Reset

Action level Hardware detection (Frame D and above)
Reset condition Reset when the electric valve switch is correctly closed
Record Yes
Check if the power is shut down during the drive operation?
The input power is abnormal
Check if the three-phase input power is normal.
Malfunction caused by interference Verify the wiring/grounding of the main circuit to prevent interference.
Cycle the power after checking the power. If ryF error still exists, return to the
Hardware failure
factory for repair.
14-36
Hardware error of PG
65 card (PGF5)
Hardware error of PG card
Action and Reset

1. The PG card (PG01U/PG02U) can only be used with the permanent
magnetic motor. When the power is ON and Pr. 00-04=29 pole section
shows 0 or 7 (wiring error or no U/V/W signal input), the PGF5 error will be
Action level
activated.
2. The drive receives the operation command right after the power is ON,
meanwhile, the PG card is not ready yet.
Reset condition Reset after cycle the power.
Record Yes
Wiring error or there is no U/V/W
Re-connect the cables correctly
signal input
Encoder failure Verify if it is the UVW encoder
The setting of encoder parameter
Choose the correct setting of Pr. 10-00
is incorrect
If the motor selection switch of PG
Check if it is the UVW encoder or Delta encoder
card on the correct position
PG card selection is incorrect Install the correct PG card
Reverse direction of
Rotating direction is different from the commanding
68 the speed feedback
direction detected by the sensorless
(SdRv)
Action and Reset

Pr. 10-08
Record When Pr. 10-08=1 or 2, SdRv is a “Fault”, and the fault is recorded.
The setting of Pr.10-25 FOC
bandwidth of speed observer is Decrease the setting of Pr. 10-25
improper
The setting of motor parameter is
Reset the motor parameter and execute parameter tuning
incorrect
The motor cable is abnormal or
Check if the cable is well functioned or replace the cable
broken
A reverse force is exerted, or the
motor runs in a reverse direction at Start speed tracking function (Pr. 07-12)
start
14-37
Over speed rotation

69 feedback (SdOr)
Over speed rotation detected by sensorless
Action and Reset

Pr. 10-12
Record When Pr. 10-12=1 or 2, SdOr is a “Fault”, and the fault is recorded.
The setting of Pr. 10-25 FOC
bandwidth of speed observer is Decrease the setting of Pr. 10-25
improper
The setting of ASR bandwidth of
Increase the bandwidth of ASR speed controller
speed controller is improper
The setting of motor parameter is
Reset motor parameter and execute parameter tuning
incorrect
14-38
Large deviation of
A large deviation between the rotating speed and the
70 speed feedback
command detected by the sensorless
(SdDe)
Action and Reset

Pr. 10-15
Record When Pr. 10-15=1 or 2, SdDe is a “Fault”, and the fault is recorded.
Improper parameter setting for
Reset proper setting for Pr. 10-13 and Pr. 10-14
abnormal rotating slip function
Improper parameter setting for Reset ASR parameters
ASR and acceleration/deceleration Set proper acceleration/deceleration time
The acceleration/deceleration time
Reset proper acceleration/deceleration time
is too short
Motor shaft lock Remove the cause of motor shaft lock
The mechanical brake is not
Verify the system action timeline
released
Incorrect parameter setting for
torque limit (Pr. 06-12, Pr. 11-17 – Adjust the setting to proper value
20)
71 Watchdog（WDTT） Watchdog error
Action and Reset

Action time N/A
Reset method Hardware failure, and cannot reset. Cycle the power.
Reset condition N/A
Record Yes
Hardware interference prevent interference.
If the WDTT fault still exists, return to the factory for repair.
14-39
72 STO Loss 1 (STL1) STO1 – SCM1 internal loop detection error
Action and Reset

Reset condition N/A
Record Yes
STO1 and SCM1 short circuit lines
Connect the short circuit line
are not connected
After you make sure all the wiring is correct, if STOL fault still exists after cycling
Hardware failure
the power, please return to the factory for repair.
Check if the PIN of IO card is broken?
Bad connection of the IO card Check if the IO card connects to the control board correctly, and if the screws
are tightened well?
The IO card does not match the
Contact local agent or Delta
version of the control board
Emergency stop for

73 external safety (S1)
Emergency stop for external safety
Action and Reset

Reset condition Reset only after S1 error is cleared.
Record Yes
The switch action of S1 and SCM
Reset the switch and cycle the power.
(OPEN)
S1 and SCM short circuit lines are
Re-connect the short circuit lines
not connected
Verify the wiring/grounding of the main circuit, control circuit and encoder to
If S1 fault still exists after cycling the power, please return to the factory for
Hardware failure
repair.
Poor connection of the IO card Check if the IO card connects to the control board correctly, and if the screws
are tightened well?
14-40
External mechanical brake error

External brake error The MO terminal is active when MOx=12, 42, 47 or 63,
75 (Brk) but the MIx=55 does not receive signal for mechanical
brake action during the set time of Pr. 02-56.
Action and Reset

MIx=55 did not receive signal for the mechanical brake action during the set time
Action level
of Pr. 02-56.
Record Yes
Verify if the mechanical brake can work correctly.
Mechanical brake error
Replace mechanical brake.
Incorrect parameter setting If there is no brake-confirming signal to use, set Pr. 02-56=0.
Tighten the screws.
Signal cable is loose or cut off
Replace the signal cable with a new one.
The time of Pr. 02-56 is set too
Increase the time setting of Pr. 02-56
short
76 STO（STO） Safety Torque Off function active
Action and Reset

When Pr. 06-44=1 and after STO error is cleared, it automatically
Auto
Reset method resets.
Manual When Pr. 06-44=0 and after STO error is cleared, reset it manually.
Reset condition Reset only after STO error is cleared.
Record Yes
The switch action of STO1/SCM1
Reset the switch (ON) and cycle the power
and STO2/SCM2 (OPEN)
are tightened well?
14-41
77 STO Loss 2 (STL2) STO2–SCM2 internal loop detection error
Action and Reset

Reset condition N/A
Record Yes
STO2 and SCM2 short circuit lines
Connect the short circuit lines
are not connected
After you make sure all the wiring is correct, if STL2 fault still exists after cycling
Hardware failure
are tightened well?
STO1–SCM1 and STO2–SCM2 internal loop detection

78 STO Loss 3 (STL3)
error
Action and Reset

Reset condition N/A
Record Yes
STO1 and SCM1, or STO2 and
SCM2 short circuit lines are not Re-connect the short circuit lines
connected
After you make sure all the wiring is correct, if STL3 fault still exists after cycling
Hardware failure
are tightened well?
14-42
Output phase loss

82 U phase (OPHL)
U phase output phase loss
Action and Reset

Pr. 06-46
Action time Pr. 06-48: Use the setting value of Pr. 06-48 first if there is DC braking function,
and then use that of Pr. 06-46.
Pr.06-45
3: No warning
Record Pr. 06-45=1 or 2 is “Fault”, and will be recorded.
The three-phase impedance of
Replace the motor.
motor is unbalanced
Check the cable condition.
The motor is wired incorrectly
Replace the cable.
Using a single-phase motor Choose a three-phase motor
Check the flat cable of the control board. Re-do the wiring and test again if the
flat cable is loose. If the fault still exists, return the unit to the factory.
The current sensor is damaged
Verify that the three-phase current is balanced via a current clamp meter. If it is
balanced and the OPHL fault still exists, return the unit to the factory
The drive capacity is much larger
Make sure the capacity of the drive and motor match to each other.
than the motor capacity
14-43
Output phase loss

83 V phase (OPHL)
V phase output phase loss
Action and Reset

Pr. 06-46
Action time Pr. 06-48: Use the setting value of Pr. 06-48 first. If DC braking function
activates, use that of Pr. 06-46.
Pr. 06-45
3: No warning
Record When Pr. 06-45=1 or 2, OPHL is a “Fault”, and the fault is recorded.
Replace the motor.
Check if the wiring is incorrect Check the cable and replace it if necessary.
single-phase motor
Check if the current sensor is drive to test. If the fault still exists, return to the factory for repair.
broken Check if the three-phase current is balanced with a current clamp meter. If the
current is balanced and the OPHL fault still exists, return to the factory for repair.
Check if the drive capacity is larger
Choose the drive that matches the motor capacity
14-44
Output phase loss

84 W phase (OPHL)
W phase output phase loss
Action and Reset

Pr. 06-46
Action time Pr. 06-48: Use the setting value of Pr. 06-48 first. If DC braking function
activates, use that of Pr. 06-46.
Pr. 06-45
3: No warning
Record When Pr. 06-45=1 or 2, OPHL is a “Fault”, and the fault is recorded.
Replace the motor.
Check if the wiring is incorrect Check the cable and replace it if necessary.
single-phase motor
Check if the current sensor is drive to test. If the fault still exists, return to the factory for repair.
broken Check if the three-phase current is balanced with a current clamp meter. If the
current is balanced and the OPHL fault still exists, return to the factory for repair.
Check if the drive capacity is larger
Choose the drive that matches the motor capacity
14-45
PG ABZ line off

85 (AboF)
The ABZ line off for protection when using PG02U
Action and Reset

Record Yes
The PG signal cable is not
Check the PG signal cable
connected or cut off
PG card screw is loose Tighten all the screws
1. After you check the wiring, if AboF fault still exists after cycle the power,
Hardware failure 2. Check if the VP power of PG card has no output, or the output voltage level
is abnormal.
3. Check if the encoder is broken.
Encoder wiring is too long, causing
1. Decrease the wiring length.
large voltage drop of PG card VP
2. Power on the encoder by other power sources.
power.
14-46
PG UVW line off

86 (UvoF)
UVW line off for protection when using PG02U
Action and Reset

Record Yes
The PG signal cable is not
Check the PG signal cable
connected or cut off
PG card screw is loose Tighten all the screws
1. After you check the wiring, if AboF fault still exists after cycle the power,
Hardware failure 2. Check if the VP power of PG card has no output, or the output voltage level
is abnormal.
3. Check if the encoder is broken.
Encoder wiring is too long, causing
1. Decrease the wiring length.
large voltage drop of PG card VP
2. Power on the encoder by other power sources.
power.
Overload protection at
87 low frequency (oL3)
Low frequency and high current protection
Action and Reset

Record Yes
1.
Reduce the ambient temperature of the operating drive.
The drive operates in the low 2.
Replace the drive with a larger power model.
frequency range (High HP: below 3.
Reset drive parameters or decrease carrier frequency.
15 Hz; Low HP: below 5 Hz) and 4.
If the drive operates in V/F control mode, reduce the output voltage for
IGBT temperature (High HP: 20°C; low-frequency operation.
Low HP: 50°C) 5. If the drive operates in IMVF and PMSVC control mode, decrease the
torque compensation gain (Pr.07-26).
14-47
Rotor position
89 detection error Rotor position detection error protection
(RoPd)
Action and Reset

Action level Reset the software
Record Yes
Check if the motor cable is
Check or replace the cable.
abnormal or broken
Motor coil error Replace the motor.
Hardware failure IGBT broken. Return to the factory for repair.
Cycle the power. If RoPd still occurs during operation, return to the factory for
Drive’s current feedback line error
repair.
90 Force to stop (FStp) Keypad forces PLC to Stop
Action and Reset

When Pr. 00-32=1, STOP button on the keypad is valid. When giving the STOP
Action level
command during the PLC operation, FStp fault will active.
Record Yes
Pr. 00-32=1: keypad STOP button
Check if it is necessary to set Pr. 00-32=0, so the keypad STOP button is invalid.
is valid
Press STOP button during PLC
Verify the timing of STOP function.
operation
14-48
93 CPU error 0 (TRAP) CPU crash
Action and Reset

Reset method Cannot reset, power off.
Reset condition N/A
Record Yes
Verify the wiring of control circuit, and the wiring/grounding of the main circuit to
Hardware interference prevent interference.
If TRAP fault still exists, return to the factory for repair.
Hardware failure Return to the factory for repair.
CPU is in an infinite loop Cycle the power. If the TRAP fault still exists, return to the factory for repair.
CANopen guarding
101 error (CGdE)
CANopen guarding error
Action and Reset

When CANopen Node Guarding detects that one of the slaves does not
Action level response, the CGdE fault will activate.
The upper unit sets factor and time during configuration.
Action time The time that upper unit sets during configuration
Record Yes
The guarding time is too short, or
Increase the guarding time (Index 100C) and detection times
less detection times
bad connected
14-49
CANopen heartbeat
102 error (CHbE)
CANopen heartbeat error
Action and Reset

When CANopen Heartbeat detects that one of the slaves does not
response, the CHbE fault will activate.
Action level
configuration.
The confirming time that upper unit sets for producer and consumer during
Action time
configuration.
Record Yes
The heartbeat time is too short Increase heartbeat time (Index 100C)
bad connected
14-50

104 (CbFE)
Action and Reset

Hardware When CANopen card is not installed, CbFE fault will occur.
When the master received wrong communication package, CbFE
fault will occur.
Action level
Software Too much interference on BUS
When the CAN_H and CAN_L communication cable is short, the
master will receive wrong package, and CbFE fault will occur.
Action level Immediately act
Record Yes
Check if the CANopen card is
Make sure the CANopen card is installed.
installed
Check if the CANopen speed
Reset CANopen speed (Pr. 09-37)
is correct
bad connected
CANopen index error

105 (CIdE)
CANopen index error
Action and Reset

Reset condition Upper unit sends a reset package to clear this fault
Record Yes
Reset CANopen Index (Pr. 00-02=7)
index
14-51
CANopen station
106 address error (CAdE)
CANopen station address error (only supports 1 – 127)
Action and Reset

Reset method Manual reset (Pr. 00-02=7)
Reset condition N/A
Record Yes
2. Reset CANopen (Pr. 00-02=7)
station address
CANopen memory
107 error (CFrE)
CANopen memory error
Action and Reset

When the user update firmware version of the control board, the FRAM internal
Action level
data will not be changed, and then CFrE fault will occur.
Record Pr. 00-21=3, the fault is recorded
CANopen internal memory error 2. Reset CANopen (Pr. 00-02=7)
14-52
InrCOM time-out error

111 (ictE)
Internal communication time-out
Action and Reset

Pr. 09-31=-1 – -10 (there is no -9), when the internal communication between
Action level
Slave and Master is abnormal, IctE fault will occur.
Reset method Automatically reset after the internal communication is normal
Reset condition N/A
Record Yes
The communication condition is
Verify the setting of Pr. 09-02 is the same as the setting of upper unit.
different with the upper unit
bad connected
PMLess shaft lock The drive has RUN command with output frequency, but
112 (SfLK) the permanent magnetic motor does not turn.
Action and Reset

Action time 3 sec.
Record Yes
Improper setting of the speed
Increase the setting value.
observer bandwidth
Motor shaft lock Remove causes of the motor shaft lock.
Motor error (e.g. demagnetization) Replace the motor with a new one.
14-53
Auto-tune error 1 No feedback current error when motor parameter

142 (AUE1) automatically detects
Action and Reset

Record Yes
Motor is not wired Wire the motor correctly
used as an open state on the Verify that the electromagnetic valve is closed.
output side of the drive (U/V/W).
Auto-tune error 2 Motor phase loss error when motor parameter

143 (AUE2) automatically detects
Action and Reset

Record Yes
Incorrect motor wiring Wire the motor correctly.
Motor error Check if the motor works normally.
used as an open state on the Verify that the three-phases of the electromagnetic valve are all closed.
output side of the drive (U/V/W).
Motor U/V/W wire error Check if the wires are broken.
14-54
Auto-tune error 3 No load current I0 measurement error when motor

144 (AUE3) parameter automatically detects.
Action and Reset

Record Yes
Incorrect settings for the motor
Check the settings for Pr. 05-01 / Pr. 05-13 / Pr. 05-34.
parameter (rated current)
Auto-tune error 4 Leakage inductance Lsigma measurement error when

148 (AUE4) motor parameter automatically detects.
Action and Reset

Record Yes
Incorrect setting of motor
Check the setting of Pr. 01-01.
parameters (base frequency)
C/B mismatch
170 (CBM)
Control board matching error
Action and Reset

Action level N/A
Action time Acts when turning on the drive
Reset method Cannot reset
Reset condition Cannot reset
Record Yes
Replace with the correct control board. If the CBM still exists, contact Delta for
Incorrect control board
further confirmation.
14-55
14-56
Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000
Chapter 15 CANopen Overview
15-1 CANopen Overview
15-2 Wiring for CANopen
15-3 CANopen Communication Interface Description
15-4 CANopen Supporting Index
15-5 CANopen Fault Code
15-6 CANopen LED Function
15-1
The built-in CANopen function is a kind of remote control. You can control the AC motor drive by
using CANopen protocol. CANopen is a CAN-based higher layer protocol that provides standardized
communication objects, including real-time data (Process Data Objects, PDO), configuration data
(Service Data Objects, SDO), and special functions (Time Stamp, Sync message, and Emergency
message). It also has network management data, including Boot-up message, NMT message, and Error
Control message. Refer to the CiA website http://www.can-cia.org/ for details. The content of this
instruction sheet may be revised without prior notice. Consult our distributors or download the most
updated version at http://www.delta.com.tw/industrialautomation
Delta CANopen supporting functions:
 Supports CAN2.0A Protocol
 Supports CANopen DS301 V4.02
 Supports DS402 V2.0.
Delta CANopen supporting services:
 PDO (Process Data Objects): PDO1–PDO4
 SDO (Service Data Objects):
Initiate SDO Download;
Initiate SDO Upload;
Abort SDO;
You can use the SDO message to configure the slave node and access the Object Dictionary in
every node.
 SOP (Special Object Protocol):
Support default COB-ID in Predefined Master/Slave Connection Set in DS301 V4.02;
Support SYNC service;
Support Emergency service.
 NMT (Network Management):
Support NMT module control;
Support NMT Error control;
Support Boot-up.
Delta CANopen not supporting service:
 Time Stamp service
15-2
15-1 CANopen Overview

CANopen Protocol
CANopen is a CAN-based higher layer protocol, and was designed for motion-oriented machine
control networks such as handling systems. Version 4.02 of CANopen (CiA DS301) is standardized as
EN50325-4. The CANopen specifications cover the application layer and communication profile (CiA
DS301), as well as a framework for programmable devices (CiA DS302), recommendations for cables
and connectors (CiA DS303-1), SI units, and prefix representations (CiA DS303-2).
Device Profile CiA Device Profile CiA Device Profile CiA

DSP-401 DSP-404 DSP-XXX
OSI Layer 7
Application Communication Profile CiA DS-301
OSI Layer 2
CAN Controller CAN 2.0A
Data Link Layer
+ -
OSI Layer 1
Physical Layer + - ISO 11898
CAN bus
RJ45 Pin Definition
8~1
plug
PIN Signal Description

1 CAN_H CAN_H bus line (dominant high)
2 CAN_L CAN_L bus line (dominant low)
3 CAN_GND Ground / 0V /V-
6 CAN_GND Ground / 0V /V-
15-3
CANopen Communication Protocol

It has services as follows:
 NMT (Network Management Object)
 SDO (Service Data Objects)
 PDO (Process Data Object)
 EMCY (Emergency Object)
NMT (Network Management Object)
The Network Management (NMT) follows a Master/Slave structure for executing NMT service.
A network has only one NMT master, and the other nodes are slaves. All CANopen nodes have a
present NMT state, and the NMT master can control the state of the slave nodes. Following shows
the state diagram of a node:
(1)
Initializing
(15)
Reset Application (9)

(10)
(11)
(16)
Reset Communication
(2)F
(14)
Pre-Operation ABCD
(3) (4) (5) (7)
(13)
Stopped AB
(6) (8)
(12)
Operation ABCD
(1) After power is applied, start in the auto-initialization state

(2) Automatically enter the pre-operational state A: NMT
(3) (6) Start remote node B: Node Guard
(4) (7) Enter the pre-operational state C: SDO
(5) (8) Stop remote node D: Emergency
(9) (10) (11) Reset node E: PDO
(12) (13) (14) Reset communication F: Boot-up
(15) Automatically enter reset application state
(16) Automatically enter reset communication state
Initializing Pre-Operational Operational Stopped

PDO ○
SDO ○ ○
SYNC ○ ○
Time Stamp ○ ○
EMCY ○ ○
Boot-up ○
NMT ○ ○ ○
15-4
SDO (Service Data Objects)
Use SDO to access the Object Dictionary in every CANopen node using the Client/Server model.
One SDO has two COB-IDs (request SDO and response SDO) to upload or download data between
two nodes. There is no data limit for SDOs to transfer data, but it must transfer data by segment when
the data exceeds four bytes with an end signal in the last segment.
The Object Dictionary (OD) is a group of objects in a CANopen node. Every node has an OD in
the system, and OD contains all parameters describing the device and its network behavior. The
access path in the OD is the index and sub-index; each object has a unique index in the OD, and has
a sub-index if necessary.
PDO (Process Data Objects)
PDO communication can be described by the producer/ consumer model. Each node of the
network listens to the messages of the transmission node and distinguishes whether the message
has to be processed or not after receiving the message. A PDO can be transmitted from one device
to one another device or to many other devices. Every PDO has two PDO services: a TxPDO and an
RxPDO. PDOs are transmitted in a non-confirmed mode. All transmission types are listed in the
following table:
PDO
Type Number
Cyclic Acyclic Synchronous Asynchronous RTR only
0 ○ ○
1–240 ○ ○
241–251 Reserved
252 ○ ○
253 ○ ○
254 ○
255 ○
Type number 0 indicates the synchronous aperiodic message between two PDO transmissions.
Type number 1–240 indicates the number of SYNC message between two PDO transmissions.
Type number 252 indicates the data is updated (but not sent) immediately after receiving SYNC.
Type number 253 indicates the data is updated immediately after receiving RTR.
Type number 254: Delta CANopen does not support this transmission format.
Type number 255 indicates the data is an asynchronous aperiodic transmission.
All PDO transmission data must be mapped to index via Object Dictionary.
EMCY (Emergency Object)

When errors occur inside the hardware, an emergency object is triggered. An emergency object
is only sent when an error occurs. As long as there is nothing wrong with the hardware, there is no
emergency object warning of an error message.
15-5
15-2 Wiring for CANopen

Use an external adapter card EMC-COP01 for CANopen wiring to connect CANopen to a
C2000. The link uses a RJ45 cable. You must terminate the two farthest ends with 120 Ω
terminating resistors as shown in the picture below.
15-6
15-3 CANopen Communication Interface Descriptions

15-3-1 CANopen Control Mode Selection
There are two control modes for CANopen: the DS402 standard (Pr. 09-40 set to 1) is the default,
and the Delta’s standard setting (Pr. 09-40 set to 0). There are two control modes according to
Delta’s standard. One is the old control mode (Pr. 09-30 = 0); this control mode can only control the
motor drive under frequency control. The other mode is a new standard (Pr. 09-30 = 1); this new
control mode allows the motor drive to be controlled under multiple modes. The C2000 currently
supports speed, torque, position and home mode. The following table shows the control mode
definitions:
CANopen Control Mode

Control Speed Torque Position Home
Mode
Index Description Index Description Index Description Index Description
Selection
Target
Target Torque Target
DS402 6042-00 Rotating 6071-00 607A-00 ----- -----
(%) Position
standard Speed (RPM)
Pr. 09-40=1 Max. Torque
----- ----- 6072-00 ----- ----- ----- -----
Limit (%)
Delta Standard
Target
(Old definition)
2020-02 Rotating ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
Pr. 09-40=1,
Speed (Hz)
Pr. 09-30=0
Target
Delta Standard Target Torque Target
2060-03 Rotating 2060-07 2060-05 ----- -----
(New definition) (%) Position
Speed (Hz)
Pr. 09-40=0,
Torque Limit
Pr. 09-30=1 2060-04 2060-08 Speed Limit (Hz) ----- ----- ----- -----
(%)
CANopen Control Mode Operation Control

Selection Index Description
DS402 standard 6040-00 Operation Command
Pr. 09-40=1 ----- -----
Delta Standard (Old definition)
2020-01 Operation Command
Pr. 09-40=1, Pr. 09-30=0
Delta Standard (New definition) 2060-01 Operation Command
Pr. 09-40=0, Pr. 09-30=1 ----- -----
CANopen Control Mode Other

Selection Index Description
DS402 standard 605A-00 Quick stop processing mode
Pr. 09-40=1 605C-00 Disable operation processing mode
Delta Standard (Old definition)
----- -----
Pr. 09-40=1, Pr. 09-30=0
Delta Standard (New definition) ----- -----
Pr. 09-40=0, Pr. 09-30=1 ----- -----
You can use some indices in either DS402 or Delta’s standard.
For example:
1. Indices that are defined as RO attributes.
2. The corresponding index of available parameter groups: (2000-00–200B-XX)
3. Accelerating / Decelerating Index: 604F 6050
15-7
15-3-2 DS402 Standard Control Mode
15-3-2-1 Related set up for an AC motor drive (following the DS402 standard)
If you want to use the DS402 standard to control the motor drive, follow these steps:
1. Wire the hardware (refer to Section 15-2 Wiring for CANopen)
2. Set the operation source: set Pr.00-21 to 3 for CANopen communication card control. (Run/
stop, forward/ reverse run…etc.)
3. Set the frequency source: set Pr.00-20 to 6. Choose the source for the Frequency command
from the CANopen setting.
4. Set the torque source: set Pr. 11-33. Choose the source for the Torque command from the
CANopen setting.
5. Set the position source: set Pr. 11-40. Choose the source for the Position command from the
CANopen setting.
6. Set DS402 for the control mode: Pr. 09-40=1
7. Set the CANopen station: set the CANopen station (range 1–127, 0 is the disable CANopen
slave function) with Pr.09-36. Note: set Pr.00-02 = 7 to reset if the station number error CAdE
or CANopen memory error CFrE appears.
8. Set the CANopen baud rate: set Pr. 09-37 (CANBUS Baud Rate: 1Mbps(0), 500Kbps(1),
250Kbps(2), 125Kbps(3), 100Kbps(4) and 50Kbps(5))
9. Set the multiple input functions to Quick Stop. You can also choose enable or disable; the
default setting is disabled. If it is necessary to enable the function, set MI terminal to 53 in one
of the following parameters: Pr. 02.01–Pr. 02.08 or Pr. 02.26–Pr. 02.31. (Note: This function is
available in DS402 only.)
15-3-2-2 The status of the motor drive (by following DS402 standard)
According to the DS402 definition, the motor drive is divided into 3 blocks and 9 statuses as
described below.
3 blocks
1. Power Disable: without PWM output

2. Power Enable: with PWM output
3. Fault: One or more errors have occurred.
9 status
1. Start: Power On
2. Not ready to switch on: the motor drive is initiating.
3. Switch On Disable: occurs when the motor drive finishes initiating.
4. Ready to Switch On: warming up before running.
5. Switch On: the motor drive has the PWM output, but the reference command is not effective.
6. Operation Enable: able to control normally.
7. Quick Stop Active: when there is a Quick Stop request, stop running the motor drive.
8. Fault Reaction Active: the motor drive detects conditions that might trigger error(s).
9. Fault: One or more errors have occurred in the motor drive.
15-8
When the motor drive turns on and finishes the initiation, it remains in Ready to Switch On status.
To control the operation of the motor drive, change to Operation Enable status. To do this, set the
control word’s bit0–bit3 and bit7 of the Index 6040H and pair with Index Status Word (Status Word
0X6041). The control steps and index definition are described below:
Index 6040
15–9 8 7 6~4 3 2 1 0
Enable Enable
Reserved Halt Fault Reset Operation Quick Stop Switch On
operation Voltage
Index 6041
15–14 13–12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Internal
Target Switch on Quick Voltage Operation Ready to
Reserved Operation limit Remote Reserved Warning Fault Switch on
reached disabled stop enabled enable switch on
active
Power
Start Fault Reaction Active
Disable
X0XX1111
Not Ready to Switch On

X0XX0000 Fault
X0XX1000
XXXXXXX
Switch On Disable
0XXXXX0X X1XX0000
0XXXXX0X
0XXXX110 or
and 0XXXX01X
Disable QStop=1 or
Disable QStop=0
Ready to Switch On
0XXXXX0X
X01X0001 or
0XXXX01X Fault
0XXXX111 0XXXX110 or
Disable QStop=0 Power
Switch On
Enable
X01X0011 0XXXXX0X
or
0XXX1111 0XXXX111 0XXXX01X Fout=0
or
0XXXX110 Disable QStop=0
Operation Enable Quick Stop Active
X01X0111 0XXXX01X X00X0111
and
Disable QStop=1
Set command 6040=0xE, then set another command 6040=0xF. Then you can switch the
motor drive to Operation Enable. The Index 605A determines the lines from Operation Enable when
the control mode changes from Quick Stop Active. When the setting value is 1–3, both lines are
active, but when the setting value of 605A is not 1–3, once the motor drive is switched to Quick Stop
Active, it is not able to switch back to Operation Enable.)
15-9
PDO
Index Sub Definition Default R/W Size Unit Mode note
Map
0: Disable drive function
1: Slow down on slow down ramp
2: Slow down on quick stop ramp
5: Slow down on slow down ramp
Quick stop
605Ah 0 2 RW S16 No and stay in QUICK STOP
option code
6: Slow down on quick stop ramp
and stay in QUICK STOP
7: Slow down on the current limit
and stay in Quick stop
When the control section switches from Power Enable to Power Disable, use 605C to define the stop
method.
PDO
Index Sub Definition Default R/W Size Unit Mode note
Map
Disable
1: Slow down with slow down
605Ch 0 operation 1 RW S16 No
ramp; disable the drive
option code
function
15-3-2-3 Various mode control method (by following DS402 standard)

The control mode of C2000 currently supports speed, torque, position and home control, and are
described as below:
Speed mode
1. Set C2000 to speed control mode: set Index 6060 to 2.
(The Index 6071 is available for torque limit under the speed control mode)
2. Switch to Operation Enable mode: set 6040=0xE, and then set 6040 = 0xF.
3. Set the target frequency: Set target frequency of 6042, since the operation unit of 6042 is rpm, a
transform is required:
n: rotation speed (rpm) (rounds/minute)
120
nf p: motor’s pole number (Pole)
p
f: rotation frequency (Hz)
For example:
Set 6042H = 1500 (rpm), if the number of poles is 4 (Pr. 05-04 or Pr. 05-16), then the motor
drive's operation frequency is 1500/ (120/4) = 50Hz. The 6042 is defined as a signed operation.
The plus or minus sign means to rotate clockwise or counter clockwise
4. To set acceleration and deceleration: Use 604F (Acceleration) and 6050 (Deceleration).
5. Trigger an ACK signal: in the speed control mode, the bit 6–4 of Index 6040 needs to be controlled.
It is defined as below:
Index 6040
SUM
bit 6 bit 5 bit 4
Speed mode
1 0 1 Locked at the current signal.
(Index 6060=2)
1 1 1 Run to reach targeting signal.
Other Decelerate to 0Hz.
15-10
NOTE 01: Read 6043 to get the current rotation speed. (Unit: rpm)
NOTE 02: Read bit 10 of 6041 to find if the rotation speed has reached the targeting value. (0: Not
reached; 1: Reached)
Torque mode
1. Set AC motor drive to the torque mode: set Index 6060 = 4.
(The Index 6042 is available for speed limit under the torque control mode)
2. Switch to Operation Enable mode: set 6040 = 0xE, and then set 6040 = 0xF.
3. To set targeting torque: set 6071 as targeting torque and 6072 as the largest output torque.
Index 6040
Torque mode SUM
bit6 bit5 bit4
(Index 6060=4)
X X X RUN to reach the targeting torque.
15-11
NOTE: The standard DS402 does not regulate the maximum speed limit. Therefore, if the motor drive
defines the control mode of DS402, the highest speed will go with the setting of Pr. 11-36 to
Pr. 11-38.
NOTE 01: Read 6077 to get the current torque. (Unit: 0.1%).
NOTE02: Read bit10 of 6041 to find if the torque has reached the targeting value. (0: Not reached; 1:
Reached)
Position mode
1. Set the parameter of a trapezium curve to define position control (Pr. 11-43 Max. Frequency of
Point-to-Point Position Control, Pr. 11-44 Accel. Time of Point-to-Point Position Control and Pr.
11-45 Decel. Time of Point-to-Point Position Control)
2. Set C2000 to position control mode: set Index 6060 = 1.
4. Set targeting position: set 607A as the targeting position.
5. Trigger an ACK signal: set 6040 = 0x0F, and then set 6040 = 0x1F. (Pulse On).
NOTE 01: Read 6064 to get the current position.

NOTE 02: Read bit10 of 6041 to find if the position reaches the targeting position. (0: Not reached, 1:
reached)
NOTE 03: Read bit11 of 6041 to find if the position is over the limited area. (0: in the limit, 1: over the
limit)
Home mode
1. Set Pr. 00-12 to choose a home method.
2. Set the left and right limits correspond to the position of MI terminal.
3. Switch to Home mode: set Index 6060 = 6.
5. To trigger an ACK signal: set 6040 = 0x0F, and then set 6040 = 0x1F (Pulse On, and the motor
drive will be back to home.)
NOTE 01: Read bit12 of 6041 to find if the home mode is completed. (0: Not reached, 1: reached)
15-12
15-3-3 Using the Delta Standard (Old definition, only supports speed mode)
15-3-3-1 Various mode control method (Delta Old Standard)
Follow the steps below:
1. Wire the hardware (refer to Section 15-2 Wiring for CANopen).

2. Set the operation source: set Pr. 00-21 to 3 for CANopen communication card control. (Run/
stop, Forward/ reverse run…., etc.)
3. Set the frequency source: set Pr. 00-20 to 6. Choose source for the Frequency Commend from
the CANopen setting.
4. Set Delta Standard (Old definition, only supports speed mode) as the control mode: Pr. 09-40 =
0 and Pr. 09-30 = 0.
5. Set the CANopen station: set Pr. 09-36; the range is among 1–127. When Pr. 09-36=0, the
CANopen slave function is disabled. Note: If an error appears (CAdE or CANopen memory error)
as you complete the station setting, set Pr.00-02 = 7 to reset.
15-3-3-2 By speed mode

1. Set the target frequency: set 2020-02, the unit is Hz, with 2 decimal places. For example, 1000 is
10.00Hz.
2. Operation control: set 2020-01 = 0002H for running, and set 2020-01 = 0001H for stopping.
15-13
15-3-4 Using Delta Standard (New Definition)
15-3-4-1 Related set up for an AC motor drive (Delta New Standard)
Follow the steps below:
1. Wire the hardware (refer to Section 15-2 Wiring for CANopen).

2. Set the operation source: set Pr. 00-21 to 3 for CANopen communication card control. (Run/
stop, Forward/ reverse run…., etc.)
3. Set the frequency source: set Pr. 00-20 to 6. Choose the source of the Frequency Command
from CANopen setting.
4. Set the torque source: set Pr. 11-33. Choose the source of the Torque Command from CANopen
setting.)
5. Set the position source: set Pr.11-40=3. Choose the source of the Position Command from
CANopen setting.)
6. Set Delta Standard (New definition) as the control mode: Pr. 09-40 = 0 and Pr. 09-30 = 0.
7. Set the CANopen station: set Pr. 09-36; the range is among 1–127. When Pr. 09-36=0, the
CANopen slave function is disabled. (Note: If an error appears (CadE or CANopen memory
error) as you complete the station setting, set Pr.00-02 = 7 to reset.
15-3-4-2 Various mode control method (Delta New Standard)
Speed Mode
1. Set C2000 to speed control mode: set Index6060 = 2.
2. Set the target frequency: set 2060-03, unit is Hz, with 2 decimal places. For example, 1000 is
10.00Hz.
3. Operation control: set 2060-01 = 008H for Server on, and set 2060-01 = 0081H for running.
15-14
Torque Mode
1. Set C2000 to torque control mode: set Index 6060 = 4.
2. Set the target torque: set 2060-07, unit as %, and the value is one decimal place. For example,
100 is 10.0%.
3. Operation control: set 2060-01 = 0080H starts excitation, and the drive immediately runs at the
target torque.
Note01: Read 2061-07 for the current torque (unit is 0.1%).

Note02: Read bit0 of 2061-01 to find if the torque has reached the set value (0: Not reached, 1:
Reached).
Note 03: If the speed of the drive reaches the speed limit when torque outputs, you may reduce the
output torque in order to ensure that the speed stays within the limits.
Position Mode
1. Set the parameter of a trapezium curve to define position control (Pr. 11-43 Max. Position Control
Frequency), Pr. 11-44 Accel. Time of Position Control, Pr. 11-45 Decel. Time of Position Control)
2. Set C2000 to position control mode, set Index 6060 = 1.
3. Set 2060-01 = 0080h, then motor drive starts excitation.
4. Set target position: set 2060-05 = target position.
5. Set 2060-01 =0081h to trigger the motor drive runs to the target position.
6. Repeat step 3 to step 5 to move to another position.
15-15
NOTE01: Read 2061-05 to get the current position.

NOTE02: Read bit0 of 2061 to find if the position has reached to the target position. (0: Not reached,
1: Reached).
Home Mode
1. Set Pr. 00-12 to choose the method to return home.
2. Set the left and right limits correspond to the position of MI terminal.
3. Switch to home mode: set Index 6060 = 6.
4. Set 2060-01 = 0080h, then the motor drive starts excitation.
5. Set the ACK signal: set 2060-01 = 0081h, then the motor drive starts to go back home.
NOTE 01: Read bit12 of 6041 to find if returning home is completed. (0: Not reached, 1: Reached).
15-16
15-3-5 DI/DO AI/AO are controlled through CANopen
To control the DO/AO of the motor drive through CANopen, follow the steps below:
1. Define the DO to be controlled by CANopen. For example, set Pr. 02-14 to control RY2.
2. Define the AO to be controlled by CANopen. For example, set Pr. 03-23 to control AFM2.
3. Control the mapping index of CANopen. To control DO, use control index 2026-41. To control AO,
you will need to control 2026-AX. To set RY2 as ON, set bit1 of Index 2026-41 =1, then RY2
outputs 1. To control AFM2 output = 50.00%, set Index 2026-A2 =5000, then AFM2 outputs 50%.
The following table shows the mapping of CANopen DI/ DO/ AI/ AO:
DI:
Terminal Related Parameters R/W Mapping Index
FWD == RO 2026-01 bit0
REV == RO 2026-01 bit1
MI1 == RO 2026-01 bit2
MI2 == RO 2026-01 bit3
MI3 == RO 2026-01 bit4
MI4 == RO 2026-01 bit5
MI5 == RO 2026-01 bit6
MI6 == RO 2026-01 bit7
MI7 == RO 2026-01 bit8
MI8 == RO 2026-01 bit9
MI10 == RO 2026-01 bit10
MI11 == RO 2026-01 bit11
MI12 == RO 2026-01 bit12
MI13 == RO 2026-01 bit13
MI14 == RO 2026-01 bit14
MI15 == RO 2026-01 bit15
15-17
DO：
RY1 Pr. 02-13 = 50 RW 2026-41 bit0
RY2 Pr. 02-14 = 50 RW 2026-41 bit1
MO1 Pr. 02-16 = 50 RW 2026-41 bit3
MO2 Pr. 02-17 = 50 RW 2026-41 bit4
MO10 2026-41 bit5
Pr. 02-36 = 50 RW
RY10 2026-41 bit5
MO11 2026-41 bit6
Pr. 02-37 = 50 RW
RY11 2026-41 bit6
RY12 Pr. 02-38 = 50 RW 2026-41 bit7
RY13 Pr. 02-39 = 50 RW 2026-41 bit8
RY14 Pr. 02-40 = 50 RW 2026-41 bit9
RY15 Pr. 02-41 = 50 RW 2026-41 bit10
AI：
AVI == RO Value of 2026-61
ACI == RO Value of 2026-62
AUI == RO Value of 2026-63
AO：
AFM1 Pr. 03-20 = 20 RW Value of 2026-A1
AFM2 Pr. 03-23 = 20 RW Value of 2026-A2
15-18
15-4 CANopen Supporting Index

C2000 Index:
The parameter index corresponds as shown in this example:
Index sub-Index
2000H + Group member+1
For example:
Pr. 10-15 (Encoder Slip Error Treatment)
Group member
10(0AH) - 15(0FH)
Index = 2000H + 0AH = 200A

Sub Index = 0FH + 1H = 10H
C2000 Control Index:
Delta Standard Mode (Old Definition)

Index Sub Definition Default R/W Size Note
0 Number 3 R U8
bit1–0 00B: disable
01B: stop
10B: disable
11B: JOG Enable
bit3–2 Reserved
bit5–4 00B:disable
01B: Direction forward
10B: Reverse
11B: Switch Direction
bit7–6 00B: 1st step Accel. /Decel.
01B: 2nd step Accel. /Decel.
10B: 3rd step Accel. /Decel.
11B: 4th step Accel. /Decel.
bit11–8 0000B: Master speed
0001B: 1st step speed
0010B: 2nd step speed
1 Control word 0 RW U16
2020H 0011B: 3rd step speed
0100B: 4th step speed
bit12 1: Enable the function of
bit6-11
bit 15 Reserved
Freq. command
2 0 RW U16
(XXX.XXHz)
15-19

bit0 1: E.F. ON
bit1 1: Reset
3 Other trigger 0 RW U16
bit2 1: Base Block (B.B) ON
bit15–3 Reserved
2021H 0 Number 10 R U8
High byte: Warn code
1 Error code 0 R U16
Low byte: Error code
bit1–0 00B: stop
01B: decelerate to stop
10B: waiting for operation
command
11B: in operation
bit2 1: JOG command
bit4–3 00B: Run forward
01B: switch from run in reverse
to run forward
10B: switch from run forward to
run in reverse
11B: Run in reverse
bit7–5 Reserved
2 AC motor drive status 0 R U16
bit8 1: Master Frequency command
controlled by communication
interface
bit9 1: Master Frequency command
controlled by analog signal
input
bit10 1: Operation command
controlled by communication
interface
bit11 1: Parameter lock
bit12 1: Enable the digital keypad
copy parameter function
bit15–13 Reserved
Freq. command
3 0 R U16
(XXX.XXHz)
4 Output freq. (XXX.XXHz) 0 R U16
5 Output current (XX.XA) 0 R U16
6 DC bus voltage (XXX.XV) 0 R U16
7 Output voltage (XXX.XV) 0 R U16
The current segment run by
8 the multi-segment speed 0 R U16
commend
9 Reserved 0 R U16
A Display counter value（c） 0 R U16
Display output power angle
B 0 R U16
(XX.X°)
Display output torque
C 0 R U16
(XXX.X%)
Display actual motor speed
D 0 R U16
(rpm)
Number of PG feedback
E 0 R U16
pulses (0–65535)
Number of PG2 pulse
F 0 R U16
commands (0–65535)
10 Power output (X.XXXkWh) 0 R U16
Multi-function display
17 0 R U16
(Pr.00-04)
2022H 0 Reserved 0 R U16
1 Display output current 0 R U16
2 Display counter value 0 R U16
15-20

Display actual output
3 0 R U16
frequency (XXX.XXHz)
Display DC-BUS voltage
4 0 R U16
(XXX.XV)
Display output voltage
5 0 R U16
(XXX.XV)
Display output power angle
6 0 R U16
(XX.X°)
7 Display output power in kW 0 R U16
Display actual motor speed
8 0 R U16
(rpm)
Display estimate output
9 0 R U16
torque (XXX.X%)
A Display PG feedback 0 R U16
Display PID feedback value
B after enabling PID function 0 R U16
in % (To 2 decimal places)
Display signal of AVI analog
C input terminal, 0–10V 0 R U16
corresponds to 0–100% (To
2 decimal places)
Display signal of ACI analog
input terminal,
D 4–20mA/0–10V 0 R U16
corresponds to 0–100% (To
2 decimal places)
Display signal of AUI analog
E input terminal, -10V–10V 0 R U16
corresponds to -100–100%
(To 2 decimal places)
Display the IGBT
F temperature of drive power 0 R U16
module in oC
Display the temperature of
10 0 R U16
capacitance in oC
The status of digital input
11 0 R U16
(ON/OFF), refer to Pr.02-12
The status of digital output
12 0 R U16
(ON/OFF), refer to Pr.02-18
Display the multi-step
13 0 R U16
speed that is executing
The corresponding CPU pin
14 0 R U16
status of digital input
The corresponding CPU pin
15 0 R U16
status of digital output
Number of actual motor
revolutions (PG1 of PG
card). Starts from 9 when
16 the actual operation 0 R U16
direction is changed, or the
keypad display at stop is 0.
Max. is 65535
Pulse input frequency (PG2
17 0 R U16
of PG card)
Pulse input position (PG
18 card PG2), maximum 0 R U16
setting is 65535.
Position command tracing
19 0 R U16
error
Display times of counter
1A 0 R U16
overload (0.00–100.00%)
1B Display GFF in % 0 R U16
15-21

Display DC BUS voltage
1C 0 R U16
ripples (Unit: VDC)
Display PLC register D1043
1D 0 R U16
data
Display Pole of Permanent
1E 0 R U16
Magnet Motor
User page displays the
1F 0 R U16
value in physical measure
20 Output Value of Pr.00-05 0 R U16
Number of motor turns
21 0 R U16
when drive operates
22 Operation position of motor 0 R U16
23 Fan speed of the drive 0 R U16
Control mode of the drive 0:
24 0 R U16
speed mode 1: torque mode
Carrier frequency of the
25 0 R U16
drive
26 Reserved
27 Motor status
Output positive/ negative
28 torque of motor drive
calculation
29 Torque command
2A kWh display
2B PG2 pulse input low-word
2C PG2 pulse input high-word
Motor actual position
2D
low-word
Motor actual position
2E
high-word
2F PID reference target
30 PID bias value
31 PID output frequency
CANopen Remote IO mapping

Index Sub R/W Definition
01h R Each bit corresponds to the different input terminals
02h R Each bit corresponds to the different input terminals
03h–40h R Reserved
41h RW Each bit corresponds to the different output terminals
42h–60h R Reserved
61h R AVI proportional value (%)
62h R ACI proportional value (%)
63h R AUI proportional value (%)
2026H 64h–6Ah R Reserved
6Bh R Extension card AI10, 0.0–100.0% (EMC-A22A)
6Ch R Extension card AI11, 0.0–100.0% (EMC-A22A)
6Dh–A0h R Reserved
A1h RW AFM1 output proportional value (%)
A2h RW AFM2 output proportional value (%)
A3h–AAh RW Reserved
ABh RW Extension card AO10, 0.0–100.0% (EMC-A22A)
ACh RW Extension card AO11, 0.0–100.0% (EMC-A22A)
15-22
Index
2026-01
1 FWD REV MI1 MI2 MI3 MI4 MI5 MI6 MI7 MI8
2 MI10 MI11 MI12 MI13 MI14 MI15
3 MI10 MI11 MI12 MI13
1: Control broad I/O (Standard)
2: Add external card, EMC-D611A
Index
2026-41
1 RY1 RY2 MO1 MO2
2 MO10 MO11
3 RY10 RY11 RY12 RY13 RY14 RY15
1: Control broad I/O (Standard)
3: Add external card, EMC-R6AA
Delta Standard Mode (New definition)

Descriptions
Index sub R/W Size Speed Mode Position Mode Home Mode Torque Mode
bit DefinitionPriority
00h R U8 0: Stop Homing
0: fcmd =0 Pulse 1: Position Pulse 1: Return
0 Ack 4
1: fcmd = Fset(Fpid) control to home
0: FWD run command
1 Dir 4
1: REV run command
0: Relative move
2 1: Absolute move
The torque target
of internal
0: drive run till target decoding is set
speed is attained as 0, but the
3 Halt 3
1: drive stop by display of outside
declaration setting torque target will
remain its outside
setting.
0: drive run till target
speed is attained
01h RW U16 4 Hold 4 1: frequency
stop at current
frequency
2060h 0: JOG OFF
5 JOG 4
Pulse 1: JOG RUN
6 Qstop 2 Quick Stop Quick Stop Quick Stop Quick Stop
0: Power OFF 0: Power OFF 0: Power OFF 0: Power OFF
7 Power 1
1: Power ON 1: Power ON 1: Power ON 1: Power ON
8 Reserved
0->1: Absolute 0->1: Absolute 0->1: Absolute 0->1: Absolute
9 Ext Cmd2 4
position cleared position cleared position cleared position cleared
10–14 Reserved
Pulse 1: Fault code Pulse 1: Fault Pulse 1: Fault Pulse 1: Fault
15 RST
cleared code cleared code cleared code cleared
Mode 1: P2P position
02h RW U16 Cmd
0: Speed mode
mode
3: Home mode 2: Torque mode
Speed command
03h RW U16 (unsigned decimal)
04h RW U16
Position
05h RW S32 command
15-23
Descriptions
Index sub R/W Size Speed Mode Position Mode Home Mode Torque Mode
bit DefinitionPriority
06h RW
Torque
07h RW U16 command
(signed decimal)
Speed limit
08h RW U16 (unsigned
decimal)
0 Arrive Frequency attained Position attained Homing complete Torque attained
0: Motor FWD 0: Motor FWD 0: Motor FWD
0: Motor FWD run
1 Dir
1: Motor REV run
run run run
1: Motor REV run 1: Motor REV run 1: Motor REV run
2 Warn Warning Warning Warning Warning
01h R U16 3 Error Error detected Error detected Error detected Error detected
4
5 JOG JOG JOG JOG JOG
6 Qstop Quick stop Quick stop Quick stop Quick stop
2061h
7 Power On Switch ON Switch ON Switch ON Switch ON
15–8
02h R
Actual output Actual output Actual output Actual output
03h R U16 frequency frequency frequency frequency
04h R
Actual position Actual position Actual position Actual position
05h R S32 (absolute) (absolute) (absolute) (absolute)
06h R
07h R S16 Actual torque Actual torque Actual torque Actual torque
DS402 Standard
PDO
Index Sub Definition Default R/W Size Unit Mode Note
Map
0: No action
6007h 0 Abort connection option code 2 RW S16 Yes 2: Disable Voltage
3: Quick stop
603Fh 0 Error code 0 R0 U16 Yes
6040h 0 Control word 0 RW U16 Yes
6041h 0 Status word 0 R0 U16 Yes
6042h 0 vl target velocity 0 RW S16 rpm Yes vl
6043h 0 vl velocity demand 0 RO S16 rpm Yes vl
6044h 0 vl control effort 0 RO S16 rpm Yes vl
604Fh 0 vl ramp function time 10000 RW U32 1ms Yes vl
Unit must be 100ms, and
6050h 0 vl slow down time 10000 RW U32 1ms Yes vl
check if the setting is 0.
6051h 0 vl quick stop time 1000 RW U32 1ms Yes vl
1: Slow down on slow down
ramp
2: Slow down on quick stop
ramp
605Ah 0 Quick stop option code 2 RW S16 No 5: Slow down on slow down
ramp and stay in QUICK
STOP
6: Slow down on quick stop
ramp and stay in QUICK
STOP
Disable operation option 1: Slow down with slow down
605Ch 0 1 RW S16 No
code ramp; disable the drive
function
1: Profile Position Mode
6060h 0 Mode of operation 2 RW S8 Yes 2: Velocity Mode
4: Torque Profile Mode
15-24
PDO
Index Sub Definition Default R/W Size Unit Mode Note
Map
6: Homing Mode
6061h 0 Mode of operation display 2 RO S8 Yes Same as above
6064h 0 pp Position actual value 0 RO S32 Yes pp
6071h 0 tq Target torque 0 RW S16 0.1% Yes tq Valid unit: 1%
6072h 0 tq Max torque 150 RW U16 0.1% No tq Valid unit: 1%
6075h 0 tq Motor rated current 0 RO U32 mA No tq
6077h 0 tq torque actual value 0 RO S16 0.1% Yes tq
6078h 0 tq current actual value 0 RO S16 0.1% Yes tq
6079h 0 tq DC link circuit voltage 0 RO U32 mV Yes tq
607Ah 0 pp Target position 0 RW S32 1 Yes pp
15-25
15-5 CANopen Fault Code
*: Refer to setting value of Pr.06-17–Pr. 06-22

CANopen
ID CANopen
Display Fault code Description fault register
No.* fault code
(bit 0–7)
1 0001H Over-current during acceleration 1 2213 H
2 0002H Over-current during deceleration 1 2213 H
3 0003H Over-current during steady operation 1 2214H
Ground fault. When one of the output

terminals is grounded, the short
circuit current is more than 50% of
4 0004H 1 2240H
AC motor drive rated current.
NOTE: The short circuit protection is
provided for the AC motor drive protection,
not to protect the user.
Short-circuit is detected between

5 0005H upper bridge and lower bridge of the 1 2250H
IGBT module.
Over-current at stop. Hardware

6 0006H 1 2214H
failure in current detection
Over-current during acceleration.

7 0007H 2 3210H
Hardware failure in current detection
Over-current during deceleration.

8 0008H 2 3210H
Hardware failure in current detection.
15-26
CANopen
ID CANopen
No.* fault code
(bit 0–7)
DC BUS over-voltage at constant

9 0009H 2 3210H
speed
Over-voltage at stop. Hardware

10 000AH 2 3210H
failure in voltage detection
DCBUS voltage is less than Pr.06-00

11 000BH 2 3220H
during acceleration.

12 000CH 2 3220H
during deceleration.

13 000DH 2 3220H
at constant speed.

14 000EH 2 3220H
at stop
15 000FH Phase Loss Protection 2 3130H
IGBT is overheated above the

protection level.
16 0010H 3 4310H
1–15HP: 90°C
20–100HP: 100°C
Heat sink overheat

17 0011H 3 4310H
Heat sink temperature exceeds 90°C
18 0012H IGBT over-heating protection error 3 FF00H
Temperature detection circuit error

19 0013H (capacity module) 3 FF01H
CAP NTC
15-27
CANopen
ID CANopen
No.* fault code
(bit 0–7)
Overload; the AC motor drive detects
excessive drive output current.
21 0015H 1 2310H
NOTE: The AC motor drive can withstand up
to 150% of the rated current for a maximum
of 60 seconds.
22 0016H Electronic thermal relay 1 protection 1 2310H
23 0017H Electronic thermal relay 2 protection 1 2310H
Motor overheating: the AC motor

24 0018H drive internal temperature exceeds 3 FF20H
the setting for Pr. 06-30 (PTC level).
When the output current exceeds the

26 001AH over-torque detection level (Pr. 06-07 3 8311H
or Pr. 06-10) and exceeds Pr. 06-08

or Pr. 06-11; when Pr. 06-06 or Pr.
27 001BH 06-09 is set as 2 or 4, the keypad 3 8311H

displays these two fault codes.
28 001CH Low current detection 1 8321H
29 001DH Home limit error 1 7320H
30 001EH Cannot program internal EEPROM 5 5530H
31 001FH Cannot read internal EEPROM 5 5530H
33 0021H U-phase current error 1 FF04H
15-28
CANopen
ID CANopen
No.* fault code
(bit 0–7)
34 0022H V-phase current error 1 FF05H
35 0023H W-phase current error 1 FF06H
36 0024H cc (current clamp) hardware error 5 FF07H
37 0025H oc hardware error 5 FF08H
38 0026H ov hardware error 5 FF09H
39 0027H GFF hardware error 5 FF0AH
40 0028H Motor parameters auto-tuning error 1 FF21H
41 0029H PID loss (ACI) 7 FF22H
42 002AH PG feedback error 7 7301H
43 002BH PG feedback loss 7 7301H
44 002CH PG feedback stall 7 7301H
15-29
CANopen
ID CANopen
No.* fault code
(bit 0–7)
45 002DH PG slip error 7 7301H
48 0030H ACI loss (ACE) 1 FF25H
External Fault; when the

multi-function input terminal (EF) is
49 0031H 5 9000H
active, the AC motor drive stops
output.
Emergency stop; when the
multi-function input terminals MI1 to
50 0032H 5 9000H
MI6 are active, the AC motor drive
stops output.
External Base Block; when the
multi-function input terminal (B.B.) is
51 0033H 5 9000H
active, the AC motor drive stops
output.
Keypad is locked after you enter the

52 0034H 5 FF26H
wrong password three times.
Modbus function code error (illegal

54 0036H 4 7500H
function code)
Modbus data address error [illegal

55 0037H 4 7500H
data address (00 H–254 H)]
56 0038H Modbus data error (illegal data value) 4 7500H
Modbus communication error (data is

57 0039H 4 7500H
written to read-only address)
15-30
CANopen
ID CANopen
No.* fault code
(bit 0–7)
58 003AH Modbus transmission time-out. 5 7500H
60 003CH Brake resistor error 4 7110H
Y-connection / Δ-connection switch

61 003DH 2 3330H
error
Energy regeneration when

62 003EH 2 FF27H
decelerating
Motor slip exceeds Pr. 05-26 and Pr.

63 003FH 7 FF28H
05-27 setting
64 0040H Electric valve switch error 5 7110H
65 0041H PG Card Error 5 FF29H
Reverse direction of the speed

68 0044H 7 8400H
feedback
69 0045H Over speed rotation feedback 7 8400H
70 0046H Large deviation of speed feedback 7 8400H
STO1–SCM1 internal loop detection

72 0048H 5 5441H
error
15-31
CANopen
ID CANopen
No.* fault code
(bit 0–7)
73 0049H Emergency stop for external safety 5 FF2AH
75 004BH External brake error 5 7110H
76 004CH Safe Torque Off function active 5 5440H
STO2–SCM2 internal loop detection

77 004DH 5 5442H
error
STO1–SCM1 and STO2–SCM2

78 004EH 5 5443H
internal loop detection error
82 0052H Output phase loss 1 (Phase U) 2 2331H
83 0053H Output phase loss 2 (Phase V) 2 2332H
84 0054H Output phase loss 3 (Phase W) 2 2333H
85 0055H PG ABZ line off 5 7301H
86 0056H PG UVW line off 5 7301H
89 0059H Rotor position detection error 7 FF30H
15-32
CANopen
ID CANopen
No.* fault code
(bit 0–7)
90 005AH Force to stop 7 FF2EH
101 0065H CANopen guarding error 4 8130H
102 0066H CANopen heartbeat error 4 8130H
104 0068H CANopen bus off error 4 8140H
105 0069H CANopen index error 4 8100H
106 006AH CANopen station address error 4 8100H
107 006BH CANopen memory error 4 8100H
InrCOM internal communication

111 006FH 4 7500H
special error code
112 0070H PMLess shaft lock 7 FF31H
15-33
15-6 CANopen LED Function

There are two CANopen flash signs: RUN and ERR.
RUN LED:
LED status Condition CANopen State
OFF OFF Initial
Blinking Pre-Operation
ON
200 200 1000
Single flash 單次閃爍 ms ms ms Stopped
OFF
ON ON Operation
ERR LED:
LED status Condition / Status
OFF No Error
One Message failure
Single ON
200 1000
flash 單次閃爍 ms ms
OFF
Guarding failure or heartbeat failure

Double ON
200 200 200 1000
flash 雙次閃爍 ms ms ms ms
OFF
SYNC failure
Triple flash ON
200 200 200 200 200 1000
雙次閃爍 ms ms ms ms ms ms
OFF
ON Bus off
15-34
Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsC2000
Chapter 16 PLC Function Applications
16-1 PLC Summary
16-2 Notes before PLC use
16-3 Turn on
16-4 Basic principles of PLC ladder diagrams
16-5 Various PLC device functions
16-6 Introduction to the Command Window
16-7 Error display and handling
16-8 CANopen Master control applications
16-9 Explanation of various PLC mode controls (speed, torque,
homing, and position)
16-10 Internal communications main node control
16-11 Count function using MI8
16-12 Modbus remote IO control applications (use MODRW)
16-13 Calendar Function
16-1
16-1 PLC Summary

16-1-1 Introduction
The commands provided by the C2000's built-in PLC functions, including the ladder diagram editing
tool WPLSoft, as well as the usage of basic commands and applications commands, chiefly retain
the operating methods of Delta's PLC DVP series.
16-1-2 WPLSoft ladder diagram editing tool
WPLSoft is Delta's program editing software for the DVP and C2000 programmable controllers in the
Windows operating system environment. Apart from general PLC program design general Windows
editing functions (such as cut, paste, copy, multiple windows, etc.), WPLSoft also provides many
Chinese/ English annotation editing and other convenience functions (such as registry editing,
settings, file reading, saving, and contact graphic monitoring and settings, etc.).
The following basic requirements that need to install WPLSoft editing software:
Item System requirements
Operating system Windows 95/98/2000/NT/ME/XP
CPU At least Pentium 90
Memory At least 16MB (we recommend at least 32MB)
Hard drive capacity: at least 100MB free space
Hard drive
One optical drive (for use in installing this software)
Resolution: 640×480, at least 16 colors; it is recommended that the screen
Display
area be set at 800×600 pixels
Mouse Ordinary mouse or Windows-compatible device
Printer Printer with a Windows driver program
RS-485 port Must have at least an RS-485 port to link to the PLC
Suitable PLC
Delta's full DVP-PLC series, VFD-C2000 series
models
16-2
16-2 Notes before PLC use

1. The PLC has a preset communications format of 7, N, 2, 9600, with node 2; the PLC node can
be changed in Pr. 09-35, but this address may not be the same as the drive's address setting of
Pr. 09-00.
2. The C2000 provides 2 communications serial ports that can be used to download PLC programs
(see figure below). Channel 1 has a fixed communications format of 19200, 8, N, 2 RTU.
3. The client can simultaneously access data from the converter and internal PLC, which is
performed through identification of the node. For instance, if the converter node is 1 and the
internal PLC node is 2, then the client command will be
01 (node) 03 (read) 0400 (address) 0001 (1 data item), indicating that it must read the data in
converter Pr. 04-00
02 (node) 03 (read) 0400 (address) 0001 (1 data item), indicating that it must read the data in
internal PLC X0
4. The PLC program will be disabled when uploading/ downloading programs.
5. Please note when using WPR commands to write in parameters, values may be modified up to
a maximum of 109 times, otherwise a memory write error will occur. The calculation of
modifications is based on whether the entered value has been changed. If the entered value is
left unchanged, the modifications will not increase afterwards. But if the entered value is
different from before, the number of modifications will increase by one.
6. When Pr. 00-04 is set as 28, the displayed value will be the value of PLC register D1043 (see
figure below):
16-3
H 0.00Hz Digital Keypad KPC-CC01

A 0.00Hz
Can display 0–65535
C _____
7. In the PLC Run and PLC Stop mode, the content 9 and 10 of Pr. 00-02 cannot be set and cannot
be reset to the default value.
8. The PLC can be reset to the default value when Pr. 00-02 is set as 6.
9. The corresponding MI function will be disabled when the PLC writes to input contact X.
10. When the PLC controls converter operation, control commands will be entirely controlled by the
PLC and will not be affected by the setting of Pr. 00-21.
11. When the PLC controls converter frequency commands (FREQ commands), frequency
commands will be entirely controlled by the PLC, and will not be affected by the setting of Pr.
00-20 or the Hand ON/OFF configuration.
12. When the PLC controls converter frequency (TORQ commands), torque commands will be
entirely controlled by the PLC, and will not be affected by the setting of Pr. 11-33 or the Hand
ON/OFF configuration.
13. When the PLC controls converter frequency (POS commands), position commands will be
entirely controlled by the PLC, and will not be affected by the setting of Pr. 11-40 or the Hand
ON/OFF configuration.
14. When the PLC controls converter operation, if the keypad Stop setting is valid, this will trigger
an FStP error and cause stoppage.
16-4
16-3 Turn on
16-3-1 Connect to PC
Start operation of PLC functions in accordance with the following four steps
1. After pressing the Menu key and selecting 4: PLC on the KPC-CC01 digital keypad, press
the Enter key (see figure below).
2. Wiring: Connect the drive's RJ45 communications interface to a PC via the RS-485.
3. PLC function usage

 PLC functions are as shown in the figure on the left; select
PLC
item 2 and implement PLC functions.
1.Disable
1: No function (Disable)
2.PLC Run
3.PLC Stop 2: Enable PLC (PLC Run)
3: Stop PLC functions (PLC Stop)
 When the external multifunctional input terminals (MI1–MI8) are in PLC Mode select bit0
(51) or PLC Mode select bit1 (52), and the terminal contact is closed or opened, it will
compulsorily switch to the PLC mode, and keypad switching will be ineffective.
Corresponding actions are as follows:
16-5
PLC mode
PLC Mode select bit1(52) PLC Mode select bit0 (51)
Using KPC-CC01
Disable OFF OFF
PLC Run OFF ON
PLC Stop ON OFF
Maintain previous state ON ON
NOTE
 When input/ output terminals (FWD REV MI1–MI8, MI10–15, Relay1, Relay2, RY10–RY15,
MO1–MO2, and MO10–MO11) are included in the PLC program, these input/ output terminals will
only be used by the PLC. As an example, when the PLC program controls Y0 during PLC operation
(PLC1 or PLC2), the corresponding output terminal relay (RA/RB/RC) will operate in accordance
with the program. At this time, the multifunctional input/ output terminal setting will be ineffective.
Because these terminal functions are already being used by the PLC, the DI/ DO/ AO in use by the
PLC can be determined by looking at Pr. 02-52, Pr. 02-53, and Pr. 03-30.
 When the PLC's procedures use special register D1040, the corresponding AO contact AFM1 will be
occupied, and AFM2 corresponding to special register D1045 will have the same situation.
 Pr. 03-30 monitors the state of action of the PLC function analog output terminal; bit0 corresponds to
the AFM1 action state, and bit1 corresponds to the AFM2 action state.
16-6
16-3-2 I/O device explanation

Input devices:
Serial
X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X10 X11 X12 X13 X14 X15 X16 X17
No.
1 FWD REV MI1 MI2 MI3 MI4 MI5 MI6 MI7 MI8
2 MI10 MI11 MI12 MI13 MI14 MI15
3 MI10 MI11 MI12 MI13
1: Control I/O |
2: Expansion card: EMC-D611A (D1022=4)
Output devices:
Serial
Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 Y10 Y11 Y12 Y13 Y14 Y15 Y16 Y17
No.
1 RY1 RY2 MO1 MO2
2 MO10 MO11
3 RY10 RY11 RY12 RY13 RY14 RY15
1: Control I/O |
3: Expansion card: EMC-R6AA (D1022=6)
16-3-3 Installation WPLSoft

Download and install WPLSoft editing software in Delta’s website:
After completing installation, the WPLSoft program will be installed in the designated subfolder “C:
\Program Files\Delta Industrial Automation\WPLSoft x.xx”.
16-3-4 Program writing

Step 1: Click on the WPLSoft icon to start the editing software. (See figure 16-1)
Figure 16-1 (Left: WPLSoft icon; Right: Start WPLSoft)
16-7
Step 2: The WPLSoft editing window appears (see figure 16-2 below). When running WPLSoft for the
first time, before "New file" has been used, only the "File (F)," "Communications (C)," View
(V)," "Options (O)," and "Help (H)" columns will appear on the function toolbar.
Figure 16-2
NOTE After running WPLSoft for the second time, the last file edited will open and be displayed
in the editing window. The following figure 16-3 provides an explanation of the WPLSoft editing
software window:
Figure 16-3
16-8
Step 3: Click on the icon on the toolbar: opens new file (Ctrl+N), see figure 16-4 below
Figure 16-4
NOTE You can also find “New file (N) (Ctrl+N)” in the "File (F)", as shown in figure 16-5 below.
Figure 16-5
Step 4: The "Device settings" window will appear after clicking, see figure 16-6 below. You can now
enter the project title and filename, and select the device and communication settings to be
used.
Figure 16-6
Communications settings: Perform settings in accordance with the desired communications method.
See figure 16-7 below.
Figure 16-7
16-9
Step 5: Press Confirm after completing settings and begin program editing. There are two program
editing methods; you can choose whether to perform editing in the command mode or the
ladder diagram mode (see figure 16-8 below).
Figure 16-8
NOTE In ladder diagram mode, you can perform program editing using the buttons on the function
icon row (see figure 16-9 below).
Figure 16-9
16-10
Basic Operation-Example
Input the ladder diagram as the figure below. The following steps can be operated through the mouse
or function key (F1–F12) on the keyboard.
Figure 16-10
Step 1: The following screen will appear after a new file is established:
Figure 16-11
Step 2: Click on the always-open switch icon or press the function key F1. After the name of the
input device and the comment dialog box have appeared, the device name (such as "M"),
device number (such as "10"), and input comments (such as "auxiliary contact") can be
selected; press the OK button when finished (see figure 16-12 and 16-13 below).
Figure 16-12
16-11
Figure 16-13
Step 3: Click on the output coil icon or press function key F7. After the name of the input device
and the comment dialog box have appeared, the device name (such as "Y"), device number
(such as "0"), and input comments (such as "output coil") can be selected; press the OK button
when finished (see figure 16-14 and 16-15 below).
Figure 16-14
Figure 16-15
16-12
Step 4: Press “ENTER” button, when the “Input Instructions” window appears, key in “END” in the
field and press the OK button (see figure 16-16 and 16-17 below).
Figure 16-16
Figure 16-17
Step 5: Click on the “Ladder diagram => Code” icon, which will compile the edited ladder
diagram as a command program. After compiling, the number of steps will appear on the left
side of the busbar (see figure 16-18 below).
Figure 16-18
16-13
16-3-5 Program download
After inputting a program using WPLSoft, select compile . After completing compilation, select
the to download a program. WPLSoft will perform program download with the online PLC in the
communications format specified in communications settings.
16-3-6 Program monitoring
While confirming that the PLC is in the Run mode, after downloading a program, click on in the
communications menu and select start ladder diagram control (see figure below)
16-14
16-4 Basic principles of PLC ladder diagrams

16-4-1 Schematic diagram of PLC ladder diagram program scanning
Output results are

calculated on the basis of
the ladder diagram
configuration Repeated
(internal devices will have implementation
real-time output
before results are sent to
an external output point)
16-4-2 Introduction to ladder diagrams

Ladder diagrams comprise a graphic language widely applied in automatic control, and employs
common electrical control circuit symbols. After a ladder diagram editor has been used to create a
ladder pattern, PLC program designed is completed. The use of a graphic format to control
processes is very intuitive, and is readily accepted by personnel who are familiar with electrical
control circuit technology. Many of the basic symbols and actions in a ladder diagram comprise
commonly seen electrical devices in conventional automatic control power distribution panels, such
as buttons, switches, relays, timers, and counters.
Internal PLC devices: The types and quantities of internal PLC devices vary in different brands of
products. Although these internal devices use the same names as conventional electrical control
circuit elements such as relays, coils, and contacts, a PLC does not actually contain these physical
devices, and they instead correspond to basic elements in the PLC's internal memory (bits). For
instance, if a bit is 1, this may indicate that a coil is electrified, and if that bit is 0, it will indicate that
the coil is not electrified. An N.O. contact (Normal Open, or contact a) can be used to directly read the
value of the corresponding bit, and an N.C. contact (Normal Close, or contact b) can be used to
obtain the inverse of the bit's value. Multiple relays occupy multiple bits, and 8 bits comprise one byte;
two bytes comprise one word, and two words comprise a double word. When multiple relays are
processing at the same time (such as addition/ subtraction or displacement, etc.), a byte, word, or
double word can be used. Furthermore, a PLC contains two types of internal devices: a timer and a
counter. It not only has a coil, but can count time and numerical values. Because of this, when it is
necessary to process some numerical values, these values are usually in the form of bytes, words, or
double words.
16-15
The various internal devices in a PLC all account for a certain quantity of storage units in the
PLC's storage area. When these devices are used, the content of the corresponding storage area is
read in the form of bits, bytes, or words.
Introduction to the basic internal devices in a PLC
Device type Description of Function
An input relay constitutes the basic unit of storage in a PLC's internal memory
corresponding to an external input point (which serves as a terminal connecting
with an external input switch and receiving external input signals). It is driven by
external input signals, to which it assigns values of 0 or 1. A program design
method cannot change the input relay status, and therefore cannot rewrite the
corresponding basic units of an input relay, and WPLSoft cannot be used to
Input Relay perform compulsory On/Off actions. A relay's contacts (contacts a and b) can be
used an unlimited number of times. An input relay with no input signal must be left
idle and cannot be used for some other purpose.
 Device indicated as: X0, X1, X7, X10, X11, etc. This device is expressed
with the symbol "X" , and a device's order is indicated with an octal number.
Please refer to Chapter 16-3-2 I/O device explanation for input point
numbers.
An output relay constitutes the basic unit of storage in a PLC's internal memory
corresponding to an external output point (which connects with an external load).
It may be driven by an input relay contact, a contact on another internal device, or
its own contacts. It uses one NO contact to connect with external loads or other
contacts, and, like input contacts, can use the contact an unlimited number of
Output Relay times. An output relay with no input signal will be idle, but may be used an internal
relay if needed.
 Device indicated as: Y0, Y1,…Y7, Y10, Y11,…etc. This device is expressed
with the symbol "Y" , and a device's order is indicated with an octal number.
Please refer to Chapter 16-3-2 I/O device explanation for output point
numbers.
Internal relays have no direct connection with the outside. These relays are
auxiliary relays inside a PLC. Their function is the same as that of an auxiliary
(central) relay in an electrical control circuit: Each auxiliary relay corresponding to
a basic unit of internal storage; they can be driven by input relay contacts, output
Internal Relay relay contacts, and the contacts of other internal devices. An internal auxiliary
relay's contact can also be used an unlimited number of times. Internal relays
have no outputs to outside, and must output via an output point.
 Device indicated as: M0, M1 to M799, etc. This device is expressed as the
symbol "M" , and its order is expressed as a decimal number.
A counter is used to perform counting operations. A count setting value (such as
the number of pulses to be counted) must be assigned when a counter is used. A
counter contains a coil, contact, and a counting storage device. When the coil
Counter goes from Off to On, this indicates that the counter has an input pulse, and one is
added to its count. There are 16 bits that can be employed by the user.
 Device indicated as: C0, C1 to C79, etc. This device is expressed as the
symbol "C" , and its order is expressed as a decimal number.
A timer is used to complete control of timing. The timer contains a coil, contact,
and a time value register. When the coil is electrified, if the preset time is reached,
the contact will be actuated (contact a will close, contact b will open), and the
timer's fixed value will be given by the set value. Timer has a regulated clock
Timer cycle (timing units: 100 ms). As soon as power to the coil is cut off, the contact will
no longer be actuated (contact a will open, contact b will close), and the original
timing value will return to zero.
 Device indicated as: T0, T1 to T159, etc. The device is expressed as the
symbol "T" , and its order is expressed as a decimal number.
16-16
Device type Description of Function

When a PLC is used to perform various types of sequence control and set time
value and count value control, it most commonly perform data processing and
numerical operations, and data registers are used exclusively for storage of data
and various parameters. Each data register contains 16 bits of binary data, which
Data register means that it can store one word. Two data registers with adjacent numbers can
be used to process double words.
 Device indicated as: D0, D1 to D399, etc. The device is expressed as the
symbol "D" , and its order is expressed as a decimal number.
Ladder diagram images and their explanation

Ladder diagram
Explanation of commands Command Using Device
structures
NO switch, contact a LD X、Y、M、T、C
NC switch, contact b LDI X、Y、M、T、C
Series NO AND X、Y、M、T、C
Series NC ANI X、Y、M、T、C
Parallel NO OR X、Y、M、T、C
Parallel NC ORI X、Y、M、T、C
Positive edge-triggered
LDP X、Y、M、T、C
switch
Negative edge-triggered
LDF X、Y、M、T、C
switch
ANDP X、Y、M、T、C
series
ANDF X、Y、M、T、C
series
ORP X、Y、M、T、C
parallel
ORF X、Y、M、T、C
parallel
Block series ANB N/A
Block parallel ORB N/A
MPS
Multiple outputs MRD N/A
MPP
Coil driven output
OUT Y、M
commands
16-17
Ladder diagram
Explanation of commands Command Using Device
structures
Some basic
Some basic commands, commands
applications commands Applications
commands
Inverted logic INV N/A
16-4-3 Overview of PLC ladder diagram editing

The program editing method begins from the left busbar and proceeds to the right busbar (the
right busbar is omitted when editing using WPLSoft). Continue to the next row after completing each
row; there is a maximum of 11 contacts on each row. If this is not sufficient, a continuous line will be
generated to indicate the continued connection and more devices can be added. A continuous series
of numbers will be generated automatically and identical input points can be used repeatedly. See
figure below:
The ladder diagram programming method involves scanning from the upper left corner to the
lower right corner. The coils and applications command-computing box are handled in the output,
and the ladder diagram is placed on the farthest right. Taking the figure below as an example, we can
gradually analyze the procedural sequence of the ladder diagram. The number in the upper right
corner gives the sequential order.
Explanation of
command
sequence
1 LD X0
2 OR M0
3 AND X1
4 LD X3 X0 X1 Y1 X4
AND M1 Y1
ORB M0 T0 M3
TMR T0 K10
5 LD Y1
X3 M1
AND X4
6 LD T0
AND M3
ORB
7 ANB
8 OUT Y1
TMR T0 K10
16-18
Explanation of basic structure of ladder diagrams

LD (LDI) command: An LD or LDI command is given at the start of a block.
LDP and LDF have this command structure, but there are differences in their action state. LDP, LDF
only act at the rising or falling edge of a conducting contact. (see figure below):
AND (ANI) command: A series configuration in which a single device is connected with one device
or a block.
ANDP, ANDF also have structures like this, but their action occurs at the rising and falling edge.
OR (ORI) command: A single device is connected with one device or a block.
ORP, ORF also have identical structures, but their action occurs at the rising and falling edge.
ANB command: A configuration in which one block is in series with one device or block.
16-19
ORB command: A configuration in which one block is in parallel with one device or block.
In the case of ANB and ORB operations, if a number of blocks are connected, they should be
combined to form a block or network from the top down or from left to right.
MPS, MRD, MPP commands: Branching point memory for multiple outputs, enabling multiple,
different outputs. The MPS command begins at a branching point, where the so-called branching
point refers to the intersection of horizontal and vertical lines. We have to rely on the contact status
along a single vertical line to determine whether the next contact can give a memory command.
While each contact is basically able to give memory commands, in view of convenience and the
PLC's capacity restrictions, this can be omitted from some places when converting a ladder diagram.
The structure of the ladder diagram can be used to judge what kinds of contact memory commands
are used.
MPS can be distinguished by use of the "┬" symbol; this command can be used consecutively for up
to 8 times. The MRD command is read from branching point memory; because logic states along any
one vertical line must be the same, in order to continue analysis of other ladder diagrams, the original
contact status must be read.
MRD can be distinguished by use of the "├" symbol. The MPP command is read from the starting
state of the uppermost branching point, and it is read from the stack (pop); because it is the final
command along a vertical line, it indicates that the state of the vertical line can be concluded.
MPP can be distinguished by use of the "└" symbol. Although there should basically be no errors
when using the foregoing analytical approach, the compiling program may sometimes omit identical
state output, as shown in the following figure:
MPS
( )
( )
( )
( )
MRD
( )
MPP ( )
( )
16-20
16-4-4 Commonly used basic program design examples

Start, stop, and protection
Some applications may require a brief close or brief break using the buttons to start and stop
equipment. A protective circuit must therefore be designed to maintain continued operation in these
situations; this protective circuit may employ one of the following methods:
Example 1: Priority stop protective circuit
When the start NO contact X1=On, and the stop NC contact X2＝Off, Y1=On; if X2=On at
this time, coil Y1 will no longer be electrified, and this is therefore referred to as priority stop.
Y1 X2
Y1
STOP
X1
START
Example 2: Priority start protective circuit

When start NO contact X1=On, and the stop NC contact X2＝Off, Y1=On, and coil Y1 will be
electrified and protected. At this time, if X2=On, coil Y1 will still protect the contact and
continue to be electrified, and this is therefore priority start.
X1 X2
Y1
START STOP
Y1
Example 3: Setting (SET) and reset (RST) command protective circuit

The following figure shows a protective circuit composed of RST and SET commands.
Priority stop occurs when the RST command is placed after the SET command. Because the
PLC executes programs from the top down, at the end of the program, the state of Y1 will
indicate whether coil Y1 is electrified. When X1 and X2 are both actuated, Y1 will lose power,
and this is therefore priority stop.
Priority start occurs when the SET command is placed after the RST command. When X1
and X2 are both actuated, Y1 will be electrified, and this is therefore priority start.
16-21
Commonly used control circuits

Example 4: Conditional control
X1, X3 are respectively start/ stop Y1, and X2 & X4 are respectively start/ stop Y2; all have
protective circuits. Because Y1's NO contact is in series with Y2's circuit, it becomes an
AND condition for the actuation of Y2. The action of Y1 is therefore a condition for the action
of Y2, and Y1 must be actuated before Y2 can be actuated.
X1 X3
Y1 X1
Y1 X3
X2
X2 X4 Y1
Y2 X4
Y2
Y1
Y2
Example 5: Interlocking control

The figure below shows an interlocking control circuit. Depending on which of the start
contacts X1, X2 is valid first, the corresponding output Y1 or Y2 will be actuated, and when
one is actuated, the other will not be actuated. This implies that Y1 and Y2 cannot be
actuated at the same time (interlocking effect). Even if both X1 and X2 are valid at the same
time, because the ladder diagram program is scanned from the top down, it is impossible for
Y1 and Y2 to be actuated at same time. This ladder diagram assigns priority only to Y1.
X1 X3 Y2
Y1 X1
Y1 X3
X2
X2 X4 Y1
Y2 X4
Y2
Y1
Y2
16-22
Example 6: Sequence control

If the NC contact of Y2 in the interlocking control configuration of example 5 is put in series
with the Y1 circuit, so that it is an AND condition for actuation of Y1 (see figure below), not
only is Y1 a condition for the actuation of Y2 in this circuit, the actuation of Y2 will also stop
the actuation of Y1. This configuration confirms the actuation order of Y1 and Y2.
X1 X3 Y2
Y1
Y1
X2 X4 Y1
Y2
Y2
Example 7: Oscillating circuit

Oscillating circuit with a period of ΔT+ΔT
The figure below shows a very simple ladder diagram. When starting to scan the Y1 NC
contact, because the Y1 coil has lost power, the Y1 NC contact will be closed. When the Y1
coil is then scanned, it will be electrified, and the output will be 1. When the Y1 NC contact is
scanned in the scanning cycle, because Y1 coil is electrified, the Y1 NC contact will be
opened, the Y1 coil will then lose power, and the output will be 0. Following repeated
scanning, the output of Y1 coil will have an oscillating waveform with a period of ΔT (On) +ΔT
(Off).
Y1
Y1 Y1
T T
Oscillating circuit with a period of nT+ΔT

The program of the ladder diagram shown below uses timer T0 to control coil Y1's electrified
time. After Y1 is electrified, it causes timer T0 to close during the next scanning cycle, which
will cause the output from Y1 to have the oscillating waveform shown in the figure below.
Here n is the timer's decimal setting value, and T is the clock cycle of the timer.
X0 Y1
TMR T0 Kn X0
T0
Y1
Y1
nT T
16-23
Example 8: Flashing circuit

The following figure shows an oscillating circuit of a type commonly used to cause an
indicator light to flash or a buzzer to buzz. It uses two timers to control the On and Off time of
Y1 coil. Here n1, n2 are the timing set values of T1 and T2, and T is the clock cycle of the
timer.
X0 T2
TMR T1 Kn1 X0 n2*T
T1
TMR T2 Kn2
Y1
X0 T1 n1*T
Y1
Example 9: Triggering circuit

In the figure below, a command consisting of the differential of the rising edge of X0 causes
coil M0 to generate a single pulse for ΔT (length of one scanning cycle), and coil Y1 is
electrified during this scanning cycle. Coil M0 loses power during the next scanning cycle,
and NC contact M0 and NC contact Y1 are both closed. This causes coil Y1 to stay in an
electrified state until there is another rising edge in input X0, which again causes the
electrification of coil M0 and the start of another scanning cycle, while also causing coil Y1 to
lose power, etc. The sequence of these actions can be seen in the figure below. This type of
circuit is commonly used to enable one input to perform two actions in alternation. It can be
seen from the time sequence in the figure below that when input X0 is a square wave signal
with a period of T, the output of coil Y1 will be a square wave signal with a period of 2T.
X0
M0 X0
M0 Y1 T
Y1 M0
M0 Y1
Y1
Example 10: Delay circuit

When input X0 is On, because the corresponding NC contact will be Off, the timer T10 will
be in no power status, and output coil Y1 will be electrified. T10 will receive power and
begin timing only after input X0 is Off, and output coil Y1 will be delayed for 100 sec.
(K1000*0.1 sec. =100 sec.) before losing power; please refer to the sequence of actions in
the figure below.
16-24
Example 11: The open/ close delay circuit is composed of two timers; output Y4 will have a delay
whether input X0 is On or Off.
Example 12: Extended timing circuit

In the circuit in the figure on the left, the total delay time from the moment input X0 closes to
the time output Y1 is electrified is (n1+n2)*T, where T is the clock cycle. Timers: T11, T12;
clock cycle: T.
X0
TMR T11 Kn1 X0
T11 n1*T
TMR T12 Kn2 T11
T12 n2*T
Y1
T12
Y1
(n1+n2)*T
16-25
16-5 Various PLC device functions

Item Specifications Notes
Algorithmic control Program stored internally, alternating
method back-and-forth scanning method
When it starts again after ending (after execution to
Input/ output control
the END command), the input/ output has an
method
immediate refresh command
Algorithmic Applications command (1 to
Basic commands (several μs);
processing speed several tens of μs)
Programming
Command + ladder diagram
language
Program capacity 10000 steps
This number of contacts
constitutes C2000 input/ output
Input/ output terminal Input (X): 10, output (Y): 4
contacts; other devices have
different correspondences
Type Device Item Range Function

X0–X17, 16 points, octal Corresponds to external
X External input relay Total
number input point
32
Y0–Y17, 16 points, octal Corresponds to external
Y External output relay points
number output point
General Use M0–M799, 800 points Total
Auxiliary Contact can switch On/ Off
M Special 880
Relay M1000–M1079, 80 points within the program
purpose points
Timers referred to by the
Relay bit
form Total TMR command; contact of
T Timer 100ms timer T0–T159, 160 points 160 the T with the same
points number will go On when
the time is reached
Counter referred to by the
Total CNT command; contact of
16-bit counter,
C Counter C0–C79, 80 points 80 the C with the same
general use
points number will go On when
the count is reached
The contact will be On
T Current timer value T0–T159, 160 points
when the time is reached
The counter contact will
C Current counter value C0–C79, 16-bit counter 80 points come On when the count is
Register reached
word data Used to
maintain D0–D399, 400 points Total
Data power Off Used as data storage
D 1400
Register memory area
Special D1000–D1199, 200 points points
purpose D2000–D2799, 800 points
Single-byte Setting Range: K-32,768–K32,767
K Decimal
Double-byte Setting Range: K-2,147,483,648–K2,147,483,647
Constant
Single-byte Setting Range:H0000–HFFFF
H Hexadecimal
Double-byte Setting Range: H00000000–HFFFFFFFF
Serial communications port (program
RS-485/ keypad port
write/read)
Input/output Built-in three analog inputs and two analog outputs
Function expansion module Optional
EMC-D42A; EMC-R6AA; EMCD611A
Accessories
Communication Expansion Optional
EMC-COP01,(CANopen)
Module Accessories
16-26
16-5-1 Introduction to device functions

Input/ output contact functions
Input contact X functions: Input contact X is connected with an input device, and reads input signals
entering the PLC. The number of times that contact a or b of input contact X is used in the program is
not subject to restrictions. The On/ Off state of input contact X will change as the input device
switches On and Off; a peripheral device (WPLSoft) cannot be used to force contact X On or Off.
Output contact Y functions

The job of output contact Y is to send an On/Off signal to drive the load connected with output contact
Y. Output contacts consist of two types: relays and transistors. While number of times that contact a
or b of each output contact Y is used in the program is not subject to restrictions, it is recommended
that the number of output coil Y be used only once in a program, otherwise the right to determine the
output state when the PLC performs program scanning will be assigned to the program's final output
Y circuit.
Numerical value, constant [K]/ [H]

Single-byte K-32,768–K32,767
K Decimal
Double-byte K-2,147,483,648–K2,147,483,647
Constant
Single-byte H0000–HFFFF
H Hexadecimal
Double-byte H00000000–HFFFFFFFF
The PLC can use five types of numerical values to implement calculations based on its control tasks;
the following is an explanation of the missions and functions of different numerical values.
Binary Number, BIN
The PLC's numerical operations and memory employ binary numbers. Binary nibbles and relevant
terms are explained as follows:
bit Bits are the fundamental units of binary values, and have a state of either 1 or 0
Comprised of a series of 4 bits (such as b3–b0); can be used to express a
Nibble
one-nibble decimal number 0–9 or hexadecimal number: 0–F.
Comprised of a series of two nibbles (i.e. 8 bits, b7–b0); can express a
Byte
hexadecimal number: 00–FF.
Comprised of a series of two bytes (i.e. 16 bits, b15–b0); can express a
Word
hexadecimal number with four nibbles: 0000–FFFF.
Comprised of a series of two words (i.e. 32 bits, b31–b0); can express a
Double Word
hexadecimal number with eight nibbles: 00000000–FFFFFFFF
Relationship between bits, digits, nibbles, words, and double words in a binary system (see figure
below):
16-27
Octal Number, OCT

The external input and output terminals of a DVP-PLC are numbered using octal numbers
Example: External input: X0–X7，X10–X17…(Device number table);
External output: Y0–Y7，Y10–Y17…(Device number table)
Decimal Number, DEC

Decimal numbers are used for the following purposes in a PLC system:
 The setting values of timer T or counter C, such as TMR C0 K50. (K constant)
 The numbers of devices including M, T, C, or D, such as M10 or T30. (device number)
 Used as an operand in an application command, such as MOV K123 D0. (K constant)
Binary Code Decimal, BCD

Uses one nibble or 4 bits to express the data in a decimal number; a series of 16 bits can therefore
express a decimal number with 4 nibbles. Chiefly used to read the input value of a fingerwheel
numerical switch input or output a numerical value to a seven-segment display drive.
Hexadecimal Number, HEX

Applications of hexadecimal numbers in a PLC system: Used as operands in application commands,
such as MOV H1A2B D0. (H constant)
Constant K
Decimal numbers are usually prefixed with a "K" in a PLC system, such as K100. This indicates that it
is a decimal number with a numerical value of 100.
Exceptions: K can be combined with bit device X, Y, M, or S to produce data in the form of a nibble,
byte, word, or double word, such as in the case of K2Y10 or K4M100. Here K1 represents a
4-bit combination, and K2–K4 variously represent 8, 12, and 16-bit combinations.
Constant H
Hexadecimal numbers are usually prefixed with the letter "H" in a PLC system, such as in the case of
H100, which indicates a hexadecimal number with a numerical value of 100.
16-28
Functions of auxiliary relays

Like an output relay Y, an auxiliary relay M has an output coil and contacts a and b, and the number
of times they can be used in a program is unrestricted. Users can use an auxiliary relay M to
configure the control circuit, but cannot use it to directly drive an external load. Auxiliary relays have
the following two types of characteristics:
Ordinary auxiliary relays: Ordinary auxiliary relays will all revert to the Off state if a power outage
occurs while the PLC is running, and will remain in the Off state if power is again
turned down.
Special purpose auxiliary relays: Each special purpose auxiliary relay has its own specific use. Do not
use any undefined special purpose auxiliary relays.
Timer functions
Timers take 100 ms as their timing units. When the timing method is an upper time limit, when the
current timer value = set value, power will be sent to the output coil. Timer setting values consist of
decimal K values, and the data register D can also serve as a setting value.
Actual timer setting time = timing units * set value
Counter features
Item 16-bit counter
Type General Type
CT Direction: Score
Setting 0–32,767
Designation of set value Constant K or data register D
Change in current value When the count reaches the set value, there is no longer a count
Output contact When the count reaches the set value, the contact comes On and stays On
The current value reverts to 0 when an RST command is executed, and the
Reset
contact reverts to Off
Contact actuation All are actuated after the end of scanning
Counter functions
When a counter's counting pulse input signal goes Off→On, if the counter's current value is equal to
the set value, the output coil will come On. The setting value will be a decimal K values, and the data
register D can also serve as a setting value.
16-bit counter C0–C79:

 16-bit counter setting range: K0–K32,767. (when K0 and K1 are identical, the output contact
will immediately be On during the first count.)
 The current counter value will be cleared from an ordinary counter when power is shut off to the
PLC.
 If the MOV command or WPLSoft is used to transmit a value greater than the set value to the
C0 current value register, when the next X1 goes from Off→On, the C0 counter contact will
change to On, and the current value will change to the set value.
 A counter's setting value may be directly set using a constant K or indirectly set using the value
in register D (not including special data registers D1000–D1199 or D2000–D2799).
 If the set value employs a constant K, it may only be a positive number; the set value may be
either a positive or a negative number if the value in data register D is used. The current
counter value will change from 32,767 to -32,768 as the count continues to accumulate.
16-29
Example
LD X0
X0
RST C0 RST C0
LD X1 X1
CNT C0 K5
CNT C0 K5
C0
LD C0 Y0
OUT Y0
1. When X0=On and the RST command is
executed, the current value of C0 will
revert to 0, and the output contact will
revert to Off.
2. When X1 changes from Off→On, the
current value of the counter will execute
an increase (add one).
3. When the count of counter C0 reaches the 4.
set value K5, the contact C0 will come On,
and the current value of C0＝ set value
=K5. Afterwards, signal C0 triggered by X1
cannot be received, and the current value
of C0 will remain K5.
16-5-2 Introduction to special relay functions (special M)

R/W items: RO: read only function; RW: read and write function
Special
Description of Function R/W *
M
Operates monitor NO contact (contact a). NO while RUN, contact a. This contact
M1000 RO
is On while in the RUN state.
Operates monitor NC contact (contact b). NC while RUN, contact b. This contact is
M1001 RO
Off while in the RUN state.
Initiates a forward (the instant RUN is On) pulse. Initial pulse, contact a. Produces
M1002 RO
a forward pulse the moment RUN begins; its width = scan cycle
Initiates a reverse (the instant RUN is Off) pulse. Initial pulse, contact a. Produces
M1003 RO
a reverse pulse the moment RUN ends; the pulse width = scan cycle
M1004 Reserved RO
M1005 Drive malfunction instructions RO
M1006 Converter has no output (1 = no output, 0 = output) RO
M1007 Drive direction FWD(0)/REV(1) RO
M1008
– -- --
M1010
M1011 10 ms clock pulse, 5ms On / 5ms Off RO
M1012 100 ms clock pulse, 50ms On / 50ms Off RO
M1013 1 sec. clock pulse, 0.5s On / 0.5s Off RO
M1014 1 min. clock pulse, 30s On / 30s Off RO
M1015 Frequency attained (when used together with M1025) RO
M1016 Parameter read/write error RO
M1017 Parameter write successful RO
M1018 -- --
16-30
Special
M
M1019 -- --
M1020 Zero flag RO
M1021 Borrow flag RO
M1022 Carry flag RO
M1023 Divisor is 0 RO
M1024 -- --
Target drive frequency = set frequency (ON)
M1025 RW
Target drive frequency =0 (OFF)
M1026 Drive operating direction FWD(OFF) / REV(ON) RW
M1027 Drive Reset RW
M1028 -- --
M1029 -- --
M1030 -- --
Compulsory setting of the current PID integral value equal to D1019 (0 change, 1
M1031 RW
valid)
M1032 Compulsory definition of FREQ command after PID control RW
M1033 -- --
M1034 Initiates CANopen real-time control RW
M1035 Initiates internal communications control RW
M1036 Ignore calendar error RW
M1037 -- --
M1038 MI8 count begins RW
M1039 Reset MI8 count value RW
M1040 Excitation (Servo On) RW
M1041 -- --
M1042 Quick stop RW
M1043 -- --
M1044 Pause (Halt) RW
M1045
– -- --
M1047
M1048 Move to new position RW
M1049 -- --
M1050 Absolute position / relative position (0: relative/1: absolute) RW
M1051 -- --
M1052 Lock frequency (lock, frequency locked at the current operating frequency) RW
M1053 -- --
M1054 Compulsory reset of absolute position RW
M1055 Search Origin RW
M1056 Excitation ready (Servo On Ready) RO
M1057 -- --
M1058 On Quick Stopping RO
M1059 CANopen Master setting complete RO
M1060 CANopen Currently initializing slave station RO
M1061 CANopen Slave station initialization failure RO
M1062 -- --
M1063 Torque attained RO
M1064 Target reached RO
M1065 Read/write CANopen data time out RO
M1066 Read/write CANopen data complete RO
M1067 Read/write CANopen data successful RO
M1068 Calendar calculation error RO
M1069 -- --
M1070 Return home complete RO
M1071 Homing error RO
16-31
Special
M
M1072
– -- --
M1075
M1076 Calendar time error or refresh time out RO
M1077 485 Read/write complete RO
M1078 485 Read-write error RO
M1079 485 Communications time out RO
M1090 AUTO RO
M1091 OFF RO
M1092 HAND RO
M1100 LOCAL RO
M1101 REMOTE RO
M1168 SBOV BCD and BIN mode switch RW
M1260 PLC PID1 Enable RW
M1262 PLC PID1 integral positive value limit RW
M1270 PLC PID2 Enable RW
M1272 PLC PID2 integral positive value limit RW
16-5-3 Introduction to special register functions (special D)

Special D Description of Function R/W *
D1000 -- --
D1001 Device system program version RO
D1002 Program capacity RO
D1003 Total program memory content RO
D1004
– -- --
D1009
D1010 Current scan time (units: 0.1 ms) RO
D1011 Minimum scan time (units: 0.1 ms) RO
D1012 Maximum scan time (units: 0.1 ms) RO
D1013
– -- --
D1017
D1018 Current integral value RO
D1019 Compulsory setting of PID I integral RW
D1020 Output frequency (0.000–600.00Hz) RO
D1021 Output current (####.#A) RO
AI AO DI DO Expansion card number
0: No expansion card
4: AC input card (6 in) (EMC-D611A)
D1022 RO
5: Digital I/O Card (4 in 2 out ) (EMC-D42A)
6: Relay card (6 out) (EMC-R6AA)
11: Analog I/O Card (2 in 2 out) (EMC-A22A)
Communication expansion card number
0: No expansion card
1: DeviceNet Slave (CMC-DN01)
2: Profibus-DP Slave (CMC-PD01)
D1023 RO
3: CANopen Slave (EMC-COP01)
4: Modbus-TCP Slave (CMC-MOD01)
5: EtherNet/IP Slave (CMC-EIP01)
12: PROFINET Slave (CMC-PN01)
D1024
– -- --
D1026
16-32

PID calculation frequency command (frequency command after
D1027 RO
PID calculation)
D1028 AVI value (0.00–100.00%) RO
D1029 ACI value (0.0–100.00%) RO
D1030 AUI value (-100.0–100.00%) RO
D1031 C series: extension card AI10 (0.0–100.0%) RO
D1032 C series: extension card AI11 (0.0–100.0%) RO
D1033
– -- --
D1035
D1036 Servo error bit RO
D1037 Drive output frequency RO
D1038 DCBUS voltage RO
D1039 Output voltage RO
D1040 Analog output value AFM1 (-100.00–100.00%) RW
D1041 C series: extension card AO10 (0.0–100.0%) RW
D1042 C series: extension card AO11 (0.0–100.0%) RW
Can be user-defined (will be displayed on panel when Pr. 00-04 is set as 28;
D1043 RW
display method is C xxx)
D1044 -- -
D1045 Analog output value AFM2 (-100.00–100.00%) RW
D1046
– -- --
D1049
Actual Operation Mode
0: Speed
D1050 1: Position RO
2: Torque
3: Homing Origin
D1051 Encoder Pulses L RO
D1052 Encoder Pulses H RO
D1053 Actual torque RO
D1054 MI8 current calculated count value (Low Word) RO
D1055 MI8 current calculated count value (High Word) RO
D1056 Rotational speed corresponding to MI8 RO
D1057 MI8's rotational speed ratio RW
D1058 MI8 refresh rate (ms) corresponding to rotational speed RW
D1059 Number of nibbles of rotational speed corresponding to MI8 (0–3) RW
Operation Mode setting
0: Speed
D1060 1: Position RW
2: Torque
3: Homing Origin
D1061 485 COM1 communications time out time (ms) RW
D1062 Torque command (torque limit in speed mode) RW
D1063 Year (Western calendar) (display range 2000–2099) (must use KPC-CC01) RO
D1064 Week (display range 1–7) (must use KPC-CC01) RO
D1065 Month (display range 1–12) (must use KPC-CC01) RO
D1066 Day (display range 1–31) (must use KPC-CC01) RO
D1067 Hour (display range 0–23) (must use KPC-CC01) RO
D1068 Minute (display range 0–59) (must use KPC-CC01) RO
D1069 Second (display range 0–59) (must use KPC-CC01) RO
D1100 Target frequency RO
D1101 Target frequency (must be operating) RO
D1102 Reference frequency RO
D1103 Target L RO
D1104 Target H RO
16-33

D1105 Target torque RO
D1106 -- --
D1107 π(Pi) Low word RO
D1108 π(Pi) High word RO
D1109 Random number RO
Internal node communications number (set number of slave stations to be
D1110 RW
controlled)
D1111 Actual position (Low word) RO
D1112 Actual position (High word) RO
D1113 -- RO
D1114 -- --
D1115 Internal node synchronizing cycle (ms) RO
D1116 Internal node error (bit0 = Node 0, bit1 = Node 1,…bit7 = Node 7) RO
Internal node online correspondence (bit0 = Node 0, bit1 = Node 1,…bit7
D1117 RO
= Node 7)
D1118 -- --
D1119 -- --
D1120 Internal node 0 control command RW
D1121 Internal node 0 mode RW
D1122 Internal node 0 reference command L RW
D1123 Internal node 0 reference command H RW
D1124 -- --
D1125 -- --
D1126 Internal node 0 status RO
D1127 Internal node 0 reference status L RO
D1128 Internal node 0 reference status H RO
D1129 -- --
D1134 -- --
D1135 -- --
D1139 -- --
D1144 -- --
D1145 -- --
D1149 -- --
D1154 -- --
D1155 -- --
16-34

D1159 -- --
D1164 -- --
D1165 -- --
D1169 -- --
D1174 -- RW
D1175 -- --
D1176 Internal node 5 status --
D1179 -- --
D1184 -- --
D1185 -- --
D1189 -- --
D1194 -- --
D1195 -- --
D1199 -- --
Special
Description of Function Default R/W *
D
PID 1 Mode:
D1200 0 RW
0: Basic mode
PID 1 Target selection:
0: Refer to D1202
D1201 1: AVI 0 RW
2: ACI
3: AUI
D1202 PID 1 Target value (0.00%–100.00%) 5000 RW
16-35
Special
Description of Function Default R/W *
D
PID 1 Feedback selection:
0: Refer to D1204
D1203 1: AVI 1 RW
2: ACI
3: AUI
D1204 PID 1 Feedback value (0.00%–100.00%) 0 RW
D1205 PID 1 P value (decimal 2 points) 10 RW
D1206 PID 1 I value (decimal 2 points) 1000 RW
D1207 PID 1 D value (decimal 2 points) 0 RW
D1209 PID 1 Max. limit 10000 RW
D1215 PID 1 Calculation (decimal 2 points) 0 RO
PID2 Mode:
D1220 0 RW
0: Basic mode
PID 2 Target selection:
0: Refer to D1202
D1221 1: AVI 0 RW
2: ACI
3: AUI
D1222 PID 2 Target value (0.00%–100.00%) 5000 RW
PID 2 Feedback selection:
0: Refer to D1204
D1223 1: AVI 1 RW
2: ACI
3: AUI
D1224 PID 2 Feedback value (0.00%–100.00%) 0 RW
D1225 PID 2 P value (decimal 2 points) 10 RW
D1226 PID 2 I value (decimal 2 points) 1000 RW
D1227 PID 2 D value (decimal 2 points) 0 RW
D1229 PID 2 Max. limit 10000 RW
D1235 PID 2 Calculation (decimal 2 points) 0 RO
16-36
The following is CANopen Master's special D (Allow writing only when PLC is in
STOP state)
n = 0–7
Power
PDO
Special D Description of Function off Default R/W
Map
Memory
Channel opened by CANopen initialization
D1070 NO NO 0 R
(bit0=Machine code0 …)
Error channel occurring in CANopen initialization
D1071 NO NO 0 R
process (bit0=Machine code0 …)
D1072 Reserved - - -
D1073 CANopen break channel (bit0=Machine code0 …) NO NO R
Error code of master error
0: No error
D1074 NO NO 0 R
1: Slave station setting error
2: Synchronizing cycle setting error (too small)
D1076 SDO error message (main index value) NO NO R
D1077 SDO error message (secondary index value) NO NO R
D1078 SDO error message (error code) NO NO R
D1079 SDO error message (error code) NO NO R
D1081 -
– Reserved - -
D1086
D1087
– Reserved - - -
D1089
D1090 Synchronizing cycle setting NO YES 4 RW
Sets slave station On or Off (bit 0–bit 7 correspond to RW
D1091 NO YES FFFFH
slave stations number 0–7)
D1092 Delay before start of initialization NO YES 0 RW
D1093 Break time detection NO YES 1000ms RW
D1094 Break number detection NO YES 3 RW
D1095
– Reserved - - -
D1096
Corresponding real-time transmission type (PDO)
D1097 NO YES 1 RW
Setting range: 1–240
Corresponding real-time receiving type (PDO)
D1098 NO YES 1 RW
Initialization completion delay time
D1099 NO YES 15 sec. RW
Setting range: 1–60000 sec.
Station number n of slave station
D2000+100*n Setting range: 0–127 NO YES 0 RW
0: No CANopen function
16-37
The C2000 supports 8 slave stations under the CANopen protocol; each slave station occupies
100 special D locations; stations are numbered 1–8, total of 8 stations.
Explanation of Slave station no. 1 D2000 Node ID
slave station D2001 Slave station no. 1 torque restrictions
number – –
D2099 Address 4(H) corresponding to receiving
channel 4
Slave station no. 2 D2100 Node ID
D2101 Slave station no. 2 torque restrictions
– –
channel 4
– –
channel 4

– –
channel 4
1. The range of n is 0–7

2. ●Indicates PDOTX, ▲Indicates PDORX; unmarked special D can be refreshed using the
CANFLS command
Special D Description of Function Default: R/W

D2000+100*n Setting range: 0–127 0 RW
D2002+100*n Manufacturer code of slave station number n (L) 0 R
D2003+100*n Manufacturer code of slave station number n (H) 0 R
D2004+100*n Manufacturer's product code of slave station number n (L) 0 R
D2005+100*n Manufacturer's product code of slave station number n (H) 0 R
Basic definitions
CAN PDO Default:
Index 1 2 3 4
Communications break handling method of
D2006+100*n 0 6007H–0010H RW
slave station number n
D2007+100*n Error code of slave station number n error 0 603FH–0010H R
D2008+100*n Control word of slave station number n 0 6040H–0010H ● ● ● RW
D2009+100*n Status word of slave station number n 0 6041H–0010H ▲ ▲ ▲ R
D2010+100*n Control mode of slave station number n 2 6060H–0008H RW
D2011+100*n Actual mode of slave station number n 2 6061H–0008H R
Velocity Control
Slave station number n=0–7
CAN PDO Default:
Index 1 2 3 4
D2001+100*n Torque restriction on slave station number n 0 6072H–0010H RW
D2012+100*n Target speed of slave station number n 0 6042H–0010H ● RW
D2013+100*n Actual speed of slave station number n 0 6043H–0010H ▲ R
D2014+100*n Error speed of slave station number n 0 6044H–0010H R
D2015+100*n Acceleration time of slave station number n 1000 604FH–0020H R
D2016+100*n Deceleration time of slave station number n 1000 6050H–0020H RW
16-38
Torque control
CAN PDO Default:
Index 1 2 3 4
D2017+100*n Target torque of slave station number n 0 6071H–0010H ● RW
D2018+100*n Actual torque of slave station number n 0 6077H–0010H ▲ R
D2019+100*n Actual current of slave station number n 0 6078H–0010H R
Position control
CAN PDO Default:
Index 1 2 3 4
D2020+100*n Target of slave station number n (L) 0 RW
607AH–0020H ●
D2021+100*n Target of slave station number n (H) 0 RW
Actual position of slave station number n
D2022+100*n 0 R
(L)
6064H–0020H ▲
Actual position of slave station number n
D2023+100*n 0 R
(H)
D2024+100*n Speed chart of slave station number n (L) 10000 RW
6081H–0020H
D2025+100*n Speed chart of slave station number n (H) 0 RW
20XXH correspondences: MI MO AI AO
CAN PDO Default:
Index 1 2 3 4
D2026+100*n MI status of slave station number n 0 2026H–0110H ▲ RW
D2027+100*n MO setting of slave station number n 0 2026H–4110H ● RW
D2028+100*n AI1 status of slave station number n 0 2026H–6110H ▲ RW
D2031+100*n AO1 status of slave station number n 0 2026H–A110H ● RW
PDO reflection length setting:
D2034+100*n Real-time transmission setting of slave station number n 000AH RW

D2067+100*n Real-time reception setting of slave station number n 0000H RW
16-5-4 PLC Communication address

Device Range Type Address (Hex)
X 00–37 (Octal) bit 0400–041F
Y 00–37 (Octal) bit 0500–051F
T 00–159 bit/word 0600–069F
M 000–799 bit 0800–0B1F
M 1000–1079 bit 0BE8–0C37
C 0–79 bit/word 0E00–0E47
D 00–399 word 1000–118F
D 1000–1099 word 13E8–144B
D 2000–2799 word 17D0–1AEF
16-39
Command code that can be used

Function Code Description of Function Function target
01 Coil status read Y,M,T,C
02 Input status read X,Y,M,T,C
03 Read single unit of data T,C,D
05 Compulsory single coil status change Y,M,T,C
06 Write single unit of data T,C,D
0F Compulsory multiple coil status change Y,M,T,C
10 Write multiple units of data T,C,D
NOTE
When PLC functions have been activated, the C2000 can match PLC and drive parameters; this method employs different
addresses, drives (default station number is 1, PLC sets station number as 2)
16-40
16-6 Introduction to the Command Window

16-6-1 Overview of basic commands
Ordinary commands
Command Execution
Function OPERAND
code speed (us)
LD Load contact a X, Y, M, T, C 0.8
LDI Load contact b X, Y, M, T, C 0.8
AND Connect contact a in series X, Y, M, T, C 0.8
ANI Connect contact b in series X, Y, M, T, C 0.8
OR Connect contact a in parallel X, Y, M, T, C 0.8
ORI Connect contact b in parallel X, Y, M, T, C 0.8
ANB Series circuit block N/A 0.3
ORB Parallel circuit block N/A 0.3
MPS Save to stack N/A 0.3
MRD Stack read (pointer does not change) N/A 0.3
MPP Read stack N/A 0.3
Output command
Command Execution
Function OPERAND
code speed (us)
OUT Drive coil Y, M 1
SET Action continues (ON) Y, M 1
RST Clear contact or register Y, M, T, C, D 1.2
Timer, counter
Command Execution
Function OPERAND
code speed (us)
TMR 16-bit timer T-K or T-D commands 1.1
CNT 16-bit counter C-K or C-D (16-bit) 0.5
Main control command

Command Execution
Function OPERAND
code speed (us)
MC Common series contact connection N0–N7 0.4
MCR Common series contact release N0–N7 0.4
Contact rising edge / falling edge detection command

Command Execution
Function OPERAND
code speed (us)
LDP Start of forward edge detection action X, Y, M, T, C 1.1
LDF Start of reverse edge detection action X, Y, M, T, C 1.1
ANDP Forward edge detection series connection X, Y, M, T, C 1.1
ANDF Reverse edge detection series connection X, Y, M, T, C 1.1
ORP Forward edge detection parallel connection X, Y, M, T, C 1.1
ORF Reverse edge detection parallel connection X, Y, M, T, C 1.1
Upper/lower differential output commands

Command Execution
Function OPERAND
code speed (us)
PLS Upper differential output Y, M 1.2
PLF Lower differential output Y, M 1.2
16-41
Stop command
Command Execution
Function OPERAND
code speed (us)
END Program conclusion N/A 0.2
Other commands
Command Execution
Function OPERAND
code speed (us)
NOP No action N/A 0.2
INV Inverse of operation results N/A 0.2
P Index P 0.3
16-6-2 Detailed explanation of basic commands

Command Function
LD Load contact a
X0–X17 Y0–Y17 M0–M799 T0–159 C0–C79 D0–D399
Operand
     －
The LD command is used for contact a starting at the left busbar or contact a starting
at a contact circuit block; its function is to save current content and save the acquired
contact status in the cumulative register.
Ladder diagram: Command code: Description:
X0 X1
Y1 LD X0 Load Contact a of X0
Create series
AND X1 connection to contact a
of X1
OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil
Command Function
LDI Load contact b
X0–X17 Y0–Y17 M0–M799 T0–159 C0–C79 D0–D399
Operand
     －
The LDI command is used for contact b starting at the left busbar or contact b starting
at a contact circuit block; its function is to save current content and save the acquired
contact status in the cumulative register.
X0 X1
Y1 LDI X0 Load Contact b of X0
Create series
of X1
Command Function
AND Connect contact a in series
X0–X17 Y0–Y17 M0–M799 T0–159 C0–C79 D0–D399
Operand
     －
The AND command is used to create a series connection to contact a; first reads
current status of the designated series contact and logical operation results before
contact in order to perform "AND" operation; saves results in cumulative register.
X1 X0 LDI X1 Load Contact b of X1
Y1 Create series
of X0
16-42
Command Function
ANI Connect contact b in series
X0–X17 Y0–Y17 M0–M799 T0–159 C0–C79 D0–D399
Operand
     －
The ANI command is used to create a series connection to contact b; its function is to first read
current status of the designated series contact and logical operation results before contact in
order to perform "AND" operation; saves results in cumulative register.
X1 X0
Create series connection
ANI X0 to contact b of X0
Command Function
OR Connect contact a in parallel
X0–X17 Y0–Y17 M0–M799 T0–159 C0–C79 D0–D399
Operand
     －
The OR command is used to establish a parallel connection to contact a; its function is to first
read current status of the designated series contact and logical operation results before
contact in order to perform "OR" operation; saves results in cumulative register.
X0
X1 Create series connection
OR X1 to contact a of X1
Command Function
ORI Connect contact b in parallel
X0–X17 Y0–Y17 M0–M799 T0–159 C0–C79 D0–D399
Operand
     －
The ORI command is used to establish a parallel connection to contact a; its function is to first
read current status of the designated series contact and logical operation results before
contact in order to perform "OR" operation; saves results in cumulative register.
X0
X1 Create series connection
ORI X1 to contact b of X1
Command Function
ANB Series circuit block
Operand N/A
ANB performs an "AND" operation on the previously saved logic results and the current
cumulative register content.
X0 X1 LD X0 Load Contact a of X0
ANB
Y1 Establish parallel
ORI X2 connection to contact b of
X2 X3 X2
LDI X1 Load Contact b of X1
Block A Block B Establish parallel
OR X3 connection to contact a of
X3
ANB Series circuit block
16-43
Command Function
ORB Parallel circuit block
Operand N/A
ORB performs an "OR" operation on the previously saved logic results and the current
cumulative register content.
X0 X1 Block A LD X0 Load Contact a of X0
ANI X1 connection to contact b
X2 X3 of X1
ORB
LDI X2 Load Contact b of X2
Block B Establish parallel
of X3
ORB Parallel circuit block
Command Function
MPS Save to stack
Operand N/A
Save current content of cumulative register to the stack. (Add one to stack pointer)
Command Function
MRD Read stack (pointer does not change)
Operand N/A
Reads stack content and saves to cumulative register. (Stack pointer does not
change)
Command Function
MPP Read stack
Operand N/A
Retrieves result of previously-save logical operation from the stack, and saves to
cumulative register. (Subtract one from stack pointer)
MPS LD X0 Load Contact a of X0
X0 X1 MPS Save to stack
Y1 Create series
X2 AND X1 connection to contact a
MRD M0 of X1
Y2 Read stack (pointer
MRD
does not change)
MPP Create series
END AND X2 connection to contact a
of X2
OUT M0 Drive M0 coil
MPP Read stack
END Program conclusion
16-44
Command Function
OUT Drive coil
X0–X17 Y0–Y17 M0–M799 T0–159 C0–C79 D0–D399
Operand
－   －－－
Outputs result of logical operation before OUT command to the designated element.
Coil contact action:
Out command
Result: Access Point:
Coil
Contact a (NO) Contact b (NC)
FALSE Off Not conducting Conducting
TRUE On Conducting Not conducting

X0 X1 LD X0 Load Contact b of X0
of X1
Command Function
SET Action continues (ON)
X0–X17 Y0–Y17 M0–M799 T0–159 C0–C79 D0–D399
Operand
－   －－－
When the SET command is driven, the designated element will be set as On, and will
be maintained in an On state, regardless of whether the SET command is still driven.
The RST command can be used to set the element as Off.
X0 Y0 LD X0 Load Contact a of X0
SET Y1 Establish parallel
AN Y0 connection to contact b
of Y0
SET Y1 Action continues (ON)
Command Function
RST Clear contact or register
X0–X17 Y0–Y17 M0–M799 T0–159 C0–C79 D0–D399
Operand
－     
When the RST command is driven, the action of the designated element will be as
follows:
Element Mode
Y, M Both coil and contact will be set as Off.
The current timing or count value will be set as 0, and both the coil
T, C
and contact will be set as Off.
D The content value will be set as 0.
If the RST command has not been executed, the status of the designated element will
remain unchanged.
X0 LD X0 Load Contact a of X0
RST Y5 Clear contact or
RST Y5
register
16-45
Command Function
TMR 16-bit timer
T-K T0–T159, K0–K32,767
Operand
T-D T0–T159, D0–D399
When the TMR command is executed, the designated timer coil will be electrified, and
the timer will begin timing. The contact's action will be as follows when the timing
value reaches the designated set value (timing value >= set value):
NO (Normally Open) contact Closed
NC (Normally Close) contact Open
If the RST command has not been executed, the status of the designated element will
remain unchanged.
TMR T5 K1000 T5 timer
TMR T5 K1000
Set value as K1000
Command Function
CNT 16-bit counter
C-K C0–C79, K0–K32,767
Operand
C-D C0–C79, D0–D399
When the CNT command is executed from Off→On, this indicates that the designated
counter coil goes from no power → electrified, and 1 will be added to the counter's
count value; when the count reaches the designated value (count value = set value),
the contact will have the following action:
NO (Normally Open) contact Closed
NC (Normally Close) contact Open
After the count value has been reached, the contact and count value will both remain
unchanged even if there is continued count pulse input. Please use the RST
command if you wish to restart or clear the count.
CNT C2 K100 C2counter
CNT C2 K100
Set value as K100
Command Function
MC/MCR Connect/release a common series contact
Operand N0–N7
MC is the main control initiation command, and any commands between MC and
MCR will be executed normally. When the MC command is Off, any commands
between MC and MCR will act as follows:
Determination of commands Description
The timing value will revert to 0, the coil will lose
Ordinary timer
power, and the contact will not operate
The coil will lose power, and the count value and
Counter
contact will stay in their current state
Coil driven by OUT command None receive power
Elements driven by SET, RST
Will remain in their current state
commands
Applications commands None are actuated
MCR is the main control stop command, and is placed at the end of the main control program.
There may not be any contact commands before the MCR command.
The MC-MCR main control program commands support a nested program structure with a
maximum only 8 levels; use in the order N0–N7, please refer to the following program:
16-46
Command Description:
Ladder diagram: code:
X0
MC N0 LD X0 Load Contact a of X0
Connection of N0 common series
X1 MC N0
contact
Y0
LD X1 Load Contact a of X1
X2 OUT Y0 Drive Y0 coil
MC N1 :
Y1 Connection of N1 common series
MC N1
contact
MCR N1 LD X3 Load Contact a of X3
MCR N0 :
MCR N1 Release N1 common series contact
X10
:
MC N0
X11 :
Y10
Connection of N0 common series
MC N0
MCR N0 contact
:
Command Function
LDP Start of forward edge detection action
X0–X17 Y0–Y17 M0–M799 T0–159 C0–C79 D0–D399
Operand
     －
The LDP command has the same usage as LD, but its action is different; its function is to save
current content, while also saving the detected state of the rising edge of the contact to the
cumulative register.
Command Description:
Ladder diagram: code:
X0 X1
Y1 Start of X0 forward edge detection
LDP X0
action
Create series connection to
AND X1
contact a of X1
Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in series for the scope of usage
of each operand.
A rising edge contact will be TRUE after power is turned on if the rising edge contact is On
before power is turned on to the PLC.
Command Function
LDF Start of reverse edge detection action
X0–X17 Y0–Y17 M0–M799 T0–159 C0–C79 D0–D399
Operand
     －
The LDF command has the same usage as LD, but its action is different; its function is to save
current content while also saving the detected state of the falling edge of the contact to the
Command code: Description:
Ladder diagram:
X0 X1 Start of X0 reverse
LDF X0
Y1 edge detection action
Create series
of X1
16-47
Command Function
ANDP Forward edge detection series connection
X0–X17 Y0–Y17 M0–M799 T0–159 C0–C79 D0–D399
Operand
     －
The ANDP command used for a contact rising edge detection series connection.
Y1 X1 Forward edge
ANDP X1 detection series
connection
Command Function
ANDF Reverse edge detection series connection
X0–X17 Y0–Y17 M0–M799 T0–159 C0–C79 D0–D399
Operand
     －
The ANDF command is used for a contact falling edge detection series connection.
Y1 X1 Reverse edge
ANDF X1 detection series
connection
Command Function
ORP Forward edge detection parallel connection
X0–X17 Y0–Y17 M0–M799 T0–159 C0–C79 D0–D399
Operand
     －
The ORP command is used for a contact rising edge detection parallel connection.
X0
X1 X1 Forward edge
ORP X1 detection parallel
connection
Command Function
ORF Reverse edge detection parallel connection
X0–X17 Y0–Y17 M0–M799 T0–159 C0–C79 D0–D399
Operand
     －
The ORF command is used for contact falling edge detection parallel connection.
X0
X1 Reverse edge
X1
ORF X1 detection parallel
connection
16-48
Command Function
PLS Upper differential output
X0–X17 Y0–Y17 M0–M799 T0–159 C0–C79 D0–D399
Operand
－   －－－
Upper differential output commands. When X0=Off→On (positive edge-triggered), the
PLS command will be executed, and M0 will send one pulse, with a pulse length
consisting of one scanning period.
X0
PLS M0 LD X0 Load Contact a of X0
M0 M0 Upper differential
PLS M0
SET Y0 output
Time sequence diagram: LD M0 Load Contact a of M0
Y0 Action continues
SET Y0
(ON)
Command Function
PLF Lower differential output
X0–X17 Y0–Y17 M0–M799 T0–159 C0–C79 D0–D399
Operand
－   －－－
Lower differential output command. When X0= On→Off (negative edge-triggered), the
PLF command will be executed, and M0 will send one pulse, with pulse length
consisting of one scanning period.
X0
PLF M0 LD X0 Load Contact a of X0
M0 M0 Lower differential
PLF M0
SET Y0 output
Time sequence diagram: LD M0 Load Contact a of M0
Y0 Action continues
SET Y0
(ON)
Command Function
END Program conclusion
Operand N/A
An END command must be added to the end of a ladder diagram program or
command program. The PLC will scan from address 0 to the END command, and will
return to address 0 and begins scanning again after execution.
16-49
Command Function
NOP No action
Operand N/A
The command NOP does not perform any operation in the program. Because
execution of this command will retain the original logical operation results, it can be
used in the following situation: the NOP command can be used instead of a command
that is deleted without changing the program length.
LD X0 Load Contact b of X0
NOP No action
Command Function
INV Inverse of operation results
Operand N/A
Saves the result of the logic inversion operation prior to the INV command in the
X0
Inverse of operation
INV
results
Command Function
P Index
Operand P0–P255
Pointer P is used to subprogram call command API 01 CALL. User does not require
starting from zero, but the number cannot be used repeatedly, otherwise an
unpredictable error will occur.
Command code: Description:
Ladder diagram:
CALL P10 CALL P10 Call command CALL to
P10
X1
P10 Y1 ：
P10 Pointer P10
16-50
16-6-3 Overview of application commands

Command code P STEPS
Classification API Function
16 bit 32 bit command 16 bit 32 bit
01 CALL -  Call subprogram 3 -
Circuit control 2 SRET - - Conclusion of subprogram 1 -
06 FEND - - Conclusion a main program 1 -
10 CMP DCMP  Compares set output 7 13
11 ZCP DZCP  Range comparison 9 17
Send
12 MOV DMOV  Data movement 5 9
comparison
13 SMOV DSMOV  Nibble movement 11 21
15 BMOV –  Send all 7 –
18 BCD DBCD  BIN to BCD transformation 5 9
19 BIN DBIN  BCD to BIN transformation 5 9
20 ADD DADD  BIN addition 7 13
Four logical 21 SUB DSUB  BIN subtraction 7 13
operations 22 MUL DMUL  BIN multiplication 7 13
23 DIV DDIV  BIN division 7 13
24 INC DINC  BIN add one 3 5
25 DEC DDEC  BIN subtract one 3 5
Rotational 30 ROR DROR  Right rotation 5 –
displacement 31 ROL DROL  Left rotation 5 –
40 ZRST –  Clear range 5 -
41 DECO DDECO  Decoder 7 13
42 ENCO DENCO  Encoder 7 13
Data Process 43 SUM DSUM  ON bit number 5 9
44 BON DBON  ON bit judgement 7 13
BIN whole number → binary
49 FLT DFLT  floating point number 5 9
transformation
– Comparison of binary floating
110 DECMP  – 13
point numbers
– Comparison of binary floating
111 DEZCP  – 17
point number range
116 – DRAD  Angle → Diameter – 9
117 – DDEG  Diameter → angle – 9
– Binary floating point number
120 DEADD  – 13
addition
121 DESUB  – 13
subtraction
122 DEMUL  – 13
multiplication
123 DEDIV  – 13
division
Floating point
operation 124 DEXP  – 9
obtain exponent
125 DLN  – 9
obtain logarithm
127 DESQR  – 9
find square root
Binary floating point number →
129 INT DINT  BIN whole number 5 9
transformation
130 DSIN  – 9
SIN operation
131 DCOS  – 9
COS operation
132 DTAN  – 9
TAN operation
16-51

133 DASIN  – 9
ASIN operation
134 DACOS  – 9
ACOS operation
135 DATAN  – 9
ATAN operation
136 DSINH  – 9
SINH operation
137 DCOSH  – 9
COSH operation
138 DTANH  – 9
TANH operation
Other 147 SWAP DSWAP  Exchange the up/down 8 bits 3 5
communicatio
150 MODRW –  MODBUS read/write 7 –
n
160 TCMP –  Compare calendar data 11 –
161 TZCP –  Compare calendar data range 9 –
Calendar 162 TADD –  Calendar data addition 7 –
163 TSUB –  Calendar data subtraction 7 –
166 TRD –  Calendar data read 3 –
170 GRY DGRY  BIN→GRY code transformation 5 9
GRAY code GRY code →BIN
171 GBIN DGBIN  5 9
transformation
Contact form logical operation
215 LD& DLD& - 5 9
LD#
216 LD| DLD| - 5 9
LD#
217 LD^ DLD^ - 5 9
LD#
218 AND& DAND& - 5 9
AND#
Contact form
logical 219 ANDl DANDl - 5 9
AND#
operation
220 AND^ DAND^ - 5 9
AND#
221 OR& DOR& - 5 9
OR#
222 OR| DOR| - 5 9
OR#
223 OR^ DOR^ - 5 9
OR#
224 LD＝ DLD＝ - Contact form compare LD* 5 9
225 LD＞ DLD＞ - Contact form compare LD* 5 9
226 LD＜ DLD＜ - Contact form compare LD* 5 9
228 LD＜＞ DLD＜＞ - Contact form compare LD* 5 9
229 LD＜＝ DLD＜＝ - Contact form compare LD* 5 9
230 LD＞＝ DLD＞＝ - Contact form compare LD* 5 9
232 AND＝ DAND＝ - Contact form compare AND* 5 9
233 AND＞ DAND＞ - Contact form compare AND* 5 9
Contact form 234 AND＜ DAND＜ - Contact form compare AND* 5 9
compare
236 AND＜＞ DAND＜＞ - Contact form compare AND* 5 9
command
237 AND＜＝ DAND＜＝ - Contact form compare AND* 5 9
238 AND＞＝ DAND＞＝ - Contact form compare AND* 5 9
240 OR＝ DOR＝ - Contact form compare OR* 5 9
241 OR＞ DOR＞ - Contact form compare OR* 5 9
242 OR＜ DOR＜ - Contact form compare OR* 5 9
244 OR＜＞ DOR＜＞ - Contact form compare OR* 5 9
245 OR＜＝ DOR＜＝ - Contact form compare OR* 5 9
246 OR＞＝ DOR＞＝ - Contact form compare OR* 5 9
16-52

Floating point number contact
275 - FLD＝ - - 9
form compare LD*
Floating point Floating point number contact
276 - FLD＞ - - 9
contact form form compare LD*
277 - FLD＜ - - 9
form compare LD*
278 - FLD＜＞ - - 9
form compare LD*
279 - FLD＜＝ - - 9
form compare LD*
280 - FLD＞＝ - - 9
form compare LD*
281 - FAND＝ - - 9
form compare AND*
282 - FAND＞ - - 9
form compare AND*
283 - FAND＜ - - 9
form compare AND*
284 - FAND＜＞ - - 9
form compare AND*
Compare Floating point number contact
285 - FAND＜＝ - - 9
command form compare AND*
286 - FAND＞＝ - - 9
form compare AND*
287 - FOR＝ - - 9
form compare OR*
288 - FOR＞ - - 9
form compare OR*
289 - FOR＜ - - 9
form compare OR*
290 - FOR＜＞ - - 9
form compare OR*
291 - FOR＜＝ - - 9
form compare OR*
292 - FOR＞＝ - - 9
form compare OR*
139 RPR –  Read servo parameter 5 –
140 WPR –  Write servo parameter 5 –
141 FPID –  Drive PID control mode 9 –
142 FREQ –  Drive torque control mode 7 –
262 – DPOS  Set target - 5
263 TORQ –  Set target torque 5 -
 Read CANopen slave station
Drive special 261 CANRX – 9 -
data
command
 Write CANopen slave station
264 CANTX – 9 -
data
 Refresh special D
265 CANFLS – 3 -
corresponding to CANopen
320 ICOMR DICOMR  Internal communications read 9 17
321 ICOMW DICOMW  Internal communications write 9 17
323 WPRA – - RAM write in drive parameters 5 -
16-53
16-6-4 Detailed explanation of applications commands

API
CALL S Call subprogram
01 P
Bit device Word device 16-bit command (3 STEP)
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D CALL Continuous CALLP Pulse
execution type execution type
Notes on operand usage: 32-bit command

The S operand can designate P －－－－
C2000 series device: The S operand can designate P0-P63
Flag signal: none
 S：Call subprogram pointer.
 Write the subprogram after the FEND command.

 The subprogram must end after the SRET command.
 Refer to the FEND command explanation and sample content for detailed
command functions.
API
SRET － Conclusion of subprogram
02 P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D Continuous
FEND －－
execution type

No operand －－－－
A contact-driven command is not needed
Flag signal: none
 A contact-driven command is not needed. Automatically returns next

command after CALL command
 Indicates end of subprogram. After end of subprogram, SRET returns to main
program, and executes next command after the original call subprogram CALL
command.
 Refer to the FEND command explanation and sample content for detailed
command functions.
16-54
API
FEND － Conclusion a main program
06
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D Continuous
FEND －－
execution type

No operand －－－－
A contact-driven command is not needed
Flag signal: none
 This command indicates the end of the main program. It is the same as
the END command when the PLC executes this command.
 The CALL command program must be written after the FEND command,
and the SRET command added to the end of the subprogram.
 When using the FEND command, an END command is also needed.
However, the END command must be placed at the end, after the main
program and subprogram.
16-55
API
CMP S1 S2 D Compares set output
10 D P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D CMP Continuous CMPP Pulse
S1 * * * * * * * * execution type execution type
S2 * * * * * * * *
D * * 32-bit command (13 STEP)
DCMP Continuous DCMPP Pulse
Notes on operand usage:
The operand D occupies three consecutive points Flag signal: none
 S1 : Compare value 1. S2 : Compare value 2. D : Results of comparison.
 Compares the size of the content of operand S1 and S2 ; the results of
comparison are expressed in D .

 Size comparison is performed algebraically. All data is compared in the form of
numerical binary values. Because this is a 16-bit command, when b15 is 1, this
indicates a negative number.
 When the designated device is Y0, it automatically occupies Y0, Y1 and Y2.
 When X10=On, the CMP command executes, and Y0, Y1 or Y2 will be On. When
X10=Off, the CMP command will not execute, and the state of Y0, Y1 and Y2 will
remain in the state prior to X10=Off.
 If ≥, ≤, or ≠ results are needed, they can be obtained via series/parallel
connections of Y0–Y2.
 To clear results of comparison, use the RST or ZRST command.

X10 X10
RST M0 ZRST M0 M2
RST M1
RST M2
16-56
API
ZCP S1 S2 S D Range comparison
11 D P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D ZCP Continuous ZCPP Pulse
S2 * * * * * * * *
S * * * * * * * * 32-bit command (17 STEP)
D * * DZCP Continuous DZCPP Pulse
The content value of operand S1 is less than the content value of Flag signal: none
S2 operand
The operand D occupies three consecutive points
 S1 : Lower limit of range comparison. S2 : Upper limit of range comparison.

S : Comparative value. D : Results of comparison.
 When the comparative value S is compared with the lower limit S1 and
upper limitS2 , the results of comparison are expressed in D .
 When lower limit S1 > upper limit S2 , the command will use the lower limit
S1 to perform comparison with the upper and lower limit.
 Size comparison is performed algebraically. All data is compared in the form of
numerical binary values. Because this is a 16-bit command, when b15 is 1, this
indicates a negative number.
 When the designated device is M0, it automatically occupies M0, M1 and M2.
 When X0=On, the ZCP command executes, and M0, M1 or M2 will be On. When
X0=Off, the ZCP command will not execute, and the state of M0, M1 or M2 will
remain in the state prior to X0=Off.
 If ≥, ≤, or ≠ results are needed, they can be obtained via series/parallel
connections of M0–M2.
 To clear results of comparison, use the RST or ZRST command.

X0 X0
RST M0 ZRST M0 M2
RST M1
RST M2
16-57
API
MOV S D Data movement
12 D P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D MOV Continuous MOVP Pulse
S * * * * * * * * execution type execution type
D * * * * *
Notes on operand usage: none 32-bit command (9 STEP)
DMOV Continuous DMOVP Pulse
Flag signal:
 S : Data source. D : Destination of data movement.
 When this command is executed, the content of S will be directly moved to

D . When the command is not executed, the content of D will not change.
 When X0=Off, the content of D10 will not change; if X0=On, the value K10 will be
sent to data register D10.
 When X1=Off, the content of D10 will not change; if X1=On, the current value of
T0 will be sent to data register D10.
X0
MOV K10 D0
X1
MOV T0 D10
16-58
API n
SMOV S m1 m2 D Nibble movement
13 D P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D MOV Continuous SMOVP Pulse
D * * * * *
DSMOV Continuous DSMOV Pulse
execution type P execution type
Flag signal: M1168
S : Data source. m1
 : The data source transfers starting bit number.
m2
：The data source transfers individual bit number. D : Transfer destination.
n
Transferring starting bit number of the destination.
 BCD mode (M1168 = Off):
SMOV enables and operates BCD under this mode, the operation is similar to the
way SMOV operates decimal numbers. The command copies specific bit number
of arithmetic element S (S is a 4-figure decimal number), and sends the bit
number to arithmetic element D (D is also a 4-figure decimal number). The current
data on the target register will be covered.
 m1 range: 1–4
 m2 range: 1–m1 (m2 cannot be larger than m1)
 n range: m2–4 (n cannot be smaller than m2)
 When M1168 = Off (BCD mode), X0 is ON, the instruction transfers two digits of
the decimal number starting from the fourth digit of the decimal number (the digit
in the thousands place of the decimal number) in D10 to the two digits of the
decimal number starting from the third digit of the decimal number (the digit in the
hundreds place of the decimal number) in D20. After the instruction is executed,
the digits in the thousands place of the decimal number (103) and the ones place
of the decimal number (100) in D20 are unchanged.
16-59
 When M1168 is On (BIN mode), and the SMOV command is executed, D10 and
D20 do not change in BCD mode, but send 4 digits as a unit in BIN mode.
16-60
API
BMOV S D n Send all
15 P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D BMOV Continuous BMOVP Pulse
S * * * * * * execution type execution type
D * * * * *
n * * * * 32-bit command
Notes on operand usage: －－－－
n operand scope n ＝ 1 to 512
Flag signal: none
 S : Initiate source device. D : Initiate destination device. n : Send block

length.
 The content of n registers starting from the initial number of the device designated
by S will be sent to the n registers starting from the initial number of the
device designated by n ; if the number of points referred to by n exceeds the
range used by that device, only points within the valid range will be sent.
 When X10=On, the content of registers D0–D3 will be sent to the four registers
D20 to D23.
 If the designated bit devices KnX, KnY, and KnM are sent, S and D must
have the same number of nibbles, which implies that n must be identical.
 In order to prevent overlap between the transmission addresses of two operands,

which would cause confusion, make sure that the addresses designated by the
two operands have different sizes, as shown below:
When S > D , send in the order → →.
X10
D20 1 D19
BMOV D20 D19 K3 2
D21 D20
3
D22 D21
When S < D , send in the order → →.
X11
D10 3 D11
BMOV D10 D11 K3 2
D11 D12
1
D12 D13
16-61
API
BCD S D BIN to BCD transformation
18 D P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D BCD Continuous BCDP Pulse
D * * * * *
DBCD Continuous DBCDP Pulse
Flag signal: none

 S : Data source. D : Destination of data movement.
 The content of data source S (BIN value, 0–9999) executes

BCD transformation and saves in D .
 Arithmetic elements S and D use the F device, it can only use 16-bit command.
 When X0 is ON, and the BIN value of D10 is transformed to BCD value, the digit is
saved in 4-bit element of K1Y0 (Y0–Y3).
X0
BCD D10 K1Y0
 If D10 = 001E (Hex) = 0030 (Decimal), the executed result will be Y0–Y3=0000
(BIN).
16-62
API
BIN S D BCD to BIN transformation
19 D P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D BIN Continuous BINP Pulse
D * * * * *
DBIN Continuous DBINP Pulse
Flag signal: none

 S : Data source. D : Transformation result.
 The content of data source S (BCD: 0–9,999) executes BIN transformation

and saves in D .
 Valid number range of the data source S: BCD (0–9,999), DBCD (0–99,999,999).
 When X0 is ON, and the BCD value of K1X20 is transformed to BIN value, the
result saves in D10.
X0
BIN K1X20 D10
 When PLC reads a BCD type switch-off from the outside, it has to use the BIN
command to transform the read data to BIN value, then saves the value into PLC.
16-63
API
ADD S1 S2 D BIN addition
20 D P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D ADD Continuous ADDP Pulse
S2 * * * * * * * *
D * * * * * 32-bit command (13 STEP)
Notes on operand usage: none DADD Continuous DADDP Pulse
Flag signal: M1020 Zero flag

M1021 Borrow flag
M1022 Carry flag
Please refer to the following
supplementary explanation
 S1 : Augend. S2 : Addend. D : Sum.
 Using two data sources: The result of adding S1 and S2 using the BIN
method will be stored in D .
 The highest bit of any data is symbolized as bit 0 indicating (positive) 1 indicating
(negative), enabling the use of algebraic addition operations. (for instance:
3+(-9)=-6)
 Flag changes connected with the addition.
1. When calculation results are 0, the zero flag M1020 will be On.
2. When calculation results are less than –32,768, the borrow flag M1021 will be
On.
3. When calculation results are greater than 32,767, the carry flag M1022 will be
On.
 16-bit BIN addition: When X0=On, the result of the content of addend D0 plus the
content of augend D10 will exist in the content of D20.
X0
ADD D0 D10 D20
 Relationship between flag actions and negative/positive numbers:
16-64
API
SUB S1 S2 D BIN subtraction
21 D P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D SUB Continuous SUBP Pulse
S2 * * * * * * * *
Notes on operand usage: none Continuous Pulse
DSUB DSUBP
Flag signal: M1020 Zero flag

M1021 Borrow flag
M1022 Carry flag
Please refer to the following
supplementary explanation
 S1 : Minuend. S2 : Subtrahend. D : Difference.
 Using two data sources: The result of subtraction of S1 and S2 using the
BIN method is stored in D .
 The highest bit of any data is symbolized as bit 0 indicating (positive) 1 indicating
(negative), enabling the use of algebraic subtraction operations.
 Flag changes connected with subtraction.
1. When calculation results are 0, the zero flag M1020 will be On.
2. When calculation results are less than –32,768, the borrow flag M1021 will be
On.
3. When calculation results are greater than 32,767, the carry flag M1022 will be
On.
 16-bit BIN subtraction: When X0=On, the content of D10 is subtracted from the
content of D0, and the difference is stored in D20.
X0
SUB D0 D10 D20
16-65
API
MUL S1 S2 D BIN multiplication
22 D P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D MUL Continuous MULP Pulse
S2 * * * * * * * *
Notes on operand usage: DMUL Continuous DMULP Pulse
The 16-bit command operand D will occupy 2 consecutive points execution type execution type
Flag signal: none
 S1 : Multiplicand. S2 : Multiplier. D : Product.
 Using two data sources: When S1 and S2 are multiplied using the BIN
method, the product is stored in D .
16-bit BIN multiplication operation:
When D is a bit device, K1–K4 can be designated as a hexadecimal number,

which will occupy 2 consecutive units.
 When 16-bit DO is multiplied by 16-bit D10, the result will be a 32-bit product; the
upper 16 bits will be stored in D21, and the lower 16 bits will be stored in D20.
Whether the bit at the farthest left is Off or On will indicate the sign of the result.
X0
MUL D0 D10 D20
MUL D0 D10 K8M0
16-66
API
DIV S1 S2 D BIN division
23 D P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D DIV Continuous DIVP Pulse
S2 * * * * * * * *
Notes on operand usage: DDIV Continuous DDIVP Pulse
The 16-bit command operand D will occupy 2 consecutive points execution type execution type
Flag signal: none
 S1 : Dividend. S2 : Divisor. D : Quotient and remainder.
 Using two data sources: The quotient and remainder will be stored in D when
S1 and S2 are subjected to division using the BIN method. The sign bit for
S1 , S2 and D must be kept in mind when performing a 16-bit operation.
16-bit BIN division:
If D is a bit device, K1–K4 can be designated 16 bits, which will occupy 2

consecutive units and yield the quotient and remainder.
 When X0=On, the quotient resulting from division of dividend D0 by divisor D10
will be placed in D20, and the remainder will be placed in D21. Whether the
highest bit is Off or On will indicate the sign of the result.
X0
DIV D0 D10 D20
DIV D0 D10 K4Y0
16-67
API
INC D BIN add one
24 D P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D INC Continuous INCP Pulse
D * * * * * execution type execution type
Notes on operand usage: none
32-bit command (5 STEP)
DINC Continuous DINCP Pulse
Flag signal: none
 D : Destination device.
 If a command is not the pulse execution type, when the command is executed, the
program will add 1 to the content of device D for each scanning cycle.
 This command is ordinarily used as a pulse execution type command (INCP).
 During 16-bit operation, 32,767 +1 will change the value to -32,768. During 32 bit
operation, 2,147,483,647 +1 will change the value to -2,147,483,648.
 When X0=Off→On, 1 is automatically added to the content of D0.
X0
INCP D0
16-68
API
DEC D BIN subtract one
25 D P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D DEC Continuous DECP Pulse
DDEC Continuous DDECP Pulse
Flag signal: none
 D : Destination device.
 If a command is not the pulse execution type, when the command is executed, the
program will add 1 to the content of device D for each scanning cycle.
 This command is ordinarily used as a pulse execution type command (DECP).
 During 16-bit operation, -32,768 minus 1 will change the value to 32,767. During
32 bit operation, -2,147,483,648 minus 1 will change the value to -2,147,483,647.
 When X0=Off→On, 1 is automatically subtracted from the content of D0.
X0
DECP D0
16-69
API
ROR D n Right rotation
30 D P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D ROR Continuous RORP Pulse
n * *
Notes on operand usage: DROR Continuous DRORP Pulse
Only K4 (16-bit) will be valid if the operand D is designated as KnY execution type execution type
or KnM.
n operand n=K1-K16 (16-bit) Flag signal: M1022 Carry flag
 D : Device to be rotated.
n : Number of bits for one rotation.
 Rotates the device designated by D to the right n bits.

 This command is ordinarily used as a pulse execution type command (RORP).
 When X0=Off→On, 4 of the 16 bits in D10 specify a right rotation; the content of
the bit indicated with * (see figure below) will be sent to the carry flag signal
M1022.
16-70
API
ROL D n Left rotation
31 D P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D ROL Continuous ROLP Pulse
n * *
Notes on operand usage: 32-bit command (9 STEP)
Only K4 (16-bit) will be valid if the operand D is designated as KnY DROL Continuous DROLP Pulse
or KnM. execution type execution type
n operand n=1 to 16 (16-bit)
Flag signal: M1022 Carry flag
 D : Device to be rotated. n : Number of bits for one rotation.
 Rotates the device designated by D to the left n bits.

 This command is ordinarily used as a pulse execution type command (ROLP).
 When X0=Off→On, 4 of the 16 bits in D10 specify a left rotation; the content of the
bit indicated with * (see figure below) will be sent to the carry flag signal M1022.
16-71
API
ZRST D1 D2 Clear range
40 P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D ZRST Continuous ZRSTP Pulse
D1 * * * * * execution type execution type
D2 * * * * *
Number of operand D1 operand ≤ number of operand D2 －－－－
Operands D1, D2 must designate the same type of device
Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in Flag signal: none
series for the scope of device usage
 D1: Clear range's initial device. D2: Clear range's final device.
 When the number of operand D1 > number of operand D2, only the operand
designated by D2 will be cleared.
 When X0 is On, auxiliary relays M300–M399 will be cleared and changed to Off.
 When X1 is On, 16-bit counters C0–C127 will all be cleared. (Writes 0, and clears
and changes contact and coil to Off).
 When X10 is On, timer T0–T127 will all be cleared. (Writes 0, and clears and
changes contact and coil to Off).
 When X3 is On, the data in data registers D0–D100 will be cleared and set as 0.
X0
ZRST M300 M399
X1
ZRST C0 C127
X10
ZRST T0 T127
X3
ZRST D0 D100
 Devices can independently use the clear command (RST), such as bit device Y, M
and word device T, C, D.
X0
RST M0
RST T0
RST Y0
16-72
API
DECO S D n Decoder
41 D P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D DECO Continuous DECOP Pulse
D * * * * * * *
n * * 32-bit command (13 STEP)
Notes on operand usage: none DDECO Continuous DDECOP Pulse
Flag signal: none
 S : Decoding source device. D : Device that saves the decoding result.

n
: Length of decoding bit.
 Decodes with the lower “n” bit, and saves the length of “2n” bit in D.
 This command usually uses pulse execution type command (DECOP).
 When D is the bit device, n = 1–8, when D is the word device, n = 1–4.
 When Dis the bit device, the valid range of n is 0< n ≦8. If n = 0 or n > 8, a fault
will occur.
 When n = 8, the maximum decoding will be 28 = 256 points.
 When M200 switches from Off to On, the content of X0–X2 is decoded to
M100–M107.
 If S = 3, M103 (the third digit starting from M100) = On.
 When the command is executed, M200 turns to Off. The ones that are decoded
and outputted act as usual.
M200
DE COP X0 M100 K3
X2 X1 X0
0 1 1
4 2 1
3
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
M107 M106 M105 M104 M103 M102 M101 M100
 When D is word device, the valid range of n is 0< n ≦4. If n = 0 or n > 4, the fault
occurs.
 When M200 switches from Off to On, the content of D10 (b2–b0) is decoded to
D20 (b7–b0). The unused digits (b15–b8) of D20 become 0.
 The lower 3 digits of D10 are decoded and saved in the lower 8 digits of D20, the
upper 8 digits are 0.
 When the command is executed, M200 turns to Off. The ones that are decoded
and outputted act as usual.
M200
DE COP D10 D20 K3
16-73
API
ENCO S D n Encoder
42 D P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D ENCO Continuous ENCOP Pulse
D * * * * *
Notes on operand usage: none DENCO Continuous DENCOP Pulse
Flag signal: none
 S : Encoding source device. D : Device that saves the encoding result.

n
: Length of encoding bit.
 Encodes the data of lower “2n” bit length from encoding source device S, and
saves the encoding result in D.
 If multiple digits of encoding source device are 1, the command will process the
first digit starting from high digit.
 This command usually uses pulse execution type command (ENCOP).
 When S is the bit device, n = 1–8, when S is the word device, n = 1–4.
 When S is the bit device, the valid range of n is 0< n ≦8. If n = 0 or n > 8, a fault
will occur.
 When X0 switches from Off to On, the content of 23 digit (M0–M7) is encoded and
saved in the lower 3 digits (b2–b0). The unused digits (b15–b3) in D0 become 0.
 When the command is executed, X0 turns to Off. The data in D is unchanged.
X0
ENCOP M0 D0 K3
 When S is word device, the valid range of n is 0< n ≦4. If n = 0 or n > 4, the fault
occurs.
 When X0 switches from Off to On, 23 digit data of D10 (b0–b7) is encoded and
saved in the lower 3 digits (b2–b0) of D20. The unused digits (b15–b3) of D20
become 0. (b8–b15 in D10 are invalid data)
 When the command is executed, X0 turns to Off. The data in D is unchanged.
M200
DE COP D10 D20 K3
16-74
API
SUM ON bit number
43 D P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D SUM Continuous SUMP Pulse
D * * *
DSUM Continuous DSUMP Pulse
Flag signal: M1020
 S : Source device. D : Destination of saving counter values.

 The total amount of all digits that is “1” in S will be saved in D.
 D will use 2 registers when use the 32-bit command.
 Arithmetic elements S and D use F device, and can only use 16-bit command.
 If there is no bit is ON, the flag signal M1020 will be ON.
 When M200 = On, the total amount of content “1” digit in D0’s 16-bit command will
be saved in D2.
M200
S UM D0 D2
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 3
D0 D2
16-75
API
BON S D n ON bit judgement
44 D P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D BON Continuous BONP Pulse
D * * * * *
Notes on operand usage: none DBON Continuous DBONP Pulse
Flag signal: none
 S : Source device. D : Destination of saving judging result. n

: assign
judged digit (numbering from 0)
 The status of specific digit from source device is shown on target position.
 Arithmetic element S uses F device, and can only use the 16-bit command.
 The valid range of arithmetic element n: n = 0–15 (16-bit), n = 0–31 (32-bit).
 When X0 = On, if the 15th digit of D0 is “1”, M0 is On. If it is “0”, M0 is Off.

 When X0 turns to Off, M0 remains previous status.
X0
BON D0 M0 K15
b15 b0
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 M0=Off
D0
b15 b0
1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 M0=On
D0
16-76
API BIN whole number → binary decimal

FLT
49 D P transformation
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D FLT Continuous FLTP Pulse
S * * * * * execution type execution type
D * * * * *
Notes on operand usage: Please refer to the function specifications 32-bit command (9 STEP)
table for each device in series for the scope of device usage DFLT Continuous DFLTP Pulse
The operand D will occupy 2 consecutive points execution type execution type
Flag signal: none
 S: Transformation source device. D: Device storing transformation results.

 Transforms BIN whole number into a binary decimal value.
 When M200 is On, converts the whole number of values corresponding to D0 and
D1 into floating point numbers, which are placed in D20 and D21.
16-77
API
ECMP Comparison of binary floating point numbers
110 D P
Bit device Word device 16-bit command
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D －－－－
S1 * * *
S2 * * * 32-bit command (13 STEP)
D * * * DECMP Continuous DECMP Pulse
Notes on operand usage: execution type P execution type
The operand D occupies three consecutive points
 S1: Comparison of binary floating point numbers value 1. S2: Comparison of
binary floating point numbers value 2. D: Results of comparison, occupies 3
consecutive points.
 When binary floating point number 1 is compared with comparative binary
floating point number 2, the result of comparison (>, =, <) will be expressed in D.
 If the source operand S1 or S2 designates a constant K or H, the command will
transform the constant to a binary floating-point number for the purpose of
comparison.
 When the designated device is M10, it will automatically occupy M10–M12.
 When X0=On, the DECMP command executes, and one of M10–M12 will be On.
When X0=Off, the DECMP command will not execute, and M10–M12 will remain
in the X0=Off state.
 If results in the form of ≥, ≤, or ≠ are needed, they can be obtained by series and
parallel connection of M10–M12.
 Please use the RST or ZRST command to clear the result.
16-78
API
EZCP Comparison of binary floating point number range
111 D P
Bit device Word device
16-bit command
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D
－－－－
S1 * * *
S2 * * *
S * * *
DEZCP Continuous DEZCP Pulse
D * *
execution type P execution type
The operand D occupies three consecutive points Flag signal: none
Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in
 S1: Lower limit of binary floating point number in range comparison. S2: Upper
limit of binary floating point number in range comparison. S: Comparison of
binary floating point numerical values. D: Results of comparison, occupies 3
consecutive points.
 Comparison of binary floating point numerical value S with binary floating point
number lower limit value S1 and binary floating point number upper limit value S2;
the results of comparison are expressed in D.
transform the constant to a binary floating-point number for the purpose of
comparison.
 When the lower limit binary floating point number S1 is greater than the upper
limit binary floating point number S2, a command will be issued to perform
comparison with the upper and lower limits using the binary floating point number
lower limit value S1.
 When the designated device is M0, it will automatically occupy M0–M2.
 When X0=On, the DEZCP command will be executed, and one of M0–M2 will be
On. When X0=Off, the EZCP command will not execute, and M0–M2 will
continue in the X0=Off state.
 Please use the RST or ZRST command to clear the result.
16-79
API
RAD Angle → Diameter
116 D P
S * * *
D * 32-bit command (9 STEP)
Notes on operand usage: DRAD Continuous DRADP Pulse
Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in execution type execution type
Flag signal: none
 S: data source (angle). D: result of transformation (diameter).

 Uses the following formula to convert angles to radians.
 Diameter ＝Angle × (π/180)
 When X0=On, the angle of the designated binary floating point number (D1, D0)
will be converted to radians and stored in (D11, D10), with the content consisting
of a binary floating point number.
X0
DRAD D0 D10
16-80
API
DEG Diameter → angle
117 D P
S * * *
Notes on operand usage: DDEG Continuous DDEGP Pulse
Flag signal: none
 S: data source (diameter). D: results of transformation (angle).

 Uses the following formula to convert radians to an angle.
 Angle ＝Diameter × (180/π)
 When X0=On, angle of the designated binary floating point number (D1, D0) in
radians will be converted to an angle and stored in (D11, D10), with the content
consisting of a binary floating point number.
X0
DDEG D0 D10
16-81
API
EADD Adding binary floating point numbers
120 D P
S1 * * *
D * DEADD Continuous DEADDP Pulse
Notes on operand usage: execution type execution type
series for the scope of device usage Flag signal: none
 S1: addend. S2: augend. D: sum.

 When the content of the register designated by S2 is added to the content of the
register designated by S1, and the result is stored in the register designated by D.
Addition is performed entirely using binary floating-point numbers.
transform that constant into a binary floating point number for use in addition.
 In the situation when S1 and S2 designate identical register numbers, if a
"continuous execution" command is employed, when conditional contact is On,
the register will perform addition once during each scan. Pulse execution type
commands (DEADDP) are generally used under ordinary circumstances.
 When X0=On, a binary floating point number (D1, D0) will be added to a binary
floating point number (D3, D2), and the results stored in (D11, D10).
X0
DEADD D0 D2 D10
 When X2 =On, a binary floating point number (D11, D10) will be added to K1234
(which has been automatically converted to a binary floating-point number), and
the results stored in (D21, D20).
X2
DEADD D10 K1234 D20
16-82
API
ESUB Subtraction of binary floating point numbers
121 D P
S1 * * *
D * DESUB Continuous DESUBP Pulse
 S1: minuend. S2: subtrahend. D: difference.

 When the content of the register designated by S2 is subtracted from the content
of the register designated by S1, the difference will be stored in the register
designated by D; subtraction is performed entirely using binary floating-point
numbers.
transform that constant into a binary floating point number for use in subtraction.
the register will perform addition once during each scan. Pulse execution type
commands (DESUBP) are generally used under ordinary circumstances.
 When X0=On, a binary floating point number (D1, D0) will be subtracted to a
binary floating point number (D3, D2), and the results stored in (D11, D10).
X0
DESUB D0 D2 D10
 When X2 =On, the binary floating point number (D1, D0) will be subtracted from
K1234 (which has been automatically converted to a binary floating-point
number), and the results stored in (D11, D10).
X2
DESUB K1234 D0 D10
16-83
API
EMUL Multiplication of binary floating point numbers
122 D P
S1 * * *
D * DEMUL Continuous DEMULP Pulse
 S1: multiplicand. S2: multiplier. D: product.

 When the content of the register designated by S1 is multiplied by the content of
the register designated by S2, the product will be stored in the register
designated by D; multiplication is performed entirely using binary floating-point
numbers.
transform that constant into a binary floating point number for use in
multiplication.
the register will perform multiplication once during each scan. Pulse execution
type commands (DEMULP) are generally used under ordinary circumstances.
 When X1=On, the binary floating point number (D1, D0) will be multiplied by the
binary floating point number (D11, D10), and the product will be stored in the
register designated by (D21, D20).
X1
DEMUL D0 D10 D20
 When X2 =On, the binary floating point number (D1, D0) will be multiplied from
K1234 (which has been automatically converted to a binary floating-point
X2
DEMUL K1234 D0 D10
16-84
API
EDIV Division of binary floating point numbers
123 D P
S1 * * *
D * DEDIV Continuous DEDIVP Pulse
 S1: dividend. S2: divisor. D: quotient and remainder.

 When the content of the register designated by S1 is divided by the content of the
register designated by S2, the quotient will be stored in the register designated
by D; division is performed entirely using binary floating-point numbers.
transform that constant into a binary floating point number for use in division.
 When X1=On, the binary floating point number (D1, D0) will be divided by the
binary floating point number (D11, D10), and the quotient stored in the register
designated by (D21, D20).
X1
DEDIV D0 D10 D20
 When X2=On, the binary floating point number (D1, D0) will be divided by
K1,234 (which has been automatically converted to a binary floating-point
X2
DEDIV D0 K1234 D10
16-85
API
EXP Binary floating point number obtain exponent
124 D P
S * * *
Notes on operand usage: DEXP Continuous DEXPP Pulse
Flag signal: none
 S: operation source device. D: operation results device.

 Taking e =2.71828 as a base, S is the exponent in the EXP operation.
 [ D +1，D ]=EXP [ S +1，S ]
 Valid regardless of whether the content of S has a positive or negative value.

The designated register D must have a 32-bit data format. This operation is
performed using floating-point numbers, and S must therefore be converted to a
floating point number.
 Content of operand D =e S ; e=2.71828, S is the designated source data
 When M0 is On, the value of (D1, D0) will be converted to a binary floating point
number, which will be stored in register (D11, D10).
 When M1 is On, the EXP operation is performed on the exponent of (D11, D10);
its value is a binary floating point number stored in register (D21, D20).
M0
DFLT D0 D10
M1
DEXP D10 D20
16-86
API
LN Binary floating point number obtain logarithm
125 D P
S * * *
Notes on operand usage: DLN Continuous DLNP Pulse
Flag signal: none
 S: operation source device. D: operation results device.

 Taking e =2.71828 as a base, S is the exponent in the EXP operation.
 [ D +1，D ]=EXP [ S +1，S ]
 Valid regardless of whether the content of S has a positive or negative value.

The designated register D must have a 32-bit data format. This operation is
performed using floating-point numbers, and S must therefore be converted to a
 Content of operand D =e S ; e=2.71828， S is the designated source data
 When M0 is On, the value of (D1, D0) will be converted to a binary floating point
number, which will be stored in register (D11, D10).
 When M1 is On, the EXP operation is performed on the exponent of (D11, D10);
its value is a binary floating point number stored in register (D21, D20).
M0
DFLT D0 D10
M1
DLN D10 D20
16-87
API
ESQR Binary floating point number find square root
127 D P
S * * *
Notes on operand usage: DESQR Continuous DESQR Pulse
Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in execution type P execution type
Flag signal: none
 S: source device for which square root is desired D: result of finding square root.
 When the square root is taken of the content of the register designated by S, the
result is temporarily stored in the register designated by D. Taking square roots
is performed entirely using binary floating-point numbers.
 If the source operand S refers to a constant K or H, the command will transform
that constant into a binary floating point number for use in the operation.
 When X0=On, the square root is taken of the binary floating point number (D1,
D0), and the result is stored in the register designated by (D11, D10).
X0
DESQR D0 D10
 When X2 =On, the square root is taken of K1,234 (which has been automatically
converted to a binary floating-point number), and the results stored in (D11,
D10).
X2
DESQR K1234 D10
16-88
API Binary floating point number → BIN whole

INT
129 D P number transformation
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D INT Continuous INTP Pulse
S * execution type execution type
D *
Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in DINT Continuous DINTP Pulse
series for the scope of device usage execution type execution type
Flag signal: none
 S: the source device to be transformed. D: results of transformation.

 The content of the register designated by S is transformed from a binary floating
point number format into a BIN whole number, and is temporarily stored in D. The
BIN whole number floating point number will be discarded.
 The action of this command is the opposite of that of command API 49 (FLT).
 When X0=On, the binary floating point number (D1, D0) is transformed into a
BIN whole number, and the result is stored in (D10); the BIN whole number
floating point number will be discarded.
X0
DINT D0 D10
16-89
API
SIN Binary floating point number SIN operation
130 D P
S * * *
Notes on operand usage: DSIN Continuous DSINP Pulse
Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in series execution type execution type
for the scope of device usage
Flag signal: none
 S: the designated source value. D: the SIN value result.

 S is the designated source in radians.
 The value in radians (RAD) is equal to (angle ×π/180).
 The SIN obtained from the source value designated by S is stored in D.
The following figure displays the relationship between the arc and SIN results:
 When X0=On, the SIN value of the designated binary floating point number (D1,
D0) in radians (RAD) will be stored in (D11, D10), with the content consisting of a
binary floating point number.
X0
DSIN D0 D10
16-90
API
COS Binary floating point number COS operation
131 D P
S * * *
Notes on operand usage: DCOS Continuous DCOSP Pulse
Flag signal: none
 S: the designated source value. D: the COS value result.

 The source designated by S can be given as radians or an angle; this is decided
by flag M1018.
 When M1018=Off, the operation is in radians mode, where the radians (RAD)
value is equal to (angle ×π/180).
 When M1018=On, the operation is in the angle mode, where the angular range is
0°≤ angle <360°.
 When calculation results yield 0, M1020=On.
 The COS obtained from the source value designated by S is stored in D.
The following figure displays the relationship between the arc and SIN results:
 When X0=On, the COS value of the designated binary floating point number (D1,
D0) in radians will be stored in (D11, D10), with the content consisting of a binary
X0
DCOS D0 D10
16-91
API
TAN Binary floating point number TAN operation
132 D P
S * * *
Notes on operand usage: DTAN Continuous DTANP Pulse
Flag signal: none
 S: the designated source value. D: the TAN value result.

 The source designated by S can be given as radians or an angle; this is decided by
flag M1018.
 When M1018=Off, the operation is in radians mode, where the radians (RAD) value
is equal to (angle ×π/180).
 When M1018=On, the operation is in the angle mode, where the angular range is
0°≤ angle <360°.
 When calculation results yield 0, M1020=On.
 The TAN obtained from the source value designated by S is stored in D.
The following figure displays the relationship between the arc and TAN results:
 When X0=On, the TAN value of the designated binary floating point number (D1,
D0) in radians (RAD) will be stored in (D11, D10), with the content consisting of a
X0
DTAN D0 D10
16-92
API
ASIN Binary floating point number ASIN operation
133 D P
S * * *
Notes on operand usage: DASIN Continuous DASINP Pulse
Flag signal: none
 S: the designated source (binary floating point number). D: the ASIN value result.
 ASIN value =sin-1
The figure below shows the relationship between input data and result:
 When X0=On, the ASIN value obtained from the designated binary floating point
number (D1, D0) will be stored in (D11, D10), with the content consisting of a
X0
DASIN D0 D10
16-93
API
ACOS Binary floating point number ACOS operation
134 D P
S * * *
Notes on operand usage: DACOS Continuous DACOS Pulse
Flag signal: none
 S: the designated source (binary floating point number). D: the ACOS value result.
 ACOS value =cos-1
 When X0=On, the ACOS value obtained from the designated binary floating point
X0
DACOS D0 D10
16-94
API
ATAN Binary floating point number ATAN operation
135 D P
S * * *
Notes on operand usage: DATAN Continuous DATANP Pulse
Flag signal: none
 S: the designated source (binary floating point number). D: the ATAN value result.
 ATAN value =tan-1
 When X0=On, the TAN value obtained from the designated binary floating point
X0
DATAN D0 D10
16-95
API
SINH Binary floating point number SINH operation
136 D P
S * * *
Notes on operand usage: DSINH Continuous DSINHP Pulse
Flag signal: none
 S: the designated source (binary floating point number). D: the SINH value result.
 SINH value =(es-e-s)/2
 When X0=On, the SINH value obtained from the designated binary floating point
X0
DSINH D0 D10
16-96
API
COSH Binary floating point number COSH operation
137 D P
S * * *
Notes on operand usage: DCOSH Continuous DCOSH Pulse
Flag signal: none
 S: the designated source (binary floating point number). D: the COSH value result.
 COSH value =(es+e-s)/2
 When X0=On, the COSH value obtained from the designated binary floating point
X0
DCOSH D0 D10
16-97
API
TANH Binary floating point number TANH operation
138 D P
S * * *
Notes on operand usage: DTANH Continuous DTANH Pulse
Flag signal: none
 S: the designated source (binary floating point number). D: the TANH value result.
 TANH value =(es-e-s)/(es+e-s)
 When X0=On, the TANH value obtained from the designated binary floating point
number (D1, D0) will be stored in (D11, D10), with the content consisting of a binary
X0
DTANH D0 D10
16-98
API
SWAP Exchange the up/down 8 bits
147 D P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D SWAP Continuous SWAPP Pulse execution
execution type type
S ＊＊＊＊＊＊
DSWAP Continuous DSWAPP Pulse execution
execution type type
Flag signal: none
 S : The device that going to exchange its up/down 8 bits.

 When using 16-bit command, the upper 8-bit and lower 8-bit exchange.
 When using 32-bit command, the contents of upper 8-bit and lower 8-bit of the 2
registers exchange.
 This command usually uses pulse execution type (SWAPP, DSWAPP)
16-99
API
MODRW MODBUS data read/write
150 P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D MODRW Continuous MODRW Pulse
S1 * * * execution type P execution type
S2 * * *
S3 * * * 32-bit command
S * －－－－
n * * *
Flag signal: M1077 M1078 M1079
 S1: online device address. S2: communications function code. S3: address of
data to read/write. S: register for data to be read/written is stored. N: length of data
to be read/written.
 COM1 must be defined as controlled by the PLC (set Pr.09-31 = -12) before using
this command, and the corresponding communications speed and format must
also be set (set Pr.09-01 and Pr.09-04). S2: communications function code.
Currently only supports the following function code; the remaining function code
cannot be executed.
Function Description
H 02 Input read
H 03 Read word
H 06 Write single word
H 0F Write multiple coils
H 10 Write single word
 After executing this command, M1077, M1078 and M1079 will be immediately
changed to 0.
 As an example, when C2000 must control another converter and PLC, if the
converter has a station number of 10 and the PLC has a station number of 20, see
the following example:
Control slave device converter
MODRW command
Seria S1 S2 S3 S4 n
Example
l No.
Node Function Addres Leng
Register
ID code s th:
Reads 4 sets of data comprising the
converter slave device parameters
1 K10 H3 H100 D0 K4
Pr.01-00 to Pr.01-03, and saves the
read data in D0 to D3
converter slave device addresses
2 K10 H3 H2100 D5 K3
H2100 to H2102, and saves the read
data in D5 to D7
Writes 3 sets of data comprising the
converter slave device parameters
3 K10 H10 H500 D10 K3
Pr.05-00 to Pr.05-03, and writes the
values as D10 to D12
Writes 2 sets of data comprising the
converter slave device addresses
4 K10 H10 H2000 D15 K2
H2000 to H2001, and writes the values
as D15 to D16
16-100
PLC controlling slave device

MODRW command
Serial Example S1 S2 S3 S4 n
No. Node Functio Addres Registe
Length:
ID n code s r
1 PLC slave device's X0 to X3 state, and K20 H2 H400 D0 K4
saves the read data in bits 0 to 3 of D0
2 PLC slave device's Y0 to Y3 state, and K20 H2 H500 D1 K4
3 PLC slave device's M0 to M3 state, and K20 H2 H800 D2 K4
4 PLC slave device's T0 to T3 state, and K20 H2 H600 D3 K4
5 PLC slave device's C0 to C3 state, and K20 H2 HE00 D4 K4
PLC slave device's T0 to T3 count
6 K20 H3 H600 D10 K4
value, and saves the read data of D10
to D13
PLC slave device's C0 to C3 count
7 K20 H3 HE00 D20 K4
to D23
PLC slave device's D0 to D3 count
8 K20 H3 H1000 D30 K4
to D33
Writes 4 sets of the PLC slave device's
9 Y0 to Y3 state, and writes the values as K20 HF H500 D1 K4
bits 0 to 3 of D1
10 M0 to M3 state, and writes the values K20 HF H800 D2 K4
as bits 0 to 3 of D2
11 T0 to T3 state, and writes the values as K20 HF H600 D3 K4
bits 0 to 3 of D3
12 C0 to C3 state, and writes the values K20 HF HE00 D4 K4
as bits 0 to 3 of D4
13 T0 to T3 state, and writes the values of K20 H10 H600 D10 K4
D10 to D13
14 C0 to C3 state, and writes the values of K20 H10 HE00 D20 K4
D20 to D23
15 D0 to D3 state, and writes the values of K20 H10 H1000 D30 K4
D30 to D33
16-101
 Will trigger M0 On when the PLC begins to operate, and sends instruction to
execute one MODRW command.
 After receiving the slave device's response, if the command is correct, it will
execute one ROL command, which will cause M1 to be On.
 After receiving the slave device's response, will trigger M50 = 1 after a delay of 10
PLC scanning cycles, and then execute one MODRW command.
 After again receiving the slave device's response, if the command is correct, it will
execute one ROL command, and M2 will change to On at this time (and M2 can
be defined as a repeat of M); K4M0 will change to K1, and only M0 will remain 1.
Transmission can proceed in a continuous cycle. If you wish to add a command,
merely add the desired command in the empty frame, and change repeat M to
Mn+1.
16-102
API
TCMP Comparison of calendar data
160 P
Bit device Word device
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D
TCMP Continuous TCMPP Pulse
S1 * * * * * * * *
S2 * * * * * * * *
S3 * * * * * * * * 32-bit command
S * * *
－－－－
D * *
Flag signal: none
 S1: Sets the hours of the comparison time, setting range is "K0–K23." S2: Sets the
minutes of the comparison time, setting range is "K0–K59." S3: Sets the seconds of
the comparison time, setting range is "K0–K59." S: current calendar time. D:
Results of comparison.
 Compares the time in hours, minutes, and seconds set in S1–S3 with the current
calendar time in hours, minutes, and seconds, with the results of comparison
expressed in D.
 S The hour content of the current calendar time is "K0–K23." S +1 comprises the
minutes of the current calendar time, and consists of "K0–K59." S +2 comprises the
seconds of the current calendar time, and consists of "K0–K59."
 The current calendar time designated by S is usually compared using the TCMP
command after using the TRD command to read the current calendar time. If the
content value of S exceeds the range, this is considered an operating error, the
command will not execute, and M1068=On.
 When X10=On, the command will execute, and the current calendar time in
D20–D22 will be compared with the preset value of 12:20:45; the results will be
displayed in M10–M12. When X10 On→Off, the command will not be executed, but
the On/Off status prior to M10–M12 will be maintained.
 If results in the form of ≥, ≤, or ≠ are needed, they can be obtained by series and
parallel connection of M10–M12.
16-103
API
TZCP Comparison of calendar data
161 P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D TZCP Continuous TZCPP Pulse
S1 * * * execution type execution type
S2 * * *
S * * * 32-bit command
D * * －－－－
 S1: Sets the lower limit of the comparison time. S2: Sets the upper limit of the
comparison time. S: current calendar time. D: Results of comparison.
 Performs range comparison by comparing the hours, minutes, and seconds of the
current calendar time designated by S with the lower limit of the comparison time
set as S1 and the upper limit of the comparison time set as S2, and expresses the
results of comparison in D.
 S1、S1 +1、S1 +2: Sets the hours, minutes, and seconds of the lower limit of the
comparison time.
 S2、S2 +1、S2 +2: Sets the hours, minutes, and seconds of the upper limit of the
comparison time.
 S、S +1、S +2: The hours, minutes, and seconds of the current calendar time
 The D0 designated by the S listed in this program is usually obtained by

comparison using the TZCP command after using the TRD command in advance to
read the current calendar time. If the value of S1, S2, or S exceeds the range, this is
considered an operating error, the command will not execute, and M1068=On.
 When the current time S is less than the lower limit value S1 and S is less than the
upper limit value S2, D will be On. When the current time S is greater than the lower
limit value S1 and S is greater than the upper limit value S2, D +2 will be On; D +1
will be On under other conditions.
 When X10=On, the TZCP command executes, and one of M10–M12 will be On.
When X10=Off, the TZCP command will not execute, and M10–M12 will remain in
the X10=Off state.
16-104
API
TADD Calendar data addition
162 P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D TADD Continuous TADDP Pulse
S2 * * *
D * * * 32-bit command
series for the scope of device usage  Flag signal: M1020 Zero flag
M1022 Carry flag
M1068 Calendar error
 S1: time addend. S2: time augend. D: time sum.
 The calendar data in hours, minutes, and seconds designated by S2 is added to the
calendar data in hours, minutes, and seconds designated by S1, and the result is
stored as hours, minutes, and seconds in the register designated by D.
 If the value of S1 or S2 exceeds the range, this is considered an operating error, the
command will not execute, M1067, M1068=On, and D1067 will record the error
code 0E1A(HEX).
 If the results of addition are greater than or equal to 24 hours, carry flag
M1022=On, and D will display the results of addition minus 24 hours.
 If the results of addition are equal to 0 (0 hours, 0 minutes, 0 seconds), zero flag
M1020=On.
 When X10=On, the TADD command will be executed, and the calendar data in
hours, minutes, and seconds designated by D0 to D2 will be added to the calendar
data in hours, minutes, and seconds designated by D10 to D12, and the results are
stored as a total number of hours, minutes, and seconds in the registers
designated by D20 to D22.
X10
TADD D0 D10 D20
16-105
API
TSUB Calendar data subtraction
163 P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D TSUB Continuous TSUBP Pulse
S2 * * *
D * * * 32-bit command
series for the scope of device usage  Flag signal: M1020 Zero flag
M1022 Carry flag
M1068 Calendar error
 S1: time minuend. S2: time augend. D: time sum.
 Subtracts the calendar data in hours, minutes, and seconds designated by S2 from
the calendar data in hours, minutes, and seconds designated by S1, and the result
is temporarily stored as hours, minutes, and seconds in the register designated by
D.
 If the value of S1 or S2 exceeds the range, this is considered an operating error, the
command will not execute, M1067, M1068=On, and D1067 will record the error
code 0E1A(HEX).
 If subtraction results in a negative number, borrow flag M1021=On, and the result of
that negative number plus 24 hours will be displayed in the register designated by
D.
 If the results of subtraction are equal to 0 (0 hours, 0 minutes, 0 seconds), zero flag
M1020=On.
 When X10=On, the TADD command will be executed, and the calendar data in
hours, minutes, and seconds designated by D10 to D12 will be subtracted from the
calendar data in hours, minutes, and seconds designated by D0 to D2, and the
results are stored as a total number of hours, minutes, and seconds in the registers
designated by D20 to D22.
X10
TSUB D0 D10 D20
16-106
API
TRD Calendar data read
166 P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D TRD Continuous TRDP Pulse
D * * * execution type execution type
Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in 32-bit command
series for the scope of device usage －－－－
 Flag signal: none

 S1: time minuend. S2: time augend. D: time sum.
 D: device used to store the current calendar time after reading.
 The EH/EH2/SV/EH3/SV2/SA/SX/SC main units have a built-in calendar clock, and
the clock provides seven sets of data comprising year, week, month, day, hour,
minute, and second stored in D1063 to D1069. The TRD command function allows
program designers to directly read the current calendar time into the designated
seven registers.
 D1063 only reads the two right digits of the Western calendar year.
 When X0=On, the current calendar time is read into the designated registers D0 to
D6.
 In D1064, 1 indicates Monday, 2 indicates Tuesday, and so on, with and 7 indicating
Sunday.
X0
TRD D0
Special General
Item Content Item
D D
Year Year
D1063 00–99 D0
(Western) (Western)
D1064 Weeks 1–7 D1 Weeks
D1065 Month 1–12 D2 Month
D1066 Day 1–31 D3 Day
D1067 Hour 0–23 D4 Hour
D1068 Minute 0–59 D5 Minute
D1069 Second 0–59 D6 Second
16-107
API
GRY BIN→GRAY code transformation
170 D P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C GRY
D Continuous GRYP Pulse
D * * * * *
Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in DGRY Continuous DGRYP Pulse

 S: source device. D: device storing GRAY code.
 Transforms the content value (BIN value) of the device designated by S to GRAY
code, which is stored in the device designated by D.
 The valid range of S is as shown below; if this range is exceeded, it will be
considered an error, and the command will not execute.
16-bit command: 0–32,767
 32-bit command: 0–2,147,483,647
 When X0=On, the constant K6513 will be transformed to GRAY code and stored in
D0.
16-108
API
GBIN GRAY code →BIN transformation
171 D P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D GBIN Continuous GBINP Pulse
D * * * * *
Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in DGBIN Continuous DGBINP Pulse
 S: source device used to store GRAY code. D: device used to store BIN value after
transformation.
 The GRAY code corresponding to the value of the device designated by S is
transformed into a BIN value, which is stored in the device designated by D.
 This command will transform the value of the absolute position encoder connected
with the PLC's input and (this encoder usually has an output value in the form of
GRAY code) into a BIN value, which is stored in the designated register.
 The valid range of S is as shown below; if this range is exceeded, it will be
considered an error, and the command will not execute.
16-bit command: 0–32,767
 32-bit command: 0–2,147,483,647
 When X20=On, the GRAY code of the absolute position encoder connected with
input points X0 to X17 will be transformed into BIN value and stored in D10.
X20
GBIN K4X0 D10
X17 K4X0 X0
GRAY CODE 6513 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1
b15 b0
H1971=K6513 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1
16-109
API
215– LD# S1 S2 Contact form logical operation LD#
217 D

X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D LD# Continuous －－
S1 * * * * * * * * execution type
S2 * * * * * * * *
Notes on operand usage: ＃：&、|、^ 32-bit command (9 STEP)
Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in DLD# Continuous －－
series for the range of device usage execution type
Flag signal: none
 S1: data source device 1. S2: data source device 2.

 This command performs comparison of the content of S1 and S2; when the result
of comparison is not 0, this command will be activated, but this command will not
be activated when the result of comparison is 0.
 The LD#This command can be used while directly connected with the busbar
16-bit 32-bit Conditions for
API No. Conditions for inactivation
commands commands activation
215 LD& DLD& S1 & S2  0 S1 & S2 0
216 LD| DLD| S1 | S2 0 S1 | S2 0
217 LD^ DLD^ S1 ^ S2 0 S1 ^ S2 0
 &: logical AND operation.
 |: logical OR operation.
 ^: logical XOR operation.
 When the content of C0 and C10 is subjected to the logical AND operation, and
the result is not equal to 0, Y10=On.
 When the content of D200 and D300 is subjected to the logical OR operation, and
the result is not equal to 0, and X1=On, Y11=On and remains in that state.
LD & C0 C10 Y10
X1
LD I D200 D300 SET Y11
16-110
API
218– AND# S1 S2 Contact form logical operation AND#
220 D

X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D AND# Continuous －－
S2 * * * * * * * *
Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in DAND# Continuous －－
series for the scope of device usage execution type
Flag signal: none

 The AND# command is an operation command in series with the contact.
218 AND& DAND& S1 & S2 0 S1 & S2 0
219 AND| DAND| S1 | S2 0 S1 | S2 0
220 AND^ DAND^ S1 ^ S2 0 S1 ^ S2 0
 When X0=On and the content of C0 and C10 is subjected to the logical
AND operation, and the result is not equal to 0, Y10=On.
 When X1=Off and D10 and D0 is subjected to the logical OR operation, and the
result is not equal to 0, Y11=On and remains in that state.
 When X2 =On and the content of the 32-bit register D200 (D201) and 32-bit
register D100 (D101) is subjected to the logical XOR operation, and the result is
not equal to 0 or M3=On, M50=On.
X0
AND & C0 C10 Y10
X1
AND I D10 D0 SET Y11
X2
DAND ^ D200 D100 M50
M3
16-111
API
221– OR# S1 S2 Contact form logical operation OR#
223 D

X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D OR# Continuous －－
S2 * * * * * * * *
Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in DOR# Continuous －－
Flag signal: none

 The OR# command is an operation command in series with the contact.
221 OR& DOR& S1 & S2  0 S1 & S2 0
222 OR| DOR| S1 | S2 0 S1 | S2 0
223 OR^ DOR^ S1 ^ S2 0 S1 ^ S2 0
 When X1=On or the content of C0 and C10 is subjected to the logical
AND operation, and the result is not equal to 0, Y0=On.
 When X2 and M30 are both equal to On, or the content of 32-bit register D10
(D11) and 32-bit register D20 (D21) is subjected to the logical OR operation, and
the result is not equal to 0, or the content of the 32-bit counter C235 and the 32-bit
register D200 (D201) is subjected to the logical XOR operation, and the result is
not equal to 0, M60=On.
X1
Y0
OR & C0 C10
X2 M30
M60
DOR I D10 D20
DOR ^ D25 D200
16-112
API
224– LD※ S1 S2 Contact form compare LD*
230 D

X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D LD※ Continuous －－
S2 * * * * * * * *
Notes on operand usage: ※：=、>、<、<>、≦、≧ 32-bit command (9 STEP)
Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in DLD※ Continuous －－
Flag signal: none

 This command compares the content of S1 and S2. Taking API 224 (LD=) as an
example, this command will be activated when the result of comparison is
"equal," and will not be activated when the result is "unequal."
 The LD* can be used while directly connected with the busbar
Conditions for Conditions for
API No. 16-bit commands 32-bit commands
activation inactivation
224 LD＝ DLD＝ S1 ＝ S2 S1 ≠ S2
225 LD＞ DLD＞ S1 ＞ S2 S1 ≦ S2
226 LD＜ DLD＜ S1 ＜ S2 S1 ≧ S2
228 LD＜＞ DLD＜＞ S1 ≠ S2 S1 ＝ S2
229 LD＜＝ DLD＜＝ S1 ≦ S2 S1 ＞ S2
230 LD＞＝ DLD＞＝ S1 ≧ S2 S1 ＜ S2
 When the content of C10 is equal to K200, Y10=On.
 When the content of D200 is greater than K-30, and X1=On, Y11=On and remains
in that state.
LD= K200 C10 Y10
X1
LD> D200 K-30 SET Y11
DLD> K678493 C20 M50
M3
16-113
API
232– AND※ S1 S2 Contact form compare AND*
238 D

X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D AND※ Continuous －－
S2 * * * * * * * *
Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in DAND※ Continuous －－
Flag signal: none

 This command compares the content of S1 and S2. Taking API 232 (AND=) as an
example, when the result of comparison is equal, this command will be activated;
when the result of comparison is unequal, this command will not be activated.
 The AND* command is a comparison command in series with a contact.
232 AND＝ DAND＝ S1 ＝ S2 S1 ≠ S2
233 AND＞ DAND＞ S1 ＞ S2 S1 ≦ S2
234 AND＜ DAND＜ S1 ＜ S2 S1 ≧ S2
236 AND＜＞ DAND＜＞ S1 ≠ S2 S1 ＝ S2
237 AND＜＝ DAND＜＝ S1 ≦ S2 S1 ＞ S2
238 AND＞＝ DAND＞＝ S1 ≧ S2 S1 ＜ S2
 When X0=On and the current value of C10 is also equal to K200, Y10=On.
 When X1=Off and the content of register D0 is not equal to K-10, Y11=On and
remains in that state.
 When X2 =On and the content of the 32-bit register D0 (D11) is less than 678,493,
or M3=On, M50=On.
X0
AND= K200 C10 Y10
X1
AND<> K-10 D0 SET Y11
X2
DAND> K678493 D10 M50
M3
16-114
API
240– OR※ S1 S2 Contact form compare OR*
246 D

X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D OR※ Continuous －－
S2 * * * * * * * *
Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in DOR※ Continuous －－
Flag signal: none

 This command compares the content of S1 and S2. Taking API 240 (OR=) as an
example, when the result of comparison is equal, this command will be activated;
when the result of comparison is unequal, this command will not be activated.
 The OR* command is a compare command in parallel with a contact.
240 OR＝ DOR＝ S1 ＝ S2 S1 ≠ S2
241 OR＞ DOR＞ S1 ＞ S2 S1 ≦ S2
242 OR＜ DOR＜ S1 ＜ S2 S1 ≧ S2
244 OR＜＞ DOR＜＞ S1 ≠ S2 S1 ＝ S2
245 OR＜＝ DOR＜＝ S1 ≦ S2 S1 ＞ S2
246 OR＞＝ DOR＞＝ S1 ≧ S2 S1 ＜ S2
 When X0=On and the current value of C10 is also equal to K200, Y10=On.
 When X1=Off and the content of register D0 is not equal to K-10, Y11=On and
remains in that state.
 When X2 =On and the content of the 32-bit register D0 (D11) is less than 678,493,
or M3=On, M50=On.
X1
Y0
OR>= K200 C10
X2 M30
M60
DOR>= D100 K100000
16-115
API
275– FLD※ S1 S2 Floating point number contact form compare LD*
280

S1 * * *
Notes on operand usage: ＃：&、|、^ FLD※ Continuous －－
Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in execution type
Flag signal: none

 This command compares the content of S1 and S2. Taking "FLD=" as an example,
if the result of comparison is "equal," this command will be activated; but it will not
be activated when the result is "unequal."
 The FLD* command can directly input floating point numerical values (for
instance: F1.2) to the S1, S2 operands, or store floating-point numbers in register
D for use in operations.
 This command can be used while directly connected with the busbar
API No. 32-bit commands
275 FLD＝ S1 ＝ S2 S1 ≠ S2
276 FLD＞ S1 ＞ S2 S1 ≦ S2
277 FLD＜ S1 ＜ S2 S1 ≧ S2
278 FLD＜＞ S1 ≠ S2 S1 ＝ S2
279 FLD＜＝ S1 ≦ S2 S1 ＞ S2
280 FLD＞＝ S1 ≧ S2 S1 ＜ S2
 When the floating point number of register D200 (D201) is less than or equal
to F1.2, and X1 activated, contact Y21 will be activated and remain in that state.
X1
FLD<= D200 F1.2 SET Y21
16-116
API
281– FAND※ S1 S2 Floating point number contact form compare AND*
286

S1 * * *
Notes on operand usage: ＃：&、|、^ FAND※ Continuous －－
Flag signal: none

 This command compares the content of S1 and S2. Taking "FAND=" as an
example, if the result of comparison is "equal," this command will be activated;
but it will not be activated when the result is "unequal."
 The FAND* command can directly input floating point numerical values (for
281 FAND= S1 ＝ S2 S1 ≠ S2
282 FAND＞ S1 ＞ S2 S1 ≦ S2
283 FAND＜ S1 ＜ S2 S1 ≧ S2
284 FAND＜＞ S1 ≠ S2 S1 ＝ S2
285 FAND＜＝ S1 ≦ S2 S1 ＞ S2
286 FAND＞＝ S1 ≧ S2 S1 ＜ S2
 When X1=Off, and the floating point number in register D100 (D101) is not equal
to F1.2, Y21=On and remains in that state.
X1
FAND<> F1.2 D0 SET Y21
16-117
API
287– FOR※ S1 S2 Floating point number contact form compare OR*
292

S1 * * *
Notes on operand usage: ＃：&、|、^ FOR※ Continuous －－
Flag signal: none

 This command compares the content of S1 and S2. Taking "FOR=" as an
example, if the result of comparison is "equal," this command will be activated;
but it will not be activated when the result is "unequal."
 The FOR* command can directly input floating point numerical values (for
287 FOR＝ S1 ＝ S2 S1 ≠ S2
288 FOR＞ S1 ＞ S2 S1 ≦ S2
289 FOR＜ S1 ＜ S2 S1 ≧ S2
290 FOR＜＞ S1 ≠ S2 S1 ＝ S2
291 FOR＜＝ S1 ≦ S2 S1 ＞ S2
292 FOR＞＝ S1 ≧ S2 S1 ＜ S2
 When X2 and M30 are both equal to "On," or the floating point number in register
D100 (D101) is greater than or equal to F1.234, M60=On.
X2 M30
M60
FOR>= D100 F1.234
16-118
16-6-5 Detailed explanation of drive special applications commands

API
RPR S1 S2 Read servo parameter
139 P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D RPR Continuous RPRP Pulse
S2 *
Notes on operand usage: none 32-bit command
－－－－
Flag signal: none
 S1 : Parameter address of data to be read. S2 : Register where data to be
read is stored.
API
WPR S1 S2 Write servo parameter
140 P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D WPR Continuous WPRP Pulse
S2 * * *
－－－－
Flag signal: none
 S1 : Data to write to specified page. S2 : Parameter address of data to be

written.
 When the data in the C2000 drive's parameter H01.00 is read and written to
D0, data from H01.01 will be read and written to D1.
 When M0=On, the content of D10 will be written to the C2000 drive parameter
04.00 (first speed of multiple speed levels).
 When the parameter has been written successfully, M1017=On.
 The C2000's WPR command does not support writing to the 20XX address,
but the RPR command supports reading of 21XX, 22XX.
Take care when using the WPR command. When writing parameters, because
most parameters are recorded as they are written, these parameters may only be
revised 109 times; a memory write error may occur if parameters are written more
than 109 times.
Because the following commonly-used parameters have special processing, there

are no restrictions on the number of times they may be written.
Pr. 00-10: Control method
Pr. 00-11: Speed mode selection
Pr. 00-12: P2P position mode
Pr. 00-13: Torque mode select
Pr. 00-27: User-defined value
16-119
Pr. 01-12: Acceleration time 1

Pr. 01-13: Deceleration time 1
Pr. 02-12: Select MI Conversion Time mode:

Pr. 02-18: Select MO Conversion Time mode:
Pr. 04-50–Pr. 04-69: PLC register parameter 0 - 19
Pr. 08-04: Upper limit of integral

Pr. 08-05: PID output upper limit
Pr. 10-17: Electronic gear A

Pr. 10-18: Electronic gear B
Pr. 11-34: Torque command

Pr. 11-43: P2P highest frequency
Pr. 11-44: Position control acceleration time
Pr. 11-45: Position control deceleration time
Calculation of the number of times written is based on whether the written value is
modified. For instance, writing the same value 100 times at the same time counts
as writing only once.
When writing a PLC program, if unsure of usage of the WPR command, we
recommend that you use the WPRP command.
16-120
API
FPID S1 S2 S3 S4 Drive PID control mode
141 P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D FPID Continuous FPIDP Pulse
S2 * * *
S4 * * * －－－－
Flag signal: none
 S1 : PID reference target value input terminal select. S2 : PID function
proportional gain P. S3 : PID function integral time I. S4 : PID function

differential time D.
 The FPID command can directly control the drive's feedback control of PID Pr.
08-00 PID reference target value input terminal selection, Pr. 08-01 proposal gain
P, Pr. 08-02 integral time I, and Pr. 08-03 differential time D.
 When M0=On, the set PID reference target value input terminal selection is 0 (no
PID function), the PID function proportional gain P is 0, the PID function integral
time I is 1 (units: 0.01 sec.), and the PID function differential time D is 1 (units:
0.01 sec.).
 When M1=On, the set PID reference target value input terminal selection is 0 (no
PID function), the PID function proportional gain P is 1 (units: 0.01), the
PID function integral time I is 0, and the PID function differential time D is 0.
 When M2=On, the set PID reference target value input terminal selection is 1
(target frequency input is controlled from the digital keypad), the PID function
proportional gain P is 1 (units: 0.01), the PID function integral time I is 0, and the
PID function differential time D is 0.
 D1027: Frequency command after PID operation.
M0
FPID H0 H0 H1 H1
M1
FPID H0 H1 H0 H0
M2
FPID H1 H1 H0 H0
M1000
MOV D1027 D1
END
16-121
API
FREQ S1 S2 S3 Drive speed control mode
142 P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D FREQ Continuous FREQP Pulse
S2 * * *
Notes on operand usage: none －－－－
Flag signal: M1015
 S1 : Frequency command. S2 : Acceleration time. S3 : Deceleration time

 S2,S3: In acceleration/deceleration time settings, the number of decimal places is determined
by the definitions of Pr. 01-45.
Example
When Pr. 01-45=0: units of 0.01 sec.
The setting of 50 for S2 (acceleration time) in the ladder diagram below implies 0.5 sec,
and the S3 (deceleration time) setting of 60 implies 0.6 sec
 The FREQ command can control drive frequency commands, and acceleration and
deceleration time; it also uses special register control actions, such as:
M1025: Control drive RUN(On) / STOP(Off) (RUN requires Servo On (M1040 On) to be
effective)
M1026: Control drive operating direction FWD(Off) / REV(On)
M1040: Control Servo On / Servo Off.
M1042: Trigger quick stop (ON) / does not trigger quick stop (Off).
M1044: Pause (On) / release pause (Off)
M1052: Lock frequency (On) / release lock frequency (Off)
 M1025: Drive RUN(On) / STOP(Off), M1026: drive operating direction FWD(Off) / REV(On).
M1015: frequency reached.
 When M10=On, sets the drive frequency command K300 (3.00Hz), with an acceleration /
deceleration time of 0.
When M11=On, sets the drive frequency command K3000 (30.00Hz), with an acceleration
time of 50 (0.5 sec.) and deceleration time of 60 (0.6 sec.). (When Pr. 01-45=0)
 When M11=Off, the drive frequency command will now change to 0
M1000
M1025
M11
M1026
M1000
M1040
M12
M1042
M13
M1044
M14
M1052
M10 M11
FREQP K300 K0 K0
M11 M10
FREQ K3000 K50 K60
END
 Pr. 09-33 are defined on the basis of whether reference commands have been cleared before
PLC operation.
bit0: Prior to PLC scanning procedures, whether the target frequency has been cleared is 0.
(This will be written to the FREQ command when the PLC is On)
bit1: Prior to PLC scanning procedures, whether the target torque has been cleared is 0.
(This will be written to the TORQ command when the PLC is On)
bit2: Prior to PLC scanning procedures, whether speed limits in the torque mode have been
cleared is 0. (This will be written to the TORQ command when the PLC is On)
16-122
Example: When using r to write a program

M0
FREQ K2000 K1000 K1000
END
If we force M0 to be 1, the frequency command will be 20.00Hz; but when M0 is set as 0,
there will be a different situation.
Case 1: When the Pr.09-33 bit 0 is 0, and M0 is set as 0, the frequency command will remain
at 20.00Hz.
Case 2: When the Pr.09-33 bit 0 is 1, and M0 is set as 0, the frequency command will change
to 0.00Hz.
The reason for this is that when the Pr.09-33 bit 0 is 1 prior to PLC scanning procedures, the
frequency will first revert to 0.
When the Pr.09-33 bit 0 is 0, the frequency will not revert to 0.
16-123
API
TORQ S1 S2 Drive torque control mode
263 P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D TORQ Continuous TORQ P Pulse
S2 * * *
32-bit command
－－－－
Flag signal: M1063
 S1 : Torque command (numbered, no more than one digit). S2 : Speed limit.
 The TORQ command can control the drive torque command and speed limits; it also uses
special register control actions, such as:
M1040: Controls Servo On/Servo Off. When Servo is ON, if a TORQ command is
executed, the torque will output the torque defined by the TORQ command, and the
frequency restrictions will similarly be controlled by the TORQ command.
 M1040: Control Servo On/Servo Off. M1063: set torque attained. D1060 is the mode
controls. D1053 is the actual torque.
 When M0=Off, set the drive torque command K+500 (+50.0%), rotational speed
restrictions is 3000 (30Hz).
 When M0=On, sets the drive torque command K-300 (-30.0%), rotational speed
restrictions is 3000 (30Hz).
 When M10=On, drive began output torque command.
 When set torque is attained, M1063 will go On; this flag usually jumps continuously,
however.
 Pr. 09-33 are defined on the basis of whether reference commands have been cleared
before PLC operation.
bit0: Prior to PLC scanning procedures, whether the target frequency has been cleared is
0. (This will be written to the FREQ command when the PLC is On)
bit1: Prior to PLC scanning procedures, whether the target torque has been cleared is 0.
(This will be written to the TORQ command when the PLC is On)
bit2: Prior to PLC scanning procedures, whether speed limits in the torque mode have
been cleared is 0. (This will be written to the TORQ command when the PLC is On)
Example:
M1
TORQ K300 K400
END
If we now force M1 to be 1, the torque command will be K+300 (+30%), and the speed
limit will be 400 (40Hz). But when M1 is set as 0, there will be a different situation.
Case 1: When bit 1 and bit 2 of Pr. 09-33 are both set as 0, and M1 is set as 0, the torque
command will remain at +30%, and the speed limit will be set as 40Hz.
Case 2: When bit 2 of Pr. 09-33 are both 1, and M1 is set as 0, the torque command will
revert 0%, and the speed limit will be set as 0Hz.
16-124
API
DPOS S1 Drive point-to-point control
262 P
* * * 32-bit command (5 STEP)

DPOS Continuous DPOSP Pulse
Flag signal: M1064, M1070
 S1 : Target (must have a number).

 The DPOS command can control the drive's position commands, and employs
special register control actions, such as:
M1040: Control Servo On/Servo Off. M1055 search for origin. M1048 move to
new position. If the control mode is position mode (D1060 = 1), and the converter
is in the Servo ON state (M1040 = 1), if the DPOS command is executed, the
drive will move to a new position in conjunction with activation of M1048 once
(OFF to ON).
 M1040: Control Servo On/Servo Off. M1064: set position attained. D1060 is the
mode control. D1051(L) and D1052(H) are the actual position points.
 When X0=On, M1040 will be On (Servo On).
 When X1=On, sets DPOS position as +300000, and M1048 will change to On
(move to new position) after a delay of 1 sec. Check whether the value of D1051
has changed at this time; after the set position point has been reached, M1064
will go On, and Y0 will output On.
16-125
API
CANRX S1 S2 S3 D Read CANopen slave station data
261 P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D CANRX Continuous CANRX Pulse
S1 * * execution type P execution type
S2 * *
S3 * * 32-bit command
D * * * －－－－
Flag signal
 S1 : Slave station number. S2 : Main index.. S3 : Subindex+bit length.

D : Preset address.
 The CANRX command can read the index of the corresponding slave station.
When it is executed, it will send the SDO message format to the slave station.
M1066 and M1067 will both be 0 at that time, and M1066 will be set as 1 after
reading. If the slave station gives the correct response, it will write the value to the
preset register, and set M1067 as 1. If the slave station has a response error,
M1067 will be set as 0, and an error message will be recorded to D1076 to
D1079.
M1002: When the PLC runs, the command will be triggered once and will set
K4M400 = K1
Afterwards, each time M1066 is 1, it will switch to a different message.
16-126
API
CANTX S1 S2 S3 S4 Write CANopen slave station data
264 P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D CANTX Continuous CANTXP Pulse
S1 * * execution type execution type
S2 * * * * *
S3 * * 32-bit command
S4 * * －－－－
Flag signal
 S1 : Slave station number. S2 : Address to be written. S3 : Main index.

S4 : Subindex+bit length.
 The CANTX command can write a value to the index of the corresponding slave
station. When it is executed, it will send the SDO message format to the slave
station. M1066 and M1067 will both be 0 at that time, and M1066 will be set as 1
after reading. If the slave station gives the correct response, it will write the value
to the preset register, and set M1067 as 1. If the slave station has a response
error, M1067 will be set as 0, and an error message will be recorded to D1076 to
D1079.
16-127
API
CANFLS D Refresh special D corresponding to CANopen
265 P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D CANFLS Continuous CANFLSP Pulse
D * * execution type execution type
32-bit command
－－－－
Flag signal
 D : Special D to be refreshed.
 The CANFLS command can refresh special D commands. When is a read only
attribute, executing this command will send a message equivalent to that of
CANRX to the slave station, and the number of the slave station will be
transmitted back and refreshed to this special D. When there is a read/write
attribute, executing this command will send a message equivalent to that of
CANTX to the slave station, and the value of this special D will be written to the
corresponding slave station.
 When M1066 and M1067 are both 0, and M1066 is set as 1 after reading, if the
slave station gives a correct response, the value will be written to the designated
register, and M1067 will be set as 1. If the slave station's response contains an
error, then M1067 will be set as 0, and an error message will be recorded to
D1076–D1079.
API
ICOMR D Internal communications read
320 D P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D ICOMR Continuous ICOMRP Pulse
S2 * * *
D * * * DICOMR Continuous DICOMRP Pulse
Notes on operand usage: none execution type execution type
S1 : Selection of slave device. S2 : Device selection (0: converter, 1: internal
PLC). S3 : Read address. D : Saving target.

 The ICOMR command can obtain the slave station's converter and the internal
PLC's register value.
16-128
API
ICOMW D Internal communications write
321 D P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D ICOMW Continuous ICOMW Pulse
S1 * * * execution type P execution type
S2 * * *
D * * * DICOM Continuous DICOM Pulse
Notes on operand usage: none W execution type WP execution type
S1 : Selection of slave device. S2 : Device selection (0: converter, 1: internal
PLC). S3 : Read address. D : Saving target.

 The ICOMW command write a value to the slave station's converter and the
internal PLC's register.
Please refer to the following example:
16-129
API
WPRA S1 S2 Drive parameters write-in
323 P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D WORA Continuous WORAP Pulse
S2 * * *
－－－－
Flag signal: none
S1 : Data that is going to write in S2 : Parameter address of the write-in data
 Read the data of C2000 drive’s parameter H01.00 and write into D0, read data of
H01.01 and write into D1.
 When M0 is ON, write the content of D10 into C2000 drive’s Pr.04-00 (1st step
speed frequency).
 When parameter writes-in successfully, M1017 is ON.
 The WPR command does not support the write-in of 20XX address, but the RPR
command supports the read-out of 21XX and 22XX.
 When WPRA executes, the data is only written into the RAM area, and will get
back to previous record when the power is off.
16-130
16-7 Error display and handling
Code ID Descript Recommended handling approach

Turn power on and off when resetting the
PLrA 47 RTC time check
keypad time
Turn power on and off after making sure
PLrt 49 Incorrect RTC time
that the keypad is securely connected
Check whether the program has an error
PLod 50 Data writing memory error
and download the program again
Data write memory error during Restart power and download the program
PLSv 51
program execution again
Try uploading again; if the error persists,
PLdA 52 Program transmission error
sent to the manufacturer for service
Command error while downloading Check whether the program has an error
PLFn 53
program and download the program again
Program exceeds memory capacity Restart power and download the program
PLor 54
or no program again
Command error during program Check whether the program has an error
PLFF 55
execution and download the program again
PLSn 56 Check code error
and download the program again
Program has no END stop Check whether the program has an error
PLEd 57
command and download the program again
MC command has been used Check whether the program has an error
PLCr 58
continuously more than nine times and download the program again
PLdF 59 Download program error
and download again
Check whether the program code has a
PLSF 60 PLC scan time excessively long
writing error and download again
16-131
16- 8 CANopen Master control applications

Control of a simple multi-axis application is required in certain situations. If the device supports the
CANopen protocol, a C2000 can serve as the master in implementing simple control (position, speed,
homing, and torque control). The setting method comprises the following seven steps:
Step 1: Activating CANopen Master functions

1. Pr. 09-45=1 (initiates Master functions); restart power after completing setting, the status
bar on the KPC-CC01 digital keypad will display "CAN Master".
2. Pr. 00-02=6 reset PLC (please note that this action will reset the program and PLC registers
to the default values)
3. Turn power off and on again.
4. Use the KPC-CC01 digital keypad to set the PLC control mode as "PLC Stop" (if a
newly-introduced drive is used, the blank internal PLC program will cause a PLFF warning
code to be issued).
Step 2: Master memory settings

1. After connecting the 485 communications cable, use WPL Soft to set the PLC status as
Stop (if the PLC mode has been switched to the "PLC Stop" mode, the PLC status should
already be Stop)
2. Set the address and corresponding station number of the slave station to be controlled. For
instance, if it is wished to control two slave stations (a maximum of 8 stations can be
controlled simultaneously), and the station numbers are 21 and 22, it is only necessary to
set D2000 and D2100 as 20 and 21, and then set D2200, D2300, D2400, D2500, D2600,
and D2700 as 0. The setting method involves use of the PLC's WPL editing software WPL
as follows:
 Open WPL and implement communications > register edit (T C D) function
16-132
 After leaving the PLC register window, the register setting screen will appear, as shown
below:
If there is a new PLC program and no settings have been made yet, you can read default data
from the converter, and merely edit it to suit the current application.
If settings have already been made, however, the special D in the CANopen area will display the
saved status (the CANopen D area is located at D1090 to D1099 and D2000 to D2799).
Assuming it is a new program, we will first read the default data from the converter; check the
communications format if there is no communications link (the default PLC station number is 2,
9600, 7N2, ASCII). Perform the following steps:
1. Switch the PLC to Stop status
2. Press the transmit button
3. Click on read memory after exiting the window
4. Ignore D0–D399
5. Click on the confirm button.
16-133
After reading the data, it is necessary to perform some special D settings. Before proceeding, we
will first introduce the special D implications and setting range.
The CANopen Master's special D range is currently D1070 to D1099 and D2000 to D2799; this
range is divided into 3 blocks:
- The first block is used to display CANopen's current status, and has a range of D1070–D1089
- The second block is used for CANopen's basic settings, and has a range of D1090–D1099
- The third block is the slave station mapping and control area, and has a range of
D2000–D2799.
These areas are therefore introduced as follows:
The first contains the current CANopen status display:

When the master initializes a slave station, we can find out from D1070 whether configuration of
the slave device has been completed; we can find out whether an error occurred in the
configuration process from D1071 and whether the configuration is inappropriate from D1074.
After entering normal control, we can find out whether the slave device is offline from D1073. In
addition, we can check the slave device's read/write information using the CANRX, CANTX, and
CANFLS commands; error information can be obtained from D1076 to D1079 if there has been a
read/write failure.
Special D Description of Function R/W
Channel opened by CANopen initialization (bit0=Machine
D1070 R
code0 …….)
Error channel occurring in CANopen initialization process
D1071 R
(bit0=Machine code0 …….)
D1072 Reserved -
16-134

D1073 CANopen break channel (bit0=Machine code0 …….) R
Error code of master error
0: No error
D1074 R
1: Slave station setting error
2: Synchronizing cycle setting error (too small)
D1075 Reserved -
D1076 SDO error message (main index value) R
D1077 SDO error message (secondary index value) R
D1078 SDO error message (error code L) R
D1079 SDO error message (error code H) R
The second area is for basic CANopen settings: (the PLC must have stopped when this
area is used to make settings)
We must set the information exchange time for the master and slave station,
D1090 Synchronizing cycle setting 4 RW
Use D1090 to perform settings; setting time relationships include:
For instance, when communications speed is 500K, TXPDO + RXPDO have 8 sets, and
synchronizing time will require more than 4 ms
We must also define how many slave stations will be opened. D1091 is the channel for defining
station opening, and D2000+100*n is the station number defining this channel. See the detailed
explanation below.
Sets slave station On or Off (bit 0-bit 7 correspond to RW
D1091
slave stations number 0-7)
D2000+100*n Slave station number RW
16-135
If slave devices have a slow start-up, the master can delay for a short time before performing
slave station configuration; this time delay can be set via D1092.
Special D Description of Function Default R/W
D1092 Delay before start of initialization 0 RW
With regard to slave device initialization, a delay time can be set to judge whether failure has
occurred. If the communications speed is relatively slow, the delay time can be adjusted to judge
whether initialization has been completed, which will ensure that there is time to perform slave
device initialization.
Initialization completion delay time
D1099 15 sec. RW
Setting range: 1 to 60000 sec.
After communication is successful, the system must detect whether there is a break in
communications with the slave station. D1093 is used to set detection time, and D1094 sets the
number of consecutive errors that will trigger a break error.
D1093 Break time detection 1000ms RW
D1094 Break number detection 3 RW
The packet type transmitted by PDO is set before establishing normal communications and
generally does not require adjustment.
Corresponding real-time transmission type
D1097 (PDO) 1 RW
Corresponding real-time receiving type (PDO)
D1098 1 RW
The third block is the slave station mapping and control area.
CANopen provides a PDO method to perform mapping of the master and slave station memory,
and enables the master to directly access read/write data in a certain memory area. The master
will automatically perform data exchange with the corresponding slave device, and the
read/write values can be seen directly from the special D area after real-time exchange (M1034
= 1 time) has been established. The C2000 currently supports real-time mapping of four PDOs,
and there are two types of PDO RXPDO (reads slave device information) and TXPDO (writes to
slave device). In addition, in order to facilitate control, the C2000 cannot perform mapping of
commonly-used registers; the following is an overview of the current PDO mapping situation:
TXPDO
PDO4 (Torque) PDO3 (Position) PDO2 (Remote I/O) PDO1 (Speed)
Description Special D Description Special D Description Special D Description Special D
Controller Controller
D2008+100*n D2008+100*n Slave device DO D2027+100*n Controller word D2008+100*n
word word
Target Target D2020+100*n Slave device
D2017+100*n D2031+100*n Target speed D2012+100*n
torque position D2021+100*n AO1
Control Control Slave device
D2010+100*n D2010+100*n D2032+100*n
method method AO2
Slave device
D2033+100*n
AO3
16-136
RXPDO
PDO4 (Torque) PDO3 (Position) PDO2 (Remote I/O) PDO1 (Speed)
Mode word D2009+100*n Mode word D2009+100*n Slave device DI D2026+100*n Mode word D2009+100*n
D2022+100*n
Actual torque D2018+100*n Actual position Slave device AI1 D2028+100*n Actual frequency D2013+100*n
D2023+100*n
Actual mode D2011+100*n Actual mode D2011+100*n Slave device AI2 D2029+100*n
Slave device AI3 D2030+100*n
Because usage requires only simple to open the corresponding PDO, where TXPDO employs
D2034+100*n settings and RXPDO employs D2067+100*n settings.
These two special D areas are defined as follows:

PDO4 PDO3 PDO2 PDO1
Default
Torque Position Remote I/O Speed
definition
bit 15 14–12 11 10–8 7 6–4 3 2–0
Definition En Length En Length En Length En Length
En: indicates whether PDO is used
Length: indicates mapping of several variables
In a simple example, if we want to control a C2000 slave device and make it to operate in speed
mode, we only have to make the following settings:
D2034+100*n =000Ah
TX PDO
Length: PDO4 PDO3 PDO2 PDO1
1 Controller D2008+100*n Controller D2008+100*n Slave D2027+100*n Controller D2008+100*n
Word Word device DO Word
2 Target D2017+100*n Target D2020+100*n Slave D2031+100*n Target D2012+100*n
torque D2021+100*n device speed
AO1
3 Control D2010+100*n Control D2010+100*n Slave D2032+100*n
method method device
AO2
4 Slave device
D2033+100*n
AO3
PDO4 PDO3 PDO2 PDO1

Definition Torque Position Remote I/O Speed
bit 15 14–12 11 10–8 7 6–4 3 2–0
Definition 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 2
D2067+100*n =000Ah
TX PDO
Length: PDO4 PDO3 PDO2 PDO1
1 Controller D2009+100*n Controller D2009+100*n Slave D2026+100*n Controller D2009+100*n
Word Word device DI Word
2 Actual D2018+100*n Actual D2022+100*n Slave D2028+100*n Actual D2013+100*n
torque position D2023+100*n device AI1 frequency
3 Actual D2011+100*n Actual D2011+100*n Slave D2029+100*n
mode mode device AI2
4 Slave device
D2030+100*n
AI3
PDO4 PDO3 PDO2 PDO1

Definition Torque Position Remote I/O Speed
bit 15 14–12 11 10–8 7 6–4 3 2–0
Definition 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 2
Switch the PLC to Run after completing settings. Now wait for successful initialization of CANopen
(M1059 = 1 and M1061 = 0), and then initiate CANopen memory mapping (M1034 = 1). The
control word and frequency command will now automatically refresh to the corresponding slave
device (D2008+n*100 and D2012+n*100), and the slave device's status word and currently
16-137
frequency will also be automatically sent back to the master station (D2009+n*100 and
D2013+n*100). This also illustrates how the master can handle these tasks through read/write
operations in the special D area.
Furthermore, it should be noted that the remote I/O of PDO2 can obtain the slave device's current
DI and AI status, and can also control the slave device's DO and AO status. Nevertheless, after
introducing a fully automatic mapping special D, the C2000 CANopen master also provides
additional information refreshes. For instance, while in speed mode, acceleration/deceleration
settings may have been refreshed. The special D therefore also stores some seldom-used
real-time information, and these commands can be refreshed using the CANFLS command. The
following is the C2000's current CANopen master data conversion area, which has a range of
D2001+100*n–D2033+100*n, as shown below:
1. The range of n is 0–7
2. ●Indicates PDOTX, ▲Indicates PDORX; unmarked special D can be refreshed using the
CANFLS command
PDO Default
1 2 3 4
D2000+100*n Setting range: 0–127 0 RW
Manufacturer code of slave station
D2002+100*n 0 R
number n (L)
Manufacturer code of slave station
D2003+100*n 0 R
number n (H)
Manufacturer's product code of slave
D2004+100*n 0 R
station number n (L)
Manufacturer's product code of slave
D2005+100*n 0 R
station number n (H)
Basic definitions
PDO Default
1 2 3 4
Communications break handling
D2006+100*n 0 RW
method of slave station number n
Error code of slave station number n
D2007+100*n 0 R
error
Control word of slave station number
D2008+100*n 0 ● ● ● RW
n
Status word of slave station number
D2009+100*n 0 ▲ ▲ ▲ R
n
Control mode of slave station
D2010+100*n 2 RW
number n
Actual mode of slave station number
D2011+100*n 2 R
n
16-138
Velocity Control
PDO Default
1 2 3 4
Torque restriction on slave station
D2001+100*n 0 RW
number n
Target speed of slave station number
D2012+100*n 0 ● RW
n (rpm)
Actual speed of slave station number
D2013+100*n 0 ▲ R
n (rpm)
Error speed of slave station number n
D2014+100*n 0 R
(rpm)
Acceleration time of slave station
D2015+100*n 1000 RW
number n (ms)
Deceleration time of slave station
D2016+100*n 1000 RW
number n (ms)
Torque control
PDO Default
1 2 3 4
Target torque of slave station number
D2017+100*n 0 ● RW
n(-100.0% – +100.0%)
Actual torque of slave station number
D2018+100*n 0 ▲ R
n(XX.X%)
Actual current of slave station number
D2019+100*n 0 R
n(XX.XA)
Position control
PDO Default:
1 2 3 4
D2020+100*n Target of slave station number n (L) 0 RW
●
D2021+100*n Target of slave station number n (H) 0 RW
Actual position of slave station
D2022+100*n 0 R
number n (L)
▲
Actual position of slave station
D2023+100*n 0 R
number n (H)
Speed chart of slave station number n
D2024+100*n 10000 RW
(L)
Speed chart of slave station number n
D2025+100*n 0 RW
(H)
Remote I/O
PDO Default:
1 2 3 4
D2026+100*n MI status of slave station number n 0 ▲ R
D2027+100*n MO setting of slave station number n 0 ● RW
D2028+100*n AI1 status of slave station number n 0 ▲ R
D2031+100*n AO1 setting of slave station number n 0 ● RW
16-139
After gaining an understanding of special D definitions, we return to setting steps. After entering the
values corresponding to D1090 to D1099, D2000+100*n, D2034+100*n and D2067+100*n, we can
begin to perform downloading, which is performed in accordance with the following steps:
1. D2000 and D2100 are set as 20 and 21, and D2200, D2300, D2400, D2500, D2600, and D2700
are set as 0; if a setting of 0 causes problems, D1091 can be set as 3, and slave stations 2 to 7 can
be closed.
2. Switch PLC to Stop status.
3. Press the transmit button.
4. Click on write memory after exiting the window.
5. Ignore D0–D399.
6. Change the second range to D1090–D1099.
7. Click on Confirm.
 Another method can be used to set D1091: Determine which of slave stations 0 to 7 will not be
needed, and set the corresponding bits to 0. For instance, if it is not necessary to control slave
stations 2, 6 and 7, merely set D1091 = 003B, and the setting method is the same as
described above: Use WPL to initiate communications > use register edit (T C D) function
to perform settings.
16-140
Step 3: Set the master's communications station number and communications

speed
 When setting the master's station number (Pr. 09-46, default is set as 100), make sure not to use the
same number as a slave station.
 Set the CANopen communications speed (Pr. 09-37); regardless of whether the drive is defined as a
master or slave station, the communications speed is set via this parameter.
Step 4: Write program code

Real-time access: Can directly read/write to or from the corresponding D area.
Non real-time access:
Read command: Use the CANRX command for reading. M1066 will be 1 when reading is completed;
M1067 will be 1 if reading is successful, and M1067 will be 0 if an error has occurred.
Write command: Use the CANTX command for writing. M1066 will be 1 when writing is completed;
M1067 will be 1 if writing is successful, and M1067 will be 0 if an error has occurred.
Refresh command: Use CANFLS command to refresh (if there are RW attributes, the master will
write to the slave station; if there are RO attributes, the slave station will return the read
values to the master); M1066 will be 1 if refresh has been completed; M1067 will be 1 if
refresh is successful, and M1067 will be 0 if an error has occurred.
NOTE
When using CANRX, CANTX or CANFLS, internal implementation commands will wait until M1066 is
completed before executing the next CANRX, CANTX or CANFLS.
Afterwards, download program to the drive (Please note that the PLC's default communications format is
ASCII 7N2 9600, and the station number is 2. The WPL must therefore be modified, and the WPL setting
pathway is settings > communications settings)
Step 5: Set the slave stations' station numbers, communications speed, control
source, and command source
Delta's C2000 and EC series devices currently support the CANopen communications interface drive, and
the corresponding slave station numbers and communications speed parameters are as follows:
Corresponding device
parameters Value Definition
C2000 E-C
Slave station 0 Disable CANopen hardware interface
09-36 09-20
address 1–127 CANopen Communication address
0 1Mbps
1 500Kbps
Communication 2 250Kbps
09-37 09-21
speed 3 125Kbps
4 100Kbps
5 50Kbps
00-21 - 3
Control source
- 02-01 5
00-20 - 6
Frequency source
- 02-00 5
11-33 - 3
Torque source
- - -
11-40 - 3
Position source
- - -
16-141
Delta's A2 Servo currently supports the CANopen communications interface, and the corresponding slave
station numbers and communications speed parameters are as follows:
Corresponding device
parameters Value Definition
A2
Slave station
03-00 1–127 CANopen Communication address
address
R= 0 125Kbps
R= 1 250Kbps
Communication
03-01 bit 8-11 XRXX R= 2 500Kbps
speed
R= 3 750Kbps
R= 4 1Mbps
Control/command
01-01 B
source
Step 6: Connect hardware wiring

When performing wiring, note the head and tail terminal resistance; connection methods are as
follows:
Terminal Terminal
Resistor Resistor
Step 7: Initiate control

After a program has been written and downloaded, switch the PLC mode to Run. Merely turn power
to master and slave stations off and then on again.
Refer to CANMasterTest 1 vs. 2 drive.dvp
Example
C2000 drive one-to-two control
Step 1: Activating CANopen Master functions

 Pr. 09-45=1 (initiates Master functions); restart power after completing setting, the
status bar on the KPC-CC01 digital keypad will display "CAN Master".
 Pr. 00-02=6 reset PLC (please note that this action will reset the program and PLC
registers to the default values)
 Turn power off and on again.
 Use the KPC-CC01 digital keypad to set the PLC control mode as "PLC Stop" (if a
newly-introduced drive is used, the blank internal PLC program will cause a PLFF
warning code to be issued).
16-142
Step 2: Master memory correspondences

 Enable WPL
 Use keypad set PLC mode as Stop (PLC 2)
 WPL read D1070 to D1099, D2000 to D2799
 Set D2000=10, D2100=11
 Set D2100, 2200, 2300, 2400, 2500, 2600, 2700=0
 Download D2000 to D2799 settings
Step 3: Set the master's communications station number and communications speed
 When setting the master's station number (Pr. 09-46, default is set as 100), make
sure not to use the same number as a slave station.
 Set the CANopen communications speed as 1M (Pr. 09-37=0); regardless of whether
the drive is defined as a master or slave station, the communications speed is set via
this parameter.
Step 4: Write program code

Real-time access: Can directly read/write to or from the corresponding D area.
Non real-time access:
Read command: Use the CANRX command for reading. M1066 will be 1 when reading
is complete; M1067 will be 1 if reading is successful, and M1067 will be 0 if
an error has occurred.
Write command: Use the CANTX command for writing. M1066 will be 1 when writing is
complete; M1067 will be 1 if writing is successful, and M1067 will be 0 if an
error has occurred.
Refresh command: Use CANFLS command to refresh (if there are RW attributes, the
master will write to the slave station; if there are RO attributes, the slave
station will return the read values to the master); M1066 will be 1 if refresh
has been completed; M1067 will be 1 if refresh is successful, and M1067
will be 0 if an error has occurred.
NOTE
When using CANRX, CANTX or CANFLS, internal implementation commands will wait until M1066 is
completed before executing the next CANRX, CANTX or CANFLS.
Afterwards, download program to the drive (Please note that the PLC's default
communications format is ASCII 7N2 9600, and the station number is 2. The WPL must
therefore be modified, and the WPL setting pathway is settings > communications
settings)
Step 5: Set the slave stations' station numbers and communications speed
Slave station no. 1: 09-37 = 0(Speed 1M) 09-36=10(Node ID 10 )
Slave station no. 2: 09-37 = 0(Speed 1M) 09-36=10(Node ID 11 )
16-143
Step 6: Connect hardware wiring

When performing wiring, note the head and tail terminal resistance; connection methods are
as follows:
Terminal Terminal
resistor resistor
Step 7: Initiate control

After a program has been written and downloaded, switch the PLC mode to Run. Merely
turn power to master and slave stations off and then on again.
Refer to CANMasterTest 1 vs. 2 driver.dvp
16-144
16-9 Explanation of various PLC mode controls (speed, torque,

homing, and position)
The torque mode and position mode are based on FOC vector control and speed mode also
supports FOC vector control. Control therefore cannot be performed successfully unless finishing
motor parameter auto tuning ahead of time for the torque mode and position mode, and the speed
mode based on FOC.
In addition, motors are classified as two types: IM and PM. For IM motors, the auto tuning of the
motor parameter will be enough. For PM motors, after completing motor parameter auto tuning, the
auto tuning of motor origin angle of deviation should be completed as well. Please refer to Chapter
12-1 Pr. 05-00 for detailed explanation.
※ If a PM motor belongs to Delta's ECMA series, motor parameters can be directly input from
data in the servo motor catalog, and parameter study will not be needed.
Control methods and settings are explained as follows:
Speed control:
Register table for speed mode:
Control special M
Special
Description of Function Attributes
M
M1025 Drive frequency = set frequency (ON) / drive frequency =0 (OFF) RW
M1026 Drive operating direction FWD(OFF) / REV(ON) RW
M1040 Hardware power (Servo On) RW
M1042 Quick stop RW
M1044 Pause (Halt) RW
M1052 Lock frequency (lock, frequency locked at the current operating frequency) RW
Status special M
Special
M
M1015 Frequency attained (when used together with M1025) RO
M1056 Servo On Ready RO
M1058 On Quick Stopping RO
Control special D
Special
D
D1060 Mode setting (speed mode is 0) RW
Status special D
Special
D
D1037 Converter output frequency (0.00–600.00) RO
D1050 Actual operating mode (speed mode is 0) RO
16-145
Speed mode control commands:

FREQ(P) S1 S2 S3
Target speed The first acceleration time setting The first deceleration time setting
Example of speed mode control:
Before performing speed control, if the FOC (magnetic field orientation) control method is used,
setting of electromechanical parameters must first be completed.
1. Setting D1060 = 0 will shift the converter to the speed mode (default).
2. Use the FREQ command to control frequency, acceleration time, and deceleration time.
3. Set M1040 = 1, the drive will now be excited, but the frequency will be 0.
4. Set M1025 = 1, the drive frequency command will now jump to the frequency designated
by FREQ, and acceleration/deceleration will be controlled on the basis of the acceleration
time and deceleration time specified by FREQ.
5. M1052 can be used to lock the current operating frequency.
6. M1044 can be used to temporarily pause operation, and the deceleration method will comply
with deceleration settings.
7. M1042 can be used to perform quick stop, and deceleration will be as quick as possible
without giving rise to an error. (There may still be a jump error if the load is too large.)
8. Control user rights: M1040(Servo ON) > M1042(Quick Stop) >M1044(Halt) >M1052(LOCK)
16-146
Torque control:
Register table for torque mode:
Control special M
Special M Description of Function Attributes
M1040 Servo On RW
Status special M
M1056 Servo On Ready RO
M1063 Torque attained RO
Control special D
Special D Description of Function Attributes
D1060 Operating mode setting (torque mode is 2) RW
Status special D
D1053 Actual torque RO
Torque mode control commands:

TORQ(P) S1 S2
Target torque (with numbers) Frequency restrictions
Example of torque mode control:

The setting of electromechanical parameters involved in torque control must be completed before
implementing torque control.
1. Set D1060 = 2 to change the converted to the torque mode.
2. Use the TORQ command to implement torque control and speed limits.
3. Set M1040 = 1; the drive will now be excited, and immediately jump to the target torque or
speed limit. D1053 can be used to find out the current torque.
0 M1002
MOV K2 D1060
ON only for 1scan a Set control mode (0:V)
6 M1000
TMR T0 K30
Normally open contact Power on delay
T0
Power on delay Ready

13 X1
TORQ K100 K1000
Set Torque
19 X1
TORQ K-200 K1000
Set Torque
25 M0 X4
Ready Power on
28
END
9999
16-147
Homing control / position control:

Register table in homing mode / position mode:
Control special M
M1040 Servo On RW
Move to new position, must use control mode as position mode (D1060 =
M1048 RW
1) and M1040 = 1
M1050 Absolute position / relative position (0: relative / 1: absolute) RW
Search for origin (home start), must use control mode as position mode
M1055 RW
(D1060 = 3) and M1040 = 1
Status special M
M1064 Target reached RO
M1070 Return home complete RO
M1071 Homing error RO
Control special D
D1060 Operating mode setting (position mode is 1, homing mode is 3) RW
Status special D
D1051 Actual position (Low word) RO
D1052 Actual position (High word) RO
※ D1051 and D1052 must be combined to give the actual location, and it has a serial number.
Position mode control commands:

DPOS(P) S1
Target (with numbers)
Example of homing mode / position mode control:
First complete setting of electromechanical parameters connected with position before

implementing homing control or position control.
1. Set Pr. 00-40 to select the homing method and the corresponding limit sensors and origin.
(Setting the MI function gives a reverse rotation limit of 44, a forward rotation limit of 45, and
an origin proximity of 46. Because the C2000 currently only supports a Z-phase origin, the
encoder card must provide Z-phase.)
2. Set D1060 = 3 to change the converter to the homing mode.
3. Set M1040 = 1
In the VF/SVC/VFPG mode, will enter the STANDBY mode (Pr. 01-34 can be used to access
the STANDBY mode's action options).
In the FOC+PG mode, zero speed holding will occur
4. Set M1055 = 1, and the drive will now start to search for the origin.
5. When homing is complete, M1070 will change to ON. If you now set D1060 = 1, the control
mode will switch to position mode (please note that M1040 will not change to off; this
mechanical origin move).
16-148
6. The DPOS command can now be used to designate the drive's target location. M1050 or Pr.
00-12 can be used to set a change in absolute or relative position.
7. Implement M1048 Pulse ON once (must be more than 1 ms in duration), and the converter
will begin to move toward the target (M1040 must be 1 to be effective). The current position
can be obtained from D1051 and D1052.
Part 1: The initialization mode is defined as the "homing" mode from the beginning (set D1060 = 3).
X2 is used to implement converter excitation.
Initial condition
0 M1002
MOV K3 D1060
ON only for 1scan a Set control mode (0:V)
SET M100
Home mode
RST M101
P2P mode
10 X2
Servo on req Power on
Part 2: Homing; Use X3 to trigger homing action; will automatically switch to position mode after
completion.
Home mode
12 M100 X3
Home Home Home

mode req
M1070
RST M100
Home
finish
RST M100
16-149
Part 3: Point-to-point movement; switch to position mode (set D1060 = 1), and move back and forth
between position points. (+300000 – -300000 )
P2P mode
20 M101
MOV K1 D1060
P2P mode Set control mode (0:V)
MOV K1 K4M200
+300000
33 M200
DPOS K300000
+300000
TMR T100 K10
43
M201 M1064
TMR T101 K10
Ack Target Position atta
49
M202
DPOS K300000
-400000
TMR T102 K10
59 M1064
TMR T103 K10
Ack Target Position atta
65 M200 T100
ROLP K4M200 K1
+300000 +300000
M200 T100
+300000
M200 T100
+300000
M200 T100
+300000
81 M202
(M1048)
Ack
M203
84 Ack
END
※ If homing is not needed in an application, the first and second parts can be skipped. However,
the M1040 condition from Part 1 must be included, and the writing method in Part 1 involve the
use of X2 to achieve direct access. In addition, when M101 is used at the beginning of Part 3 to
set the control mode, it can be rewritten as M1002, which will put the PLC immediately into the
position mode when it starts running.
16-150
16-10 Internal communications main node control
The protocol has been developed in order to facilitate the use of RS-485 instead of CANopen in
certain application situations. The RS-485 protocol offers similar real-time characteristics as
CANopen; this protocol can only be used on the C2000 and CT2000 devices. The maximum number
of slave devices is 8.
Internal communications have a master-slave structure. The initiation method is very simple:
Slave device:
Set Pr. 09-31 = -1 to -8 in order to access 8 nodes, and set Pr. 00-20 = 1 to define the control source
as RS-485 and access the reference sources that must be controlled, namely speed command (Pr.
00-21 = 2), torque command (Pr. 11-33 = 1), and position command (Pr. 11-40=2). This will complete
slave device settings. (PLC functions do not need to be activated)
System
Setting the master is even simpler; it is only necessary to set Pr. 09-31 = -10, and enable the PLC.
Hardware wiring: The master and slave stations are connected via the RS-485 serial port. The C2000
provides two types of RS-485 serial port interfaces, see the figure below: (please refer to Chapter 06
“Control Terminals” concerning detailed terminal connections)
16-151
Master programming: In a program, D1110 can be used to define a slave station to be controlled (1–8,
if set as 0, can jump between 8 stations). Afterwards, M1035 is set as 1, and the memory positions of
the master and slave stations will correspond. At this time, it is only necessary to send commands to
the correlation slave station address to control that station. The following is a register table connected
with internal communications:
Control special M
M1035 Initiates internal communications control RW
Control special D
Internal node communications number 1–8 (set the station number of
D1110 RW
the slave station to be controlled)
Description of Function
Special D User Location Attributes
Definition bit Speed mode Torque mode Homing mode
rights mode
Command Homing
0 4 - -
functions Origin
Reverse
Immediate
1 4 rotation - -
change
requirements
2 4 - - - -
Temporary Temporary
3 3 - -
pause pause
Frequency Temporary
4 4 - -
locking pause
Internal node N control
D1120 + 10*N
command
5 4 JOG - - - RW
6 2 Quick Stop Quick Stop Quick Stop Quick Stop
7 1 Servo ON Servo ON Servo ON Servo ON
Speed interval Speed interval
11–8 4 - -
switching switching
Deceleration
13–12 4 - - -
time change
Enable Bit Enable Bit
14 4 - -
13–8 13–8
Clear error Clear error Clear error Clear error
15 4
code code code code
Internal node N control
D1121 + 10*N
mode
0 1 2 3 RW
Position Torque
Speed
Internal node N command command
D1122 + 10*N
reference command L
command
(with (with
- RW
(no number)
numbers) numbers)
Internal node N
D1123 + 10*N
reference command H
- Speed limit - RW
※ N = 0–7
Status special D
D1115 Internal node synchronizing cycle (ms) RO
Internal node error (bit0 = slave device 1, bit1 = slave device 2,…bit7 = slave
D1116 RO
device 8)
Internal node online correspondence (bit0 = slave device 1, bit1 = slave device
D1117 RO
2,…bit7 = slave device 8)
16-152

bit Speed mode Location mode Torque mode Homing mode
Frequency command Position command Torque command Zero command
0
arrival attained attained completed
Clockwise Clockwise Clockwise Clockwise
1
Counterclockwise: Counterclockwise: Counterclockwise: Counterclockwise:
D1126 + 10*N 2 Warning Warning Warning Warning RO
3 Error Error Error Error
5 JOG
6 Quick Stop Quick Stop Quick Stop Quick Stop
7 Servo ON Servo ON Servo ON Servo ON
Actual torque
D1127 + 10*N Actual frequency Actual position -
(with numbers)
(with numbers) RO
D1128 + 10*N - - -
※ N=0–7
Example: Assume it is desired to control slave station 1 operation at frequencies of 30.00Hz and
60.00 Hz, status, and online node correspondences:
When it is judged that slave station 1 is online, delay 3 sec. and begin control
16-153
It is required slave station 1 maintains forward rotation at 30.00Hz for 1 sec., and maintains reverse
rotation at 60.00 Hz for 1 sec., and repeat this cycle continuously.
16-154
16-11 Count function using MI8

16-11-1 High-speed count function
The C2000's MI8 supports one-way pulse counting, and the maximum speed is 100K. The starting
method is very simple, and only requires setting M1038 to begin counting. The 32 bit count value is
stored on D1054 and D1055 in non-numerical form. M1039 can reset the count value to 0.
※ When the PLC program defines MI8 for use as a high-speed counter, and also for use in PLC
procedures, it must be written to M1038 or M1039, and the original MI8 functions will be disabled.
16-11-2 Frequency calculation function

Apart from high-speed counting, the C2000's MI8 can also convert a received pulse to frequency.
The following figure shows that there is no conflict between frequency conversion and count
calculations, which can be performed simultaneously.
PLC speed calculation formula

D1057 Speed
D1058 Interval between calculations
D1059 Decimal places
Assuming that there are 5 input pulses each second, (see figure below) we set D1058=1000ms=1.0
sec. as the calculation interval. This enables five pulses to be sent to the converter each second.
Assuming that each 5 pulses correspond to 1Hz, we set D1057=5.

Assuming that we wish to display numbers to two decimal places, we set D1059=2, which is also
1.00Hz. The numerical value displayed at D1056 is 100. For simplicity, the D1056 conversion formula
can be expressed as in the following table:
16-155
16-12 Modbus Remote IO Control Applications (use MODRW)

The C2000's internal PLC supports 485 read/write functions, which can be realized using the
MODRW command. However, the 485 serial port must be defined as available for the PLC's 485 use
before writing a program, and the Pr. 09-31 must be set as -12. After completing settings, the
standard functions defined by 485 can be used to implement read/write commands at other stations.
Communications speed is defined by parameter 09-01, the communications format is defined by Pr.
09-04, and the PLC's current station number is defined by Pr. 09-35. The C2000 currently supports
the functions read coil (0x01), read input (0x02), read register (0x03), write to single register (0x06),
write to several coils (0x0F), and write to several registers (0x10). Explanations and the usage of
these functions are provided as follows:
MODRW command
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 General Slave device is Delta's PLC Slave device is Delta's
Node Command Address Return: meaning meaning converter meaning
Length
ID D area
Read 18 bits of data corresponding to
Read coil slave station 3 PLC Y0 to Y21. This
K3 H01 H500 D0 K18 Does not support this function
(bit) data is stored by bit 0 to 15 of the this
station's D0 and bit 0 to bit 3 of D1.
Read 10 bits of data corresponding to
Read input slave station 3 PLC X0 to X11. This
K3 H02 H400 D10 K10 Does not support this function
(bit) data is stored by bit 0 to 9 of this
station's D10.
Read 3 words of data
Read 3 words of data corresponding corresponding to slave station
Read register
K3 H03 H600 D20 K3 to slave station 3 PLC T0 to T2. This 3 converter parameters 06-00
(word)
data is stored by D20 to D22. to 06-02. This data is stored by
D20 to D22
Write slave station 3 converter
Write to single Write slave station 3 PLC's T16 to this
K3 H06 H610 D30 XX 06 to 16 parameter to this
register (word) station's D30 value
station's D30 value
Write to
Write slave station 3 PLC's Y11 to
K3 H0F H509 D40 K10 multiple coils Does not support this function
Y22 to bit 0 to 9 of D40.
(Bit)
Write to Write slave station 3 converter
Write slave station 3 PLC's T2 to T5 to
K3 H10 H602 D50 K4 multiple 06-02 to 06-05 parameters to
D50 to D53
registers (word) this station's D50 to D53
※ XX indicates doesn't matter
After implementing MODRW, the status will be displayed in M1077 (485 read/write complete), M1078
(485 read/write error), and M1079 (485 read/write time out). M1077 is defined so as to immediately
revert to 0 after the MODRW command has been implemented. However, any of three situations—a
report of no error, a data error report, or time out with no report—will cause the status of M1077 to
change to On.
Example program: Testing of various functions

At the start, will cause the transmitted time sequence to switch to the first data unit.
0 M1002
MOV K1 K4M0
On only for 1 scan a
16-156
When the reported message indicates no error, it will switch to the next transmitted command
6 M1077 M1078 M1079

ROLP K4M0 K1
485 R/W 485 R/W 485 R/W
rite is co rite is fail rite is time 0
If time out occurs or an error is reported, the M1077 will change to On. At this time, after a delay of 30
scanning cycles, it will re-issue the original command once
14 M1077
ADD D30 K1 D30
485 R/W rite is co
D30 K40 MOV K0 D30
( M200 )
Delay cycle
33 M1002
( M100 )
ON only for 1 scan a ReqTXOnce
M200
Delay cycle
36 M100 M0
MODRW K2 H1 H500 D200
ReqTXOnce M1
MODRW K2 HF H500 D100
M2
M3
M4
It will repeat after sending all commands
102 M5
MOV K1 K4M0
INC D1
D30 K40 MOV K1 K4M0
121
END
Practical applications:
Actual use to control the RTU-485 module.
Step 1: Set the communications format. Assume that the communications format is 115200, 8,N,2,
RTU
C2000：The default PLC station number is set as 2 (09-35)
Pr. 09-31=-12 (COM1 is controlled by the PLC ), Pr. 09-01=115.2 (The communications speed is
115200 )
Pr. 09-04=13 (The format is 8,N,2, RTU)
16-157
RTU-485: The station number = 8 (give example)
ID7 ID6 ID5 ID4 ID3 ID2 ID1 ID0 PA3 PA2 PA1 PA0 DR2 DR1 DR0 A/R
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0
Communication station #:
ID0~ ID7 are defined as 2 0 , 2 1, 2 2 ...2 6 , 2 7
Communication protocol
Communication Protocol
Communicaton Speed
Step 2: Install control equipment. We sequentially connect a DVP16-SP (8 IN 8 OUT), DVP-04AD (4

channels AD), DVP02DA (2 channels DA), and DVP-08ST (8 switches) to the RTU-485.
The following corresponding locations can be obtained from the RTU-485's configuration definitions:
Module Terminals 485 Address
X0–X7 0400H–0407H
DVP16-SP
Y0–Y7 0500H–0507H
DVP-04AD AD0–AD3 1600H–1603H
DVP02DA DA0–DA1 1640H–1641H
DVP-08ST Switch 0–7 0408H–040FH
16-158
Step 3: Physical configuration
Step 4: Write to PLC program
16-159
16-160
Step 5: Actual testing situation:

I/O testing: When the switch is activated, it can be discovered that the display corresponds to
M115–M108. Furthermore, it can be seen that one output point light is added every 1 sec.
(the display uses a binary format)
This light signal increase

by 1number per second.
WPL will be modified
when pressing this Switch
AD DA testing: It can be discovered that D200 and D201 are roughly twice the D300, and continue to
increase progressively. For their part, the D202 and D203 are roughly twice the D301,
and continue to decrease progressively.
16-161
16-162
16-13 Calendar functions

The C2000's internal PLC includes calendar functions, but these may only be used when a keypad
(KPC-CC01) is connected, otherwise the function cannot be used. Currently-supported commands
include TCMP (comparison of calendar data), TZCP (calendar data range comparison), TADD (calendar
data addition), TSUB (calendar data subtraction), and TRD (calendar reading). Please refer to the
explanation of relevant commands and functions for the usage of these commands.
In real applications, the internal PLC can judge whether calendar function have been activated; if
they have been activated, calendar warning codes may be displayed in some situations. The basis for
whether a calendar function has been activated is whether the program has written the calendar time
(D1063 to D1069) in connection with the foregoing calendar commands or programs.
The calendar's time display is currently assigned to D1063 to D1069, and is defined as follows:
Special
Item Content Attributes
D
Year
D1063 20xx (2000–2099) RO
(Western)
D1064 Weeks 1–7 RO
D1065 Month 1–12 RO
D1066 Day 1–31 RO
D1067 Hour 0–23 RO
D1068 Minute 0–59 RO
D1069 Second 0–59 RO
Calendar-related special M items are defined as follows:
Special
Item Attributes
D
M1068 Calendar time error RO
Calendar time error or refresh time
M1076 RO
out
M1036 Ignore calendar warning RW
*When a program writes to the commands TCMP, TZCP, TADD, or TSUB, if it is discovered that a
value exceeds the reasonable range, M1026 will be 1.
*When the keypad display is PLra (RTC correction warning) or PLrt (RTC time out warning), M1076
will be ON.
*When M1036 is 1, the PLC will ignore the calendar warning.
Calendar trigger warning code is defined as follows:
Reset Whether it affects PLC
Warning Description
approach operation
Requires Will not have any effect
PLra Calendar time correction
power restart
Requires Will not have any effect
PLrt Calendar time refresh time out
power restart
*When the PLC's calendar functions are operating, if the keypad is replaced with another keypad, it
will jump to PLra.
*When it is discovered at startup that the keypad has not been powered for more than 7 days, or the
time is wrong, PLra will be triggered.
*When it is discovered that the C2000 has no keypad in 10 sec. after startup, PLrt will be triggered.
16-163
*If the keypad is suddenly pulled out while the calendar is operating normally, and is not reconnected
for more than 1 minute, PLrt will be triggered.
Practical applications:
We will perform a demo of simple applications.
We first correct the keypad time. After pressing Menu on the keypad, select the 9th time setting
option. After selection, set the current time.
Menu Time Setup

7.Quick Start 2020/09/01
8.Displ Setup 02:16:21
9.Time Setup
We set converter on during the period of 8:00–17:20, which allows us to write the following example
At K16
Normally open
contact of
operation
At K16
monitoring (a)
Servo on
Motor drive
Run (ON)/ Stop(OFF)
Normally open
contact of
operation
monitoring (a)
16-164
Chapter 17 Safe Torque Off Function C2000
Chapter 17 Safe Torque Off Function
17-1 The Drive Safety Function Failure Rate
17-2 Safe Torque Off Terminal Function Description
17-3 Wiring Diagram
17-4 Parameter
17-5 Operating Sequence Description
17-6 New Error Code for STO Function
17-1
17-1 The Drive Safety Function Failure Rate
Item Definition Standard Performance

Channel 1: 80.08%
SFF Safe Failure Fraction IEC61508
Channel 2: 68.91%
HFT (Type A
Hardware Fault Tolerance IEC61508 1
subsystem)
IEC61508 SIL 2
SIL Safety Integrity Level
IEC62061 SILCL 2
Average frequency of dangerous failure
PFH IEC61508 9.56×10-10
[h-1]
Probability of Dangerous Failure on
PFDav IEC61508 4.18×10-6
Demand
Category Category ISO13849-1 Category 3
PL Performance level ISO13849-1 d
MTTFd Mean time to dangerous failure ISO13849-1 High
DC Diagnostic coverage ISO13849-1 Low
17-2 Safety Torque Off Terminal Function Description

The Safe Torque Off function (STO) is to cut off the power supply to motor through the hardware,
thereby the motor couldn’t produce torque.
The STO function controls the motor current driving signal through two hardware circuits respectively,
and thus cut off the inverter power module output in order to achieve the status of safety stop.
Operation principle Description as following table 1:

Table 1: Terminal operation description
Signal Channel Photo-coupler status
STO1–SCM1 ON (High) ON (High) OFF (Low) OFF (Low)

STO signal
STO2–SCM2 ON (High) OFF (Low) ON (Low) OFF (Low)
STL2 mode STL1 mode STO mode

Driver Output status Ready (Torque output (Torque output (Torque output
off) off) off)
 STO means Safe Torque Off

 STL1–STL3 means Safe Torque Off hardware abnormal.
 STL3 means STO1–SCM1 and STO2–SCM2 internal circuit detected abnormal.
 STO1–SCM1 ON (High): means STO1–SCM1has connection to a +24VDC power supply.
 STO2–SCM2 ON (High): means STO2–SCM2 has connection to a +24VDC power supply.
 STO1–SCM1 OFF (Low): means STO1–SCM1hasn’t connection to a +24VDC power supply.
 STO2–SCM2 OFF (Low): means STO2–SCM2hasn’t connection to a +24VDC power supply.
17-2
17-3 Wiring Diagram

17-3-1 Internal STO circuit as below:
I /O C a rd C2000
+ 24 V V+
ST O1
SCM1
S TO2
C PU
Li ne
drive
Gat e
dr ive M
S CM2
M CM
M O1
DC M C OM
17-3-2 In the figure below, the factory setting for +24V-STO1-STO2 and SCM1-SCM2-DCM is
short-circuited:
I/O Card C2000

+ 24 V V+
STO 1
SCM1
S TO2
CP U
Lin e
drive
Gate
drive M
S CM2
M CM
M O1
DC M C OM
17-3
17-3-3 The control loop wiring diagram:

1. Remove the shot-circuit of +24V-STO1-STO2 and DCM-SCM1-SCM2.
2. The wiring as below diagram. The ESTOP switch must at Close status in normal situation and drive
will be able to Run.
3. STO mode, switch ESTOP open. Drive output stop and keypad display STO.
17-4
17-4 Parameters
 STO Alarm Latch
Default: 0
Settings 0：STO Alarm Latch
1：STO Alarm no Latch
 Pr. 06-44=0 STO Alarm Latch: after the reason of STO Alarm is cleared, a Reset command is
needed to clear the STO Alarm.
 Pr. 06-44=1 STO Alarm no Latch: after the reason of STO Alarm is cleared, the STO Alarm will
be cleared automatically.
 The STL1–STL3 error are all “Alarm latch” mode (in STL1–STL3 mode, the Pr. 06-44 function is
no effective).
Default:11
Default:1
Default:0

Multi-function Output 4 (MO2)
Default:66
Settings 66: SO N.O. output
68: SO N.C. output

66 SO Logic A output Safety Output Normal Open
68 SO Logic B output Safety Output Normal Close
 C2000 factory setting Pr. 02-17 (MO2) = 66 (N.O.) and Multi-function Output setting item adds 2
new function: 66 and 68.
Safety Output status

Drive status N.O. N.C.
(MO=66) (MO=68)
Normal run Open Close
STO Close Open
STL1–STL3 Close Open
 Content of Multi-function Display

Default: 3
Settings 45: Hardware version
17-5
17-5 Operating Sequence Description

17-5-1 Normal operation status
As shown in Figure 3: When the STO1–SCM1 and STO2–SCM2=ON (no STO function is
needed), the drive will execute “Operating” or “Output Stop” according to RUN/STOP command.
Figure 3
17-5-2-1 STO, Pr. 06-44=0, Pr. 02-35=0

As shown in Figure 4: When both of STO1–SCM1 and STO2–SCM2 channel has turned off during
operating, the STO function enabling and the drive will stop output regardless of Run command is ON or
OFF status.
Figure 4
17-5-2-2 STO, Pr. 06-44=0, Pr. 02-35=1

As shown in Figure 5: As same as the figure 4. Because the Pr. 02-35=1, after the Reset command,
if the operating command still exists, then the drive will immediately execute the run command
again.
Figure 5
17-6
17-5-3 STO, Pr. 06-44=1
Figure 6
17-5-4 STL1
Figure 7
17-5-4 STL2
Figure 8
17-7
17-6 New Error Code for STO Function

Present Fault Record
Second Most Recent Fault Record
Third Most Recent Fault Record
Fourth Most Recent Fault Record
Fifth Most Recent Fault Record
Sixth Most Recent Fault Record
Settings 72: Channel 1 (STO1–SCM1)internal hardware error
76: STO (Safe Torque Off)
77: Channel 2 (STO2–SCM2) internal hardware error
78: Channel 1 and Channel 2 internal hardware error
Error code Name Description

76 STO Safe Torque Off function active
STL1
72 STO1–SCM1 internal hardware detect error
(STO1–SCM1)
STL2
77 STO2–SCM2 internal hardware detect error
(STO2–SCM2)
STO1–SCM1 and STO2–SCM2 internal
78 STL3
hardware detect error
The Old/New control board and Old/New I/O card:

C2000 v1.12 firmware v1.20 firmware
v1.12 control board + old I/O card (no STO function) OK OK
v1.12 control board + new I/O card (with STO function) Error Error
v1.20 control board + old I/O card (no STO function) Error Error
v1.20 control board + new I/O card (with STO function) Error OK
17-8
Appendix A. Revision HistoryC2000
Appendix A. Revision History

New information
Description Related part
Combine the content of C2000 690V models to this manual. Whole manual
Service link label introduction. Chapter 1
Carton version upacking steps of frame D models. Chpater 3
The descriptions of short-circuit rated current (SCCR), built-in DC reactor
model list, requirements on insulation level of Curve B motor, capacitor filter,
Chapter 7
dimension of flange mounting for frame D models, dimension and model
names of magnetic ring, and description of power termina kit.
The descriptions of new extension cards, EMC-A22A (I/O relay), CMC-EC01
(Communication, EtherCAT), and CMC-PN01 (Communication, PROFINET). Chapter 8
Delta standard filedbus cable list.
Efficiency curve, and derating curve of voltage / current. Chpater 9
A note to describe how to use VFDSoft when OS is Win10, and a process of
Chapter 10
Start Wizard.
Add desciptions of the following parameters:
 Parameter group 01: 01-49
 Parameter group 02: 02-71, 02-74, 02-75
 Parameter group 04: 04-70–04-99
 Parameter group 06: 06-51, 06-62, 06-86
Chapter 11,
 Parameter group 07: 07-38, 07-62, 07-63
Section 12-1
 Parameter group 08: 08-26–08-28
 Parameter group 13
 Parameter group 14
The descriptions of the adjustment and application for AC drive Section 12-2
New functions of special relay (special M): M1090, M1091, M1092, M1100, Chpater 16
M1101, M1168, M1260, M1262, M1270, M1271; new functions of special
register (special D): D1200–D1207, D1209, D1215, D1220–D1227, D1229,
D1235.
New chapter to describe safety torque off function. Chapter 17
A-1
Appendix A. Revision History C2000
Updated information
Nameplate information, and the decription of RFI jumper. Chapter 1
The decriptions of using the lifting hook and the figure. Chpater 3
The wiring diagrams of all frame sizes, and the wiring of SINK (NPN) /
Chpater 4
SOURCE (PNP) mode.
The wiring diagrams of mair circuit terminals for all frame sizes, the
Chpater 5
descriptions of the main circuit termials.
The specifications of the control terminals and the wiring precautions. Chpater 6
EMC filter model list, the specifications and the assembly of DC reactor, the
model list and the descriptions of zero-phase reactor, the torque value, the Chapter 7
figures, applicable models and assembly/disassembly of fan.
The figures of extension cards, the figures to assembly / disassembly, the
figure to illustrate the positon of the terminating resistor and the extension Chapter 8
cards.
The cable length of PG card, the description of EMC-BPS01, and delete the
Chapter 8
description of CANopen cable and breakout box.
The general specifications, the descriptons of environmental characteristics. Chpater 9
Describe the functions which are listed on the MENU. Delete information of
Chapter 10
KPC-CE01.
Update desciptions of the following parameters:
 Parameter group 00: 00-00, 00-04, 00-06, 00-11, 00-13, 00-17, 00-20,
00-24, 00-25, 00-40
 Parameter group 01: 01-02–01-08, 01-11, 01-12–01-23, 01-24–01-27,
01-36–01-42, 01-43
 Parameter group 02: 02-00, 02-01–02-08, 02-13, 02-14, 02-26–02-31,
02-34, 02-38–02-41, 02-42–02-46, 02-49, 02-50–02-53, 02-58, 02-70
 Parameter group 03: 03-00, 03-02, 03-03–03-05, 03-09, 03-10, 03-19
03-20, 03-23, 03-30, 03-51–03-74
 Parameter group 05: 05-00–05-09, 05-13–05-15 05-17–05-21,
Chapter 11,
05-28–05-30, 05-34, 05-35, 05-38, 05-43. Delete 05-26, 05-27
Section 12-1
 Parameter group 06: 06-02–06-04, 06-14, 06-16–06-22, 06-28, 06-29,
06-30, 06-39, 06-46, 06-52, 06-55
 Parameter group 07: 07-00, 07-07, 07-08, 07-12–07-14, 07-19, 07-23
 Parameter group 08: 08-00–08-02, 08-16, 08-20, 08-23
 Parameter group 09: 09-04, 09-11–09-26, 09-31, 09-33, 09-39, 09-40,
09-60, 09-75, 09-84, 09-88, 09-89
 Parameter group 10: 10-02, 10-16, 10-19 10-24, 10-27, 10-30, 10-32,
10-34, 10-35–10-37, 10-41, 10-49, 10-51, 10-52. Delete 10-22
 Parameter group 11: 11-00, 11-01, 11-11, 11-12, 11-17–11-20, 11-31,
11-32, 11-39, 11-40
A-2
Appendix A. Revision HistoryC2000
Updated information
The descriptions of the adjustment and application for AC drive. Section 12-2
The descriptions of the warning codes Chpater 13
The descriptions of the fault codes Chpater 14
The descriptions of the bit setting for 2060H, 2020H. And the descriptions of
Chpater 15
speed mode, torque mode, PDO type no. 0.
The function description of D1051, D1052, and D1111, D1112. Chpater 16
The installation of WPLSoft Chpater 16
A-3

PLC

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PLC

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

PLC

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Delta Vector Control Drive - C2000 Series User Manual

Industrial Automation Headquarters

DACH: Delta Electronics (Netherlands) B.V.

Delta Vector Control Drive

C2000 Series User Manual

1-1 Nameplate Information…..................................................................................................1-2

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION ..................................................................................................................2-1

2-1 Mounting Clearance..........................................................................................................2-2

CHAPTER 3 UNPACKING ........................................................................................................................3-1

CHAPTER 4 WIRING ................................................................................................................................4-1

4-1 System Wiring Diagram...................................................................................................4-3

CHAPTER 5 MAIN CIRCUIT TERMINALS .............................................................................................5-1

5-1 Main Circuit Diagram.........................................................................................................5-4

CHPATER 6 CONTROL TERMINALS ......................................................................................................6-1

6-1 Remove the Cover for Wiring…………………………………………………………………6-4

CHAPTER 7 OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES ................................................................................................7-1

CHAPTER 8 OPTION CARDS ..................................................................................................................8-1

8-1 Option Card Installation......................................................................................................8-2

CHAPTER 9 SPECIFICATION ..................................................................................................................9-1

9-1 230V Series…………………………………...........................................................................9-2

CHAPTER 10 DIGITAL KEYPAD ...........................................................................................................10-1

10-1 Descriptions of Digital Keypad ………………………………….............................................10-2

CHAPTER 11 SUMMARY OF PARAMETERS ....................................................................................... 11-1

CHAPTER 12 DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETER SETTINGS ................................................................12-1

12-1 Description of Parameter Settings ……................................................................... 12.1-00-1

CHAPTER 13 WARNING CODES ..........................................................................................................13-1

CHAPTER 14 FAULT CODES AND DESCRIPTIONS............................................................................14-1

15-1 CANopen Overview……………………............................................................................15-3

CHAPTER 16 PLC FUNCTION APPLICATIONS ...................................................................................16-1

16-1 PLC Summary……………………....................................................................................16-2

CHAPTER 17 SAFE TORQUE OFF FUNCTION……………………………………………………….17-1

17-1 The Drive Safety Function Failure Rate……………………………………………………………17-2

APPENDIX A. REVISION HISTORY………………………………………………………………............…..A-1

1-1 Nameplate Information

1-2 Model Name

1-3 Serial Number

1-4 Apply After Service by Mobile Device

1-5 RFI Jumper

Receiving and Inspection

1-1 Nameplate Information

1-2 Model Name

1-3 Serial Number

1-4 Apply After Service by Mobile Device

1-5 RFI Jumper

Figure 1-5 Figure 1-6

Isolating main power from ground:

Important points regarding ground connection

Figure 1-8 Figure 1-9

Pay particular attention to the following points:

Floating Ground System (IT Systems)

Asymmetric Ground System (Corner Grounded TN Systems)

RFI jumper can be used

Detail A (Mounting Hole)

Detail B (Mounting Hole)

Detail B (Mounting Hole)

Detail B (Mounting Hole)

Detail B (Mounting Hole)

Detail B (Mounting Hole)

Side fixing baffle plate Side fixing baffle plate